Optimod-Surround 8685 V1.0 Operating Manual - Orban

Operating Manual
OPTIMOD
8685
Surround Audio Processor
Version 1.0 Software

IMPORTANT NOTE: Refer to the unit’s rear panel for your Model Number.
Model Number: Description:
8685 OPTIMOD 8685 audio processor for digital surround transmission channels.
7.1-channel surround processing and three independent 2.0 processors, all
with loudness meters and CBS Loudness Controllers.
Option 1 3G HD-SDI Input/Output Interface Module
Option 2 3G HD-SDI Input/Output Interface Module with Dolby-E Decoder
Option 3 3G HD-SDI Input/Output Interface Module with Dolby-E Encoder
Option 4
MANUAL:
3G HD-SDI Input/Output Interface Module with Dolby-E Decoder and Encoder
Part Number: Description:
8685 Operating Manual
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK,
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
This symbol, wherever it appears, alerts you to
the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage
inside the enclosure ⎯ voltage that may be
sufficient to constitute a risk of shock.
This symbol, wherever it appears, alerts you to important
operating and maintenance instructions in the accompanying
literature. Read the manual.
In accordance to the WEEE (waste electrical and electronic equipment) directive
of the European Parliament, this product must not be discarded into the
municipal waste stream in any of the Member States. This product may be
sent back to your Orban dealer at end of life where it will be reused or recycled
at no cost to you.
If this product is discarded into an approved municipal WEEE collection site or
turned over to an approved WEEE recycler at end of life, your Orban dealer
must be notified and supplied with model, serial number and the name and
location of site/facility.
Please contact your Orban dealer for further assistance.
www.orban.com

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the appliance is operated.
Retain Instructions: The safety and operation instructions should be retained for future reference.
Heed Warnings: All warnings on the appliance and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.
Follow Instructions: All operation and user instructions should be followed.
Water and Moisture: The appliance should not be used near water (e.g., near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement,
or near a swimming pool, etc.).
Ventilation: The appliance should be situated so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. For example, the appliance
should not be situated on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface that may block the ventilation openings; or, placed in a built-in installation, such as a
bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation openings.
Heat: The appliance should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other appliances (including amplifiers)
that produce heat.
Power Sources: The appliance should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on
the appliance.
Grounding or Polarization: Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization means of an appliance is not defeated.
Power-Cord Protection: Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or
against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance.
Cleaning: The appliance should be cleaned only as recommended by the manufacturer.
Non-Use Periods: The power cord of the appliance should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time.
Object and Liquid Entry: Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through openings.
Damage Requiring Service: The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when: The power supply cord or the plug has
been damaged; or Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or The appliance has been exposed to rain; or The appliance
does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
Servicing: The user should not attempt to service the appliance beyond that described in the operating instructions. All other servicing should be
referred to qualified service personnel.
The Appliance should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer.
Safety Instructions (European)
Notice For U.K. Customers If Your Unit Is Equipped With A Power Cord.
WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.
The cores in the mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
GREEN and YELLOW - Earth BLUE - Neutral BROWN - Live
As colours of the cores in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed
as follows:
The core which is coloured green and yellow must be connected to the terminal in the plug marked with the letter E, or with the earth symbol, or coloured
green, or green and yellow.
The core which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal marked N or coloured black.
The core which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal marked L or coloured red.
The power cord is terminated in a CEE7/7 plug (Continental Europe). The green/yellow wire is connected directly to the unit's chassis. If you need to
change the plug and if you are qualified to do so, refer to the table below.
WARNING: If the ground is defeated, certain fault conditions in the unit or in the system to which it is connected can result in full line voltage between
chassis and earth ground. Severe injury or death can then result if the chassis and earth ground are touched simultaneously.
Conductor WIRE COLOR
Normal Alt
L LIVE BROWN BLACK
N NEUTRAL BLUE WHITE
E EARTH GND GREEN-YELLOW GREEN
AC Power Cord Color Coding

Safety Instructions (German)
Gerät nur an der am Leistungsschild vermerkten Spannung und Stromart betreiben.
Sicherungen nur durch solche, gleicher Stromstärke und gleichen Abschaltverhaltens ersetzen. Sicherungen nie überbrücken.
Jedwede Beschädigung des Netzkabels vermeiden. Netzkabel nicht knicken oder quetschen. Beim Abziehen des Netzkabels den
Stecker und nicht das Kabel enfassen. Beschädigte Netzkabel sofort auswechseln.
Gerät und Netzkabel keinen übertriebenen mechanischen Beaspruchungen aussetzen.
Um Berührung gefährlicher elektrischer Spannungen zu vermeiden, darf das Gerät nicht geöffnet werden. Im Fall von Betriebsstörungen
darf das Gerät nur Von befugten Servicestellen instandgesetzt werden. Im Gerät befinden sich keine, durch den Benutzer
reparierbare Teile.
Zur Vermeidung von elektrischen Schlägen und Feuer ist das Gerät vor Nässe zu schützen. Eindringen von Feuchtigkeit und
Flüssigkeiten in das Gerät vermeiden.
Bei Betriebsstörungen bzw. nach Eindringen von Flüssigkeiten oder anderen Gegenständen, das Gerät sofort vom Netz trennen und
eine qualifizierte Servicestelle kontaktieren.
Safety Instructions (French)
On s'assurera toujours que la tension et la nature du courant utilisé correspondent bien à ceux indiqués sur la plaque de l'appareil.
N'utiliser que des fusibles de même intensité et du même principe de mise hors circuit que les fusibles d'origine. Ne jamais
shunter les fusibles.
Eviter tout ce qui risque d'endommager le câble seceur. On ne devra ni le plier, ni l'aplatir. Lorsqu'on débranche l'appareil,
tirer la fiche et non le câble. Si un câble est endommagé, le remplacer immédiatement.
Ne jamais exposer l'appareil ou le câble ä une contrainte mécanique excessive.
Pour éviter tout contact averc une tension électrique dangereuse, on n'oouvrira jamais l'appareil. En cas de dysfonctionnement,
l'appareil ne peut être réparé que dans un atelier autorisé. Aucun élément de cet appareil ne peut être réparé par l'utilisateur.
Pour éviter les risques de décharge électrique et d'incendie, protéger l'appareil de l'humidité. Eviter toute pénétration
d'humidité ou fr liquide dans l'appareil.
En cas de dysfonctionnement ou si un liquide ou tout autre objet a pénétré dans l'appareil couper aussitôt l'appareil
de son alimentation et s'adresser à un point de service aprésvente autorisé.
Safety Instructions (Spanish)
Hacer funcionar el aparato sólo con la tensión y clase de corriente señaladas en la placa indicadora de características.
Reemplazar los fusibles sólo por otros de la misma intensidad de corriente y sistema de desconexión. No poner nunca los fusibles en
puente.
Proteger el cable de alimentación contra toda clase de daños. No doblar o apretar el cable. Al desenchufar, asir el enchufe y no el
cable. Sustituir inmediatamente cables dañados.
No someter el aparato y el cable de alimentación a esfuerzo mecánico excesivo.
Para evitar el contacto con tensiones eléctricas peligrosas, el aparato no debe abrirse. En caso de producirse fallos de funcionamiento,
debe ser reparado sólo por talleres de servicio autorizados. En el aparato no se encuentra ninguna pieza que pudiera ser reparada por
el usuario.
Para evitar descargas eléctricas e incendios, el aparato debe protegerse contra la humedad, impidiendo que penetren ésta o líquidos
en el mismo.
En caso de producirse fallas de funcionamiento como consecuencia de la penetración de líquidos u otros objetos en el aparato,
hay que desconectarlo inmediatamente de la red y ponerse en contacto con un taller de servicio autorizado.
Safety Instructions (Italian)
Far funzionare l'apparecchio solo con la tensione e il tipo di corrente indicati sulla targa riportante i dati sulle prestazioni.
Sostituire i dispositivi di protezione (valvole, fusibili ecc.) solo con dispositivi aventi lo stesso amperaggio e lo stesso comportamento
di interruzione. Non cavallottare mai i dispositivi di protezione.
Evitare qualsiasi danno al cavo di collegamento alla rete. Non piegare o schiacciare il cavo. Per staccare il cavo, tirare la presa e mai
il cavo. Sostituire subito i cavi danneggiati.
Non esporre l'apparecchio e il cavo ad esagerate sollecitazioni meccaniche.
Per evitare il contatto con le tensioni elettriche pericolose, l'apparecchio non deve venir aperto. In caso di anomalie di funzionamento
l'apparecchio deve venir riparato solo da centri di servizio autorizzati. Nell'apparecchio non si trovano parti che possano essere riparate
dall'utente.
Per evitare scosse elettriche o incendi, l'apparecchio va protetto dall'umidità. Evitare che umidità o liquidi entrino nell'apparecchio.
In caso di anomalie di funzionamento rispettivamente dopo la penetrazione di liquidi o oggetti nell'apparecchio, staccare immediatamente
l'apparecchio dalla rete e contattare un centro di servizio qualificato.

Manual
PLEASE READ BEFORE PROCEEDING!
The Operating Manual contains instructions to verify the proper operation of this unit and initialization of certain options.
You will find these operations are most conveniently performed on the bench before you install the unit in the rack.
Please review the Manual, especially the installation section, before unpacking the unit.
Trial Period Precautions
If your unit has been provided on a trial basis:
You should observe the following precautions to avoid reconditioning charges in case you later wish to return the unit to
your dealer.
(1) Note the packing technique and save all packing materials. It is not wise to ship in other than the factory carton. (Replacements
cost $35.00).
(2) Avoid scratching the paint or plating. Set the unit on soft, clean surfaces.
(3) Do not cut the grounding pin from the line cord.
(4) Use care and proper tools in removing and tightening screws to avoid burring the heads.
(5) Use the nylon-washered rack screws supplied, if possible, to avoid damaging the panel. Support the unit when tightening
the screws so that the threads do not scrape the paint inside the slotted holes.
Packing
When you pack the unit for shipping:
(1) Tighten all screws on any barrier strip(s) so the screws do not fall out from vibration.
(2) Wrap the unit in its original plastic bag to avoid abrading the paint.
(3) Seal the inner and outer cartons with tape.
If you are returning the unit permanently (for credit), be sure to enclose:
• The Manual(s)
• The Registration/Warranty Card
• The Line Cord
• All Miscellaneous Hardware (including the Rack Screws and Keys)
• The Extender Card (if applicable)
• The Monitor Rolloff Filter(s) (OPTIMOD-AM only)
• The COAX Connecting Cable (OPTIMOD 8685 and OPTIMOD 8685 only)
Your dealer may charge you for any missing items.
If you are returning a unit for repair, do not enclose any of the above items.
Further advice on proper packing and shipping is included in the Manual (see Table of Contents).
Trouble
If you have problems with installation or operation:
(1) Check everything you have done so far against the instructions in the Manual. The information contained therein is
based on our years of experience with OPTIMOD and broadcast stations.
(2) Check the other sections of the Manual (consult the Table of Contents and Index) to see if there might be some suggestions
regarding your problem.
(3) After reading the section on Factory Assistance, you may call Orban Customer Service for advice during normal California
business hours. The number is (1) 510/351-3500.

WARNING
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed
and used as directed by this manual, it may cause interference to radio communication. This
equipment complies with the limits for a Class A computing device, as specified by FCC
Rules, Part 15, subject J, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such
interference when this type of equipment is operated in a commercial environment. Operation
of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference. If it does, the user will be
required to eliminate the interference at the user’s expense.
WARNING
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital
apparatus set out in the radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of
Communications. (Le present appareil numerique n’emet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant
les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques [de las class A] prescrites dans le
Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Communications du
Canada.)
IMPORTANT
Perform the installation under static control conditions. Simply walking across a rug can generate
a static charge of 20,000 volts. This is the spark or shock you may have felt when
touching a doorknob or some other conductive surface. A much smaller static discharge is
likely to destroy one or more of the CMOS semiconductors employed in OPTIMOD 8685.
Static damage will not be covered under warranty.
There are many common sources of static. Most involve some type of friction between two
dissimilar materials. Some examples are combing your hair, sliding across a seat cover or
rolling a cart across the floor. Since the threshold of human perception for a static discharge
is 3000 volts, you will not even notice many damaging discharges.
Basic damage prevention consists of minimizing generation, discharging any accumulated
static charge on your body or workstation, and preventing that discharge from being sent to or
through an electronic component. You should use a static grounding strap (grounded through
a protective resistor) and a static safe workbench with a conductive surface. This will prevent
any buildup or damaging static.
U.S. patent 5,737,434 protects OPTIMOD 8685.
Orban and Optimod are registered trademarks.
All trademarks are property of their respective companies.
Published April 2011.
© Copyright Orban
8350 East Evans Suite C4, Scottsdale, AZ 85260 USA
Phone: (1) (480) 403-8300; Fax: (1) (480) 403-8301; E-Mail: custserv@orban.com; Site: www.orban.com

Operating Manual
OPTIMOD
8685
Surround Audio Processor
Version 1.0 Software

Table of Contents
Index.........................................................................................................................0-9
Section 1 Introduction
.........................................................................................................................................1-1
CRUCIAL INFORMATION—PLEASE READ!.............................................................................1-1
USING THIS MANUAL .......................................................................................................1-2
THE OPTIMOD 8685 DIGITAL AUDIO PROCESSOR..............................................................1-2
Absolute Control of Loudness and Peak Modulation...........................................1-3
Flexible Configuration ............................................................................................1-4
Adaptability through Multiple Audio Processing Structures ...............................1-6
User-Friendly Interface............................................................................................1-7
Controllable .............................................................................................................1-7
PRESETS IN OPTIMOD 8685 ............................................................................................1-8
Factory Processing Presets.......................................................................................1-9
User Processing Presets ...........................................................................................1-9
INPUT/OUTPUT CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................1-10
Digital AES3id Inputs/Outputs..............................................................................1-10
Analog Outputs .....................................................................................................1-11
Remote Control Interface .....................................................................................1-11
Computer Interface ...............................................................................................1-11
RS-485 Serial Ports.......................................................................................................... 1-12
RS-232 Serial Port ........................................................................................................... 1-12
RJ45 Ethernet Connector ............................................................................................... 1-12
Optional HD-SDI Input/Output.............................................................................1-12
ROUTING AUDIO TO AND FROM THE 8685 ........................................................................1-12
Using Lossy Data Reduction before the 8685’s Input................................................... 1-13
Links from the 8685’s Output to a Transmission Encoder or Transmitter ................... 1-13
Sample Frequency Synchronization .............................................................................. 1-14
Using the 8685 to Control Studio Output Levels.......................................................... 1-15
AV-Sync Delay................................................................................................................. 1-15
USING OPTIMOD 8685 AS A STUDIO LEVEL CONTROLLER .................................................1-16
ABOUT TRANSMISSION LEVELS AND METERING ..................................................................1-16
Meters ....................................................................................................................1-16
Figure 1-1: Absolute Peak Level, VU and PPM Reading ............................................... 1-16
Studio Line-up Levels and Headroom..................................................................1-17
Transmission Levels................................................................................................1-17
LINE-UP FACILITIES .........................................................................................................1-18
Metering of Levels and Subjective Loudness ......................................................1-18
Test Modes .............................................................................................................1-20
Calibrated Bypass Test Mode......................................................................................... 1-20
Calibrated Line-up Tones............................................................................................... 1-21
SETTING OUTPUT/MODULATION LEVELS............................................................................1-21
STREAMING AND NETCASTING APPLICATIONS.....................................................................1-22
Using OPTIMOD 8685 in Streaming Applications......................................................... 1-22
Loudness ......................................................................................................................... 1-22
Choosing your Encoder.................................................................................................. 1-23
EAS TRANSMISSION .......................................................................................................1-23
PC CONTROL AND SECURITY PASSCODE ............................................................................1-23
WARRANTY, USER FEEDBACK ..........................................................................................1-24
User Feedback........................................................................................................1-24

LIMITED WARRANTY.............................................................................................1-24
INTERNATIONAL WARRANTY ...............................................................................1-24
EXTENDED WARRANTY ........................................................................................1-25
Section 2 Installation
.........................................................................................................................................2-1
INSTALLING THE 8685.......................................................................................................2-1
Figure 2-1: AC Line Cord Wire Standard).........................................................................2-2
Figure 2-2: Wiring the 25-pin Remote Interface Connector...........................................2-4
8685 REAR PANEL ...........................................................................................................2-5
Table 2-1: Serial Port Pin Identification ...........................................................................2-5
INPUT AND OUTPUT CONNECTIONS.....................................................................................2-6
AES3id Digital Inputs and Outputs.........................................................................2-6
HD-SDI Input and Output (optional)......................................................................2-7
Wordclock/AES11id Sync Input ...............................................................................2-7
Analog Audio Output .............................................................................................2-7
Power Ground..........................................................................................................2-8
QUICK SETUP...................................................................................................................2-8
I/O SETUP .....................................................................................................................2-19
Table 2-2: Routing Switcher Sources and Destinations.................................................2-23
USING CLOCK-BASED AUTOMATION .................................................................................2-38
SECURITY AND PASSCODE PROGRAMMING.........................................................................2-40
To Unlock the Front Panel ....................................................................................2-43
8685 User Interface Behavior during Lockout...............................................................2-43
Default ADMIN Passcode................................................................................................2-43
Security and Orban’s PC Remote Application......................................................2-44
Passcodes and Software Updates .........................................................................2-44
If you have forgotten your “All Access” passcode… ..........................................2-44
ADMINISTERING THE 8685 THROUGH ITS RS-232 SERIAL PORT OR ETHERNET ........................2-45
Connecting via the RS-232 Port Using a Terminal Program on a PC..................2-46
Administrative Operations....................................................................................2-47
Connecting to the 8685’s Ethernet Port or RS-232 Port Using TCP/IP................2-52
Using the API: Example .........................................................................................2-54
Recalling a Processing Preset..........................................................................................2-54
REMOTE CONTROL INTERFACE PROGRAMMING ..................................................................2-54
NETWORKING AND REMOTE CONTROL..............................................................................2-56
SYNCHRONIZING OPTIMOD TO A NETWORK TIMESERVER.....................................................2-59
INSTALLING 8685 PC REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE ..........................................................2-62
Installing the Necessary Windows Services..........................................................2-62
Check Hardware Requirements............................................................................2-63
Running the Orban Installer Program..................................................................2-63
Setting Up Ethernet, LAN, and VPN Connections ...............................................2-64
Conclusion..............................................................................................................2-65
APPENDIX: SETTING UP SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS .............................................................2-67
Preparing for Communication through Null Modem Cable ..............................2-67
Connecting Using Windows 2000 Direct Serial Connection:..............................2-67
Connecting Using Windows XP Direct Serial Connection ..................................2-72
Preparing for Communication through Modems ...............................................2-77
Connecting Using Windows 2000 Modem Connection ......................................2-77
Connecting using Windows XP Modem Connection ..........................................2-83
UPDATING YOUR 8685’S SOFTWARE.................................................................................2-88

Section 3 Operation
.........................................................................................................................................3-1
8685 FRONT PANEL .........................................................................................................3-1
INTRODUCTION TO PROCESSING..........................................................................................3-4
Some Audio Processing Concepts.................................................................................... 3-4
Distortion in Processing ................................................................................................... 3-4
Loudness and Distortion .................................................................................................. 3-4
Processing for Low Bit Rate Codecs................................................................................. 3-5
Speech/Music Detector..................................................................................................... 3-6
Sound-for-Picture Applications: Controlling Dynamic Range ..............................3-6
Optimod 8685 in Audio-Only Applications: From Bach to Rock..........................3-7
ABOUT THE 8685’S SIGNAL PROCESSING FEATURES ..............................................................3-8
Simultaneous Stereo (2.0) and Surround (5.1 or 7.1) Processing .........................3-8
Signal Flow...............................................................................................................3-9
Input Conditioning........................................................................................................... 3-9
Two-Band Gated AGC ...................................................................................................... 3-9
Equalization.................................................................................................................... 3-10
Multiband Compressor/Limiter...................................................................................... 3-11
LFE Processing................................................................................................................. 3-13
Low-IM Look-Ahead Limiter .......................................................................................... 3-13
Loudness Control............................................................................................................ 3-14
Input/output Delay......................................................................................................... 3-16
CUSTOMIZING THE 8685’S SOUND ...................................................................................3-16
Basic Modify...........................................................................................................3-17
Intermediate Modify .............................................................................................3-18
Advanced Modify ..................................................................................................3-18
Setting Preset Loudness Correctly for Dolby Digital Transmission ....................3-19
Gain Reduction Metering .....................................................................................3-20
To Create or Save a Preset ....................................................................................3-20
ABOUT THE PROCESSING STRUCTURES...............................................................................3-21
FACTORY PROGRAMMING PRESETS ...................................................................................3-24
To import a 2.0 preset from the 8685’s front panel: .................................................... 3-25
To import a 2.0 preset from PC Remote:....................................................................... 3-25
Sound-for-Picture Presets......................................................................................3-26
Table 3-1: Factory Programming Presets (Sound-for-picture)...................................... 3-27
Protection and Studio AGC Presets ......................................................................3-30
Table 3-2: Pass-Through, Protection and AGC Presets.................................................. 3-31
Radio-Style Presets ................................................................................................3-32
Table 3-3: Radio-Style Presets ........................................................................................ 3-33
EQUALIZER CONTROLS ....................................................................................................3-36
Table 3-4: Five-Band Equalizer Controls........................................................................ 3-38
AGC CONTROLS ............................................................................................................3-41
Table 3-5: AGC Controls................................................................................................. 3-42
Advanced AGC Controls........................................................................................3-43
AGC Controls Exclusive to 2.0 Processing:..................................................................... 3-45
DISTORTION CONTROL ....................................................................................................3-46
Table 3-6: Distortion Control Adjustments ................................................................... 3-46
THE TWO-BAND STRUCTURE ...........................................................................................3-48
Customizing the Settings ......................................................................................3-49
The Two-Band Structure’s Full and Advanced Setup Controls ...........................3-49
Table 3-7: Two-Band Controls ....................................................................................... 3-50

Advanced Two-Band Controls ..............................................................................3-52
Figure 3-2: Output level in dB (y) for a given input level in dB (x) at various settings of
the KNEE and RATIO control ............................................................................................3-54
THE FIVE-BAND STRUCTURE ............................................................................................3-55
Using the Five-Band Structure..............................................................................3-55
Customizing the Settings ......................................................................................3-56
The Five-Band Structure’s Full and Advanced Setup Controls............................3-56
Table 3-8: Multiband Controls .......................................................................................3-57
Table 3-9: MB Attack/Release Controls..........................................................................3-58
Table 3-10: MB Band Mix Controls.................................................................................3-60
Advanced Five-Band Controls...............................................................................3-62
Table 3-11: Test Modes...................................................................................................3-64
TEST MODES .................................................................................................................3-64
USING THE 8685 PC REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE ...........................................................3-65
To set up a new connection:.................................................................................3-65
To initiate communication:...................................................................................3-66
To modify a control setting:..................................................................................3-66
To recall a preset:...................................................................................................3-67
To import a preset into the 2.0 processing:.........................................................3-67
To save a user preset you have created: ..............................................................3-68
To back up User Presets, system files, and automation files onto your computer’s
hard drive:..............................................................................................................3-68
Note to Users Familiar with Older Version of PC Remote ............................................3-69
To restore archived presets, Setups, and automation files:................................3-69
To modify the active SETUP: ...................................................................................3-70
To modify AUTOMATION: .........................................................................................3-70
To group multiple 8685s: ......................................................................................3-71
Navigation Using the Keyboard ...........................................................................3-71
To Quit the Program..............................................................................................3-71
About Aliases created by Optimod 8685 PC Remote Software .........................3-71
Multiple Installations of Optimod 8685 PC Remote ...........................................3-72
USING THE 8685 FOR PRODUCTION AND MASTERING .........................................................3-73
APPENDIX A: USING THE ITU BS.1770 AND CBS LOUDNESS METERS TO MEASURE LOUDNESS
CONTROLLER PERFORMANCE ...........................................................................................3-78
Test Setup........................................................................................................................3-78
Results..............................................................................................................................3-79
Figure 3-3: Peak output of meters in each 10-second interval as a function of time .3-79
Figure 3-4: Histogram sorting CBS loudness measurements into 1 dB bins.................3-81
Histograms ......................................................................................................................3-81
Studies indicating that BS.1770 is inaccurate at very low frequencies ........................3-81
Figure 3-5: Histogram sorting BS.1770 loudness measurements into 1 dB bins ..........3-82
Conclusions......................................................................................................................3-83
Section 4 Maintenance
.........................................................................................................................................4-1
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................................4-1
SUBASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.......................................................................4-2
FIELD AUDIT OF PERFORMANCE..........................................................................................4-8
Table 4-1: Decoder Chart for Power Supervisor ............................................................4-10
Table 4-2: Layout Diagram of J7, with expected voltages on each pin .......................4-10
Table 4-3: Typical Power Supply Voltages and AC Ripple ............................................4-10

Test Procedure for the Base I/O Module ....................................................................... 4-11
Table 4-4: Frequency Tolerance for Various Sample Rates .......................................... 4-11
Table 4-5: Sample screenshot showing a successful test .............................................. 4-12
Table 4-6: SDI Timing & Jitter Specifications................................................................. 4-15
Section 5 Troubleshooting
.........................................................................................................................................5-1
PROBLEMS AND POTENTIAL SOLUTIONS...............................................................................5-1
Loudness incorrect compared to other Dolby Digital Transmissions............................. 5-1
Loudness Controller reduces transient punch of programming.................................... 5-2
Transient loudness events (like esses in speech) sound obtrusively loud...................... 5-2
Commercials too loud in sound for picture applications ............................................... 5-2
LFE channel is unbalanced with respect to the rest of the audio spectrum ................. 5-3
Dialog is buried by music and/or effects......................................................................... 5-3
Dialog is muffled.............................................................................................................. 5-3
Shrill, harsh sound............................................................................................................ 5-3
Dull sound......................................................................................................................... 5-3
Too much bass when the loudness controller is producing large amounts of GR........ 5-4
RFI, hum, clicks, or buzzes................................................................................................ 5-4
Unexpected gain pumping when processing 5.1 material............................................. 5-4
Poor peak modulation control ........................................................................................ 5-4
Audible distortion ............................................................................................................ 5-4
Audible noise.................................................................................................................... 5-5
System will not pass line-up tones at 100% modulation ............................................... 5-6
System will not pass Emergency Alert System (“EAS” USA Standard) tones at the legally
required modulation level ............................................................................................... 5-6
System Receiving 8685’s digital output will not lock ..................................................... 5-6
System will not lock to video sync at 88.2 or 96 kHz...................................................... 5-6
AES Channel Status Bits will not set the 8685’s 2.0 processing to Stereo or Dual-Mono
mode................................................................................................................................. 5-6
Equipment receiving the 8685’s 2.0 Processing output changes operation mode
unexpectedly. ................................................................................................................... 5-6
General dissatisfaction with subjective sound quality ................................................... 5-7
Security passcode lost (when unit is locked out) ............................................................ 5-7
Connection Issues between the 8685 and a PC, Modem, or Network ................5-7
Troubleshooting Connections.................................................................................5-7
You Cannot Access the Internet After Making a Direct or Modem Connection to
the 8685: ..................................................................................................................5-8
OS-SPECIFIC TROUBLESHOOTING ADVICE ............................................................................5-9
Troubleshooting Windows XP Direct Connect: .....................................................5-9
Troubleshooting Windows XP Modem Connect: ................................................5-10
TECHNICAL SUPPORT.......................................................................................................5-10
FACTORY SERVICE...........................................................................................................5-11
SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS ..................................................................................................5-11
Section 6 Technical Data
.........................................................................................................................................6-1
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................................6-1
Performance.............................................................................................................6-1
Installation ...............................................................................................................6-2

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................................6-6
Overview ..................................................................................................................6-7
Control Circuits ........................................................................................................6-7
User Control Interface and LCD Display Circuits ...................................................6-8
Input Circuits............................................................................................................6-9
Output Circuits.......................................................................................................6-10
DSP Circuit..............................................................................................................6-11
Power Supply .........................................................................................................6-12
HD-SDI Module (optional) ....................................................................................6-13
ABBREVIATIONS .............................................................................................................6-13
PARTS LIST.....................................................................................................................6-15
Obtaining Spare Parts ...........................................................................................6-15
Base Board .............................................................................................................6-16
CPU Module ...........................................................................................................6-17
Serial I/O Board ......................................................................................................6-19
Base Input/Output (I/O) Board (for units without SDI) .......................................6-20
DSP Board...............................................................................................................6-22
Interface Board ......................................................................................................6-24
Headphone Board .................................................................................................6-24
Encoder Board .......................................................................................................6-25
LCD Carrier Board..................................................................................................6-25
Power Supply Distribution Board.........................................................................6-26
Optional HD-SDI I/O Board ...................................................................................6-27
Optional Serial RS-232 / RS-485 Board for HD-SDI Option .................................6-33
SCHEMATICS AND PARTS LOCATOR DRAWINGS ...................................................................6-34
Function Description Drawing Page
Chassis Circuit Board Locator and basic Top view
6-37
interconnections
(not to scale)
Base Board Glue logic; supports CPU module Parts Locator 6-38
and RS-232 daughterboard.
Contains:
Drawing
System Connections Schematic 1 of 4 6-39
CPU module interface Schematic 2 of 4 6-40
Power Supply Monitor Schematic 3 of 4 6-41
CPLD, General Purpose Interface,
and Remotes
Schematic 4 of 4 6-42
CPU Module Control microprocessor. Services Parts Locator 6-43
front panel, serial port, Ethernet,
DSP board, and control board. Resides
on base board.
Contains:
Drawing
Ethernet Schematic 1 of 5 6-44
General Purpose Bus Schematic 2 of 5 6-45
Memory Schematic 3 of 5 6-46
Miscellaneous Functions Schematic 4 of 5 6-47
Power and Ground Distribution Schematic 5 of 5 6-48
RS-232 Board Supports Serial Port Parts Locator 6-49
(base model)
Drawing
Schematic 1 of 1 6-50

Function Description Drawing Page
Dual Power
Supply
Distribution
I/O Board
Power supply supervisor automatically
chooses good power supply if
one of the dual supplies fails.
Parts Locator
Drawing
6-51
Power Supply Input Control Schematic 1 of 2 6-52
Power Supply Failure Detector Schematic 2 of 2 6-53
Analog Output
Parts Locator 6-54
AES3 Input/output
Drawing
Contains:
Analog Outputs Schematic 1 of 6 6-55
Digital I/O and SRC 1-6 Schematic 2 of 6 6-56
Digital I/O and SRC 7-12 Schematic 3 of 6 6-57
Control and Miscellaneous Schematic 4 of 6 6-58
Interface Schematic 5 of 6 6-59
Power Distribution Schematic 6 of 6 6-60
DSP Board DSP Chips; Local +3.3V regulator. Parts Locator 6-61
Contains:
Drawing
DSP Interconnects Schematic 1 of 9 6-62
DSP Extended Serial Audio Interface
(ESAI)
Schematic 2 of 9 6-63
DSP Control Interface Schematic 3 of 9 6-64
DSP External Memory Control Interface
Schematic 4 of 9 6-65
DSP Power and Ground Schematic 5 of 9 6-66
DSP 86xx 8-bit Control Interface Schematic 6 of 9 6-67
Clock Generation and CPLD Schematic 7 of 9 6-68
86xx Power Distribution Schematic 8 of 9 6-69
External Memory Interface Controller
Schematic 9 of 9 6-70
Front-Panel LCD Carrier Parts Locator 6-71
Boards
Drawing
LCD Carrier Schematic 1 of 3 6-72
Headphone and Encoder Board Parts Locator
Drawings
6-73
Headphone Board Schematic 2 of 3 6-74
Encoder Board Schematic 3 of 3 6-75
Front-Panel Front Panel Interface Board Parts Locator 6-76
Interface
Drawing
Board Schematic 1 of 2 6-77
Schematic 2 of 2 6-78
SDI I/O Board Optional HD-SDI I/O Board Parts Locator 6-79
(optional)
Drawing 1
Contains: Parts Locator
Drawing 2
6-80
System Interconnect Schematic 1 of 17 6-81
Analog Output Schematic 2 of 17 6-82
Video I/O Schematic 3 of 17 6-83
AES I/O Schematic 4 of 17 6-84
SDI I/O Schematic 5 of 17 6-85
PIC Controller Schematic 6 of 17 6-86

Function Description Drawing Page
HD-SDI Serial
Board
(for HD-SDI
Power Supplies & Interface Schematic 7 of 17 6-87
FPGA Schematic 8 of 17 6-88
DDR SDRAM Schematic 9 of 17 6-89
Clock Oscillators Schematic 10 of 17 6-90
AES and Wordclock Sync Schematic 11 of 17 6-91
GTP Power & Filter Distribution Schematic 12 of 17 6-92
Dolby-E Decoder-Encoder Schematic 13 of 17 6-93
Clock Cleaner Schematic 14 of 17 6-94
Genlock Schematic 15 of 17 6-95
SRC Miscellaneous Signals Schematic 16 of 17 6-86
SRC Power Distribution Schematic 17 of 17 6-97
HD-SDI RS232/RS485 serial interface
board for HD-SDI option
Contains:
Parts Locator
Drawing
6-98
Option) UART Schematic 1 of 2 6-99
Serial Ports Schematic 2 of 2 6-100
DSP Block
Diagram
Shows signal processing 6-101
Index
2
2.0 preset
importing 3- · 25
2.0 processing · 12
2B Bass Attack control 3- · 53
2B Master Attack control 3- · 53
2B Release Shape 3- · 51
A
AAC codec 1- · 23
Abbreviations
Table of 6- · 13
AC Line Cord Standard 2- · 2
AC3 metadata
interface 6- · 4
ac3_compre 6- · 3
ac3_dialnorm · 3
ac3_dynrnge 6- · 3
Administering 8585 Through Terminal
Program 2- · 45
Administrative Operations
via terminal program 2- · 47
Adobe pdf 1- · 2
Advanced Modify 3- · 18
AES channel status bits 5- · 6
AES/EBU I/O 2- · 6
AES11id 1- · 7
AES11id 6- · 3
AES3 status bits 2- · 18
AES3id 2 · 5
AES3id I/O 1- · 10
AGC
bass attack control 3- · 44
Bass Coupling control 3- · 43
bass release control 3- · 44
bass threshold control 3- · 44
control list 3- · 41
crossover control 3- · 44
defeating 3- · 41
defeating 3- · 32
drive control 3- · 41
Gate Threshold control 3- · 42

idle gain control 3- · 44
master attack control 3- · 44
master release control 3- · 41
meter 3- · 2
ratio control 3- · 44
setting external mode 2- · 20
window release control 3- · 43
window size control 3- · 43
AGC 1- · 6
AGC 3- · 9
AGC controls table 3- · 42
AGC Matrix 3- · 45
AGC mode 2- · 10
AGC+LC presets 3- · 29
allpass crossover 3- · 45
analog I/O 1- · 11
analog output
Circuit description 6- · 10
analog output 2- · 6, 7
analog television
processing for 2- · 31
API
example 2- · 54
via Telnet/SSH 1- · 8
archiving presets 3- · 68
artifacts
minimizing codec 3- · 5
ASCII commands
and RS232 port 2- · 45
asynchronous resampling 1- · 21
ATSC A/85
and streaming 1- · 22
Attack
Multiband 3- · 62
attack 3- · 44
audio
connections 2- · 6
output 2- · 6
output, connecting 2- · 7
audio I/O 2- · 5
audio routing 1- · 12
auditing performance 4- · 8
automation
capabilities 2- · 40
Automation
Clock-based 2- · 38
modifying from PC 3- · 70
automation 1- · 8
automation 3- · 70
automation event
adding 2- · 39
editing 2- · 40
automation lockout 2- · 41
AV Sync
Video Delay control 2- · 24
AV sync 2- · 19
AV-sync 1- · 15
B
B1B2 Crossover 3- · 63
B1>LFE Coupling control 3- · 13
backing up presets 3- · 68
balanced
output, simulates transformer 2- · 7
band coupling 3- · 60
Band Mix
Multiband 3- · 60
bandwidth 2- · 10, 20
Base board
removing 4- · 5
Replacing 4- · 6
Basic Modify 3- · 17
Bass Clip control 3- · 46
bass clipper
I/O transfer curves 3- · 47
Bass Frequency control 3- · 36
Bass Gain control 3- · 36
Bass Slope control 3- · 36
bass threshold 3- · 44
Bass>LFE Couple control 3- · 52
Battery
Replacing 6- · 8
bit depth of internal processing 6- · 1
Block diagram 6- · 101
bookmarks 1- · 2
breakpoint 3- · 53
Breakpoint controls 3- · 63
Brilliance control 3- · 39
BS.1770 1- · 7
BS.1770 meter 3- · 78
Buttons
Enter 3- · 1
Escape 3- · 1
buzz 5- · 4
bypass
PC remote 1- · 23
relay 1- · 12
test mode 1- · 20, 78
bypass 1- · 6
Bypass mode 3- · 64

C
CALM Act 1- · 3
CBS Loudness Level meter 1- · 18
CBS Loudness Meter 3- · 78
center channel processing 3- · 12
channel mode
setting 2- · 34
chassis
getting inside 4 · 2
ground 2- · 8
circuit board locator drawing 6- · 37
Circuit description
Control 6- · 7
LCD display 6- · 8
user Control interface 6- · 8
circuit description 6- · 6
Classical music 3- · 32
cleaning front panel 4- · 1
clipper, bass 3- · 11
clipping 3- · 4
clock
reset to hour 2- · 55
setting via timeserver 2- · 59
Clock
Battery 6- · 8
Setting 2- · 38
clock 1- · 8
Clock-based automation 2- · 38
codec
overshoots in 3- · 77
processing for low bit rate 3- · 5
commercial loudness 5- · 2
Components
Obtaining 6- · 15
compression 3- · 4
compression ratio 3- · 53
Compression Ratio controls 3- · 63
compressor gate 3- · 43
computer
connecting to 2- · 4
interface, specifications 6- · 5
Troubleshooting connections 5- · 7
Windows XP 5- · 9
computer interface
RS-232 2- · 5
serial 2- · 5
computer interface 1- · 11
configuration
input/output 1- · 10
connecting
through Win XP direct serial 2- · 72
connection to PC
troubleshooting 5- · 7
connectors
audio 2- · 6
control
Loudness Attack 3- · 15
Loudness Threshold 3- · 14
Control knob 3- · 2
control table
distortion control 3- · 46
controls
2B Bass Attack 3- · 53
2B Bass Coupling 3- · 52
2B Drive 3- · 49
2B Gate 3- · 51
2B Master Attack 3- · 53
2B Release 3- · 49
2B Release Shape 3- · 51
AGC Bass Attack 3- · 44
AGC Bass Coupling 3- · 43
AGC Crossover 3- · 44
AGC Drive 3- · 41
AGC Gate Threshold 3- · 42
AGC Idle Gain 3- · 44
AGC Limit Drive 3- · 48
AGC Master Attack 3- · 44
AGC Matrix 3- · 45
AGC Max Delta GR 3- · 45
AGC Release 3- · 41
AGC Window Release 3- · 44
AGC Window Size 3- · 43
B1B2 Crossover 3- · 63
band mix 3- · 60
Bass Clip 3- · 46
Bass Clip Shape 3- · 47
Bass Threshold 3- · 52
Bass>LFE Couple 3- · 52
breakpoint 3- · 53
Breakpoint 3- · 63
Brilliance 3- · 39
Bx Limiter Attack 3- · 62
BxBx Coupling 3- · 60
compression ratio 3- · 53
Compression Ratio 3- · 63
Delta Release 3- · 62
Delta Threshold 3- · 46
description 3- · 1
DJ Bass 3- · 39
HF Enhance 3- · 40
knee 3- · 53
Knee 3- · 63
LFE Threshold 3- · 52

LO PASS 3- · 40
Loudness Threshold 3- · 52
Main>Center Max Delta GR 3- · 63
Master Threshold 3- · 52
MAX LPF 2- · 10
Maximum Lowpass Filter 2- · 20
MB Downward Expander 3- · 59
MB Limit Drive 3- · 48
MB Release 3- · 57
Metadata Source 2- · 34
Multiband Attack 3- · 62
Mute 3- · 60
Pass Gain 3- · 22
Pass Switch 3- · 23
Phase Rotator 3- · 41
preemphasis 2- · 29
Surround Optimization 3- · 10
SYNC DELAY 2- · 19
Transient Enhance 3- · 48
copying presets 3- · 69
corrosion 4- · 1
coupling controls 3- · 61
cover
Removing 4- · 2
CPU board
Replacing 4- · 7
CPU module
removing 4- · 4
crossover
allpass 3- · 45
modes 3- · 44
crossover frequency
five-band 3- · 23
D
D/A converter
Circuit description 6- · 10
specification 6- · 5
passcode · 43
default passcode 2- · 43
Defaults
Resetting to 2- · 44
delay
AV-sync 1- · 15
setting 2.0 2- · 29
setting processing 2- · 19
delay 3- · 16
delay 6- · 2
delta release control 3- · 62
diagnostic info
fetching via API 2- · 51
dialnorm
setting value of 2- · 15
Dialnorm
and Loudness Controller 3- · 14
and MB limiter drive 3- · 13
and streaming 1- · 22
conveying via RS-485 · 15
re Loudness Level meter 1- · 19
setting 2- · 14
Dialnorm 1- · 1
Dialnorm 3- · 3, 17, 19
dialog intelligibility 3- · 12
digital I/O 1- · 10
Digital input
Circuit description 6- · 9
Digital output
Circuit description 6- · 11
Display
Removing 4- · 4
Display Interface
Removing 4- · 5
Replacing 4- · 6
distortion
excessive 5- · 7
troubleshooting 5- · 4
vs. loudness 3- · 4
distortion control 3- · 46
dither 2- · 28
DJ Bass control 3- · 39
Dolby Digital 1- · 14
Dolby Digital 2- · 14
Dolby metadata
reauthoring 6- · 3
Dolby-E
module specifications 6- · 3
video delay setting for 2- · 25
Dolby-E 1- · 5
downmix
setting gains 2- · 35
downmix 1- · 5
downward expander 3- · 59
DSP
Block diagram 6- · 101
Circuit description 6- · 11
DSP board
Removing 4- · 2
Replacing 4- · 6
dual-mono 1- · 5
dual-mono 2- · 18
dual-mono 6- · 2

dual-mono mode 2- · 34
dull sound
troubleshooting 5- · 3
E
EAS
modulation low 5- · 6
test tones 1- · 23
easy setup 2- · 8
EBU R 128
and streaming 1- · 22
EBU R 128 1 · 18
Enter button 3- · 1
equalizer
bass shelf 3- · 36
control list 3- · 36
parametric 3- · 37
equalizer 3- · 10
Escape button 3- · 1
Ethernet
connecting via TCP/IP 2- · 52
Ethernet 1- · 12
Ethernet 2- · 5, 64
Exponential Shape 3- · 51
exporting presets 3- · 68
external sync
setting source 2- · 27
F
Factory defaults
Resetting to 2- · 44
Restoring via Terminal Program 2- · 48
factory preset
radio 3- · 32
selecting 2- · 16
factory presets 1- · 9
factory programming presets 3- · 24
factory service 5- · 11
fallback
and silence sense 2- · 37
feedback
user 1- · 24
Final Limit control 3- · 48
Firewall 2- · 57, 64
Firmware
updating 8585 2- · 88
five-band
attack time controls 3- · 62
band coupling controls 3- · 60
delta release control 3- · 62
downward expander thresold control 3- · 59
full modify control list 3- · 56
limiter attack control 3- · 62
multiband drive control 3- · 56
multiband gate threshold control 3- · 58
mutiband release control 3- · 57
output mix controls 3- · 61
five-band 3- · 55
Five-Band Structure
adjusting 3- · 56
passcode · 44
Forgotten passcode 2- · 44
Frequency control (EQ) 3- · 37
frequency response
specification 6- · 1
Front panel
removing 4- · 3
Replacing 4- · 7
Unlocking 2- · 43
Front Panel
Cannot access 2- · 44
front panel 3- · 1
front panel display 3- · 2
Fuse 2- · 2
fuse 6- · 12
G
Gain control (EQ) 3- · 37
gain reduction meter
limiter 3- · 3
multiband 3- · 3
gain reduction meter 3- · 20
gate
threshold control 3- · 58
gate 3- · 43
Gate control 3- · 51
Gate indicators 3- · 3
Gateway
Setting via terminal program 2- · 50
Gateway 2- · 56, 64
GPI
programming 2- · 54
specifications 6- · 5
GPI 1- · 7
GPI interface
testing 4- · 13
grounding
loss of 4- · 1

power 2- · 8
grouping 8585s 3- · 71
H
Hard Clip Shape 3- · 47
hard-wire bypass 1- · 12
HD-SDI
3G 6- · 12
I/O specifications 6- · 3
HD-SDI 1- · 12, 7
HD-SDI VANC 6- · 15, 4
HE-AAC 1- · 23
Headphone
Jack 3- · 1
Level control 3- · 1
Headphone amplifier
Reassembling 4- · 7
Removing 4- · 3
headphone jack 1- · 5
headphones
low-delay monitoring 2- · 28
headroom
in codecs 1- · 21
relationship to EQ 1- · 21
HF Enhance meters 3- · 3
HF enhancer 3- · 10
hiding meters 2 - · 41
High Frequency Enhancer 3- · 40
high frequency limiter 3- · 61
high-pass filter
30 Hz 3- · 9
Highpass Filter 3- · 40
hum 5- · 4
hyperlinks 1- · 2
Hyperterminal 2- · 45
I
I/O
AES/EBU 2- · 6
connections 2- · 3
I/O assembly
Removing 4- · 2
I/O board
Replacing 4- · 6
I/O routing
default 2- · 8
idle gain 3- · 44
importing 2.0 preset 3- · 25
importing presets 3- · 69
In meters 3- · 2
input
digital, specifications 6- · 2
Input
routing 2- · 23
input level
line-up 1- · 17
input meter 1- · 18
input routing
default 2- · 8
inputs 2- · 5
inspection of package contents 2- · 1
installation procedure 2- · 1
intelligibility
dialog 3- · 12
Interface type
Changing via terminal program 2- · 51
Intermediate Modify 3- · 18
Internet
Cannot access 5- · 8
Internet timeservers
syncing to 2- · 59
IP address
changing via Terminal Program 2- · 49
Entering into 8585 2- · 56
terminal connection via Ethernet 2- · 53
terminal connection via RS-232 · 53
J
J.17
and 8585 digital I/O 1- · 10
defined 1- · 10
preemphasis applied to digital audio output
6- · 3
Jazz format 3- · 34
Jones & Torick 1- · 19
Joystick 3- · 1
K
Knee control 3- · 53, 63
knee.ratio curves 3- · 54
L
latency 3- · 16
LCD display

Reassembling 4- · 7
LCD display 6- · 9
Less-More control 3- · 24
level
line-up 2- · 25
metering 1- · 17
setting 2.0 reference 2- · 27
setting surround 2- · 33
setup 2- · 11
transmission 1- · 17
level controller 1- · 16
LFE processing 3- · 13
LFE Threshold control 3- · 52
limiter
attack 3- · 62
limiter gain reduction meters 3- · 3
limiting
look-ahead 3- · 4, 13
limiting 3- · 4
Line voltage 2- · 2
Linear Shape 3- · 51
line-up level 2- · 25
line-up tone 1- · 8
line-up tones
system will not pass at 100% modulation 5- ·
6
line-up tones 1- · 21
link to TX 1- · 13
Lo Pass control 3- · 40
locate joystick 3- · 1
location 1- · 12
lock
driven equipment cannot lock to 8585 output
5- · 6
Locked out 2- · 44
lockout
Front panel 2- · 43
UI behavior during 2- · 43
look-ahead limiter 3- · 13
look-ahead limiting 3- · 4
lossy data reduction
in studio 1- · 13
loudness
adjusting presets for correct 3- · 19
and presets 2- · 17
insufficient 5- · 7
insufficient due to poor peak control 5- · 4
setting 1- · 1
vs. distortion 3- · 4
Loudness
increase expected 1- · 22
Loudness Attack control 3- · 15
loudness control 1- · 6
Loudness Controller
adjusting 3- · 15
and presets 2- · 17
impact vs. control tradeoff 3- · 15
threshold control 3- · 52
Loudness Controller 3- · 14
Loudness Controller 5- · 2
Loudness GR meter 3- · 3
Loudness Level meter 1- · 18
Loudness Level meter 2- · 14
Loudness Level meter 3- · 3, 19
Loudness meter
comparing CBS and BS.1770 3- · 78
Loudness Threshold control
setting 3- · 19
Loudness Threshold control 3- · 14, 52
M
Main board
Reattaching 4 · 6
Main>Center Max Delta GR 3- · 12, 55, 63
manual
using 1- · 1
mastering
presets for 3- · 31
setting output level 3- · 77
Mastering
using 8685 in 3- · 73
mastering applications 3- · 73
mastering presets 3- · 74
Matrix
AGC 3- · 45
Max Delta GR
AGC 3- · 45
MB Attack/Release table 3- · 58
MB Limit Drive control
etting 3- · 19
measuring performance 4- · 8
metadata
conveying via RS-485 · 15
I/O 2- · 5
reauthoring 6- · 3
serial I/O 1- · 12
metadata 1- · 5
metadata 2- · 14
Metadata Source control 2- · 34
meter

AGC GR 3- · 2
circuit description 6- · 8
gain reduction 3- · 3, 20
HF Enhance 3- · 3
input 1- · 18
input 3- · 2
limiter GR 3- · 3
loudness 1- · 18
loudness 2- · 14
loudness GR 3- · 3
Loudness Level 3- · 3
output 1- · 18
output 3- · 3
studio 1- · 16
Mode>Out 2- · 18
modem
preparing for connection 2- · 77
recommended baud rate 2- · 78
specification for 2- · 63
Windows 2000 configuration 2- · 77
Windows XP configuration 2- · 83
Modem
Setting up 2- · 58
Modem init string
changing from front panel 2- · 58
Changing via terminal program 2- · 51
modulation
switching 1- · 21
modulation control
troubleshooting poor 5- · 4
mono
2.0 processing mode 1- · 5
MP3 1- · 23
Multiband
gain reduction meters 3- · 3
Multiband Band Mix 3- · 60
Multiband Control table 3- · 57
Multiband Drive 3- · 56
music/speech detector 3- · 6
Mute controls 3- · 60
mutliband compressor
surround 3- · 11
N
netcasting applications
encoder 1- · 23
netcasting applications 1- · 22
networking 2- · 56
noise
specification 6- · 1
troubleshooting 5- · 5
null modem cable
communicating through 2- · 67
null modem cable 2- · 63
O
OPTIMOD-8585 1- · 2
Out meters 3- · 3
output
2.0 source 2- · 28
analog output level trim adjustment 4- · 10
analog, connecting 2- · 7
analog, specifications 6- · 5
digital, setting dither 2- · 28
digital, setting sample rate 2- · 28
digital, setting word length · 28
digital, specifications 6- · 3
headphone monitoring, setup 2- · 28
setting 2.0 delay 2- · 29
setting 2.0 level 2- · 30, 31
setting surround config. 2- · 33
setting surround level 2- · 33
Output
routing 2- · 23
output configuration
I/O setup 2- · 27
output format 2- · 28
output level
quick setup 2- · 13
setting 2- · 14
output meter 1- · 18
output mix controls 3- · 61
output routing
default 2- · 8
output routing 2- · 11
outputs
analog 2- · 6
outputs 2 - · 5
overshoot
excessive 5- · 4
P
parametric equalizer 3- · 10
Parts
Obtaining 6- · 15
Parts list
Base board 6- · 16
CPU module 6- · 17

DSP board 6- · 22
Encoder board 6- · 25
Headphone board 6- · 24
I/O board 6- · 20
Interface board 6- · 24
LCD carrier board 6- · 25
Power supply 6- · 26
RS-232 board 6- · 19
Parts list 6- · 15
Pass Gain control 3- · 22
Pass Switch control 3- · 23
passcode
and software updates 2- · 44
create new 2- · 42
delete 2- · 42
edit 2- · 42
programming 2- · 40
Pass-Through 3- · 22
Pass-Through preset 3- · 31
PC
Orban installer program 2- · 63
PC board locator diagram 6- · 37
PC control
security 1- · 23
PC hardware requirements 2- · 63
PC Remote
aliases 3- · 71
moving alias folders 3- · 72
multiple coexisting versions 3- · 72
upgrading versions 3- · 72
PC Remote software
installing 2- · 62
PC Remote software 1- · 7
PC Remote Software 3- · 65
pdf 1- · 1
Penteo
I/O routing 2- · 23
routing for 2- · 23
using with HD-SDI I/O 2- · 24
Penteo upmixer 1- · 4
performance
measuring 4- · 8
phase rotator 3- · 9, 41
phase-linear 1- · 6
phase-linear crossover 3- · 48
Plink 2- · 53
Plink 2 - · 54
Pop-up menu 3- · 2
port
set for TCP/IP 2- · 57
Port
Terminal 2- · 52
Port #
Setting via terminal program 2- · 50
Ports 2- · 64
power
cord 2- · 2, 5
Power 2- · 2
power supply
dual 1- · 6
Orban part # 6- · 12
Power supply
Circuit description 6- · 12
Parts list 6- · 26
Pin identifier 4- · 10
Removing 4- · 5
Testing 4- · 9
Power supply board
reattaching 4 · 6
PPP
and RS232 port 2- · 45
PreCode 1- · 7
Precode 3- · 5
preemphasis
J.17 2- · 25
preemphasis control 2- · 29
preemphasis processing 2- · 31
preset
AGC 3- · 30
AGC+Flat Limiter · 30
backup 3- · 68
converting to pass-through 3- · 23
copying between 8585s 3- · 69
customizing 3- · 23, 16
Edge 3- · 33
exporting 3- · 68
factory 1- · 9
factory programming 3- · 24
five-band 3- · 23
Gold 3- · 33
Gregg 3- · 34
Impact 3- · 34
importing from PC 3- · 69
importing to 2.0 processing 3- · 67
Jazz 3- · 34
Look-Ahead Limiter 3- · 30
loudness of 2- · 17
oldies 3- · 33
Pass-Through 3- · 31
processing 1- · 8
Protect 3- · 31
protection 3- · 30
radio 3- · 32
radio News-Talk 3- · 34

adio-style 3- · 33
recalling from front panel 1- · 8
recalling from PC 3- · 67
recalling via GPI 2- · 55
Recalling via terminal program 2- · 47
restoring archived 3- · 69
Rock 3- · 35
saving user 3- · 20
Smooth Jazz 3- · 35
Soft-Knee 3- · 31
sound-for-picture 3- · 26, 27
Sports (Radio) 3- · 34
TV 2B Drama 3- · 28
TV 2B Gen Purp NO LC 3- · 28
TV 2B Gen Purpose 3- · 27
TV 5B Drama 3- · 28
TV 5B Drama Coupled 3- · 29
TV 5B GEN PUR W/NR 3- · 28
TV 5B Gen Purp NO LC 3- · 28
TV 5B Gen Purpose 3- · 28
TV 5B News 3- · 29
TV 5B Optical Film 3- · 29
TV 5B Sports 3- · 29
two-band 3- · 23
user presets 1- · 9
WMA Music 3- · 35
WMA News-Talk 3- · 35
presets
wideband control only 3- · 29
processing
2.0 1- · 10
2.0 3- · 12
AGC 3- · 9
center channel 3- · 12
distortion in 3- · 4
equalization 3- · 10
introduction to 3- · 4
LFE 3- · 13
multiband compression 3- · 11
music/speech 3- · 6
radio-style 3 · 7
signal flow 3- · 8
simultaneous stereo & surround 3- · 8
structures 1- · 6
structures 3- · 21
video oriented 3- · 6
Processing
block diagram 6- · 101
Processing Mode control 1- · 10
processing structures
two-band 3- · 27
processing structures 2- · 6
Production
using 8685 in 3- · 73
Proof of Performance 1- · 8
Proof of Performance 3- · 64
protection presets 3- · 31
PuTTY 2- · 53
PuTTY 2 - · 54
Q
quick setup 2- · 8
R
rack-mounting unit 2- · 3
radio · 34
radio news format 3- · 34
radio sports format 3- · 34
radio-style presets 3- · 33
ratio
AGC 3- · 44
compression 3- · 53
control 3- · 10
Rdd06-2008 2- · 15
rear panel 2- · 5
Recalling preset
via terminal program 2- · 47
recalling presets
via scripting 2- · 54
Recalling setup
via terminal program 2- · 48
reference input
audio 6- · 3
video 6- · 4
reference level 2- · 27
registration card 2- · 1
remote control
connecting 2- · 3
GPI, specifications 6- · 5
PC Remote software 3- · 65
programming GPI 2- · 54
via GPI 1- · 7
wiring 2- · 4
remote control 2- · 5
remote interface
GPI 1- · 11
testing 4- · 13
wiring 2- · 4
remote interface connector 2- · 5
Remote software
installing 2- · 62

Resetting 8585 2- · 44
resolution
specification 6- · 1
RFI 5- · 4
Rock format 3- · 35
Rotary encoder
Removing 4- · 4
Rotary Encoder
Reassembling 4- · 7
routine maintenance 4- · 1
routing
default 2- · 8
input 2- · 21
output 2- · 21
routing audio 1- · 12
Routing switcher
sources & destinations 2- · 23
routing switcher 2- · 8
RS232
testing 4- · 13
RS232 board
Replacing 4- · 7
RS-232 connector 2- · 5
RS-232 interface
Circuit description 6- · 8
removing board 4- · 4
RS232 port
configuring 2- · 46
RS-232 port
connecting via TCP/IP 2- · 52
RS232 Serial Port 2- · 45
RS-485
functionality 2- · 15
RS-485 ports 2- · 5
Rumble Filter 3- · 40
S
sample frequency
processing 1- · 14
sample rate
8585 internal 3- · 9
at digital output 6- · 3
internal, specification 6- · 1
setting output 2- · 12, 13
Sample rate
synchronization 1- · 15
sample rate converter
testing 4- · 11, 12, 13, 14
sample rate converter 1- · 14
saving Setups 3- · 20
saving user presets 3- · 20
Schematics
Table of contents 6- · 34
Screen display 3- · 2
screens
System Setup 2- · 8
scripting 2- · 54
SDI
I/O specifications 6- · 3
SDI 6- · 12
SDI Video Delay 2- · 25
searching 1- · 2
security
PC Remote 2- · 44
view meters 2- · 41
security 1- · 23
security 2- · 40
Serial Communications
setting up 2- · 67
Serial connection
Setting up direct 2- · 57
serial connector 2- · 5
serial port
configuring RS232 2- · 46
connecting via TCP/IP 2- · 52
loading correct driver 2- · 45
pin identification 2- · 5
serial port 1- · 12
serial ports
RS-485 2- · 5
service 5- · 11
setting clock
via timeserver 2- · 59
setup
I/O 2- · 19
modifying from PC 3- · 70
quick 2- · 8
recalling via GPI 2- · 55
Recalling via terminal program 2- · 48
setup wizard 2- · 8
Setups
saving 3- · 20
setups 1- · 8
shelving equalizer
bass, slope of 3- · 10
shipping instructions 5- · 11
shrill sound
troubleshooting 5- · 3
signal flow 3- · 9
Signal flow diagram 6- · 101

silence alarm 1- · 8
Silence sense 2- · 37
silence threshold 2- · 37
Sinewave generator 3- · 64
Smooth Jazz 3- · 35
SMPTE 2020 6- · 15, 4
SMPTE 2020-2-2008 6- · 34, 4
SMPTE 259M 1- · 12
SMPTE 259M 6- · 4
SMPTE 274M 1- · 15
SMPTE 274M 6- · 6, 27, 15, 4
SMPTE 292M 6- · 12
SMPTE 296M 6- · 4
SMPTE 424M 6- · 12
SMPTE RDD 06-2008 6- · 4
SMPTE Rdd06-2008 6- · 3
soft-knee presets 3- · 31
Software
updating 8585 2- · 88
software updates
and passcodes 2- · 44
software updates 1- · 8
Solo 3- · 60
sound-for-picture
preset descriptions 3- · 28
processing 3- · 6
spare parts
obtaining 6- · 15
specifications 6- · 1
speech/music detector 3- · 6
station ID
setting 2- · 18
status bits
AES3 2- · 18
setting AES3id 2- · 36
stereo
control by status bits 2- · 18
stereo mode 2- · 34
STL
compatibility with 32 kHz sample rate 2- · 6
overshoot in uncomressed digital 2- · 6
STL systems 1- · 15
Streaming
using Dialnorm in 1- · 22
streaming media 1- · 22
structure
five-band 3- · 23
two-band 3- · 23
structures
switching between 3- · 22
switching between 3- · 22
studio AGC 1- · 16
subassembly removal & replacement 4- · 2
subframe delay 1- · 15
Subnet
Crossing 2- · 57
Mask 2- · 56
Subnet Mask
Setting via Terminal Program 2- · 49
surround
auto-fallback 2- · 37
surround input
ref level, I/O setup 2- · 25
Surround Input Mix control 2- · 35
Surround Optimization control 3- · 10, 11
Switches
Voltage select 2- · 2
sync
SDI 2- · 27
setting source 2- · 27
video 1- · 5, 15
video 2- · 27
video 6- · 4
sync delay 2- · 19
sync input
audio 1- · 5
Sync input
audio 6- · 5
sync input 1- · 14
System clock
Setting 2- · 38
system setup
quick setup 2- · 8
System Setup screen 2- · 8
T
tally outputs
programming 2- · 37
Silence sense threshold 2- · 37
tally outputs 1- · 8
tally outputs 2- · 3
Tally Outputs 6- · 5
TCP/IP
connecting to serial or Ethernet 2- · 52
technical support 5- · 10
telephone support 5- · 10
Telnet 2- · 53
Telnet/SSH 1- · 8
Terminal Port 2- · 52
terminal port #

Changing via terminal program 2- · 51
setting 2- · 53
terminal program
connecting to RS232 2- · 46
test modes 3- · 64
Test Modes table 3- · 64
test tone
frequencies 2- · 28
frequencies vs sample rate 2- · 28
mapping 2- · 32
Threshold
Bass Delta 3- · 46
Master Delta 3- · 46
Time & date 2- · 9
timeservers
syncing to 2- · 59
Tone generator 3- · 64
Transient Enhance 3- · 48
troubleshooting
installation 5- · 1
TVA presets 2- · 31
two-band
bass attack control 3- · 53
bass coupling control 3- · 52
bass threshold control 3- · 52
drive control 3- · 49
full modify controls 3- · 49
gate control 3- · 51
master attack control 3- · 53
master compression threshold 3- · 52
release control 3- · 49
Two-Band Controls table 3- · 50
two-band structure 3- · 27, 48
U
Unbalanced output
wiring for 2- · 8
Unlocking 8585
via Terminal Program 2- · 49
Unlocking 8585 2- · 43, 44
unpacking 2- · 1
updating software
and passcodes 2- · 44
updating software 2- · 88
user feedback 1- · 24
user presets
archiving 3- · 21
creating 3- · 17, 20
saving from PC Remote 3- · 68
user presets 1- · 9
V
VANC 1- · 5
VANC 6- · 15, 4
Video Delay
setting control 2- · 24
video delay 1- · 15
video delay 6- · 4
video reference input 6- · 34, 4
video sync 1- · 15
video sync 2- · 27
video sync 6- · 4
view meters 2- · 41
Voltage select switch 2- · 2
VPN 2- · 57
VPN, setting up 2- · 64
W
warranty
extended 1- · 25
warranty 1- · 24
warranty 6- · 6
wideband control 3- · 29
Width control (EQ) 3- · 37
window
release control 3- · 43
window size control 3- · 43
Windows
installing services 2- · 62
Windows 2000
adding direct serial connection 2- · 68, 72,
78, 84
direct serial connection 2- · 67
modem connection 2- · 77
Windows Media codec 3- · 35
Windows XP
direct connect 5- · 9
modem configuration 2- · 83
modem connect 5- · 10
wizard
quick setup 2- · 8
women
processing for 3- · 5
word length
at output, specification 6- · 3
setting output 2- · 28
wordclock 1- · 5, 7
wordclock 2- · 7, 27
wordclock 6- · 3

X
XLR connector
wiring standard 2- · 8

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INTRODUCTION 1-1
Section 1
Introduction
Crucial Information—Please Read!
To make automatic loudness control as straightforward and dependable as possible,
the 8685 operates somewhat differently from other Optimods.
• Dialnorm: The 8685 works very easily with Dolby Digital® transmission systems
if you do one crucial thing: You must tell the 8685 what value of Dolby Digital
Dialnorm metadata you are transmitting to your audience. This will prevent your
transmission from being too loud or quiet compared to other correctly set up
Dolby Digital transmissions.
• The 8685’s Quick Setup wizard (page 2- 8) leads you through the process of setting
Dialnorm on the 8685. Step 10 on page 2-14 explains how the 8685 uses its
knowledge of transmitted Dialnorm to control loudness.
• Your Dolby Digital transmission’s loudness will automatically be correct if:
• you use a “TV” factory preset (Table 3-1 on page 3-27),
• you have adjusted the 8685’s input reference level so that the processing operates
with normal amounts of gain reduction (step 7 on page 2-11 or step 7
on page 2-25), and
• you have adjusted the 8685’s Dialnorm to match the Dialnorm you are transmitting
(step 10 on page 2-14 or step 13 on page 2-34).
The 8685’s DIALNORM value can be set in two places: There is a global setting
in the active Setup, which can be overridden by a setting in the active
processing preset. Except for the 2.0 parameters in the analog TV
presets, all factory processing presets are configured to use the global
Dialnorm setting specified in the active Setup.
You can use the 8685’s RS-485 serial ports (serial ports #2 and #3 on the
back panel) to convey DIALNORM to the Dolby-Encoder automatically. See
Conveying Metadata on page 2-15.
• Setting Output Loudness: To set the 8685’s output loudness, adjust its
DIALNORM value or adjust the MB LIMITER DRIVE control in the active processing
preset. Both methods cause 8685’s OUTPUT LEVEL meter indication to change.

1-2
INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 8685
• Adjusting DIALNORM changes output loudness without changing the indication
on the 8685’s CBS Loudness Level meter or the amount of gain reduction in
the loudness controller. The peak limiter’s gain reduction will change. This is
the preferred method if the 8685’s loudness controller is active because it has
the smallest effect on the sonic texture of the 8685’s audio processing.
• Adjusting MB LIMITER DRIVE changes the Loudness Level meter’s indication and
the amount of gain reduction in the loudness controller and peak limiter.
The 8685’s output level controls (called SURROUND OUTPUT 100% and 2.0
OUTPUT 100% for the surround and 2.0 processing chains respectively) do
not change output loudness. Their only purpose is to set the 8685’s
maximum peak output level with respect to 0 dBfs, which allows you to
compensate for transmission channels that introduce peak overshoots.
For example, if you lower an OUTPUT 100% control from 0 dBfs to –2 dBfs,
the 8685 automatically reduces the gain following its peak limiter by
2 dB and simultaneously increases the drive into the peak limiter by 2 dB.
Hence, the average output level does not change but the maximum peak
output level is constrained to –2 dBfs. This unconventional arrangement
results from the 8685’s handling of Dialnorm—if you have set DIALNORM
correctly on the 8685, you can change the 8685’s output level control
freely without causing your on-air loudness to be incorrect with respect
to other transmissions.
If you are processing for a Dolby Digital distribution channel and wish to
customize a factory preset, see Setting Preset Loudness Correctly for
Dolby Digital Transmission on page 3-19.
Using This Manual
The Adobe pdf eBook form of this manual contains numerous hyperlinks and bookmarks.
A reference to a numbered step or a page number (except in the Index) is a
live hyperlink; click on it to go immediately to that reference.
If the bookmarks are not visible, click the “Bookmarks” tab on the left
side of the Acrobat Reader window.
This manual has a table of contents and index. To search for a specific word or
phrase, you can also use the Adobe Acrobat Reader’s text search function.
The OPTIMOD 8685 Digital Audio Processor
Orban’s all-digital Optimod-Surround 8685 Audio Processor can help you achieve the
highest possible quality digital audio broadcast, digital television, and netcast audio
processing using up to 7.1 audio channels. Thanks to versatile compression ratio controls
and a mastering-quality look-ahead peak limiter, the 8685 is also ideal for mastering
chores.
The 8685 is Orban’s second-generation surround/2.0 processor. In addition to the effective
automatic loudness control and automatic mix correction of its predecessor

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INTRODUCTION 1-3
(the 8585), the 8685 offers new input/output capabilities that include support for
SDI and HD-SDI and for Dolby-E. Dual redundant power supplies help ensure maximum
uptime. In addition to surround processing, the 8685 can simultaneously provide
up to four channels of 2.0 processing, allowing it to provide all the audio processing
necessary for a typical ATSC broadcast with multiple subchannels. Like the
8585, the 8685 is dialnorm-aware. Loudness control is excellent when measured by
the ITU BS.1770 standard (as specified in ATSC A/85:2009) or by the 8685’s built-in
CBS Loudness Meters. When properly installed and set up, the 8685 will automatically
make a station compliant with the CALM Act.
OPTIMOD 8685 is descended from the industry-standard OPTIMOD audio processors
for radio and television. Thousands of these broadcast-specific processors are attracting
and holding audiences all over the world. They have proven that the
“OPTIMOD sound” can attract and keep an audience even in the most competitive
commercial environment.
Take a little time now to familiarize yourself with OPTIMOD 8685. A small investment
of your time now will yield large dividends in audio quality.
The rest of Chapter 1 explains how OPTIMOD 8685 fits into the DAB and DTV broadcast
facilities and how to use it for netcasting. Chapter 2 explains how to install it.
Chapter 3 explains how to operate OPTIMOD 8685. Chapters 4 through 6 provide
reference information.
OPTIMOD 8685 was designed to deliver a high quality sound while simultaneously
increasing the average modulation of the channel substantially beyond that achievable
by “recording studio”-style compressors and limiters. Because such processing
can exaggerate flaws in the source material, it is very important that the source
audio be as clean as possible.
For best results, feed OPTIMOD 8685 unprocessed audio. No other audio processing
is necessary or desirable.
Absolute Control of Loudness and Peak Modulation
• The 8685 includes third-generation CBS Loudness Controllers for DTV applications.
Separate loudness controllers are available in the multichannel and 2.0
processing chains and work with the both Two-Band and Five-Band structures.
The third-generation improvements reduce annoyance more than simple loudness
control alone, doing so without audible gain pumping. Attack time is fast
enough to prevent audible loudness overshoots, so the control is smooth and
unobtrusive. Loudness control is excellent when measured by the 8685’s built-in
ITU BS.1770 and second-generation (Jones & Torick) CBS Loudness Meters, allowing
stations to comply automatically with the requirements of the CALM act.
(See Using the ITU BS.1770 and CBS Loudness Meters to Measure Loudness Controller
Performance starting on page 3-78.)
• The 8685 precisely controls peak levels to prevent digital clipping. The
maximum level of the digital samples is controlled to better than 2%.

1-4
INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 8685
• While primarily oriented toward “flat” media, the 8685’s four 2.0 channel
processors can also provide preemphasis limiting for the two standard preemphasis
curves of 50μs and 75μs. This allows it to protect pre-emphasized analog
microwave links, satellite uplinks and similar channels where protection limiting
or light processing is required. It also allows using a 2.0 processor to process
for analog television transmissions, which use either 50μs and 75μs preemphasis
depending on country.
Note that the 8685’s 2.0 channel processing cannot provide simultaneous,
independent audio processing for flat and preemphasized channels. Even
though one output may be pre-emphasized while other is flat, the only
difference between the outputs is that the “flat” output has de-emphasis
applied to it after the processing while the preemphasized output does
not.
Flexible Configuration
• Five processors in one: A gain-coupled multichannel processor for up to 7.1
channels, plus four additional, independent 2.0 channel processors (each of
whose performance is equivalent to an OPTIMOD 6300) that can be used for
many tasks such as processing the audio for a second language or for processing
up to four ATSC subchannels. Because its output can be mixed into the LF and RF
outputs of the multichannel processing, the first 2.0 channel processor can also
be used to process an independent feed (like the output of a sports truck,
news truck, or newsroom) before it is mixed with the station’s main multichannel
audio path.
• The multichannel and 2.0 processors can operate with separate audio processing
parameters like release times. For example, the 2.0 processors could be
set up for relatively heavy processing to make a newsroom feed more consistent,
while the main processing was set up more conservatively to correct network
material and commercials unobtrusively.
• The base 8685 configuration includes five AESid digital inputs and six AES3id
outputs, all transformer-coupled. These inputs and outputs appear on BNC
connectors and have 75Ω impedance. The digital inputs and digital outputs have
sample-rate converters and can operate at 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48, 88.2, and 96 kHz
sample rates.
• The optional HD-SDI I/O module includes three AES3id inputs and three
AES3id outputs, which can be used as a loop-through for Orban’s Penteo®
2.0�5.1 upmixer or to provide I/O for up to three channels of 2.0 processing.
The SDI I/O option provides up to 11 frames of video delay to match the delay
of the 8685’s loudness processing (typically 20 ms) and optional Dolby-E encode
and decode. A relay provides hard-wire safety bypass from the SDI input
to the SDI output in case of hardware failure. (See Optional HD-SDI Input/Output
Interface Module on page 6-3 for details.)

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INTRODUCTION 1-5
• OPTIMOD 8685’s inputs and outputs are highly configurable via remotecontrollable
internal routing switchers. Additionally, the outputs of the
multichannel and 2.0 processing chains can be independently configured to emit
the output of the AGC or the output of the multiband compressor/limiter,
all configurable to use or bypass look-ahead limiting.
• Via the internal output routing switcher, a given output signal can be applied to
more than one hardware output. This allows using the 8685 as an AES splitter.
• For both the base I/O configuration and the optional HD-SDI module, a stereo
analog monitor output appears on XLR connectors on the rear panel. It can be
configured to emit any 8685 output signal, including a downmix of the multichannel
audio. The analog outputs are transformerless, balanced, and floating
(with 50Ω impedance) to ensure highest transparency and accurate pulse response.
They can be used to drive a transmitter, although their normal function
is monitoring.
• A stereo headphone jack is available on the front panel. It can be configured
to emit any 8685 output signal and is independent of the stereo analog monitor
output.
• Two RS485 serial ports allow the 8685 to accept and emit Dolby Digital
metadata. If the optional HD-SDI module is installed, metadata can also be deembedded
and re-embedded in the HD-SDI VANC area and, if the Dolby-E
modules are installed, de-embedded from and re-embedded into Dolby-E data
that is conveyed either through from the HD-SDI connection or the AES3id connections.
• The 8685’s 2.0 processing offers a dual-mono mode that allows two entirely
separate mono programs to be processed, facilitating multiple-language operation.
In this mode, both processing channels operate using the same processing
parameters (like release time); you cannot adjust the two channels to
provide different processing textures.
• An audio sync input is configurable to accept AES11id or wordclock sync.
You can synchronize the output sample rate of all AES3id outputs to this input.
You can also synchronize the outputs to the AES3 digital input #1 or to
the 8685’s internal clock. The sync source of each AES3 output is independently
selectable.
• In the optional HD-SDI module, a BNC connector can accept video sync per
SMPTE 274M and SMPTE 296M, which can be used as a reference for the output
audio sample rate and to correctly align Dolby-E frames with video per
Dolby's requirements. The signal applied to the SDI input can also be used as a
sync reference.

1-6
INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 8685
• Dual power supplies with independent AC line inputs provide redundant operation.
• All input, output, and power connections are rigorously RFI-suppressed to
Orban’s traditional exacting standards, ensuring trouble-free installation.
• The 8685 is designed and certified to meet all applicable international
safety and emissions standards.
Adaptability through Multiple Audio Processing Structures
• A processing structure is a program that operates as a complete audio processing
system. Only one processing structure can be on-air at a time. OPTIMOD
8685 realizes its processing structures as a series of high-speed mathematical
computations made by Digital Signal Processing (DSP) chips.
• The 8685 features two processing structures: Five-Band for a spectrally consistent
sound and Two-Band for a more transparent sound that preserves the
frequency balance of the original program material.
• A special Two-Band preset creates a no-compromise “Protect” function that is
functionally similar to the “Protect” structures in earlier Orban digital processors.
• The Five-Band and the Two-Band structures can be switched via a mute-free
crossfade.
• Audio processing can be smoothly activated and defeated on-air, allowing
programs that can benefit from full dynamic range to pass through the 8685
without dynamics compression. This pass-through can be activated and defeated
via clock-based automation, from the 8685’s front panel, from 8685’s PC Remote
software, from 8685’s programmable GPI inputs, or from 8685’s Ethernet or
RS232 serial API.
• The 8685’s AGC rides gain over an adjustable range of up to 25dB, compressing
dynamic range and compensating for both operator gain-riding errors and gain
inconsistencies in automated systems. The AGC output is available to drive STLs,
so the 8685 can be used as a studio AGC.
• The 8685’s processing structures are all phase-linear to maximize audible transparency.
• The 8685’s equalizers and crossovers use 48-bit arithmetic to ensure masteringquality
noise and distortion performance.
• The 8685 includes third-generation CBS Loudness Controllers for DTV applications.
Separate loudness controllers are available in the multichannel

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INTRODUCTION 1-7
and 2.0 processing chains and work with the both Two-Band and Five-Band
structures. The third-generation improvements reduce annoyance more than
simple loudness control alone, doing so without audible gain pumping. Attack
time is fast enough to prevent audible loudness overshoots, so the control is
smooth and unobtrusive. Material processed by the CBS Loudness Controller has
been shown to be well controlled when measured with a long-term loudness
meter using the BS.1770 standard. (See Using the ITU BS.1770 and CBS Loudness
Meters to Measure Loudness Controller Performance starting on page 3-78.)
• Orban’s PreCode technology manipulates several aspects of the audio to
minimize artifacts caused by low bitrate codecs, ensuring consistent loudness
and texture from one source to the next. It is particularly useful when processing
for netcasts or mastering for any low bit rate channel.
PreCode includes special audio band detection algorithms that are energy and
spectrum aware. This can improve codec performance on some codecs by reducing
audio processing induced codec artifacts, even with program material that
has been preprocessed or mastered by other processing than Optimod. There are
several factory presets tuned specifically for low bit-rate codecs.
User-Friendly Interface
• A large (quarter-VGA) color liquid crystal display (LCD) makes setup, adjustment
and programming of the 8500 easy. Navigation is by a miniature joystick,
two dedicated buttons, and a large rotary knob. The LCD shows all metering
functions of the processing structure in use.
• Use the Locate joystick to navigate through a menu that lets you recall a preset,
modify processing (at three levels of expertise), or to access the system’s
setup controls.
Controllable
• The 8685 can be remote-controlled by 5-12V pulses applied to eight programmable,
optically isolated “general-purpose interface” (GPI) ports.
• 8685 PC Remote software is a smooth, responsive graphical application that
runs under Windows XP and Vista. It communicates with a given 8685 via TCP/IP
over modem, direct serial, and Ethernet connections. You can configure PC
Remote to switch between many 8685s via a convenient organizer that supports
giving any 8685 an alias and supports grouping multiple 8685s into folders.
Clicking an 8685’s icon causes PC Remote to connect to that 8685 through an
Ethernet network or initiates a Windows Dial-Up or Direct Cable Connection if
appropriate. The PC Remote software allows the user to access all 8685 features
and allows the user to archive and restore presets, automation lists, and system

1-8
INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 8685
setups (containing I/O levels, digital word lengths, GPI functional assignments,
etc.).
• An API provides remote administration over TCP/IP via the RS232 serial or
Ethernet ports. The 8685 hosts a TCP/IP terminal server to allow external control
of the 8685 from either a Telnet/SSH client or a custom third party application.
All commands are simple text strings. You can recall presets, operate the
input and output routing switchers and more. Password security is provided.
• The 8685 contains a versatile real-time clock, which allows automation of various
events (including recalling presets) at pre-programmed times. To ensure accuracy,
the clock can be synchronized to an Internet timeserver.
• Silence alarm and digital audio fault tally outputs are available.
• A Bypass Test Mode can be invoked locally, by remote control (from either the
8685’s GPI port or the 8685 PC Remote application), or by automation to permit
broadcast system test and alignment or “proof of performance” tests.
• The 8685 contains a built-in line-up tone generator, facilitating quick and accurate
level setting in any system.
• The 8685’s software can be upgraded by running Orban-supplied downloadable
upgrade software on a PC. The upgrade can occur remotely through the
8685’s Ethernet port or serial port (connected to an external modem), or locally
(by connecting a Windows® computer to the 8685’s serial port through the supplied
null modem cable).
Presets in OPTIMOD 8685
There are two distinct kinds of presets in OPTIMOD 8685: processing presets,
which contain the settings of the 8685’s audio processing controls (like compression
thresholds), and setups, which contain technical setup settings (like input reference
settings and channel routing). You can modify presets and setups and save them as
“user presets” and “user setups.” You can recall these by several means, including
the 8685’s GPI inputs, serial and Ethernet API, PC Remote, clock-based automation,
and front panel.
To recall a preset from the front panel, start from the main screen that shows meters.
If the screen is not displaying meters, press the ESCAPE button until you see the
meters. Then press the ESCAPE button and LOCATE to RECALL/IMPORT. Press the ENTER
button to see the preset list. LOCATE to the desired preset and hit ENTER to activate
it.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INTRODUCTION 1-9
Factory Processing Presets
The Factory Presets are our “factory recommended settings” for various program
formats or types. There are multiple Factory Presets for both radio-oriented and
video oriented programming. Each Factory Preset on the Preset list is really a library
of more than 20 separate presets, selected by navigating to MODIFY PROCESSING >
LESS-MORE and using the LESS-MORE control to adjust OPTIMOD 8685 for less or
more processing. The factory presets are listed and described starting on page 3-23.
The description indicates the processing structure and the type of processing.
Factory Presets are stored in OPTIMOD 8685’s non-volatile memory and cannot be
erased. You can change the settings of a Factory Preset, but you must then store
those settings as a User Preset, which you are free to name as you wish. The Factory
Preset remains unchanged.
The surround and 2.0 processors do not have to use the same Factory Preset. To use
different presets, start by recalling your preferred Factory Preset for the surround
processing. Then “import” a different factory preset for the 2.0 processors and save
the result as a User Preset. This procedure is described in more detail below.
User Processing Presets
User Presets permit you to change a Factory Preset to suit your requirements and
then store those changes.
You can store more than 40 User Presets, limited only by available memory in your
8685 (which will vary depending on the version of your 8685’s software). You can
give your preset a name up to 18 characters long.
User Presets cannot be created from scratch. You must always start by recalling a
Factory Preset. Make the changes and then store your modified preset as a User Preset.
You can also recall a previously created user preset, modify it, and save it again,
either overwriting the old version or saving under a new name. In all cases, the
original Factory Preset remains for you to return to if you wish.
User Presets inherit the structure of their parent Factory Presets (Five-Band or Two-
Band). The only way you can choose the structure of a factory preset is to edit it
from a Factory preset having that structure (or to edit it from an older User Preset
having the desired structure). You cannot change an existing User Preset’s structure.
Presets contain parameters for both the surround and 2.0 processors. A preset,
whether Factory or User, can be edited in several ways to create a new User Preset.
You can adjust any individual parameter in the surround and 2.0 sections of the preset.
You can also bulk-import all of the 2.0 parameters contained in any User Preset
or Factory Preset.
User Presets are stored in non-volatile memory that does not require battery
backup. To Create or Save a Preset on page 3-20 has more about User Presets. Instructions
for importing and editing a 2.0 preset are on page 3-25.

1-10
INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 8685
Input/Output Configuration
In its base configuration, OPTIMOD 8685 simultaneously accommodates:
• Digital AES3id inputs (5) and outputs (6).
• Two analog monitor outputs.
• A headphone output.
The 2.0 processors in OPTIMOD 8685 can be operated in either stereo or dual-mono
mode via the 2.0 PROC MODE control. In dual-mono mode, the channels operate independently
(and have separate Loudness Controllers and Loudness Level Meters),
but the processing parameters that determine the “sound” of the processor are the
same on both channels.
Dual-mono or stereo mode is a global system parameter. You can change modes
manually, via the 8685’s GPI inputs, via 8685 PC Remote software, or via the 8685’s
built-in time-of-day automation. Further, the 8685 can be programmed to recognize
the “stereo” and “dual-mono” flags in the AES input bitstream and to switch modes
accordingly. It will also set these flags appropriately in its output AES bitstream.
Digital AES3id Inputs/Outputs
The digital input and outputs conform to the professional AES3id standard, which
calls for 75Ω coaxial cable terminated with BNC connectors.
The 8685’s AES3id connections are all internally terminated with transformers
that expect to see 75Ω. To interface AES3id to AES3 (110Ω balanced)
connections, we recommend using 75Ω/110Ω matching transformers
when cable runs are long. For short runs (10 feet or less), transformers
are usually unnecessary.
In the base configuration, there are five inputs (which carry 10 channels) and six
outputs (which carry 12 channels). In the optional HD-SDI configuration, there are
three inputs and three outputs. All inputs and outputs have sample rate converters
that allow operation at 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2, and 96 kHz sample frequency.
To ensure best control of peak modulation, operate the output at 48 kHz
or higher.
Level control of the AES3id inputs are accomplished via software control through
System Setup (see step 8 on page 2-27) or through PC Remote. Level control is one
of the many parameters contained in a Setup.
The output sample rate of each AES3id output can be locked independently to the
8685’s internal crystal clock, the sample rate present at its AES3id input, the sample
rate present at the 8685’s AES11id sync input, or 1x word clock.
The 8685 can apply J.17 deemphasis to signals applied to the digital inputs assigned
to the 2.0 processors. J.17 is a 6 dB/octave shelving preemphasis/deemphasis stan-

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INTRODUCTION 1-11
dard with break points at 400 Hz and 4 kHz. It is used mainly in older studio/transmitter
links that use NICAM technology.
Analog Outputs
The two analog outputs appear on XLR-type male connectors on the rear panel.
These are intended primarily for monitoring. However, their frequency response is
wide enough to limit overshoot to 1% or less, allowing these outputs to be used
feed processed audio to a transmitter or STL.
These outputs can emit many different signals as determined by the 8685’s output
routing switcher. Output impedance is 50Ω; balanced and floating. The outputs can
drive 600Ω or higher impedances, balanced or unbalanced. The peak output level is
adjustable from –6dBu to +24dBu.
Level control of the analog outputs is accomplished via software control through
System Setup (see step 4 on page 2-21 and step 10 on page 2-30) or through PC Remote.
Remote Control Interface
The Remote Control Interface is a set of eight optically isolated GPI inputs on a DB-
25 connector, which can be activated by 5-12V DC. They can control various functions
of the 8685:
• Recall any processing Preset, Setup, Test Mode state (Bypass or Tone), or exit
from a Test Mode to the previous processing preset.
• Reset the 8685’s internal clock to the nearest hour or to midnight.
You can reconfigure the functions of the GPI inputs via System Setup. For
example, if you are not switching between stereo and mono, the inputs
ordinarily dedicated to controlling the stereo/mono status can instead be
re-configured to call additional presets.
See Remote Control Interface Programming on page 2-54 for information on programming
the GPI and step 5 on page 2-3 for wiring information.
Computer Interface
On the rear panel of the 8685 are an RS-232 serial port and an Ethernet port for interfacing
to IBM-compatible PCs either locally or through a TCP/IP network. The
Ethernet port supports remote control and metering, and allows downloading software
upgrades. The RS-232 port supports ASCII commands through a terminal connection.
Each 8685 package ships with 8685 PC Remote software, an application for any PC
running Microsoft Windows XP (SP2 or higher) or Vista. 8685 PC Remote permits you
to adjust any 8685 preset by remote control or to do virtually anything else that you

1-12
INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 8685
can do from the 8685’s front panel controls. The program displays all of the 8685’s
meters on the computer screen to aid remote adjustment. Because of the large
numbers of meters and controls in the 8685, we expect that most users will prefer to
operate it via PC Remote.
RS-485 Serial Ports
There are two RS-485 serial ports on the rear panel (serial ports #2 and #3). These
can operate up 115 kbps. These can accept and emit Dolby® AC3 metadata.
RS-232 Serial Port
8685 PC Remote can communicate at up to 115 kbps direct connection between the
computer and the 8685 through their RS-232 serial ports.
RJ45 Ethernet Connector
The 8685 can be connected to any Ethernet network that supports the TCP/IP protocol.
See page 2-45 for instructions on how to control the 8685 via the RS-232 and
Ethernet ports via a terminal emulator and page 2-65 for instructions on how to
connect to the 8685 via its PC Remote application for Windows.
Optional HD-SDI Input/Output
The optional HD-SDI I/O module offers supports SD-SDI (per SMPTE 259M); 1.5 Gbit/s
HD-SDI (per SMPTE 292M; up to 720p and 1080i) and 3.0 Gbit/s single-wire HD-SDI
(per SMPTE 424M; 1080p).
The SDI I/O can de-embed up to eight channels of audio, send them to the 8685’s
DSP for audio processing, and then re-embed them with video that has been delayed
to maintain AV-sync. There are four variants (see Optional HD-SDI Input/Output
Interface Module on page 6-3 for details).
The HD-SDI module can accommodate Dolby-E® decoding and encoding via optional
plug-in modules.
A relay provides hard-wire safety bypass from the SDI input to the SDI output in case
of hardware failure.
Routing Audio to and from the 8685
Audio links are used in different ways. Performance requirements differ depending
on the application:
• A link that passes unprocessed audio to drive the OPTIMOD 8685 should have
very low noise and low non-linear distortion, but its transient response is not
important.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INTRODUCTION 1-13
• A link that passes OPTIMOD 8685’s peak-controlled output does not need as low
a noise floor as a link passing unprocessed audio. However, if the application
calls for high average modulation, the link’s transient response is critical.
• A link that passes OPTIMOD 8685’s peak-controlled output after it has been
coded by the transmission codec requires bit-accurate transmission of the transmission
codec’s output. In DTV applications, the 8685 will typically drive a Dolby
Digital encoder at the studio. The link will pass the Dolby Digital encoder’s output
to the transmitter, either directly or multiplexed onto a transport stream.
Using Lossy Data Reduction before the 8685’s Input
Many broadcasters are now using lossy data reduction algorithms like MPEG-1 Layer
2, Layer 3, or AAC to increase the storage time of digital playback media and to
transmit audio. Sometimes, several encode/decode cycles will be cascaded before the
material is finally delivered to OPTIMOD 8685’s input.
All such algorithms operate by increasing the quantization noise in discrete frequency
bands. If not psychoacoustically masked by the program material, this noise
may be perceived as distortion, “gurgling,” swishing, or other interference. Psychoacoustic
calculations are used to ensure that the added noise is masked by the desired
program material and not heard. Cascading several stages of such processing
can raise the added quantization noise above the threshold of masking, making it
audible.
In addition, at least one other mechanism can cause the noise to become audible at
the radio. OPTIMOD 8685’s multiband limiter performs an “automatic reequalization”
function that can significantly change the frequency balance of the
program (sometimes by more than 10 dB). This can cause noise that would otherwise
have been masked to become unmasked because the psychoacoustic masking conditions
under which the masking thresholds were originally computed have changed.
Accordingly, if you use lossy data reduction before the 8685, you should use the
highest data rate possible. This maximizes the headroom between the added noise
and the threshold where it will be heard. In addition, you should minimize the
number of encode and decode cycles because each cycle moves the added noise
closer to the threshold where the added noise is heard.
For MPEG Layer 2 encoding, we recommend 384kb/second or higher.
Links from the 8685’s Output to a Transmission Encoder or Transmitter
When used as a transmission processor, the 8685’s output should be connected to
the encoder or transmitter (like Dolby’s DP569 Dolby Digital encoder) so that the
link introduces no change in OPTIMOD 8685’s output bitstream. A simple AES3id
connection is ideal. Alternatively, an uncompressed digital link will pass the 8685’s
output with little or no degradation if the link does not truncate word length (from
20 to 16 bits, for example) and does not require downward sample rate conversion.
The 8685’s look-ahead limiters tightly control peak levels at the 8685’s outputs. Lossy
compression following the 8685’s output can decrease system performance because
the compression adds peak level overshoots. Such links must therefore be carefully
qualified before you use them to carry the peak-controlled output of OPTIMOD
8685 to the transmitter. For example, the MPEG Layer 2 algorithm can increase peak

1-14
INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 8685
levels up to 4dB at 160kb/sec by adding large amounts of quantization noise to the
signal. While the desired program material may psychoacoustically mask this noise, it
is nevertheless large enough to affect peak levels severely. For any lossy compression
system, overshoot decreases as bit rate increases, so use the highest bit rate practical
in your system. In addition, there will be an unavoidable amount of overshoot
caused by asynchronous re-sampling (see page 1-14).
When using lossy digital compression, it is particularly important to minimize the
amount of peak limiting in the 8685. Heavy peak limiting may introduce audible artifacts
as a side effect of precisely controlling peak levels. It is pointless to introduce
such artifacts if the lossy compression compromises the benefits of the limiting by
adding overshoots. Instead, allow a generous amount of headroom when setting
the drive level into the STL. Most lossy digital STLs have a noise floor that is low
enough to make this practical.
The Dolby Digital transmission encoder is lossy and introduces overshoot. Hence, it is
usually unwise to use substantial amounts of peak limiting when the 8685 is used as
a final transmission processor to drive a Dolby Digital encoder. If a reasonable value
of Dialnorm is used, little or no peak limiting should be required in the 8685 because
the Dolby Digital signal path will have a generous amount of headroom.
Peak control in OPTIMOD 8685 occurs at a 48 kHz sample frequency. This is sufficient
to prevent any samples from exceeding the threshold of limiting. However, after reconstruction,
the analog output may overshoot the nominal 100% level because
these overshoots “fall between the samples,” so the processing cannot be aware of
them. If you pass the 8685’s output through a digital>analog>digital conversion, the
new samples will not be synchronous with the samples inside OPTIMOD 8685. Therefore,
they may well fall on the overshoots, causing loss of peak modulation control.
Typically, this introduces less than 1 dB of overshoot, so allowing 1 dB of headroom
in the transmission chain should be adequate to prevent audible problems.
The 8685’s outputs are equipped with sample rate converters that can output at 32
kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48, 88.2, or 96 kHz. Setting the output sample rate below 48 kHz can
cause overshoot due to spectral truncation and asynchronous re-sampling of the 48
kHz peak-controlled samples, just as in the D>A>D case described above. Spectral
truncation can cause overshoots substantially larger than 1 dB. To prevent this, set
the 8685’s bandwidth control (in the active Setup) to so it is lower than the bandwidth
of the downstream link. For example, a 32 kHz sample rate link requires setting
the 8685’s bandwidth to 15 kHz or lower.
Sample Frequency Synchronization
Virtually all digital broadcasting systems require audio to be synchronized to a master
clock. The 8685 can synchronize the audio sample rate appearing at its AES3id
outputs and optional SDI output to one of several sources. Although the these outputs
can emit different sample rates, they must all be synchronized to the same
source.
If a given output is set to a different sample rate than the sync source, the output
sample rate will equal the sync source’s sample rate multiplied by the ratio of two
integers. For example, if the sync source is 48 kHz and the output sample rate is 32
kHz, the output sample rate will be exactly 2/3 of the sync sample rate.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INTRODUCTION 1-15
The 8685 provides a BNC connector that accepts “house sync” in AES11id (75Ω unbalanced)
or 1 x word clock (squarewave at the sample frequency) format. The 8685
automatically detects which of these signals is present, if any. A setup menu selection
determine whether the 8685’s outputs are synchronized to the 8685’s sync input,
its internal clock, or the signal applied to its AES3 audio input, If the optional
HD-SDI module is installed, this adds two more allowable sync sources: video sync
and a signal applied to the SDI input (see below).
Because the 8685’s digital input receivers have sample rate converters, these inputs
can accept any sample frequency from 32 to 96 kHz. These inputs do not need to be
synchronized to house sync.
In the optional HD-SDI module, a BNC connector can accept video sync per SMPTE
274M and SMPTE 296M. This can be used as a reference for the sample rate at the
AES3id outputs and to correctly align Dolby-E frames with video per Dolby's requirements
(SMPTE RDD 6-2008 and Dolby Labs published specifications) in cases
where HD-SDI is not in use.
When an HD-SDI or SDI signal is present at the SDI input, this signal supplies Dolby-E
frame sync and a reference for the sample rate appearing at the 8685’s AES3id outputs.
As with the base configuration, these outputs can also be synchronized to the
AES11/wordclock input, the signal appearing on AES3id input 1/2, or the 8685’s internal
timebase.
The AES3id inputs are equipped with sample rate converters, so they can receive
signals that are not locked to house sync.
Using the 8685 to Control Studio Output Levels
The 8685 can be used to process a live production like a sports remote or news studio
for consistency. In this case, the 8685 is usually not the final peak control device
in the audio chain before the station’s on-air encoder or transmitter. In these applications,
it is wise to minimize the amount of peak limiting by turning down the
FINAL LIMIT DRIVE control in the 8685’s active preset until the 8685’s limiting meters
show little or no gain reduction.
If the 8685 is outside the studio, it is common for the audio to be linked to the studio
via a lossy digital STL. See the comments about minimizing peak limiting in the
section Using Lossy Data Reduction before the 8685’s Input on page 1-13 .
AV-Sync Delay
The 8685’s audio processing provides an adjustable audio time delay of up to 60 milliseconds.
This allows the installer to force the total delay through the processing to
be exactly one or two frames. (Two frames are required for 59.94/60 fps progressively
scanned video.) The definition of “frame” depends on the system in which
OPTIMOD 8685 is installed.
The selections are MINIMUM (approximately 24 ms delay), 30 fps (NTSC
monochrome video), 29.97 fps (NTSC color video), 25 fps (most PAL
video), and 24 fps (film). You can also adjust the delay in one-millisecond
increments from 25 to 60 ms.

1-16
INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 8685
When the optional HD-SDI module is installed, the 8685 can provide up to 11 frames
of video delay. This is more than enough to maintain AV-sync when the optional
Dolby-E decoder, Dolby-E encoder, and Penteo® upmixer are installed in the audio
path. The delay of the 8685’s audio processing is usually set to exactly one frame.
Using OPTIMOD 8685 as a Studio Level Controller
See page 6-101 for a block diagram of the 8685’s signal processing and routing.
One or more of the 8685’s processors can be used as a studio AGC, digital radio/netcast
processor, or low-delay talent headphone processor. The surround and
2.0 outputs can be configured independently to emit one of the following signals:
• Stereo enhancement, equalization, and AGC without look-ahead peak limiting
• Stereo enhancement, equalization, and AGC with peak limiting
• Stereo enhancement, equalization, and multiband processing (two-band or 5band,
including AGC) without peak limiting
• Stereo enhancement, equalization, and multiband processing (two-band or 5band,
including AGC) with peak limiting
About Transmission Levels and Metering
Meters
Studio engineers and transmission engineers consider audio levels and their measurements
differently, so they typically use different methods of metering to monitor
these levels. The VU meter is an average-responding meter (measuring the approximate
RMS level) with a 300ms rise time and decay time; the VU indication usually
ABSOLUTE PEAK
Figure 1-1: Absolute Peak Level, VU and PPM Reading
PPM
VU

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INTRODUCTION 1-17
under-indicates the true peak level by 8 to 14dB. The Peak Program Meter (PPM) indicates
a level between RMS and the actual peak. The PPM has an attack time of 5
or 10ms, slow enough to cause the meter to ignore narrow peaks and underindicate
the true peak level by 5 dB or more. The absolute peak-sensing meter or
LED indicator shows the true peak level. It has an instantaneous attack time, and a
release time slow enough to allow the engineer to read the peak level easily. Figure
1-1 shows the relative difference between the absolute peak level, and the indications
of a VU meter and a PPM for a few seconds of music program.
Studio Line-up Levels and Headroom
The studio engineer is primarily concerned with calibrating the equipment to provide
the required input level for proper operation of each device, and so that all devices
operate with the same input and output levels. This facilitates patching devices
in and out without recalibration.
For line-up, the studio engineer uses a calibration tone at a studio standard level,
commonly called line-up level, reference level, or operating level. Metering at the
studio is by a VU meter or PPM (Peak Program Meter). As discussed above, the VU or
PPM indication under-indicates the true peak level. Most modern studio audio devices
have an analog clipping level of no less than +21dBu, and often +24dBu or
more. So the studio standardizes on a maximum program indication on the meter
that is lower than the clipping level, so those peaks that the meter does not indicate
will not be clipped. Line-up level is usually at this same maximum meter indication.
In facilities that use VU meters, this level is usually at 0VU, which corresponds to the
studio standard level, typically +4 or +8dBu. If the link is PCM digital, there are two
common standards for line-up level: –18 dBfs (EBU) and –20 dBfs (SMPTE).
For facilities using +4dBu standard level, instantaneous peaks can reach +18dBu or
higher (particularly if the operator overdrives the console or desk). Older facilities
with +8dBu standard level and equipment that clips at +18 or +21dBu will experience
noticeable clipping on some program material.
In facilities that use the BBC-standard PPM, maximum program level is usually PPM4
for music, PPM6 for speech. Line-up level is usually PPM4, which corresponds to
+4dBu. Instantaneous peaks will reach +17dBu or more on voice.
In facilities that use PPMs that indicate level directly in dBu, maximum program and
line-up level is often +6dBu. Instantaneous peaks will reach +11dBu or more.
Transmission Levels
The transmission engineer is primarily concerned with the peak level of a program
to prevent overloading or over-modulation of the transmission system. This peak
overload level is defined differently, system to system.
In FM modulation (FM/VHF radio and television broadcast, microwave or analog satellite
links), it is the maximum-permitted RF carrier frequency deviation. In AM
modulation, it is negative carrier pinch-off. In analog telephone/post/PTT transmis-

1-18
INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 8685
sion, it is the level above which serious crosstalk into other channels occurs, or the
level at which the amplifiers in the channel overload. In digital channels, it is the
largest possible digital word.
For metering, the transmission engineer uses an oscilloscope, absolute peak-sensing
meter, calibrated peak-sensing LED indicator, or a modulation meter. A modulation
meter usually has two components—a semi-peak reading meter (like a PPM), and a
peak-indicating light, which is calibrated to turn on whenever the instantaneous
peak modulation exceeds the overmodulation threshold.
Line-Up Facilities
Metering of Levels and Subjective Loudness
The meters on the 8685 show peak input levels, the peak output modulation, and
subjective loudness.
• Input levels are displayed using a VU-type scale (0 to –40dB), but the metering
indicates absolute instantaneous peak (much faster than a standard PPM or VU
meter). The maximum digital word at the input corresponds to the 0 dB point on
the 8685’s input meter.
• The output meter indicates the values of the digital samples at the output of the
8685’s audio processing, not at its digital outputs. 0 dB on the output meter corresponds
to the setting of the digital output level control in the active Setup
(SURROUND OUT 100% for the surround processing and 2.0 OUT 100% for the 2.0
processors). For example, if this control is set to –3 dBfs and the meter indicates 0
dB, the peak level at the 8685’s digital output is –3 dBfs.
• 0 dB on the meter also corresponds to the threshold of limiting of the 8685’s
look-ahead peak limiters, which prevent the processed audio’s level from increasing
beyond 0 dB.
If the output’s sample rate is set to a rate other than 48 kHz and or
passed through a D/A converter, the peak level of the output may increase
because of asynchronous resampling. (See page 1-14).
• The subjective loudness meter, labeled LOUDNESS LEVEL in the 8685’s GUI displays
either loudness measured by the EBU R 128-2010 1 standard or loudness measured
using the CBS Technology Center algorithm developed by Jones and Torick 2 .
1 EBU Recommendation R 128, “Loudness normalization and permitted maximum
level of audio levels,” Geneva, August 2010. http://tech.ebu.ch/loudness
2 Bronwyn L. Jones and Emil L. Torick, “A New Loudness Indicator for Use in Broadcasting,”
J. SMPTE September 1981, pp. 772-777.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INTRODUCTION 1-19
Both meters are displayed simultaneously in 8685 PC Remote software.
The meter is scaled so that the loudness level at the consumer’s receiver is correct
when the 8685’s processing is adjusted to make dialog peak at “0 dB” on the
8685’s Loudness Level meter and the Dialnorm value (which you must enter
manually) in the active 8685 Setup is the same as the Dialnorm value being
transmitted to the consumer’s receiver. Because loudness perception combines
the contributions of all acoustic sources, there is only one Loudness Level meter
indication regardless of the number of audio channels.
The CBS meter is a “short-term” Loudness Level meter that displays the
details of moment-to-moment loudness with dynamics similar to a VU
meter. Created using Orban-developed modeling software, the DSP implementation
typically matches the original CBS analog meter within 0.5
dB on sinewaves, tone bursts and noise.
The Jones & Torick algorithm improves upon the original loudness measurement
algorithm developed by CBS researchers in 1967. Its foundation
is psychoacoustic studies done at CBS Laboratories over a two year period
by Torick and the late Benjamin Bauer, who built on S. S. Stevens’ ‘50sera
work at Harvard University.
After surveying existing equal-loudness contour curves (like the famous
Fletcher-Munson set) and finding them inapplicable to measuring the
loudness of broadcasts, Bauer and Torick organized listening tests that
resulted in a new set of equal-loudness curves based on octave-wide
noise reproduced by calibrated loudspeakers in a semireverberant 16 x 14
x 8 room, which is representative of a room in which broadcasts are normally
heard. They published this work 3 along with results from other
tests whose goal was to model the loudness integration time constants of
human hearing. These studies concentrated on the moderate sound levels
typically preferred by people listening to broadcasts (60 to 80 phons 4 )
and did not attempt to characterize loudness perception at very low and
high levels.
According to this research and its predecessors, the four most important
factors that correlate to the subjective loudness of broadcasts are these:
1. The power of the sound.
2. The spectral distribution of the power. The ear’s sensitivity depends
strongly on frequency. It is most sensitive to frequencies between 2 and 8
kHz. Sensitivity falls off fastest below 200 Hz.
3. Whether the power is concentrated in a wide or narrow bandwidth.
For a given total sound power, the sound becomes louder as the power is
3 Benjamin B. Bauer and Emil L. Torick, “Researches in Loudness Measurement,” IEEE
Transactions on Audio and Electroacoustics, Volume AU-14, Number 3, September
1966, pp. 141-151
4 The phon is a unit of perceived loudness, equal in number to the intensity in decibels
of a 1 kHz tone judged to be as loud as the sound being measured.

1-20
INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 8685
Test Modes
spread over a larger number of critical bands (about 1/3 octave). This is
called loudness summation.
4. Temporal integration: As its duration increases, a sound at a given
level appears progressively louder until its duration exceeds about 200
milliseconds, at which point no further loudness increase occurs.
Bauer and Torick used the results of this research to create a loudness
level meter with eight octave-wide filters, each of which covers three
critical bands. (B & T did not use one filter per critical band because this
would have made the meter, which was realized using analog circuitry,
prohibitively expensive.) Each filter feeds a full-wave rectifier and each
rectifier feeds a nonlinear lowpass filter that has a 10 ms attack time and
a 200 ms release time, somewhat like the sidechain filter in an AGC. This
models the “instantaneous loudness” perception mechanism in the ear.
Instantaneous loudness is not perceived directly but is an essential part of
the total loudness model.
To map the instantaneous loudness to perceived short-term loudness, the
outputs of each of the nonlinear lowpass filters are arithmetically
summed with gains chosen to follow the 70 phon equal-loudness curves
of the ear as determined by Bauer and Torick’s research. The sum is applied
to a second, slower nonlinear lowpass filter. This has an attack time
of 120 ms and a release time of 730 ms. Along with the eight nonlinear
lowpass filters following the individual filters, this filter models temporal
integration and maps it to the visual display. Meanwhile, the arithmetic
addition models loudness summation.
The internationally accepted unit of subjective loudness is the sone. With
a sinewave, 40 phons = 1 sone. A doubling of sones corresponds to a
doubling of loudness. However, because broadcasters were accustomed
to working in decibel units, Jones and Torick chose to map loudness on a
LED ladder display encompassing –20 to +5 dB in 0.5 dB increments, with
the understanding that the perceived loudness doubles every 10 dB at
loudness levels typically heard by broadcast audiences.
The J & T meter is monophonic. Psychoacoustic studies indicate that
when multiple acoustic sources are present in a room, loudness is most
accurately expressed by summing the power in the sources. For example,
driving two loudspeakers with identical program produces 3 dB higher
loudness than a single speaker produces. Therefore, to extend the J & T
algorithm to surround reproduction, we implement one eight-filter filterbank
for each channel and compute RMS sums of the outputs of corresponding
filters in each channel before these sums are applied to the
eight nonlinear lowpass filters. As in the monophonic J & T algorithm,
the sum of these lowpass filters drives a second nonlinear filter, which
drives the display.
Calibrated Bypass Test Mode
A BYPASS Test Mode is available to transparently pass line-up tones generated earlier
in the system. It will also pass program material, with no gain reduction or protection
against overmodulation. It can transparently pass any line-up tone applied
to its input up to about 130% output modulation, at which point clipping may occur.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INTRODUCTION 1-21
BYPASS is not appropriate for normal on-air use because switching to and from it
will usually cause clicks or other program disruptions and because it does not protect
against inadvertent output clipping. To defeat the dynamics processing on-air
(which might be desired when switching from a local to a network program, for example),
use the PASS-THROUGH factory preset or a user preset derived from the PASS-
THROUGH factory preset.
Calibrated Line-up Tones
To facilitate matching the output level of the 8685 to the transmission system that it
is driving, the 8685 contains a test tone oscillator that produces sine waves at 8685’s
outputs. You can adjust the frequency and modulation level of the built-in line-up
tone via the front panel or PC Remote software, and you can specify which outputs
emit the tone. Outputs that do not emit the tone are automatically set to BYPASS,
which facilitates using the tone oscillator as a sinewave source to test the 8685—use
a cable to connect an output that is emitting the tone to an input that is in BYPASS
mode. (See step 4 on page 4-11 for an example.) You can use the front panel, the
PC Remote software, or the opto-isolated remote control interface ports to activate
the Test Tone.
Setting Output/Modulation Levels
In a perfect world, one could set the peak level at OPTIMOD 8685’s output to 0 dBfs.
However, there are several potential problems that may make it desirable to set the
modulation level slightly lower.
• First is asynchronous re-sampling, which we have discussed earlier in this chapter.
(See page 1-14.) If any digital processing that causes its output samples to be
asynchronous to its input samples is used after OPTIMOD 8685’s output, this can
cause the peak levels of individual samples to increase above the nominal
threshold of limiting. This increase is typically less than 0.5dB.
• Second is additional processing, like equalization. Equalization that applies
boosts at certain frequencies is very likely to add peak level and thus cause clipping.
However, equalization that attenuates certain frequencies can also cause
overshoots because of added phase shifts. So be wary of any equalization and allow
headroom to accommodate it.
• Third is headroom in lossy data compression systems. A well-designed perceptual
encoder will accept samples up to 0dBfs and will have enough internal headroom
to avoid clipping. However, there is no guarantee that receiver manufacturers
or decoder providers will implement perceptual decoders with sufficient
headroom to avoid clipping overshoots. Such overshoots are the inevitable side
effect of increasing the quantization noise in the channel, and can be as large as
3-4dB. Most perceptual encoder algorithms are designed to have unity gain from
input to output. So if peak levels at the input frequently come up to 0dBfs, peak
levels at the output will frequently exceed 0dBfs (and will be clipped) unless the
decoder algorithm is adjusted to have less than unity gain.

1-22
INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 8685
Canny engineers familiarize themselves with the performance of real-world receivers
and reduce the peak modulation of the transmissions if it turns out that most receivers
are clipping due to perceptual encoding overshoots. Our experience to date
suggests that allowing 3dB headroom will prevent audible overshoot-induced clipping
in low bite-rate systems (e.g., 32 kbps streams), while 1.5 dB is adequate for
128kbps and above. While some clipping may still occur, it will have a very low duty
cycle and will almost certainly be inaudible.
Streaming and Netcasting Applications
This section was written in mid 2008. As the state of the art in netcasting is changing
with ferocious rapidity, we expect it to become outdated quickly. Please check
Orban’s web site, www.orban.com, for newer information.
Using OPTIMOD 8685 in Streaming Applications
You need an audio source connection (AES3id digital or SPDIF digital for the base
configuration; these options plus HD-SDI audio channels when the optional HD-SDI
module is installed). The 8685 AES3id inputs can accept any sample rate from 20 to
96 kHz. You can also use any stream available within the computer’s internal WAVE
audio system, like a digital playout system. If you use the computer’s WAVE audio
system, you will need a sound card with full duplex capability along with digital inputs
and outputs. Connect the digital output of the sound card to the 8685’s digital
input and connect the 8685’s digital output to the input of the sound card.
You will ordinarily connect the signal that the sound card receives to the input of an
encoder application, like Orban’s Opticodec-PC. You then apply the encoded output
of the encoder to a netcast server application, which may operate on the same machine
as the encoder, or on a different machine on your network. In the latter case,
you will route the encoded audio to the netcast server application through your
network.
See Processing for Low Bit Rate Codecs on page 3-5.
Loudness
You can expect a significant increase in loudness from OPTIMOD 8685 processing by
comparison to most unprocessed audio.
An exception is recently mastered CDs, which may have already been aggressively
processed for loudness when they were mastered.
In radio broadcasting, it is generally believed that loudness relative to other stations
attracts an audience that perceives the station as being more powerful than its
competition. We expect that the same subliminal psychology will also hold true in
netcasting.
For sound-with-picture applications, you can use Dialnorm and one of the 8685’s
“TV” presets to standardize loudness so that it is consistent with other transmissions.
We recommend setting Dialnorm to –24 dB, which is consistent with the ATSC A/85
2009 recommendation and acceptably close to the EBU R 128 recommendation,
which specifies –23 dB.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INTRODUCTION 1-23
Choosing your Encoder
The state of the art in encoder technology is rapidly changing. At this writing, the
most efficient audio encoder technology available is MPEG4 HE-AACv2, which also
has the advantage of being standards-based. Orban is the first provider of this technology
for streaming audio applications with Opticodec-PC 1010.
Be aware that different encoders are optimized for different bit rates, so you should
match your encoder to your potential audience. An encoder appropriate for a dialup
rate of 20kb/sec may not be optimum for ISDN, DSL, or E-1/T-1 rates. This makes it
necessary to use more than one algorithm to optimally serve audiences with these
disparate connection speeds.
MPEG-1 Layer 3 has become a de-facto standard for distribution of non-streaming,
high fidelity audio on the Internet, although HE-AACv2, as used in Opticodec-PC, is
far more efficient. Thanks to the Apple iPod®, AAC/MP4/M4A is rapidly becoming
the de-facto standard for downloadable music.
OPTIMOD 8685 is well matched to AAC, HE-AAC, and MP3. It can effectively preprocess
audio intended for playback from either format. If you decide to use MP3,
choose your MP3 encoder wisely, as not all MP3 encoders are created equal — they
provide different levels of quality for a given bitrate.
EAS Transmission
In normal operation, 8685 audio processing may not provide the minimum modulation
level required by EAS Emergency Alert System (EAS) standards. It may therefore
be necessary to defeat the 8685’s dynamics processing during the broadcast of EAS
tones and data.
The LOOK-AHEAD LIMITER preset provides an easy way to do this. (You could also use
the PASS-THROUGH preset.) If you set the level of your EAS message generator appropriately,
simply recall the LOOK-AHEAD LIMITER preset, run the test, and then recall
the previous processing preset. (Presets can be recalled via the front panel, PC Remote,
the 8685’s Ethernet terminal server, clock-based automation, and GPI.)
If it is impractical to set the level of the EAS message generator to work correctly
with the fixed throughput gain provided in factory LOOK-AHEAD LIMITER preset, you
can instead edit the LOOK-AHEAD LIMITER preset’s throughput gain to set the correct
modulation level. To set the gain, adjust the preset’s GAIN control, which is available
in Intermediate Modify and Advanced Modify. When you are satisfied, save the result
as a User Preset. See Customizing the 8685’s Sound on page 3-16
PC Control and Security Passcode
PC software control provides access to OPTIMOD 8685 via network, modem or direct
(null modem cable) connection, with computers running Windows 2000, XP, or Vista.
PC access is permitted only with a valid user-defined passcode.

1-24
INTRODUCTION ORBAN MODEL 8685
PC remote control can be ended from the 8685’s front panel; this feature effectively
prevents simultaneous remote and local control.
See Security and Passcode Programming (starting on page 2-40) for more detail.
Warranty, User Feedback
User Feedback
We are very interested in your comments about this product. We will carefully review
your suggestions for improvements to either the product or the manual. Please
email us at custserv@orban.com.
LIMITED WARRANTY
[Valid only for products purchased and used in the United States]
Orban warrants Orban products against defects in material or workmanship for a
period of two years from the date of original purchase for use, and agrees to repair
or, at our option, replace any defective item without charge for either parts or labor.
IMPORTANT: This warranty does not cover damage resulting from accident, misuse
or abuse, lack of reasonable care, the affixing of any attachment not provided with
the product, loss of parts, or connecting the product to any but the specified receptacles.
This warranty is void unless service or repairs are performed by an authorized
service center. No responsibility is assumed for any special, incidental, or consequential
damages. However, the limitation of any right or remedy shall not be effective
where such is prohibited or restricted by law.
Simply take or ship your Orban products prepaid to our service department. Be sure
to include a copy of your sales slip as proof of purchase date. We will not repair
transit damage under the no-charge terms of this warranty. Orban will pay return
shipping. (See Technical Support on page 5-10.)
No other warranty, written or oral, is authorized for Orban Products.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may have other rights that vary
from state to state. Some states do not allow the exclusion of limitations of incidental
or consequential damages or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts,
so the above exclusions and limitations may not apply to you.
INTERNATIONAL WARRANTY
Orban warrants Orban products against evident defects in material and workmanship
for a period of two years from the date of original purchase for use. This warranty
does not cover damage resulting from misuse or abuse, or lack of reasonable

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INTRODUCTION 1-25
care, or inadequate repairs performed by unauthorized service centers. Performance
of repairs or replacements under this warranty is subject to submission of this Warranty/Registration
Card, completed and signed by the dealer on the day of purchase,
and the sales slip. Shipment of the defective item is for repair under this warranty
will be at the customer’s own risk and expense. This warranty is valid for the original
purchaser only.
EXTENDED WARRANTY
Any time during the initial two-year Warranty period (but not thereafter), you may
purchase a three-year extension to the Warranty (yielding a total Warranty period
of five years) by remitting to Orban ten percent of the gross purchase price of your
Orban product. This offer applies only to new Orban products purchased from an
authorized Orban Dealer. To accept the extended five-year warranty, please sign and
date below, and fax this copy along with a copy of your original invoice (showing
date of purchase) to Orban Warranty Extension at +1 480.403.8314.
I ACCEPT THE EXTENDED FIVE-YEAR WARRANTY
__________________________________________________________________________
DATE______________________________________________________________________
MODEL NUMBER: 8685
SERIAL NUMBER____________________________________________________________

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-1
Section 2
Installation
Installing the 8685
Allow about 2 hours for installation.
Installation consists of: (1) unpacking and inspecting the 8685, (2) checking the line
voltage setting, fuse, and power cord, (3) mounting the 8685 in a rack, (4) connecting
inputs, outputs and power, (5) optional connecting of remote control leads and
(6) optional connecting of computer interface control leads.
When you have finished installing the 8685, proceed to “Quick Setup,” on page 2-8.
1. Unpack and inspect.
A) If you note obvious physical damage, contact the carrier immediately to make
a damage claim. Packed with the 8685 are:
Quantity Item
1 Operating Manual
2 Line Cords (domestic, European)
2 Fuses (½ A-250V Slow-Blow for 115V; 250 mA-250V for 230V)
2 Fuse holders (gray for 115V fuses and black for 230V fuses)
4 Rack-mounting screws, 10-32 x ¾—with washers, #10
1 Ethernet crossover cable
1 PC Remote Software CD
B) Save all packing materials! If you should ever have to ship the 8685 (e.g., for
servicing), it is best to ship it in the original carton with its packing materials
because both the carton and packing material have been carefully designed
to protect the unit.
C) Complete the Registration Card and return it to Orban. (please)
The Registration Card enables us to inform you of new applications, performance
improvements, software updates, and service aids that may be
developed, and it helps us respond promptly to claims under warranty
without our having to request a copy of your bill of sale or other proof
of purchase. Please fill in the Registration Card and send it to us today.
(The Registration Card is located after the cover page).

2-2
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
Customer names and information are confidential and are not sold to
anyone.
2. Check the line voltage, fuse and power cord.
DO NOT connect power to the unit yet!
A) Check the Voltage Select switch. This is on the rear panel.
The 8685 is shipped from the factory with the Voltage Select switch set to
the 230V position. Check and set the Voltage Select switch to your local
voltage requirements. To change the operating voltage, set the Voltage
Select to 115V (for 90-130V) or 230V (for 200-250V) as appropriate.
B) Install the proper fuse and fuse holder, per your country’s standards.
The 8685 is shipped from the factory with the fuse and fuse holder removed.
Select the appropriate fuse holder and fuse from the supplied
parts in the accessory kit. Use the gray fuse holder for domestic/115V operation,
or the black fuse holder for European/230V operation. For safety,
use ½ A-250 V Slow-Blow for 115V and 250mA-250V for 230V for 230V.
TYPE 18/3 SVT COR, TYP
(3 x .82 mm 2 )
PLUG FOR
115 VAC
(USA)
TYPE H05VV - F - 0.75
PLUG FOR
230 VAC
(EUROPEAN)
CONDUCTOR
WIRE COLOR
NORMAL ALT
L LINE BROWN
N NEUTRAL BLUE
E EARTH GND GREEN-YELLOW
CONDUCTOR WIRE COLOR
BLACK
WHITE
GREEN
L LINE BROWN
N NEUTRAL BLUE
E EARTH GND GREEN-YELLOW
Figure 2-1: AC Line Cord Wire Standard)
C) Check the power cord.
AC power passes through an IEC-standard mains connector and an RF filter
designed to meet the standards of all international safety authorities.
The power cord is terminated in a “U-ground” plug (USA standard), or
CEE7/7 plug (Continental Europe), as appropriate to your 8685’s Model
Number. The green/yellow wire is connected directly to the 8685 chassis.
If you need to change the plug to meet your country’s standard and you
are qualified to do so, see Figure 2-1. Otherwise, purchase a new mains
cord with the correct line plug attached.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-3
3. Mount the 8685 in a rack.
The 8685 requires three standard rack units (5 inches/12.7 cm).
There should be a good ground connection between the rack and the 8685 chassis—check
this with an ohmmeter to verify that the resistance is less than 0.5Ω.
It is wise to allow one rack unit of free space for ventilation above and below the
unit. Mounting the unit over large heat-producing devices (like a vacuum-tube
power amplifier) may shorten component life and is not recommended. Ambient
temperature should not exceed 45°C (113°F) when equipment is powered.
Equipment life will be extended if the unit is mounted away from sources of vibration,
like large blowers and is operated as cool as possible.
4. Connect inputs and outputs.
See the hookup and grounding information on the following pages.
TOPIC PAGE
AES3id Digital Inputs and Output ..............................................................2-6
HD-SDI Input and Output............................................................................2-7
Analog Audio Output..................................................................................2-7
Wordclock/AES11id Sync Input ...................................................................2-7
Power Ground ..............................................................................................2-8
5. Connect remote control interface. (optional)
For a full listing of 8685’s extensive GPI remote control provisions, refer to
Remote Control Interface Programming on page 2-54.
Optically isolated remote control connections are terminated in a type DB-25
male connector located on the rear panel. It is wired according to Figure 2-2. To
select the desired function, apply a 5-12V AC or DC pulse between the appropriate
REMOTE INTERFACE terminals. The (−) terminals can be connected together
and then connected to ground at pin 1 to create a Remote Common. A currentlimited
+12VDC source is available on pin 25. If you use 48V, connect a 2kΩ
±10%, 2-watt carbon composition resistor in series with the Remote Common or
the (+) terminal to provide current limiting.
In a high-RF environment, these wires should be short and should be run
through foil-shielded cable, with the shield connected to CHASSIS GROUND at
both ends.
6. Connect tally outputs (optional)
See the schematic on page 6-42.
The 8685 supports two hardware tally outputs, which are NPN open-collector
and operate with respect to pin 1 (common). Therefore, the voltage applied to
the load (like a relay or optoisolator) must be positive. You can use the 12 VDC
source on pin 25 to drive the high side of the load, taking into account the fact
that the voltage on pin 25 is current limited by a 310 Ω resistor.

2-4
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
PIN ASSIGNMENT
1. COMMON
2. REMOTE 1+
3. REMOTE 2+
4. REMOTE 3+
5. REMOTE 4+
6. REMOTE 5+
7. REMOTE 6+
8. REMOTE 7+
9. REMOTE 8+
10. TALLY 1
11. TALLY 2
12. N/C
13. POWER COMMON
14. REMOTE 1-
15. REMOTE 2-
16. REMOTE 3-
17. REMOTE 4-
18. REMOTE 5-
19. REMOTE 6-
20. REMOTE 7-
21. REMOTE 8-
22-24. N/C
25. +12 VOLTS DC
REMOTE INTERFACE
Figure 2-2: Wiring the 25-pin Remote Interface Connector
The tally outputs are protected against reverse polarity.
To avoid damaging the 8685, limit the current into a tally output to
30 mA. DO NOT connect a tally output directly to a low-impedance voltage
source! The tally outputs are not protected against this abuse and the
output transistors are likely to burn out. When driving a relay or other inductive
load, connect a diode in reverse polarity across the relay coil to
protect the driver transistors from reverse voltage caused by inductive
kickback.
Note that the tally outputs have no special RFI protection. Therefore, it is wise to
use shielded cable to make connections to them.
See step 22 on page 2-37 for instructions on programming the tally outputs.
7. Connect to a computer
You can connect to a computer via the 8685’s serial connector or via an Ethernet
network. See Networking and Remote Control on page 2-56 and Installing 8685
PC Remote Control Software on page 2-62 for more details.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-5
8685 Rear Panel
[Note: The 8685’s front panel is described starting on page 3-1.]
The Power Cord is detachable and is terminated in a “U-ground” plug (USA standard),
or CEE7/7 plug (Continental Europe), as appropriate to your 8685’s Model
Number.
An RS-232 (Terminal) Computer Interface, labeled SERIAL PORT, is provided to
connect the 8685 to IBM PC-compatible computers to support ASCII terminal commands,
Orban’s PC Remote software, or ppp connections. This port is labeled SERIAL
1.
Two RS-485 Serial Ports can accept and emit Dolby AC3 metadata that follows the
SMPTE Rdd06-2008 standard.
These ports are labeled SERIAL 2 AND SERIAL 3. You can use these ports to
convey DIALNORM to a Dolby Digital encoder (like Dolby’s DP-569) automatically.
See Conveying Metadata on page 2-15.
A Remote Interface Connector (GPI connector) allows you to connect the 8685 to
your existing transmitter remote control or other simple contact-closure control devices.
The 8685 remote control supports user-programmable selection of up to eight
optically isolated inputs for any one of the following parameters: recalling any factory-
or user presets, selecting tone or bypass modes, recalling Setups, and clock synchronization.
(See Remote Control Interface Programming on page 2-54.) The 8685
remote control accepts a DB-25 connector.
The Ethernet Port accepts a 10 Mb/second or 100 Mb/second Ethernet connection
terminated with an RJ45 connector. Because of its speed compared to the RS-232
port, Ethernet is the preferred method of connecting the 8685 to PC Remote.
Digital AES3id Inputs and AES3id Outputs support digital audio signals through
BNC connectors. Hardware inputs and outputs each carry two audio channels.
CHASSIS LABEL
DB-9 GENDER
FORMAT
PINOUT
1 �
2 �
3 �
4 �
5 �
6 �
7 �
8 �
9 �
SERIAL 1
Male
RS-232
DCD
S IN
S OUT
DTR
Ground
DSR
RTS
CTS
NC
SERIAL 2
Female
RS-485
Shield
TX A data out -
RX B data in +
Ground
NC
Ground
TX B data out +
RX A data in -
Shield
Table 2-1: Serial Port Pin Identification
SERIAL 3
Female
RS-485
Shield
TX A data out -
RX B data in +
Ground
NC
Ground
TX B data out +
RX A data in -
Shield

2-6
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
Analog Outputs are mainly provided for monitoring various audio signals through
XLR-type connectors. However, because of low tilt and overshoot they can also drive
transmitters while maintaining tight peak control.
Word clock/AES11id Sync Input is provided on a female BNC connector.
Optional HD-SDI Input and Output supporting SD-SDI (per SMPTE 259M); 1.5
Gbit/s HD-SDI (per SMPTE 292M; up to 720p and 1080i) and 3.0 Gbit/s single-wire
HD-SDI (per SMPTE 424M; 1080p) are provided on two female BNC connectors. See
Optional HD-SDI Input/Output Interface Module on page 6-3.
Video Sync Input supporting SMPTE 274M and SMPTE 296M is provided on a
female BNC connector on the optional HD-SDI module.
Input and Output Connections
AES3id Digital Inputs and Outputs
The base unit has five AES3id audio inputs and six AES3id audio outputs, while the
optional HD-SDI module instead has three AES3id inputs and three AES3id outputs.
The inputs and outputs are all equipped with sample rate converters and can operate
at 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2, and 96 kHz. You can force the output sample rate to be
genlocked to signal appearing at either the word clock/AES11id sync input or the
audio input. The output can also synchronize to the 8685’s internal clock.
Inputs and outputs follow the AES3id standard. This specifies 75Ω unbalanced
coaxial cable, terminated in male BNC connectors. It is suitable for
very long cable runs (up to 1000 meters).
If you wish to connect these inputs and outputs to an AES3 balanced
connection, it is wise to insert a 110Ω/75Ω balun transformer between
the AES3 and AES3id sides of the connection to ensure best signal integrity.
The digital input clip level is fixed at 0 dB relative to the maximum digital
word. The maximum digital input will make the 8685 input meters display
0dB. The reference level is adjustable using the DI REF control.
The 8685’s internal sample rate is 48 kHz. Because of “asynchronous resampling,”
any output sample rate other than 48 kHz/internal sync can
introduce overshoots.
If you need to use an STL with 32 kHz sample rate (because that is all that
is available), you will achieve lowest overshoot by setting the 8685’s internal
bandwidth to 15 kHz. That way, the 8685’s peak limiter operates
on a signal with 15 kHz bandwidth and subsequent sample rate conversion
will not add overshoot caused by spectral truncation.
For a discussion of sync issues, see Sample Frequency Synchronization on
page 1-14.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-7
HD-SDI Input and Output (optional)
The optional HD-SDI input/output supports SD-SDI (per SMPTE 259M); 1.5 Gbit/s HD-
SDI (per SMPTE 292M; up to 720p and 1080i) and 3.0 Gbit/s single-wire HD-SDI (per
SMPTE 424M; 1080p). Only audio channels 1 through 8 are supported; these can be
routed to and from several destinations (see Table 2-2: Routing Switcher Sources and
Destinations on page 2-23). See Optional HD-SDI Input/Output Interface Module on
page 6-3 for a detailed specification.
The HD-SDI input/output has a hard-wire relay bypass that connects the input BNC
connector directly to the output BNC connector automatically when no power is
connected to the 8685 and if several classes of faults occur in the 8685’s circuitry.
Wordclock/AES11id Sync Input
The sync input accepts a standard 5V p-p squarewave 1 x word clock signal (a
squarewave at the sampling frequency) or an AES11id signal, automatically detected.
A menu item allows you to synchronize the output sample frequency to the
frequency present at the sync. The connector is a female BNC with the shell
grounded to chassis.
To permit daisy-chaining sync signals, the input impedance is greater than 1 KΩ. If
the 8685 is the last device driven by the sync coaxial cable, you should terminate it
by using a BNC Tee connector and a 75Ω BNC terminator. This will prevent performance-degrading
reflections in the cable. This is required for both word clock and
AES11id operation.
Analog Audio Output
• We recommend using two-conductor foil-shielded cable (like Belden 8451 or
equivalent) for the analog output connections because signal current flows
through the two conductors only. The shield does not carry signal and is used
only for shielding.
• Analog output connectors are XLR-type connectors. There are two connectors.
These are intended for monitoring and troubleshooting. You can specify which
signals (LF, RF, C, LS, RS, LFE, LB, RB, STEREO L, STEREO R, DOWNMIX L,
DOWNMIX R, LF/RF, C, LS/RS, LB/RB, STEREO, or DOWNMIX) drive these outputs.
In the XLR-type connectors, pin 1 is CHASSIS GROUND, while pin 2 and
pin 3 are a balanced, floating pair. This wiring scheme is compatible with
any studio-wiring standard: If pin 2 or 3 is considered LOW, the other pin
is automatically HIGH.
• Electronically balanced and floating outputs simulate a true transformer output.
The source impedance is 50Ω. The output is capable of driving loads of 600Ω or
higher; the 100% modulation level is adjustable with the AO 100% control over
a –6dBu to +24dBu range. The outputs are EMI suppressed.

2-8
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
• If an unbalanced output is required (to drive unbalanced inputs of other equipment),
it should be taken between pin 2 and pin 3 of the XLR-type connector.
Connect the LOW pin of the XLR-type connector (#3 or #2, depending on your
organization’s standards) to ground; take the HIGH output from the remaining
pin. No special precautions are required even though one side of the output is
grounded.
• At the 8685’s output (and at the output of other equipment in the system), do
not connect the cable’s shield to the CHASSIS GROUND terminal (pin 1) on the
XLR-type connector. Instead, connect the shield to the chassis ground at the input
destination. Connect the red (or white) wire to the pin on the XLR-type connector
(#2 or #3) that is considered HIGH by the standards of your organization.
Connect the black wire to the pin on the XLR-type connector (#3 or #2) that is
considered LOW by the standards of your organization.
Power Ground
• Ground the 8685 chassis through the third wire in the power cord. Proper
grounding techniques never leave equipment chassis unconnected to
power/earth ground. A proper power ground is essential for safe operation. Lifting
a chassis from power ground creates a potential safety hazard.
Quick Setup
The 8685’s Quick Setup feature provides a guided, systematic procedure for setting
up the 8685. It should be adequate for most users without special or esoteric requirements.
Following this section, you can find more detailed information regarding
setup outside the Quick Setup screens. Mostly, you will not need this extra information.
For the following adjustments, use LOCATE (the green joystick, between ESCAPE and
ENTER) to select parameters. After you have highlighted the desired parameter on
the screen, use the front panel control knob to adjust the parameter settings as desired.
• The 8685 has input and output routing switchers that connect the 8685’s physical
inputs and output to the logical inputs and outputs of the 8685’s 7.1 surround
and four 2.0 audio processors, all of which are active simultaneously. (If you are
processing 5.1 surround, do not feed program material to the Lb and Rb inputs
of the surround processor.)
Quick Setup allows you to retain a custom routing setup or to use the factory default.
In the base unit AES3id input #1=Lf/Rf, #2=C/LFE, #3= Ls/Rs, #4=Lb/Rb (applies
to 7.1 processing only), and #5=Stereo (2.0 processor #1). This arrangement
is consistent with the Dolby DP-569 Dolby Digital Encoder’s default I/O routing
setting and with ATSC A/54A.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-9
If the optional HD-SDI module is installed, the default routing for the HD-SDI’s
audio channels is #1=Lf, #2=Rf, #3=C, #4=LFE, #5=Ls, #6=Rs, #7=Lst (2.0 processor
#1), #8=Rst (2.0 processor #1). The inputs and outputs of the remaining three 2.0
processors (#2, #3, and #4) are connected to AES3id inputs and outputs 1/2, 3/4,
and 5/6 respectively. The surround processor’s Lb and Rb inputs and outputs are
not connected. This arrangement accommodates 5.1 surround processing for the
audio stream carrying the primary language and 2.0 processing for an audio
stream carrying a secondary language. You can change this routing in the 8685’s
routing switcher as needed. You must do this if you are installing the optional
Penteo upmixer, which is inserted between the 8685’s three AES3id inputs and
outputs—see step 5 on page 2-23.
In addition, a C/LF MAPPING control, located in the INPUT/OUTPUT 4 screen, allows
you to swap the C and LFE assignments. (See Table 2-2: Routing Switcher Sources
and Destinations on page 2-23.)
With the 8685’s factory default Setup, the first 2.0 processor operates in STEREO
mode and its output is not mixed into the surround processor’s output. We recommend
using the default routing for Quick Setup and customizing it after you
run Quick Setup.
1. From the pop-up Menu display, Locate to System Setup, then press the
Enter button.
If the pop-up Menu isn’t onscreen, press the control knob in.
2. From the System Setup screen, Locate to the Quick Setup icon, then
press the Enter button.
Quick Setup presents a guided sequence of screens into which you must insert information
about your particular requirements.
Each Quick Setup page is titled in the top right corner (e.g., page 1 is QUICK
SETUP 1).
3. Set time and date.
A) LOCATE to the Time & Date screen (SYSTEM SETUP > QUICK SETUP 2).
B) Choose Time Format as desired (either 24-hour time or 12-hour AM / PM-style
time).
C) Set hours, minutes, and seconds, in that order, using a 24-hour format for entering
hours even if you have set the time format to 12-hour.
Seconds will stop advancing when you set hours and minutes. So set seconds
last.
D) Choose the desired date format.

2-10
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
E) Set today’s date.
F) If you want the clock to reset itself automatically to conform to Daylight Saving
Time (Summer Time), use the DAYLIGHT SAVING > MONTH/WEEK and
STANDARD TIME MONTH/WEEK. to match the daylight saving and standard times
in your area. If you do not wish to use this feature, leave the DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
and STANDARD TIME fields set to OFF.
Note that the clock will set itself automatically if you have set the 8685 to
synchronize to an Internet timeserver. See Synchronizing Optimod to a
Network Timeserver in page 2-59.
4. Decide whether you will keep the current Input/Output routing configuration.
LOCATE to the Time & Date screen (SYSTEM SETUP > QUICK SETUP 3).
To accommodate users who are re-running Quick Setup after they have made
customized routing assignments, it is possible to keep the current Input/Output
routing configuration or to use the factory default configuration.
5. Set the surround and 2.0 maximum low pass filter frequency as appropriate
to your application.
The audio bandwidth of the 8685’s surround and 2.0 processors (10.0 to 20.0 kHz
in 1.0 kHz steps) can be set in three places: (1) in the active Setup, (2) in the EQ
page of the Modify screen, and (3) by remote control. The 8685’s bandwidth is
always the lowest of these three settings. The frequency in Setup is a technical
parameter that determines the highest bandwidth available. The installing engineer
should set it to complement the sample rate of the digital system being
driven by the 8685. For example, if the 8685 is driving a system with a 32kHz
sample rate, set the 2.0 MAX LOW PASS FILTER to 15.0 KHZ. That way, a setting of
20 kHz elsewhere will not cause excessive bandwidth and aliasing because the
8685 will automatically override it with the MAX LPF setting.
For ATSC digital television transmission (which uses 48 kHz sample rate), set the
2.0 MAX LOW PASS FILTER to 20 KHZ.
The 2.0 MAX LOW PASS FILTER for the surround and 2.0 channel processing
are independent.
A) LOCATE to the Lowpass Filter screen (SYSTEM SETUP > QUICK SETUP 4).
B) Set the 2.0 MAX LOW PASS FILTER control as required.
6. Set surround and 2.0 external AGC mode.
Most of the processing structures in the 8685 control level with a preliminary
AGC (Automatic Gain Control). In typical 8685 installations, there is no AGC upstream
from the 8685. However, if you are using a suitable Automatic Gain Control
ahead of the 8685 (to protect an STL, for instance), the AGC in the 8685
should be defeated. This is so that the two AGCs do not “fight” each other and
so they do not simultaneously increase gain, resulting in increased noise.
A) LOCATE to Studio Configuration screen (SYSTEM SETUP > QUICK SETUP 5).

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-11
B) Set the Surround External AGC mode.
• Set the field to YES if you have an external AGC installed at your studio
feeding the studio-to-transmitter link. This setting appropriately defeats
the 8685’s AGC for all presets.
• If you do not have an external AGC installed, set the field to NO; this setting
allows the selected preset to determine the 8685 AGC status.
C) Set the 2.0 External AGC mode (see above for choices).
7. Set surround and 2.0 reference levels.
The Reference Level screen allows you to match the 8685’s processing to the
normal operating level expected at the 8685’s input so the 8685’s AGC can operate
in the range for which it was designed. If you know the reference VU or PPM
level (sometimes known as “lineup level”) that will be presented to the 8685, set
the SURROUND REFERENCE LEVEL to this level.
It is wise to verify your setting with the steps below, which also allow you to set
the reference level controls when you do not know the reference VU or PPM
level that will be presented to the 8685.
A) Feed normal program material to the 8685.
Play program material from your studio, peaking at normal program levels
(typically 0VU if your console uses VU meters).
B) LOCATE to the Reference Levels screen (SYSTEM SETUP > QUICK SETUP 6).
C) Adjust the SURROUND REFERENCE LEVEL so that the surround AGC meter reads
an average of 10 dB gain reduction.
[−40 to –10 dBFS (VU), or –33 to –3 dBFS (PPM)] in 0.5 dB steps.]
The DIGITAL REFERENCE LEVEL VU and PPM settings track each other with
an offset of 8 dB. This compensates for the typical indications with program
material of a VU meter versus the higher indications on a PPM.
D) If you will be using the 2.0 processors, adjust the 2.0 REFERENCE LEVEL so that
the 2.0 AGC meter reads an average of 10 dB gain reduction.
8. Set the surround and 2.0 output feeds and sample rates.
A) LOCATE to the Output Configuration screen (SYSTEM SETUP > QUICK SETUP 7).
B) Choose one of the following to feed the hardware outputs assigned to the
surround audio processing:
• MB+LIMIT (stereo enhancement, equalization, AGC, two-band or 5-Band
compression, loudness control, and look-ahead peak limiting). This setting
is correct for most applications, including driving a digital television transmitter.
It fully supports Dialnorm.
The three settings below do not support Dialnorm automatically:

2-12
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
• MULTIBAND (stereo enhancement, equalization, AGC, and two-band or 5-
Band compression, and loudness control without peak limiting).
• AGC+LIMIT (stereo enhancement, equalization, AGC, and look-ahead peak
limiting)
• AGC (stereo enhancement, equalization, and AGC without peak limiting)
If you set EXT AGC to YES in System Setup, this defeats the AGC. In this
case, choosing:
• MB+LIMIT results in stereo enhancement, equalization, two-band or 5-Band
compression, and loudness control with look-ahead limiting but without
AGC.
• MULTIBAND results in stereo enhancement, equalization, two-band or 5-
Band compression, and loudness control without AGC.
• AGC+LIM results in stereo enhancement, equalization, and look-ahead limiting.
• AGC causes the input signal to be passed to the analog output with no dynamics
processing (just stereo enhancement and equalization).
The only reason to use an output without peak limiting is if low delay is
needed, as the 8685’s sophisticated, low-IM peak limiter adds about 12
milliseconds of delay. Note that this is only true if a given output’s DELAY
parameter in System Setup is set to MINIMUM. If DELAY is set to any other
value, the 8685 will automatically add delay to ensure that the input/output
delay corresponds to your DELAY control setting. In digital
television applications, DELAY will usually be set to exactly one frame to
make it easy to retain AV- sync.
In digital radio and netcast applications, you might want to use a lowdelay
output to drive your studio monitor speakers as well as talent
headphones.
CAUTION: If an output is configured for no peak limiting, it can clip and
distort. If this happens, correct it by turning down the 8685’s MB LIMITER
DRIVE control (if you are using MULTIBAND mode) or AGC LIMITER DRIVE
control (if you are using AGC mode). Then save the result as a user preset.
Note that these control settings apply only to the active processing
preset. If you use more than one processing preset, you must adjust the
appropriate LIMITER DRIVE control for each and save each as a user preset.
C) Choose the source to feed the hardware outputs assigned to the 2.0 channel
audio processing (see above for the choices). All four 2.0 processors will be set
identcially.
D) Set the surround output sample rate to 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2, or 96 kHz. 48 kHz is
correct for digital television transmission.
The internal sample rate converter sets the rate at the 8685’s digital output.
This adjustment allows you to set the output sample rate to ensure
compatibility with equipment requiring a fixed sample rate. In all cases,
the 8685’s internal processing sample rate is 48 kHz.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-13
E) Set the 2.0 output sample rate to 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2, or 96 kHz.
9. Set surround and 2.0 output levels.
A) LOCATE to the Set Output Levels screen (SYSTEM SETUP > QUICK SETUP 8).
B) Set the SURROUND OUTPUT LEVEL control to the desired peak level in units of
dB with reference to digital full-scale. (Note: This control is labeled SURROUND
OUTPUT 100% in PC Remote.)
–2.0 dBfs is an appropriate value. It provides some headroom for any overshoots
introduced by equipment (like codecs) following the 8685.
Note that if a given output is fed with a non-limited signal (AGC or LIMIT), the
peak level will not be controlled tightly.
• IMPORTANT: In MB LIMIT mode, the 8685’s SURROUND OUTPUT LEVEL and
SURROUND OUTPUT LEVEL controls do not adjust loudness; they only set the
maximum peak level at the 8685’s output. This is to reduce the likelihood
of setup errors when the 8685 is driving a Dolby Digital channel. The active
DIALNORM value and the MB LIMITER DRIVE controls set output loudness.
• Regardless of the output mode, do not try to adjust loudness at the receiver
by using the 8685’s OUTPUT LEVEL controls. Use these controls only to
set output headroom. In MB+LIMIT mode, use the DIALNORM control to set
loudness. In MB mode, use the MB LIMITER DRIVE control in the active preset.
In AGC and AGC+LIMIT modes, use the AGC LIMITER DRIVE control in the active
preset.
• If you have readjusted any LIMITER DRIVE control (located in the MULTIBAND
MODIFY screens for the surround and 2.0 processing), you must save the result
as a user preset in order to avoid the possibility of losing your settings,
which will otherwise happen if you recall a different preset.
This will allow you to use the full amount of headroom available in the
transmission channel following the 8685 and, in digital television service,
will minimize or eliminate the need to apply peak limiting to the signal.
This is because the Dolby Digital system allows you to use the DIALNORM
metadata parameter to ensure that there is enough peak headroom
through the transmission system. For most digital television transmissions,
setting DIALNORM to –24 dB or below (i.e., closer to –31 dB) will ensure
that no peak limiting ever occurs, assuming that you set loudness
with the 8685’s LIMITER DRIVE control to make the 8685’s Loudness Level
meter peak at 0 dB with typical dialog and set the 8685’s OUTPUT control
to –2.0 dBfs, which allows 2 dB of peak headroom for overshoots in the
AC3 codec.
C) Set the 2.0 OUTPUT control to the desired peak level in units of dB with reference
to digital full-scale.
D) Set the ANALOG OUTPUT control to the desired peak level in units of dBu,
where 0 dBu = 0.775 v r.m.s.

2-14
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
The 8685’s two analog output channels are most commonly used for
monitoring. Nevertheless, they produce low overshoot and can be used
to drive a transmission system with an analog input.
10. Set surround and 2.0 global Dialnorm values. (Do not skip this step!)
If you skip this step, your audio may be objectionably louder or quieter than
other stations’ audio.
The 8685 is designed to work smoothly with Dolby Digital. In essence, the Dolby
Digital Dialnorm metadata sets an invisible volume control that is cascaded with
the volume control in the consumer’s receiver. To produce the same loudness as
other properly set up transmission channels, the 8685 needs to be aware of the
Dialnorm value you are transmitting to the consumer. The 8685 uses this value in
two ways:
• It adjusts the sensitivity of the 8685’s Loudness Level meters so that when the
Loudness Level meters are peaking at 0 dB on speech material, loudness is correct
at the receiver. This means that you can use the 8685’s Loudness Level
meter as a reference if you are modifying a factory preset and want to ensure
correct loudness at the consumer’s receiver.
• It scales the output level of the 8685’s presets so that the level will be correct
for the Dialnorm value you are transmitting to the consumer. To do this, it
sets the gain of a hidden level control cascaded with the 8685’s LIMITER DRIVE
control. This gain adjustment is before the 8685’s look-ahead limiters and
OUTPUT 100% controls. This arrangement allows you to use the full headroom
of the Dolby Digital transmission channel regardless of the Dialnorm setting.
In addition, changing Dialnorm adds a hidden offset to the LOUDNESS
THRESHOLD control’s displayed setting, which ensures that the loudness controller’s
gain reduction does not change when DIALNORM is changed.
These scale factors adjust themselves automatically so that the loudness
of the consumer’s receiver is the same regardless of the settings of the
8685’s SURROUND OUTPUT 100% and 2.0 OUTPUT 100% controls, whose only
purpose is to set the 8685’s maximum peak output level with respect to
0 dBfs. This allows you to compensate for transmission channels that introduce
peak overshoots.
For example, if you change the SURROUND OUTPUT 100% control from
0 dBfs to –6 dBfs, the drive level into the look-ahead limiters automatically
increases by 6 dB. Meanwhile, the threshold of the loudness controller
and the sensitivity of the 8685’s Loudness Level meter decrease by 6
dB. Hence, the r.m.s. drive level into the Dolby Digital encoder stays the
same, the loudness controller produces the same amount of gain reduction,
and the Loudness Level meter continues to peak at 0 dB.
To change the 8685’s output loudness, adjust its DIALNORM value or adjust
the MB LIMITER DRIVE control in the active processing preset. Adjusting
DIALNORM changes loudness without changing the indication on the
8685’s Loudness Level meter and without changing the amount of gain
reduction in the loudness controller. Adjusting MB LIMITER DRIVE changes
both the Loudness Level meter’s indication and the amount of gain reduction
in the loudness controller.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-15
Each processing preset has a Dialnorm value that can override the global Dialnorm
values that you set in this step. To use the global Dialnorm value, be sure
that the active processing preset’s Dialnorm value is set to USE GLOBAL, which is
true of all Factory Presets except for the analog TV presets. In all cases, you must
ensure that the 8685’s active Dialnorm value matches the Dialnorm value you are
sending to consumers.
Setting the 8685’s active Dialnorm value:
A) LOCATE to the Set Dialnorm screen (SYSTEM SETUP > QUICK SETUP 9).
B) Set the SURROUND DIALNORM value so that it is the same as the Dialnorm value
you are transmitting to the consumer’s receiver.
Most broadcasting organizations have standardized on –24 or –25 dB.
Paragraph H.7 of ATSC Recommended Practice A/85:2009 recommends
–24 dB. (Strictly speaking, it recommends “–24 LKFS,” where LKFS is a
unit of measure for loudness when the ITU-R BS.1770 meter is used for
loudness measurement.)
If you are not driving a Dolby Digital system (in a netcasting application,
for example), you must choose an arbitrary value of Dialnorm. The 8685’s
processing was tuned for a nominal Dialnorm value of –19 dBfs and other
values of the 8685’s DIALNORM control produce hidden offsets in the MB
LIMITER DRIVE and LOUDNESS THRESHOLD controls, as described above.
If you are not using the 8685 to process a Dolby Digital transmission, –19
dBfs is a reasonable choice for the 8685’s DIALNORM. This splits the difference
between the SMPTE standard line-up level (–20 dBfs) and the EBU
standard line-up level (–18 dBfs). It offers a good tradeoff between headroom
and noise, particularly in 16-bit transmission channels.
As you set Dialnorm closer to –11 dB, loudness increases. Eventually, you
will start to see significant limiter gain reduction as the 8685’s masteringquality
look-ahead limiters work harder and harder prevent peak overload.
Above a certain Dialnorm value, the limiters will start to create audible
side effects as they create more and more gain reduction. Allowing
up to 6 dB of limiter gain reduction is usually safe, but the best sounding
limiter gain reduction is no gain reduction at all, so we advise taking advantage
of any available headroom in your transmission channel to
minimize the amount of look-ahead limiter gain reduction.
C) [Optional] Set the 2.0 DIALNORM value so that it is the same as the Dialnorm
value you are transmitting on your 2.0 channel stream, if any. This setting is
applied to all four 2.0 processors.
Conveying Metadata: All models of the 8685 can, via an SMPTE Rdd06-2008compliant
RS-485 serial connection, automatically convey their active surround
metadata value to a downstream Dolby Digital encoder like the Dolby DP-569,
which must be set up according to its operating instructions to receive and act
upon this input. This greatly reduces the possibility that operator error will cause
the wrong value of surround metadata to be transmitted to consumers.
Units equipped with the optional HD-SDI module can also receive and send
metadata via the HD-SDI VANC data per SMPTE 2020-2-2008 (Method-A) or
SMPTE 2020-3-2008 (Method-B) and, if equipped with the optional Dolby-E

2-16
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
modules, via a Dolby-E encoded bitstream (which is typically conveyed on audio
channels 1 and 2).
In the base unit, to emit an Rdd06-2008-compliant signal the 8685 must be receiving
a valid input RS-485 serial stream that is compliant with Rdd06-2008—this
is necessary to synchronize the output metadata to video frame boundaries per
the Dolby specification. In units equipped with the HD-SDI module, frame sync
can also use the SMPTE 274M/296M video reference input or the signal appearing
at the HD-SDI input.
When a valid input stream is present, the 8685 passes this stream unchanged to
its output except for the following modifications:
• The ac3_dialnorm word in the output metadata stream is reauthored so it is
the same as the 8685's active DIALNORM value.
• The ac3_dynrnge word in the output stream is set to 0, indicating that the
downstream AC3 encoder must reauthor the line-mode DRC metadata, following
the level compression profile found in the ac3_dynrng1 word in the
input metadata.
• The ac3_compre word in the output stream is set to 0, indicating that the
downstream AC3 encoder must reauthor the RF-mode DRC metadata, following
the level compression profile found in the ac3_compr1 word in the input
metadata.
Future software upgrades will add more functionality to the 8685’s handling
of metadata, including the ability to specify a different level compression
profile than that found in the input metadata, and the ability to
handle 2.0 metadata in addition to surround metadata.
To maintain sync when using metadata, it is important to set the 8685’s audio
delay to one frame of the video associated with the metadata. See step 14 on
page 2-19.
11. Choose a processing preset.
A) LOCATE to the Set Preset screen (SYSTEM SETUP > QUICK SETUP 10).
B) Turn the knob until your desired preset is highlighted at the top of the screen.
C) Press the ENTER button to put your desired preset on-air.
This step selects the processing to complement various program formats.
There are presets for radio-style and television-style applications. The latter
begin with “TV.”
The “TV xxxx” presets are tuned for strictly for digital television, while
the 2.0 parameters in the “TVA xxxx” presets are tuned to allow the 2.0
processing to be used for analog television transmissions that employ FM
aural carriers having 50μs or 75μs preemphasis. For instructions on how to
set up the 8685’s 2.0 processing for analog television, see step 11 on page
2-31.
After this step, you can always select a different processing preset, program
the 8685 to automatically change presets on a time/date schedule,

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-17
use a GPI input to trigger preset changes, modify presets to customize
your sound, and store these presets as User Presets.
Preset names are just suggestions. Feel free to audition different presets
and to choose those whose sound you prefer.
You can easily modify a preset later with the 8685’s one-knob LESS-MORE
feature. Refer to Section 3.
If you want the 8685’s surround and 2.0 processors to operate with different
presets, import a 2.0 preset into the active preset and save the
combination as a User Preset. Instructions for importing and editing a 2.0
preset are on page 3-25. Note that while the 2.0 and surround processors
can use different presets, all 2.0 processors must use the same preset.
Congratulations! You are now transmitting with your initial sound. Feel free to
read the material in Section 3 of this manual, which describes the various presets
and how you can customize them to achieve your desired signature sound.
Presets and Loudness: All 8685 TVxxxx presets are designed to produce
very similar loudness with speech and to do so regardless of the setting
of their LESS-MORE controls. Our goal was to allow these presets to be
used on-air without need for loudness adjustment, assuming that you
have told the 8685 what DIALNORM value you are transmitting to the consumer.
We set loudness partly by making appropriate compression
threshold and limiter drive adjustments, and partly by using the 8685’s
Loudness Controller.
Note that TVxxxx presets are designed for digital television. Do not confuse
these with the TVAxxxx presets, which should be used only when the
8685’s 2.0 processing is driving an analog television transmitter. (See step
11 on page 2-31 for instructions on how to configure your 8685 for analog
TV.)
We tuned the “Radio” presets to produce loudness that is approximately
the same as the TVxxxx presets. Unlike other Optimods, LESS-MORE adjustments
have minimal effect on loudness and mainly set the amount of
compression. Because the 8685’s loudness controller is defeated in the
“Radio” presets, loudness will not be as consistent from source to source
as it is with the TVxxxx presets.
You can use the 8685’s loudness controller to improve the loudness consistency
of a “Radio” preset. First, adjust the preset with LESS-MORE to
achieve the desired processing texture. Then activate the loudness controller
by setting the preset’s LOUDNESS THRESHOLD control to –10 dB,
which matches the loudness controller’s threshold to the active DIALNORM
value. For the best tradeoff between consistent loudness and potential
artifacts, adjust the MB LIMITER DRIVE control so that the loudness controller’s
gain reduction meter typically indicates 3 dB. You should see the
Loudness Level meter peaking around at 0 dB. When you have finished
your adjustments, save the result as a User Preset.
See also Setting Preset Loudness Correctly for Dolby Digital Transmission
on page 3-19.
This concludes the guided Quick Setup procedure. However, you may wish to set up
some other 8685 features. These are described in the following optional steps.

2-18
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
12. Complete Station ID (optional).
The Station ID is an optional setting that you can provide to name a given 8685.
The name can be up to eight characters long. It is used to identify your 8685 to
Orban’s 8685 PC Remote application and appears on the Main Screen when PC
Remote is controlling the 8685. It is also displayed on the Meters screen of the
8685 unit.
A) LOCATE to SETUP > PLACE/DATE/TIME > STATION IDENTIFIER (PLACE/DATE/TIME 3).
B) Use LOCATE to select each character in the ID and ENTER to confirm the selection.
C) When finished entering your name, LOCATE to SAVE. Then press ENTER.
D) When you select SAVE, you will return to the Setup main menu. If you press
ESCAPE, you can see the station name on the main screen.
13. Set up the 2.0 processors’ response to and transmission of AES3id status
bits (optional).
The default behavior of the 8685 is to ignore AES status bits because many pieces
of external equipment handle these incorrectly. However, the 8685 allows the
AES3 “channel mode” determine its 2.0 channel processing operating mode (stereo
or dual-mono). The AES3 channel mode specification provides for “twochannel
mode” (corresponding to 8685 dual-mono mode) with bits 1-4 in byte 1
in the pattern “0001,” and “stereophonic mode” (corresponding to 8685 stereo
mode) with these bits in the pattern “0100.”
The 8685 can also emit these status bits at its digital output to control downstream
equipment.
A) LOCATE to INPUT/OUTPUT > 2.0 OUT (INPUT/OUTPUT 3) and set the 2.0 OUTPUT
FORMAT to AES.
SPDIF cannot be used to handle status bit because the specification does
not allow it.
B) To enable the 8685 to change its operating mode in response to AES status
bits received at its AES input:
a) LOCATE to SYSTEM SETUP > NETWORK/REMOTE > AES STAT BITS
(NETWORK/REMOTE 4).
b) Set IN>MODE to ON.
Unless you are sure that upstream equipment will correctly format these
bits, set IN>MODE to OFF.
c) Make sure that the equipment driving the 8685 is formatting its output as
AES3. SPDIF will not work.
C) To send “two-channel mode” and “stereophonic mode” bits indicating the
8685's current operating mode, set MODE>OUT to ON.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-19
If this parameter is set to OFF, then the 8685 will output “0000” (“mode
not indicated’). This is the safest setting if you are uncertain whether
downstream equipment can respond appropriately to these bits.
14. Set the Processing Delay for a given signal path (optional).
[minimum], [30 fps], [29.97 fps], [25 fps], [24 fps], [33-50 ms in 1 ms increments]
You can set the delay through the surround and 2.0 processor paths independently.
This feature is usually used in sound-for-picture applications to add time
delay so that the input/output delay through a given processing path is exactly
one or two frames, using a variety of different standards. (Two frames are required
for 59.94/60 fps progressively scanned video.) The selections are MINIMUM
(depends on processing structure in use; typically between 20 and 23 ms), 30 fps,
29.97 fps (NTSC color video), 25 fps (most PAL video), and 24 fps (film). You can
also set the delay in 1 millisecond increments.
When equipped with the optional HD-SDI module, the 8685 offers video delay of
up to 11 frames. This can match the delays of the optional Penteo upmixer and
optional Dolby-E encode and decode modules.
LOCATE to I/O CALIB > SURROUND/2.0 OUTPUT and set the delay as required using
the SURROUND and 2.0 fields.
This control does not affect the delay to a given output if that output is
in AGC or MULTIBAND mode.
IMPORTANT: If the 8685 is processing Dolby metadata (via its serial or SDI connections),
you must set the 8685’s processing delay to match the frame rate of
the associated video. This is because the 8685 delays the metadata by exactly one
frame to comply with Dolby’s requirements for synchronization of the metadata
and video frames, so the audio must also be delayed by one frame to keep the
audio and metadata in sync.
To maintain video AV-sync if you are not using the 8685’s HD-SDI option, you
must delay the video by one frame elsewhere in your facility. The 8685’s optional
HD-SDI module will automatically delay the video by one frame, hence keeping
audio, video, and metadata in sync.
If the optional Dolby-E modules are installed and/or the optional Penteo upmixer
is in use, the HD-SDI module will add additional video delay to maintain AV sync.
You must set the VIDEO SYNC control to AUTO to enable this feature.
I/O Setup
The following material provides detailed instructions on how to set up the 8685. If
QUICK SETUP does not fully address your setup needs or if you wish to customize
your system beyond those provided with QUICK SETUP, then you may need the additional
information in the sections below. However, for most users, this material is
only for reference because QUICK SETUP has enabled them to set up the 8685 correctly.

2-20
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
For the following adjustments, use the LOCATE button to choose the parameter to be
adjusted and the knob to change its value.
Follow steps in order. Some later settings depend on earlier settings being correct.
1. Set the 2.0 maximum lowpass filter frequency as appropriate to your
application.
[10.0 kHz] to [20.0 kHz]; 1 kHz steps
The 2.0 processors’ lowpass filters are located before any dynamics processing
and affects all outputs equally. They are phase-linear FIR filters.
There is only one global bandwidth setting available for the 2.0 processors’
bandwidths; it is not possible to set the bandwidths of the individual 2.0 processors
independently.
The surround processing does not offer a lowpass filter because it is
unlikely to be used in applications that need bandwidth limiting below
20 kHz.
The 2.0 processors’ audio bandwidths can be set in the active Setup and in the
EQ pages of the Basic, Intermediate, and Advanced Modify screens. The latter allows
the active preset to determine the bandwidth so you can change the bandwidth
by recalling a User Preset.
The 2.0 processors’ bandwidth is always the lowest of these settings. The frequency
in I/O SETUP is a technical parameter that determines the highest bandwidth
available. The installing engineer should set it to be congruent with the
sample rate of the digital system that the 8685 is driving. For example, if the
8685 is driving a system with a 32 kHz sample rate, set the MAX LPF to 15.0 KHZ.
That way, a setting of 20 kHz elsewhere will not cause excessive bandwidth and
aliasing because the 8685 will automatically override it with the MAX LPF setting.
A) LOCATE to INPUT/OUTPUT > UTILITIES.
B) Using the 2.0 MAX LOW PASS FILTER control, set the maximum bandwidth for
the 2.0 processing.
C) (optional) Using the SAVE/SAVE AS > SETUP screen, save the resulting Setup.
This will allow you to recall it later. Even if you do not save the setup explicitly,
the 8685 will retain your settings (even after the unit is powered
off) until another Setup is recalled. However, it is wise to save Setups
formally so they cannot be overwritten accidentally.
2. Temporarily set the external AGC mode to “No.”
A) LOCATE to INPUT/OUTPUT > UTILITIES.
If you performed the previous step, you should be there already.
B) Set the SURROUND EXTERNAL AGC control to NO.
If you are using an external AGC before the 8685’s surround processing,
you should restore this setting to YES after the setup procedure is complete.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-21
C) Set the 2.0 EXTERNAL AGC control to NO.
If you are using an external AGC before the 8685’s 2.0 processing, you
should restore this setting to YES after the setup procedure is complete.
3. Set the routing between hardware inputs and processing inputs.
LOCATE to INPUT/OUTPUT > INP. ROUTING. This screen allows you to choose which
hardware inputs feed which processing inputs.
Because each AES3id hardware input receives two audio channels, you
can only route pairs of audio channels. The only exception is C/LFE. The
C/LFE MAPPING control, located in the INPUT/OUTPUT 4 screen, lets you
swap these two channels.
It is OK to use one hardware input to drive more than one processing input.
For example, hardware input 1/2 can drive both the 2.0 processing
and the Lf/Rf inputs to the surround processing.
If your 8685 is equipped with Option 1 (HD-SDI I/O), then the routing
switcher will include both the SDI and AES3id sources and destinations.
Refer to Table 2-2: Routing Switcher Sources and Destinations below.
For an explanation of the FALLBACK input, see step 21 on page 2-37.
4. Set the routing between processing outputs and hardware outputs.
LOCATE to INPUT/OUTPUT > OUT ROUTING and assign processing outputs to the
hardware outputs as desired. Refer to Table 2-2: Routing Switcher Sources and
Destinations below. The sources feeding the outputs are:
• Lf/Rf (left front/right front)
• C/LFE (center/low frequency effects)
The 8685’s audio processing treats C and LFE differently, so it is not possible
to pass the center input through the LFE processing channel and
vice-versa without seriously degrading the sound of the processing. The
input routing switcher allows you to swap the C and LFE channels. This is
appropriate if these are not assigned in the customary way on the AES or
SDI input, which is that “left” carries C and “right” carries LFE. You can
easily detect an accidental swap between dialog and LFE by observing
the 8685’s input level meters.
• Ls/Rs (left surround/right surround —the surround channels in 5.1 and 7.1)
• Lb/Rb (left back/right back —the rear channels in 7.1)
The 8685’s audio processing handles Ls and Lb the same, so it is possible
to swap these without compromising the sound of the processing. However,
the Ls/Rs and Lb/Rb processing channels are not functionally interchangeable
with the Lf and Rf channels.
• Lst/Rst (left stereo/right stereo — the outputs of the 2.0 processing chains)

2-22
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
• Ldm/Rdm (left downmix/right downmix — the outputs of the surround processing,
downmixed to stereo according to the settings in the INPUT/OUTPUT >
CHANNEL MODE page). See step 15 on page 2-35.
• Various monophonic variations of the above, which are convenient for doing
things like assigning the left and right outputs of the 2.0 processing to separate
hardware outputs when the 2.0 processing is in dual-mono (1/0/1.0) mode
and carrying independent monophonic programs on the two channels.
You can assign a given processor output signal to more than one hardware output.
This allows using the 8685 as an AES splitter.
If you wish to use the 8685’s automatic fallback functionality in the base configuration
(no HD-SDI), you must use the 8685’s default input routing: 1/2>Lf/Rf,
3/4>C/LFE, 5/6>Ls/Rs, and 9/10>Ls/Rs. See step 21 on page 2-37.
INPUT ROUTING MATRIX (no SDI board installed)
Lf/Rf Source 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 9/10, none
Ls/Rs Source 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 9/10, none
C/LFE Source 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 9/10, none
Lb/Rb Source 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 9/10, none
2.0 Processor x Source
for each of four 2.0 processors
1/2, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 9/10, Ldm/Rdm, none
OUTPUT ROUTING MATRIX (no SDI board installed)
Channel 1/2 Output Routing Lf/Rf, C/LFE, Ls/ Rs, Lb/ Rb, Lst/Rst, Ldm/Rdm, Lst>MONO, Rst>MONO
Channel 3/4 Output Routing Lf/Rf, C/LFE, Ls/ Rs, Lb/ Rb, Lst/Rst, Ldm/Rdm, Lst>MONO, Rst>MONO
Channel 5/6 Output Routing Lf/Rf, C/LFE, Ls/ Rs, Lb/ Rb, Lst/Rst, Ldm/Rdm, Lst>MONO, Rst>MONO
Channel 7/8 Output Routing Lf/Rf, C/LFE, Ls/ Rs, Lb/ Rb, Lst/Rst, Ldm/Rdm, Lst>MONO, Rst>MONO
Channel 9/10 Output Routing Lf/Rf, C/LFE, Ls/ Rs, Lb/ Rb, Lst/Rst, Ldm/Rdm, Lst>MONO, Rst>MONO
Channel 11/12 Output Routing Lf/Rf, C/LFE, Ls/ Rs, Lb/ Rb, Lst/Rst, Ldm/Rdm, Lst>MONO, Rst>MONO
Analog Output Routing Lf/Rf, Lst/Rst, Ldm/Rdm, Lf, Rf, C, LFE, Ls, Rs, Lb, Rb, Lst, Rst, Ldm, Rdm
Analog Headphone Routing Lf/Rf, Lst/Rst, Ldm/Rdm, Lf, Rf, C, LFE, Ls, Rs, Lb, Rb, Lst, Rst, Ldm, Rdm
INPUT ROUTING MATRIX (SDI board installed)
Lf/Rf Source
AES_1/2, AES_3/4, AES_5/6, SDI_1/2, SDI_3/4, SDI_5/6, SDI_7/8, none;
[Dolby-E option] DE_1/2, DE_3/4_, DE_5/6, DE_7/8
Ls/Rs Source
AES_1/2, AES_3/4, AES_5/6, SDI_1/2, SDI_3/4, SDI_5/6, SDI_7/8, none;
[Dolby-E option] DE_1/2, DE_3/4_, DE_5/6, DE_7/8
C/LFE Source
AES_1/2, AES_3/4, AES_5/6, SDI_1/2, SDI_3/4, SDI_5/6, SDI_7/8, none;
[Dolby-E option] DE_1/2, DE_3/4_, DE_5/6, DE_7/8
Lb/Rb Source
AES_1/2, AES_3/4, AES_5/6, SDI_1/2, SDI_3/4, SDI_5/6, SDI_7/8, none;
[Dolby-E option] DE_1/2, DE_3/4_, DE_5/6, DE_7/8
2.0 Processor x Source
AES_1/2, AES_3/4, AES_5/6, SDI_1/2, SDI_3/4, SDI_5/6, SDI_7/8, none;
for each of four 2.0 processors [Dolby-E option] DE_1/2, DE_3/4_, DE_5/6, DE_7/8
Dolby-E Metadata Source Serial, SDI VANC, Dolby-E decoder (if installed)
OUTPUT ROUTING MATRIX (SDI board installed)
Lf/Rf, C/LFE, Ls/ Rs, Lb/ Rb, Lst1/Rst1, Lst2/Rst2,Lst3/Rst3, Lst4/Rst4,
AES Channel 1/2 Output Routing
Ldm/Rdm, Lst1>MONO, Rst1>MONO, Lst2>MONO, Rst2>MONO,
Lst3>MONO, Rst3>MONO, Lst4>MONO, Rst4>MONO, SDI_1/2, SDI_3/4,
SDI_5/6, SDI_7/8; [Dolby-E option] DE_1/2, DE_3/4, DE_5/6, DE_7/8
Lf/Rf, C/LFE, Ls/ Rs, Lb/ Rb, Lst1/Rst1, Lst2/Rst2,Lst3/Rst3, Lst4/Rst4,
AES Channel 3/4 Output Routing
Ldm/Rdm, Lst1>MONO, Rst1>MONO, Lst2>MONO, Rst2>MONO,
Lst3>MONO, Rst3>MONO, Lst4>MONO, Rst4>MONO, SDI_1/2, SDI_3/4,
SDI_5/6, SDI_7/8; [Dolby-E option] DE_1/2, DE_3/4, DE_5/6, DE_7/8
Lf/Rf, C/LFE, Ls/ Rs, Lb/ Rb, Lst1/Rst1, Lst2/Rst2,Lst3/Rst3, Lst4/Rst4,
AES Channel 5/6 Output Routing
Ldm/Rdm, Lst1>MONO, Rst1>MONO, Lst2>MONO, Rst2>MONO,
Lst3>MONO, Rst3>MONO, Lst4>MONO, Rst4>MONO, SDI_1/2, SDI_3/4,
SDI_5/6, SDI_7/8; [Dolby-E option] DE_1/2, DE_3/4, DE_5/6, DE_7/8

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-23
SDI Channel 1/2 Output Routing
SDI Channel 3/4 Output Routing
SDI Channel 5/6 Output Routing
SDI Channel 7/8 Output Routing
Analog Output Routing
Analog Headphone Routing
Dolby-E Channel 1/2
Output Routing
Dolby-E Channel 3/4
Output Routing
Dolby-E Channel 5/6
Output Routing
Dolby-E Channel 7/8
Output Routing
NOTES and ABBREVIATIONS:
Lf/Rf, C/LFE, Ls/ Rs, Lb/ Rb, Lst1/Rst1, Lst2/Rst2,Lst3/Rst3, Lst4/Rst4,
Ldm/Rdm, Lst1>MONO, Rst1>MONO, Lst2>MONO, Rst2>MONO,
Lst3>MONO, Rst3>MONO, Lst4>MONO, Rst4>MONO, SDI_1/2; [Dolby-E
option] DE_1/2, DE_3/4, DE_5/6, DE_7/8
Lf/Rf, C/LFE, Ls/ Rs, Lb/ Rb, Lst1/Rst1, Lst2/Rst2,Lst3/Rst3, Lst4/Rst4,
Ldm/Rdm, Lst1>MONO, Rst1>MONO, Lst2>MONO, Rst2>MONO,
Lst3>MONO, Rst3>MONO, Lst4>MONO, Rst4>MONO, SDI_3/4; [Dolby-E
option] DE_1/2, DE_3/4, DE_5/6, DE_7/8
Lf/Rf, C/LFE, Ls/ Rs, Lb/ Rb, Lst1/Rst1, Lst2/Rst2,Lst3/Rst3, Lst4/Rst4,
Ldm/Rdm, Lst1>MONO, Rst1>MONO, Lst2>MONO, Rst2>MONO,
Lst3>MONO, Rst3>MONO, Lst4>MONO, Rst4>MONO, SDI_5/6; [Dolby-E
option] DE_1/2, DE_3/4, DE_5/6, DE_7/8
Lf/Rf, C/LFE, Ls/ Rs, Lb/ Rb, Lst1/Rst1, Lst2/Rst2,Lst3/Rst3, Lst4/Rst4,
Ldm/Rdm, Lst1>MONO, Rst1>MONO, Lst2>MONO, Rst2>MONO,
Lst3>MONO, Rst3>MONO, Lst4>MONO, Rst4>MONO, SDI_7/8; [Dolby-E
option] DE_1/2, DE_3/4, DE_5/6, DE_7/8
Lf/Rf, Lst1/Rst1, Lst2/Rst2, Lst3/Rst3, Lst4/Rst4, Ldm/Rdm, Lf, Rf, C, LFE,
Ls, Rs, Lb, Rb, Lst, Rst, Ldm, Rdm, Lst1, Rst1, Lst2, Rst2, Lst3, Rst3, Lst4,
Rst4, AES_1/2, AES_3/4, AES_5/6, SDI_1/2, SDI_3/4, SDI_5/6, SDI_7/8;
[Dolby-E option] DE_1/2, DE_3/4, DE_5/6, DE_7/8
Lf/Rf, Lst1/Rst1, Lst2/Rst2, Lst3/Rst3, Lst4/Rst4, Ldm/Rdm, Lf, Rf, C, LFE,
Ls, Rs, Lb, Rb, Lst, Rst, Ldm, Rdm, Lst1, Rst1, Lst2, Rst2, Lst3, Rst3, Lst4,
Rst4, AES_1/2, AES_3/4, AES_5/6, SDI_1/2, SDI_3/4, SDI_5/6, SDI_7/8;
[Dolby-E option] DE_1/2, DE_3/4, DE_5/6, DE_7/8
Lf/Rf, C/LFE, Ls/ Rs, Lb/ Rb, Lst1/Rst1, Lst2/Rst2,Lst3/Rst3, Lst4/Rst4,
Ldm/Rdm, Ldm/Rdm, Lst>MONO, Lst1>MONO, Rst1>MONO,
Lst2>MONO, Rst2>MONO, Lst3>MONO, Rst3>MONO, Lst4>MONO,
Rst4>MONO, SDI_1/2, SDI_3/4, SDI_5/6, SDI_7/8; [Dolby-E option]
DE_1/2
Lf/Rf, C/LFE, Ls/ Rs, Lb/ Rb, Lst1/Rst1, Lst2/Rst2,Lst3/Rst3, Lst4/Rst4,
Ldm/Rdm, Ldm/Rdm, Lst>MONO, Lst1>MONO, Rst1>MONO,
Lst2>MONO, Rst2>MONO, Lst3>MONO, Rst3>MONO, Lst4>MONO,
Rst4>MONO, SDI_1/2, SDI_3/4, SDI_5/6, SDI_7/8; [Dolby-E option]
DE_3/4
Lf/Rf, C/LFE, Ls/ Rs, Lb/ Rb, Lst1/Rst1, Lst2/Rst2,Lst3/Rst3, Lst4/Rst4,
Ldm/Rdm, Ldm/Rdm, Lst>MONO, Lst1>MONO, Rst1>MONO,
Lst2>MONO, Rst2>MONO, Lst3>MONO, Rst3>MONO, Lst4>MONO,
Rst4>MONO, SDI_1/2, SDI_3/4, SDI_5/6, SDI_7/8; [Dolby-E option]
DE_5/6
Lf/Rf, C/LFE, Ls/ Rs, Lb/ Rb, Lst1/Rst1, Lst2/Rst2,Lst3/Rst3, Lst4/Rst4,
Ldm/Rdm, Ldm/Rdm, Lst>MONO, Lst1>MONO, Rst1>MONO,
Lst2>MONO, Rst2>MONO, Lst3>MONO, Rst3>MONO, Lst4>MONO,
Rst4>MONO, SDI_1/2, SDI_3/4, SDI_5/6, SDI_7/8; [Dolby-E option]
DE_7/8
DE = Dolby-E; dm = downmix; Lstx = left channel of 2.0 processor x (x =
1…4); Rstx = right channel of 2.0 processor x; MONO = identical signals
appear on channels 1 and 2 of given destination
Table 2-2: Routing Switcher Sources and Destinations
5. Set up routing for the Penteo 2.0�5.1 upmixer (optional).
Skip this step if you are not going to use the stand-alone Penteo upmixer.
The routing switcher configuration depends on whether the optional HD-SDI
board is installed and, if so, whether you will be driving the 8685’s surround
processing with the audio embedded on the SDI signal or via the board’s three
AESid inputs.
In all cases, the input applied to the Penteo must be at a 48 kHz sample rate. The
Penteo is not equipped with sample rate converters, so its output sample rate
will be the same as its input sample rate. This will ordinarily be locked to house
sync. For details, see Sample Frequency Synchronization on page 1-14.

2-24
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
• If you will be using the 8685’s AESid inputs to receive the audio input
signal, you must insert the Penteo into the lines driving the 8685:
[AES3id input feed] � [Penteo] �[8686 AESid inputs]
In this case, set the 8685’s input switcher the same as if you were receiving
a true 5.1 source. The Penteo will pass true 5.1 material applied to its
three AES3id inputs and will delay this material to match the delay (approximately
265 ms) of the Penteo upmix process. It will upmix 2.0 material
applied to its AES3id 1/2 input and can be configured so that it detects
the difference between 5.1 and 2.0 inputs and activates upmixing
automatically as necessary.
• If you will be using audio embedded on the SDI input, you must dedicate
the 8685’s three AES3id inputs and outputs to a Penteo loop-through
connection.
This will make these connectors unavailable for use by the 8685’s 2.0
processors.
• Configure the 8685's routing switcher so that audio channels 1/2 received
from the SDI input are routed to Digital Output 1/2 on the SDI card. Similarly,
route SDI channels 3/4 to Digital Output 3/4 and route SDI channels
5/6 to Digital Output 5/6.
• Configure the 8685's routing switcher so the audio channels 1/2 received on
Digital Input 1/2 (BNC connector) are routed to the Lf/Rf inputs of the
8685's multichannel audio processing. Similarly, route Digital Input 3/4 to
C/Lfe and route Digital Input 5/6 to Ls/Rs.
• Connect the three 8685 digital outputs (1/2, 3/4, and 5/6) to Penteo digital
inputs 1/2, 3/4, and 5/6 respectively.
• Connect Penteo digital outputs 1/2, 3/4, and 5/6 to 8685 digital inputs 1/2,
3/4, and 5/6 respectively.
This will produce following signal processing chain:
[…SDI source] �
[8685 SDI RECEIVER � 8685 AES3id outputs] �
[Penteo] �
[8685 AES3id inputs � 8685 Audio Processing � 8685 SDI transmitter] �
[downstream SDI destination…]
The easiest way to configure the 8685’s router for Penteo loop-through is
to recall the 8685’s Penteo System Preset, which we have pre-configured
to realize this block diagram.
AV Sync: Penteo’s delay is large enough to introduce unacceptable AV sync errors
unless the video signal is delayed equally. The 8685’s optional SDI board can
apply up to 11 frames of video delay to the video, which is more than enough to
accommodate the delay of the Penteo, the 8685 audio processing, and a roundtrip
Dolby-E decode/encode cycle. If you do not have the SDI board, to maintain
AV sync you must apply video delay or reduce audio make-up delay elsewhere in
your transmission system.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-25
When the SDI VIDEO DELAY control (INPUT/OUTPUT 4 screen) is set to AUTO, the
8685 can calculate the amount of video delay automatically. To do this with Penteo,
the 8685 must have an Ethernet connection to the Penteo unit so that the
8685 can detect that the Penteo unit is connected.
If the 8685 does not recognize the Penteo, you must set the video delay manually.
Set the video delay to one frame (for the 8685’s audio processing) plus seven
frames for Penteo. If the optional Dolby-E decoder module is installed and passing
audio, add one frame of video delay. If the optional Dolby-E encoder module
is installed and passing audio, add an additional one frame of video delay. With
all options installed (Penteo, Dolby-E decode, and Dolby-E encode), the required
video delay is 10 frames (1+7+1+1).
6. Set the 2.0 input deemphasis.
[Flat, J.17]
You can configure the 8685 to apply J.17 deemphasis to input signals assigned to
the 2.0 processing. J.17 is first-order shelving preemphasis/deemphasis with
breakpoints at 400 Hz and 4 kHz. It is rarely used now; in broadcasting, it was
mostly used in NICAM links.
A) LOCATE to INPUT/OUTPUT > INPUT.
B) Set the 2.0 INPUT PREEMPHASIS control to FLAT or J.17. If in doubt, choose FLAT,
which is correct for almost all installations.
C) Set the 2.0 INPUT PREEMPHASIS control to FLAT or J.17
7. Adjust the surround input reference Level.
[−40 dBfs to –10 dBfs (VU), or [−33 dBfs to –3 dBfs (PPM)] in 0.5 dB steps
This step matches the 8685’s average AGC gain reduction to the level to which
program material is normally peaked on the studio meters. It makes the 8685’s
processing presets operate in their preferred range. Correctly setting the input
reference level ensures that processing presets will produce their intended
sound, controlling loudness effectively and subtly.
• If your organization uses a standardized line-up level, you can simply set the
8685’s SURROUND INPUT REFERENCE VU control to this level and skip to step (H).
However, we strongly suggest checking the result of your setting by using the
procedure starting with step (A) and choosing to calibrate using program
(step (G)).
There are two commonly used line-up levels: SMPTE (–20 dBfs) and EBU
(–18 dBfs).
• Note that you are calibrating to the average indication of the studio meters;
this is quite different from the actual peak level.
• The reference level VU (average) and PPM (quasi-peak) settings are not independent—they
track each other with an offset of 7 dB. This compensates for

2-26
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
the typical indications with program material on a VU meter versus the higher
indications on a PPM.
A) LOCATE to RECALL/IMPORT.
B) Turn the knob until ROCK MEDIUM appears in the lower line of the display.
C) Press the ENTER button to recall the preset.
D) Verify that the 8685’s SURROUND EXTERNAL AGC control is set to NO.
Refer to step 2 on page 2-20.
E) LOCATE to INPUT/OUTPUT > INPUT > SURROUND INPUT REFERENCE (VU or PPM, depending
on which metering system you use).
F) Calibrate using tone.
If your facility does not use a formal reference level and/or if the link to
the 8685’s input uses J.17 preemphasis (which is only available for the 2.0
input; see step 5 on page 2-23):
• To calibrate using tone, perform steps (a) and (b) below.
• To calibrate using program material, skip to step (G) on page 2-26.
a) If you are not using a studio level controller, feed a 400 Hz tone into the Lf
and Rf channels of the 8685 through your console at your normal program
line-up level (typically 0 VU if your console uses VU meters). Do not drive
any other channels.
b) If you are using a studio level controller that performs an AGC function,
feed a 400 Hz tone at your normal program level into its Lf and Rf channels
and adjust the studio level controller for normal operation.
c) Adjust the 8685’s SURROUND INPUT REFERENCE (VU or PPM) control to make
the 8685’s AGC meter indicate 10 dB gain reduction.
d) Skip to step (H).
G) Calibrate using program.
[Skip this step if you are using Tone to calibrate the 8685 to your standard
studio level—see step (F) above.]
a) Feed normal program material to the 8685
Play program material from your studio, peaking at the level to which
you normally peak program material (typically 0VU if your console uses
VU meters).
b) Adjust the SURROUND INPUT REFERENCE (VU or PPM) control to make the
8685’s AGC meters indicate an average of 10 dB gain reduction when the
console’s VU meter or PPM is peaking at its normal level.
If the AGC gain reduction meter averages less than 10 dB gain reduction
(higher on the meter), re-adjust the SURROUND INPUT REFERENCE (VU or
PPM) to a lower level.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-27
If the AGC gain reduction meter averages more gain reduction (lower on
the meter), re-adjust the SURROUND INPUT REFERENCE (VU or PPM) to a
higher level.
H) When finished, reset the 8685’s SURROUND EXTERNAL AGC control to YES, if required
(e.g., if that was its setting prior to your setting the SURROUND INPUT
REFERENCE (VU or PPM) level).
Refer to step 2 on page 2-20.
8. Adjust the 2.0 input reference Level.
[Skip this step if you will not be using the 2.0 processing.]
Repeat step 7 on page 2-25, but use the 2.0 INPUT REFERENCE (VU OR PPM) control.
If you choose to calibrate using tone or program material, drive the 2.0
processing’s inputs. All four 2.0 processors share the same reference level.
9. Set the 2.0 output configuration.
[Skip this step if you will not be using the 2.0 processing.]
All four 2.0 processors share the same configuration and cannot be configured
independently.
A) LOCATE to INPUT/OUTPUT > 2.0 OUTPUT (INPUT/OUTPUT 3).
B) Set the 2.0 OUTPUT SYNC to INTERNAL, IN 1-2, SYNC IN, VIDEO SYNC, SDI or any of
the 8685’s AES3id inputs.
• INTERNAL synchronizes output sample rate of the 2.0-connected hardware
output that carries the 2.0 processing to the 8685 internal crystal time base.
If there is no valid signal present on the chosen reference input, the 8685
uses internal sync until a valid signal appears.
• SYNC IN synchronizes the output sample rate to AES3id, AES11id, or word
clock applied to the 8685’s SYNC INPUT. It will overwrite the setting of the
8685’s 2.0 OUTPUT RATE control.
• IN 1-2 synchronizes the output sample rate to a signal appearing on AES3id
input 1-2.
• VIDEO SYNC synchronizes the sample rate to a SMPTE 274M or SMPTE 296Mcompliant
source applied to the 8685’s VIDEO SYNC INPUT. It will overwrite
the setting of the 8685’s 2.0 OUTPUT RATE control. This source is available
only if the optional HD-SDI module is installed.
• SDI synchronizes the sample rate to a SMPTE 259M, 292M, or 424Mcompiant
signal applied to the 8685’s HD-SDI input. This source is available
only if the optional HD-SDI module is installed.
When using Penteo in its loop-though mode when using HD-SDI input
and output (i.e. using the optional HD-SDI module’s AES3id inputs and
outputs to connect to the Penteo), it is unnecessary to lock the sample
rates appearing on the AES3id outputs to house sync because the AES3id

2-28
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
inputs are equipped with sample rate converters so no sync reference is
required. (However, there is no downside to locking the sample rate driving
the Penteo to house sync.)
C) Set the 2.0 OUTPUT RATE to 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2, or 96 kHz.
• If you are using INTERNAL sync [step (B) above], 48 kHz or 96 kHz are preferred
because their samples are synchronous with the peak-controlled
samples in the processing. If you are using external sync, this special relationship
no longer holds.
• Selecting a 32 kHz output sample rate will automatically set the highest
available audio bandwidth to 15 kHz.
• 2.0 OUTPUT RATE affects the usable range of test tone frequencies. When
2.0 OUTPUT RATE is set to 32 kHz, the highest usable tone frequency is
15 kHz. When 2.0 OUTPUT RATE is set to 44.1 or above, all tone frequencies
are usable.
D) Set the 2.0 OUTPUT WORD LENGTH.
[14], [16], [18], [20], or [24], in bits
The largest valid word length in the 8685 is 24 bits
The 8685 can truncate its output word length to 20, 18, 16 or 14 bits and
can add appropriate dither before the truncation to linearize it (see the
next step).
E) Set the 2.0 OUTPUT DITHER to IN or OUT, as desired.
[In] or [Out]
When this control is set to IN, the 8685 adds “high-pass” dither before
any truncation of the output word. The amount of dither automatically
tracks the setting of the WORD LEN control. This first-order noise-shaped
dither considerably reduces added noise in the midrange by comparison
to white PDF dither. However, unlike extreme noise shaping, it adds a
maximum of 3 dB of excess total noise power when compared to white
PDF dither. Thus, it is a good compromise between white PDF dither and
extreme noise shaping.
To ensure maximum system linearity, it is wise to set this control to IN.
F) Set 2.0 OUTPUT FORMAT to AES or SPDIF
G) Set 2.0 OUTPUT SOURCE control. The choices are:
• AGC (stereo enhancement, equalization, and AGC without peak limiting)
• AGC+LIMIT (stereo enhancement, equalization, AGC, and look-ahead peak
limiting)
• MULTIBAND (stereo enhancement, equalization, AGC, and two-band or 5-
Band compression without peak limiting)
• MB+LIMIT (stereo enhancement, equalization, AGC, two-band or 5-Band
compression, and look-ahead peak limiting).

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-29
See step 8 on page 2-11 for more about these choices.
H) Set the 2.0 OUTPUT PREEMPHASIS control. The choices are FLAT, 50μs or 75μs.
• Use FLAT if you are driving a channel that does not use preemphasis. (Very
few digital channels use preemphasis.) Set the control FLAT for DAB, DRM,
HD Radio, digital television, netcasts, and any other channel that uses a
lossy codec. When in doubt, set this control FLAT.
• Use 50μs if you are driving a channel that is preemphasized at 50μs, such as
an analog TV aural transmitter in European countries.
• Use 75μs if you are driving a channel that is preemphasized at 75μs, such as
an analog aural transmitter in the Americas (Region 2).
When the control is set to 50μs or 75μs, the signal feeding the 2.0 lookahead
limiter has this preemphasis applied to it before it feeds the limiter
and complementary deemphasis is applied after the limiter. The frequency
response through the limiter therefore remains flat below the
threshold of limiting but high frequencies cause the limiter to produce
more wideband gain reduction than do low frequencies. Because deemphasis
is applied after the limiter, the transmitter that follows the 8685’s
output must apply the final transmission preemphasis.
With 5-Band presets, the OUTPUT PREEMPHASIS control determines if the 5band
compressor’s sidechain is preemphasized at 50μs or 75μs. This makes
the 5-band compressor “preemphasis-aware,” allowing bands 4 and 5 to
be used as a high-frequency limiter to prevent the look-ahead limiter
(which creates wideband gain reduction) from creating audible “pumping”
or “gulping” artifacts on program material that is rich in high frequencies,
like “esses” in speech.
The 2.0 processing in the “TVA” presets is tuned to complement 50μs and
75μs preemphasis. See Table 3-1 on page 3-27.
I) Set the 2.0 OUTPUT DELAY control.
This sets the time delay between the 8685’s input and output in units of
milliseconds or frames. All common frame rates are supported without
the need to convert them into milliseconds.
MINIMUM delays the signal as little as possible. When MINIMUM is chosen,
the delay will depend on which output feed is in use (step (G) above) and
the setting of the active preset’s AGC CROSSOVER control. However, if the
delay is not set to MINIMUM, the delay through the 8685 will be the same
as the setting of the 2.0 OUTPUT DELAY control regardless of the settings
of other controls.
In most cases, it is appropriate to set the delay so that is equal to one or
two frames of the television standard that you are using. (Two frames are
required for 59.94/60 fps progressively scanned video.) This allows you to
apply video delay to maintain AV sync accurately.
If you are using an HD-SDI connection with the 8685’s optional HD-SDI
module, the 8685 can apply the appropriate video delay.

2-30
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
If it is impossible to delay the video, set the OUTPUT DELAY control to
MINIMUM. This will produce approximately 20 ms of delay, which is low
enough not to cause detectable AV sync problems.
10. Set the 2.0 processing’s output level if OUTPUT PREEMPHASIS control is set
Flat.
[Skip this step if the OUTPUT PREEMPHASIS control is set to 50μs or 75μs.]
LOCATE to INPUT/OUTPUT > 2.0 OUT > 2.0 OUTPUT LEVEL (100%) and set the 2.0
OUTPUT LEVEL (100%) control to desired peak level in units of dBfs (dB with respect
to digital full scale). The setting of the 2.0 OUTPUT 100% control is the
maximum peak level that the 8685 can produce at its output. This level corresponds
to a reading of 0 dB on the 8685’S 2.0 OUTPUT METER.
Typical settings are –0.5 dBfs to –3.0 dBfs, depending on whether sample
rate conversion and/or lossy encoding is occurring downstream from the
8685. Refer to Setting Output/Modulation Levels on page 1-21.
• If the 2.0 OUTPUT SOURCE is AGC+LIMIT or MB+LIMIT (step (9.G) on page 2-28),
the 8685’s look-ahead limiter will automatically constrain the peak output
level to the setting of the 2.0 OUTPUT 100% control without clipping.
• If and only if the 2.0 OUTPUT SOURCE is MB+LIMIT, the average level and loudness
do not change when you adjust the 2.0 OUTPUT Level (100%) control. The
control only sets the maximum peak level at the 8685’s output. For every dB
that the 2.0 OUTPUT SOURCE is turned down, the 8685 automatically increases
the limiter drive by 1 dB to compensate. This is to ensure that the output
loudness is always consistent with the 8685’s active DIALNORM setting.
• If the 2.0 OUTPUT SOURCE is AGC or MB, the 8685’s output level is not peak
limited. However, its average value is usually well controlled by the 8685’s
multiband compressor and loudness controller. The 8685’s peak output level
will depend on the peak-to-average ratio of the program material, so clipping
is possible if the 2.0 LIMITER DRIVE control in the active preset is set too high.
It is normal for the 2.0 OUTPUT LEVEL meter to indicate 0 dB on peaks
when the 2.0 OUTPUT SOURCE is AGC+LIMIT or MB+LIMIT. This does not indicate
clipping; the look-ahead limiter is constraining peaks to this level.
The only reason to choose the AGC or MB output sources is to minimize
input/output delay, which is important if you are driving talent headphones
from the 8685’s output. Otherwise, AGC+LIMIT and MB+LIMIT are
preferred because the 8685’s look-ahead limiter prevents clipping in
normal operation.
To prevent objectionable clipping distortion when the 2.0 OUTPUT SOURCE
is AGC or MB, set the 2.0 LIMITER DRIVE control as follows:
a) Make sure that the program material is loud enough to produce normal
amounts of gain reduction in the AGC (if activated), the multiband
compressor/limiter, and the loudness controller (if activated).
b) If the 8685’s 2.0 OUTPUT LEVEL meter is frequently hitting the top of its scale
(0 dB) and the 8685’s look-ahead limiter is defeated (as it is when the 2.0

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-31
OUTPUT SOURCE is AGC or MB), then excessive clipping is occurring. Turn
down 2.0 LIMITER DRIVE control until you no longer see clipping on the
meter.
Occasional light clipping is usually inaudible. It is sometimes preferable to
allow occasional clipping in order to use the headroom available in the
downstream channel most efficiently. This depends on the headroom
available—for example, in a 24-bit channel, there is no excuse for clipping
at any time.
If the 2.0 OUTPUT LEVEL meter is indicating very low levels, you may wish
to turn up the 2.0 LIMITER DRIVE control to better use the downstream
headroom.
c) Once you have determined a good setting for this control, save the preset
as User preset.
11. Set the 2.0 processing’s output level if OUTPUT PREEMPHASIS control is set
to 50μs or 75μs.
[Skip this step if the OUTPUT PREEMPHASIS control is set FLAT.]
We recommend using 5-Band “TVA” presets (or User Presets derived from them)
when the 2.0 OUTPUT PREEMPHASIS control [step (9.H) on page 2-29] is set to 50μs
or 75μs. The 2.0 processing in the “TVA” presets is designed to feed an analog TV
aural channel using 50us or 75us preemphasis. The surround processing in these
presets is identical to the surround processing in the corresponding “TV” presets,
whose 2.0 processing is optimized to drive channels with no preemphasis. The
main purpose of the “TVA” presets is to allow the 8685 to process analog and
digital transmission channels simultaneously, which is useful for stations in countries
that have not completed the transition to all-digital broadcasting.
To simplify setup, the “TVA” presets have local values of 2.0 DIALNORM (–17 dB),
2.0 LOWPASS FILTER CUTOFF (15 kHz), and 2.0 HIGHPASS FILTER CUTOFF (20 Hz).
These values override the corresponding global values in the active Transmission
Preset.
The filter settings complement analog aural carriers, while the value of DIALNORM
matches the loudness of the 8685’s 2.0 processing to the loudness of an Optimod-TV
designed for analog television (like Optimod-TV 8282 and 8382) when
the peak output levels of the two processors are the same and when the 2.0
OUTPUT 100% control is set to 0.0 dBfs.
A) Set the 2.0 Output Source to MB+LIMIT (step (9.G) on page 2-28).
The 8685’s look-ahead limiter will automatically control the peak modulation
of a transmitter that applies 50μs or 75μs to its input. Moreover,
the average level and loudness do not change when you adjust the 2.0
OUTPUT LEVEL (100%) control. The control only sets the maximum peak
level at the 8685’s output. For every dB that the 2.0 Output Source is
turned down, the 8685 automatically increases the limiter drive by 1 dB
to compensate. This is to ensure that the output loudness is always consistent
with the 8685’s active Dialnorm setting.
B) Make sure that preemphasis is set according to the standard used in your
country. See step (9.H) on page 2-29.

2-32
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
C) Make sure that your transmitter is configured to apply preemphasis to the
audio it receives from the 8685.
D) LOCATE to INPUT/OUTPUT > 2.0 OUT > 2.0 OUTPUT LEVEL (100%) and set the 2.0
OUTPUT LEVEL (100%) control to 0.0 dBfs.
E) Set your transmitter’s modulation with tone.
a) LOCATE to SYSTEM SETUP > TEST MODES.
b) Choose TONE. Set FREQUENCY to 100 HZ and LEVEL to 100%.
c) Click the TONE button.
d) LOCATE to the MAPPING page (to the right of the TEST MODES page) and set
the L 2.0 TONE PROC X AND R 2.0 TONE PROC X fields to TONE, where “x” is a
number from 1 to 4 that identifies which of the four available 2.0
processors you are using to drive the transmitter.
e) If you are driving your transmitter with the 8685’s analog outputs: LOCATE
to INPUT/OUTPUT > UTILITIES and adjust the ANALOG OUTPUT LEVEL control to
produce 100% modulation of your transmitter as measured by the peak
modulation instrument specified by your country’s regulatory authority.
This assumes you have routed the 2.0 processing’s left and right outputs
to the analog outputs. The routing matrix is located in the OUTPUT
ROUTING tab in I/O SETUP.
f) If you are driving your transmitter with an 8685 digital output: Use a gain
control following the 8685 output (typically, your analog transmitter’s
sensitvity control) to produce 100% modulation of your transmitter.
Achieving correct on-air loudness and proper operation of the 8685’s
loudness meter requires you to align the transmission system following
the 8685 so that 0.0 dBfs at the 8685’s output corresponds to 100% peak
modulation of the transmitter. Using the 8685’s 2.0 OUTPUT LEVEL control
to set the gain between the 8685 and the transmitter will not produce
correct loudness meter calibration and on-air loudness because this control
only sets the maximum peak level while attempting to maintain the
average modulation constant when adjusted. It does this by driving the
look-ahead limiter 1 dB harder for every 1 dB that the 2.0 OUTPUT LEVEL is
turned down.
F) Test modulation with program material to determine the overshoot in your
transmission system.
a) LOCATE to SYSTEM SETUP > TEST MODES and choose OPERATE.
b) Recall the TVA 5B GEN PURPOSE preset.
c) Apply typical program material to the 8685’s input. Verify that the 2.0
LIMITER GR meters are indicating gain reduction on peaks, which ensures
that the 8685 is producing 100% peak modulation on program material.
d) Measure your transmitter’s peak modulation. If this exceeds 100%, turn
down the 8685’s 2.0 OUTPUT LEVEL control until the modulation of peaks of
frequent recurrence is constrained to 100% deviation.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-33
Turning down the 2.0 OUTPUT 100% control reduces the peak modulation
without significantly affecting the average modulation. Hence, using
this technique keeps the 8685’s LOUDNESS LEVEL meter correctly calibrated
and provides correct on-air loudness.
G) Check loudness with respect to other stations in your market and correct your
average modulation if necessary.
Because there is no standard value for the average modulation in analog
TV transmission, the loudness of your analog transmission might be different
from other stations in your market. If this is so, match the 8685’s
loudness to the other stations by adjusting the 2.0 DIALNORM control in
the on-air preset. In PC Remote, this control is located in the 2.0 LESS-
MORE TAB; on the 8685’s front panel, the control is located in ADVANCED
MODIFY > DISTORTION. For example, changing DIALNORM from –17 dB to
–15 dB makes the transmission 2 dB louder. Adjusting DIALNORM is the
only correct way to adjust on-air loudness after the system has been calibrated
according to steps (E) and (F) above; this technique will retain correct
calibration of the 8685’s loudness level meter and loudness controller.
Note that increasing the loudness in this way will increase the likelihood
that the 8685’s look-ahead limiter will create audible “pumping” or
“gulping” artifacts on program material that is rich in high frequencies
because the look-ahead limiter is operating on a preemphasized signal
and because turning up DIALNORM drives the look-ahead limiter harder. If
you hear such artifacts, we recommend that you use a 5-Band TVA preset
if you are not doing so already. This allows you to use the Band 5 compressor/limiter
as a high-frequency limiter. If you hear audible pumping
on material rich in high frequencies, turn down the B5 THRESHOLD control
until you find the most subjectively pleasing trade-off between high frequency
loss and look-ahead limiter pumping. You can also try speeding
up the B5 ATTACK control by setting it to a lower number, or adjusting
the both controls to taste.
When you use a 2-Band “TVA” preset, some material rich in high frequencies
may cause subtle pumping even with DIALNORM set to its nominal
–17 dB value. This is because the 2-band compressor cannot produce
high frequency limiting, so preemphasis control must be performed by
the loudness controller and look-ahead limiter. We have tuned the 5-
Band factory “TVA” presets to produce appropriate amounts of highfrequency
limiting. We therefore recommend that if you need to use a
“TVA” preset, use a 5-Band preset unless you have a very good reason
not to do so.
12. Set the surround output configuration and level.
A) LOCATE to INPUT/OUTPUT > SURROUND OUTPUT.
B) Follow the procedure in step 9 on page 2-27, replacing “2.0” by “surround.”
Note that the SURROUND OUTPUT SYNC and 2.0 OUTPUT SYNC controls track each
other automatically; you cannot have separate sources for surround and 2.0
output sync.
C) Follow the procedure in step 10 on page 2-30, replacing “2.0” by “surround.”

2-34
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
13. Set surround and 2.0 global Dialnorm values. (Very important!)
See step 10 on page 2-14.
The global Dialnorm settings are in INPUT/OUTPUT > UTILITIES.
• You can use the 8685’s RS-485 serial ports to convey surround DIALNORM to the
Dolby-Encoder automatically.
• If your 8685 is equipped with the optional HD-SDI module, you can use it as a
metadata source. The metadata in the HD-SD stream must be embedded as
VANC data per SMPTE 2020-2-2008 (Method-A) or SMPTE 2020-3-2008
(Method-B). Select the metadata source with the METADATA SOURCE control,
which is located in INPUT/OUTPUT>INPUT ROUTING (INPUT/OUTPUT 4).
• If your 8685 is equipped with the optional Dolby-E decoder, you can use
metadata embedded in the Dolby-E input stream as a metadata source.
See Conveying Metadata on page 2-15 and Conveying and Re-authoring Dolby
Metadata on page 6-3.
14. Set the processing’s channel mode controls.
Note: Unlike Orban’s earlier 8585 processor, all processors (one 7.1 processor and
four 2.0 processors) in the 8685 are active simultaneously. There is no control to
turn them on or off because none is needed. The only thing the installer must do
is to make sure that no signal is accidentally feeding the Lb and Rb channels of
the surround processing if it is processing a 5.1-channel source (step 15 on page
2-35).
A) LOCATE to INPUT/OUTPUT > CHANNEL MODE.
B) For each 2.0 processor, set the 2.0 PROC MODE to STEREO or DUAL MONO.
DUAL MONO mode allows the 2.0 processing to handle two independent
mono (1.0) signals. It removes all stereo coupling and activates a separate,
independent loudness controller and loudness level meter for each
channel. However, you cannot set the processing parameters independently
for each mono channel. Moreover, the active 2.0 DIALNORM value is
applied to both mono channels equally.
STEREO mode allows you to couple or uncouple the channels in the AGC
and multiband compressor/limiter to any extent you wish via the MAX
DELTA GR controls in Advanced Control. However, in STEREO mode there
is only one loudness controller and Loudness Level meter. These work on
the r.m.s. sum of the two channels.
You can also set the 2.0 processing mode by first saving a Setup with the
2.0 PROC MODE control set as desired. Then recall the Setup from a GPI input,
the 8685’s clock-based automation, the 8685’s front panel, or PC
Remote. You can also change the 2.0 processing mode by reading channel
status data in the AES3id input feeding the 2.0 processing (see step
(B) on page 2-18.) A command from any of these sources overwrites the
current stereo/mono status.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-35
C) You can mix the audio applied to 2.0 processor #1 into the Lf and Rf channels
of the surround processing. (Only 2.0 processor #1 has this feature.) This can
be useful if you want to process some program material (such as a newsroom
or outside broadcast feed) more heavily than the remaining program elements
in a surround mix.
Set the 2.0_1 TO SURROUND INPUT MIX control to LF/RF IN, LF/RF LIM or NO
MIX.
• LF/RF IN mixes the unprocessed 2.0 left and right inputs (as set in the Input
Routing Matrix) into Lf and Rf channels feeding the surround processor.
• LF/RF LIM mixes the processed "Multiband" signal from the 2.0 processor
into the surround channel’s Lf and Rf channels. This mixing occurs just before
the surround loudness controller and look-ahead limiter so that these
elements can control the loudness and peak level of the mix.
The setting of 2.0 DIALNORM does not affect this 2.0 feed. The SURROUND
DIALNORM setting determines the loudness of the surround processing, including
the 2.0 material that has been mixed in.
This mode can be used to process a 2.0 source (for example, a newsroom
feed) before it is mixed with the main surround audio (for example, a
network feed or commercials).
• NO MIX makes 2.0 processor #1 completely independent of the surround
processing.
• The 2.0 TO SURROUND INPUT LEVEL control sets the amount of 2.0 material
mixed into the surround processing.
15. Configure the input routing switcher for 5.1 or 7.1 surround processing.
A) LOCATE to INPUT/OUTPUT > INPUT ROUTING (INPUT/OUTPUT 4).
B) If you wish to use the surround processor for 5.1 material, set the LB/RB
SOURCE control to NONE. For 7.1 material, set the LB/RB SOURCE control to
match the input audio channel carrying the Lb/Rb audio.
Failure to carry out this step can cause spurious gain reduction in the surround
processor if material unrelated to the 5.1 source accidentally feeds
the Lb and Rb channels.
16. Set the surround-to-2.0 downmix values (optional).
The 8685 creates two separate 2.0 downmixes from the surround channels:
(1) A downmix of the inputs to the surround processing. This downmix is only
used as one possible source to drive the input of any of the 2.0 processors. It is
selected in the Input Routing Switcher as “Ldm/Rdm.”
(2) A downmix of the surround processing’s output channels. This downmix appears
as an available source (“Ldm/Rdm”) in the Output Routing Matrix and is
never applied to a processor's input.

2-36
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
Note that even if the surround output is configured as AGC+LIMIT or
MB+LIMIT, the output downmix is not consistently peak limited because
peak limiting is applied to the individual channels before the downmix.
Hence, the output downmix’s maximum permitted peak level becomes
higher when more channels are active. For example, when a given signal
appears in one channel (like Center), the downmix’s maximum peak level
will be 6 dB lower than it is when the same signal is appears equally in
two channels (such as Lf and Rf).
Moreover, the output downmix will not have fully controlled loudness
because the 8685’s loudness controller and Loudness Level meter use an
r.m.s. summation of the channels, whereas the output downmix is an
arithmetic sum. If you need a downmix whose loudness is perfectly controlled
and whose maximum peak level is fixed, use the 2.0 processing
chain #1 to control loudness and peak levels by assigning its input to the
input downmix. In this case, the loudness at the 2.0 processing chain’s
output will correctly track the 8685’s active 2.0 DIALNORM value.
LOCATE to INPUT/OUTPUT > CHANNEL MODE. You will see controls that determine the
contribution of the various surround channels to the two downmixes, normalized
so that the left front and right front are mixed at 0 dB.
• The default is –3dB for all inputs.
• The center is mixed equally into the left and right 2.0 downmix channels. All
other channels are assigned only to left or right.
• The mixer settings apply identically to downmixes (1) and (2).
• To make different sets of mix parameters available, save each mix in a Setup
and recall the Setup when required.
17. Set the 2.0_1 processing’s response to AES3 status bits.
See step (B) on page 2-18.
18. Choose whether the 8685 2.0_1 output will emit status bits depending
on whether the 8685’s 2.0 processing is in stereo or dual mono mode.
See step (C) on page 2-18.
19. End Analog and Digital I/O setup.
If you are using a external AGC and you temporarily set the EXT AGC to NO in
step 2 on page 2-20, set the EXT AGC to YES.
20. Select a processing preset.
See step (10.C)) on page 2-15.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-37
21. Program Silence Sense (optional)
You can program each processing chain (surround and 2.0) in the 8685 to switch
automatically from its primary digital input to a backup input if the signal at the
primary digital input falls silent.
There are silence detectors for each physical input channel. The silence
sense parameters apply to all silence detectors. All detectors are available
to drive the 8685’s tally outputs. (See step (22.B) on page 2-38.)
In the surround processing chain, silence sense will be triggered only if all
hardware channels assigned to the surround processing fall silent.
In the 2.0 chain, silence sense will be triggered if either logical input
channel assigned to the 2.0 processing falls silent, thereby protecting
against “loss-of-one-stereo-channel” faults. (Each hardware AES3id input
carries two “logical input channels.”)
A) LOCATE to INPUT/OUTPUT > SILENCE.
B) Set the SILENCE THRESHOLD to the level below which the 8685 will interpret
the input as being silent.
C) Set the SILENCE DELAY to the amount of time that the input must be below
the SILENCE THRESHOLD before the 8685 automatically switches to the backup
input.
D) Set MULTICHANNEL INPUT FALLBACK to YES if you wish the 8685 to automatically
switch the surround processing’s Lf/ Rf input from its assigned hardware input
to a fallback input when silence on all surround channels is detected or an
AES receiver unlock error on the input assigned to Lf/Rf is detected. (Channels
LFE, Lb, Rb, Ls, and Rs will be muted.) Set the control to NO to defeat automatic
switching.
If audio is restored at the input assigned to Lf/Rf, the 8685 will automatically
reconnect the Lf and Rf channels to this input and unmute the remaining
channels.
E) Set MULTICHANNEL FB SOURCE to the hardware input that will drive the Lf and
Rf channels if silence or an AES receiver unlock error on the normal Rf/Lf input
is detected and SURROUND INPUT FALLBACK = YES. The choices depend on
whether the 8685 is equipped with the optional HD-SDI module.
F) Set the 2.0 FALLBACK to YES if you wish the 8685 to automatically switch the
2.0 processing from the hardware input normally assigned to the 2.0 processing
to a fallback input when silence on either channel or an AES receiver
unlock error is detected on the normal input channel. Set the control to NO to
defeat automatic switching.
G) Set 2.0 FB SOURCE to the hardware input that will drive the 2.0 processing if
silence or an AES receiver unlock error is detected and 2.0 FALLBACK = YES. The
choices depend on whether the 8685 is equipped with the optional HD-SDI
module.
22. Program Tally Outputs.
[Skip this step if you do not wish to use the tally outputs.]

2-38
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
See step 6 on page 2-3 for wiring instructions.
You can program the two tally outputs independently to indicate a number of
different operational and fault conditions.
A) LOCATE to SETUP > NETWORK REMOTE > TALLY OUTPUT > TALLY 1.
B) Program tally output #1.
To program a given tally output, LOCATE to TALLY 1 or TALLY 2. As you
turn the control knob, the functions listed below will appear in the highlighted
field.
• Channel xx Silent: Indicates that the level of the specified hardware input
channel has been below the SILENCE THRESHOLD for longer than the SILENCE
DELAY. See step (21.B) on page 2-37.
This function can detect if the center channel is silent.
• Surround Silent: Indicates that the levels at all hardware input channels
assigned to surround processing have been below the SILENCE THRESHOLD
for longer than the SILENCE DELAY.
• 2.0 (x) Silent: Indicates that the level at either logical input channel assigned
to a given 2.0 processor (of which there are four available) has been
below the SILENCE THRESHOLD for longer than the SILENCE DELAY.
• AES xx In Error: Indicates that the AES input receiver chip on hardware
input xx has detected an unlock error, which can occur if there is no input
carrier or if the carrier is corrupted.
• SDI Error: Indicates that the signal applied to the HD-SDI input is unavailable
or corrupted.
• Input Normal: Indicates that the silence sense function has not automatically
switched an input to its assigned fallback input.
• Input Fallback: Indicates that the silence sense function has automatically
switched an input to its assigned backup because it detected silence. See
step 21 on page 2-37.
• No Function: Tally output is disabled.
C) Program tally output #2 if you wish, following the procedure in step (B) above
with the TALLY 2 field.
Using Clock-Based Automation
1. If you have not already done so, set the system clock.
If you can connect your 8685 to the Internet through the 8685’s Ethernet port,
you can specify an Internet timeserver to set your 8685’s clock automatically. In
addition, Optimod PC Remote software can automatically set your Optimod’s lo-

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-39
cal time, OFFSET, and TIME SERVER to reflect the Windows settings in the machine
running PC Remote software. See Synchronizing Optimod to a Network Timeserver
on page 2-59. If you are planning to set your Optimod’s time via PC Remote
and/or the Internet, skip to step (C).
A) LOCATE to SYSTEM SETUP > PLACE > DATE > TIME.
B) LOCATE to the TIME AND DATE screen.
a) Choose TIME FORMAT as desired (either 24-hour time or AM/PM-style time).
b) Set hours, minutes, and seconds, in that order.
Seconds will stop advancing when you set hours and minutes. So set seconds
last.
c) Choose the desired date format.
d) Set today’s date.
e) If you want the clock to automatically reset itself to conform to Daylight
Saving Time (Summer Time), use the DAYLIGHT SAVING MONTH/WEEK and the
STANDARD TIME MONTH/WEEK fields to specify when Daylight Saving Time
begins and ends in your area. If you do not wish to use this feature, leave
these controls set OFF.
C) (Optional) > LOCATE to the STATION IDENTIFIER screen to specify your station’s
identifier (call sign or call letters).
2. Locate to System Setup > Automation.
3. If the far left button reads “Disabled,” choose it and press Enter to enable
automation.
This button lets you enable or disable all automation events easily without
having to edit individual automation events.
4. To add an automation event:
A) Select ADD.
B) You can program an event that occurs only once or an event that occurs in a
weekly preset pattern. Highlight either SET BY WEEK or SET BY DATE and press
the ENTER button.
C) For SET BY WEEK:
a) LOCATE to the each day of the week in turn; then use the knob to turn the
day on or off.
You can program the event to occur on as many days as you wish.
b) LOCATE to the Event Time field and set the hour, minute, and second when
the automation event is to occur.
Automation events have a “start” time but no “stop” time. The 8685 will
stay in the state specified by an existing automation event indefinitely,
until its state is changed by another automation event or by another ac-

2-40
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
tion (like a user’s interacting with the front panel or with the PC Remote
application).
c) LOCATE to the Event Type field and set the desired event. You can recall any
factory processing preset, user processing preset, and Setup. You can
activate BYPASS mode (for scheduled transmission network testing), TONE,
and EXIT TEST, which returns you to the processing preset that was active
before you invoked TONE or BYPASS.
Although two Setups might only differ by one parameter (for example,
different values of SURROUND DIALNORM), recalling Setups also provides an
easy way to automate complicated changes involving many parameters
like input/output routing.
D) For SET BY DATE, set the desired date and time for the event and specify the
Event Type.
E) Choose DONE and press ENTER.
You will return to the automation event list. You may have to scroll the
list (using the knob) to see the event that you just added.
5. To edit an existing event:
A) Using the knob, highlight the event you wish to edit.
B) Select the EDIT button and press ENTER. The edit screen appears.
C) Edit the event as desired.
D) When you have finished making edits, choose DONE and press ENTER.
6. To delete an event:
A) Highlight the event to delete with the knob.
B) Choose DELETE and press ENTER.
7. Choose DONE and press Enter to leave the Automation screen.
Security and Passcode Programming
You can use multi-level passcodes to control access to the 8685 via the front panel
and via PC Remote. You can configure a given passcode to allow one of the following
levels of access:
1. All Access (i.e., administrator level)
2. All Access except Security
3. All screens except Modify and Security
4. Recall, Modify, and Automation
5. Recall Presets and program Automation

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-41
6. Recall Presets
Only passcodes with ALL ACCESS let you do software updates and set passcode permissions.
Each Passcode is unique; the software will not let you create duplicate Passcodes.
Further, to prevent accidental lockout, the software requires you to have at least
one passcode with ALL ACCESS (administrator) privileges.
Your Optimod secures User Presets by encrypting them (using the Advanced Encryption
Standard algorithm with the session passcode as its key) when PC Remote
fetches them. Hence, a packet sniffer cannot intercept User Presets in plaintext form.
PC Remote then writes the fetched User Presets in encrypted form on your hard
drive, where they remain for the duration of your PC Remote session.
If PC Remote exits normally, it will erase these temporary User Preset files
from your computer’s hard disk. If it does not exit normally, these files
will remain in encrypted form. However, the next time that PC Remote
starts up, it will automatically clean up any orphaned files.
1. From the main menu, locate to SYSTEM SETUP and then to SECURITY.
The Security screen lets you set front-panel lockout time, choose if you want the
meters to be viewable when the 8685 is in lockout mode, create new passcodes,
review and/or assign authorization levels for existing passcodes, and delete passcodes.
If the 8685 is already under security control, you must enter an ALL ACCESS-level
passcode to enter the Security screen.
2. Set the Security Screen “Lockout” parameter.
The choices are 1, 5, 15, or 30 minutes, 1, 2, 4, or 8 hours, or OFF.
Front Panel lockout only occurs when the lockout value is not OFF.
The Lockout field sets the time delay between the last user interaction with the
front panel and automatic front-panel lockout. Once the front panel is locked
out, you can only regain access by entering a valid passcode.
The Lockout field does not affect PC Remote connections. Once connected, the
PC Remote application does not time out automatically; it remains connected until
explicitly disconnected by its user.
The lockout timer begins at the top of the next minute. For example, if you set
Lockout to be 1 minute at 9:10:33 AM and do not touch the front panel again,
the front panel will lock out at 9:12:00 AM.
3. Set the Security Screen “View Meters” parameter.
Select YES to display meters and NO to hide meters when lockout is active.

2-42
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
4. Create a new passcode (optional).
A) Select the “New” button from the Security screen.
The “Create New Passcode Screen” appears.
B) Use the “virtual keyboard” to create a passcode.
Use the LOCATE button to locate to each character. Then press ENTER to
accept that character.
The letters on the virtual keyboard are all uppercase. When you use the
passcode later, you must enter it using capital letters because the passcode
is case sensitive. For example, if you set up your passcode as
OOPS25, you must enter it as OOPS25, not as oops25 or Oops25.
C) When you have finished creating
your passcode, write it down so
you do not forget it.
D) Choose SAVE. The Security screen
reappears.
E) Initially, your new passcode has
ALL ACCESS (administrator) privileges.
To change its privileges,
LOCATE to the PASSCODE
AUTHORIZES ACCESS TO field. Then
turn the knob to choose the desired
privilege level.
F) Choose DONE or press ESCAPE when you are finished. The System Setup screen
appears.
5. Edit or delete an existing passcode (optional).
A) LOCATE to SYSTEM SETUP and then
to SECURITY
If the 8685 is already under security
control, you must enter an ALL
ACCESS-level passcode to enter the
Security screen.
B) LOCATE to the CURRENT PASSCODE
field. Use the blue knob to scroll
through the passcodes until you
see the one you wish to edit or delete.
C) To delete the passcode, choose the DELETE button.
At least one passcode must have “All Access” privileges. If you try to delete
the last “All Access” passcode, the following dialog box will appear:
You cannot delete this Passcode because you must have at least one
Passcode with All Access privileges. Press OK to continue.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-43
D) To edit the passcode, LOCATE to the PASSCODE AUTHORIZES ACCESS TO field.
Then turn the knob to choose the desired privilege level.
E) Choose DONE when you are finished. The System Setup screen appears.
You may edit or delete more than one passcode before choosing DONE.
Choosing DONE on the Security Screen automatically saves all of your Passcode
settings.
To Unlock the Front Panel
A) On the 8685 front panel, operate any button or the knob.
The ENTER PASSCODE screen appears.
B) Enter your passcode using the virtual keyboard.
If you enter a Passcode that does not exist, you are returned to the ENTER
PASSCODE screen.
C) Press ENTER to unlock.
You will be able to access 8685 functions allowed by the privilege level of
your passcode.
After you have finished working, the panel will automatically re-lock after
the time delay set in step 2 on page 2-41. If you have ALL ACCESS privileges,
you can set the delay as desired by following the instructions in
that step.
8685 User Interface Behavior during Lockout
If security is set so that the meters are hidden during lockout, a Lockout screen replaces
the Meters screen. It displays Input Status, Time, Date, Studio Name, and Help
Text.
If you set security to hide meters when the 8685 is locked out, the On-Air Preset and
Meters do not appear. This prevents your competitors from seeing them if your 8685
is installed in a shared facility.
The diagnostic screens are unavailable during lockout unless you enter a passcode of
any privilege level.
Default ADMIN Passcode
When you first open to the Security screen on the 8685, there is one default passcode:
ADMIN (all capitals), which has ALL SCREENS privileges. This passcode permits
an initial connection to the 8685 via PC remote; you must enter ADMIN when PC
Remote asks you for a passcode.
The front panel lockout feature’s default setting is OFF, so your 8685 will not have
the lockout feature functioning until a lockout time is set.
Any passcode you have programmed into the 8685 (via step 3 on page 2-41) allows
PC Remote connections with the same privileges. For example, if you connect to the
PC Remote and use a Passcode with ALL ACCESS access, this Passcode will allow full

2-44
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
access to the 8685 from that PC. Conversely, if you connect to the 8685 with a Passcode
that only allows access to the “Presets” on the 8685, you will only be able to
recall presets from the PC Remote.
To ensure good security, you should first create a new ALL ACCESS passcode
and then delete the ADMIN passcode (in that order) to prevent others from
accessing your 8685 with the ADMIN passcode. The longer a passcode is, the
more secure it is. Moreover, the most secure passcodes use a random combination of
letters and numbers.
Security and Orban’s PC Remote Application
Any passcodes set on the 8685 will allow the PC Remote application to connect via
direct, modem and Ethernet connections at the level authorized by the passcode.
• If no Passcodes are assigned to 8685 except the ADMIN default passcode;
When you attempt a connection to the 8685 via Direct, Modem, and Ethernet
connections, the “Enter Passcode Screen” will prompt you to enter a Passcode.
Type in ADMIN from your keyboard. This will allow you full access to the 8685 via
the PC Remote.
To ensure that your 8685 is fully protected, create a new passcode that has ALL
SCREENS access. Then delete the ADMIN passcode.
See step 3 on page 2-41 for instructions on how to create a new passcode and
step (5.C) on page 2-42 for instructions on how to delete a passcode.
• Using passcodes to end PC Remote connections from the 8685 front panel:
If you try to access an 8685 from its front panel while a remote connection exists,
a message will appear asking you whether you want to disconnect the remote
connection. If you choose to disconnect the connection, the “Enter Passcode
Screen” will appear if the unit is locked out.
Passcodes and Software Updates
PC Remote allows a software update to occur regardless of passcode level of the
8685 � PC Remote connection. However, PC Remote will only offer to perform a
software update if the version of PC Remote higher than the version of the software
installed in your 8685. Hence, this does not create a significant security issue; the
8685 is silent for only a few seconds when it reboots following a software update
because the DSP continues to process audio while the update is occurring.
If you have forgotten your “All Access” passcode…
You can access the 8685 even if you have forgotten your ALL SCREENS passcode.
A) Press the ENTER button within two seconds after the 8685 displays its “Please
wait while Optimod initializes” screen upon boot-up.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-45
B) Choose whether you want the 8685 to delete all passcodes while retaining
other customizations (like I/O levels and user presets) or if want the 8685 to
reset itself to its factory defaults. In either case, all existing passcodes will be
erased.
• If you choose to reset the unit to factory defaults, the 8685 will subsequently
ask whether it should erase all user presets or retain them.
• If you choose to only delete passcodes, the front panel will not unlock
automatically. After you have deleted the passcodes, there will be only one
passcode, ADMIN, which has All Access privileges. Use this passcode to
unlock the front panel normally.
• If you reset the unit to its factory defaults, the panel will unlock automatically.
Please note that resetting the unit to its factory defaults:
• Resets all global parameters to factory default settings
• Deletes all Automation Events
• Restores Remote Interface inputs 1-8 to “no function”.
Administering the 8685 through its RS-232 Serial
Port or Ethernet
You can connect a PC to the 8685’s RS-232 serial port or to its Ethernet port by using
a terminal program like HyperTerminal to administer security and to recall presets
using simple ASCII commands.
You must configure the 8685 so that it loads the correct serial port driver when
booting up. You do this by setting the serial interface type in the NETWORK screen
and then rebooting the 8685. There are two available drivers: One driver supports
simple ASCII commands; the other driver supports communication via TCP/IP and PPP.
Using the RS-232 port to connect to 8685 PC Remote software via a direct
cable connection or modem requires configuring the port as PPP. However,
in most cases you will use Ethernet to connect to PC Remote.
The 8685’s two RS-485 ports (Serial Ports 2 and 3) are dedicated to sending
and receiving Dolby Digital metadata; they cannot be used to control
the 8685.
• Valid commands are in either upper or lower case, not a combination.
• Only one valid command is permitted per line.
• The 8685 will not respond to unrecognized commands.
• The character code supported is ASCII.

2-46
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
Connecting via the RS-232 Port Using a Terminal Program on a
PC
• The RS-232 port must be configured as “ASCII.”
• The 8685’s RS-232 port can be used with any computer or terminal that is compatible
with the RS-232 standard interface.
• Automation systems capable of sending ASCII via an RS-232 port can control the
8685.
• Users will connect their computer or terminal to the 8685 with a null modem cable.
Only direct connections are supported; there is no provision for communications
via modem.
• Communications configuration is 9600, N, 8, 1, no handshaking
(flow control = none).
• To facilitate maintaining security at sites shared with others, the 8685 monitors
the RS-232 port for 30 minutes after power-up or after the last valid command is
received, after which all commands are ignored except for recalling a Preset or
Setup.
To allow the 8685 to be controlled through its RS-232 terminal via a PC running a
terminal program like HyperTerminal:
A) From the main menu, LOCATE to SYSTEM SETUP > NETWORK REMOTE > NETWORK.
The current setting of the RS-232 Serial Port will appear. If it is not already set
to ASCII, set it there.
B) If you have changed the configuration of the RS-232 port to ASCII from
DIRECT or MODEM, you must power-cycle the 8685. It will reboot and load the
new serial driver.
C) Connect an available RS-232 serial port (COM port) on your computer to the
RS-232 port on the 8685 via a null modem cable.
You do not need to remove power from either your computer or the
8685 when you do this.
D) Start HyperTerminal. (You can usually access it from Start > Programs > Accessories
> Communication.)
The NEW CONNECTION dialog box appears.
E) Give your new connection a name and choose OK.
The CONNECT TO dialog box appears.
F) Set the CONNECT USING field to “Direct to COMx,” where “x” is the COM port
you are using on your PC.
G) Choose OK.
The PORT SETTINGS dialog box appears.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-47
H) Set the port properties as follows:
Bits per second ..........9600
Data Bits.....................8
Parity .........................none
Stop bits .....................1
Flow control...............none
I) Choose OK.
J) LOCATE to File > Properties > Settings > ASCII Setup. Set the ASCII Setup properties
as follows:
Check: • Send line ends with line feeds
• Echo typed characters locally
• Wrap lines that exceed terminal width
Uncheck: • Append line feeds to incoming line ends
• Force incoming data to 7 bit ASCII
Leave “Line delay” and “Character delay” at their default values.
K) Activate the CAPS LOCK on your computer to ensure that you type in uppercase.
You can now type in commands described in the specification in
Administrative Operations below.
Administrative Operations
In the following tables of commands and responses:
• Text that the user enters appears in MONOSPACED BOLD.
• Responses that the 8685 transmits appear in monospaced normal.
• The symbol “�” means CR (for received commands) and CR+LF (for transmitted
responses from 8685).
1. To recall a preset:
Command Response
RP XXXXXXX[PASSCODE]� (valid passcode and preset name)
ON AIR: XXXXXXX
(invalid passcode)
[no error message is issued]
In the above table: XXXXXXX = the preset name;
PASSCODE = any valid passcode.
• If a non-existent preset name, control value, and/or an invalid passcode is en-

2-48
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
tered, the 8685 will ignore the command.
• You can apply this command anytime after the 8685 boots up. The 30-minute
timeout does not apply.
• This command is useful in interfacing automation systems to the 8685.
2. To recall a Setup:
Command Response
RS XXXXXXX[PASSCODE]� (valid passcode and Setup name)
ON AIR: XXXXXXX
(invalid passcode)
[no error message is issued]
In the above table: XXXXXXX = the Setup name;
PASSCODE = any valid passcode.
• If a non-existent Setup name, control value, and/or an invalid passcode is entered,
the 8685 will ignore the command.
• You can apply this command anytime after the 8685 boots up. The 30-minute
timeout does not apply.
• This command is useful in interfacing automation systems to the 8685.
3. To restore factory defaults:
Command Response
RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULTS� Are you sure (yes/no)?�
YES� (factory defaults restored)
Restored�
NO�
(or any response other than
YES�”)
(abort)
Defaults not restored�
To protect against accidental loss of settings, you must enter the entire command
string and a “YES” response in uppercase.
Restoring factory defaults does the following:
• Deletes all User Presets
• Resets all global parameters to factory default settings
• Deletes all Automation Events
• Restores Remote Interface inputs 1-8 to “no function”

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-49
4. To unlock an 8685:
The following command assigns an ALL ACCESS passcode. This passcode is then
available from the front panel or when you connect normally via the 8685PC application
(through the 8685’s Serial Port #1 or optional Ethernet connections).
Command Response
PW ########� (valid passcode entry) Accepted�
(invalid passcode entry) Denied�
Valid arguments follow the same rules for passcode entries made from the front
panel and via 8685PC:
• Passcode length must be 1 to 8 characters.
• Only alphanumeric characters are allowed (0…9 and A…Z). No punctuation or
extended characters are allowed.
• Lower case letters included in the argument will automatically be converted
to upper case.
5. To change the IP Address:
Command Response
IP XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX� (valid IP address)
IP: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx entered�
(invalid IP address)
ERROR. Using IP: yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy�
IP?� Using IP: yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy�
In the above table: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX = the specified IP address;
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy = the present (or default) IP address in
use.
192.168.254.254 is the factory default.
Any out-of-range or invalid characters render invalid the whole IP address
that you entered.
6. To change the Subnet Mask:
Command Response
SN XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX� (valid subnet)
SN: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx entered�
(invalid subnet)
ERROR. Using SN: yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy�
SN?� Using SN: yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy�

2-50
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
In the above table: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX = the specified subnet mask;
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy = the present subnet mask in use.
255.255.255.0 is the factory default.
Valid subnet masks are defined according to existing standards. Any out-ofrange
or invalid characters render the whole argument invalid.
7. To change the Gateway:
Command Response
GW XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX� (valid gateway)
GW: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx entered�
(invalid gateway)
ERROR. Using gw: yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy�
GW?� Using GW: yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy�
In the above table: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX = the specified gateway;
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy = the present gateway in use.
Valid gateways are defined according to existing standards. Any out-of-range or
invalid characters render the whole argument invalid.
8. To change the Port:
Command Response
PO XXXXX � (valid port)
PO: xxxxx entered�
(invalid port)
ERROR. Using PO: yyyyy�
PO?� Using PO: yyyyy�
In the above table: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX = the specified port;
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy = the present port in use.
Port 6201 is the factory default.
Valid ports are defined according to existing standards. Any out-of-range or invalid
characters render the whole argument invalid.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-51
9. To change the Terminal Port:
Command Response
TP XXXXX � (valid terminal port)
TP: xxxxx entered�
(invalid terminal port)
ERROR. Using TP: yyyyy�
TP?� Using TP: yyyyy�
In the above table: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX =s the specified terminal port;
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy = the present terminal port in use.
Port 23 is the factory default.
Valid ports are defined according to existing standards. Any out-of-range or invalid
characters render the whole argument invalid.
10. To change the Modem Init string:
Applies only for modem connections (via 8685’s Serial 1 port)
Command Response
MO ATF0S0=4� MO[ATF0S0=4] entered�
MO? Using MO[ATF0S0=4]�
The 8685 appends CR+LF to the modem init string as transmitted to a modem
(physically connected to Serial 1). The 8685 will not perform any case conversion
to the argument (i.e., lower case arguments will be transmitted to the modem as
lower case).
11. To change the RS-232 serial port Interface Type:
Command Response
TY M|D|A� (valid argument)
Ty: Modem|Direct|ASCII entered�
(invalid argument)
ERROR. Using Ty: M|D|A�
TY?� Using Ty: Modem|Direct|ASCII�
12. To fetch diagnostic information from the 8685:
This provides a status report indicating essential information:
Command Response
ST� 8685 V 1.0.x.xx
Station Name: undefined
Access Level: 0: all access
Bootup: Sat Jan 01 02:26:37 2000
Ethernet Adapter's MAC Address: xx-xx-

2-52
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
xx-xx-xx-xx
Memory Total: 16121856
Memory Available: 6598384
Available Space: 8504 Kbytes
Dialnorm value=00
485 loopback ok
Connecting to the 8685’s Ethernet Port or RS-232 Port Using
TCP/IP
You can connect a terminal emulation application that supports the TCP/IP protocol
to the 8685 via its RS-232 or Ethernet ports. This is mainly useful when interfacing
the 8685 to third-party automation systems that support TCP/IP. If such an automation
system only supports ASCII serial commands, you must configure the 8685’s serial
port as described in Connecting via the RS-232 Port Using a Terminal Program on
a PC on page2-46.
• If you wish to use the RS-232 port for this application or for connecting to 8685
PC Remote software running on a PC, the port must be configured as DIRECT or
MODEM, either of which will load the port’s PPP driver following a reboot.
If you will be using Ethernet, the RS-232 configuration does not matter.
A) From the main menu, LOCATE to SYSTEM SETUP > NETWORK REMOTE > NETWORK.
The current setting of the RS-232 Serial Port will appear. Set it to DIRECT.
(MODEM will also work.)
If you plan to connect the 8685 PC Remote Application to the 8685’s RS-
232 serial port, you must choose DIRECT or MODEM as appropriate for the
kind of connection you are planning to make — DIRECT for a null modem
cable connection to a PC’s RS-232 serial port and MODEM for a modem
connection. Either choice will cause the 8685’s PPP serial port driver to be
loaded the next time the 8685 is booted up.
B) If you have changed the configuration of the RS-232 from ASCII, you must
power-cycle the 8685. It will reboot and load the new serial driver.
• You can connect a terminal emulation application to the 8685’s Ethernet or RS-
232 Serial ports via TCP/IP, port 23 (which is the standard Telnet port and the
8685 factory default). When connected like this, you can:
• recall Presets (which contain the settings that determine the “sound” of the
processing); see step 1 on page 2-47
• recall Setups (which contain technical settings for input levels, output levels,
routing, etc.); see step 2 on page 2-48
However, you cannot perform other administrative functions. These require operating
the 8685 from its front panel (which is the most straightforward way), using
8685 PC Remote software, or connecting a terminal program to the RS-232

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-53
port in ASCII mode. (See Installing 8685 PC Remote Control Software on page 2-
62.)
• To set a different port number:
A) From the main menu, LOCATE to SYSTEM SETUP > NETWORK REMOTE > NETWORK.
The current setting of the Terminal Port will appear.
B) If you wish to change the Terminal Port, LOCATE to TERMINAL PORT. Press the
ENTER button to access the SET TERMINAL PORT screen.
C) LOCATE to CLEAR, then press the ENTER button.
This will allow you to enter the Terminal Port number.
D) LOCATE to the first number and press the ENTER button; repeat until you have
selected all the numbers in the Terminal Port. When the Terminal Port entry is
complete, LOCATE to SAVE and press the ENTER button.
• The IP address for this Ethernet connection is the same as the IP address set in
step (1.A) on page 2-56 and is visible in the SYSTEM SETUP > NETWORK REMOTE >
NETWORK screen.
• A serial connection uses a fixed IP address: 192.168.168.101.
To control the 8685 externally via TCP/IP, establish a Telnet/SSH connection and issue
commands and parameters, either by typing them directly into a Telnet/SSH client or
by placing them within batch files. Then process them with a scriptable Telnet/SSH
client that supports this operation, such as PuTTY, along with its companion command-line
interpreter, Plink. Both of these applications are available for free
download from the following web site:
http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/
The following description is based on PuTTY Release 0.55:
A) Start PuTTY.
The SESSION window appears.
B) Click the TELNET button, which is hard-wired for Port 23.
C) In the TERMINAL category, check “Implicit CR in every LF.”
You should not have to change any other PuTTY Terminal, Window, or
Connection defaults
D) Specify the host name or IP address:
• If you are connecting through the 8685’s RS-232 port, type 192.168.168.101
into the “Host Name (or IP address)” field.
• If you are connecting through the 8685’s Ethernet interface, type the
8685’s IP address into the “Host Name (or IP address)” field.

2-54
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
The IP address for this connection is the same as the IP address set in step
(1.A) on page 2-56 and is visible in the SYSTEM SETUP > NETWORK REMOTE >
NETWORK screen.
E) Name and save the Session if you wish.
F) Click OPEN.
G) Activate the CAPS LOCK on your computer to ensure that you type in uppercase.
You can now recall presets and Setups. Refer to step 1 on page 2-47 and
step 2 on page 2-48.
Using the API: Example
These examples show how PuTTY and Plink can be used to control the Optimod using
scripting and batch files on a computer connected to the same Ethernet subnet
as the Optimod being controlled. Plink and all associated scripting text, PuTTY, and
batch files should be located together in the same user-defined directory unless the
path is specified in the .bat files.
In the example, replace “192.168.1.1” with the addressed Optimod’s IP address and
“23” with the Optimod’s port number. 23 is the default; see step (B) on page 2-53.
Replace “passcode” with a passcode having any access level (because all levels allow
you to recall presets). See Security and Passcode Programming on page 2-40.
Each control session requires two ASCII files:
• a .bat file that calls Plink to establish a Telnet connection to the Optimod
• a reference.txt file that contains the actual control script.
Recalling a Processing Preset
This function will recall the TV 5B DRAMA factory preset and put it on-air. (See
step 1 on page 2-47.)
The file “recall_tv_5b_drama.bat” contains:
plink -telnet -P 23 192.168.1.1 < recall_tv_5b_drama.txt
The file “recall_tv_5b_drama.txt” contains:
RP TV 5B DRAMA[password]
disconnect
Remote Control Interface Programming
This section describes how to program the opto-isolated GPI remote control interface.
See step 5 on page 2-3 for wiring instructions.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-55
1. Locate to the System Setup > Network Remote > Remote Interface
screen.
2. Program one or more remote control interfaces.
To program a given remote input, use LOCATE to highlight the input. As you turn
the control knob, the functions listed below will appear in the highlighted field.
A momentary pulse of current will switch most functions, except as noted.
• Preset Name: activates that processing preset.
Any factory or user preset can be recalled via the control interface.
Presets programmed into the Remote Interface can be recalled more
quickly than they can via the 8685’s front panel or PC Remote. If you
need to recall a preset within one video frame, we advise using the Remote
Interface to do so. This advice also applies to the PASS-THROUGH
preset and user presets based on it.
Application example: By saving your active preset as two User Presets,
identical except that one has the 8685’s Loudness Controller turned on
and one has it turned off, you can use the GPI inputs to smoothly activate
and defeat the Loudness Controller by recalling the appropriate User Preset.
• Setup Name: activates that Setup.
You can save multiple setups that do things like changing the global
DIALNORM value and reassigning inputs and outputs in the routing
switcher.
• Bypass: switches the Bypass Test Mode on the air.
Note that this is a test mode; to smoothly defeat the audio processing except
for peak limiting (to accommodate network program pass-through,
for example), recall the factory PASS-THROUGH preset or, if you need a different
bypass gain than the factory PASS-THROUGH preset provides, a user
preset you have edited and saved based on the PASS-THROUGH preset.
• Tone: switches a Tone Test on the air.
• Exit Test: If a test mode (Tone or Bypass) is switched on the air, EXIT TEST reverts
to the normal operating mode using the previous processing preset.
• Reset Clock To Hour
Note that it is usually more convenient to synchronize your 8685 to a
network timeserver than to use this function. See Synchronizing Optimod
to a Network Timeserver on page 2-59.
• Reset to Midnight (See the note immediately above.)
• No Function: remote input is disabled.

2-56
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
End remote control interface programming.
When you are finished programming the remote control interface, press the
ESCAPE button once to return to the System Setup screen.
Networking and Remote Control
This section describes how to connect a PC to your 8685 remotely for downloading
software upgrades and for PC Remote Control.
The 8685 has a built-in Ethernet connector that can be used with 10 Mbps or 100
Mbps networks using the TCP/IP protocol. You can also connect a PC to the 8685
through the 8685’s RS-232 serial port, either by modem or directly through a null
modem cable.
1. Prepare the 8685 for a network connection.
[Skip this step if you will not be using an Ethernet connection.]
A) Set the IP address:
a) From the main menu, LOCATE to SYSTEM SETUP > NETWORK REMOTE >
NETWORK.
b) If you wish to change the IP Address, LOCATE to SET ADDRESS. Press the
ENTER button to access the SET IP ADDRESS screen.
192.168.254.254 is the 8685 default setting.
c) LOCATE to CLEAR, then press the ENTER button.
This will allow you to enter your IP address.
d) LOCATE to the first number and press the ENTER button; repeat until you
have selected all the numbers in the IP address assigned by your network
administrator. When the IP address entry is complete, LOCATE to SAVE and
press the ENTER button.
B) If necessary, set the Subnet Mask assigned by your network administrator:
a) LOCATE to SET SUBNET.
Unless previously set away from the factory default, the Subnet Mask
should indicate 255.255.255.0.
b) Press the ENTER button to access the SET SUBNET MASK screen.
c) LOCATE to the first number and press the ENTER button; repeat until you
have selected all the numbers in the Subnet Mask. When the Subnet Mask
entry is complete, toggle to SAVE and press the ENTER button.
The 8685 will not accept an invalid Subnet Mask (like 255.255.255.300).
C) If necessary, set the Gateway assigned by your network administrator.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-57
To cross subnets, you must specify a gateway. If the PC and 8685 are on
the same subnet, then it is unnecessary to specify a gateway.
If the gateway, port, and firewall (if used) are configured correctly, it is
possible to connect 8685 PC Remote to an 8685 via a VPN.
a) LOCATE to SET GATEWAY.
Unless previously set away from the factory default, the Gateway should
indicate 0.0.0.0.
b) Press the ENTER button to access the Set Gateway Address screen.
c) LOCATE to the first number and press the ENTER button; repeat until you
have selected all the numbers in the Gateway. When the Gateway entry is
complete, toggle to SAVE and press the ENTER button.
D) If necessary, set the Port assigned by your network administrator.
If you are behind a firewall, this port needs to be opened in your firewall
in order to communicate with the 8685 PC Remote application.
a) LOCATE to SET PORT.
The default port is 6201.
b) Press the ENTER button to access the SET PORT ADDRESS screen.
c) LOCATE to the first number and press the ENTER button; repeat until you
have selected all the numbers in the Port. When the Port entry is complete,
toggle to SAVE and press the ENTER button.
E) Connect your network’s Ethernet cable to the card.
This completes setup of network parameters.
2. Prepare the 8685 for direct serial connection through its RS-232 serial
port:
[Skip this step if you will not be using a direct serial connection.]
A) Configuring the 8685 network screen settings:
a) From the main menu, LOCATE to SYSTEM SETUP > NETWORK REMOTE >
NETWORK.
b) LOCATE to INTERFACE TYPE.
c) Turn the blue knob until DIRECT appears in the INTERFACE TYPE field.
B) Set 8685 passcodes as desired. See Security and Passcode Programming on
page 2-40.
C) Connect the cable:
a) Connect one end of a null modem cable to the RS-232 connector on the
8685’s rear panel.
b) Connect the other end to your computer’s COM port.

2-58
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
D) If you have changed the INTERFACE TYPE from ASCII, reboot the 8685 to load
the RS-232 port’s PPP driver.
You are now ready to connect your computer to your 8685 through a null modem
cable connected to your computer’s serial port. Refer to Installing 8685 PC Remote
Control Software (page 2-62).
3. Prepare the 8685 for modem connection through its RS-232 serial port:
[Skip this step if you will not be using a modem connection.]
A) Configure the network screen settings on your 8685:
a) From the main menu, LOCATE to SYSTEM SETUP > NETWORK REMOTE >
NETWORK.
b) LOCATE to INTERFACE TYPE.
c) Turn the blue knob until MODEM appears in the INTERFACE TYPE field.
B) Set the modem initialization string:
a) LOCATE to INIT STRING and the SET STRING button.
b) If the INIT STRING is S0=4, this is correct. Skip to step (C) below.
S0=4 is the 8685 default setting. This activates auto-answer functionality
in the modem.
c) If the INIT STRING reads UNDEFINED, press the ENTER button to access the
MODEM INIT STRING screen.
d) Using the LOCATE button, toggle to CLEAR. Then press the ENTER button.
This will clear the INIT STRING field of UNDEFINED so that you can enter
your Init String.
e) Set the INIT STRING to S0=4.
LOCATE to the first number and press the ENTER button; repeat until you
have selected all the numbers in the Init String.
C) Set 8685 passcodes as desired. See Security and Passcode Programming on
page 2-40.
D) Modem setup:
a) You will need two modems and two available phone lines, one of each for
your PC and your 8685.
Reminder: Orban Customer Service supports only the 3Com/U.S. Robotics®
56kbps fax modem EXT on the 8685 side (although other 56kbps
modems will often work OK).
b) Connect the modem to the 8685’s RS-232 port with a standard (not null)
modem cable.
You can use either an internal or an external modem with your PC.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-59
c) Connect the telephone line from the wall phone jack to the wall
connection icon on the back of the modem (modem in).
d) Connect the modem cable from the modem to the RS-232 port of the 8685.
e) Set the modem to AUTO ANSWER and turn it on.
For 3Com/U.S. Robotics® 56kbps fax modem EXT, set dip switches 3, 5,
and 8 in the down position to activate the AUTO ANSWER setting. All
other dip switches should be set to the up position.
E) If you have changed the INTERFACE TYPE from ASCII, reboot the 8685 to load
the RS-232 port’s PPP driver.
Synchronizing Optimod to a Network Timeserver
1. From the main menu, Locate to System Setup > Place/Date/Time > Time
Sync.
A) Use the SYNC PROTOCOL control to choose either TIME PROTOCOL or SNTP.
• Select TIME PROTOCOL if the Optimod is behind a firewall that does not pass
UDP packets. TIME PROTOCOL selects the time protocol as described in the
standard RFC868. This method uses TCP on port 37.
• Select SNTP if your network timeserver supports the Simple Network Time
Protocol as described in standard RFC1769. This method uses UDP on port
123.
Ask your network administrator which protocols are available. SNTP is
slightly more accurate.
B) LOCATE to SYNC PERIOD. Using the knob, choose how often your Optimod will
automatically update its internal clock to the timeserver you selected.
The choices are OFF, 8 HOURS, and 24 HOURS.
If the connection to the timeserver fails (due to network overload or other problems),
your Optimod will try once per hour to synchronize until it is successful.
C) LOCATE to OFFSET. Using the knob, set it to the difference (in hours) between
your time zone and Universal Time (UTC).
UTC is also known as GMT, or Greenwich Mean Time.
• The value can range between –12 and +12 hours. If this value is set to 0,
your Optimod’s time will be the same as UTC.
• You can empirically adjust this value until the correct time for your location
is displayed after you synchronize your Optimod to a timeserver.

2-60
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
2. Choose a timeserver.
http://tf.nist.gov/tf-cgi/servers.cgi provides a current list of timeservers available
on the Internet. You network may also have a local timeserver; ask your network
administrator.
3. Set up timeserver parameters.
You can specify the timeserver either from your Optimod’s front panel or from
its PC Remote software. From the front panel, you can only enter the timeserver’s
IP address (for example, 192.43.244.18). If you specify the timeserver
from PC Remote, you can specify either its named address (for example,
time.nist.gov) or its IP address.
4. Specify the time sync parameters from your Optimod’s front panel:
[Skip this step if you wish to specify the timeserver and time sync parameters
from your Windows XP computer.]
A) LOCATE to the SET SERVER button and press ENTER.
a) LOCATE to CLEAR. Then press the ENTER button.
This will allow you to enter the IP address of the desired timeserver.
b) Use the LOCATE button, toggle to the first number and then press the
ENTER button; repeat until you have selected all the numbers in the IP address.
When the IP address entry is complete, toggle to SAVE and press the
ENTER button.
B) LOCATE to the SYNC NOW field and press ENTER to test your settings. Your Optimod’s
display should indicate that it is connecting to the IP address that you
specified. When the connection is successful, the Optimod’s clock will automatically
synchronize to the timeserver.
• If the connection is not successful within five seconds, the display will indicate
that the connection failed. This means either that the timeserver is too
busy or that your setup cannot connect to the timeserver. Double-check the
IP address. If you are behind a firewall, make sure that port 123 is open.
• If your connection failed, the gateway address might not be set correctly
on your Optimod. The gateway address for the timeserver connection is the
same gateway address that you set in step (1.C) on page 2-56. If you do not
know the correct gateway address, you can often discover it by connecting
a Windows computer to the same Ethernet cable that is ordinarily plugged
into your Optimod. Ascertain that the computer can connect to the Internet.
At the command prompt, type ipconfig. The computer will return
the “Default Gateway.”
5. Specify the time sync from the Optimod PC Remote software:
[Skip this step if you wish to specify the timeserver and time sync parameters
from your Optimod’s front panel.]

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-61
Optimod PC Remote software can automatically set your Optimod’s local time,
OFFSET, and TIME SERVER to reflect the Windows settings in the computer running
PC Remote software.
See Installing 8685 PC Remote Control Software starting on page 2-62
and Using the 8685 PC Remote Control Software starting on page 3-65.
If you are running Windows 2000, you cannot specify the timeserver from
your computer. However, you can still set your Optimod’s clock and offset.
A) In Windows, navigate to the CONTROL PANEL > DATE AND TIME > TIME ZONE tab.
B) Set time zone to correspond to your local time zone.
C) In Windows, navigate to the CONTROL PANEL > DATE AND TIME > INTERNET TIME
tab.
D) If you are running Windows XP:
a) Check “Automatically synchronize with an Internet time server” to set your
Optimod’s SYNC PERIOD to “24.”
b) Set “Server” to the desired timeserver.
c) Click the “Update Now” button to synchronize your computer’s clock to
the selected timeserver. If this is successful, this means that you can connect
to the selected timeserver over your network.
• The Internet Time tab is not available in Windows 2000. If you are running
Optimod PC Remote on Windows 2000, you must enter the timeserver from
your Optimod’s front panel as an IP address (step 4 on page 2-60).
• If the timeserver you selected in Windows is a named address (not an IP
address), the 8685 will resolve it correctly but the IP address that appears in
your Optimod’s display will be 0.0.0.0.
• To use PC Remote to turn off your Optimod’s automatic synchronization,
uncheck “Automatically synchronize with an Internet time server” on your
PC. Then click the “Update Now” button on PC Remote.
E) Locate to Optimod PC Remote’s SETUP/UTILITY tab and click the SET 8685
CLOCK button.
• If you are running Windows XP, PC Remote will download your computer’s
currently specified timeserver into your Optimod.
• PC Remote will adjust your Optimod’s Offset setting to correspond to your
computer’s time zone setting.
• PC Remote will synchronize your Optimod’s clock with your computer’s
clock.
F) It is wise to disconnect from PC Remote and then to LOCATE to the SYNC NOW
field on your Optimod and press ENTER [step (4.B) on page 2-60]. This is to test
your Optimod’s ability to synchronize to the selected timeserver and to ensure

2-62
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
that your Optimod’s clock is set accurately. If the test fails, see the comments
under step (4.B) on page 2-60, particularly those regarding setting the gateway.
NOTE: Manually setting your Optimod’s clock via Set Time, Set Date, Daylight
Time, and the remote contact closure Reset to Hour and Reset to Midnight will
not work when the automatic synchronization function is active. To inactivate
this function (thereby permitting manual setting to work), set the SYNC PERIOD to
OFF.
Installing 8685 PC Remote Control Software
This section briefly summarizes the procedure for installing 8685 PC Remote software
on existing 8685s. If required, you will find more detailed instructions in the
.pdf file automatically installed on your computer by Orban’s installer program,
Setup8685_x.x.x.x.exe, where “x.x.x.x” represents the software version you are
installing. (For example, for version 1.0 software, this would be 1.0.0.0.)
The PC Remote software is supplied on a CD shipped with your 8685. You can also
download it from ftp.orban.com/8685.
Instructions for using the PC Remote software are found starting on page 3-65.
Installing the Necessary Windows Services
The 8685 PC Remote application uses Windows’ built-in communications and networking
services to deal with the low-level details necessary to communicate with
the 8685’s serial port. (These services are also used to upgrade your 8685’s firmware
when updates are available from Orban.) The exact process will vary, depending on
how you wish to set up the communications. That is:
• If you want to communicate through a local, un-networked PC, you have two
choices:
• Use a crossover Ethernet cable to communicate to your PC through its
Ethernet port.
• Establish a connection between a serial (COM) port of the PC and the RS-
232 port of your 8685 through a null modem cable and use Windows Direct
Serial Connect to make the basic connection.
• If you want to communicate through a pair of modems, you will use the Windows
Dial-Up networking service to make the connection. You must install the
appropriate communications services in Windows (if they are not already installed)
before you can run 8685 Remote software. You may therefore need to
have access to the Windows install disk(s)—or have their image copied onto your
computer’s hard drive—before you attempt to use the 8685 PC Remote application.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-63
In all cases, regardless of whether your PC communicates to the 8685
through its serial port or Ethernet connector, it uses the ppp and the
TCP/IP protocols to communicate with the 8685.
Check Hardware Requirements
To connect your PC to your 8685 you will need the following:
• If connecting by Ethernet: a standard Ethernet cable (with RJ45 connectors) to
connect to a network hub or router, or a crossover Ethernet cable to connect directly
to your PC’s Ethernet jack.
• If connecting by serial cable: a null modem cable (also called a “reverse” cable).
This cable has DB9 female connectors at both ends for connecting the 8685 to
the serial port on your computer. If your computer has a DB25 connector, you
must obtain an adapter.
• If connecting by modem: a 3Com/U.S. Robotics® 56kbps fax modem EXT and
normal (not null) modem cable for the 8685 side of the connection. Note that
Orban Customer Service does not support any other type of modem for connecting
to the 8685.
• PC running Windows 2000 (SP3 or higher) XP (SP2 or higher), or Vista (SP1 or
higher).
8685 PC Remote will not run on older Windows versions.
Recommended Hardware Components
Computer................................................................... Pentium III or higher
Available Disk Space ......................................................................... 25 MB
RAM ................................................................................................. 512 MB
Display.......................................................................... 1024x768 or higher
COM Port ...................................................... 16550 (or compatible) UART
WARNING!
When connecting your 8685, use shielded cable to protect the pins in the RS-232
connector from electrostatic discharge.
The following subsections provide steps for connecting to your Optimod 8685 software
using the Windows 2000/XP Direct Cable Connect or via modem connection.
Running the Orban Installer Program
Insert the installer CD into your computer’s CD drive.

2-64
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
The installer should start up and ask you if you wish to install the PC Remote application
on your computer. If it fails to do so, navigate to Start \ Run on your computer,
and type X:setup (where “X” is the drive letter of your CD drive).
Follow the prompts on your screen to install the PC Remote software automatically
on your computer.
• You might have obtained the automatic installer application from some other
source than Orban’s CD, like Orban’s ftp site or another computer on your network.
If so, just run the application and follow the on-screen instructions.
• This program installs the necessary files and adds an Orban/Optimod 8685 folder
to your computer’s Start Menu. This folder contains shortcuts to the PC Remote
application and to the documentation. If you accepted the option during installation,
there is also a shortcut to the PC Remote application on your desktop.
You have now installed all files necessary to use the PC Remote software. If you are
using a direct serial or a modem connection, the next step is to install and configure
the Windows communications services that allow your computer to communicate
with your 8685. Appendix: Setting Up Serial Communications on page 2-67 provides
details.
Setting Up Ethernet, LAN, and VPN Connections
• If you are using an Ethernet connection and your computer can successfully connect
to the Internet through its Ethernet port, it already has the correct (TCP/IP)
networking set up to communicate with the 8685. In most cases, all you need is
your 8685’s IP address, Port, and Gateway, as set in step 1 on page 2-56. You will
enter these when you create a “connection” to your 8685 from the 8685 PC Remote
application—see step (E) on page 3-66. If your computer does not have a
working Ethernet port, you must add one and then following the instructions
provided by Microsoft to set it up to enable TCP/IP networking.
• If you are using a crossover Ethernet cable to connect your Optimod directly to
your computer, you must set your Windows networking to provide a static IP address
for your computer because your Optimod does not contain a DHCP server.
• If you wish to connect to your 8685 through your LAN or VPN (through a WAN or
the Internet), consult your network administrator. Note that to cross subnets,
you must specify a gateway. If the PC and 8685 are on the same subnet, then it is
unnecessary to specify a gateway (although you will still need to specify one if
you want your Optimod to synchronize to an Internet timeserver — see
Synchronizing Optimod to a Network Timeserver on page 2-59).
• If you are behind a firewall, you must open the port you specified in step (1.D)
on page 2-57. If the gateway and firewall (if used) are configured correctly, it is
possible to connect 8685 PC Remote to an 8685 via a VPN.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-65
Conclusion
By carefully following the instructions in the Appendix, you should have successfully
installed the necessary Windows services and connected to your 8685. However, if
you experience any problems with this process, or have any other 8685 questions,
please contact Orban Customer Service:
phone: +1 510 351-3500 ; email: custserv@orban.com
For details on your new 8685 software, from new features to operational suggestions,
refer to our FTP site (ftp.orban.com/8685).

2-66
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
[NOTES]

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-67
Appendix: Setting Up Serial Communications
This appendix provides instructions for setting up both direct serial and modem
connections from your 8685 to your PC. You must do this when you define a new
connection from the 8685 PC Remote application. The appendix provides procedures
for both the Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems. (Note that the
screen shots were prepared for Orban’s Optimod-FM 8300 and refer to that product.
They are directly applicable to the 8685 as well.)
Preparing for Communication through Null Modem Cable
1. Configure your 8685.
A) On your 8685’s front panel, navigate to System SETUP / NETWORK & REMOTE.
B) Set the SERIAL INTERFACE TYPE to DIRECT.
2. Connect the cable.
A) Connect one end of a null modem cable to the DB9 serial connector on the
8685’s rear panel.
Be sure to use a null modem cable. A normal serial cable will not work.
B) Connect the other end of the cable to your computer’s COM port.
Connecting Using Windows 2000 Direct Serial Connection:
Ordinarily, a direct serial connection through a null modem cable is used only when
you are controlling one 8685 per available COM port on your computer. If you wish
to control multiple local 8685s, it is better to use an Ethernet network connection.
However, in principle you could control multiple 8685s serially from one COM port,
using a hardware serial switch to select the 8685 you wish to control. In this case,
you should set up a separate 8685 “connection” for each 8685 to be controlled, following
the instructions below. All connections should reference the same COM port.
This connection is used both for upgrading your 8685 and for connecting the 8685
PC Remote application to your 8685.
Important: The Direct Serial Connection must have exclusive access to the PC COM
port that connects to your 8685. Make sure than any software that monitors this
COM port (like HotSync manager, etc) is disabled before running Direct Serial Connection.
If you have already configured your direct serial cable connection, skip to step 2 on
page 2-72.
If you cannot access the Internet after making a Direct or Modem connection, you
will have to reconfigure certain networking parameters in Windows. Please see You

2-68
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
Cannot Access the Internet After Making a Direct or Modem Connection of the 8685
on page 5-8.
1. Add and configure a Direct Connection for Windows 2000:
A) Create a New Windows
2000 Direct Connection:
a) Launch 8685 PC
Remote.
b) Choose “Connect > New
8685”
c) Give your 8685 a name
(e.g., “KABC”) by entering
this name in the
“8685 Alias” field.
d) If you wish to have
8685 PC Remote
remember the
password for this
Optimod, enter the
pass-word in the
“Password“ field.
e) Select “Serial Connection.”
f) Click “Add.”
g) Select “Connect Directly
to another computer.”
h) Click “Next.”

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-69
i) In the drop-down box, select the serial
port you will be using to make the
connection.
j) Click “Next.”
k) Select either “For all users” or “Only
for myself.”
The correct setting depends on
how your network and security
are configured.
Your wizard may not display this
field if your computer is set up
for a single user only.
l) Click “Next.”
m)Enter a name for your Connection like:
“Connection to 8685.”
n) Click “Finish.”

2-70
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
o) Click “Yes.”
B) Edit your new Direct
Connection properties:
a) Click “Settings.”
b) Click the “General”
tab.
c) Select the device you
set up in step (i) on
page 2-69.
d) This will usually be
“Communications
cable between two
computers (COM1).”
e) Click “Configure.”

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-71
f) Set “Maximum speed (bps)” to
“115200.”
g) Check “Enable hardware flow control.”
h) Make sure that all other boxes are
not checked.
i) Click “OK.”
j) Select the Networking tab.
k) Make sure that “PPP: Windows 95/
98/ NT 4/ 2000, Internet” appears in
the “Type of dial-up server I am
calling” field.
l) Make sure that “Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) is checked.
You may leave “File and Printer
Sharing for Microsoft Networks”
and “Client for Microsoft Networks”
checked if you like.
m)Click “OK.”
n) When the “Connection properties”
window appears, click “OK.”

2-72
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
2. Launch an existing Windows 2000 Direct connection.
Once you have set up a “connection” specifying Direct Connect in the 8685 PC
Remote application (see To set up a new connection on page 3-65), choosing this
connection from 8685 PC Remote automatically opens a Windows Direct Connection
to your 8685.
You can connect by selecting
the desired connection from
the drop-down list in the
CONNECT menu.
You can also connect by double-clicking
the connection in
the “Connection List” window.
A dialog bubble will appear
on the bottom right hand corner
of the screen verifying
your connection if the connection
is successful.
If you have trouble making a connection, refer to OS Specific Troubleshooting
Advice: Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Direct Connect on page 5-9. If you have
trouble the first time after creating a connection according to the instructions
above, try restarting your computer to clear its serial port.
3. To change the properties of an existing connection:
Right-click the connection in the “connection List” window and choose “Properties.”
The “Connection properties” window opens (see page 2-68).
Connecting Using Windows XP Direct Serial Connection
If you have already configured your direct serial cable connection, skip to step 2 on
page 2-76.
If you cannot access the Internet after making a Direct or Modem connection,
you will have to reconfigure certain networking parameters in
Windows. Please see You Cannot Access the Internet After Making a Direct
or Modem Connection of the 8685 on page 5-8.
1. Add and configure a Direct Connection for Windows XP:
A) Create a New Windows XP Direct Connection:
a) Launch 8685 PC Remote.
b) Choose “Connect > New 8685”

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-73
c) Give your 8685 a name (e.g., “KABC”)
by entering this name in the “8685
Alias” field.
d) If you wish to have 8685 PC Remote
remember the password for this
Optimod, enter the password in the
“Password“ field.
e) Select “Serial Connection.”
f) Click the “Add” button.
g) Choose “Connect directly to another
computer.”
h) Click “Next.”
i) In the drop-down box, select the serial
port you will be using to make the
connection.
j) Click “Next.”

2-74
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
k) Type in a name for your
Connection like:
“Connection to 8685.”
l) Click “Finish.”
m)Click “Yes.”
B) Edit your new Direct
Connection properties:
a) Click “Settings.”

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-75
b) Click the “General” tab.
c) Select the device you set up in step (i)
on page 2-73. This will usually be
“Communications cable between two
computers (COM1).”
d) Click “Configure.”
e) Set the “Maximum Speed (bps)” to
115200.
f) Check “Enable hardware flow control.”
g) Make sure all other hardware features
are unchecked.
h) Click “OK.”

2-76
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
i) Select the Networking tab.
j) Make sure that “PPP:
Windows 95/98/NT 4/2000,
Internet” appears in the
“Type of dial-up server I am
calling” field.
k) Make sure that “Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) is checked.
You may leave “File and
Printer Sharing for Microsoft
Networks” and
“Client for Microsoft
Networks” checked if
you like
l) Click “OK.”
m)When the “Connection
properties” window
appears, click “OK.”
2. Launch an existing Windows XP Direct connection.
Once you have set up a “connection” specifying Direct Connect in the 8685 PC
Remote application (see To set up a new connection on page 3-65), choosing this
connection from 8685 PC Remote automatically opens a Windows Direct Connection
to your 8685.
You can connect by selecting the
desired connection from the dropdown
list in the CONNECT menu.
You can also connect by doubleclicking
the connection in the
“Connection List” window.
A dialog bubble will appear on the
bottom right hand corner of the
screen verifying your connection if
the connection is successful.
If you have trouble making a connection, refer to Troubleshooting Windows XP
Direct Connect on page 5-9. If you have trouble the first time after creating a
connection according to the instructions above, try restarting your computer to
clear its serial port.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-77
3. To change the properties of an existing connection:
Right-click the connection in the “connection List” window and choose “Properties.”
The “Connection properties” window opens (see page 2-68).
Preparing for Communication through Modems
1. Prepare your 8685 for a modem connection through the serial port.
See step 3 on page 2-58.
2. If you have not already done so, create an 8685 passcode.
See step 4 on page 2-42. The default passcode is ADMIN.
3. Modem setup:
You will need two modems and two available phone lines, one of each for your PC
and your 8685.
Reminder: Orban supports only the 3Com/U.S. Robotics® 56kbps fax modem
EXT on the 8685 side (although other 56kbps modems will often
work OK).
Connect the modem to the 8685’s serial port with a standard (not null) modem cable.
You can use either an internal or an external modem with your PC.
A) Connect the telephone line from the wall phone jack to the wall connection
icon on the back of the modem (modem in).
B) Connect the modem cable from the modem to the serial port of the 8685.
C) Set the modem to AUTO ANSWER and turn it on.
For 3Com/U.S. Robotics® 56kbps fax modem EXT, set dipswitches 3, 5,
and 8 in the down position to activate the AUTO ANSWER setting. All
other dipswitches should be set to the up position.
Connecting Using Windows 2000 Modem Connection
This connection is used both for upgrading your 8685 and for connecting the 8685
PC Remote application to your 8685.
1. Add and configure modem for Windows 2000:
If your modem is already installed, skip to Launch a Windows 2000 Modem connection
on page 2-82.
A) Install Windows 2000 modem:

2-78
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
Use either an internal modem or external modem with your computer.
a) If you are using an external modem, connect the modem to a serial port on
your PC and make sure the modem is connected to a working phone line.
b) On your PC, click “Start > Settings > Control Panel > Phone and Modem
Options.”
c) Click the “Modems” tab.
d) Verify that your modem appears in the list available under “The following
Modems are installed.”
e) Verify that your modem is “Attached to” the correct port.
If your modem is unavailable or not attached to the correct port, you
must Add it. See your Windows documentation.
f) If your modem is available in the list available under “The following
Modems are installed” and it is attached to the correct port, then click
“Properties” for that modem.
g) Make sure the port speed is set at 115200.
h) Click “OK.”
B) Create a New Windows 2000 Dial-Up Connection:
a) Click “Start > Settings > Network and Dial-up Connections > Make New
Connection.”
b) Once the New Connection Wizard has opened, Click “Next.”
C) Create a New Windows 2000 Direct
Connection:
a) Launch 8685 PC Remote.
b) Choose “Connect > New 8685”
c) Give your 8685 a name (e.g.,
“KABC”) by entering this
name in the “8685 Alias”
field.
d) If you wish to have 8685 PC
Remote remember the
password for this Optimod,
enter the password in the
“Password“ field.
e) Select “Serial Connection.”
f) Click the “Add” button.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-79
g) Select “Dial-up to private network.”
h) Click “Next.”
i) Enter the phone number of the modem
connected to the 8685 that you are
setting up.
j) Click the “Next” button.
k) Select either “For all users” or “Only for
myself.”
The correct setting depends on how
your network and security are configured.
This screen may not appear in computers
set up for single users.

2-80
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
l) Click the “Next” button.
m)Type in a name for your
Connection like: “Connection
to 8685–Modem.”
n) Click the “Finish”
button.
o) Click “Yes.”
D) Edit your new Direct
Connection properties:
a) Click “Settings.”

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-81
b) Click the “General” tab.
c) In the “Connect using” field, select
the modem you will be using to make
the connection on the PC side.
d) Click “Configure.”
e) Set “Maximum speed (bps)” to
“115200.”
f) Check “Enable hardware flow
control.”
g) Check “Enable modem error control.”
h) Check “Enable mcdem compression.”
i) Make sure that all other boxes are not
checked.
j) Click “OK.”

2-82
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
k) Select the Networking
tab.
l) Make sure that “PPP:
Windows 95/98/NT
4/2000, Internet”
appears in the “Type
of dial-up server I am
calling” field.
m)Make sure that
“Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) is checked.
You may leave
“Client for Microsoft
Neworks”
checked if you
like.
n) Click “OK.”
o) When the “Connection
properties” window
appears, click
“OK.”
2. Launch a Windows 2000 Modem connection.
Once you have set up a “connection” specifying a modem connection in the 8685
PC Remote application (see To set up a new connection on page 3-65), choosing
this connection from 8685 PC Remote automatically opens a Windows modem
connection to your 8685.
You can connect by selecting the desired connection from the drop-down list in
the CONNECT menu.
You can also connect by double-clicking
the connection in the “Connection List”
window.
If the connection is successful, a dialog
bubble will appear on the bottom right
hand corner of the screen verifying your
connection.
If you have trouble making a connection, refer to OS Specific Troubleshooting
Advice: Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Modem Connect on page 5-Error!
Bookmark not defined.. If you have trouble the first time after creating a connection
according to the instructions above, try restarting your computer to clear
its serial port.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-83
3. To change the properties of an existing connection:
Right-click the connection in the “connection List” window and choose “Properties.”
The “Connection properties” window opens (see page 2-78).
Connecting using Windows XP Modem Connection
1. Add and configure modem for Windows XP:
Skip this step if your modem is already configured and working.
A) Configure the Windows XP PC ports:
Use either an internal modem or external modem with your computer.
a) If you are using an external modem, connect the modem to a serial port on
your PC.
b) Make sure the modem is connected to a working phone line.
c) Click “Start > Control Panel > Systems.”
d) Go to the “Hardware” tab and click “Device Manager.”
e) In the Device Manager dialog box click the “+” next to the “Ports (COM
and LPT)” icon.
A list will branch off, showing your available ports.
f) Double-click “Communications Port (COM1) or (COM2),” depending on
how you set up your system.
The “Communications Port (Comx) Properties” dialog box opens.
Not all PCs have a COM2.
IMPORTANT: The COM port you choose at this point must match the
COM port to which you connected your modem.
g) From the tabs at the top, choose “Port Settings” and configure the settings
to match your PC modem.
If you are using a U.S. Robotics® external modem, the settings will be:
Bits per second= 115200, Data bits = 8, Parity = None, Stop bits = 1, Flow
Control = None.
h) When you are finished, click the OK button to close the “Communications
Port (Comx) Properties” dialog box.
i) Click the OK button in the “Systems Properties” dialog window.
j) Close the “Control Panel” window.
If your modem is already installed, skip to Launch an existing Windows XP modem
connection on page 2-87.
B) Install the Windows XP modem:
a) Use either an internal modem or external modem with your computer.

2-84
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
If you are using an external modem, connect the modem to a serial port
on your PC and make sure the modem is connected to a working phone
line.
b) On your PC, click “Start > Settings > Control Panel > Phone and Modem
Options.”
c) Click the “Modems” tab.
d) Verify that your modem appears in the list available under “The following
Modems are installed.”
e) Verify that your modem is “Attached to” the correct port.
If your modem is unavailable or not attached to the correct port, you
must Add it. See your Windows documentation.
f) If your modem is available in the list available under “The following
Modems are installed” and it is attached to the correct port, then click
“Properties” for that modem.
g) Make sure the port speed is set at 115200.
h) Click “OK.”
C) Create a new Windows XP modem
connection:
a) Launch 8685 PC Remote.
b) Choose “Connect > New 8685.”
The Connection Properties
window opens.
c) Give your 8685 a name (e.g.,
“KABC”) by entering this name
in the “8685 Alias” field.
d) If you wish to have 8685 PC
Remote remember the password
for this Optimod, enter the password
in the “Password“ field.
You must enter a valid
password to connect. This
means that at least one
8685 passcode must have
been assigned via the
8685’s front panel. (See
step 4on page 2-42.)

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-85
e) Click “Add.”
The Windows New Connection
Wizard starts up.
f) Select “Serial Connection.”
g) Click the “Add” button.
h) Select “Dial-up to private network.”
i) Click “Next.”
j) Enter the phone number of the modem
connected to the 8685 you are setting
up.
k) Click “Next.”
l) Type in a name for your Connection like:
“Connection to 8685 – Modem”
m)Click the “Finish” button.

2-86
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
n) Click “Yes.”
D) Edit your new Direct Connection
properties:
a) Click “Settings.”
b) Click the “General” tab.
c) Select the modem you
will be using to make
the connection on the
PC side.
d) Click “Configure.”

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-87
e) Set “Maximum speed (bps)” to
“115200.”
f) Check “Enable hardware flow control.”
g) Check “Enable modem error control.”
h) Check “Enable mcdem compression.”
i) Make sure that no other box is checked.
j) Click “OK.”
k) Select the Networking tab.
l) Make sure that “PPP: Windows
95/98/NT4/2000, Internet” ap–pears in
the “Type of dial-up server I am calling”
field.
m)Make sure that “Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) is checked.
You may leave “Client for Microsoft
Networks” checked if you like.
n) Click “OK.”
o) When the “Connection properties”
window ap-pears, click “OK.”
2. Launch an existing Windows XP modem connection.
Once you have set up a “connection” specifying a modem connection in the 8685
PC Remote application (see To set up a new connection on page 3-65), choosing
this connection from 8685 PC Remote automatically opens a Windows modem
connection to your 8685.

2-88
INSTALLATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
You can connect by selecting the desired
connection from the drop-down
list in the CONNECT menu.
You can also connect by double-clicking
the connection in the “Connection List”
window.
If the connection is successful, a dialog bubble will appear on the bottom right
hand corner of the screen verifying your connection.
If you have trouble making a connection, refer to Troubleshooting Windows XP
Modem Connect on page 5-10. If you have trouble the first time after creating a
connection according to the instructions above, try restarting your computer to
clear its serial port.
3. To change the properties of an existing connection:
Right-click the connection in the “connection List” window and choose “Properties.”
The “Connection properties” window opens (see page 2-78).
Updating your 8685’s Software
The software version number of PC Remote must be the same as the version number
of the software running within your 8685. If the software version of PC Remote is
higher than the version running in your 8685, PC Remote will automatically detect
this and will offer to update your 8685’s software automatically.
1. If you have not already done so, prepare your computer and the 8685
for a direct serial, modem, or Ethernet connection.
See Networking and Remote Control starting on page 2-56.
2. Install the latest version of 8685 PC Remote software on your computer.
This is available from
ftp://orban.com/8685
See Installing 8685 PC Remote Control Software on page 2-62.
See the readme8685_x.x.x.x.htm file (where x.x.x.x is the version number) for details
about the upgrade not given in this manual. The PC Remote installer will install
this file on your computer’s hard drive.
3. If you have not previously done so, start 8685 PC Remote and set up a
“connection” to the 8685 you will be updating.
See To set up a new connection on page 3-65.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR INSTALLATION 2-89
4. Update your 8685.
We strong recommend that your computer and 8685 be powered from a
UPS when updating.
A) Attempt to initiate communication to your 8685 via your connection.
See To initiate communication on page 3-66.
8685 PC Remote will automatically detect that the 8685 software version
on your 8685 is lower as the version of 8685 PC Remote. PC Remote will
then offer to update your 8685 automatically.
This procedure will only work for a connection using an “all-screens”
(administrator) passcode.
B) Choose YES and wait for the update to complete. Note that the audio will be
interrupted for approximately three seconds when your 8685 reboots automatically
after the update is complete. If you cannot tolerate such an interruption,
choose NO or CANCEL to abort the update.
Please be patient; this will take several minutes. (The exact time will depend
on whether the 8685 has to do any “housekeeping” to its flash
memory as part of the update.)
Completion will be indicated by the updater’s command-line window’s
closing automatically and your 8685’s rebooting.
Your 8685 will continue to pass audio normally while the update is occurring.
However, the audio will be interrupted for approximately three seconds
when your 8685 reboots.
Do not interrupt power to your 8685 or your computer, close PC Remote
or the update application’s command-line window, or reboot your computer
during this time. Doing any of these things will certainly cause the
update to fail and might render your 8685 unbootable.
C) When the 8685 screen display returns after its automatic reboot, the 8685 will
be running with the updated software.
If the update fails for some reason, try repeating the procedure in steps
(0 through (C) again.
D) If the 8685 screen remains blank for more than one minute after the update
has completed, manually reboot the 8685 by removing AC power from the
8685 for at least ten seconds and then powering the 8685 back up.
E) The 8685 software update is now complete. You should now be able to connect
to your 8685 via PC Remote.
NOTE: If you cannot make a connection after a software upgrade, manually
reboot the 8685 with a normal “power-off/power-on” sequence.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-1
Section 3
8685 Front Panel
Operation
• Headphone Jack allows you to monitor various outputs of the processing
through headphones. Headphone impedance should be 75Ω or higher.
• You can switch the headphone feed to emit the following processor output signals:
LF, RF, C, LS, RS, LFE, LB, RB, STEREO L, STEREO R, L DOWNMIX, R
DOWNMIX, LF/RF, C, LS/RS, LB/RB, STEREO, DOWNMIX. The first 12 signals are
monophonic and are sent to both earpieces. The remaining signals are stereo.
This control is located on the INPUT/OUTPUT > OUTPUT 5 screen.
• Headphone Level Control (the small blue control knob to the right of the jack)
adjusts headphone output level.
• The red Enter button allows you to choose pop-up menu items, icons and buttons.
If you are in the Preset screen, it allows you to put a Factory or User Preset
on-air once you have selected it.
If you edit a Factory Preset, you must save it as a new User Preset to retain
your edit permanently. Even if not saved, your edited preset will be
retained automatically even if the 8685 is powered down and will be restored
on-air upon power-up. If not saved, your edited preset will appear
in the RECALL list of available presets as the name of its parent present
prefixed by the abbreviation “modif” (for “modified”).
However, if you edit another preset, your old edited preset will be lost—
the 8685 automatically retains only one “modified” preset. Therefore, it
is wise to rename and save any edited preset you wish to keep, using the
8685’s SAVE main menu item. This ensures that your edited preset will
not be overwritten accidentally.
• The green joystick, labeled Locate, is a pointing device that allows you to locate
to settings and controls on each screen. Some main menu items require multiple
screens to show all controls. When multiple screens for a given main menu item
are available, pressing and holding the knob left or right moves you between
screens.
• A yellow Escape button allows you to navigate quickly to underlying screens,
higher-level screens or the Meters screen and displays the pop-up menu.

3-2
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
When a pop-up item, like Menu, is onscreen, ESCAPE always returns you
to the underlying screen.
Pressing ESCAPE from a secondary screen page, like System Setup > Place
> Date > Time 1 takes you back to the top level; in this case, the System
Setup screen.
ESCAPE from top-level screens (like the System Setup screen), brings you
back to the Meters screen. (If you are already in the Meters screen,
ESCAPE displays the pop-up Menu.)
• The Control Knob is the large blue knob on the front panel. Turning the knob
scrolls through displayed lists (like the Preset screen list) or changes a setting that
is highlighted onscreen (e.g., the setting last selected by the Locate joystick).
Pushing the knob in towards the front panel displays the pop-up Menu over the
previous screen.
• Screen Display supplies control setting information and screen help and displays
the gain reduction and level meters (described directly below). In general,
separate meters are shown for the multiband and 2.0 (if active) processing.
The 8685’s screen displays the following information, meters and indicators:
• Which hardware inputs (1/2, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 9/10, and 11/12) have valid AES3id
signals applied to them (indicated by their being displayed in yellow) and
which do not (indicated by their being displayed in red).
• The current date and time according to the 8685’s internal clock.
• The active processing Preset.
• The active Setup.
• The multiband processor’s active input (main or backup).
If you have programmed silence sense to switch the input of the
surround processing between two inputs automatically, this indicates
if the backup input was activated.
• IN meters show the peak input level applied to the inputs of each of the
8685’s processing channels (up to 7.1) as determined by input routing
switcher settings in I/O SETUP. 0 dB = digital full-scale.
• AGC meters show the gain reduction of the slow AGC processing that precedes
the multiband compressor (two-band or five-band). Full-scale is 25 dB
gain reduction.
Because the AGC is a two-band unit with Orban’s patented bass coupling
system, the two meters indicate the gain reduction of the AGC Master
and Bass bands.
The AGC gains of the surround processing are always stereo-coupled using
power (r.m.s.) summation. Therefore, only one gain reduction meter
is required for each band. However, the AGC in the 2.0 processing can be
adjusted to be fully stereo-coupled, independent, or anywhere in be-

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-3
tween. Hence, the 2.0 processing’s AGC meters are split so that the left
and right gain reduction (or channel 1/channel 2 gain reduction in dualmono
mode) are both displayed.
• GATE indicators show silence gate activity. They light up when the input
audio falls below the threshold set by the gate threshold controls. For a
given processor (surround or 2.0), there are two gates—one for the AGC
and one for the multiband limiter—each with its own GATE THRESHOLD control.
When gating occurs, the AGC and compressor’s recovery times are
slowed drastically to prevent noise rush-up during low-level passages.
• MULTIBAND GAIN REDUCTION meters show the gain reduction in the multiband
compressors. Full-scale is 25 dB gain reduction. These meters are split,
showing main gain reduction (the GR applied all channels but the center)
to the left and center channel gain reduction to the right. See Multiband
starting on page 3-11 for an explanation of how the main and center compressors
are coupled.
• LIMITER GAIN REDUCTION meters show how much gain reduction the 8685’s
look-ahead limiters are producing.
• OUT meters indicate the instantaneous peak output level at the output of
the 8685’s audio processing before the SURROUND OUTPUT 100% or 2.0
OUTPUT 100% controls.
• HF ENHANCER METERS show how much dynamic high frequency boost the
8685’s HF Enhancer is providing.
• LOUDNESS LEVEL meter shows the subjective loudness of the output, measured
by the 1981 Jones & Torick CBS Technology Center algorithm and by
the ITU. BS.1770 algorithm. (See page 1-18 for a discussion of the J&T algorithm
and Using the ITU BS.1770 and CBS Loudness Meters to Measure
Loudness Controller Performance on page 3-78.)
For each of the two loudness-metering algorithms, there is only one meter
for the surround processing and one meter for each 2.0 processor (in
stereo mode) because regardless of the number of channels and loudspeakers
in the listening room, a given listener has only one perception
of loudness. When a given 2.0 processor is operated in dual-mono mode,
there is one LOUDNESS LEVEL meter for each mono channel.
The meter for a given processing chain is calibrated with reference to the
Dolby Digital® Dialnorm value that you specify in the 8685’s active Setup
for that processing chain. (See step 10 on page 2-14.) If you adjust the
processing so that the Loudness Level meter peaks at 0 dB on dialog and
you set up your Dolby Digital encoder so that that you are transmitting
this same Dialnorm value to consumer receivers, your transmission will
have the correct loudness compared to other correctly set up transmission
channels.
• LOUDNESS GAIN REDUCTION shows the amount of gain reduction that the
8685’s CBS Loudness Controller is producing.

3-4
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
Introduction to Processing
Some Audio Processing Concepts
Reducing the peak-to-average ratio of the audio increases loudness. If peaks are reduced,
the average level can be increased within the permitted modulation limits.
The effectiveness with which this can be accomplished without introducing objectionable
side effects (like pumping or intermodulation distortion) is the single best
measure of audio processing effectiveness.
Compression reduces the difference in level between the soft and loud sounds to
make more efficient use of permitted peak level limits, resulting in a subjective increase
in the loudness of soft sounds. It cannot make loud sounds seem louder.
Compression reduces dynamic range relatively slowly in a manner similar to riding
the gain. Limiting and clipping, on the other hand, reduce the short-term peak-toaverage
ratio of the audio.
Limiting increases audio density. Increasing density can make loud sounds seem
louder, but can also result in an unattractive busier, flatter, or denser sound. It is important
to be aware of the many negative subjective side effects of excessive density
when setting controls that affect the density of the processed sound.
Clipping sharp peaks does not produce any audible side effects when done moderately.
Excessive clipping will be perceived as audible distortion.
Look-ahead limiting is limiting that prevents overshoots by examining a few milliseconds
of the unprocessed sound before it is limited. This way the limiter can anticipate
and control peaks that are coming up.
In Dolby Digital transmission channels, appropriate setting of the
DIALNORM metadata parameter will allow enough headroom to keep peak
levels below the threshold of the 8685’s look-ahead peak limiters. The
best sounding limiting is no limiting at all.
Distortion in Processing
In a competently designed processor, distortion occurs only when the processor is
controlling peaks to prevent the audio from exceeding the peak modulation limits
of the transmission channel. The less peak control that occurs, the less likely that the
listener will hear distortion. However, to reduce the amount of peak control, you
must decrease the drive level to the peak limiter, which causes the average level
(and thus, the loudness) to decrease proportionally.
Loudness and Distortion
In processing, there is a direct trade-off between loudness and distortion. You can
improve one only at the expense of one or both of the other two. Thanks to Orban’s
psychoacoustically optimized designs, this is less true of Orban processors than of
any others. Nevertheless, all intelligent processor designers must acknowledge and
work within the laws of physics as they apply to this trade-off.
In AM and FM processing, we have long said that there is a direct tradeoff
between loudness, brightness, and distortion, However, because DTV,
DAB and netcasting systems don’t use preemphasis, there is no problem

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-5
getting the audio to sound bright and the trade-off is only between
loudness and distortion.
Perhaps the most difficult part of adjusting a processor is determining the best
trade-off for a given situation. We feel that it is usually wiser to give up ultimate
loudness to achieve low distortion. A listener can compensate for loudness by simply
adjusting the volume control. However, a listener cannot make an excessively compressed
or peak-limited signal sound clean again.
If processing for high quality is done carefully, the sound will also be excellent on
small receivers. Although such a signal might fall slightly short of ultimate loudness,
it will tend to compensate with an openness, depth, and punch (even on small
speakers) that cannot be obtained when the signal is excessively squashed.
If women form a significant portion of the station’s audience, bear in mind that
women are more sensitive to distortion and listening fatigue than men are. In any
format requiring long-term listening to achieve market share, great care should be
taken not to alienate women by excessive stridency, harshness, or distortion.
Processing for Low Bit Rate Codecs
8685’s Five-Band processing includes PreCode technology to minimize codec artifacts.
To exploit PreCode technology fully ( minimizing “phasey” and “underwater”
artifacts in low bit rate codecs), do not set up OPTIMOD 8685 for very bright sound
(with large amounts of high frequency energy) because this is likely to exacerbate
artifacts. Some appropriate presets include JAZZ, SMOOTH JAZZ, GOLD, ROCK SOFT, and
the CLASSICAL presets. Avoid presets like CRISP and EDGE; these are very brightsounding
presets and are more appropriate for uncompressed channels or compressed
channels with relatively high bit rates (64 kbps or higher for the aacPlus V2
codec used in Opticodec-PC, for example).
The 8685’s sound-for-picture (TVXXXX) presets are all conservative and will not stress
well designed codecs like Dolby AC3 and MPEG4 AAC.
The 8685 has several controls whose settings determine brightness. To minimize
brightness when using the Five-band structure:
• Use little or no high frequency boost in the equalization section.
• Set Band 4>5 coupling to 100%.
• Set the band 5 compression threshold to match the codec. Adjust the threshold
until you find a good compromise between presence and high frequency codec
artifacts. We find the range from –6.0 to +6.0 dB to be useful.
• Use a moderate Band 5 attack time. 25 ms works well.
• If necessary, lower the Band 4 compression threshold.
Starting with one of our suggested presets will help keep you out of trouble when
you edit them to create user presets.

3-6
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
We have supplied several presets tuned for the Microsoft WMA (V9) at 32 kbps in
stereo. This codec has severe artifacts at this bitrate and no preprocessing can mask
them completely. The 8685’s WMA presets strictly limit the amount of high frequency
energy applied to the codec. To prevent the processing from adding L–R energy,
these presets operate with full stereo coupling and without stereo enhancement.
The 8685’s ability to maintain source-to-source spectral consistency is also an important
advantage. Once you have set up the processing to minimize codec artifacts
caused by a given piece of program material, the 8685 will automatically minimize
codec artifacts with any program material.
Speech/Music Detector
The Speech/Music Detector allows the 8685 2.0 processing to change its processing
parameters depending on whether the input program material is speech or other
material (usually music).
The algorithm is straightforward: Speech is detected if (1) the input is mono and (2)
there are syllabic pauses at least once every 1.5 seconds. In the 2.0 channel processor,
speech with a stereo music background will usually be detected as “music,” or the
detector may switch back and forth randomly if the stereo content is very close to
the stereo/mono detector’s threshold. Mono music with a “speech-like” envelope
may be incorrectly detected as “speech.” Music incorrectly detected as “speech” may
exhibit a slight loss of loudness and punch, but misdetection will never cause objectionable
distortion on music.
Speech that is not located in the center of the stereo sound field will always be detected
as “music” because the detector always identifies stereo material as “music.”
The 8685’s surround processing handles speech differently. It does not use an automatic
speech/music detector, instead assuming that speech is mainly located in the
center channel. The center channel compressor in each frequency band can be tuned
differently than the compressors for the remaining channels, which are coupled to
preserve imaging. Main-to-center channel coupling controls allow you to set the
maximum permitted gain difference between the center channel and the remaining
channels. This allows the processing to automatically maintain an appropriate balance
between dialog and non-dialog parts of the audio.
Sound-for-Picture Applications: Controlling Dynamic Range
The most crucial commandment in sound for picture is this: dialog must always be
intelligible (although in contemporary mixes this commandment seems to be broken
with surprising regularity). Sound for picture is usually heard under less-than-ideal
conditions and its dynamic range must be controlled accordingly. Apartmentdwellers
must set their volume controls to avoid disturbing neighbors or even other
members of the family. At the quiet side, intelligibility of dialog is often impacted
by environmental noise like children playing or a dishwasher going in the kitchen.
When one considers that the hearing acuity of a significant portion of the audience
is somewhat impaired compared to that of a healthy 20-year-old, one concludes that

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-7
the dynamic range of dialog must not exceed 15dB if it is to be intelligible to 99% of
viewers under common domestic viewing conditions. Moreover, research has revealed
a “comfort zone” (within which viewers will not adjust the volume controls
of their receivers) that is even smaller: +2 to –5 dB as measured on a subjective
Loudness Level meter like the 8685’s CBS Loudness Level meter or ITU BS.1770. Feature-film
dynamic range is inappropriate for home viewing (except in dedicated
home theaters) and the dynamic range of a significant portion of video source material
must be compressed to best serve the audience. The challenge (which Optimod
8685 effectively meets) is to control dynamic range unobtrusively.
OPTIMOD 8685 can be adjusted so that the output sounds as close as possible to the
input at all times (using the Two-Band Protection Limiter preset), or so that it sounds
open but more uniform in frequency balance than the input (using the Two-Band
structure or running the Five-Band Structure with slow release time), or so that it
sounds dense, quite squashed, and very loud (using the Five-Band Structure with
faster release times).
In television audio, inconsistent loudness between channels or program elements is
annoying, so the dense, loud setup is never appropriate. The 8685 offers two-band
and five-band presets (whose names begin with “TV”) that exploit the AGC’s and
multiband compressor’s compression ratio controls to subtly control dynamic range
in sound for picture applications. These presets effectively and unobtrusively maintain
dialog intelligibility while retaining a sense of dynamic range, allowing lowlevel
elements to be heard easily. Meanwhile, the CBS Loudness Controller prevents
subjective loudness from exceeding a preset ceiling.
The “TVxxxx” presets are designed for digital television transmission
(which uses no preemphasis) and the “TVAxxxx” presets are designed for
analog television transmission that uses 50μs or 75μs preemphasis.
The preset tuning controls on the 8685 give you the flexibility to adapt the processing
to individual program segments. In most cases, your goal should be to choose
the type of processing that best optimizes dynamic range while controlling the
loudness of the loudest sounds so that they are not irritating and are consistent with
the loudness of other stations or sources. When the 8685 is otherwise set up correctly
(so that it is cognizant of the DIALNORM metadata you are transmitting to
viewers), its TVxxxx presets achieve this goal most precisely by exploiting the loudness
controller. The “radio-style” presets are crafted to match the target loudness as
well as can be achieved without use of the loudness controller.
If you want more consistent loudness from a “radio-style” preset, set its
LOUDNESS CONTROLLER THRESH control to –10 dB, turn up its MB LIMITER
DRIVE control until the loudness controller gain reduction meter indicates
about 3 dB of gain reduction with typical program material, and save the
result as a user preset.
Optimod 8685 in Audio-Only Applications: From Bach to Rock
The 8685 can be adjusted so that the output sounds:

3-8
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
• as close as possible to the input at all times (using the Two-Band Protection Limiter
preset)
• open but more uniform in frequency balance (and often more dramatic) than
the input (using the Two-Band structure or running the Five-Band Structure with
slow release time)
• dense, quite squashed, and very loud (using the Five-Band Structure with faster
release times)
The dense, loud setup will make the audio seem to jump out of car and table audio
systems but may be fatiguing and invite tune-outs on higher quality home receivers.
The loudness/distortion trade-off explained above applies to any of these setups.
In professional broadcasting environments, you will achieve best results if Engineering,
Programming, and Management go out of their way to communicate and cooperate
with each other. It is important that Engineering understand the sound that
Programming desires, and that Management fully understands the trade-offs involved
in optimizing one parameter (like loudness) at the expense of others (like
distortion or excessive density).
Never lose sight of the fact that, while listeners can easily control loudness, they
cannot make a distorted signal clean again. If such excessive processing is permitted
to audibly degrade the sound of the original program material, the signal is irrevocably
contaminated and the original quality can never be recovered.
About the 8685’s Signal Processing Features
Simultaneous Stereo (2.0) and Surround (5.1 or 7.1) Processing
The 8685 can process stereo and surround programming. There are four stereo
processors and one surround processor available for use simultaneously.
You can set the processing parameters for the stereo and surround processors independently.
The output of each stereo processor can be applied to its own lookahead
limiters and the output of these can be routed to the hardware output specified
in the 8685’s output routing switcher. Alternatively, the output of stereo processor
#1’s multiband compressor and Loudness Controller can be mixed with the LF
and RF surround signals immediately before the surround processing’s LF and RF
look-ahead limiters. The first scenario allows you to use the 8685 as five independent
processors.
The 2.0 processing is similar to Orban’s Optimod 6300 except that the 6300’s stereo
enhancer is omitted in the 8685. (For example, you might use 2.0 processing to drive
a low bitrate netcast or ATSC subchannel(s).) The second scenario allows separate
processing of locally originated 2.0 material before it is mixed with (for example) a
surround feed from your affiliated network.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-9
Signal Flow
The signal flows through the following main blocks in each of the 8685’s processing
sections (multiband and 2.0). (See page 6-101.)
• Input Conditioning, including sample rate conversion, defeatable highpass (2.0
processing only) and lowpass filters, and defeatable phase rotation
• Two-Band Gated AGC, with target-zone window gating and silence gating
• Equalization, including high-frequency enhancement
• Multiband Compression in either two or five bands, depending on the processing
structure
• Automatic Loudness Control using Orban’s third-generation CBS Loudness
Controller algorithm
• Look-Ahead Limiting
Input Conditioning
A sample rate converter converts the sample rate at the digital input to the 8685’s
internal 48 kHz rate. This 48 kHz rate accommodates a 20 kHz audio bandwidth with
a comfortably wide 4 kHz transition band for the anti-aliasing filter.
We are aware of no bias-controlled double-blind studies that have ever
demonstrated that sample rates higher than 48 kHz are audibly superior
to 48 kHz (or even that there is any audible difference at all). Moreover,
the noise and distortion produced by a given digital filter at 48 kHz is
about 6 dB lower than the N&D produced by a filter having the same
frequency response but operating at 96 kHz. The 8685 uses many digital
filters, both in its equalizer section and for the crossovers in the multiband
compressor. Hence, we believe that 48 kHz is the ideal rate for the
8685’s audio processing.
A sharp phase-linear lowpass filter, a sweepable 18 dB/octave highpass filter, and a
defeatable phase rotator complete the input-conditioning block. The lowpass filter
can present overshoot due to spectral truncation when the 8685 is driving a link that
cannot pass full 20 kHz audio bandwidth (like a 32 kHz sample rate link). The highpass
filter is useful for production applications where it is necessary to remove low
frequency rumble from a recording. The phase rotator makes speech more symmetrical,
reducing its peak-to-average ratio by as much as 6 dB without adding nonlinear
distortion. Hence, phase rotation can be very useful for loudness processing of
speech.
Two-Band Gated AGC
The AGC is a two-band device, using Orban’s patented “master/bass” band coupling.
It has an additional important feature: target-zone gating. If the input program material’s
level falls within a user-settable window (typically 3dB), then the release time
slows to a user-determined level. It can be slow enough (0.5 dB/second) to effectively
freeze the operation of the AGC. This prevents the AGC from applying additional,
audible gain control to material that is already well controlled. It also lets you

3-10
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
run the AGC with fast release times without adding excessive density to material
that is already dense.
The AGC contains a compression ratio control that allows you to vary the ratio between
2:1 and essentially ∞:1. Lower ratios can make gain riding subtler on critical
formats like classical and jazz.
The AGC has its own silence-gating detector whose threshold can be set independently
of the silence gating applied to the multiband compressor.
The 2.0 AGC can be operated in left/right or sum-and-difference mode. You can set
the coupling of the 2.0 AGC’s two sidechains (left/right or sum-and-difference) anywhere
from 100% stereo coupled to fully independent.
The surround AGC is always 100% stereo coupled. Its sidechain responds to the
power sum (r.m.s. sum) of all inputs except for LFE channel.
The LFE channel is excluded to prevent the LFE energy from audibly
modulating the loudness of energy at higher frequencies. However, the
gain of the LFE channel follows the gain of the AGC Bass band to keep it
in balance with the rest of the spectrum.
The SURROUND OPTIMIZATION control for the active preset determines how the rear
channels are weighted:
• SURROUND weights the rear channels 1.5 dB higher than the front channels to
compensate for the ear’s greater sensitivity to the loudness of these channels
when reproduced in surround.
• STEREO weights the rear channels 3.0 dB lower than the front channels to reflect
the fact that the default surround > stereo downmix contains each rear channel
mixed at –3 dB.
• COMPROMISE weights the rear channels half way between SURROUND and STEREO.
Equalization
The 8685 has a steep-slope bass shelving equalizer and three bands of fully parametric
bell-shaped EQ.
You can set the slope of the bass shelving EQ to 6, 12, or 18 dB/octave and adjust the
shelving frequency.
The 8685’s bass, midrange, and high frequency parametric equalizers have curves
that were modeled on the curves of Orban’s classic analog parametrics (like the
622B), using a sophisticated and proprietary optimization program. The curves are
matched to better than 0.15dB. This means that their sound is very close to the
sound of an Orban analog parametric. They also use very high quality filter algorithms
to ensure low noise and distortion.
The 8685 HF Enhancer is a program-controlled HF shelving equalizer that intelligently
and continuously analyzes the ratio between broadband and HF energy in
the input program material. It can equalize excessively dull material without over-

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-11
enhancing bright material. It interacts synergistically with the five-band compressor
to produce sound that is bright and present without being excessively shrill. It can
help improve dialog intelligibility. It is gated so that it does not amplify the program
material’s noise floor.
The equalizer section is mostly useful for “radio-style” processing and applications.
For television applications, it is usually left flat.
Multiband Compressor/Limiter
The multiband compressor/limiter can be operated in five-band or two-band mode.
In five-band mode, each band compressor has a KNEE and RATIO control. A soft knee
and gentle ratio are particularly useful in production and mastering applications, allowing
subtle compression that retains as much of the dynamics of the input program
material as the operator desires. These features are also exploited in the TV 2B
DRAMA and TV 5B DRAMA presets.
Several band-coupling controls allow the gain reduction of a given band’s compressor
to be affected by the gain reduction in its neighboring band’s compressor. These
coupling controls allow anything from quasi-wideband compression to fully independent
multiband compression.
A clipper, embedded in the crossover, protects bands 1 and 2 from transient overshoot.
This clipper has a shape control, allowing you to vary the “knee” of its input/output
transfer curve from hard (0) to soft (10).
Each band in the 2.0 multiband compressor has two sidechains—one for the left and
one for the right channel. You can separately set the left/right coupling of each
band anywhere from 100% stereo coupled to fully independent.
The surround multiband compressor is always stereo coupled and has two main
sidechains.
• The first surround sidechain responds to the power (r.m.s.) sum of all channels.
However, to prevent sibilance in the center channel from ducking high frequencies
in the remaining channels, the center channel does not affect the gain reduction
in bands 4 and 5.
As in the AGC, the SURROUND OPTIMIZATION control for the active preset determines
how the rear channels are weighted in the r.m.s. sum.
This sidechain applies the slow “compression” component of the gain reduction
identically in all channels except for the center. However, each channel also has
an individual “limiting” function that is not stereo coupled. This prevents fast
transients in one channel from audibly modulating the gains of the other channels.
Because this “limiting” function operates quickly, it does not affect stereo
imaging.
Do not confuse this “limiting” function with the 8685’s look-ahead limiter,
which is located after the Loudness Controller in a given processing
chain and which has much faster attack and release times.

3-12
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
• The second surround sidechain responds to the center channel alone. It provides
both a “compression” and “limiting” function.
The dual-sidechain architecture’s main application is to improve dialog intelligibility
by preventing strong energy in the non-center channels from drowning out
dialog in the center channel even when the original mix was miscalculated. To
achieve this, the center channel’s gain sometimes needs to be increased with respect
to the other channels and the dialog needs to be re-equalized automatically
by multiband compression. Moreover, this dual-sidechain architecture permits
the multiband compressor to de-ess center channel dialog as necessary
without affecting the other channels.
Completely independent compression of the dialog channel can cause unnaturalsounding
level imbalances between the dialog and the remaining program elements.
To address this, there are two coupling controls for each frequency band
in the multiband compressor. These coupling controls work by constraining the
difference (in dB) between the center channel’s gain reduction and the main
channel’s gain reduction. To do this, they clamp the center channel’s gain reduction
with respect to the main channel but do not affect the gain reduction in the
main channel. In other words, the center channel’s gain reduction is either the
output of the center channel’s compression sidechain or a fixed offset from the
main channel’s gain reduction. There are separate controls to set the maximum
positive and negative offsets. The constraints are applied to the entire center
gain reduction signal (compression plus limiting).
To preserve intelligibility, it is important to prevent the center channel’s gain reduction
from becoming too large with respect to the other channels. The BX
MAIN>CENTER MAX +DELTA GR control sets the maximum positive gain reduction
difference in each band. When the five-band structure is used, it is common to
set this control to 0 dB in Bands 1-3. To facilitate de-essing (and because Bands 4
and 5 in the center channel do not contribute to the gain reduction in the main
sidechain), we recommend setting the B4 and B5 MAIN>CENTER MAX +DELTA GR
controls to allow some extra gain reduction to occur in center channel Bands 4
and 5. It is OK to set this control to OFF in Band 5, which allows unconstrained
de-essing above 6 kHz. The TVxxxx factory presets provide examples.
Meanwhile, a BX MAIN>CENTER MAX –DELTA GR sets the maximum negative gain
reduction difference in each band, which constrains the amount of dynamic dialog
boost. It also constrains the degree to which the center channel compressor
can pull up noise. If there are program elements other than dialog panned into
the center channel, the control constrains the amount by which the front stereo
image can be narrowed. 3 dB is a typical setting.
• The 2.0 processing architecture is intrinsically dual-mono but allows stereo coupling
of the AGC and multiband gain reductions as well as the AGC and compressor
gates. If 2.0 PROC MODE control in the CHANNEL page of the active Setup sets is
set to DUAL MONO, all stereo coupling is turned off and two LOUDNESS LEVEL meters,
AGC GATE indicators, and MB GATE indicators appear.
In STEREO mode, there is one LOUDNESS LEVEL meter, AGC GATE indicator, and MB
GATE indicator. However, you can still uncouple each band in both the AGC and
multiband compressors to a variable extent—anywhere from perfect stereo cou-

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-13
pling to completely uncoupled operation. The coupling control determines the
maximum amount of gain difference permitted between the left and right
channels in a given band and therefore the amount of stereo image shift permitted
in each frequency band.
Although the processing architecture is dual-mono, you cannot adjust setup controls
independently on the left and right channels. For most sound-for-picture
applications, this is not a significant constraint.
LFE Processing
The LFE channel has its own dedicated compressor with ATTACK TIME and THRESHOLD
controls. Its other settings (such as RATIO and BREAKPOINT) track the settings of the B1
(5-band mode) or Bass Band (two-band mode) compressor. To constrain build-up of
LFE energy, the B1>LFE COUPLING control clamps the maximum gain of the LFE
channel with respect to the band 1 compressor in five-band mode and the Bass band
in two-band mode. For example, when this control is set to 3 dB (the factory default)
and the B1 compressor exhibits 12 dB of gain reduction, the LFE channel can never
have less than 9 dB of gain reduction even if the LFE compressor would have produced
less than 9 dB of gain reduction if uncoupled.
Low-IM Look-Ahead Limiter
The 8685’s peak limiter prevents overshoots by examining a few milliseconds of the
unprocessed sound before it is limited. This way the limiter can anticipate peaks that
are coming up.
Dialnorm and Limiting: Unlike some familiar compressors and limiters (whose
gain reduction is adjusted via threshold controls), the 8685 limiter’s threshold is fixed
with respect to the input of the 8685’s digital output level control so the limiter’s
drive level solely determines the gain reduction. Two cascaded gain controls set this
drive level. One is MB LIMIT DRIVE; the second is a “hidden” control whose gain is set
by the 8685’s active DIALNORM value. In the transmitted Dolby Digital bitstream, setting
DIALNORM to a less negative value automatically turns down the home receiver’s
volume control, so the 8685’s output level must be turned up by the same amount to
maintain a constant loudness at the receiver. Because it is placed before the 8685’s
look-ahead limiter, the 8685’s hidden DIALNORM gain control achieves this while allowing
the 8685’s look-ahead limiter to prevent digital clipping in the downstream
transmission chain regardless of the 8685’s DIALNORM setting. This arrangement allows
the user to set the correct loudness at the 8685’s output solely by adjusting the
8685’s active DIALNORM value—it is unnecessary to adjust any other controls within a
preset, so all presets (including User Presets) automatically adapt to the 8685’s current
DIALNORM value.
Look-Ahead Limiting and Low Bitrate Codecs: It is important to minimize audible
peak-limiter-induced distortion when one is driving a low bitrate codec because
one does not want to waste precious bits encoding the distortion. Look-ahead limiting
can achieve this goal; hard clipping cannot.
One can model any peak limiter as a multiplier that multiplies its input
signal by a gain control signal. This is a form of amplitude modulation.
Amplitude modulation produces sidebands around the “carrier” signal.

3-14
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
In a peak limiter, each Fourier component of the input signal is a separate
“carrier” and the peak limiting process produces modulation sidebands
around each Fourier component.
Considered this way, a hard clipper has a wideband gain control signal
and thus introduces sidebands that are far removed in frequency from
their associated Fourier “carriers.” Hence, the “carriers” have little ability
to mask the resulting sidebands psychoacoustically. Conversely, a lookahead
limiter’s gain control signal has a much lower bandwidth and produces
modulation sidebands that are less likely to be audible.
Simple wideband look-ahead limiting can still produce audible intermodulation
distortion between heavy bass and midrange material. The
look-ahead limiter in your Optimod uses sophisticated techniques to reduce
such IM distortion without compromising loudness capability.
Loudness Control
The 8685’s third-generation CBS Loudness Controller follows the multiband compressor
in the 8685’s signal flow diagram. However, it takes into account the effect
of the following look-ahead limiter so that it effectively monitors the loudness at
the limiter’s output, not the loudness at the multiband compressor’s output. It does
so by scaling its sidechain drive by two gain factors: (1) the MB LIMIT DRIVE control
and (2) the 858’s active DIALNORM value, which is determined either globally or by
the active preset depending on the active preset’s DIALNORM setting. (See Low-IM
Look-Ahead Limiter on page 3-13.)
The loudness controller constrains the loudness of most commercials well enough to
eliminate viewer annoyance. It works by constantly monitoring the subjective loudness
of the 8685's output. The subjective loudness is a single value that represents
the listener’s impression of the loudness in the listening room. It takes into account
the contribution of all stereo and surround channels.
When subjective loudness would otherwise exceed the threshold set by the
LOUDNESS THRESHOLD control, the loudness controller reduces the gain of material
above 200 Hz, preventing loudness from exceeding the threshold. To prevent the
loudness controller from causing too much dynamic bass boost, you can use the
LOUDNESS CONTROLLER BASS COUPLE control to limit the maximum difference between
the gain of the band below 200 Hz and the band above 200Hz. For example,
when this control is set to 3 DB and the loudness controller’s gain reduction is 10 dB,
the gain reduction below 200 Hz will be 7 dB. However, if the loudness controller’s
gain reduction is 2 dB, the gain reduction below 200 Hz will be 0 dB because the difference
is now less than 3 dB.
The loudness controller is triggered mainly by program material that has a lot of energy
between 1 and 7 kHz, which is the ear’s most sensitive range. If you are using
the two-band structure and you find that the loudness controller is producing audible
artifacts because the program forces it to do a great deal of gain reduction, we
suggest that you use the five-band structure instead. This will automatically reequalize
such program material and will de-ess extremely sibilant program material
before the loudness controller receives it.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-15
The loudness controller’s attack and release times are tuned to match the loudness
integration times of the ear and are program-adaptive. Only the attack time is useradjustable.
If you feel that the loudness controller is not controlling the loudness of commercials
or other subjectively loud program material sufficiently well, you may wish to
set the threshold lower, forcing the loudness controller to do more work. Conversely,
if the loudness controller is doing more gain reduction that you would like, you can
set the LOUDNESS THRESHOLD control higher.
The loudness controller produces both fast and slow loudness control; the fast control
rides on top of the slow control. You can easily see this dual-speed operation on
the LOUDNESS GR meter. The LOUDNESS ATTACK control determines how much fast
control the loudness controller produces. As the control is turned down toward 0%,
it allows longer and longer loudness peaks to pass through.
Because of the system topology, the 8685’s loudness level meter assumes
that the LOUDNESS ATTACK control is always set to 100% and does not indicate
the effect of lower settings. As long as the control is set to 50% or
higher, this limitation should not have any material effect on the loudness
level meter’s accuracy. However, it is wise to double-check the effect
of the LOUDNESS ATTACK control on subjective loudness by listening tests
and/or use of an external loudness level meter like the free Orban Loudness
Meter for Windows, which uses the same algorithm as the 8685’s
built-in loudness level meter (www.orban.com/meter). The free Orban
meter is a two-channel device, but you can use it to assess the effect of
the LOUDNESS ATTACK control by testing with stereo program material applied
to the 8685’s Lf and Rf inputs.
The loudness controller may reduce the dramatic effect of certain sounds in entertainment
programming, like gunshots, explosions, or screeching tires. Operators may
therefore want to turn the loudness controller on during commercial breaks and off
during normal programming. Most sound-for-picture presets have the Loudness
Controller on. (Those that do not have “no LC” in their names.)The easiest way to
handle this situation is to start with your preferred preset, turn the loudness controller
off, and then save the result as a User Preset. Using one of the 8685’s remote
control mechanisms (like its GPI inputs), recall the “with loudness controller” and
“without loudness controller” presets as desired.
Slowing the LOUDNESS ATTACK control provides another way to maintain the dramatic
impact of loudness transients in dramatic programming; it can let gunshots and the
like through while still constraining long-term loudness to a fixed threshold. While
this is an easy solution that does not require your automation system to tell the
8685 when to recall presets, it is not ideal because there are some short-term loudness
events, like sibilance, applause, and whistles, that can be annoying to audiences.
In surround mixes with dialog mainly in the center channel, you can effectively
control sibilance with the center channel Band 4 and Band 5
compressors. In the 2.0 processor, you can use the Speech-Mode B4 and
B5 compressor threshold controls to accomplish the same goal.

3-16
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
Another loudness control strategy is this: Instead of using two presets with and
without loudness control (as described above), you can create presets with different
settings of the LOUDNESS ATTACK control (and possibly different settings of the
LOUDNESS THRESHOLD control as well). Try a slow attack (50% or below) for dramatic
programming and a faster attack (70%) for commercial breaks. This will maintain
some automatic loudness control for dramatic programming while controlling the
loudness of commercial breaks more rigorously.
Note that the loudness controller operates with reference to an absolute subjective
loudness threshold that does not adapt to program context. This means that if there
is a transition between very quiet program material (like footfalls through rustling
leaves) and a commercial, the commercial may still seem offensively loud even
though the loudness controller is controlling its loudness correctly with reference to
other sounds that reach full-scale loudness. Philosophically, this is inevitable; the
loudness controller cannot reduce the level of the commercial to the level of rustling
leaves without destroying the effectiveness of the commercial and angering the
sponsor!
Input/output Delay
The 8685’s input/output time delay is typically 25 ms—about three-quarters of an
NTSC frame. To make intelligent decisions about how to process, the 8685 needs to
look ahead at the next part of the program waveform. As digital transmission processing
advances further and further from its analog roots, this is the inevitable price
of progress.
A 25ms audio delay does not cause annoying AV-sync problems by itself. However,
to facilitate maintaining AV-sync in systems, the 8685 allows you to pad the delay to
exactly one or frames of 24, 25, 29.97, 30, 50, 59.94, or 60 fps video, which makes
matching audio and video delays convenient. (Two frames are required for 59.94/60
fps progressively scanned video.) See step 14 on page 3-19.
Customizing the 8685’s Sound
The subjective setup controls on the 8685 give you the flexibility to customize your
station’s sound. Nevertheless, as with any audio processing system, proper adjustment
of these controls consists of balancing the trade-offs between loudness, density,
and audible distortion. The following pages provide the information you need
to adjust the 8685 controls to suit your format, taste, and competitive situation.
When you start with one of our Factory Presets, there are three levels of subjective
adjustment available to you to let you customize the Factory Preset to your requirements:
Basic Modify, Intermediate Modify, and Advanced Modify.
See page 6-101 for a block diagram of the processing.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-17
Basic Modify
BASIC MODIFY allows you to control two important elements of 8685 processing:
the equalizer and the dynamics section (multiband compression, limiting, and clipping).
At this level, there is only one control for the dynamics section: LESS-MORE,
which changes several different subjective setup control settings simultaneously according
to a table that we have created in the 8685’s permanent ROM (Read-Only
Memory). In this table are sets of subjective setup control settings that provide, in
our opinion, the most favorable trade-off between loudness, density, and audible
distortion for a given amount of processing. We believe that most 8685 users will
never need to go beyond the LESS-MORE level of control because the combinations
of subjective setup control settings produced by this control have been optimized by
Orban’s audio processing experts on the basis of years of experience designing audio
processing and upon hundred of hours of listening tests.
Unlike other the LESS-More controls in most other Optimods, the 8685’s LESS-MORE
control is designed to always maintain the target loudness that the active Dialnorm
value specifies. In general, the LESS-MORE control sets the average amount of dynamic
range control provided by the processing, although the spectral balance also
changes in some of the “radio-style” presets. As you go from less to more, the loudness
of loud sounds will stay about the same but the loudness of quieter sounds will
increase. Because of the 8685’s sophisticated gating circuits, very quiet material like
background sounds, quiet underscoring, hiss, and hum will not be pumped up.
You need not (in fact, cannot) create a sound entirely from scratch. All User Presets
are created by modifying Factory Presets or by further modifying Factory Presets
that have been previously modified with a LESS-MORE adjustment. It is wise to set
the LESS-MORE control to achieve a sound as close as possible to your desired sound
before you make further modifications at the Advanced Modify level. If you do so,
any changes you make at this level are likely to be smaller and to require resetting
fewer controls.
In the 8685, LESS-MORE affects only the dynamics processing (compression, limiting,
and clipping). Unlike some of Orban’s older digital processors, the 8685’s equalization
and stereo enhancement are decoupled from LESS-MORE. You can therefore
change EQ or stereo enhancement and not lose the ability to use LESS-MORE. When
you create a user preset, the 8685 will automatically save your EQ and stereo enhancement
settings along with your LESS-MORE setting. When you recall the user
preset, you will still be able to edit your LESS-MORE setting if you wish.
Please note that when a given Factory or user processing preset’s DIALNORM setting is
GLOBAL, the 8685’s global DIALNORM setting automatically scales its loudness at the
8685’s output. If you want a given preset to produce a predictable loudness level in
a non-Dolby transmission environment (particularly when the preset is exported to
other 8685 units), you should set the processing preset’s DIALNORM value to something
other than GLOBAL. This will always override the active Setup’s global DIALNORM
setting. (See Low-IM Look-Ahead Limiter on page3-13 for a discussion of the series
connection of the DIALNORM and LIMITER DRIVE controls.)

3-18
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
Intermediate Modify
Intermediate Modify is a compromise between Basic Modify and Advanced Modify.
Most people will never have any reason to go beyond Intermediate Modify.
Advanced Modify
Intermediate Modify does not provide LESS-MORE control. Furthermore,
once you have edited a preset’s dynamics parameters in Intermediate
Modify, LESS-MORE control is no longer available in Basic Modify and will
be grayed-out if you access its screen. As noted above, we recommend
using the Basic Modify LESS-MORE control to achieve a sound as close as
possible to your desired sound before you make further modifications at
the Intermediate Modify level.
If you want to create a signature sound that is far out of the ordinary, if your taste
differs from the people who programmed the LESS-MORE tables, or if you are using
the 8685 in mastering or production applications, you will find Advanced Modify
useful. At this level, you can customize or modify any subjective setup control setting
to create a sound exactly to your taste. You can then save the settings in a User
Preset and recall it whenever you wish. This sort of customization is usually unnecessary
for sound for picture but can be very useful for radio and production applications.
Compressor attack time, knee, ratio, and threshold controls are available. These controls
can be dangerous in inexperienced hands, leading you to create presets that
sound great on some program material but overdrive the look-ahead peak limiter
on other material, causing objectionable pumping or distortion. We therefore recommend
that you create custom presets at the Advanced Modify level only if you
are experienced with on-air sound design and if you are willing to take the time to
double-check your work on many different types of program material.
This constraint is less applicable to Dolby Digital transmissions that use
conservative values of Dialnorm like –25 dB. In this case, the 8685’s lookahead
limiters will rarely produce gain reduction, so you can adjust the
compression parameters more freely without worrying that the limiters
will be overdriven.
In production and mastering applications, you will usually be working
with one piece of program material at a time. Here, you can use all of
Advanced Modify’s power to get the sound you want without being concerned
about how your settings will sound with other material.
The PC Remote software organizes its controls in tabbed screens. One set of tabs is
for surround processing and the other is for 2.0 processing. The EQUALIZATION and
LESS-MORE tabs in each set access the Basic Modify controls. The remaining tabs in
each set combine the Intermediate Modify and Advanced Modify controls, logically
organized by functionality.
Important Note: Once you have edited a preset’s dynamics parameters
in Intermediate or Advanced Modify, LESS-MORE control is no longer
available in Basic Modify. As noted above, we strongly recommend using
the LESS-MORE control to achieve a sound as close as possible to your de-

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-19
sired sound before you make further modifications at the Full or Advanced
Modify levels.
Setting Preset Loudness Correctly for Dolby Digital Transmission
In sound for picture applications that use a Dolby Digital transmission channel to the
consumer’s receiver, you can use the 8685’s LOUDNESS LEVEL meter as a reference for
adjusting a user preset’s loudness. This meter’s calibration tracks the 8685’s active
DIALNORM value, which is either the DIALNORM value in the active Setup (which applies
to any preset whose DIALNORM value is set to GLOBAL) or the DIALNORM value in
the active processing preset if this value is not set to GLOBAL.
The controls to which the following procedure refers are described later in Section 3.
A) Make sure that the input reference level in the active preset is correctly adjusted
(step 7 on page 2-11).
B) Make sure that the 8685’s active DIALNORM value is the same as the Dialnorm
value you are transmitting to consumers’ receivers (step 10 on page 2-14).
C) LOCATE to ADVANCED CONTROL, which is where you can access the controls required
to complete the steps below.
D) If the AGC is turned on in the preset, adjust the AGC DRIVE control so that the
AGC is producing the desired amount of compression. We recommend 10 dB
or less with normal levels.
E) If the AGC’s idle gain (i.e. the gain reduction produced by the AGC when its silence
gate is on) is inappropriate, adjust it with the AGC IDLE GAIN control.
If you are using a factory processing preset and you have adjusted the
input reference level correctly, there is no need to adjust the AGC DRIVE
or AGC IDLE GAIN controls.
F) Adjust the MULTIBAND DRIVE or 2-BAND DRIVE control (depending on whether
the five-band or two-band structure is active) to produce the desired amount
of multiband gain reduction. We recommend about 5 dB for dialog at normal
levels.
G) If you wish to use the Loudness Controller: Set the LOUDNESS THRESHOLD control
to –10 dB, which matches its threshold to the 8685’s active DIALNORM
value. Then set the MB LIMIT DRIVE control to make the LOUDNESS GR meter
indicate 3 dB of gain reduction with dialog at normal levels.
You should see the LOUDNESS LEVEL meter peaking around 0 dB when the
LOUDNESS GR meter shows that gain reduction is occurring
H) If you do not wish to use the Loudness Controller: Set the LOUDNESS
THRESHOLD control to OFF. Then adjust the MB LIMITER DRIVE control to produce
0 dB peak indications on the LOUDNESS LEVEL meter with dialog at normal
levels.
Presets with the loudness controller off will produce wider source-tosource
loudness variation (as indicated on the LOUDNESS LEVEL meter)
than presets with the loudness controller on. When the loudness control-

3-20
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
ler is off, the five-band structure will control loudness better than the
two-band structure. When the loudness controller is on, both structures
have comparable loudness control.
If you chose an appropriate DIALNORM value for your transmission, the
8685’s limiting meters should rarely indicate any gain reduction.
Gain Reduction Metering
Unlike the metering on some processors, when any 8685 gain reduction meter indicates
full-scale (at its bottom), it means that its associated compressor has run out of
gain reduction range, that the circuitry is being overloaded, and that various nastinesses
are likely to commence. Because the various compressors have 25 dB of gain
reduction range, the meter should never come close to 25 dB gain reduction if
OPTIMOD 8685 has been set up for a sane amount of gain reduction under ordinary
program conditions.
To Create or Save a Preset
There are two kinds of user presets in the 8685: Processing Presets and System Presets.
Once you have edited a preset, you can save it as a user preset. The 8685 can
store an indefinite number of user presets (typically more than 30), limited only by
available memory.
The 8685 preserves any edited, unsaved preset until you recall another preset. This is
true even if the 8685 is powered down or reboots. However, to ensure that you do
not accidentally lose your work, it is wise to save as a User Preset any edited preset
you want to keep. To save a preset:
A) Press the ESCAPE button repeatedly until you see the main menu.
B) LOCATE to SAVE/SAVE AS and press ENTER.
The SAVE PRESET screen appears.
• To save a Processing Preset, use the SAVE PRESET screen.
• To save a Setup, LOCATE to the SAVE SETUP screen, which is to the right of
the SAVE PRESET screen.
C) Choose a name for your preset.
Some non-alphanumeric characters (like < and > ) are reserved and cannot
be used in preset names.
D) Use the “virtual keyboard” to create a preset name.
Use the LOCATE button to navigate to each character. Then press ENTER to
accept that character.
The SHIFT key on the virtual keyboard changes it between upper and
lower case.
E) LOCATE to the SAVE button and press ENTER.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-21
• You cannot give a user preset the same name as a factory preset. If the
name that you have selected duplicates the name of a factory preset, a
warning box will appear saying:
Factory presets cannot be overwritten.
• If the name you have selected duplicates the name of an existing user preset,
the 8685 warns you that you are about to overwrite that preset. Answer
YES if you wish to overwrite the preset and NO otherwise. If you answer
NO, the 8685 will give you an opportunity to choose a new name for
the preset you are saving.
You can save user presets from the 8685 PC Remote application. (See
Using the 8685 PC Remote Control Software on page 3-65.) Please note
that when you save presets from the PC Remote application, you save
them in the 8685’s memory (as if you had saved them from the 8685’s
front panel). The PC Remote application also allows you to archive presets
to your computer’s hard drive (or other storage device) and to restore
them. However, archiving a preset is not the same as saving it. Archived
presets reside on a storage medium supported by your computer,
while saved presets reside in the 8685’s local non-volatile memory. You
cannot archive a preset until you have saved it. (See To back up user presets,
system files, and automation files onto your computer’s hard drive
on page 3-68.)
Note that if, for some reason, you wish to save an unmodified preset (either
Factory or user) under a new name, you must temporarily make an
arbitrary edit to that preset in order to make the SAVE PRESET button appear.
After you have saved the preset, reverse the edit and save the preset
again.
About the Processing Structures
If you want to create your own User Presets, the following detailed discussion of the
processing structures is important to understand. If you only use Factory Presets or if
you only modify them with LESS-MORE, you may still find the material interesting
but you do not need to understand it to get excellent sound from the 8685. We
have carefully designed the 8685’s factory presets and most users will not need to go
beyond these.
In the 8685, a processing structure is a DSP configuration that operates as a complete
audio processing system. There are three basic structures: Two-Band, Five-
Band, and Pass-Through. To make transitions from one structure to the next as
smooth as possible, the DSP computes all processing structures simultaneously but
only one can be active in the foreground.
The surround and 2.0 processors are essentially independent and can use different
structures. For example, the surround processor could be running the five-band
structure while the 2.0 processor is running the two-band structure.

3-22
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
To select a structure for the Surround processing, recall a factory preset or user having
the desired structure. If the 2.0 section of that preset has the wrong structure,
change it by importing a factory or user preset whose 2.0 section has desired structure
(see page 3-25). For example, if the TV 5B-GEN PURPOSE factory preset is active,
importing the TV 2B-GEN PURPOSE preset will cause the 2.0 processing to
change from five-band mode to two-band mode. Once you have the combination of
structures you want, save the result as a User Preset, which you can leave unchanged
or edit as you wish.
You cannot change the structures of the Surround or 2.0 sections of a given preset
by editing them; the only way to choose a structure is to recall (Surround processing)
or import (2.0 processing) a preset having that structure.
Switching Between Structures: The AGC, equalizer, and look-ahead limiter are
common to both Two-Band and Five-Band processing and therefore stay the same
when the 8685 switches between two-band and five-band operation. However, different
controls, as appropriate for Two-Band or Five-Band multiband compression,
appear in the screens containing dynamics processing controls. The meters also
change functionality to display the Two-Band or Five-Band gain reduction.
The Two-Band and Five-Band multiband compressor sidechains are independent and
always operate in the background. In the audio path, these structures both use the
five-band crossover. Two-Band processing uses bands 2 through 5 as the Master
band (above 200 Hz) by forcing their gains to be identical and controlling them with
the two-band sidechain. Meanwhile, the Two-Band sidechain creates the Two-Band
Bass band (below 200 Hz) by controlling band 1. Hence, switching between Two-
Band and Five-Band can be made seamless because the audio chain’s structure does
not change; the only thing that changes is the gain control sidechain.
To ensure seamless switching between a given two-band and five-band preset, it is
important to ensure that both presets are set up for approximately the same loudness
or to switch them during silence.
Pass-Through: PASS-THROUGH is a “soft bypass” function and is useful for any program
material that has been pre-processed for consistent loudness, like a network
feed. PASS-THROUGH defeats the AGC and multiband compressor gain reduction but
retains the look-ahead limiter (to prevent digital clipping), the equalizer, and the
loudness controller. PASS-THROUGH does not change the audio path like the 8685’s
BYPASS function. Instead, PASS-THROUGH gain-ramps the AGC and compressor
sidechains to produce the desired bypass gain. This ramping occurs within one video
frame (approximately 30 ms). This gain ramping and the invariant audio path minimize
the likelihood that invoking PASS-THROUGH will causes clicks in the audio when
PASS-THROUGH is invoked during program material.
PASS-THROUGH’S most important parameter is the PASS GAIN control. In the factory
PASS-THROUGH preset, the equalizer is available but is set “flat” while the Loudness
Controller is available, but is set OFF.
You can set the equalizer non-flat and save the result as a User Preset.
Duplicating the equalizer settings of the active preset to or from which
you switch may reduce the likelihood that switching to PASS-THROUGH

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-23
will cause an audio click. However, clicks can only occur if you switch during
active audio; you can prevent clicks by switching during silence like
the boundary between two program elements. The downside of using
non-flat equalization in PASS-THROUGH is that the equalization will color
the program material intended for “pass-through,” so it is usually not a
good idea—switching during silence is far preferable.
You can use the Loudness Controller to monitor and cap the maximum
subjective loudness of program material that would ordinarily be passed
through uncontrolled—a pathologically loud network commercial, for
example.
Note: LESS-MORE is not available in the PASS-THROUGH preset.
In addition to editing the factory PASS-THROUGH preset to create a pass-through user
preset, you can convert a two-band or five-band preset to pass-through mode. This
will retain the preset’s equalizer and loudness controller settings but will disable
other settings. To do this, LOCATE to ADVANCED MODIFY>AGC and set the PASS SWITCH
control to IN. To restore the preset’s full functionality, you can later set the PASS
SWITCH control to OUT.
Five-Band: The Five-Band structure is very flexible, enabling you to fine-tune your
on-air sound. All filters are phase-linear. Band 1 is lowpass, band 2 is highpass, and
the remaining bands are bandpass. The Band 1↔2 crossover frequency is switchable
between 100 and 200 Hz. The remaining crossover frequencies are fixed at 520 Hz,
1.8 kHz, and 6 kHz.
There are several Factory Presets for the Five-Band structure. You can edit these with
the LESS-MORE control. This control affects the sound-for-picture-oriented presets
differently than it does the music presets. When a sound-for-picture-oriented preset
is on the air, the LESS-MORE control adjusts the average amount of gain reduction by
adjusting the drive level to the Five-Band structure's input and adjusting the idle
gain—the amount of gain reduction in the AGC when it is gated. (It gates whenever
the input level to the AGC is below the setting of the AGC GATE THRESH control.)
However, LESS-More does not change the loudness controller threshold; it just
changes the amount of compression in the AGC and multiband compressor. Dialog
at normal levels will still be consistent with the setting of the 8685’s DIALNORM parameter.
Hence, LESS-MORE determines how much the 8685 will amplify the loudness
of quiet parts of the input while ensuring that the program material does not become
unpleasantly loud.
When a music preset is on the air, the LESS-MORE control sets the amount of overall
processing, making optimum tradeoffs between loudness, brightness, and distortion.
In sound for picture, there are no loudness wars; for music presets, there is
probably never a need to advance the LESS-MORE control beyond 5.
Two-Band: The Two-Band structure is the same as the Five-Band structure except
that the Two-Band compressor sidechain controls the gains of the five bands. The
upper four bands are 100% coupled and are controlled by the Master output of the
sidechain, while the Bass output of the sidechain controls Band 1.
The Two-Band structure has an open, easy-to-listen-to sound that is similar to the
source material if the source material is of good quality. However, if the spectral

3-24
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
balance between the bass and high frequency energy of the program material is incorrect,
the Two-Band structure (when its BASS COUPLING control is not set to 0 dB)
can gently correct it without introducing obvious coloration.
In radio-oriented applications, the Two-Band structure is mainly useful for classical
or “fine arts” programming that demands high fidelity to the original program
source.
The two-band structure preserves the frequency balance between midrange and
high frequency elements in the programming while permitting gentle automatic reequalization
of the balance between these elements (in the “master” band, which is
above 200 Hz) and elements in the “bass” band (below 200 Hz). It has a “reverse exponential”
release characteristic available, which can be very useful in sound-forpicture
applications by correcting large gain difference quickly while not adding
significant density to material that is already well controlled.
Factory Programming Presets
Factory Programming Presets are our “factory recommended settings” for various
program formats or types. The Factory Programming Presets are starting points to
help you get on the air quickly without having to understand anything about adjusting
the 8685’s sound.
You can easily edit any of these presets with the LESS-MORE control to optimize the
trade-off between loudness and distortion according to the needs of your format,
although this is often unnecessary. It is OK to use unmodified factory presets on the
air. These represent the best efforts of some very experienced transmission processing
sound designers. We are sometimes asked about unpublished “programming secrets”
for Optimods. In fact, there are no “secrets” that we withhold from users. This
manual reveals our “secrets” and the presets embody all of our craft as processing
experts. The presets are editable because other sound designers may have different
preferences from ours, not because the presets are somehow mediocre or improvable
by those with special, arcane knowledge that we withhold from most of our
customers.
Start with one of these presets. Spend some time listening critically to your sound.
Listen to a wide range of program material typical of your format and listen on several
types of audio systems (not just on your studio monitors). Then, if you wish, customize
your sound using the information in the Protection Limiter, Two-Band and
Five-Band sections that follow.
Each factory preset has full LESS-MORE capability. The table shows the presets, including
the source presets from which they were taken and the nominal LESS-MORE
setting of each preset. Some of the Five-Band presets appear several times under
different names because we felt that these presets were appropriate for more than
one format; these can be identified by a shared source preset name.
Important! If you are dissatisfied with the sound available from the factory
presets, please understand that each named preset is actually 19 pre-

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-25
sets that can be accessed via the LESS-MORE control. Try using this control
to trade off the amount of dynamic range reduction against processing
artifacts and side effects. Once you have used LESS-MORE, save your edited
preset as a User Preset.
Do not be afraid to choose a preset other than the one named for your programming
if you believe this other preset has a more appropriate sound. Also, if you
want to fine-tune the frequency balance of the programming, feel free to use Basic
Modify and make small changes to the Bass, Mid EQ, and HF EQ controls. The 8685
lets you make changes in EQ (and stereo enhancement) without losing the ability to
use Less-More settings.
Of course, LESS-MORE is still available for the unedited preset if you want
to go back to it. There is no way you can erase or otherwise damage the
Factory Presets. So, feel free to experiment.
If a preset has “2B” or “2BAND” in its name, it will activate the Two-Band structure.
(The Protection presets are two-band as well.) Other presets use the Five-Band structure.
Each Factory Preset contains parameters for the surround and 2.0 processing. These
parameters are identical. If you wish to use separate parameters for the surround
and 2.0 processing, you must create a User Preset (see page 3-20). A preset, whether
Factory or User, can be edited in three ways to create a new User Preset:
• If you have not previously edited individual parameters in the preset’s dynamics
processing, you can adjust LESS-MORE in both the Surround and 2.0 sections
of the preset
• You can adjust any individual parameter in both the Surround and 2.0 sections
of the preset.
• You can bulk-import all of the 2.0 parameters contained in any User Preset or
Factory Preset.
When you edit a preset by bulk-importing 2.0 parameters like this, they will overwrite
the existing 2.0 parameters in your edited preset, including any that you have
might have adjusted before you imported.
To import a 2.0 preset from the 8685’s front panel:
A) LOCATE to RECALL/IMPORT > IMPORT 2.0 PRESET.
You may have to scroll the display using PREV button until IMPORT PRESET
appears.
B) Turn the wheel until the desired preset name appears.
C) Press ENTER to recall the preset.
To import a 2.0 preset from PC Remote:
A) Choose IMPORT 2.0 CONTROLS from the FILE menu to bring up the IMPORT 2.0
CONTROLS dialog box.

3-26
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
B) With the mouse, highlight the desired 2.0 source preset, either Factory or
User.
C) Click IMPORT.
After importing the 2.0 parameters, you are still free to adjust any individual Surround
or 2.0 parameter. When you are satisfied with your work, you can then save
this combination of Surround and 2.0 parameters as a new User Preset. You can then
use your new User Preset as a source for 2.0 parameters to be imported into any
other User Presets you may wish to create or edit. For example, you could have six
User Presets with identical 2.0 processing parameters but with different Surround
processing parameters. The 2.0 bulk import feature makes this easy.
If you have not edited any parameters in a given 2.0 Factory Preset’s dynamics processing,
LESS-MORE will continue to be available even if that 2.0 preset has been imported
into a User Preset and you are editing that User Preset. Moreover, you can
freely create multiple generations of User Presets that retain 2.0 LESS-MORE functionality.
The only thing that counts is that the 2.0 parameters in a given User Preset
are unchanged compared the original source Factory Preset.
Sound-for-Picture Presets
Sound-for-picture preset names all begin with “TV” or “TVA.” Most of these presets
have the CBS Loudness Controller turned on. It is set so that loudness is constrained
to a level consistent with the active DIALNORM value (see Loudness Control on page
3-14). If you wish to use a given preset with the loudness controller turned off, set
its LOUDNESS THRESH parameter to OFF and save the result as a User Preset.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-27
Presets beginning with “TVA” are tuned with the assumption that the 2.0 processing
is operating with 50μs or 75μs preemphasis and is driving an analog TV transmitter.
See step 11 on page 2-31. A given “TVA” preset’s surround processing is identical to
the surround processing in the corresponding “TV” preset, which is turned with the
assumption that the 2.0 processing will operate with no preemphasis (FLAT); see step
10 on page 2-30.
TV 2B–GEN PURPOSE (TV Two-Band General Purpose): This preset accommodates
most dramatic programming (particularly older material), providing gentle gain control
that limits dynamic range to a level that provides the general audience with
consistently intelligible dialog. It sounds very similar to Orban’s analog OPTIMOD-TV
(Model 8182A) when that unit is adjusted for “General” programming according to
the instructions in its operating manual. This preset retains the spectral balance of
its input as much as possible. TV 2B-GEN PURPOSE is not the best choice for live news,
sports, or films with optical soundtracks. The Five-Band presets (see below) can
automatically equalize such program material when its spectral balance is inappropriate
and can also apply single-ended dynamic noise reduction.
These presets defeat the AGC and do all gain riding with the two-band compressor,
which is set for reverse exponential release. This release characteristic does not significantly
increase the density of material whose level is well controlled while still
performing fast correction of levels that are too low. The Loudness Controller is active,
so this preset controls loudness tightly.
For modern dramatic programming mixed in surround, you may prefer the TV 5B-
Preset Names Normal Less-More
TV 2B-GEN PURP NO LC 5.0
TV 2B-GEN PURPOSE 5.0
TV 5B-GEN PUR W NR 5.0
TV 5B-GEN PURPOSE 5.0
TV 5B-GEN PURP NO LC 5.0
TV 2B-DRAMA 5.0
TV 5B-DRAMA 5.0
TV 5B-DRAMA COUPLD 5.0
TV 5B-NEWS 5.0
TV 5B-OPTICAL FILM 5.0
TV 5B-SPORTS 5.0
TV AGC+LC 5.0
TV AGC+LC+DS 5.0
TVA 2B-GEN PURP NO LC 5.0
TVA 2B-GEN PURPOSE 5.0
TVA 5B-GEN PUR W NR 5.0
TVA 5B-GEN PURPOSE 5.0
TVA 5B-GEN PURP NO LC 5.0
TVA 2B-DRAMA 5.0
TVA 5B-DRAMA 5.0
TVA 5B-DRAMA COUPLD 5.0
TVA 5B-NEWS 5.0
TVA 5B-OPTICAL FILM 5.0
Table 3-1: Factory Programming Presets (Sound-for-picture)

3-28
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
DRAMA preset, which preserves more of the mixes’ original dynamic range.
TV 2B GEN PURP NO LC (TV Two-Band General Purpose without Loudness Controller):
This preset is the same as TV 2B-GEN PURPOSE except the Loudness Controller
is turned off and the MB DRIVE control is backed off by 3 dB to achieve approximately
the same loudness as TV 2B-GEN PURPOSE. Because the Loudness Controller
is inactive, this preset has more dynamic punch than TV 2B-GEN PURPOSE, but the
loudness of highly processed material (like commercials with a lot of midrange
boost) may be objectionably loud.
TV 5B-GEN PUR W/NR (TV Five-Band General Purpose with Noise Reduction): provides
effective dynamic range control and “automatic re-equalization” of most dramatic
material. It uses the Loudness Controller to control loudness tightly. It applies
single-ended noise reduction to the material, which will reduce unwanted noise like
hiss, hum, or stage rumble. However, it will also reduce ambience. If the program
material is carefully produced (as are most contemporary feature-film soundtracks),
you may wish to use TV 5B-GEN PURPOSE (which does not apply noise reduction), or,
if the material is so well produced that it would not benefit from “automatic reequalization,”
use TV 2B-GEN PURPOSE.
TV 5B-GEN PURPOSE (TV Five-Band General Purpose without Noise Reduction): is
identical to TV 5B-GEN PUR W/NR except that the single-ended dynamic noise reduction
system is off.
TV 5B GEN PURP NO LC (TV Five-Band General Purpose without Loudness Controller):
This preset is the same as TV 5B-GEN PURPOSE except the Loudness Controller
is turned off and the MB DRIVE control is backed off by 3 dB to achieve approximately
the same loudness as TV 5B-GEN PURPOSE. Because the Loudness Controller
is inactive, this preset has more dynamic punch than TV 5B-GEN PURPOSE. The fiveband
processing makes the audio spectrum more consistent than does TV 2B-GEN
PURP NO LC, so TV 5B-GEN PURP NO LC controls loudness better than TV 2B-GEN
PURP NO LC even though the Loudness Controller is inactive.
TV 2B-DRAMA (TV Two-Band Drama): uses the 8685’s soft knee compression and
AGC RATIO control to regulate loudness while still preserving some of the dynamic
range of the original mix. This preset sounds very smooth and natural with modern
surround sound mixes for scripted dramas. The 8685’s Loudness Controller is exploited
to limit loudness to a maximum level. Typically, the Loudness Controller will
produce 1 to 3 dB of gain reduction with dialog at normal levels and may produce as
much as 12 dB of gain reduction with very loud sound effects or commercials.
Because it preserves some dynamic range, it is important that the input level to the
8685 not be too far awry. Usually, network feeds will meet this requirement but local
playout of older material that has not been checked for loudness by a long-term
Loudness Level meter like ITU-R BS.1770 may not work well. Use one of the generalpurpose
presets for this kind of material.
TV 5B-DRAMA (TV Five-Band Drama): like its 2B counterpart, uses the 8685’s soft
knee compression and AGC RATIO control to regulate loudness while still preserving
some of the dynamic range of the original mix. In addition, the five-band compressor
automatically re-equalizes material that may otherwise sound spectrally unbal-

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-29
anced. The center channel compressor effectively de-esses dialog without punching
holes in the remaining channels. Coupling between the center channel and remaining
channels allows the center channel’s level to be boosted automatically by as
much as 3 dB with respect to the other channels if this is needed to help intelligibility.
We prefer this preset to TV 2B-DRAMA because of its effective, unobtrusive de-essing
and because it is more resistant to spectral gain intermodulation, which is program
material in one frequency range’s audibly pumping material in a different range.
Like its two-band counterpart, this preset is sensitive to input levels because its compression
ratio is finite. It also fully exploits the Loudness Controller, which usually
shows slight gain reduction with dialog at normal levels.
TV 5B-DRAMA COUPLD (TV Five-Band Drama Coupled): is similar to TV 5B DRAMA
but uses more interband band coupling in the five-band compressor and a slower
multiband compressor release time so it performs less automatic re-equalization of
the program material. This is an alternative to TV 2B DRAMA that de-esses more effectively.
TV 5B-NEWS (TV Five-Band News): rides gain more quickly than the generalpurpose
presets. Its AGC release time is faster, so it will bring up low-level material
more quickly. It is designed for live news programs where input levels may be quite
unpredictable. It also automatically re-equalizes substandard audio (which is quite
common in live news broadcasts). The dynamic single-ended noise reduction is
turned on.
TV 5B-SPORTS (TV Five-Band Sports): is similar to TV 5B-NEWS, except the AGC release
time is slower to resist pumping up crowd noise.
TV 5B-OPTICAL FILM (TV Five-Band Optical Film): is designed to make the best of
the low-quality audio provided with optical film sound tracks (particularly 16mm).
The gate threshold is quite high to avoid pumping up hiss, thumps, and other optical
artifacts. The threshold of the single-ended dynamic noise reduction system is
also high so that this system can reduce artifacts as far as possible. Release times are
slow, because we assumed that material encoded on optical film has already been
carefully level-controlled to accommodate the very limited dynamic range of the
medium, so little gain riding is therefore required from the 8685.
TV AGC+LC and TV AGC+LC+DS are intended for stations that are prohibited by
network or other edict from using multiband processing. The AGC performs gain riding
and the loudness controller regulates loudness without aid from the multiband
compressor. Both are configured to produce only wideband gain reduction.
• TV AGC+LC uses the five-band structure with all compressors of the multiband
compressors except for LFE turned off. Except for independent control of the LFE
level, which is important to prevent power in the LFE channel from causing audible
midrange pumping in the loudness controller, all gain reduction is strictly
wideband.

3-30
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
• TV AGC+LC+DS uses the five-band structure with all multiband compressors except
for LFE and B5 turned off. B5 is configured as a de-esser, which, depending
on the strictness of a given “wideband-only” edit, may be an acceptable use of
frequency-selective gain reduction. (In our experience, there is a significant
amount of television material that has not been adequately de-essed in production
and thus requires additional de-essing from the on-air processing.)
This preset sounds better than TV AGC+LC because the loudness controller does
not have to de-ess, which it does by using wideband gain reduction. Hence, it is
less likely to audibly duck material having heavy “esses.”
Protection and Studio AGC Presets
AGC+ FLAT LIMITER: This preset allows the 8685 to serve as a studio AGC, substituting
for the AGC in an Optimod at a radio or television transmitter and providing
protection limiting for the STL that links the output of the 8685 to the input of the
Optimod at the transmitter. It uses the look-ahead limiter to prevent overloading
the STL on peaks.
This preset is tuned so that it does not normally trigger gain reduction in the 8685’s
five-band compressor — the Optimod at the transmitter should be the processor
that performs this multiband compression.
LOOK-AHEAD LIMITER: The LOOK-AHEAD LIMITER preset is a Two-Band preset that
turns off the stereo enhancer, AGC, equalizer, and two-band compressor so that you
can use the processing as a fast look-ahead protection limiter.
This preset’s LESS-MORE control is set to 1.0. For most program material, LESS-MORE
= 1.0 will produce no look-ahead limiter gain reduction.
• In the surround processing channel, when LESS-MORE = 1.0 and the Lf and Rf
channels are both driven, the threshold of the look-ahead limiter is 16 dB above
reference level.
• In the 2.0 processing channel, when LESS-MORE = 1.0 and the Lst and Rst channels
are both driven, the threshold of the look-ahead limiter is 18 dB above reference
level.
This assumes that the 8685’s SURROUND REF LEVEL and 2.0 REF LEVEL controls
have been adjusted to produce 10 dB of AGC Master band gain reduction
in the surround and 2.0 AGCs respectively when the ROCK-
GENERAL preset is active and the 8685’s Lf, Rf, Lst, and Rst inputs are
driven by a 400 Hz tone at your facility’s reference level. This level is typically
either –18 dBfs or –20 dBfs, depending on which standard you have
adopted.
To produce look-ahead limiter gain reduction, turn up the LESS-MORE control. Each
step of the LESS-MORE control increases the drive level to the look-ahead limiter by
1 dB and increases the input/output gain by 1 dB for signals below the limiter

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-31
threshold. At LESS-MORE = 10, the processor’s gain below threshold has increased to
9 dB.
Instead of adjusting LESS-MORE, you can adjust the FINAL LIMIT DRIVE control (which
what LESS-MORE actually does). Do not set the FINAL LIMIT DRIVE control below “0”
with this preset; doing so will compromise system headroom.
Adjusting the LESS-MORE or FINAL LIMIT DRIVE controls is equivalent to simultaneously
decreasing the threshold and increasing the make-up gain
in a protection limiter having threshold and output make-up gain controls.
PASS-THROUGH: This is the only factory preset that invokes the Pass-Through structure
(see Pass-Through on page 3-22). It usually edited to set the desired passthrough
gain and the result is then saved as a User Preset.
PROTECT: This is a two-band preset designed to produce no gain reduction unless it
encounters unusually high input levels caused by operator error. It uses the 2B compressor
to control excessive levels, so it is more forgiving than the LOOK-AHEAD and
PASS-THROUGH presets, which offer only peak limiting.
SOFT KNEE 5B; SOFT KNEE 2B: These presets are “zeroed-out” starting points for
mastering applications, particularly where soft knee compression is desired. These
presets need to be manually tweaked to complement the program material being
processed. See Using the 8685 for Production and Mastering starting on page 3-73.
These presets are phase-linear. They set all equalization flat and turn off the AGC.
The multiband compressor (two-band or 5-band) is set to supply a very soft-knee
compression characteristic with approximately 5-10 dB of gain reduction. The ratio
for a given compressor starts out at 1:1 and ends up at ∞:1 when the input level is 20
dB above threshold.
Mastering engineers will certainly want to adjust the compression thresholds and
band coupling to complement the program material. The ratio and knee controls
are adjustable separately for each band’s compressor. For example, one might want
to use a low ratio and soft knee in bands 1-4 while using a higher ratio and/or
harder knee in band 5 (for de-essing).
The 8685’s powerful equalization section is, of course, also available. Additionally,
these presets set the look-ahead limiter drive control conservatively, which ensures
highest quality. However, the 8685’s look-ahead limiter can be driven quite hard
Preset Names Normal Less-More
AGC+FLAT LIMITER 5.0
LOOK-AHEAD LIMITER 1.0
PASS-THROUGH 5.0
PROTECT 1.0
SOFT KNEE 2B 5.0
Table 3-2: Pass-Through, Protection and AGC Presets

3-32
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
without objectionable side effects, so the 8685 can create competitively loud masters.
Radio-Style Presets
The radio-style presets (Table 3-3 on page 3-33) have been named similarly to their
radio counterparts in Orban’s OPTIMOD 8500 and 6300. Their basic audio texture is
very similar to the presets in these products. The loudness controller is turned off.
CLASSICAL: As their names imply, the CLASSICAL 5-BAND and CLASSICAL TWO-
BAND presets are optimized for classical music, gracefully handling recordings with
very wide dynamic range and sudden shifts in dynamics. The Five-Band version uses
heavy inter-band coupling to prevent large amounts of automatic re-equalization,
which could otherwise cause unnatural stridency and brightness in strings and horns
and which could pump up very low frequency rumble in live recording venues.
The Five-Band preset defeats the AGC, using only the five-band compressor for gain
reduction. It also defeats phase rotation to ensure the most transparent Five-Band
sound available.
CLASSICAL-5B+AGC uses the AGC set for 2:1 compression ratio. Because of the
AGC, it affects more of the total dynamic range of the recording than does the
CLASSICAL-5 BAND preset. However, the AGC provides extremely smooth and unobtrusive
compression because of the gentle ratio and window gating. This preset
uses the Five-Band compressor very lightly with a fast release time as a peak limiter.
The AGC does almost all of the compression.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-33
There is also a corresponding two-band preset called CLASSICAL-2B+AGC. Even
more transparent, “purist” classical processing is available from this preset, which is
phase-linear and which preserves the spectral balance of the original material as
much as possible. However, if you need a bit more automatic re-equalization than
the CLASSICAL TWO-BAND preset provides, use the CLASSICAL 5-BAND preset.
CLASSICAL-2B SFTKN (Classical using two-band Soft-Knee Compression) defeats
the AGC and exploits the 8685’s soft-knee two-band compression. Quiet material is
gently compressed with a very low compression ratio. The compression ratio increases
as the source material gets louder (see Figure 3-2 on page 3-54). Very quiet
material is typically amplified by 10 dB. This level-dependent compression ratio provides
very smooth, subtle compression.
Because the CLASSICAL presets preserve a significant amount of the dynamic range
present in the source material (including speech), it is wise to use a separate microphone
processor to ensure appropriate voice/music balance.
EDGE: This preset is designed for hit music broadcasters who prefer extremely
punchy bass to fastidious distortion control. It is loud and has a bright high frequency
texture.
GOLD: GOLD is loud and “hi-fi”-sounding while still respecting the limitations and
Preset Names Normal Less-More
CLASSICAL-2 BAND 5.0
CLASSICAL-2B SFTKN 5.0
CLASSICAL-2B+AGC 5.0
CLASSICAL-5 BAND 7.0
CLASSICAL-5B+AGC 5.0
EDGE 10.0
GOLD 9.5
GREGG 9.5
GREGG OPEN 9.5
IMPACT 9.5
JAZZ 7.0
LOUD-HOT 8.5
NEWS-TALK 7.0
ROCK-DENSE 7.0
ROCK-LIGHT 7.0
ROCK-MEDIUM 7.0
ROCK-OPEN 7.0
ROCK-SOFT 8.5
SMOOTH JAZZ 9.0
SPORTS 7.0
WMA MUSIC 9.5
WMA NEWS-TALK 7.0
Table 3-3: Radio-Style Presets

3-34
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
basic flavor of the recordings from the era of the 1950s through 1970s.
For example, we do not attempt to exaggerate high frequency energy in
the GOLD preset. The highs in recordings of this era are often noisy, distorted,
or have other technical problems that make them unpleasant
sounding when the processor over-equalizes them in an attempt to emulate
the high frequency balance of recently recorded material.
GREGG: GREGG and GREGG OPEN all use a 200 Hz band1/band2 crossover frequency
to achieve a bass sound similar to the classic five-band Gregg Labs FM processors
designed by Orban’s Vice President of New Product Development, Greg
Ogonowski. Dynamically, these presets produce a slight increase in bass energy below
100 Hz and a decrease of bass energy centered at 160 Hz. This bass sound works
particularly well with speakers having good bass response.
In terms of loudness, midrange texture, and HF texture, these presets are similar to
the LOUD-HOT+BASS presets.
IMPACT: IMPACT is intended for CHR and similar formats where attracting a large
audience (maximizing cume) is more important than ensuring long time-spentlistening.
This is a bright, “major-market” preset that has a great deal of presence
energy to cut through on lower-quality speakers.
Its sound changes substantially as the LESS-MORE control is turned down—fast peak
limiting decreases while bass punch and transparency improve. Therefore, exploring
various Less-More settings is worthwhile with IMPACT, because, for many circumstances,
this preset will be “over the top” if it is not turned down with LESS-MORE.
JAZZ: JAZZ is specifically tailored toward broadcasters that play mostly instrumental
music, particularly classic jazz (Coltrane, Mingus, Monk, etc.). It is a quiet preset with
a very clean, mellow high end to prevent stridency on saxophones and other horns.
It preserves much of the qualities of the original recordings, doing light reequalization.
The preset produces very low listening fatigue, so it is a good choice
for broadcasters that want listeners to stay all day. Note that broadcasters programming
“smooth jazz” should investigate the SMOOTH JAZZ preset, which is
much louder and more “commercial”-sounding.
LOUD-HOT: A very bright and present with up-front vocals. Release time is medium.
NEWS-TALK: This preset is quite different from the others. It is based on the fast
multiband release time setting so it can quickly perform automatic equalization of
substandard program material, including telephone. It is useful for creating a uniform,
intelligible sound from widely varying source material, particularly source material
that is “hot from the field” with uncontrolled quality.
SPORTS: Similar to NEWS-TALK except the AGC Release (AGC Release Time) is
slower and the Gate Thresh (Gate Threshold) is higher. This recognizes that most
sports programming has very low signal-to-noise ratio due to crowd noise and other
on-field sounds, so the preset does not pump this up as the NEWS-TALK preset
would tend to do.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-35
ROCK: ROCK-DENSE, ROCK-MEDIUM, and ROCK-OPEN are appropriate for general
rock and contemporary programming. They provide a bright high end and
punchy low end (although not as exaggerated as the URBAN presets). A midrange
boost provides enough presence energy to ensure that vocals stand out. A modest
amount of high frequency coupling (determined by the Band Clipping 3>4 setting)
allows reasonable amounts of automatic HF equalization to correct dull program
material, while still preventing exaggerated frequency balances and excessive HF
density. Dense, medium, and open refer to the compression density, which is determined
by the release time settings in the AGC and multiband compressor sections.
ROCK-LIGHT has an open sound with little audible compression and less brightness
than the first three presets. It is a compromise between ROCK-OPEN and ROCK-
SOFT.
ROCK-SOFT has a mellow, easy-to-listen-to high frequency quality that is designed
for female-skewing formats. It is also a candidate for “Quiet Storm” and “Love
Songs” light rock or light urban formats.
ROCK-SMOOTH has the same mellow, easy-to-listen-to high frequency quality as
ROCK-SOFT, but with more density. Again, it is a good choice for female-skewing
formats, but where you need more compression and density than you get with
ROCK-SOFT.
For Contemporary Hit Radio (CHR) we recommend the ROCK-DENSE or ROCK-
MEDIUM versions. In competitive situations, you may need to use LOUD-HOT (you
can use LESS-MORE to get it even louder) or even LOUD-HOT+BASS or IMPACT.
However, the “rock” presets are somewhat cleaner and are therefore more likely to
encourage longer times spent listening than are the “loud” presets.
For Album-Oriented Rock (AOR) we recommend the ROCK-MEDIUM or ROCK-OPEN
versions, although you might prefer the more conservative ROCK-LIGHT or ROCK-
SMOOTH versions.
SMOOTH JAZZ: This preset is designed for commercial broadcasters playing smooth
jazz (Kenny G., etc.). It is designed to prevent stridency with saxes and other horns.
This preset is based on a custom Optimod-FM 8400 preset that has been used successfully
by a major-market smooth jazz station with very good ratings. However, if
the loudness/density tradeoff is not to your taste, use LESS-MORE to turn it down,
producing lower loudness with less density.
WMA MUSIC: This preset is based on GREGG SLOW but has been edited to minimize
artifacts in the Windows Media Audio V9 codec when operated at bitrates below
64 kbps. See Processing for Low Bit Rate Codecs on page 3-5.
WMA NEWS-TALK: This preset is based on NEWS-TALK but has been edited to
minimize artifacts in the Windows Media Audio V9 codec when operated at bitrates
below 64 kbps.

3-36
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
Equalizer Controls
The table summarizes the equalization controls available for the Five-Band structure.
(Note that “advanced” controls are accessible only from 8685 PC Remote software.)
Except for BRILLIANCE and DJ BASS, these equalization controls are common to both
the Two-Band and Five-Band structures. The equalizer is located between the AGC
and multiband compressor sections of both structures.
Any equalization that you set will be automatically stored in any User Preset that
you create and save. For example, you can use a User Preset to combine an unmodified
Factory Programming Preset with your custom equalization. Of course, you can
also modify the Factory Preset (with Basic Modify, Intermediate Modify, or Advanced
Modify) before you create your User Preset.
In general, you should be conservative when equalizing modern, well-recorded program
material. This is particularly true with general-purpose video programming.
The discussion below applies mainly to radio-style applications
Except for BASS GAIN, most of the factory presets use less than 3 dB of equalization.
Bass Shelf Controls, the Five-Band structure’s low bass equalization controls, are
designed to add punch and slam to rock and urban music. They provide a parametric
shelving equalizer with control over gain, hinge frequency, and slope (in dB/octave).
Bass Shelf Hinge Frequency
Bass Gain
Hz 55 110 220 440
Bass Slope
18dB/oct
12dB/oct
6dB/oct
+6 dB
+3 dB
0 dB
Bass Hinge Frequency sets the
frequency where shelving starts to
take effect.
Bass Gain sets the amount of bass
boost (dB) at the top of the shelf.
Bass Slope sets the slope (dB/octave) of the
transition between the top and bottom of the shelf.
The moderate-slope (12 dB/octave) shelving boost achieves a bass boost that is more
audible on smaller receivers, but which can sound boomier on high-quality receivers
and home theater systems. The steep-slope (18 dB/octave) shelving boost creates a
solid, punchy bass from the better consumer receivers and home theater systems
with decent bass response. The 6 dB/octave shelving boost is like a conventional
tone control and creates the most mid-bass boost, yielding a “warmer” sound. Because
it affects the mid-bass frequency range, where the ear is more sensitive than it
is to very low bass, the 6 dB/octave slope can create more apparent bass level at the
cost of bass “punch.”
There are no easy choices here; you must choose the characteristic you want by
identifying your target audience and the receivers they are most likely to be using.
Often, you will not want to use any boost at all for general-purpose sound-forpicture
programming because this can exaggerate rumble and other low frequency

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-37
noise. Additionally, large amounts of boost will increase the gain reduction in the
lowest band of the multiband compressor, which may have the effect of reducing
some frequencies below 100 or 200 Hz (depending on the setting of the B1/B2
XOVER control). So be aware the large fixed bass boosts may have a different effect
than you expect because of the way that they interact with the multiband compressor.
On the other hand, stations specializing in pop music programming will usually want
to employ some bass boost to maintain the punch of this programming, particularly
if urban or rap music is a significant part of the music mix.
Low Frequency Parametric Equalizer is a specially designed equalizer whose
boost and cut curves closely emulate those of a classic Orban analog parametric
equalizer with conventional bell-shaped curves (within ±0.15 dB worst-case). This
provides warm, smooth, “analog-sounding” equalization.
LF Frequency determines the center frequency of the equalization, in
Hertz. Range is 20-500Hz.
LF Gain determines the amount of peak boost or cut (in dB) over a ±10
dB range.
LF Width determines the bandwidth of the equalization, in octaves. The
range is 0.8-4.0 octaves. If you are unfamiliar with using a parametric
equalizer, 1.5 octaves is a good starting point. These curves are relatively
broad because they are designed to provide overall tonal coloration, instead
of notching out small areas of the spectrum.
The LF parametric can be used in the mid-bass region (100-300Hz) to add “warmth”
and “mellowness” to the sound when boosting. When cutting, it can remove a
“woody” or “boxy” sound.
The equalizer, such as the classic Orban analog parametrics like the 622B, has constant
“Q” curves. This means that the cut curves are narrower than the boost curves.
The width (in octaves) is calibrated with reference to 10 dB boost. As you decrease
the amount of EQ gain (or start to cut), the width in octaves will decrease. However,
the “Q” will stay constant.
“Q” is a mathematical parameter that relates to how fast ringing damps out. (Technically,
we are referring to the “Q” of the poles of the equalizer transfer function,
which does not change as you adjust the amount of boost or cut.)
The curves in the 8685’s equalizer were created by a so-called “minimax” (“minimize
the maximum error” or “equal-ripple”) IIR digital approximation to the curves provided
by the Orban 622B analog parametric equalizer. Therefore, unlike less sophisticated
digital equalizers that use the “bilinear transformation” to generate EQ
curves, the shapes of the 8685’s curves are not distorted at high frequencies.
Midrange Parametric Equalizer is a parametric equalizer whose boost and cut
curves closely emulate those of an analog parametric equalizer with conventional
bell-shaped curves.

3-38
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
MID Frequency determines the center frequency of the equalization, in
Hertz. Range is 250-6000Hz.
MID Gain determines the amount of peak boost or cut (in dB) over a ±10
dB range.
MID Width determines the bandwidth of the equalization, in octaves.
The range is 0.8-4.0 octaves. If you are unfamiliar with using a parametric
equalizer, 1 octave is a good starting point.
With Five-Band presets, the audible effect of the midrange equalizer is closely associated
with the amount of gain reduction in the midrange bands. With small
amounts of gain reduction, it boosts power in the presence region. This can increase
the loudness of such material substantially. As you increase the gain reduction in the
midrange bands (by turning the MULTIBAND DRIVE (Multiband Drive) control up), the
MID GAIN control will have progressively less audible effect. The compressor for the
midrange bands will tend to reduce the effect of the MID frequency boost (in an attempt
to keep the gain constant) to prevent excessive stridency in program material
that already has a great deal of presence power. Therefore, with large amounts of
gain reduction, the density of presence region energy will be increased more than
will the level of energy in that region. Because the 3.7 kHz band compressor is par-
Equalizer Controls
Group Basic/
Intermediate
Modify Name
Bass Shelf Bass Frequency
Advanced Name Range
Bass Frequency 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 105, 110, 115,
120, 125, 130, 135, 140, 145, 150,
160, 170, 180, 190, 200, 210, 220,
230, 240, 250, 270, 290, 310, 330,
350, 380, 410, 440, 470, 500Hz
Bass Gain Bass Gain 0 … 12 dB
Bass Slope Bass Slope 6,12,18 dB/Oct
Low
LF Frequency Low Frequency 20 ... 500 Hz
LF Gain Low Gain –10.0 … +10.0 dB
LF Width Low Width 0.8 ... 4 octaves
Mid
Mid Frequency Mid Frequency 250 ... 6000 Hz
Mid Gain Mid Gain –10.0 … +10.0 dB
Mid Width Mid Width 0.8 ... 4 octaves
High
High Frequency
High Frequency 1.0 … 15.0 kHz
High Gain High Gain –10.0 … +10.0 dB
High Width High Width 0.8 ... 4 octaves
Brilliance Brilliance BRILLIANCE 0.0 … +6.0 dB
HF Enhancer HF Enh High Frequency
Enhancer
0 … 15
DJ Bass DJ Bass DJ Bass Boost Off, 1… +10 dB
Highpass Filter Highpass Highpass Filter Off, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90,
(2.0 processing
100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 170,
only)
200 Hz
Lowpass Filter Lowpass Lowpass Filter 10 … 20 kHz; 1 kHz steps
Phase Rotate Phase Rotator Phase Rotator In, Out (2.0 processing only)
Table 3-4: Five-Band Equalizer Controls

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-39
tially coupled to the gain reduction in the 6.2 kHz band in most presets, tuning MID
FREQUENCY to 2-4 kHz and turning up the MID GAIN control will decrease energy in
the 6.2 kHz band—you will be increasing the gain reduction in both the 3.7 kHz and
6.2 kHz bands. You may wish to compensate for this effect by turning up the
BRILLIANCE control.
With Two-Band presets, the midrange equalizer will behave much more as you
might expect because the two-band structure cannot automatically re-equalize midrange
energy. Instead, increasing midrange energy will moderately increase the
Master band’s gain reduction.
Use the mid frequency equalizer with caution. Excessive presence boost tends to be
audibly strident and fatiguing. Moreover, the sound quality, although loud, can be
very irritating. We suggest a maximum of 3 dB boost, although 10 dB is achievable.
In some of our factory music presets, we use a 3 dB boost at 2.6 kHz to bring vocals
more up-front.
High Frequency Parametric Equalizer is an equalizer whose boost and cut curves
closely emulate those of an analog parametric equalizer with conventional bellshaped
curves.
High Frequency determines the center frequency of the equalization, in
Hertz. The range is 1-15 kHz
High Gain determines the amount of peak boost or cut over a ±10 dB
range.
High Width determines the bandwidth of the equalization, in octaves.
The range is 0.8-4.0 octaves. If you are unfamiliar with using a parametric
equalizer, one octave is a good starting point.
Excessive high frequency boost can exaggerate hiss and distortion in program material
that is less than perfectly clean. We suggest no more than 4 dB boost as a practical
maximum, unless source material is primarily from high-quality digital sources. In
several of our presets, we use this equalizer to boost the upper presence band (4.4
kHz) slightly, leaving broadband HF boost to the BRILLIANCE and/or HF ENHANCE controls.
Brilliance controls the drive to Band 5 in the 5-Band structure only. (This control is
nonfunctional in the two-band structure.) The Band 5 compressor/limiter dynamically
controls this boost, protecting the final limiter from excessive HF drive. We recommend
a maximum of 4 dB of BRILLIANCE boost and most people will prefer substantially
less.
DJ Bass (“DJ Bass Boost“) control determines the amount of bass boost produced
on some male voices. In its default OFF position, it causes the gain reduction of the
lowest frequency band to move quickly to the same gain reduction as its nearest
neighbor when gated. This fights any tendency of the lowest frequency band to develop
significantly more gain than its neighbor when processing voice because voice
will activate the gate frequently. Each time it does so, it will reset the gain of the
lowest frequency band so that the gains of the two bottom bands are equal and the

3-40
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
response in this frequency range is flat. The result is natural-sounding bass on male
voice. This is particularly desirable for most sound-for-picture programming.
If you like a larger-than-life, “chesty” sound on male voice, set this control away
from OFF. When so set, gating causes the gain reduction of the lowest frequency
band to move to the same gain reduction (minus a gain offset equal to the numerical
setting of the control) as its nearest neighbor when gated. You can therefore set
the maximum gain difference between the two low frequency bands, producing
considerable dynamic bass boost on voice. This setting might be appropriate for
news and sports.
The difference will never exceed the difference that would have otherwise
occurred if the lowest frequency band were gated independently. If
you are familiar with older Orban processors like the 8282, this is the
maximum amount of boost that would have occurred if you had set their
DJ BASS BOOST controls to ON.
The amount of bass boost will be highly dependent on the fundamental
frequency of a given voice. If the fundamental frequency is far above
100Hz, there will be little voice energy in the bottom band and little or
no audio bass boost can occur even if the gain of the bottom band is
higher than the gain of its neighbor. As the fundamental frequency
moves lower, more of this energy leaks into the bottom band, and you
hear more bass boost. If the fundamental frequency is very low (a rarity),
there will be enough energy in the bottom band to force significant gain
reduction, and you will hear less bass boost than if the fundamental frequency
were a bit higher.
This control is only available in the Five-Band structure.
If the GATE THRESH (Gate Threshold) control is turned OFF, the DJ BASS
boost setting is disabled.
HF Enhance (“High Frequency Enhancer”) is a program-adaptive 6 dB/octave shelving
equalizer with a 4 kHz turnover frequency. It constantly monitors the ratio between
high frequency and broadband energy and adjusts the amount of equalization
in an attempt to make this ratio constant as the program material changes. It
can therefore create a bright, present sound without over-equalizing material that is
already bright. Used gently, it is useful for improving dialog intelligibility, particularly
with the two-band structure because, unlike the five-band structure, the twoband
structure cannot automatically re-equalize high frequencies.
Highpass Filter determines if a sweepable 18 dB/octave highpass filter will be
placed in-circuit before other processing. This filter is useful for reducing low frequency
noise, particularly when the 8685 is being used for production or mastering.
This filter is available only in the 2.0 processing chain.
Lowpass Filter control sets the bandwidth (and therefore the amount of high frequency
signal the 8685 passes) from 10 kHz to 20 kHz. The lowpass filter can replace
any anti-aliasing filters in downstream equipment. Set the filter to 20 kHz (full
bandwidth) for downstream equipment with sample rates of 44.1 or 48 kHz. Set the
filter to 15 kHz for 32 kHz sample rate. For other sample rates, set the filter so that
it is as close as possible to 45% of the sample rate without exceeding 45%.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-41
This setting is unique to the preset in which it resides. Regardless of its
setting, the 8685 will not permit the system bandwidth to exceed the
bandwidth set by the MAX LOWPASS FILTER parameter located I/O Setup.
Phase Rotator determines if the phase rotator will be in-circuit. The purpose of the
phase rotator is to make voice waveforms more symmetrical. Because it can slightly
reduce the clarity and definition of program material, we recommend leaving it OUT
unless program material is mainly speech, where it may result in cleaner sound because
it can substantially reduce the amount of gain reduction that the 8685’s lookahead
limiter produces on speech waveforms.
AGC Controls
The AGC is common to the Two-Band and Five-Band structures.
Five of the AGC controls are common to the Intermediate Modify and Advanced
Modify screens, with additional AGC controls available in the Advance Modify
screen, as noted in the following table. Some of the AGC controls are available only
in the 2.0 processing chain because the channels in the surround AGC are always
fully coupled.
AGC Off/On control activates or defeats the AGC.
It is usually used to defeat the AGC when you want to create a preset with minimal
processing (like a CLASSICAL preset). The AGC is also ordinarily defeated if you are
using a studio level controller. However, in this case it is better to defeat the AGC
globally in System Setup.
AGC Drive control adjusts signal level going into the slow dual-band AGC, therefore
determining the amount of gain reduction in the AGC. This control also adjusts
the “idle gain”—the amount of gain reduction in the AGC section when the structure
is gated. (It gates whenever the input level to the structure is below the threshold
of gating.)
The total amount of gain reduction in the Five-Band structure is the sum of the gain
reduction in the AGC and the gain reduction in the multiband compressor. The total
system gain reduction determines how much the loudness of quiet passages will be
increased (and, therefore, how consistent overall loudness will be). It is determined
by the setting of the AGC DRIVE control, by the level at which the console VU meter
or PPM is peaked, and by the setting of the MULTIBAND DRIVE (compressor) control.
AGC Release control provides an adjustable range from 0.5 dB/second (slow) to 20
dB/second (fast). The increase in density caused by setting the AGC RELEASE control
to fast settings sounds different from the increase in density caused by setting the
five-band’s MULTIBAND RELEASE control to FAST. You can trade the two off to produce
different effects.
Unless it is purposely speeded-up (with the AGC RELEASE control), the automatic
gain control that occurs in the AGC prior to the multiband compressor makes audio
levels more consistent without significantly altering texture. Then the multiband

3-42
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
compression and associated multiband clipper audibly change the density of the
sound and dynamically re-equalize it as necessary (booming bass is tightened; weak,
thin bass is brought up; highs are always present and consistent in level).
The various combinations of AGC and compression offer great flexibility:
• Light AGC + light compression yields a wide sense of dynamics, with a small
amount of automatic re-equalization.
• Moderate AGC + light compression produces an open, natural quality with
automatic re-equalization and increased consistency of frequency balance.
• Moderate AGC + moderate compression gives a more dense sound, particularly
as the release time of the multiband compressor is sped up.
• Moderate AGC + heavy compression (particularly with a FAST multiband release
time) results in a “wall of sound” effect, which may cause listener fatigue.
Adjust the AGC (with the AGC DRIVE control) to produce the desired amount of AGC
action, and then fine-tune the compression and look-ahead limiting, and loudness
control.
AGC Gate Threshold control determines the lowest input level that will be recognized
as program by the 8685; lower levels are considered to be noise or background
sounds and cause the AGC or multiband compressor to gate, effectively
freezing gain to prevent noise breathing.
In sound for picture, the settings of the gate threshold controls are quite critical if
you want the processing to be undetectable to the audience. If these controls are
set too low, then the 8685 will pump up quiet sounds like ambience and underscor-
AGC Controls
Intermediate Names Advanced Name Range
AGC On/Off AGC Off/On Off/On
Bass Coupling AGC Bass Coupling Off, 12…0 dB
Drive AGC Drive –10 ... 25 dB
Gate Thresh AGC Gate Threshold Off, –44 ... –5 dB
AGC Release AGC Master Release 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2 … 20 dB/S
--- AGC Crossover Allpass, LinearNoDelay, Linear
--- AGC Master Attack 0.2 … 6
--- AGC Bass Attack 1 … 10, Off
--- AGC Bass Release 1 … 10 dB/sec
--- AGC Bass Threshold –12.0 … 12.0 dB
--- AGC Idle Gain –10 … +10 dB
--- AGC Ratio ∞:1, 4:1, 3:1, 2:1
--- AGC Window Release 0.5 … 20 dB
--- AGC Window Size –25 … 0 dB
--- AGC Matrix (2.0 only) L/R, sum/diff
--- Master Delta Threshold (2.0 only) –6.0 … +6.0 dB
--- Bass Delta Threshold (2.0 only) –6/0 … +6.0 dB
--- Maximum Delta GR (2.0 only) 0.0 … 24.0, Off dB
Table 3-5: AGC Controls

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-43
ing to unnaturally high levels.
There are two independent silence-gating circuits in each of the 8685’s processing
chains. The first affects the AGC and the second affects the multiband compressor.
Each has its own threshold control.
AGC Idle Gain on page 3-44 explains how the AGC gate’s no-signal gain is determined.
AGC Bass Coupling control sets the balance provided in the AGC between bass
and the rest of the frequency spectrum.
The AGC processes audio in a master band for all audio above approximately 200 Hz
and a bass band for audio below approximately 200 Hz. The gain reduction in the
BASS audio path is either the output of the Bass compressor sidechain or the output
of the Master band sidechain. The AGC BASS COUPLING control sets the switching
threshold. For example, if the AGC BASS COUPLING control is set to 4 dB and the master
gain reduction is 10 dB, the bass gain reduction cannot decrease below 6 dB even
if the gain reduction signal from the Bass compressor sidechain is lower. However,
the audio path bass gain reduction can be larger than the master gain reduction
without limit. In the previous example, the bass gain reduction could be 25 dB.
A typical setting of the AGC BASS COUPLING control is 0 dB, which allows the AGC
bass band to correct excessive bass as necessary but does not permit it to provide a
dynamic bass boost.
Advanced AGC Controls
The following AGC controls are found only in the Advanced Modify screen and in
8685 PC Remote.
AGC Window Size determines the size of the floating “slow zone” window in the
master band of the AGC. (The Bass band is not windowed.)
The window works by slowing down changes in the AGC gain reduction that are
smaller than the WINDOW SIZE. The window has 2:1 asymmetry around the current
AGC gain reduction. For example, if the WINDOW SIZE is set to 4 dB, the window extends
4 dB in the release direction and 2 dB in the attack direction.
If the AGC needs to respond to a large change in its input level by making a gain
change that is larger than the window, then the AGC’s attack and release controls
determine the AGC’s response time. However, if the change in input level is smaller
than the window size, the WINDOW RELEASE control determines the attack and release
times. This is usually much slower than the normal AGC time constants. This
prevents the AGC from building up density in material whose level is already well
controlled.
The previous explanation was somewhat simplified. In fact, the window has “soft
edges.” Instead of switching abruptly between time constants, the attack and re-

3-44
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
lease times morph smoothly between the setting of the WINDOW RELEASE control and
the setting of the AGC master release and attack controls.
The most useful range of the AGC WINDOW SIZE is 3 to 6 dB.
AGC Window Release (see AGC WINDOW SIZE above.)
AGC Ratio determines the compression ratio of the AGC. The compression ratio is
the ratio between the change in input level and the resulting change in output
level, both measured in units of dB.
The 8685 compressor can be operated at a compression ratio as low as 2:1. This can
add a sense of dynamic range and is mostly useful for subtle fine arts formats like
classical and jazz.
AGC Bass Threshold determines the compression threshold of the bass band in the
AGC. It can be used to set the target spectral balance of the AGC.
As the AGC BASS COUPLING control is moved towards 0 dB, the AGC BASS THRESHOLD
control affects the sound less and less.
The interaction between the AGC BASS THRESHOLD control and the AGC BASS
COUPLING control is a bit complex, so we recommend leaving the AGC BASS
THRESHOLD control at its factory setting unless you have a good reason for readjusting
it.
AGC Idle Gain. The “idle gain” is the target gain of the AGC when the silence gate
is active. Whenever the silence gate turns on, the gain of the AGC slowly moves towards
the idle gain.
The idle gain is primarily determined by the AGC DRIVE setting—a setting of 10 dB
will produce an idle gain of –10 dB (i.e., 10 dB of gain reduction) when the AGC IDLE
GAIN control = 0 dB. However, sometimes you may not want the idle gain to be the
same as the AGC DRIVE setting. The AGC IDLE GAIN control allows you to add or subtract
gain from the idle gain setting determined by the AGC DRIVE setting.
You might want to do this if you make a custom preset that otherwise causes the
gain to increase or decrease unnaturally when the AGC is gated. For example, to
make the idle gain track the setting of the AGC DRIVE control, set the AGC IDLE GAIN
control to zero. To make the idle gain 2 dB lower than the setting of the AGC DRIVE
control, set the AGC IDLE GAIN control to –2.
AGC Bass Attack sets the attack time of the AGC bass compressor (below 200Hz).
The calibration is approximate.
AGC Master Attack sets the attack time of the AGC master compressor (above
200Hz). The calibration is approximate.
AGC Bass Release sets the release time of the AGC bass compressor.
AGC Crossover allows you to choose ALLPASS, LINEAR or LINEARNODELAY modes.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-45
ALLPASS is a phase-rotating crossover that introduces one pole of phase rotation at
200 Hz. The overall frequency response remains smooth as the two bands take different
amounts of gain reduction—the response is a smooth shelf without extra
peaks or dips around the crossover frequency. The two bands are down 3 dB at the
crossover frequency. However, this mode adds group delay distortion and is therefore
subtly less transparent-sounding than the LINEARNODELAY mode.
LINEARNODELAY (Linear-Phase; no delay) is a phase-linear crossover whose upper
band is derived by subtracting its lower band from the crossover’s input. When the
upper and lower bands have the same gain, their sum is perfectly flat with no phase
rotation. However, when the upper and lower bands have different gains, peaks and
dips appear in the frequency response close to the crossover frequency.
LINEARNODELAY is useful if you need a crossover with low delay and no
phase distortion when flat. Its downside is the possibility of coloration
when the gains of the two bands are widely disparate.
LINEAR is a phase-linear crossover whose upper band is derived by subtracting its
lower band from the crossover’s input, as passed through a delay equal to the group
delay of the lowpass crossover filter. The overall frequency response remains smooth
as the two bands take different degrees of gain reduction—the response is a smooth
shelf without extra peaks or dips around the crossover frequency. The two bands are
each down 6 dB at the crossover frequency. This crossover has constant delay even
when the two bands have unequal gains.
While LINEAR has the ideal combination of no phase distortion (even
when non-flat) and smooth shelving behavior, it adds about 4 ms to the
overall delay (compared to ALLPASS and LINODLY), so it is not a good
choice if you need to drive talent headphones.
AGC Controls Exclusive to 2.0 Processing:
AGC Matrix (2.0 processing only) allows you to operate the AGC in left/right mode
or in sum/difference mode. Usually you will operate in left/right mode. However,
sum/difference mode can give a type of stereo enhancement where the L–R signal is
allowed to have a higher gain than the L+R signal. This will only work if you allow
the two channels of the AGC to have different gains. To do this, set the AGC MAX
DELTA GR control greater than zero.
The AGC in the surround processing is always stereo coupled. Its gain reduction
is proportional to the r.m.s. sum of the channels.
AGC Max Delta GR (2.0 processing only) determines the maximum gain difference
permitted between the two channels of the AGC. Set it to “0” for perfect stereo
coupling.
This control works the same regardless of whether the AGC operates in
left/right or sum/difference MATRIX modes, in both cases controlling the
maximum gain difference between the “channels.” Depending on the
Matrix mode setting, the “channels” will handle left and right signals or
will handle sum and difference signals. When the AGC operates in

3-46
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
sum/difference MATRIX mode, this control determines the maximum
amount of width change in the stereo soundfield.
Master Delta Threshold (2.0 processing only) allows you to set the difference between
the compression thresholds of the sum and difference channels. (This control
is only useful when you set the AGC MATRIX to SUM/DIF.) By setting the threshold of
the difference channel lower than the sum channel, you can have the AGC automatically
produce more gain reduction in the difference channel. This will reduce
the separation of material with an excessively wide stereo image (like old Beatles records).
To make this work, you must set the MAX DELTA GR control away from zero.
For example, to limit an excessively wide image while preventing more than 3 dB
difference in gain between the sum and difference channels, set the MAX DELTA GR
control to 3.0 and the MASTER DELTA THRESHOLD control to some positive number,
depending on how much automatic width control you want the 8685 to perform
Bass Delta Threshold (2.0 processing only) works the same as MASTER DELTA
THRESHOLD, but applies to the bass band. You will usually set it the same as MASTER
DELTA THRESHOLD.
Distortion Control
The distortion control adjustments are common to the Two-Band and Five-Band
structures except as noted in the descriptions on the following pages.
Bass Clip Threshold controls Orban’s patented embedded bass clipper.
The bass clipper is embedded in the multiband crossover so that harmonics created
by clipping are rolled off by part of the crossover filters. The threshold of this clipper
is ordinarily set anywhere between 0 dB and 6 dB below the threshold of the lookahead
limiter, depending on the setting of the LESS-MORE control in the parent preset
upon which you are basing your Advanced Control adjustments and depending
on how much look-ahead limiting the preset causes with typical program material.
This provides headroom for contributions from the other four bands so that bass
transients don’t smash against the look-ahead limiter, causing audible intermodulation
distortion between the bass and higher frequency program material.
The threshold of the bass clipper is user-adjustable to trade off bass punch against
Distortion Control Adjustments
Name Range
AGC Final Limit Drive –10.0 … +12.0 dB
Multiband Final Limit Drive –20.0 … +24.0 dB
Bass Clip Shape 0.0 … 10.0
Bass Clip Threshold –6.0 … +6.0 dB, OFF
Center Bass Clip Threshold (surround only) –6.0 … +6.0 dB, OFF
Speech Bass Clip Threshold (2.0 only) –6.0 … +6.0 dB, OFF
Transient Enhance 0…10 ms
Dialnorm –31…–11 dB, Global
Table 3-6: Distortion Control Adjustments

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-47
look-ahead limiter distortion control. The range (with reference to the look-ahead
limiter threshold) is –6 dB to +6 dB (and OFF). As you raise the threshold of the clipper,
you will get more bass but also more distortion and pumping. Be careful when
setting this control; do not adjust it casually. Listen to program material with heavy
bass combined with spectrally sparse midrange material (like a singer) and listen for
IM distortion induced by the bass’ pushing the midrange into the look-ahead limiter.
Although the low-IM technology in the 8685’s look-ahead limiter substantially reduces
this distortion, overdriving the limiter hard enough can still cause problems.
Because the sound-for-picture presets typically produce little or no look-ahead limiting
with reasonable values of DIALNORM, the bass clipper is not needed and is turned
off to prevent its adding unnecessary distortion.
In the Five-Band structure, band 1 drives the clipper. In the Two-Band
structure, the Bass band drives the clipper.
For 2.0 processing, note that the SPEECH BASS CLIP THRESHOLD control overrides the
BASS CLIP THRESHOLD control when OPTIMOD-PC automatically detects speech (see
Speech/Music Detector on page 3-6). For surround processing, the center channel
(which usually carries dialog) has an independent CENTER BASS CLIP THRESHOLD control.
Bass Clip Shape allows you to change the knee of the input/output gain curve of
the bass clipper. It allows you to control the shape of the “knee”—the transition between
no clipping and flat topping. “0” provides the hardest knee, where the transition
between linear operation and flat topping occurs abruptly as the clipper’s in-
Figure 3-1: Bass Clipper Input/Output Transfer Curves as Bass Clip Shape Control is
Varied from 0.0 (Hard) to 10.0 (Soft)

3-48
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
put level is changed. “10” is the softest knee, where the transition starts 6 dB below
BASSCLIPTHRESH setting and occurs gradually. The factory default setting is “7.6.”
(See Figure 3-1.)
Final Limit Drive controls (AGC and MB) adjust the level of the audio driving the
low-IM look-ahead limiters that the 8685 uses to control fast peaks, thereby adjusting
the peak-to-average ratio of the processed audio. The FINAL LIMIT DRIVE controls
primarily determine the loudness/distortion trade-off.
Only one of the two LIMIT DRIVE controls is active at a given time. Depending on the
setting of the SURROUND OUTPUT SOURCE and 2.0 OUTPUT SOURCE controls in the active
Setup, a given processing channel’s look-ahead limiter receives either the AGC’s
output or the multiband compressor/limiter’s output. This determines which LIMIT
DRIVE control is active.
Turning up the FINAL LIMIT DRIVE control drives the look-ahead limiter harder, reducing
the peak-to-average ratio at the 8685’s output and increasing the loudness at
the consumer’s receiver. When the amount of limiting is increased, the audible intermodulation
distortion caused by limiting increases, even though special algorithms
minimize the increase compared to less sophisticated designs. Lower settings
reduce loudness, of course, but result in a cleaner sound.
Note that the active FINAL LIMIT DRIVE control is cascaded with a hidden
gain control whose value is determined by the active DIALNORM setting.
See Low-IM Look-Ahead Limiter 3-13.
Transient Enhance is mainly useful in mastering. This control allows you to insert
an audio delay in the sidechain of the five-band compressor. By delaying the gain
control signal, this allows attack transients to pass through the multiband compressor
uncompressed, which can increase punch. There is a tradeoff between this control
and the activity of the look-ahead limiter, which will have to eliminate attack
transients exceeding the look-ahead limiter’s threshold. For any material, there will
be an optimum setting for the TRANSIENT ENHANCE control that provides the most
punch without triggering look-ahead limiter artifacts.
The Two-Band Structure
The Two-Band structure consists of a slow two-band gated AGC for gain riding, an
equalization section, a gated two-band compressor, and a low-IM look-ahead limiter.
A CBS Loudness Controller, which is primarily useful for sound-for-picture applications,
can be activated to control subjectively perceived loudness.
The 8685’s Two-Band Structure can be made phase-linear throughout to maximize
sonic transparency. However, you can also choose an allpass crossover structure (see
AGC CROSSOVER on page 3-44).
The Two-Band structure has an open, easy-to-listen-to sound that is similar to the
source material if the source material is of good quality. We recommend using it
when you want to preserve the spectral balance of the source material while not

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-49
significantly increasing program density. Hence, it is mainly useful for unobtrusive
gain riding in sound-for-picture applications and in fine arts programming.
If you need processing for loudness and/or processing that automatically
corrects spectral balance inconsistency in the source material, we recommend
using the Five-Band structure instead. We tend to prefer the Five-
Band structure in sound-for-picture applications because it can use the
AGC for gentle two-band gain riding while using the five-band compressor/limiter
to de-ess dialog without causing gain pumping.
There are several Two-Band presets for sound-for-picture and radio-style processing.
See Table 3-2 on page 3-31, Table 3-3 on page 3-33, and Table 3-1 on page 3-27.
Customizing the Settings
Each Two-Band Factory Preset has a LESS-MORE control (located in the Basic Modify
screen) that adjusts on-air loudness. LESS-MORE simultaneously adjusts all of the
processing controls to optimize the trade-offs between unwanted side effects as
processing levels are decreased or increased.
If you wish, you may adjust the Modify parameters to your own taste. Always start
with LESS-MORE to get as close to your desired sound as possible. Then edit the Modify
parameters using the Basic, Intermediate or Advanced Modify screen, and save
those edits to a User Preset.
The Two-Band Structure’s Full and Advanced Setup Controls
The tables below show a summary of the Two-Band controls in the dynamics section.
AGC, Equalizer, and Clipper controls are common to both Two-Band and Five-Band
structures and are described in the pages above.
Some of the Two-Band controls are common to the Intermediate Modify and Advanced
Modify screens, with additional Two-Band controls available in the Advanced
Modify screen. (Note that “advanced” controls are accessible only from 8685 PC Remote
software.)
2B Drive control adjusts signal level going into the two-band compressor, determining
the amount of gain reduction in the two-band compressor.
Regardless of the release time setting, we feel that the optimal amount of gain reduction
in the two-band compressor for sound-for-picture applications is 10-15dB.
For fine arts formats, operating with 0-10 dB of gain reduction (with the gain riding
AGC set to OFF) maintains a sense of dynamic range while still controlling levels effectively.
2B Release control determines how fast the two-band compressor releases (and
therefore how quickly loudness increases) when the level of the program material
decreases. This release time only applies when the silence gate does not gate the
Two-Band Compressor.

3-50
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
The control can be adjusted from 0.5 dB/second (slow) to 20 dB/second (fast). Settings
toward 20 dB/second result in a more consistently loud output, while settings
toward 0.5 dB/second allow a wider variation of dynamic range. Both the setting of
the 2B RELEASE control and the dynamics and level of the program material determine
the actual release time of the compressor.
With faster 2B RELEASE control settings (above 8 dB/second), the sound will change
substantially with the amount of gain reduction in the two-band compressor. This
means that you should activate the gain-riding AGC to ensure that the two-band
compressor is always driven at the level that produces the amount of gain reduction
desired. Decide based on listening tests how much gain reduction gives you the density
that you want without creating a feeling of over-compression and fatigue. For
most applications, we recommend using slower release rates because applications
that could use faster Two-Band release rates are usually better suited to five-band
processing. Five-band processing minimizes the undesirable artifacts that fast release
rates can produce.
The release rate (in dB/second) in the two-band compressor automatically becomes
faster as more gain reduction occurs. This makes the program progressively denser,
Two-Band
Intermediate Name Advanced Name Range
2B Bass Coupling 2B Bass Coupling 0 … 100 %
2B Drive 2B Drive –10 … 25 dB
2B Gate 2B Gate Threshold Off, –44 … –5 dB
2B Release 2B Release 0.5 … 20 dB/second
2B Rel Shape 2B Release Shape Linear, Exponential
Loudness Threshold Loudness Controller Threshold Off, 0.0 … -24.0 dB
Loudness Attack Loudness Controller Attack 0…100%
Loudness Bass Couple Loudness Controller Bass Couple 0…12 dB, Off
--- 2B Master Knee 0 … 50 dB
--- 2B Bass Knee 0 … 50 dB
--- 2B Master Ratio 1:1 … infinity:1
--- 2B Bass Ratio 1:1 … infinity:1
--- 2B Master Break(point) 1 … 50 dB
--- 2B Bass Break(point) 1 … 50 dB
--- 2B Master Compression Threshold –15 … 0 dB, Off
--- 2B Bass Compression Threshold -10.0 … 5.0 dB, Off
--- 2B Master Attack 4 … 50, Off
--- 2B Bass Attack 4 … 50, Off
--- 2B Master Comp Ratio 1:1 … ∞:1
--- 2B Bass Comp Ratio 1:1 … ∞:1
--- 2B Master Knee 0 … 50 dB
--- 2B Bass Knee 0 … 50 dB
--- LFE Threshold –10…+5 dB, Off
--- LFE Attack 4…50 ms
--- Bass>LFE Couple 12…0 dB, Off
--- Master Main>Center Max +Delta GR 0…24 dB, Off
--- Master Main>Center Max -Delta GR 0…24 dB, Off
--- Bass Main>Center Max +Delta GR 0…24 dB, Off
--- Bass Main>Center Max -Delta GR 0…24 dB, Off
Table 3-7: Two-Band Controls

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-51
creating a sense of increasing loudness although peaks are not actually increasing.
At the gain reduction values set by the 2B MASTER BREAKPOINT and 2B BASS
BREAKPOINT controls, the release rate for these bands becomes constant and density
does not increase with additional amounts of gain reduction.
2B Release Shape selects a LINear or EXPonential release shape.
Linear causes the Two-Band compressor to release at a constant number of dB per
second above the 2B BREAKPOINT setting and proportionally to the amount of gain
reduction otherwise.
Despite its name, EXPONENTIAL actually offers a reverse-exponential characteristic: It
causes the release to commence slowly and then speed up as it progresses. The
EXPONENTIAL shape allows you to create the open sound of a slow release time with
program material whose level is well controlled while permitting the processing to
quickly correct excessively low input levels. We recommend using Exponential for
general-purpose sound-for-picture programming. For program material dominated
by music, LINEAR may be a better choice because Exponential may create unnatural
side effects. (If the 2B Release control is set between about 0.5 and 2 dB/second, an
Exponential release shape should cause no problems even with music.)
Note: The BREAKPOINT controls do nothing when EXPONENTIAL release is chosen.
2B Gate (“2B Gate Threshold”) threshold control determines the lowest input level
that will be recognized as program material by OPTIMOD 8685; lower levels are considered
to be noise or background sounds and will cause the AGC or two-band compressor
to gate, effectively freezing gain to prevent noise breathing.
There are two independent gating circuits in the 8685 Two-Band structure. The first
affects the AGC and the second affects the two-band compressor. Each has its own
threshold control.
The two-band gain reduction will eventually recover to 0 dB (when the RELEASE
SHAPE is set to LINEAR) or to the setting of the 2B DRIVE control (when the RELEASE
SHAPE is set to EXP). However, recovery is slow enough to be imperceptible. This
avoids OPTIMOD 8685’s getting stuck with a large amount of gain reduction on a
long, low-level musical passage immediately following a loud passage.
In EXP release mode, the two-band gate’s gated gain reduction is the
same as the setting of the 2B DRIVE CONTROL, which is similar to the behavior
of the AGC gate. This is because EXP release is mainly useful in
sound-for-picture processing and is used in the TV 2B GEN PURPOSE and
TV 2B GEN PURP+LC presets. In these presets, the AGC is defeated so that
all gain riding can occur in the two-band compressor. See AGC Idle Gain
on page 3-44 for a more complete discussion.
It is common to set the 2B GATE control between approximately –35 dB and –25 dB.
Higher values are useful in sound-for-picture processing to prevent background
sounds and underscoring from being pumped up, while lower settings are more
common with musical programming.

3-52
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
2B Bass Coupling is used to set the balance between bass and the rest of the frequency
spectrum.
The two-band compressor processes audio in a master band for all audio above approximately
200Hz, and a bass band for audio below approximately 200Hz. The
BASS CPL control determines how closely the on-air balance of material below 200Hz
matches that of the program material above 200Hz.
Bass coupling is set to 100% on all of the two-band presets because these presets
are designed to do gentle gain riding without increasing program density or significantly
modifying the spectral balance of the program. When bass coupling is set to
100%, the bass band will usually have the same amount of gain reduction as the
master band. Only with material having unusually heavy bass will you see additional
gain reduction in the bass band.
Bass Clip (“Bass Clip Threshold”): See page 3-46.
Loudness Threshold sets the maximum subjective loudness allowed by the processing
with reference to the input of the 8685’s MB look-ahead limiter. (See Loudness
Control on page 3-14.)
Advanced Two-Band Controls
The following Two-Band controls are only accessible from the 8685 PC Remote software:
2B Master Compression Threshold sets the level where gain reduction starts to
occur in the Master (above 200Hz) band of the Two-Band Compressor.
2B Bass Threshold determines the compression threshold of the bass band (below
200 Hz) in the Two-Band Compressor. It can be used to set the target spectral balance
of the Two-Band Compressor.
LFE Threshold determines the compression threshold of the LFE channel in the
Two-Band Compressor.
Bass>LFE Couple control determines the extent to which the gain of the LFE channel
is determined by and follows the gain of the Bass band. Set towards 0 dB (fully
coupled) this control reduces the amount of dynamic LFE boost, preventing unnatural
exaggeration of material in the LFE channel.
The gain reduction in the LFE audio path is either the output of the Bass compressor
sidechain or the output of the LFE compressor’s band sidechain. The BASS>LFE
COUPLING control sets the switching threshold. For example, if the BASS>LFE
COUPLING control is set to 4 dB and the Bass gain reduction is 10 dB, the LFE gain reduction
cannot decrease below 6 dB even if the gain reduction signal from the LFE
compressor sidechain is lower. However, the LFE gain reduction can be larger than
the bass gain reduction without limit. In the previous example, the LFE gain reduction
could be 25 dB.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-53
A typical setting of the Bass>LFE BASS COUPLING control is 3 dB, which caps the possible
dynamic LFE boost at 3 dB. Some may prefer 0 dB, which precludes any dynamic
LFE boost.
2B Master Attack sets the attack time of the Two-Band Compressor master compressor
(above 200Hz).
2B Bass Attack sets the attack time of the Two-Band Compressor bass compressor
(below 200Hz).
2B Master Comp Ratio and 2B Bass Comp Ratio set the compression ratio of the
Master compressor and Bass compressor respectively at their thresholds of compression.
Beyond threshold, the ratio increases with increased gain reduction until it becomes
∞:1 at the amount of gain reduction (in dB) set by the 2B MASTER KNEE control.
When you adjust these controls, the thresholds of the multiband compressors
change automatically so that the total amount of gain reduction stays approximately
the same. (This automatic adjustment is internal to the 8685’s DSP; the MB
THRESH controls’ displayed settings do not show it.)
To achieve a classic soft knee characteristic, set the 2B MASTER COMP RATIO control to
1:1 and set the KNEE control to the gain reduction in dB at which you wish the compression
ratio to level off to ∞:1. The maximum setting produces the softest knee.
Setting the KNEE to 0 dB produces a classic hard knee curve with ∞:1 compression ratio
regardless of the setting of the 2B MASTER COMP RATIO control.
See Figure 3-2 on page 3-54 for the curves of output level vs. input level for various
settings of the KNEE and RATIO controls.
2B Knee (see 2B MASTER COMP RATIO above).
2B Breakpoint The release rate (measured in dB/second) in the 8685’s compressors
is constant when the gain reduction is higher than the control’s setting, and exponential
when the gain reduction is lower than the control’s setting.
When the release is exponential, the release rate is proportional to the amount of
gain reduction. Do not confuse this with the reverse exponential characteristic triggered
by setting the 2B RELEASE SHAPE control to EXPONENTIAL. In this case, release
commences slowly and then speeds up as it progresses.
The 2B BREAKPOINT control is only active when the 2B RELEASE SHAPE control is set to
LINEAR.
Compression-induced audio density remains constant when the gain reduction is
above the 2B BREAKPOINT setting. When the gain reduction is below the 2B
BREAKPOINT setting, density decreases proportionally to the amount of gain reduction.

3-54
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
For example, if the 2B BREAKPOINT is set to 10 DB, the release rate (in dB/second) will
be constant when the gain reduction is above 10 dB. Between 10 dB and 0 dB gain
reduction, the release rate will slow down more and more.
The calibration of the BREAKPOINT controls is only accurate when KNEE = 0 dB and/or
RATIO = infinity:1 — i.e., when the compression ratio is essentially infinite. When the
ratio is less than infinite, the effective breakpoint of the compressor will be lower
than 2B BREAKPOINT setting.
The main use of the 2B BREAKPOINT control is to prevent the compressor from objectionably
increasing audio density when using low compression ratios and a significant
amount of gain reduction—for example, 10 dB. The 2B BREAKPOINT control is
best adjusted by ear. If you find that density increases too much as gain reduction
increases, lower the 2B BREAKPOINT control’s setting. If you want more density at
high amounts of gain reduction, increase the 2B BREAKPOINT control’s setting. 10 dB
Figure 3-2: Output level in dB (y) for a given input level in dB (x) at various settings of the
KNEE and RATIO control

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-55
is a good starting point for setting this control.
Loudness Controller Attack: See Loudness Control on page 3- 14.
Loudness Controller Bass Couple: See Loudness Control on page 3- 14.
Master Main>Center Max +Delta GR: Along with the other XXX DELTA GR controls,
this control is explained in Multiband , starting on page 3-11.
The Five-Band Structure
The Five-Band structure consists of a stereo enhancer, a slow gain-riding two-band
AGC, an equalization section, a five-band compressor, a dynamic single-ended noise
reduction system, an output mixer (for the five bands), a loudness controller, and a
low-IM look-ahead limiter.
Unlike the Two-Band structure, whose two-band compressor has a continuously
variable release time, the release time of the Five-Band compressor is switchable to
seven increments between slow and fast. Each setting makes a significant difference
in the overall flavor and quality of the sound.
When the input is noisy, you can sometimes reduce the noise by activating the single-ended
noise reduction system. Functionally, the single-ended noise reduction
system combines a broadband downward expander with a program-dependent lowpass
filter. This noise reduction can be valuable in reducing audible hiss, rumble, or
ambient studio noise on-air. We use it for the news and sports factory presets.
Using the Five-Band Structure
The Five-Band structure is very flexible, enabling you to fine-tune your on-air sound
for your target audience and desired market position. There are several basic Factory
Presets for the Five-Band structure. Each of these presets can be edited with the
LESS-MORE control. This control affects the sound-for-picture-oriented presets differently
than it does the music presets (presets with “music” in their names). When a
sound-for-picture-oriented preset is on the air, the LESS-MORE control adjusts the
average amount of gain reduction by adjusting the drive level to the Five-Band
structure's input. This also adjusts the idle gain—the amount of gain reduction in
the AGC section when the structure is gated. (It gates whenever the input level to
the structure is below the threshold of gating.)
When a music preset is on the air, the LESS-MORE control sets the amount of overall
processing, making optimum tradeoffs between loudness, brightness, and distortion.
In sound for picture, there are no loudness wars; for music presets, there is no
need to advance the LESS-MORE control beyond its setting in the Factory Presets.
The five-band compressor/limiter in the Surround structure is always stereo-coupled.
The five-band compressor/limiter in the 2.0 processing can be stereo-coupled to any
extent via the various Bx MAX DELTA GR controls.

3-56
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
Note that the active DIALNORM setting greatly influences the loudness of a given preset.
See Low-IM Look-Ahead Limiter on page 3-13.
Customizing the Settings
The controls in the Five-Band structure give you the flexibility to customize your station
sound. However, as with any audio processing system, proper adjustment of
these controls requires proper balancing of the trade-offs explained above. The following
provides the information you need to adjust the Five-Band structure controls
to suit your programming and taste.
The Five-Band Structure’s Full and Advanced Setup Controls
The tables below summarize the Multiband and Band Mix controls in the dynamics
section. The AGC, Equalizer, Stereo Enhancer, and Clipper controls are common to
both the Two-Band and Five-Band structures and are discussed in their own sections
in Section 3.
MB Drive (“Multiband Drive”) control adjusts the signal level going into the multiband
compressor, and therefore determines the average amount of gain reduction
in the multiband compressor. Range is 25dB.
Adjust the MULTIBAND DRIVE control to your taste and programming requirements.
Used lightly with a slow or medium release time, the Five-Band compressor produces
an open, re-equalized sound that is appropriate for most sound-for-picture programming.
The Five-Band compressor can increase audio density when operated at a
fast or medium-fast release because it acts more and more like a fast limiter (not a
compressor) as the release time is shortened. With fast and medium-fast release
times, density also increases when you increase the drive level into the Five-Band
compressor because these faster release times produce more limiting action. Increasing
density can make loud sounds seem louder, but can also result in an unattractive
busier, flatter, or denser sound. It is very important to be aware of the many negative
subjective side effects of excessive density when setting controls that affect the
density of the processed sound.
Because the 8685’s AGC algorithm uses sophisticated window gating, it is preferable
to make the AGC do most of the gain riding (instead of the multiband compressor),
because the AGC can ride gain quickly without adding excessive density to program
material that is already well controlled. Use the multiband compressor lightly, so it
can achieve automatic re-equalization of material that the AGC has already controlled
without adding excessive density to the audio or re-equalizing to an unnatural
extent.
The MULTIBAND DRIVE interacts with the MULTIBAND RELEASE. With slower release time
settings, increasing the MULTIBAND DRIVE control scarcely affects density. Instead, the
primary danger is that the excessive drive will cause noise to be increased excessively
when the program material becomes quiet. You can minimize this effect by activating
the single-ended noise reduction and/or by carefully setting the MULTIBAND GATE
THRESHOLD control to freeze the gain when the input gets quiet.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-57
When the release time of the Five-Band compressor is set towards fast, the setting
of the MULTIBAND DRIVE control becomes much more critical to sound quality because
density increases as the control is turned up. Listen carefully as you adjust it. With
these fast release times, there is a point beyond which increasing the Five-Band
compressor drive will no longer yield more loudness and will simply degrade the
punch and definition of the sound. Instead, let the AGC do most of the work.
Because excessive loudness is an irritant in sound for picture, there is almost never
any reason to push processing to the point where it degrades the audio. We recommend
no more than 10dB gain reduction as shown on the meters for Band 3. More
than 10dB, particularly with the fast release time, will often create a wall of sound
effect that many find fatiguing.
To avoid excessive density with fast Five-Band release time, we recommend using no
more than 5dB gain reduction in band 3, compensating for any lost loudness by
speeding up the AGC RELEASE instead.
MB Release control can be switched to any of seven settings. To understand how to
adjust this control for sound-for-picture programming, please see the discussion
above under MB DRIVE.
In the 2.0 processing, the SPEECH MB RELEASE control overrides the MB RELEASE control
when speech is automatically detected (page 3-6). You may wish to set the
SPEECH MB RELEASE control faster for speech (to maximize smoothness and uniformity)
and slower on music (to prevent excessive build-up of density).
In the surround processing, the CENTER MB RELEASE control always sets the release
time of the center channel compressor. This allows you to optimize the center channel
for speech processing.
Multiband Controls
Full Name Advanced Name Range
MB Drive Multiband Drive 0 ... 25
MB Gate Threshold Multiband Gate Threshold Off, –44 ... –5 dB
Loudness Threshold Loudness Controller Threshold Off, 0.0…–24.0 dB
Loudness Attack Loudness Controller Attack 0…100%
Loudness Bass Couple Loudness Controller Bass Cou-ple 0…12 dB, Off
MB Downward Expander Downward Expander Off, –18.0 … 12.0 dB
--- Downward Expander Stereo Couple On, Off [2.0 only]
--- B5 Down Expander Delta Threshold –18.0…+12.0 dB
--- B1/B2 XOVER 100 Hz, 200 Hz
--- B1 MaxDeltGr 0 … 24 dB, Off
--- B2 MaxDeltGr 0 … 24 dB, Off
--- B3 MaxDeltGr 0 … 24 dB, Off
--- B4 MaxDeltGr 0 … 24 dB, Off
--- B5 MaxDeltGr 0 … 24 dB, Off
--- LFE Threshold –16…0 dB, Off
--- LFE Attack 4…50 ms
--- B1>LFE Couple 12…0 dB, Off
Table 3-8: Multiband Controls

3-58
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
Bx Compression Threshold sets the compression threshold for each band in units
of dB. We recommend making small changes around the factory settings to preserve
the internal headroom built into the processing chain. These controls will affect the
spectral balance of the processing above threshold.
You can use the Bx SPEECH COMPRESSION THRESHOLD control to set independent frequency
balances for music and speech in the 2.0 processing chain, (page 3-6). The Bx
CENTER COMPRESSION THRESHOLD control performs a similar function in the surround
processing. It is particularly useful when setting up the center channel to de-ess dialog.
The SPEECH and CENTER controls appear only in Advanced Control.
MB Gate Threshold control determines the lowest input level that will be recognized
as program by OPTIMOD 8685; lower levels are considered to be noise or
background sounds and cause the AGC or multiband compressor to gate, effectively
freezing gain to prevent noise breathing.
The multiband gate only works appropriately when the KNEE and RATIO controls of
all bands are set identically, which is typically true in broadcast applications. We recommend
turning off the multiband gate if the individual KNEE and RATIO settings
are unequal.
There are two independent gating circuits in the 8685. The first affects the AGC and
the second affects the multiband compressor. Each has its own threshold control.
The multiband silence gate causes the gain reduction in bands 2 and 3 of the multiband
compressor to move quickly to the average gain reduction occurring in those
bands when the gate first turns on. This prevents obvious midrange coloration un-
MB Attack/Release/Threshold
Full Name Advanced Name Range
MB Release Multiband Release Slow, Slow2, Med, Med2, MFast, MFast2,
Fast
--- Speech Multiband Release Slow, Slow2, Med, Med2, MFast, MFast2,
Fast [2.0 only]
--- Center Multiband Release Slow, Slow2, Med, Med2, MFast, MFast2,
Fast [surround only]
Bx THR Bx Compression Threshold –16.00 … 0.0, Off
--- Bx Speech Compression Thresh –16.00 … 0.0, Off [2.0 only]
--- Bx Center Compression Thresh –16.00 … 0.0, Off [surround only]
--- Bx Attack 4.0 … 50.0 ms, Off
--- Bx Speech Attack 4.0 … 50.0 ms, Off [2.0 only]
--- Bx Center Attack 4.0 … 50.0 ms, Off [surround only]
--- Bx Limiter Attack 0 … 100%
--- Bx Delta Release –6 … 6
--- Bx Compression Ratio 1:1 … ∞:1
--- Bx Knee 0 … 50 dB
--- Bx Break 1 … 50 dB
--- Bx Main>Center Max +Delta GR 0…24 dB, Off
--- Bx Main>Center Max –Delta GR 0…24 dB, Off
--- Transient Enhance 0 … 10 ms
Table 3-9: MB Attack/Release Controls

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-59
der gated conditions, because bands 2 and 3 have the same gain.
The gate also independently freezes the gain of the two highest frequency bands
(forcing the gain of the highest frequency band to be identical to its lower
neighbor), and independently sets the gain of the lowest frequency band according
to the setting of the DJ BASS boost control (in the Equalization screen). Thus, without
introducing obvious coloration, the gating smoothly preserves the average
overall frequency response “tilt” of the multiband compressor, broadly maintaining
the “automatic equalization” curve it generates for a given piece of program material.
If the MB GATE control is turned OFF, the DJ BASS control (in the Equalization
screen) is disabled.
MB Downward Expander determines the level below which the single-ended
noise reduction system’s downward expander begins to decrease system gain, and
below which the high frequencies begin to become low-pass filtered to reduce perceived
noise. Activate the single-ended dynamic noise reduction by setting the MB
DOWNWARD EXPANDER control to a setting other than OFF.
The single-ended noise reduction system combines a broadband downward expander
with a program-dependent low-pass filter. These functions are achieved by
introducing extra gain reduction in the multiband compressor. You can see the effect
of this extra gain reduction on the gain reduction meters.
Ordinarily, the gating on the AGC and multiband limiter will prevent objectionable
build-up of noise, and you will want to use the single-ended noise reduction only on
unusually noisy program material. In sound for picture, it is particularly useful in live
news and sports.
Please note that it is impossible to design such a system to handle all program material
without audible side effects. You will get best results if you set the MB
DOWNWARD EXPANDER control of the noise reduction system to complement the program
material you are processing. The MB DOWNWARD EXPANDER should be set higher
when the input is noisy and lower when the input is relatively quiet. The best way to
adjust the MB DOWNWARD EXPANDER control is to start with the control set very high.
Reduce the control setting while watching the gain reduction meters. Eventually,
you will see the gain increase in sync with the program. Go further until you begin
to hear noise modulation—a puffing or breathing sound (the input noise) in sync
with the input program material. Set the MB DOWNWARD EXPANDER control higher
until you can no longer hear the noise modulation. This is the best setting.
Obviously, the correct setting will be different for a sporting event than for classical
music. It may be wise to define several presets with different settings of the MB
DOWNWARD EXPANDER control, and to recall the preset that complements the program
material of the moment.
Note also that it is virtually impossible to achieve undetectable dynamic noise reduction
of program material that is extremely noisy to begin with, because the program
never masks the noise. It is probably wiser to defeat the dynamic noise reduction

3-60
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
with this sort of material (traffic reports from helicopters and the like) to avoid objectionable
side effects. You must let your ears guide you.
MB Band Mix controls determine the relative balance of the bands in the multiband
compressor. Because these controls mix after the band compressors, they do
not affect the compressors’ gain reductions and can be used as a graphic equalizer
to fine-tune the spectral balance of the program material over a ±6 dB range.
The range of the band mix controls has been purposely limited because
the only gain control element after these controls is the look-ahead limiter,
which can produce considerable audible distortion if overdriven.
You should make large changes in EQ with the bass and parametric
equalizers and the HF enhancer, because these are located before the
compressors. The compressors will therefore protect the system from
look-ahead limiter overloads caused the chosen equalization. Use the
multiband mix controls only for fine-tuning.
You can also get a similar effect by adjusting the compression threshold
of the individual bands. This is comparably risky with reference to lookahead
limiter overload, but unlike the MB BAND MIX controls, does not affect
the frequency response when a given band is below threshold and is
thus producing no gain reduction.
On/Mute switches allow you to listen to any band (or any combination of bands) independently.
This is a feature designed for intermediate or advanced users and developers
when they are creating new 8685 presets. The mute control works by muting
the input of compressor in that band. This prevents the muted compressor’s
sidechain from producing a gain reduction signal that could couple into unmuted
bands through the various band-coupling controls.
Please note that a single band will interact with the look-ahead limiter quite differently
than will that band when combined with all of the other bands. Therefore, do
not assume that you can tune each band independently and have it sound the same
when the clipping system is processing all bands simultaneously.
B3>B4 Couple (“Band 3>4 Coupling”) control determines the extent to which the
gains of bands 4 (centered at 3.7 kHz) and 5 (above 6.2 kHz) are determined by and
follows the gain of band 3 (centered at 1 kHz). Set towards 100% (fully coupled) this
control reduces the amount of dynamic upper midrange boost, preventing unnatu-
Band Mix
Full Name Advanced Name Range
B2>B1 CPL B2>B1 Coupling 0 ... 100 %
B2>B3 CPL B2>B3 Coupling 0 ... 100 %
B3>B2 CPL B3>B2 Coupling 0 … 100 %
B3>B4 CPL B3>B4 Coupling 0 ... 100 %
B4>B5 CPL B4>B5 Coupling 0 ... 100 %
B1 OUT B1 Output Mix –6.0 … +6.0 dB
B2 OUT B2 Output Mix –6.0 … +6.0 dB
B3 OUT B3 Output Mix –6.0 … +6.0 dB
B4 OUT B4 Output Mix –6.0 … +6.0 dB
B5 OUT B5 Output Mix –6.0 … +6.0 dB
Table 3-10: MB Band Mix Controls

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-61
ral upper midrange boost. The gain of band 5 is further affected by the BAND 4>5
COUPLING control.
The COUPLING controls use an “OR” algorithm: the final gain reduction in a given
band is the higher of (1) the gain reduction that would have been produced in that
band with no coupling, OR (2) the gain reduction in the adjacent coupled band multiplied
by the setting of the COUPLING control.
For example, assume that Band 4 would produce 10 dB of gain reduction with no
B3>B4 coupling. If the BAND 3>4 COUPLING control is set to 50%, Band 3 will not affect
Band 4’s gain reduction unless Band 4 is producing more than 20 dB of gain reduction.
At this point, every 2 dB increase in Band 4’s gain reduction will cause a 1
dB increase in Band 3’s gain reduction.
B4>B5 Couple (“Band 4>5 Coupling”) controls the extent to which the gain of
band 5 (6.2 kHz and above) is determined by and follows the gain of band 4.
The sum of the high frequency limiter control signal and the output of the BAND 4>5
COUPLING control determines the gain reduction in band 5. The BAND 4>5 COUPLING
control receives the independent left and right band 4 gain control signal. Range is
0 to 100% coupling.
B3>B2 Couple and B2>B3 Couple controls determine the extent to which the
gains of bands 2 and 3 track each other.
When combined with the other coupling controls, these controls can adjust the multiband
processing to be anything from fully independent operation to quasiwideband
processing.
B2>B1 Couple control determines the extent to which the gain of band 1 (below
100Hz or 200Hz, depending on crossover setting) is determined by and follows the
gain of band 2 (centered at 400Hz). Set towards 100% (fully coupled), it reduces the
amount of dynamic bass boost, preventing unnatural bass boost. Set towards 0%
(independent), it permits frequencies below 100Hz (the “slam” region) to have
maximum impact in modern rock, urban, dance, rap, and other music where bass
punch is crucial. Accordingly, it can be useful in music video oriented formats.
Bx Out (“Band x Output Mix”) controls determine the relative balance of the bands
in the multiband compressor. Because these controls mix after the band compressors,
they do not affect the compressors’ gain reductions and can be used as a
graphic equalizer to fine-tune the spectral balance of the program material over a
±3 dB range.
Their range has been purposely limited because the only gain control element after
these controls is the back-end clipping system (including the multiband clipper/distortion
controller), which can produce considerable audible distortion if overdriven.
The thresholds of the individual compressors have been tuned to prevent
audible distortion with almost any program material. Large changes in the frequency
balance of the compressor outputs will change this tuning, leaving the 8685
more vulnerable to unexpected audible distortion with certain program material.
Therefore, you should make large changes in EQ with the bass and parametric

3-62
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
equalizers and the HF enhancer, because these are located before the compressors.
The compressors will thus protect the system from unusual overloads caused the
chosen equalization. Use the multiband mix controls only for fine-tuning.
You can also get a similar effect by adjusting the compression threshold of the individual
bands. This is comparably risky with reference to clipper overload, but unlike
the MB BAND MIX controls, the threshold adjustments do not affect the frequency response
when a given band is below threshold and is thus producing no gain reduction.
Advanced Five-Band Controls
B1-B5 Attack (Time); Speech B1-B5 Attack (2.0); Center B1-B5 Attack (surround)
controls set the speed with which the gain reduction in each band responds
to level changes at the input to a given band’s compressor. These controls affect the
sound of the processor in many subtle ways. The main trade-off is “punch”
(achieved with slower attack times) versus distortion and/or pumping produced in
the look-ahead limiter (because slower attack times increase overshoots that the
look-ahead limiter must eliminate). The results are strongly program-dependent and
must be verified with listening tests to a wide variety of program material.
The ATTACK time controls are calibrated in arbitrary units that very approximately
correspond to milliseconds. Higher numbers correspond to slower attacks.
In the 2.0 processing, there are separate controls for music and speech (page 3-6), so
you can set attack times faster for speech (to minimize look-ahead limiter artifacts)
and slower for music (to maximize punch and transient definition). In the surround
processing, there are separate controls for the center channel.
B1-B5 Limiter Attack controls allow you to set the limiter attack anywhere from 0
to 100% of normal in the Five-Band compressor/limiters. Because the limiter and
compressor characteristics interact, you will usually get best audible results when
you set these controls in the range of 70% to 100%. Below 70%, you will usually
hear pumping because the compressor function is trying to create some of the gain
reduction that the faster limiting function would have otherwise achieved. If you
hear pumping in a band and you still wish to adjust the limiter attack to a low setting,
you can sometimes ameliorate or eliminate the pumping by slowing down the
compressor attack time in that band.
Setting these controls to around 50% can increase punch when you are using low
compression ratios with small amounts of gain reduction.
B1-B5 Delta Release controls are differential controls. They allow you to vary the
release time in any band of the Five-Band compressor/limiter by setting an offset between
the MULTIBAND RELEASE setting and the actual release time you achieve in a
given band. For example, if you set the MULTIBAND RELEASE control to medium-fast
and the BAND 3 DELTA GR control to –2, then the band 3 release time will be the
same as if you had set the MULTIBAND RELEASE control to medium and set the BAND 3
DELTA GR control to 0. Thus, your settings automatically track any changes you make
in the MULTIBAND RELEASE control. In our example, the release time in band 3 will always
be two “click stops” slower than the setting of the MULTIBAND RELEASE control.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-63
If your setting of a given DELTA RELEASE control would otherwise create a release
slower than “slow” or faster than “fast” (the two end-stops of the MULTIBAND
RELEASE control), the band in question will instead set its release time at the appropriate
end-stop.
B1>LFE Couple See Bass>LFE Couple on page 3-52.
B1-B5 Compression Ratio: See page 3-53.
Note that the multiband gate only works appropriately when the KNEE and RATIO
controls of all bands are set identically, which is typically the case in broadcast applications.
We recommend turning off the multiband gate if the individual KNEE and
RATIO settings are unequal.
B1-B5 Knee: See page 3-53.
B1-B5 Breakpoint: See page 3-53.
B1/B2 Crossover (Band 1 to Band 2 Crossover Frequency) sets the crossover frequency
between bands 1 and 2 to either 100 Hz or 200 Hz. It significantly affects the
bass texture, and the best way to understand the differences between the two
crossover frequencies is to listen.
B1-B5 Main>Center Max +Delta GR; B1-B5 Main>Center Max –Delta GR: See
Multiband starting on page 3-11 for an explanation of these controls.

3-64
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
Test Modes
The Test Modes screen allows you to switch between OPERATE, BYPASS, and TONE.
When you switch to BYPASS or TONE, the 8685 saves the preset you had on-air and
will restore it when you switch back to OPERATE. Even if you had been editing a preset
and did not yet save these changes as a User preset, you will not lose the edits
you made.
Table 3-11: Test Modes on page 3-64 shows the facilities available, which should be
largely self-explanatory.
In TONE mode, any channel can be set to OFF (the tone is off). ON (the tone is on) or
BYPASS (equivalent to placing that channel in BYPASS mode). When bench testing
the 8685, you can cause one hardware output to emit a tone while leaving the remaining
channels in BYPASS. Using a BNC/BNC patch cable, you can apply the tone to
any 8685 input for testing. This eliminates the need for an external test oscillator.
The tone oscillator tracks the WORD LENGTH and DITHER settings for that channel’s
output. Resolution as high as 24 bits is available. Activating dither will result in ideal
tones with no measurable harmonic distortion.
In the 2.0 processing, test modes function identically in 2.0 stereo and dual-mono
modes. For example, in dual mono mode, setting TONE CHAN to LEFT applies signal to
channel 1 but not to channel 2.
Setup: Test
Parameter Labels Units Default Range (CCW to CW) Step
Mode --- Operate Operate, Bypass, Tone ---
Bypass Gain dB 0.0 −18 … +25 1
Tone Frequency Hz 400 16, 20, 25, 31.5, 40, 50,
63, 80, 100, 125, 160,
200, 250, 315, 400, 500,
630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600,
2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000,
6300, 8000, 9500, 10000, 12500,
13586.76, 15000, 20000* [*44.1
kHz and higher output SR only]
LOG
Tone Level % 100 0 … 121 1
Lf Tone --- Bypass Off, On, Bypass ---
Rf Tone --- Bypass Off, On, Bypass ---
Ls Tone --- Bypass Off, On, Bypass ---
Rs Tone --- Bypass Off, On, Bypass ---
C Tone --- Bypass Off, On, Bypass ---
LFE Tone --- Bypass Off, On, Bypass ---
Lb Tone --- Bypass Off, On, Bypass ---
Rb Tone --- Bypass Off, On, Bypass ---
L 2.0 Proc x Tone --- Bypass Off, On, Bypass ---
R 2.0 Proc x Tone --- Bypass Off, On, Bypass ---
Table 3-11: Test Modes

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-65
Using the 8685 PC Remote Control Software
8685 PC Remote control software allows you to access any front-panel 8685 control
remotely. The software also gives you the ability to backup user presets, system files,
and automation files to your computer’s storage devices (hard drives, etc.) and to restore
them later to your 8685.
The 8685 PC Remote software can connect to your 8685 via modem, direct serial cable
connection, or Ethernet network. It communicates with your 8685 via the TCP/IP
protocol, regardless of how it is connected to your 8685.
PC Remote works best on large, high-resolution displays. Scroll bars will
appear when using lower resolutions.
Before running 8685 PC Remote, you must have installed the appropriate Windows
communications services on your computer. By default, the installer installs a shortcut
to 8685PC.exe on your desktop and in your Start Menu under Orban\Optimod
8685.
8685 PC Remote can control only one 8685 at a time, but it can readily switch between
several 8685s. 8685 PC Remote has a built-in “address book” that allows it to
select and connect to:
• any 8685 on the same network as the PC,
• any 8685 that can be accessed through a modem connected to the PC via dial-up
networking, and,
• any 8685 that is connected directly to one of the PC’s serial ports.
Before your PC can communicate with a given 8685, you must first set up a “connection,”
which is information that allows PC Remote to locate and communicate with
the 8685.
To set up a new connection:
A) Launch 8685PC.exe.
B) Create a new 8685 connection by choosing NEW 8685 from the CONNECT file
menu or by right clicking on the ALL CONNECTIONS icon in the Connections List
and selecting NEW 8685.
The Connection Properties dialog box opens.
C) Enter an Alias name for your 8685 (like “KABC”).
D) Leave the password field blank to prompt the user to enter a password when
initiating a connection.
Refer to Security and Passcode Programming on page 2-40.
Otherwise, enter a password to allow PC Remote to connect to your 8685
without requiring a password when the connection is initiated.

3-66
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
For successful connection, a password must have already been entered
into your 8685 unit.
E) If you are communicating with your 8685 through a network, select the
Ethernet radio button. See also Setting Up Ethernet, LAN, and VPN Connections
on page 2-64.
F) If you are communicating via a direct serial cable connection or a modem
connection, follow the appropriate procedure described in Appendix: Setting
up Serial Communications, starting on page 2-67.
G) Click OK after entering all required information.
To initiate communication:
Initiate communication by doubleclicking
on the desired 8685 alias in the
Connections List, or by selecting the
desired 8685 alias from the CONNECT
drop down menu.
• If a warning message appears
stating: “No password is set at the
8685…” go to your 8685 unit and
create a passcode.
• If an Enter Passcode dialog box appears, enter a valid passcode and the 8685
PC Remote software will initiate a connection to the 8685 unit.
When run, the Orban PC Remote software installer makes copies of all 8685 factory
preset files on your local hard drive. The PC Remote software reads these
files to speed up its initialization. If any of these files have been deleted or damaged,
the PC Remote software will refresh them by downloading them from the
8685. If the PC Remote software needs to do this, it can substantially increase the
time required for the software to initialize, particularly through a slow modem
connection.
When this download is finished, the main meters will appear.
• A wheel mouse is the quickest and easiest interface to use—you will rarely (if
ever) have to use the keyboard.
• A bubble containing help about a given control will appear if you drag your
mouse over that control.
To modify a control setting:
A) Choose PROCESSING PARAMETERS from the EDIT menu or click the second-tothe-left
button on the button bar.
B) There are separate menu tabs for the surround and 2.0 processing channels.
Select appropriate menu tabs for LESS-MORE and EQ to access Basic Modify

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-67
controls. All other menu tabs contain Full or Advanced Modify controls for a
given processing channel.
You can reset any Basic Modify Control without losing LESS-MORE functionality;
Full and Advanced modify control adjustments will cause LESS-
MORE to be grayed-out.
To set a control, click it (it will become highlighted) and then adjust it by
dragging it with the mouse or moving the wheel on the mouse.
To recall a preset:
You can also use the + and – keys on the numeric keypad to adjust any
control.
Presets, whether Factory or User, contain settings for both the surround and 2.0
processing. Recalling a preset overwrites both the surround and 2.0 controls.
If you wish instead to recall only the 2.0 settings in a given preset while leaving
the surround processing unchanged, you must Import the 2.0 section of a Factory
or User preset into the currently active preset (see To import a preset into the 2.0
processing below).
A) Choose RECALL PRESET from the FILE menu to bring up the OPEN PRESET FILE
dialog box. You can also click the leftmost button on the button bar.
B) Click the desired preset within the dialog box to select it.
C) Double-click the desired preset or select it and click the RECALL PRESET button
to put it on-air.
Continually clicking the RECALL PRESET button will toggle between the
current and previous on-air presets.
D) Click DONE to dismiss the OPEN PRESET FILE dialog box.
The folder on your hard drive containing the preset files (both Factory
and User) is automatically synchronized to the contents of its associated
8685’s non-volatile memory each time 8685 PC Remote connects to that
8685. The 8685’s memory is the “master.” This means that if you delete a
user preset from the 8685’s memory (whether locally via its front panel or
via 8685 PC Remote), 8685 PC Remote will automatically erase this preset
from this folder on your computer. To archive a preset permanently, you
must use the Backup function (see page 3- 68).
To import a preset into the 2.0 processing:
This procedure allows you to recall only the preset settings that affect the 2.0
processing. The surround processing does not change.
A) Choose IMPORT 2.0 PRESET from the FILE menu to bring up the IMPORT 2.0
PRESET FILE dialog box.
B) Click the desired preset within the dialog box to select it.

3-68
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
C) Double-click the desired preset or select it and click the IMPORT button to activate
it.
D) Click DONE to dismiss the IMPORT PRESET FILE dialog box.
To save a user preset you have created:
A) Select SAVE PRESET AS from the FILE menu to bring up the SAVE AS Dialog Box.
The current preset name will appear in the File Name field.
B) Click in the field, and edit it.
C) Click SAVE to save the preset to the 8685’s internal memory as a User Preset.
If you have made edits to a previously existing user preset, you can select
SAVE PRESET from the FILE menu to overwrite the pre-existing user preset
automatically.
This operation saves both the surround and 2.0 portions of the preset.
You can “mix and match” surround and 2.0 settings by using the Import
function to bring the 2.0 settings of any preset into the current preset.
You can then save the result as a new User Preset.
To back up User Presets, system files, and automation files onto
your computer’s hard drive:
A) Select BACKUP TO PC from the FILE Menu.
B) Click OK.
PC Remote will offer three options:
• Save Backup Files (User Presets, Setups [system files], and automation) in
plain text.
This allows the presets and files to be read with any text editor program
and to be readily exchanged between Optimod users.
• Save Backup Files using the session passcode to encrypt them.
• Save Backup Files using the password of your choice to encrypt them.
The encryption options prevent archived presets, system files, and automation
files from being restored if the user does not have the password
used for the encryption. There is no “back door”— Orban cannot help
you to decrypt a preset whose password is unknown.
All User Preset, Setup, and automation files are copied from your Optimod’s
internal memory to a folder called “backup” on your PC. This
folder is a subfolder of the folder named the same as the alias of the Optimod
that you are backing up.
This folder name (“backup”) and location are hard-coded into the software.
If you wish to move the backup files somewhere else later, use a
file manager (like Explorer) on your computer.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-69
To make more than one backup archive, rename the current backup
folder (for example, to “Backup1”). 8685 PC Remote will create a new
backup folder the next time you do a backup, leaving your renamed
backup folder untouched. Later, you will be able to restore from any
folder—the Restore dialog box allows you to choose the folder containing
the files to be restored
If you attempt to back up a preset with the same name as a preset existing
in the Backup folder, but with a different date, 8685 PC Remote will
warn you and will allow you to overwrite the preset in the Backup folder
or to cancel the operation. If you wish to keep the existing archived preset,
you can first use a file manager to move the existing user preset in
the Backup folder to another folder and then repeat the backup operation.
Note to Users Familiar with Older Version of PC Remote
To make the user presets easily accessible to all users (including those
without Administrator privileges in Windows), we have moved the default
location of the user preset folder from inside Windows Program
Files directory, where it was in previous software versions.
For Windows XP, the new location is:
C:\Documents and Settings\
All Users\Documents\Orban\
Optimod 8685 PC Remote\my 8685
For Windows Vista and 7, the new location is:
C:\Users\Public\Documents\Orban\
Optimod 8685 PC Remote\my 8685
To restore archived presets, Setups, and automation files:
In addition to restoring archived presets, Setups, and automation files to their
original Optimod, you can also copy these archived files from one Optimod to
another. The Optimod whose connection is active will receive the file.
If the preset, Setup, or automation file was encrypted when it was originally
saved, PC Remote will request the password under which it was encrypted.
All User Presets are compatible with all 8685 software versions. If Orban
adds new controls to a software version, the new software will assign a
reasonable default value to any control missing in an old User Preset. If
you archive such a User Preset after restoring it, the newly written archive
file will now include the new controls (with the default values,
unless you edit any of these values before you re-archive the preset).
A) Select RESTORE FROM PC from the FILE menu.
A standard Windows dialog box will open.
B) Select the type of files you want to restore using the FILES OF TYPE field at
the bottom of the dialog box.
You can select to restore all user presets (*.orb8685user), 8685 user presets
(*.orb8685user), Setups (*.orb8685setup), and automation files
(*.orb8685autom).

3-70
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
If you want to restore files from a different directory (i.e., that might
have been created on a different 8685), navigate to that directory from
within the dialog box.
C) To restore a single user preset:
a) Set the FILES OF TYPE field to a user preset file type (*.orb8685user).
b) Select the desired preset in the dialog box.
c) Click the RESTORE button.
D) To restore all the user presets from a specific location:
a) Set the FILES OF TYPE field to a user preset file type (*.orb8685user)
b) Highlight all the user presets in the dialog window
c) Click the RESTORE button.
E) To restore a Setup file:
a) Set the FILES OF TYPE field to the System Setup file type (*.orb8685setup).
b) Select the desired system file in the dialog box.
c) Click the RESTORE button.
F) To restore an automation file:
a) Set the FILES OF TYPE field to the Automation file type (*.orb8685autom)
b) Select the desired automation file in the dialog box
c) Click the RESTORE button.
G) Click DONE to dismiss the RESTORE dialog box.
To modify the active SETUP:
Choose SETUP from the TOOLS menu or click the third-from-the-left button on
the button bar.
To set a control, click it (it will become highlighted) and then use the wheel on
the mouse to adjust it. You can also use the + and – keys on the numeric keypad
to adjust any control.
To modify AUTOMATION:
A) Choose AUTOMATION from the TOOLS menu.
An Automation Dialog box will open.
B) Click the NEW EVENT to create a new event
Controls to set the event type and time are available on the right hand
side of the dialog box.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-71
C) Check the ENABLE AUTOMATION check box at the top of the dialog box to enable
automation.
To group multiple 8685s:
Right-click ALL CONNECTIONS in the Connections List and select NEW GROUP.
You can add multiple 8685 to a single group to help organize a network of 8685.
However, only one 8685 from within a group can be connected to 8685 PC Remote
at any one time.
Navigation Using the Keyboard
In general, PC Remote uses standard Windows conventions for navigation.
Navigate around the screens using the TAB key. Use CTRL-TAB to move to the next
tabbed screen in PC Remote.
Use the + and – keys or the left and right arrow keys on the numeric keypad to adjust
control settings.
To Quit the Program
Use standard Windows conventions: Press ALT-F4 on the keyboard, or click the X on
the upper right corner with the mouse.
About Aliases created by Optimod 8685 PC Remote Software
When you ADD A NEW 8685 using Optimod 8685 PC Remote, your 8685 automatically
receives an 8685 Alias name to differentiate it from other 8685s. You can change the
name anytime in the 8685 Properties window inside 8685 PC Remote.
When you add a new 8685 or change the name of an existing 8685 Alias, an Alias
folder is created in the same location as the executable for Optimod 8685 PC Remote
(usually \Program Files\Orban\Optimod 8685). The folder has the same name as
the Alias name. Once you establish the initial connection to the 8685, all presets for
that 8685 are automatically copied to the Alias folder—the folder contains all the
preset files for that 8685, both Factory and User. If you have backed up the 8685 using
8685 PC Remote, these will appear in a “backup” subfolder located within the
Alias folder.
Archived user preset files are text files and can be opened in a text editor
(like Notepad) if you want to examine their contents. Of course, you will
only see a meaningful display if the files were archived in plaintext (i.e.,
not encrypted).
Alias folders and their associated backup subfolders are registered in your PC’s Registry.
This prevents folders from being accidentally deleted or moved. If you move or
delete Alias folders from the PC, the Alias folders recreate themselves in the previ-

3-72
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
ous location and restore their contents by copying it from their associated 8685s
when 8685 PC Remote connects to such an 8685.
Multiple Installations of Optimod 8685 PC Remote
Rarely, you may want to have more than one installation of 8685 PC Remote on your
computer. There are a few extra things to know if you have multiple installations.
If you install a new version of the Optimod 8685 PC Remote software on your PC,
any Alias folders and backup subfolders created in an earlier software version still
remain in their original location on your PC (and in its registry).
The version of 8685 PC Remote must match the version of the software in the 8685
controlled by it. Therefore, you will only need multiple installations of PC Remote
(having separate version numbers) if:
• you are controlling multiple 8685s, and
• not all of your 8685s are running the same version of 8685 software, and
• you do not want to upgrade at least one controlled 8685 to the latest version of
8685 PC Remote software.
Each version of 8685 PC Remote has its own top-level folder, normally under
\Program Files\Orban. (The default folder is \Program Files\Orban\Optimod 8685.)
When you install a new version of 8685 PC Remote, the default behavior is to overwrite
the old version, which is usually the desired behavior. To prevent the installer
from overwriting the old version, you must specify a different installation folder
when you install the new version (for example, \Program Files\Orban\Optimod
8685v2).
Each version of 8685 PC Remote will display all 8685 Aliases, even those pointing to
8685s with incompatible version numbers. If you attempt to connect to an older version
of 8685 from a newer version of 8685 PC Remote, 8685 PC Remote will offer to
upgrade the software in the target 8685 so that it corresponds to the version of
8685 PC Remote that is active. If you attempt to connect to newer version of 8685
from an older version of 8685 PC Remote, it will refuse to connect and will emit an
error message regarding incompatible versions.
If you decide to install the new software to a different location on your PC, new Aliases
created using the new software will not be located in the same place as the old
Aliases.
To Move Alias Folders:
Even though each version of 8685 PC Remote can see all aliases, you may wish to
move the corresponding folders so they are under the folder corresponding to the
highest version of 8685 PC Remote that is currently installed on your computer (although
this is not required). If your Alias folders reside in different locations, you
can move all the Alias folders to the same location by using the PC Remote software.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-73
Do not use an external file manager (like Windows Explorer) to do this. The old Alias
folders need to be re-created under the Optimod 8685 PC Remote software you
wish to use (so that the registry entries can be correctly updated). You can do this
two different ways.
• Rename the Alias (preferred): Start the Optimod 8685 PC Remote executable
you wish to use and rename your old Aliases with a slightly different name. A
new Alias folder with the new name will be created in the same location as the
Optimod 8685 PC Remote executable.
• Delete and Recreate the Alias: Start the Optimod 8685 PC Remote executable
you wish to use. Delete the old 8685 Aliases and create new ones to replace
them. New Alias folders will be created in the same location as the Optimod
8685 PC Remote executable.
Important: The deletion process will automatically erase its associated
folder, including the Backup directory. If you have anything in the
Backup directory that you wish to keep, you should therefore move that
directory elsewhere (or transfer the desired files to another, active
backup directory).
Ordinarily, the erasure process will move the Backup directory to your
computer’s Recycle Bin, so you can recover a Backup directory that you
have accidentally deleted in this way.
To share an archived User Preset between 8685s:
A) Navigate to the directory containing the desired User Preset from within the
RESTORE FROM PC dialog box
B) Click the RESTORE button.
This User Preset will be downloaded to the 8685 to which 8685 PC Remote
is currently connected.
If the User Preset is encrypted, PC Remote will request its password.
Using the 8685 for Production and Mastering
The 8685 can be a useful tool for mastering and production applications in the professional
audio industry, like preparation of equalized, level-controlled, peak limited
CD, DVD, or BluRay masters. We have frequently used the 8685 in this context,
achieving excellent results.
We strongly recommend using 8685 PC Remote software for controlling the 8685
when mastering. PC Remote shows all meters at once and allows easier access to operating
controls.
Because of their broadcast origins, most of the 8685’s presets provide more processing
than would ordinarily be required for mastering. In addition, we would expect

3-74
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
that the mastering engineer would want to tweak a preset carefully to complement
the program material being mastered. The 8685 provides important tools to allow a
mastering engineer to fine-tune the processing to complement the program material:
• Three bands of parametric equalization with low-noise filter structures and
curves modeled after classic second-order analog bell-shaped EQ.
• A powerful, low-noise parametric bass shelving equalizer with sweepable frequency
and a choice of 6, 12, or 18 dB/octave slopes.
• Two-band and five-band compressor/limiters with phase-linear crossovers and
powerful controls, including attack time, release time, threshold, knee, and ratio
for each band. These compressor/limiters also offer user-adjustable interband
coupling, allowing the user to operate them anywhere from quasi-wideband to
fully independent.
• A look-ahead peak limiter with advanced, proprietary distortion reduction algorithms.
You cannot create a user preset “from scratch”; you must create it by modifying an
existing preset, factory or user. Each preset has an “easy adjustment” facility called
LESS-MORE, which is a one-knob provision for turning the amount of processing up
or down.
Systematically, the following is a good method for creating mastering presets. It assumes
that you have already set the processor mixer controls to achieve normal drive
levels.
A) Connect to the 8685 via 8685 PC Remote software. Compared to using the
8685’s front panel, using PC Remote gives you more convenient access to the
8685’s many tuning controls.
Note that by drawing a marquee around several controls by clicking and
dragging with your computer’s mouse, you can temporarily couple them
so you can adjust several bands’ controls (for example, the LIMITER ATTACK
controls) simultaneously. The coupling will remain active until you click
outside the area that the marquee encloses.
B) Decide whether you are going to use two-band or five-band processing.
Two-band processing retains any fixed equalization originally applied to
the program (except for a mild amount of dynamic adjustment to bass
below 200 Hz); five-band processing performs an “automatic reequalization”
function. Both flavors of processing can be extremely
smooth and unobtrusive. Because the five-band compressor/limiter offers
user-adjustable interband coupling that determines the “discreteness” of
the multiband compression, it is usually the best choice.
If you are going to use two-band processing, recall the 2B SOFT KNEE preset.
If you are going to use five-band processing, recall the 5B SOFT KNEE
preset. If you want to do look-ahead peak limiting without any other dy-

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-75
namics processing, recall the LOOK-AHEAD LIMITER preset. See page 3-26 for
a description of these presets.
C) If you have started with one of the SOFT KNEE presets, the AGC will already be
OFF. If you need a very large amount of compression for an application like
processing material intended for in-flight entertainment systems, you can either
edit the preset to turn the AGC on or start with a preset other than SOFT
KNEE.
You can turn the AGC off globally for all presets, which is convenient if
you don’t expect to use it in the future. (See step 2 on page 2-20.)
D) Unless you will be using a large amount of compression for special applications,
set the MB GATE THRESHOLD to OFF.
In the SOFT KNEE and LOOK-AHEAD LIMITER presets, this is already done.
The multiband gate only works appropriately when the KNEE and RATIO
controls of all bands are set identically, which is typically true in broadcast
applications. We recommend turning off the multiband gate if the
individual KNEE and RATIO settings are unequal.
E) Adjust the 2B DRIVE control (two-band) or MB DRIVE control (five-band) to
achieve the desired amount of multiband gain reduction.
F) Adjust the release time control (2B RELEASE or MB RELEASE) to achieve the desired
compression density.
If you are using the Five-Band structure, you can use the DELTA RELEASE
controls to fine-tune the release time of each band independently.
The release characteristic is always “automatic” (i.e., with programdependent
time constants) and the RELEASE control simply scales this
process. This, combined with multiband operation, makes the compression
remarkably resistant to the usual compressor pumping and squashing.
G) Adjust the ATTACK TIME controls on the individual compressors to trade off
overshoot control against transient punch.
H) Adjust the RATIO and KNEE controls in each band to taste.
The RATIO control sets the compression ratio at the threshold of compression.
To achieve a classic soft knee characteristic, set the RATIO to 1:1 and
adjust the softness of the knee with the KNEE control.
The KNEE control’s setting is the gain reduction in dB at which the compression
ratio reaches ∞:1. (See page 3-53 for a description of the RATIO,
KNEE, and BREAKPOINT controls.)
I) After you adjust the RATIO and KNEE controls, adjust the THRESHOLD controls in
the individual bands to achieve the desired amount of gain reduction.
The KNEE control automatically and invisibly changes a given band’s internal
compression threshold to keep the compressor’s output level constant
whenever the drive level is high enough to move the gain reduction
into the ∞:1 range. This means that the internal threshold decreases
with softer knee settings (higher settings of the KNEE control). However,
the indicated threshold the 8685’s user interface does not change. This
behavior ensures that the THRESHOLD control alone determines the maxi-

3-76
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
mum output level of the compressor, regardless the KNEE control’s setting.
J) Adjust the LIMITER ATTACK TIME controls to taste.
These controls allow you to set the limiter attack anywhere from 0% to
100% of normal in the Five-Band compressors, each of whose gain reduction
has a fast-release (limiter) and slow-release (compressor) component.
Because the limiter and compressor characteristics interact, you will usually
get best audible results when you set these controls in the range of
70% to 100%. Below 70%, you will usually hear pumping because the
compressor function is trying to create some of the gain reduction that
the faster limiting function would have otherwise achieved. If you hear
pumping in a band and you still wish to adjust the limiter attack to a low
setting, you can sometimes ameliorate or eliminate the pumping by slowing
down the compressor attack time in that band.
Of course, sometimes artistic pumping is desired for certain styles of music
and/or recording. The LIMITER ATTACK TIME controls can help achieve
this sound.
If you are using low compression ratios and small amounts of gain reduction,
setting the LIMITER ATTACK TIME controls as low as 50% can often increase
punch.
K) Adjust the TRANSIENT ENHANCE control to taste.
This control allows you to insert an audio delay of up to 10 ms in the
sidechain of the five-band compressor. Delaying the gain control signal,
allows attack transients to pass through the multiband compressor uncompressed,
which can increase punch. There is a tradeoff between this
control and the amount of gain reduction in the look-ahead limiter,
which will have to eliminate attack transients exceeding the look-ahead
limiter’s threshold.
L) Adjust equalization as necessary.
As discussed above, there is a versatile program equalizer available between
the AGC and multiband compressor. In five-band mode, there is
also a five-band mix control (functioning as a phase-linear graphic equalizer)
after the five-band compressor. In five-band mode, any fixed equalization
will be partially “undone” by the dynamic re-equalization effect
of the five-band compression, so two-band mode is most useful when
you are relying on the 8685’s fixed EQ or on external EQ earlier in the
signal path.
Note also that you can use the individual band compression threshold
controls, the BASS COUPLING control, and HF COUPLING control to affect
the amount of automatic re-equalization performed by the five-band
compression. As you set these controls closer to 100%, they permit progressively
less dynamic LF and HF program-adaptive boost. If you feel
that the dynamic re-equalization is not producing enough brightness
when the program material lacks high frequencies, you should turn the
BAND 3>4 and BAND 4>5 COUPLING closer to 0%. Similarly, if weak bass is
not sufficiently boosted, turn the BAND 2>1 COUPLING closer to 0%.
M) Set the amount of peak limiting with the MB LIMIT DRIVE control.
In general, the less peak limiting you use, the better sounding the result
will be. However, if your client demands a “loud” result, the 8685’s look-

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-77
ahead peak limiter is a powerful tool for achieving this with minimum
distortion or other side effects. Nevertheless, be aware that this function
is not like some familiar “look-ahead” limiters. The release time is in the
order of a few milliseconds and is not user adjustable. The purpose of the
limiter is only to limit peaks that pass through the earlier compressors because
of their finite attack times. Functionally it is used like a peak clipper,
but it has vastly reduced modulation distortion by comparison to a
clipper, whether “soft knee” or “hard knee.”
The main potential side effects of the look-ahead limiter are gain breathing
and a “warbling” sound in the midrange when heavy bass is simultaneously
present. Listen carefully for this intermodulation effect (particularly
on vocals) when you are adjusting the FINAL LIMIT control.
N) Adjust the Bass Clip Threshold and Bass Clip Shape controls to complement
the amount of final limiting.
For most mastering applications, you can set the BASS CLIP THRESHOLD to
OFF. However, if you hear pumping or “warbling” distortion in the lookahead
limiter caused by heavy bass transients, you can reduce this effect
by setting the BASS CLIP to a lower level. (The BASS CLIP control is calibrated
in “dB below the look-ahead limiter threshold.”) It is most effective
when the B1/B2 CROSSOVER control is set to 100 Hz, as this setting
prevents intermodulation between vocals and instrumental bass in the
clipper.
O) If you wish to compare your processed sound to the unprocessed original, recall
the LOOK AHEAD LIMITER preset and toggle between it and your processing
preset. If there is a gross loudness disparity, you may wish to edit the gain
within the LOOK AHEAD LIMITER preset and save this as a user preset.
P) Save your preset using File/Save Preset.
Once you have created one “mastering” preset, you can edit it to create
others and save them under different names.
Q) For a 44.1 or 88.2 kHz output sample rate, set the digital output level (step 9
on page 2-27) to approximately –0.5dBfs; this will prevent overshoots caused
by sample rate conversion. For a 48 or 96 kHz output sample rate, set the digital
output level to –0.1dBfs.
At 44.1 kHz, the output samples are not exactly the same ones that the
look-ahead limiter controlled at the internal 48 kHz sample rate, so slight
overshoot can occur. At 48 kHz output sample rate, overshoot will be less
than 0.1dB.
If your mastered audio is intended for transmission via a lossy codec like
AAC, MP3 or WMA, be aware that the codec’s decoder may overshoot
and cause audible clipping distortion. See Setting Output/Modulation
Levels on page 1-21. If the 8685’s output is applied directly to a lossy codec,
decrease the setting of the 8685’s output level control to allow the
necessary headroom. If the 8685’s output is applied to a linear PCM storage
medium (like a CD), it is better to use the entire dynamic range of
the linear medium by setting the 8685’s output level close to 0 dBfs. Then
compensate for codec overshoots by reducing gain when you transcode
from the linear PCM recording to the codec.

3-78
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
Appendix A: Using the ITU BS.1770 and CBS
Loudness Meters to Measure Loudness Controller
Performance
In 2009, the ATSC released a Recommended Practice: Techniques for Establishing and
Maintaining Audio Loudness for Digital Television (A/85:2009). This specifies use of a
long-term loudness meter based on the ITU BS.1770 algorithm for assessing and setting
the loudness of DTV broadcasts.
For many years, Orban has used the Jones & Torick loudness controller and loudness
measuring technology 1 in its products for loudness control of sound for picture. Developed
after 15 years of psychoacoustic research at CBS Laboratories, the CBS loudness
controller accurately estimates the amount of perceived loudness in a given
piece of program material. If the loudness exceeds a preset threshold, the controller
automatically reduces it to that threshold. The CBS algorithm has proven its effectiveness
by processing millions of hours of on-air programming and greatly reducing
viewer complaints caused by loud commercials.
Since first licensing and using the CBS algorithm in its Optimod-TV 8182 back in the
early ‘80s, Orban has continually refined and developed this technology. In the last
quarter century, audio processors from Orban and CRL using the CBS loudness controller
have processed millions of hours of on-air television programming — an unsurpassed
track record that no other subjective loudness controller technology can
claim.
Because the ATSC recommends the BS.1770 algorithm, many engineers facing the
problem of controlling broadcast loudness have wondered how the CBS and BS.1770
technologies compare. The purpose of this paper is to present, using both meters,
comparative measurements of the output of Orban’s current audio processors 2 that
use our latest refinement of the CBS loudness controller technology. 3
Test Setup
A stereo recording of approximately 30 minutes of unprocessed audio from the output
of the master control of a San Francisco network station was applied to the 2.0
1 Jones, Bronwyn L.; Torick, Emil L., “A New Loudness Indicator for Use in Broadcasting,”
J. SMPTE September 1981, pp. 772-777.
2 Optimod-Surround 8585 and 8685, Optimod 6300 (with version 2.0 and higher
software), and Optimod-PC 1101 and 1101E (with version 2.0 and higher software).
3 For a discussion of the CBS and BS.1770 technologies, see
http://orban.com/meter/Technology.html. The ATSC A/85:2009 document also discusses
the BS.1770 algorithm.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-79
processing chain of an Optimod-Surround 8685 processor, set for normal operation
using its TV 5B GEN PURPOSE preset. The digital output of the processor was applied
to the digital input of an Orban 1101 soundcard, which was adjusted to pass the audio
without further processing and to apply it to an Orban software-based loudness
meter 4 that simultaneously computes the BS.1770 loudness and CBS loudness. The
first 750 seconds of the program material were a daytime drama with commercial
and promotional breaks, while the remainder was local news, also with commercial
and promotional breaks.
BS.1770 meter was adjusted to produce a 10-second integration window in which,
per the BS.1770 standard, all data are equally weighted. The CBS Loudness Gain control
was set to +5.5 dB. Data were logged every 10 seconds and included the maximum
meter indication produced by both the BS.1770 and CBS meters in each 10second
interval. This produced a total of 163 data points, which were imported into
a scientific plotting application (PSI Plot).
Results
Figure 3-3 on page 3-79 shows the results as a function of time for both meters. The
peak CBS readings fit within a ±2 dB window. The BS.1770 readings also fit within a
±2 LKFS5 window except for three short intervals. These intervals correspond to dialog
without background music and in the author’s opinion illustrate a weakness in
the version of the BS.1770 algorithm current at this writing6 . Television dialog contains
inter-syllable pauses, pauses for breath, and sometimes pauses for dramatic effect.
The ATSC Recommended Practice describes the problem as follows7 :
Because the measurement of loudness per BS.1770 is an integrated
measurement, quiet passages tend to lower the measured value. To avoid
this, the integration may be paused during quiet passages. Automatic
triggering, hold and resume, generally called “gating”, is being studied
by some organizations including the ITU-R, and gating may be added to
BS.1770 in the future. Some equipment may offer gating as a feature. As
yet, there are no standards for gated loudness measurements. Users
should utilize the current version of BS.1770 for measurements.
Figure 3-3: Peak output of meters in each 10-second interval as a function of time
4 This software is available for free download at http://orban.com/meter/. However,
the free version of the software does not support the logging functions that the author
employed to acquire data for the figures in this paper.
5 In the BS.1770 standard, measured loudness is reported as LKFS. A unit of LKFS is
the same measure as a decibel. A –15 LKFS program can be made to match the
loudness of a quieter –22 LKFS program by attenuating it by 7 dB.
6 Since this white paper was written, the EBU published its R 128-2010 algorithm,
which incorporates silence gating.
7 ATSC A/85:2009, Section 5.2, p. 15

3-80
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
F
S
L
K
d
B
-14
-16
-18
-20
-22
Material Applied to
8685-Processed
Loudness Meter Algorithm
BS.1770
-24
1000 1500
500 0
-14
-16
-18
-20
-22
Time (seconds)
Material Applied to
8685-Processed
Loudness Meter Algorithm
CBS
-24
1000 1500
500 0
Time (seconds)

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-81
B
in
p
e
r
n
s
a
tio
v
r
b
s
e
o
f O
e
r
m
b
N
u
100
80
60
40
20
Loudness Meter Histogram
CBS
Meter Indication in Each 10-Second Period
Maximum
0
-21 -20 -19 -18 -17 -16 -15
-22 -23
dB
Figure 3-4: Histogram sorting CBS loudness measurements into 1 dB bins
Histograms
The measurements can also be presented as histograms (Figure 3-4 above and Figure
3-5 on page 3-82) that sort the magnitude of the measurements into 1 dB or 1 LKFSwide
slices and show the number of measurements that fit into each of these slices.
The histogram thus provides an effective portrayal of the consistency of the loudness
— when the data are tightly clustered within a few bins, this indicates that the
loudness is more consistent than it would be if the data were spread out into a larger
number of bins.
Both histograms show the loudness is well controlled, although the details are different.
Both the BS.1770 and CBS measurements indicate that most of the data
points are in a ±1 dB window. However, the BS.1770 has low probability outliers that
are absent in the CBS graph. These outliers represent the aforementioned periods of
unadorned dialog that measure low because the BS.1770 standard does not yet
specify silence gating.
Studies indicating that BS.1770 is inaccurate at very low frequencies
In addition to its lack of silence gating, another weakness of BS.1770 is that, unlike
the CBS loudness controller and meter as implemented in Orban products, the

3-82
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
B
in
p
e
r
n
s
a
tio
v
r
b
s
e
o
f O
e
r
m
b
N
u
100
80
60
40
20
Histogram
BS.1770
Time = 10 sec
Integration
Uniformly Sampled every 10 Seconds
0
-21 -20 -19 -18 -17 -16 -15
-22 -23
LKFS
Figure 3-5: Histogram sorting BS.1770 loudness measurements into 1 dB bins
BS.1770 algorithm does not take into account the effect of the LFE channel, for
good reason. Nacross and Lavoie 8 tried to extend the BS.1770 algorithm to include
the LFE channel by summing the K-weighted LFE channel’s power into the current
BS.1770 algorithm, where the gain is weighted for the fact that LFE channel receives
a 10 dB gain boost on playback, per Dolby’s standards. This modified BS.1770 algorithm
failed to agree with the judgments of a subjective listening panel unless a 10
dB attenuation “fudge factor” was applied to the LFE channel prior to its power
summation with the other channels. Nacross and Lavoie concluded:
A problem exists however, should ITU-R BS.1770 be modified to simply
include an attenuated version of the LFE channel. Because the LFE channel
receives a 10 dB boost on playback, the low-frequencies on this channel
would contribute differently to a loudness measure if they were
moved to one of the other main channels, even though the perceived
8 Norcross, Scott G; Lavoie, Michel C., ”Investigations on the Inclusion of the LFE
Channel in the ITU-R BS.1770-1 Loudness Algorithm,” AES Convention Paper 7829,
127 th
AES Convention, New York 2009

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR OPERATION 3-83
loudness would not appreciably change. This suggests that while LFE content
does contribute to the perceived loudness, Equation (2) 9 does not
sufficiently predict how that content should be included.
A recent Australian study may shed light on the failure of BS.1770 when program
material contains considerable energy at very low frequencies. 10 The authors used
octave-band noise in subjective listening tests with the goal of verifying the Kweighting
curve used in BS.1770. The authors state:
Comparison of the test results with an image of the filter curve currently
specified in ITU-R Recommendation BS.1770 (Figure 13) shows good
agreement at 250 Hz and above 500 Hz, reasonable agreement at 500 Hz,
but marked difference in the bottom two octaves. The relatively good
performance of the BS.1770 algorithm in ITU trials suggests that, in partial
loudness terms, there was probably not much test content in the 125
Hz band or below. While the existing BS.1770 filter curve is probably a
good choice in applications where the program is dominated by speech,
and it is certainly an improvement on the A and B curves in that application,
it is likely to give significant errors in measuring the loudness of
other programs with more partial loudness in the lower frequencies, such
as movie soundtracks and popular music. It is therefore desirable to improve
on this filter for more general measurement of program loudness.
Conclusions
Several studies have shown that the loudness “comfort range” for typical television
listening is +2, –5 dB11 . Beyond this range, a viewer is likely to become annoyed,
eventually reaching for the remote control to change volume (or worse from the
broadcaster’s point of view, to mute a commercial). Whether measured via the CBS
or BS.1770 algorithms, the CBS loudness controller algorithm in Orban’s current
products effectively controls subjective loudness to much better than this +2, –5 dB
window.
The results using BS.1770 metering would be even more consistent if that algorithm
employed silence gating (such as that used in the Dolby LM100) to prevent unadorned
dialog from reading low compared to music and dialog with substantial
background music or effects. The newer EBU R-128 loudness meter is intended to
correct the “silence gating” problem with BS.1770 but as of this writing, the low
frequency issue has not yet been formally addressed by standards-setting bodies.
9
⎡
Leq(
w)
⎣
i = L,
R,
C,
L , R
0 2
T 2
1
x
x
w
1 w,
i
= ⎢ G T LFE∫
2 dt +
T x ∑ T ∫ 2
ref
0 xref
i
s
s
⎤
dt⎥,
dB
⎦
10 Cabrera, Densil; Dash, Ian; Miranda, Luis, “Multichannel Loudness Listening Test,”
AES Convention Paper 7451, 124 th
AES Convention, Amsterdam 2008
11 ATSC A/85:2009 Annex E, “Loudness Ranges”

3-84
OPERATION ORBAN MODEL 8685
The CBS algorithm does not need silence gating because it is a “short-term” loudness
measurement that incorporates models of the loudness integration time of
human hearing, which the BS.1770 algorithm does not.
Moreover, controlling loudness to a standard such as BS.1770 says nothing about the
subjective acceptability of the loudness controller’s action. Automatic loudness controllers
can produce all of the well known artifacts of dynamics processing, including
noise breathing, spectral inconsistency, gain pumping, and harshness. Improperly designed
multiband compressors can reduce dialog intelligibility 12 . This is why it is important
to carefully assess the audio quality and side effects that an automatic loudness
controller produces so that one can choose a device that controls loudness effectively
without producing objectionable and unnatural artifacts that can fatigue
audiences. All loudness controllers are not created equal even if they produce identical
measurements on a loudness meter.
—Robert Orban, February 2010
12 Stone, Michael A.; Moore, Brian C. J.; Füllgrabe, Christian; Hinton, Andrew C.,
”Multichannel Fast-Acting Dynamic Range Compression Hinders Performance by
Young, Normal-Hearing Listeners in a Two-Talker Separation Task,” J., AES Volume
57 Issue 7/8 pp. 532-546; July 2009

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR MAINTENANCE 4-1
Section 4
Maintenance
Routine Maintenance
The Optimod 8685 Audio Processor uses highly stable digital and analog circuitry
throughout. Recommended routine maintenance is minimal.
1. Periodically check audio level and gain reduction meter readings.
Become familiar with normal audio level meter readings, and with the normal
performance of the G/R metering. If any meter reading is abnormal, see Section 5
for troubleshooting information.
2. Listen to the 8685's output.
A good ear will pick up many faults. Familiarize yourself with the “sound” of the
8685 as you have set it up, and be sensitive to changes or deterioration. However,
if problems arise, please do not jump to the conclusion that the 8685 is at
fault. The troubleshooting information in Section 5 will help you determine if
the problem is with OPTIMOD 8685 or is somewhere else.
3. Periodically check for corrosion.
Particularly in humid or salt-spray environments, check for corrosion at the input
and output connectors and at those places where the 8685 chassis contacts the
rack.
4. Periodically check for loss of grounding.
Check for loss of grounding due to corrosion or loosening of rack mounting
screws.
5. Clean the front panel when it is soiled.
Wash the front panel with a mild household detergent and a damp cloth. Do not
use stronger solvents; they may damage plastic parts, paint, or the silk-screened
lettering. Do not use paper-based cleaning towels or use cleaning agents containing
ammonia, or alcohol. An acceptable cleaning product is “Glass Plus.” For
best results when cleaning the lens, use a clean, lint-free cloth.

4-2
MAINTENANCE ORBAN MODEL 8685
Subassembly Removal and Replacement
See page 6-37 for the Circuit Board Locator and Basic Interconnections diagram.
1. Removing the Top Cover.
To access the main boards, power supply board or display assembly, you must
remove the top cover.
A) Disconnect the 8685 and remove it from the rack.
Be sure power is disconnected before removing the cover.
Hazardous voltage is exposed when the unit is open and the
power is ON.
B) Set the unit upright on a padded surface with the front panel facing you.
C) Remove seventeen thread-forming screws and five machine screws holding
the top cover in place and lift the top cover off.
Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver.
2. Removing the Input/Output Assembly.
This applies to both the base I/O assembly (AES3id I/O only) and to the optional
HD-SDI I/O assembly.
A) Make sure that AC power is disconnected from the 8685.
B) Remove the 14-conductor ribbon cable from the base board at JP600.
C) Remove the two 40-conductor ribbon cables from the DSP board at J602 and
J603.
D) Remove the power cable at J601.
E) Remove the three Phillips screws holding the rear of the Input/Output assembly
to the floor of the chassis.
F) Remove the ten Phillips screws holding the input/output assembly to the rear
panel.
G) Remove the Input/Output assembly.
3. Removing the DSP Board.
A) Make sure that AC power is disconnected from the 8685.
B) If you have not done so yet, remove the top cover (step 1 on page 4-2).
C) Disconnect the ribbon cable from J901 on the DSP board.
D) Disconnect the ribbon cable from J601 on the DSP board.
E) At J602 and J603 on the Input/Output assembly, disconnect the two ribbon
cables soldered to J701 and J702 of the DSP board.

OPTIMOD MAINTENANCE 4-3
F) Disconnect the power cable assembly from J801 of the DSP board.
G) Remove the six Phillips screws holding the DSP board to the bottom of the
chassis.
H) Remove the DSP board.
4. Removing the Front Panel.
To service the headphone amplifier, the color LCD display, the pushbuttons, or
the rotary encoder, it is first necessary to remove the front panel assembly.
A) Make sure that AC power is disconnected from the 8685.
B) Release the catch on J200 on the display interface board and remove the ribbon
cable from J200.
C) Remove the cable assembly that connects through the chassis bulkhead to the
headphone amplifier board.
D) Remove the six Phillips head screws that hold the front panel to the main
chassis.
These are located in two groups of three on the sides of the main chassis,
close to the front panel.
E) Pull the front panel toward you to remove it.
Do not stress the cables connecting the front panel to the main chassis.
To protect the assembly from cosmetic damage, set it down on a soft surface
like foam rubber, a quilt, or a blanket.
5. Removing the Headphone Amplifier Board.
Because they are socketed, you can remove and replace the headphone amplifier
driver chips without further disassembly.
If you need to remove the headphone amplifier circuit board (to access components
other than the headphone amplifier driver chip):
A) Make sure that AC power is disconnected from the 8685.
B) Pull the friction-fit knob off the headphone volume control.
C) Remove three Phillips screws.
This will free the board.
6. Preparing to Remove the Rotary Encoder Board.
The circuit board containing the pushbuttons, joystick, and rotary encoder is
mounted on a metal shield plate. To remove the plate, remove three screws and
lift the plate off at a 45-degree angle, following the axis of the rotary encoder.

4-4
MAINTENANCE ORBAN MODEL 8685
7. Removing the Rotary Encoder Board.
Remove the four screws holding the board to the standoffs and lift the board
from the standoffs.
All of the knobs and buttons are friction-fit and can be removed, if necessary, by
pulling them off their shafts. However, to avoid possibly damaging the rotary
encoder, we advise not removing its knob unless necessary. Instead, to access the
screw partially blocked by the rotary encoder’s knob, use a small screwdriver and
attack the screw head from a slight angle, avoiding the edge of the knob to prevent
cosmetic damage.
The pushbutton switches, joystick, and rotary encoder are all soldered to this
board and can be replaced by normal solder rework techniques.
8. Removing the Color LCD Display and carrier board.
A) Make sure that AC power is disconnected from the 8685.
B) Remove the cable assembly from J14 on the base board.
C) Remove the 33-conductor flat ribbon cable from the display interface board
at J103:
a) Carefully disconnect the cable by rotating the black “wing” at the rear of
the connector 90° from horizontal to vertical.
b) Slide the cable out of the connector.
You may find it easier to first remove the display interface board from
the control module stack.
D) Remove the four screws that hold the display carrier board to the standoffs
on which it is mounted. Then lift the assembly off the standoffs.
9. Removing the Serial Port Connector Board:
A) If you have not done so yet, remove the top cover (step 1, above).
B) Using a 3/16-inch hex nut driver, remove the six hex nuts holding the serial
port connectors to the chassis.
C) Unplug the serial port interface assembly from the base board.
10. Removing the CPU Module.
A) The Display Board and CPU Board are a “sandwich” assembly. The CPU board
is located on top of the Display Board and is plugged into it.
B) Make sure that AC power is disconnected from the 8685.
C) Remove the RJ45 network cable from the control module
D) Remove the four Phillips screws from the control module.
E) Carefully unplug the module by pulling it evenly away from the display interface
board.

OPTIMOD MAINTENANCE 4-5
11. Removing the Display interface Board.
You must first remove the CPU Module before removing the Display Interface
Board.
A) Unscrew the four standoffs that had supported the CPU board before it was
removed.
B) Carefully pull the Display Interface Board evenly away from the Base Board,
being careful not to stress any ribbon cables still connected to it.
C) Unplug any ribbon cables from the Display Interface Board, which now can be
removed completely. Refer to step (8.C)to disconnect the 33-conductor ribbon
cable to J103.
12. Removing the Base Board.
You must have completed steps 9, 10, and 11 first.
A) Make sure that AC power is disconnected from the 8685.
B) Remove the three power ribbon cables from the power supply and dress them
away from the Base Board.
C) Using a 3/16-inch nut driver, remove the two jackscrews and lock washers
holding the DB25 connector to the rear panel.
D) Remove the four Phillips screws and four standoffs holding the Base Board to
the bottom of the chassis.
E) Verify that all connectors have been removed.
F) Remove the Base Board.
13. Removing the Power Supply assembly [needs revision].
To remove the power supply it is necessary to remove the 8685 from the rack and
to remove the top cover. It is most convenient to remove the Power Supply Assembly
if the Base Board, RS-232 Board, CPU Module, and Display Interface Module
have been removed.
A) Be sure that the AC line cord is disconnected from the power supply.
B) Unplug the three ribbon cables from the power supply.
C) Unplug the two cable assemblies from the power transformer by squeezing
the locking tab and removing the connector.
D) Remove the nut securing the green ground wire to the chassis.
E) Remove the two Phillips screws securing the mains input connector to the rear
of the chassis
F) Remove the three Phillips screws at the bottom edge of the power supply
G) Remove the four Phillips screws holding the power supply assembly to the top
apron of the chassis.

4-6
MAINTENANCE ORBAN MODEL 8685
H) Remove the power supply assembly.
14. Replacing the Power Supply Assembly:
A) Hold power supply board into main chassis, so that it aligns with the four
mounting holes on the top apron of the chassis.
B) Replace the four Phillips screws holding the power supply assembly to the top
apron of the chassis, but do not fully tighten them yet.
C) Replace but do not fully tighten the two Phillips screws that hold the IEC connector.
D) Replace and fully tighten the three Phillips screws at the bottom edge of the
power supply
E) Fully tighten the four Phillips screws holding the power supply assembly to
the top apron of the chassis
F) Fully tighten the two Philips that hold the IEC connector.
G) Replace the two cable assemblies from the power transformer.
H) Replace the nut securing the green ground wire to the chassis.
I) Reattach the three ribbon cables to the power supply.
J) Reattach the two cable assemblies from the power transformer.
15. Replacing the I/O Board and DSP board:
Referring to steps 2 and 3, follow the instructions in reverse.
16. Replacing the Base Board.
Referring to step 12, follow the instructions in reverse.
Note that you cannot replace the Serial Port board, Display Interface Board, and
the CPU board until you have replaced the base board.
17. Replacing the Display Interface Board.
Referring to step 11, follow the instructions in reverse.
• To avoid bent pins or other damage, verify that all connector pins are aligned
before applying force.
• Verify that pin one of the ribbon cables (red stripe) is oriented correctly. Pin 1
is indicated by the number “1” or a square pad.
• Note that you cannot replace the CPU board until you have replaced the Base
Board and the display interface board.

OPTIMOD MAINTENANCE 4-7
18. Replacing the CPU Board:
To avoid bent pins or other damage verify that all connector pins are aligned before
applying force.
Referring to step 10, follow the instructions in reverse.
19. Replacing the Serial Port Board:
Referring to step 9, follow the instructions in reverse.
20. Reassembling the Color LCD Display and carrier board.
Referring to step 8, follow the instructions in reverse.
Verify that pin one of the ribbon cables (red stripe) is oriented correctly.
Pin 1 is indicated by the number “1” or a square pad.
21. Replacing the Rotary Encoder Board.
Referring to steps 6 and 7, follow the instructions in reverse.
Verify that pin one of the ribbon cables (red stripe) is oriented correctly.
Pin 1 is indicated by the number “1” or a square pad.
22. Replacing the Headphone Amplifier Board.
Referring to step 5, follow the instructions in reverse.
23. Replacing the Front Panel.
Referring to step 4, follow the instructions in reverse.
24. Check your work.
Referring to the cable wiring diagram on page 6-37, verify that all cables have
been securely reattached.
Verify that all removed hardware has been replaced and is secure.
25. Replace the Top Cover.
Place top on the unit and reattach the seventeen thread-forming screws and five
machine screws.
The 8685 can now be returned to service.

4-8
MAINTENANCE ORBAN MODEL 8685
Field Audit of Performance
Required Equipment:
• Bitstream analyzer that can accept AES3id inputs
Audio Precision System 2
Stanford Research Systems SR1
NTI Digilyzer DL1 or equivalent
• Digital voltmeter (for testing power supply voltages)
• Oscilloscope
Accurate to ±0.1%.
DC-coupled, triggered sweep, with 5MHz or greater vertical bandwidth.
• Two short 75Ω jumper cables terminated by male BNC connectors
• One 75Ω BNC “Tee” connector, male to two females.
• Optional: Distortion analyzer with analog input (for checking the performance
of the analog outputs)
Audio Precision System 2 or equivalent
• Optional: Two 620Ω ±5% resistors (for terminating the analog outputs)
• Optional: HD-SDI test set
Phabrix SxA AES or equivalent
It is assumed that the technician is thoroughly familiar with the operation of this
equipment.
This procedure is useful for detecting and diagnosing problems with the 8685's performance.
It assesses the performance of the digital inputs, digital outputs, and digital-to-analog
converters and verifies that the digital signal processing section (DSP)
is passing signal correctly. If it is doing so, there is a high probability that the DSP is
performing the dynamic signal processing correctly. There is therefore no need to
measure such things as attack and release times—these are defined by software and
will automatically be correct if the DSP is otherwise operating normally.
If you do not have a signal analyzer with a digital input (like the Audio Precision System
2), you may use the 8685’s two analog outputs to drive an analyzer with analog
inputs. However, this will limit the resolution of your measurements.
The procedure uses the 8685’s built-in high-resolution sinewave oscillator to generate
test tones. An external tone generator is not required.
It is often more convenient to make measurements on the bench away from high RF
fields which could affect results. For example, in a high RF field it is very difficult to
accurately measure the very low THD produced by a properly operating 8685 at

OPTIMOD MAINTENANCE 4-9
most frequencies. However, in an emergency it is usually possible to detect many of
the more severe faults that could develop in the 8685 circuitry even in high-RF environments.
See the assembly drawings in Section 6 for component locations. Be sure to turn the
power off before removing or installing circuit boards.
Follow these instructions in order without skipping steps.
Note: To unbalance the analog output, connect pin 1 (ground) to pin 3, and measure
between pin 1 (ground) and pin 2 (hot).
Note: All analog output measurements are taken with a 620Ω ±5% resistor tied between
pin 2 and 3 of the XLR connector.
1. Save your existing System Setup.
To facilitate testing the 8685, we supply several Setups to be recalled as you
work through the testing procedure below. Recalling a Setup will cause you to
lose any unsaved adjustments you have made to the 8685’s setup parameters.
Therefore, to allow you to restore your existing settings later, save them as a System
Setup before you start testing the 8685. (See step 4 on page 2-21 and step
10 on page 2-30.)
2. Test the power supply
A) If the power supply is entirely dead and the fuse is not blown, verify that the
primary winding of the power transformer is intact by measuring the resistance
of the power supply at the IEC AC line connector.
• For 115-volt operation, the resistance should be approximately 7.6Ω.
• For 230-volt operation, the resistance should be approximately 27Ω.
B) The green LED power indicator on the upper right of the front panel display
monitors the DC power supply outputs. If one or more power supply voltages
are out of tolerance, red flashes will report them according to the table below.
If there are multiple values out of tolerance, they are reported one after
another in a continuous loop, with one green flash indicating the beginning
of each count.
Number of Red Flashes Problem With
1 + unregulated supply
2 +15V or –15V
3 +5V or –5V
4 +5V Digital
5 Analog � Digital ground connection broken
6 DSP A +3.3V supply
7 DSP B +3.3V supply
8 CPU +3.3V supply

4-10
MAINTENANCE ORBAN MODEL 8685
Number of Red Flashes Problem With
9 CPU +2.5V supply
Table 4-1: Decoder Chart for Power Supervisor
You can monitor power supply voltages at connector J7 on the power
supply board (see page 6-51 for the parts locator drawing and page 6-52
for the schematic). When one faces the connector, the voltages can be
found on the pins in the following pattern:
(1) + unreg. (3) digital gnd (5) +15V (7) +5 V digital (9) –5V analog
(2) - unreg (4) chassis gnd (6) -15V (8) +5V analog (10) NC
Table 4-2: Layout Diagram of J7, with expected voltages on each pin
C) Measure the regulated voltages at J7 with the DVM and observe the ripple
with an oscilloscope, AC-coupled. The following results are typical:
Power Supply Rail DC Voltage (volts) AC Ripple (mV p-p)
+15VDC +15 ± 0.5

OPTIMOD MAINTENANCE 4-11
Test Procedure for the Base I/O Module
If you have an 8685 with the base I/O module (no HD-SDI), follow steps 4 through 9
below.
4. Test Digital I/O and Sync for Input/Output 1/2 (Lf/Rf).
A) Recall the AUDIT3 Setup. This uses the 2.0 processing chain as a test tone generator
to test the surround channels.
B) Using a 75Ω BNC/BNC jumper cable, the 8685’s OUTPUT 11/12 BNC connector to
its INPUT 1/2 BNC connector and verify that the 1/2 indicator on the 8685’s
front panel turns yellow, indicating that the 8685’s INPUT 1/2 AES3id receiver
has locked to the signal emitted from OUTPUT 11/12.
C) Connect the digital analyzer to the 8685’s OUTPUT1/2 BNC connector and verify
that the THD+N is below –100 dBfs and that the sample rate is 48 kHz, as
locked to the input sample rate.
D) AUDIT3 emits its test signal at a 48 kHz sample rate. To test 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz sample rates, recall AUDIT4, AUDIT5, AUDIT6, and AUDIT7 in
turn. Use the AES3id analyzer to do the following for each sample rate:
a) Measure the THD+N and verify that it is below –100 dBfs (0.001%).
b) Listen to the AES3id analyzer’s decoded analog output and verify that the
output sounds clean and glitch-free.
c) Verify that the frequencies measured at the 8685’s OUTPUT 1/2 follow the
values in the chart below within given tolerances.
Sample Rate Tolerance (PPM) Tolerance ( Hz)
32.0 kHz 100 PPM ±3.20 Hz
44.1 kHz 100 PPM ±4.41 Hz
48.0 kHz 100 PPM ±4.80 Hz
88.2 kHz 100 PPM ±8.82 Hz
96.0 kHz 100 PPM ±9.60 Hz
Table 4-4: Frequency Tolerance for Various Sample Rates
5. Test Digital I/O and Sync for Input/Output 3/4 (C/LFE).
Connect the 8685’s OUTPUT 11/12 BNC connector to its INPUT 3/4 BNC connector,
connect the analyzer to OUTPUT 3/4, and follow the procedure in step 4 by analogy.
Use Setups AUDIT8 through AUDIT12.
6. Test Digital I/O and Sync for Input/Output 5/6 (Ls/Rs).
Connect the 8685’s OUTPUT 11/12 BNC connector to its INPUT 5/6 BNC connector,
connect the analyzer to OUTPUT 5/6, and follow the procedure in step 4 by analogy.
Use Setups AUDIT13 through AUDIT17.

4-12
MAINTENANCE ORBAN MODEL 8685
7. Test Digital I/O and Sync for Input/Output 7/8 (Lb/Rb).
Connect the 8685’s OUTPUT 11/12 BNC connector to its INPUT 7/8 BNC connector,
connect the analyzer to OUTPUT 7/8, and follow the procedure in step 4 by analogy.
Use Setups AUDIT18 through AUDIT22.
8. Test Digital I/O and Sync for Input/Output 9/10 (routed to Lf/Rf).
Connect the 8685’s OUTPUT 11/12 BNC connector to its INPUT 9/10 BNC connector,
connect the analyzer to OUTPUT 9/10, and follow the procedure in step 4 by analogy.
Use Setups AUDIT23 through AUDIT27.
9. Test Digital Output 11/12 and Sync Input.
A) Connect the BNC “Tee” connector to the 8685’s SYNC input.
B) Connect OUTPUT 7/8 to one end of the “Tee” connector.
C) Connect INPUT 9/10 to the other end of the “Tee” connector.
D) Connect the AES3id analyzer to OUTPUT 11/12.
E) Follow the procedure in step 4 by analogy. Use Setups AUDIT28 through
AUDIT32.
F) Skip to step 10 on page 4-12.
10. Test RS-485 (metadata) serial ports.
This test uses the “loopback” technique to allow the 8685 to self-test its RS-485
serial ports.
8685 V 1.0.x.xx
Station Name: undefined
Access Level: 0: all access
Bootup: Sat Jan 01 02:26:37 2000
Ethernet Adapter's MAC Address: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx
Memory Total: 16121856
Memory Available: 6598384
Available Space: 8504 Kbytes
Dialnorm value=00
485 loopback ok
Table 4-5: Sample screenshot showing a successful test
A) Disconnect AC power from the 8685.
B) By using jumpers or constructing an appropriate cable, connect the input and
output RS-485 serial connectors as follows:
a) Connect pin 2 of connector J2 (RS-485 METADATA INPUT) to pin 2 of J1 (RS-
485 METADATA OUTPUT).
b) Connect pin 7 of J2 to pin 7 of J1.
C) Re-power the 8685.

OPTIMOD MAINTENANCE 4-13
D) LOCATE to diagnostic screen 3 at the unit or, after connecting via PC Remote,
open the PC diagnostic dialog box. Verify that the last line reads “485 loopback
ok.”
• If the loopback fails, no text will be displayed—there is no “error message.”
• The line above the loopback shows the current Dialnorm value received.
Valid values are 11-31. 00 indicates that no Dialnorm is being received.
11. Optional tests.
A) GPI (Remote Interface) inputs: You can test each GPI input for functionality in
the obvious way, by programming a function for it and then verifying that
the function executes when you activate the input. To connect to the GPI inputs,
see step 5 on page 2-3. To program a GPI input, see Remote Control Interface
Programming on page 2-54.
B) Tally outputs:
a) Connect them according to step 6 on page 2-3.
b) Program them for each of the conditions listed in step (22.B) on page 2-38
and verify that they respond accordingly. AESxx input errors can be tested
most simply by disconnecting the AES3id signal from the input
programmed to trigger the tally.
This test also verifies the 8685’s Silence Sense functionality (see step 21 on
page 2-37).
C) RS-232 Port: You can test the RS-232 for functionality by verifying that you
can connect to a PC through a null modem cable. See Networking and Remote
Control on page 2-56 (in particular, step 2 on page 2-57).
12. Test Digital I/O and Sync for Input/Output 1/2 (Lf/Rf).
A) Recall the AUDIT33 Setup. This uses the 2.0 processing chain as a test tone generator
to test the surround channels.
B) Using a 75Ω BNC/BNC jumper cable, the 8685’s OUTPUT 5/6 BNC connector to
its INPUT 1/2 BNC connector and verify that the 1/2 indicator on the 8685’s
front panel turns yellow, indicating that the 8685’s INPUT 1/2 AES3id receiver
has locked to the signal emitted from OUTPUT 11/12.
C) Connect the digital analyzer to the 8685’s OUTPUT1/2 BNC connector and verify
that the THD+N is below –100 dBfs and that the sample rate is 48 kHz, as
locked to the input sample rate.
D) AUDIT33 emits its test signal at a 48 kHz sample rate. To test 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz sample rates, recall AUDIT34, AUDIT35, AUDIT36, and
AUDIT37 in turn. Use the AES3id analyzer to do the following for each sample
rate:
a) Measure the THD+N and verify that it is below –100 dBfs (0.001%).
b) Listen to the AES3id analyzer’s decoded analog output and verify that the
output sounds clean and glitch-free.

4-14
MAINTENANCE ORBAN MODEL 8685
c) Verify that the frequencies measured at the 8685’s OUTPUT 1/2 follow the
values Table 4-4 on page 4-11 within the given tolerances.
13. Test Digital I/O and Sync for Input/Output 3/4 (C/LFE).
Connect the 8685’s OUTPUT 1/2 BNC connector to its INPUT 3/4 BNC connector,
connect the analyzer to OUTPUT 3/4, and follow the procedure in step 4 by analogy.
Use Setups AUDIT38 through AUDIT42.
14. Test Digital I/O and Sync for Input/Output 5/6 (Ls/Rs).
Connect the 8685’s OUTPUT 1/2 BNC connector to its INPUT 5/6 BNC connector,
connect the analyzer to OUTPUT 5/6, and follow the procedure in step 4 by analogy.
Use Setups AUDIT43 through AUDIT47.
15. Test the Sync Input.
A) Connect the BNC “Tee” connector to the 8685’s SYNC input.
B) Connect OUTPUT 1/2 to one end of the “Tee” connector.
C) Connect INPUT 5/6 to the other end of the “Tee” connector.
D) Connect the AES3id analyzer to OUTPUT 5/6 (where it should be already).
E) Follow the procedure in step 4 by analogy. Use Setups AUDIT48 through
AUDIT52.
F) Skip to step 17.
The following steps test the optional HD-SDI module, which has three AES3id inputs
and outputs in addition to an AES3id/AES11id/Wordclock sync input.
16. Test the optional SDI/HD-SDI I/O module
Detailed instructions on testing the optional HD-SDI I/O are beyond the scope of
this edition of the manual but may be added in the future. An outline of the appropriate
tests is as follows:
A) Use a test set like the recommended Phabrix to verify that the 8685 can pass a
SMPTE-compliant SDI/HD-SDI signal from its input to output at 480i, 480p,
720p, 1080i, and 1080p at frames rates of 24, 25, and 30 frames/second and
24*(1000/1001) and 30*(1000/1001) (pull-down) frames/second.
B) Verify that the rise time, fall time, and jitter appearing at the 8685’s SDI output
meets the following SMPTE specifications. Be sure to use cable with 75
ohm coax and connectors; 50 ohm cable/connectors will degrade the performance.

OPTIMOD MAINTENANCE 4-15
SMPTE Rise Time Fall Time (tf) Difference Jitter
Jitter
standard (tr)
(tr/tf)
(Alignment) Timing)
259M-2008 400ps (min) 1500ps (max) 500ps (max) 0.2UI (max) 0.2UI (max)
292-2008 270ps (max) 270ps (max) 100ps (max) 0.2UI (max) 1UI(max)
424M-2006 135ps (max) 135ps (max) 50ps (max)) 0.3UI (max) 2UI (max)
Table 4-6: SDI Timing & Jitter Specifications
C) At each combination of frame rates and resolutions, verify that the AES 1/2
output’s sample rate can be locked to the SDI input signal. Note that only 32,
44.1, and 48 kHz are supported for the pull-down frame rates, while 32, 44.1,
48, 88.2, and 96 kHz are supported for the integer frame rates.
D) Apply a SMPTE 274M-compliant reference signal to the video reference input
and verify that the sample rate at AES output 1/2 can be locked to this reference.
Do the same with a SMPTE 296M-compliant video reference input.
E) At each combination of frame rates and resolutions, verify that the 8685 can
delay the video signal without corruption with the maximum 15-frame delay
available in the setting of the 8685’s VIDEO DELAY control.
F) If the optional Dolby-E decoder module is fitted, verify that a valid Dolby-E
signal applied to the 8685’s AES Input 1/2 can be decoded and routed to the
8685’s AES Output 1/2. Verify the same thing when the Dolby-E signal is received
from the SDI audio stream 1/2.
G) If the optional Dolby-E encoder module is fitted, verify that a multichannel
signal applied to the 8685’s AES3id inputs 1/2, 3/4, and 5/6 can be encoded
and routed to AES3id output 1/2.
17. Return OPTIMOD 8685 to service.
A) Remove the 620Ω resistors connected across the outputs.
B) Restore your normal operating parameters by recalling the Setup you saved in
step 1 on page 4-9: LOCATE to RECALL/IMPORT>RECALL SETUP. Highlight the
Setup using the knob or joymouse. Then press ENTER.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TROUBLESHOOTING 5-1
Section 5
Troubleshooting
Problems and Potential Solutions
Always verify that the problem is not the source material being fed to the 8685, or
in other parts of the system.
Refer to Section 3 for discussions of the controls referred to below.
Loudness incorrect compared to other Dolby Digital Transmissions
• Review Setting Preset Loudness Correctly for Dolby Digital Transmission on page
3-19.
• Be sure that a full bandwidth signal has not been applied accidentally to the LFE
input of the processing. If this has occurred, the 8685’s Loudness Level meter and
Loudness Controller will not operate correctly.
• Be sure that the active DIALNORM setting in the 8685 is the same as the DIALNORM
setting you are transmitting to consumers. Use a device like the Dolby LM100
Loudness Meter to read out the Dialnorm you are transmitting to your audience
(or simply check the Dialnorm setting of your Dolby Digital encoder). See step 10
on page 2-14.
• Be sure that the 8685’s input reference level is set to produce normal amounts of
gain reduction. See step 7 on page 11.
Note that if you are using a “radio-style” preset, loudness control will be
looser than if you use a TVxxxx preset because the TVxxxx presets have
the 8685’s CBS Loudness Controller turned on, which ensures tightest
loudness control. Any radio-style preset can be edited to activate the
Loudness Controller.
The 8685’s LFE processing does not apply any band limiting and operates
under the assumption that (1) the input signal has been previously filtered
to 120 Hz or lower, and (2) the LFE channel will receive a 10 dB
gain boost when reproduced by the consumer’s receiver.
• If the loudness controller is on, be sure that the LOUDNESS THRESHOLD control is
set to –10 dB.
This matches the loudness controller’s threshold to the 8685’s active
DIALNORM value.

5-2
TROUBLESHOOTING ORBAN MODEL 8685
• Once DIALNORM is correct, be sure that your active preset is causing the 8685’s
LOUDNESS GAIN REDUCTION meter to indicate approximately 3 dB of gain reduction
on normal dialog. Adjust its MB LIMIT DRIVE control if it does not. When the loudness
controller is operating normally, the 8685’s LOUDNESS LEVEL meter should be
peaking around 0 dB on dialog. If it is not and you are using a custom preset,
you might get better loudness control by slightly tweaking the LOUDNESS
THRESHOLD control to make the LOUDNESS LEVEL meter peak around 0, bearing in
mind that the correct setting is –10 dB for typical sound-for-picture processing. A
maximum variation of ±1 dB will typically suffice.
If the 8685’s active DIALNORM setting is not the same as the DIALNORM setting
you are transmitting to your audience, the 8685’s Loudness Level
meter will be calibrated incorrectly, so even if the meter is peaking at 0
dB, loudness at the consumer’s receiver will not be correct.
Note that because the 8685’s Loudness Level meter shares the loudness
controller’s filterbank, the meter does not show the effect of the
LOUDNESS ATTACK control, which shapes the loudness controller’s gain reduction
signal outside the loudness controller’s feedback loop. Therefore,
if you are using values of LOUDNESS ATTACK below about 50%, the loudness
of transient events may be significantly higher than the Loudness
Level meter indicates.
Loudness Controller reduces transient punch of programming
• Reduce the amount of fast gain reduction in the loudness controller by setting
the LOUDNESS ATTACK control closer to 0 %. This will allow more short loudness
peaks to pass through without attenuation by the loudness controller. We believe
that the range from 50% to 70% offers the most useful tradeoffs between
reducing punch and allowing irritating short-term loudness bursts to pass
through uncontrolled.
Transient loudness events (like esses in speech) sound obtrusively loud
• Set the LOUDNESS ATTACK control closer to 100%. This will allow the loudness
controller to do more de-essing but may decrease transient impact as a side effect.
• Set the TRANSIENT ENHANCE control to 0 ms.
• If “ess” sounds in speech (particularly with women’s voices) seem too pronounced,
one solution is to use the five-band structure and tune it for de-essing
(which we have done already in the TVxxx preets). Set the SPEECH B5 THRESHOLD
control (for 2.0 processing) or CENTER B5 THRESHOLD control more negative. For
surround processing, make sure that the B5 MAIN>CENTER MAX +DELTA GR is set to
10 dB or more. This will allow the center band 5 compressor to produce as much
extra gain reduction as needed to control “esses.”
Commercials too loud in sound for picture applications
• Make sure that the Loudness Controller is activated on the preset that you are
using—the LOUDNESS CONTROLLER THRESH control must not be set OFF (see page
3-52) and is normally set to –10 dB.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TROUBLESHOOTING 5-3
• If the Loudness Controller is active but, based on its gain reduction meter, you do
not believe it is working hard enough, set its threshold lower using the LOUDNESS
CONTROLLER THRESH control.
Note that the Loudness Controller controls subjective loudness to an absolute
threshold and does not understand the context of the program.
Therefore, if a commercial follows a piece of very quiet program material,
the commercial may still seem loud even though the Loudness Controller
is working properly.
See Loudness Control on page 3-14.
LFE channel is unbalanced with respect to the rest of the audio spectrum
• Adjust the LFE COMPRESSION THRESHOLD control.
• Adjust the B1>LFE COUPLING control.
• Adjust the LC BASS COUPLING control.
Dialog is buried by music and/or effects
• In the surround processing, set the BX MAIN>CENTER MAX –DELTA GR controls to a
higher value. This will allow the center channel compressor to have more gain
with respect to the other channels.
Dialog is muffled
• Use the five-band structure and set the B3>B4 COUPLING and B4>B5 COUPLING
controls to a higher value. This will allow the processing to apply more dynamic
high frequency boost. In the surround processing, adjust these controls in the
center channel compressor.
• Set the B4 COMPRESSOR THRESHOLD control to a higher value (i.e., closer to 0 dB).
This will produce less gain reduction in the presence region.
• Try using the 8685’s HF Enhancer. To do so, LOCATE to the EQUALIZER screen and
set the HF ENHANCE control to taste. For most TV programming, very low settings
(like 0.25) are appropriate because they minimize the possibility of increasing
noise.
Shrill, harsh sound
• This problem can be caused by excessive HF boost in the HF Equalizer and HF Enhancer.
It could also be caused by an excessively high setting of the band 4 or
band 5 compression threshold control (if you are using the Five-Band Structure),
or by excessively high settings of the BAND 4 MIX and BAND 5 MIX controls (located
in Full and Advanced Modify).
Dull sound
• If you are using the Two-Band structure, dull-sounding source material will
sound dull on the air. The Five-Band Structure will automatically re-equalize such
dull-sounding program material to make its spectral balance more consistent
with other program material.

5-4
TROUBLESHOOTING ORBAN MODEL 8685
• Particularly if you are using the Two-Band structure, try using the 8685’s HF Enhancer.
See Dialog is muffled above.
Too much bass when the loudness controller is producing large amounts of GR
• The loudness controller is producing too little gain reduction in the below-200
Hz band. Set the LOUDNESS BASS COUPLE control closer to 0 dB. See Loudness
Control on page 3-14.
RFI, hum, clicks, or buzzes
• For good RFI resistance, always use balanced analog outputs and be sure that the
cables connected to the digital inputs and outputs are well shielded.
The 8685 has been designed with very substantial RFI suppression on its
analog and digital input and output ports, and on the AC line input. It
will usually operate adjacent to high-powered transmitters without difficulty.
In the most unusual circumstances, it may be necessary to reposition
the unit to reduce RF interference, and/or to reposition its input and
output cables to reduce RF pickup on their shields.
The AES3id inputs and output are transformer-coupled and have very
good resistance to RFI.
Unexpected gain pumping when processing 5.1 material
• Make sure that the Lb and Rb channels are not accidentally receiving a signal.
The feed to the Lb and Rb channels must be turned off. See step 15 on page 2-
35.
Poor peak modulation control
• The 8685 typically controls peak modulation to an accuracy of ±2% when operated
with 48 kHz output sample rate. As explained in Section 1, output sample
rate conversion will slightly compromise this control because the peak control
occurs with reference to individual sample values at 48 kHz. The converted samples
no longer have the same peak values as the 48 kHz samples; some values can
be slightly higher. However, the overshoot of the converted signal almost never
exceeds 0.5dB and is therefore not a significant problem.
• Using the analog output will cause similar amounts of overshoot because the
peaks in the reconstructed analog waveform are not necessarily synchronous
with the peak-controlled samples in the 8685. Moreover, analog connections can
cause analog-domain overshoot if the connection is not phase-linear and does
not have a –3dB low-frequency cutoff below 0.15Hz.
Audible distortion
• Make sure that the problem can be observed on more than one monitoring system.
• Verify that the source material at the 8685's audio inputs is clean. Heavy processing
can exaggerate even slightly distorted material, pushing it over the edge into
unacceptability.
• The subjective adjustments available to the user have the potential to cause distortion
when too much fast gain reduction occurs in the multiband compressors

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TROUBLESHOOTING 5-5
and/or look-ahead peak limiters. Watch the gain reduction meters and do not let
them go to full scale. You can turn down the gain reduction in the multiband
compressors via the MB DRIVE (five-band) and 2-BAND DRIVE (two-band) controls.
The normal gain reduction in the look-ahead limiters should not exceed 6 dB.
Advancing the MB LIMIT DRIVE control too far will cause distortion by creating
large amounts of gain reduction in the look-ahead limiters. Setting DIALNORM to
high levels will do the same thing. We do not recommend using DIALNORM values
higher (i.e., closer to 0) than –18 dBfs unless you are specifically trying to make
“loud” masters in mastering applications. (We strongly discourage that because
decades of broadcast experience has shown that over-processing audio cause
subliminal listening fatigue and audience tune-outs.) DIALNORM values of –25 dB
and below are preferred because these will cause very little gain reduction in the
look-ahead limiters.
• If you are using an external processor ahead of the 8685, be sure it is not clipping
or otherwise causing problems.
Audible noise
(See also “RFI, Hums, Clicks, or Buzzes” on page 5-1.)
• Excessive compression will always exaggerate noise in the source material. The
8685 has two systems that fight this problem. The silence gates freeze the gain
of the AGC and compressor systems whenever the input noise drops below a
level set by the threshold control for the processing section in question, preventing
noise below this level from being further increased.
• There are two independent silence gates in each processing channel of the 8685.
The first affects the AGC and the second affects the Multiband Compressor. Each
has its own threshold control. (See MB GATE on page 3-57.)
• In sound for picture, the setting of the GATE THRESHOLD control is quite critical if
you want the processing to be undetectable to the audience. If this control is set
too low, then the 8685 will pump up quiet sounds like ambiance and underscoring
to unnaturally high levels. Refer to Section 3 of this manual for a further discussion.
• In the Five-Band Structure, dynamic single-ended noise reduction (see DWNEXP
THR on page 3-59) can be used to reduce the level of the noise below the level at
which it appears at the input.
The 8685's AES3id inputs are capable of receiving words of up to 24 bits.
A 24-bit word has a dynamic range of approximately 144 dB. The 8685's
digital input will thus never limit the unit's noise performance even with
very high amounts of compression.
• See Routing Audio to and from the 8685 starting on page 1-12 for a discussion of
pitfalls that can compromise audio quality.

5-6
TROUBLESHOOTING ORBAN MODEL 8685
System will not pass line-up tones at 100% modulation
• This is normal. Sine waves have a very low peak-to-average ratio by comparison
to program material. The processing thus automatically reduces their peak level
to bring their average level closer to program material, promoting a more consistent
and well-balanced sound quality.
• The 8685 can generate test tones itself. The 8685 can also be put into Bypass
mode (locally or by remote control) to enable it to pass externally generated
tones at any desired level. (See Test Modes on page 3-64.)
System will not pass Emergency Alert System (“EAS” USA Standard) tones at the
legally required modulation level
• See System Will Not Pass Line-Up Tones at 100% Modulation (directly above) for
an explanation. These tones should be injected into the transmitter after the
8685, or the 8685 should be temporarily switched to a PASS-THROUGH preset to
pass the tones.
System Receiving 8685’s digital output will not lock
• Be sure that the sample rate at the 8685’s output is set to match the sample rate
that the driven system expects. (Use the SURROUND OUTPUT RATE or 2.0 OUTPUT
RATE control as appropriate.)
• Be sure that the 8685’s output mode (AES3 or SPDIF) in the active Setup is set to
match the standard expected by the driven system.
• In synchronous systems like TV facilities, be sure that you have set up the 8685’s
digital outputs to lock to your desired reference, which can be an AES3id signal
applied 8685 digital input 1/2 or a word clock reference applied to the 8685’s
Sync input. If the optional HD-SDI module is installed, the 8685 will also sync to a
signal applied to the video reference input or the HD-SDI input. See step (9.B) on
page 2-27 for 2.0 outputs and step (12.B) on page 2-33 for surround outputs.
System will not lock to video sync at 88.2 or 96 kHz
• Synchronization of 88.2 or 96 kHz audio sample rates from the video reference
input only works for integer fame rates, not pull-down frame rates.
AES Channel Status Bits will not set the 8685’s 2.0 processing to Stereo or Dual-
Mono mode.
• Be sure that the equipment driving the 8685 is set in AES3 or AES/EBU mode.
(SPDIF will not work.) Similarly, you must set the 8685’s digital output mode (via
the SURROUND OUTPUT FORMAT or 2.O OUTPUT FORMAT control) to AES in order to
send AES channel status bits to downstream equipment. (See step 13 on page 2-
18.)
Equipment receiving the 8685’s 2.0 Processing output changes operation mode unexpectedly.
• Some equipment will respond incorrectly to AES Channel status bits:. Try turning
these off in the 8685. (See step 13 on page 2-18.)

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TROUBLESHOOTING 5-7
General dissatisfaction with subjective sound quality
• The 8685 is a complex processor that can be adjusted for many different tastes.
For most users, the factory presets, as augmented by the gamut offered by the
LESS-MORE control for each preset, are sufficient to find a satisfactory “sound.”
However, some users will not be satisfied until they have accessed other Modify
Processing controls and have adjusted the subjective setup controls in detail to
their satisfaction. Such users must fully understand the material in Section 3 of
this manual to achieve the best results from this exercise.
• Section 1 of this manual provides a thorough discussion of system engineering
considerations, particularly with regard to minimizing overshoot and noise.
Security passcode lost (when unit is locked out)
• Please see If you have forgotten your “All Access” passcode…on page 2-44.
Connection Issues between the 8685 and a PC, Modem, or Network
• User Interface Slowdown: The more user presets you make, the more slowly
the 8685 will respond to front-panel commands. Delete any user presets you do
not need.
• Software Updates: Close any running Windows programs before attempting
to update.
• Interrupted Software Updates: If you canceled an update before it completed,
wait at least one minute before attempting your next update.
• Software Updates via Modem: If you are updating via the modem, do not
change the “connection type” parameter on the 8685 while the modem is connected
or attempting to connect.
• Security Passcode: An ALL ACCESS (administrator) security passcode is required
for upgrading, regardless of whether you are using a Direct, Modem, or
Ethernet connection.
• Passcode Format: The passcode is case-sensitive. When entering it into Windows’
Dial-up Connection dialog box, it must be typed exactly as it was originally
entered into the Security screen.
Troubleshooting Connections
• If you get an error message such as “the specified port is not connected” or
“There is no answer”…

5-8
TROUBLESHOOTING ORBAN MODEL 8685
A) You may have the wrong interface type set on your 8685. LOCATE to SETUP >
NETWORK & REMOTE > NETWORK > SERIAL INTERFACE TYPE and check the interface
setting. See Connecting to the 8685’s Ethernet Port or RS-232 Port Using
TCP/IP on page 2-52.
B) If you are connecting via Direct Serial Connection or modem, review the
Properties you have set on that connection. Double-check to ensure that you
have set Windows parameters as described in Appendix: Setting Up Serial
Communications on page 2- 67.
• If your Direct Connect does not work:
A) Check to make sure that the cables are connected properly.
B) Check that you are using a null modem cable.
C) Ensure that the null modem cable is connected to the 8685’s serial connector.
• If your Modem Connect does not work:
A) Ensure that the modem cables and phone lines are connected properly.
B) Check that you have entered the correct phone number for connection.
C) Check that you have entered the passcode correctly on the 8685 and the passcode
has been entered correctly on your PC.
D) Ensure that you enabled the correct PC modem port settings.
E) Ensure that the external modem attached to your 8685 is set to AUTO ANSWER.
F) Make sure that the only “Allowed Network Protocol” is TCP/IP. “NetBUI” and
“IPX > SPX Compatible” must not be checked.
• If you cannot connect to your computer through a crossover Ethernet cable:
You must set your Windows networking to provide a static IP address for
your computer because your Optimod does not contain a DHCP server.
You Cannot Access the Internet After
Making a Direct or Modem Connection to the 8685:
If you are connected to the 8685 via modem or direct connect, you cannot access
any other TCP/IP connection. The PPP connection becomes the default protocol
and the default gateway defaults to the 8685 unit’s IP address. This means that
all existing network connections point to the 8685 unit. To correct this:
A) In Start > Settings > Network and Dialup Connections, open the direct or modem
connection you are using to connect to 8685.
B) Select “Properties.”
C) Click the tab that reads “Networking.”
D) Highlight “Internet protocol (TCP/IP).”
E) Select “Properties.”

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TROUBLESHOOTING 5-9
F) Select “Advanced.”
G) Uncheck the “Use default gateway on remote network” box.
H) Select “OK.”
If this “Use default gateway on remote network” box is not selected, the
gateway will not point to the 8685 unit when you establish a direct or
modem connection.
OS-Specific Troubleshooting Advice
Troubleshooting Windows XP Direct Connect:
If you are having trouble establishing a connection, check your New Connection’s
properties to make sure they are set up correctly:
A) Click “Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > Network Connections”
to bring up the Network Connections screen.
B) In the “Network Connections” window, right-click “Optimod 8685 - Direct”
and choose “Properties.”
C) The “Properties” window opens for “Optimod 8685 - Direct.”
D) Click the “Networking” tab.
E) Set “Type of dial-up server I am calling” to “PPP: Windows 95/98/NT4/2000,
Internet”
F) Select the “Settings” button and make sure all PPP settings are unchecked,
then click “OK.”
G) In “This connection uses the following items,” uncheck all except for “Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP).” You can also leave “QoS Packet Scheduler” checked if you
like.
H) In “This connection uses the following items,” select “Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP)” and then click the “Properties” button. The “Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) Properties” window opens.
I) Choose “Obtain an IP address automatically” and “Obtain DNS server address
automatically”
J) Click the “Advanced…” button on the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” Window.
K) In the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” select the “General” Tab; make sure that
no check boxes are checked.
L) Click “OK” to dismiss the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” window.
M) On the “Properties” window for “Optimod 8685 – Modem” click the “Advanced”
tab.
N) Click “OK” to dismiss the window whose name is your new connection.

5-10
TROUBLESHOOTING ORBAN MODEL 8685
O) Click “Cancel” to dismiss the “Connect [nnnn]” dialog box
P) Restart your computer.
This resets the serial port and reduces the likelihood that you will encounter
problems connecting to the 8685.
Troubleshooting Windows XP Modem Connect:
If you are having trouble establishing a connection, check your New Connection’s
properties to make sure they are set up correctly.
A) Click “Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > Network Connections”
to bring up the Network Connections screen.
B) In the “Network Connections” window, right-click “Optimod 8685 - Modem”
and choose “Properties.”
The “Properties” window opens for “Optimod 8685 - Modem.”
C) Click the “Networking” tab.
D) Set “Type of dial-up server I am calling” to “PPP: Windows 95/98/NT4/2000,
Internet”
E) Select the “Settings” button. Make sure all PPP settings are unchecked and
then click “OK.”
F) In “This connection uses the following items,” uncheck all except for “Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP).” You can also leave “QoS Packet Scheduler” checked if you
like.
G) In “This connection uses the following items,” select “Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP)” and then click the “Properties” button.
The “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window opens.
H) Choose “Obtain an IP address automatically” and “Obtain DNS server address
automatically.”
I) Click the “Advanced…” button on the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” Window.
J) In the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings,” select the “General” Tab; make sure that
no check boxes are checked.
K) Click “OK” to dismiss the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” window.
L) Click “OK” to dismiss the window whose name is your new connection.
Restart your computer. (This resets the serial port and reduces the likelihood that
you will encounter problems connecting to the 8685.)
Technical Support
If you require technical support, contact Orban customer service. Be prepared to describe
the problem accurately. Know the serial number of your 8685 ⎯ this is located

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TROUBLESHOOTING 5-11
on the rear panel of the unit. Current contact information is found at
http://www.orban.com/contact/.
Please check Orban’s website, www.orban.com, for Frequently Asked Questions and
other technical tips about 8685 that we may post from time to time. Manuals (in
.pdf form) and 8685 software upgrades will be posted there too—click “Downloads”
from the home page.
Factory Service
Before you return a product to the factory for service, we recommend that you refer
to this manual. Make sure you have correctly followed installation steps and operation
procedures. If you are still unable to solve a problem, contact our Customer Service
for consultation. Often, a problem is relatively simple and can be quickly fixed
after telephone consultation.
If you must return a product for factory service, please notify Customer Service by
telephone, before you ship the product; this helps us to be prepared to service your
unit upon arrival. Also, when you return a product to the factory for service, we recommend
you include a letter describing the problem.
Please refer to the terms of your Limited One-Year Standard Warranty, which extends
to the first end user. After expiration of the warranty, a reasonable charge will
be made for parts, labor, and packing if you choose to use the factory service facility.
Returned units will be returned C.O.D. if the unit is not under warranty. Orban will
pay return shipping if the unit is still under warranty. In all cases, the customer pays
transportation charges to the factory (which are usually quite nominal).
Shipping Instructions
Use the original packing material if it is available. If it is not, use a sturdy, doublewalled
carton no smaller than 7″ (H) x 15.5″ (D) x 22″ (W) ⎯ 18 cm (H) x 40 cm (D) x
56 cm (W), with a minimum bursting test rating of 200 pounds (91 kg). Place the
chassis in a plastic bag (or wrap it in plastic) to protect the finish, then pack it in the
carton with at least 1.5 inches (4 cm) of cushioning on all sides of the unit. “Bubble”
packing sheets, thick fiber blankets, and the like are acceptable cushioning materials;
foam “popcorn” and crumpled newspaper are not. Wrap cushioning materials
tightly around the unit and tape them in place to prevent the unit from shifting out
of its packing.
Close the carton without sealing it and shake it vigorously. If you can hear or feel
the unit move, use more packing. Seal the carton with 3-inch (8 cm) reinforced fiberglass
or polyester sealing tape, top and bottom in an “H” pattern. Narrower or
parcel-post type tapes will not withstand the stresses applied to commercial shipments.
Mark the package with the name of the shipper, and with these words in red:

5-12
TROUBLESHOOTING ORBAN MODEL 8685
DELICATE INSTRUMENT, FRAGILE!
Insure the package properly. Ship prepaid, not collect. Do not ship parcel post. Your
Return Authorization Number must be shown on the label, or the package will
not be accepted.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-1
Section 6
Specifications
Technical Data
It is impossible to characterize the listening quality of even the simplest limiter or
compressor based on specifications, because such specifications cannot adequately
describe the crucial dynamic processes that occur under program conditions. Therefore,
the only way to evaluate the sound of an audio processor meaningfully is by
subjective listening tests.
Certain specifications are presented here to assure the engineer that they are reasonable,
to help plan the installation, and make certain comparisons with other
processing equipment.
Performance
Frequency Response (Bypass Mode): Surround Processing: ±0.10 dB, 20 Hz–20 kHz for
44.1 kHz or higher input/output sample rates. At 32 kHz input and/or output sample rate,
the passband is reduced to approximately 14.7 kHz.
Noise: Output noise floor will depend upon how much gain the processor is set for (Limit
Drive, AGC Drive, Two-Band Drive, and/or Multiband Drive), gating level, equalization,
noise reduction, etc. The dynamic range of the A/D Converter, which has a specified
overload-to–noise ratio of 110 dB, primarily governs it. The dynamic range of the digital
signal processing is 144 dB.
Polarity (Bypass Mode; Operate Mode when processing chain is configured for linear
phase): Absolute polarity maintained. Positive-going signal on input will result in positivegoing
signal on output.
Internal Processing Sample Rate: 48 kHz. We believe this provides maximum audible
transparency by minimizing numerical “noise” in the equalizers and filters while still preserving
a pure, transparent sound. The double-precision equalizers and crossover filters
used throughout the 8685 produce at least 6 dB lower noise and nonlinear distortion
than they would at 96 kHz.
Processing Resolution: Internal processing has 24 bit (fixed point) or higher resolution;
uses 12 Freescale (formerly Motorola) 150 MHz DSP56367 DSP chips.

6-2
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
Delay: The minimum available input/output delay is approximately 20 ms with look-ahead
limiting active and 6 ms with look-ahead limiting bypassed. This can be padded to exactly
one or two frames of 24, 25, 29.97, 30, 50, 59.94, or 60 frames/second video up to
a maximum delay of 60 ms. (Two frames are required for 59.94/60 fps progressively
scanned video.) The optional HD-SDI I/O module provides video delay of up to 11
frames to compensate for the delay of the 8685’s loudness processing (approximately
one frame), optinal Penteo® upmixer (approximately seven frames) and optional Dolby-
E® decoder and encoders (one frame apiece).
Surround Processing Stereo Coupling: All channels of the AGC and compressors are
coupled using r.m.s. summation. The user can select whether or not the LFE channel
contributes to the r.m.s. sum in the AGC and compressor control sidechains. Peak limiters
in the multiband compressor limiter and look-ahead limiters all operate uncoupled to
prevent transients in a given channel from causing audible loudness modulation in other
channels. In additional, the compressors acting on the center channel can be uncoupled
from the remaining channels within a user-selectable window, allowing the processing to
correct the balance between dialog and remaining program elements automatically.
2.0 Processing Stereo Coupling: Stereo or dual-mono. In dual-mono mode, both processing
channels have the same subjective adjustments (as determined by the active preset)
but are otherwise independent, making this mode appropriate for dual-language transmissions.
In stereo mode, the user can set the maximum permitted gain difference between
the channels in each band of the multiband compressor/limiter. 2.0 Stereo/Dual-
Mono operating mode can be set via GPI, Ethernet and serial connections, internal
clock-based automation, and AES3 Status Bits.
Loudness Level Meter (x2): One meter for the surround processing and one meter that
can be switched to indicate the output loudness of any of the four 2.0 processing channels,
both meters realized in software. There are two meters that operate simultaneously:
one meter displays loudness using the EBU R-128 algorithm (which is based on
ITU-R BS.1770 algorithm, but with silence gating). The other meter uses the Jones &
Troick algorithm developed at CBS Technology Center in 1981. The two meters can be
displayed on the 8685’s front-panel screen and on its PC Remote software.
Installation
In ITU terminology, the Jones & Torick meter measures “short-term” loudness. Its display
time constants are matched to the loudness integration time of the human ear,
reaching steady-state level in approximately 200 ms and having a decay time constant
of approximately 300 ms. (B. L. Jones & E. L. Torick: “A New Loudness Indicator for Use
in Broadcasting,” J. SMPTE, September 1981, pp 772-777.)
Base Configuration: Digital Audio Inputs (x5)
Configuration: Each of five hardware inputs accepts two audio channels per AES3id standard,
24 bit resolution. Internal programmable routing switcher allows any of the 10
physical input channels to be routed to the LF, RF, C, LB1, RB1, LFE, LB2, RB2,
STEREO L, or STEREO R inputs of the audio processing. For the 2.0 processing, unit
can detect Stereo or Two-Channel status bits appearing at Input #1 and switch the 2.0
processor between stereo and dual-mono modes.
User Bits: Unit can pass AES3id User Bits from Input #1 to Output #1.
Sampling Rate: 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2, or 96 kHz, automatically selected.
Connector: BNC, female, shell bypassed to chassis via 1000 pF capacitor, EMIsuppressed.
75Ω impedance, terminated.
Input Reference Level: Variable from –30 dBfs to –10 dBfs.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-3
Filtering: RFI filtered.
Base Configuration: Digital Audio Outputs (x6)
Configuration: AESid. Internal, remote-controllable routing switcher allows sending LF, RF,
C, LB1, RB1, LFE, LB2, RB2, STEREO L, STEREO R, DOWNMIX L, and DOWNMIX R
to any hardware output channel.
Sample Rate: Internal free running at 32, 44.1, 48, 88.1 or 96 kHz, selected in software.
Can also be synced to the AES3id Input #1,or to the sync input (which supports AES11id
and wordclock) at 32, 44.1, 48, 88.1 or 96 kHz, as configured in software. (Passband is
limited to approximately 14.7 kHz when using 32 kHz input and/or output sample rate.)
Word Length: Software selected for 24, 20, 18, or 16-bit resolution. First-order highpass
noise-shaped dither can be optionally added, Dither level is automatically adjusted to
complement the word length.
Connector: BNC, female, shell bypassed to chassis via 1000 pF capacitor, EMIsuppressed.
75Ω impedance, terminated.
Output Level (100% peak modulation): –20.0 to 0.0 dBfs software controlled.
Filtering: RFI filtered.
Conveying and Re-authoring Dolby Metadata
The 8685 can, via an SMPTE Rdd06-2008-compliant RS-485 serial connection, via an HD-
SDI connection (when the optional HD-SDI module is installed), or via embedded Dolby-E
metadata (when the optional Dolby-E modules are installed in the HD-SDI module), automatically
convey its active surround metadata value to a downstream Dolby Digital encoder
like the Dolby DP-569, which must be set up according to its operating instructions to receive
and act upon this input. This greatly reduces the possibility that operator error will
cause the wrong value of surround metadata to be transmitted to consumers.
To emit an RDD 06-2008-compliant signal, the 8685 must be receiving a valid input stream
that is compliant with RDD 06-2008—this is necessary to synchronize the output metadata
to video frame boundaries per the Dolby specification. When a valid input stream in present,
the 8685 passes this stream unchanged to its output except for the following modifications:
• The ac3_dialnorm word in the output metadata stream is reauthored so it is the
same as the 8685's active Dialnorm value.
• The ac3_dynrnge word in the output stream is set to 0, indicating that the downstream
AC3 encoder must reauthor the line-mode DRC metadata, following the
level compression profile found in the ac3_dynrng1 word in the input metadata.
• The ac3_compre word in the output stream is set to 0, indicating that the downstream
AC3 encoder must reauthor the RF-mode DRC metadata, following the
level compression profile found in the ac3_compr1 word in the input metadata.
Audio Reference Input
Configuration: Can accept wordclock or AES11id (75Ω) sync, automatically detected.
Connector: Female BNC.
Termination: Unterminated. For wordclock, use an external 75Ω terminator if the 6300 is
the last item in the chain. For AES11id, always use a 75Ω terminator.
Optional HD-SDI Input/Output Interface Module
OPTION #1:
HD-SDI Input/Output Interface Module.
• Replaces the base I/O module, which offers only AES3id input/output.

6-4
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
• SD-SDI (per SMPTE 259M); 1.5 Gbit/s HD-SDI (per SMPTE 292M; up to 720p
and 1080i) and 3.0 Gbit/s single-wire HD-SDI (per SMPTE 424M; 1080p).
• Supports only SDI audio channels 1 through 8.
• Includes three AES3id inputs, three AES3id outputs, and a pair of analog outputs.
In addition to the ability to receive and emit program audio, the AES3id I/O
can be configured as a loop-through to support Orban’s external Penteo upmixer.
The AES3id I/O offers the same performance as the AES3id I/O in the base configuration
above.
• Sockets exist to accept Dolby-E encoder/decoder modules; unit is fieldupgradeable
to support Dolby-E.
• Includes up to 11 frames of video delay to preserve AV-sync. Normal 8685 loudness
control processing requires one frame of delay; the Penteo upmixer requires
an additional seven frame delay; Dolby-E requires one frame for decoding and
one frame for encoding.
• Supports Dolby-E metadata received through HD-SDI and RS485 interfaces per
SMPTE RDD 06-2008. The metadata in the HD-SD stream must be embedded
the HD-SDI VANC data per SMPTE 2020-2-2008 (Method-A) or SMPTE 2020-3-
2008 (Method-B).
• Includes a video reference input (per SMPTE 274M and SMPTE 296M) that can
be used as a reference for the output audio sample rate and to correctly align
Dolby-E frames with video per Dolby's requirements (SMPTE RDD 6-2008 and
Dolby Labs published specifications) in cases where HD-SDI is not in use. When
HD-SDI is in use, frame sync is obtained from the HD-SDI input stream.
OPTION #2:
HD-SDI Input/Output Interface Module with Dolby-E Decoder.
• Base configuration (Option #1) with the addition of a Dolby-E Decoder module.
• Can accept a Dolby-E bitstream from HD-SDI or AES3id inputs and decode it to
PCM for 8685 audio processing or for direct AES3id and HD-SDI outputs.
• Supports Dolby-E metadata received through HD-SDI and RS485 interfaces per
SMPTE RDD 06-2008. The metadata in the HD-SD stream can be embedded in
a Dolby-E encoded bitstream (typically using audio channels 1 and 2) or in the
HD-SDI VANC data per SMPTE 2020-2-2008 (Method-A) or SMPTE 2020-3-
2008 (Method-B).
OPTION #3:
HD-SDI Input/Output Interface Module with Dolby-E Encoder.
• Base configuration (Option #1) with the addition of a Dolby-E Encoder module.
• Can encode PCM outputs from the 8685 audio processor or PCM received from
HD-SDI or AES3id inputs into the Dolby-E bitstream.
• Can emit Dolby-E metadata from an RS485 serial port and through HD-SDI.
• Can receive Dolby-E metadata through HD-SDI VANC or RS485.
OPTION #4:
HD-SDI Input/Output Interface Module with Dolby-E Decoder and Encoder.
• Base configuration (Option #1) with the addition of Dolby-E Decoder and Encoder
modules.
• Accepts and emits Dolby-E bitstreams from the HD-SDI and AES3id I/O.
• Supports Dolby-E metadata through HD-SDI and RS485 serial ports.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-5
Base and HD-SDI Configurations: Analog Audio Outputs
Configuration: One pair of outputs, which can be configured in software to emit LF, RF, C,
LB1, RB1, LFE, LB2, RB2, STEREO L, STEREO R, DOWNMIX L, DOWNMIX R, LF/RF,
C, LB1/RB1, LB2/RB2, STEREO L/R, and DOWNMIX L/R signals.
Source Impedance: 50Ω, electronically balanced and floating.
Load Impedance: 600Ω or greater, balanced or unbalanced. Termination not required or
recommended.
Output Level (100% peak modulation): Adjustable from –6 dBu to +24 dBu peak, into 600Ω
or greater load, software-adjustable.
Signal-to-Noise: ≥ 100 dB unweighted (Bypass mode, 20 Hz–20 kHz bandwidth, referenced
to 100% modulation).
Distortion: ≤ 0.01% THD (Bypass mode, de-emphasized) 20 Hz–20 kHz bandwidth.
Connectors: Two XLR-type, male, EMI-suppressed. Pin 1 chassis ground, Pins 2 (+) and 3
electronically balanced, floating and symmetrical.
D/A Conversion: 24 bit 128x oversampled.
Filtering: RFI filtered.
Audio Sync Input
Configuration: Can accept wordclock or AES11id (75Ω) sync, automatically selected.
Connector: Female BNC, shell grounded to chassis.
Termination: Unterminated. Use an external 75Ω terminator if the 8685 is the last item in
the chain.
Remote Computer Interface
Configuration: TCP/IP protocol via direct cable connect, modem, or Ethernet interface.
Modem is not supplied.
Serial Port: 115 kbps RS–232 port DB–9 male, EMI-suppressed.
Ethernet Port: 100 Mbit/sec on RJ45 female connector.
Base and HD-SDI Configurations: RS-485 Serial Interface (x2)
Hardware: 115 kbps RS–485 port DB–9 male, EMI-suppressed.
Compatibility: Designed to be hardware-compatible with Dolby Digital® hardware that
sends and receives Dolby Digital metadata.
Remote Control (GPI) Interface
Configuration: Eight (8) inputs, opto-isolated and floating.
Voltage: 6–15V AC or DC, momentary or continuous. 12 VDC provided to facilitate use with
contact closure.
Connector: DB–25 male, EMI-suppressed.
Control: User-programmable for any eight of user presets, factory presets, bypass, test
tone, stereo or mono modes, analog input, digital input.
Filtering: RFI filtered.
Tally Outputs
Circuit Configuration: Two NPN open-collector outputs.

6-6
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
Voltage: +15 volts maximum. Do not apply negative voltage. When driving a relay or other
inductive load, connect a diode in reverse polarity across the relay coil to protect the
driver transistors from reverse voltage caused by inductive kickback.
Current: 30 mA maximum
Indications: Tally outputs can be programmed to indicate a number of different operational
and fault conditions.
Power
Voltage: 100–264 VAC, automatically selected, 50–60 Hz, 75 VA.
Connector: IEC, EMI-suppressed. Detachable 3-wire power cord supplied.
Configuration: Two independent power supplies with independent IEC input connectors.
Power supply health is monitored and the good supply is automatically connected to the
load should one supply fail.
Safety Standards: ETL listed to UL standards, CE marked.
Environmental
Operating Temperature: 32° to 122° F / 0° to 50° C for all operating voltage ranges.
Humidity: 0–95% RH, non-condensing.
Dimensions (W x H x D): 19” x 5.25” x 15.5” / 48.3 cm x 8.9 cm x 39.4 cm. Depth shown
indicates rack penetration; overall front-to-back depth is 17.75” / 45.1 cm. Three rack
units high.
Humidity: 0–95% RH, non-condensing.
RFI / EMI: Tested according to Cenelec procedures. FCC Part 15 Class A device.
Shipping Weight: 40 lbs. / 18.1 kg
Warranty
Two Years, Parts and Service: Subject to the limitations set forth in Orban's Standard
Warranty Agreement.
Because engineering improvements are ongoing, specifications are subject to change without
notice.
Circuit Description
This section provides a detailed description of user-serviceable circuits used in the
8685. We do not provide detailed descriptions of the digital circuitry because most
of this is built with surface-mount components that cannot be removed or replaced
with typical tools available in the field. Field repair ordinarily consists of swapping
entire PC boards.
The optional HD-SDI module is built on a high-speed 10-layer board that is easily
damaged by incorrect rework techniques. Because of the high risk of damage, we do
not recommend servicing the HD-SDI module at the component level.
The section starts with an overview of the 8685 system, identifying circuit sections
and describing their purpose. Then each user-repairable section is treated in detail

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-7
by first giving an overview of the circuits followed by a component-by-component
description.
The drawing on page 6-37 shows circuit board locations.
Overview
The Control Circuits control the DSP, display, and input/output sections of the 8685
system.
The Input Circuits include the connectors and RF filtering for the analog and digital
audio inputs, as well as the circuitry to interface these inputs to the digital processing.
The Output Circuits include the connectors and RF filtering for the analog and digital
audio outputs and the circuitry to interface the digital processing to these outputs.
The DSP Circuits implement the bypass, test tone, and audio processing using digital
signal processing.
The Power Supply provides power for all 8685 circuit sections.
A block diagram of the DSP signal processing appears on page 6-101.
Control Circuits
The control circuit is based on an AMD Elan SC520 microprocessor, which is a 586class
processor running an Orban executable program over a third-party real-time
operating system. A flash memory emulates a hard drive. The memory is non-volatile
and does not rely on a battery to retain information when mains power is off.
The flash memory holds the operating system, the Orban executable program, and
all preset files, both factory and user. It also contains a write-protected “boot segment”
that functions as a boot ROM.
The control circuits process and execute user-initiated requests to the system. The
source of these requests is the front panel buttons, joymouse, and rotary encoder,
the rear panel RS-232 ports, Ethernet port, and the optically isolated General Purpose
Interface. These changes affect hardware function and/or DSP processing. The
control circuits also send information to the LCD display.
The control circuit communicates with the DSP and display circuitry through the
SC520’s general-purpose bus.
The SC520 periodically refreshes a watchdog timer. If the timer times out without
being refreshed, it assumes that the control program has crashed and automatically
reboots the SC520. The DSP chips will continue to process audio until the time comes
in the boot process to reload DSP program code into them. At this point, the audio

6-8
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
will mute for about two seconds until the DSP code download has finished. If you
hear a two-second audio mute on air, you can assume that the 8685 has rebooted
for some reason. Be prepared to convey this fact to Orban customer service if you
call for technical assistance.
The control board is divided into two assemblies: a “base board,” which has interface
circuitry, and a “CPU controller module,” which plugs into the base board and
which contains the CPU, the Ethernet interface chip, the flash memory, the DRAM,
the LCD graphics controller, and the real-time clock, which keeps time for the 8685’s
automation functions.
The real-time clock is backed up by a DL2032 battery so that it keeps accurate time
even when the 8685 is powered down. Expected battery life is about three months
when the 8685 is not powered up and many years when the 8685 is powered. The
battery is socketed and can be readily accessed by removing the 8685’s top cover;
the battery is located on the foil (top) side of the CPU controller module.
User Control Interface and LCD Display Circuits
The user control interface enables the user to control the 8685’s functionality. A rear
panel GPI connector allows optically isolated remote control of certain functions,
like recalling presets, via contact closure. An Ethernet port and an RS-232 serial connector
allow you to connect a modem or computer to the 8685. Two RS-485 serial
connectors (labeled SERIAL PORT 2 and SERIAL PORT 3) allow the 8685 to send and receive
Dolby-E (SMPTE RDD 6-2008) metadata. Front panel pushbutton switches select
between various operational modes and functions. A rotary encoder allows the user
to adjust parameters and enter data.
1. Remote Interface and RS-232 Interfaces
Located on base board
A remote interface connector and circuitry implements remote control of certain
operating modes; OPTIMOD-FM 8685 has eight remote contact closure inputs.
A valid remote signal is a momentary pulse of current flowing through remote
signal pins. Current must flow consistently for 50msec for the signal to be interpreted
as valid. Generally, the 8685 will respond to the most recent control operation,
regardless of whether it came from the front panel, remote interface, or
RS-232.
Component-Level Description:
After being current-limited by resistors, the GPI control signals are applied to
two quad optoisolators, U10, 12, and then to the control circuitry.
Octal driver U1 buffers the RS-232 port, which is located on a small daughter
board.
U10, 12 and U1 are socketed for easy field replacement in the event of overload,
lightning damage, etc. All other circuitry is surface-mount and is not

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-9
field-repairable.
2. Color LCD Display
The color LCD is an active-matrix quarter-VGA panel. The CPU addresses its controller
chip through the CPU’s ISA bus. The controller is on a board sandwiched between
the CPU module and the base board: The graphics controller plugs into the base
board and the CPU module plugs into the graphics controller.
The backlight on the display has a finite lifetime (normally a few years of continuous
operation). Therefore, the 8685 always implements a screen-saver timeout. This is
not user-adjustable.
Input Circuits
This circuitry interfaces the digital inputs to the DSP. The digital input receivers accepts
AES3-format digital audio signals from the digital input connector and sample
rate-converts them as necessary. The digital audio from the A/D and SRC is transmitted
to the DSP.
1. Digital Input Receiver and Sample Rate Converter (SRC)
Located on Input/output board
The digital input receivers IC301A, 302A, 303A, 401A, 402A accept digital audio
signals using the AES3id interface format (AES3-1992). They apply their outputs
to sample rate converters IC304B, 305B, 306B. These accept and sample-rate convert
any of the “standard” 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz rates
in addition to any digital audio sample rate within the range of 32 kHz and 96
kHz. The SRC converts the input sample rate to 48 kHz for processing by the DSP.
Receiver IC403A accepts sync signals in AES3id or AES11id format from J403A.
The signal at J403A is also applied to word clock receiver/PLL receiver IC501. Either
IC403A or IC501 generates a reference sample rate for the 8685’s output
sample rate converters.
These chips are surface-mounted and not field-replaceable without surfacemount
rework equipment.
SDI Option:
The digital input receivers for the AES3id inputs are U300A, U302A, and U304A.
The associated sample rate converters are U301B, U303B, and U305B.
The sample rate converters for SDI audio input channels 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, and 7/8 are
U400A, U400B, U401A, and U401B respectively.

6-10
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
Output Circuits
This circuitry interfaces the DSP to the analog and digital audio outputs. The digital
audio from the DSP is transmitted to the digital-to-analog converter (D/A) and output
sample rate converters (SRC). The digital-to-analog (D/A) converter converts the
digital audio words generated by the DSP to analog audio. The analog output
stages scale and buffer the D/A output signal to drive the analog output XLR connectors
with a low impedance balanced output. The digital output transmitter accepts
the digital audio words from the output sample rate converter (SRC) and
transmits them as AES3id-format digital audio signals on the digital output connector.
1. Stereo Digital-to-Analog (D/A) Converter
Located on Input/output board
The D/A, IC200, is a stereo, 24-bit delta-sigma converter. It receives the serial left
and right audio data samples from the DSP at 48 kHz sample rate and converts
them into audio signals requiring further, relatively undemanding analog filtering.
IC211 is surface-mounted and is not field-replaceable without surface-mount
rework equipment.
SDI Option:
The circuitry of the D/A converter and analog output stages is the same as for SDI
and the base configurations, but the reference designators are different. To understand
this circuitry on the SDI module, compare the schematics on pages 6-82
and 6-55.
2. Analog Output Stages
Located on Input/output board
The left and right analog signals emerging from IC200 are each filtered, amplified,
and applied to a floating-balanced integrated line driver, which has a 50Ω
output impedance. The line driver outputs are applied to the RF-filtered left and
right analog output connectors. These analog signals can represent either the
transmitter or monitor output of audio processing.
Component-Level Description:
IC201 and associated components filter the left channel signal emerging from
IC200. The purpose of these stages is to reduce the out-of-band noise energy
resulting from IC200’s noise-shaping filter and to translate the differential
output of IC200 into single-ended form. The components associated with
IC201 apply a 3 rd order low-pass filter to the differential signal from the D/A.
This filter does not induce significant overshoot of the processed audio, which
would otherwise waste modulation.
IC203B and associated components form a low-frequency servo amplifier to
remove residual DC from the signal. The 0.1Hz −3 dB frequency prevents tiltinduced
overshoot in the processed audio.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-11
The buffered output of IC201 is applied to IC204, a balanced output line
driver. This driver emulates a floating transformer. One side of its output can
be grounded without affecting its differential output level. IC204 and its right
channel counterpart IC205 are socketed for easy field replacement. All other
circuitry is surface-mounted.
The corresponding right channel circuitry is functionally identical to that just
described.
To understand this circuitry on the SDI module, compare the schematics on
pages 6-82 and 6-55.
3. Digital Sample Rate Converter (SRC) and Output Transmitter
Located on Input/output board
Output sample rate converter (SRC) chips IC304, 305, 306, 404, 405, 406 convert
the 8685’s 48 kHz system sample rate to any of the standard 32 kHz, 44.1
kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz rates for the 8685’s six AES3id outputs. The
sample rate converters drive digital audio interface transmitters IC301, 302,
3030, 401, 402, 403, which encode digital audio signals using the AES3id interface
format. These chips are surface-mounted and are not field-replaceable
without surface-mount rework equipment.
SDI Option:
DSP Circuit
The digital output transmitters for the AES3id outputs are U300AB U302B, and
U304B. The associated sample rate converters are U301A, U303A, and U305A.
The sample rate converters for channels 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, and 7/8 of the SDI output
are U402A, U402B, U403A, and U403B respectively.
The DSP circuit consists of nine Freescale (formerly Motorola) 250 MHz DSP56724
dual-core 24-bit fixed-point DSP chips that execute DSP software code to implement
digital signal processing algorithms. The none DSP chips, each operating at approximately
500 million instructions per second (MIPS), for a total of 4500 MIPS, provide
the necessary signal processing. An internal sampling rate of 48 kHz is used.
System initialization normally occurs when power is first applied to the 8685 and can
occur abnormally if the 8685’s watchdog timer forces the SC520 to reboot. Upon initialization,
the SC520 CPU downloads the DSP executable code stored in the flash
memory. The time between application of power and completion of DSP code
download is approximately 7 seconds. Once a DSP chip begins executing its program,
execution is continuous. The SC520 provides the DSP program with parameter data
(representing information like the settings of various processing controls), and extracts
the front panel metering data from the DSP chips.

6-12
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
During system initialization, the SC520 queries the DSP hardware about its operational
status and will display an error message on-screen if the DSP fails to initialize
normally. Please note any such messages and be ready to report them to Orban Customer
Service.
The DSP chips are located on the DSP board—see the drawings starting on page 6-
61. IC801 is a local switching-type voltage regulator on the DSP board that derives
the +3.3 V supply for the DSP chips from the +RAW unregulated system voltage,
while IC802 creates a +1.2 V regulated supply from +RAW.
Power Supply
Warning! Hazardous voltages are present in the power supplies when connected to
the AC line. Several parts, including the heat sink, are hot to the AC power line. Except
for servicing, do not remove the insulating shield from the power supply.
There are two redundant power supplies connected to a power supply supervisor/distribution
board. Via power supply supervisory ICs U1, U2, U3, and U7, the
power supply supervisor monitors each supply’s output for fault conditions, including
undervoltage and overvoltage. If one supply fails, the power supply supervisor
will automatically choose the good supply to power the 8685’s circuitry. MOSFETs
Q1-8 switch the supplies. These transistors have very low “on” resistance to minimize
heating and power loss.
Each of the two redundant power supplies is a modular switching supply to minimize
heat buildup and power consumption. They convert an AC line voltage input
to +15, –15, and +5 volts. All other supply voltages are derived from these three
voltages via local regulation. The supply accepts inputs from 95 to 264 VAC, 50 – 60
Hz.
The only fuses in your Optimod are 2.5A 20mm Quick Acting HBC fuses mounted on
the power supplies’ circuit boards. Because the supplies’ outputs are automatically
current-limited, the fuse will usually open only if the power supply fails. Be sure to
disconnect your Optimod from AC power before replacing the fuse!
Because of safety and EMI suppression requirements for the power supplies,
there are no user-serviceable parts in them and we do not provide
documentation for these supplies at the component level. In case of failure,
replace the entire bad supply with an Orban-supplied replacement (Orban part
number 29270.000.01.1), which ensures that your Optimod will continue to meet all
regulatory requirements for safety and emissions.
The output of the power supply is monitored by the power-indicator LED circuit,
which causes the power LED to flash according to a preset code to diagnose problems
with the various power supplies in the 8685. See step (2.B) on page 4-9.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-13
HD-SDI Module (optional)
As stated above, we do not recommend attempting to service the HD-SDI circuit
board at the component level because it is a high-speed 10-layer board and easy to
damage. Nevertheless, for completeness, we provide a parts list, parts locator drawings
and schematics for the SDI module. The parts locator drawings and schematics
are located from page 6-79 to 6-100. In the schematics, many of the ICs are labeled
to describe their functionality.
The SDI receiver consists of a cable equalizer, U200, which extracts the SDI signal.
The cleaned-up signal is processed by an FPGA (see page 6-88), which extracts and
re-embeds the video signal, the audio signals, and the metadata within the VANC
area of the SDI. The metadata is further processed by a PIC microprocessor (U500),
which also provides the interface between metadata received and emitted from the
RS485 serial ports, the SDI VANC area, and Dolby-E (when the optional Dolby-E decoder
and/or encoder modules are fitted; see page 6-93). In addition, the PIC delays
the metadata as necessary to match the delay applied to the video signal.
In addition to embedding and de-embedding the audio, the FPGA works in conjunction
with the DSPs to implement the 8685’s routing switcher. For example, this allows
audio received from the SDI to be routed to the 8685’s audio processing or
AES3id outputs.
The FPGA also controls the video memory that permits the video signal to be delayed
by up to 11 frames before being re-embedded into the SDI. The video memory
is shown on page 6-89.
Abbreviations
Some of the abbreviations used in this manual may not be familiar to all readers:
A/D (or A to D) analog-to-digital converter
AES Audio Engineering Society
AGC automatic gain control
A-I analog input
A-O analog output
BAL balanced (refers to an audio connection with two active conductors and one shield surrounding
them).
BBC British Broadcasting Corporation
BNC a type of RF connector
CALIB calibrate
CIT composite isolation transformer
CMOS complementary metal-oxide semiconductor
COFDM Coded Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex—a robust type of digital modulation using
many narrow-bandwidth, low data rate, mutually non-interfering carriers to achieve an aggregate
high data rate with excellent multipath rejection.
COM serial data communications port
D/A (or D to A) digital-to-analog converter
dBm decibel power measurement. 0 dBm = 1mW applied to a specified load. In audio, the load
is usually 600Ω. In this case only, 0 dBm = 0.775V rms.

6-14
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
dBu decibel voltage measurement. 0 dBu = 0.775V RMS. For this application, the dBm-into-
600Ω scale on voltmeters can be read as if it were calibrated in dBu.
DI digital input
DJ disk jockey, an announcer who plays records in a club or on the air
DO digital output
DOS Microsoft disk operating system for IBM-compatible PC
DSP digital signal processor (or processing). May also refer to a special type of microprocessor
optimized for efficiently executing arithmetic.
EBU European Broadcasting Union
EBS Emergency Broadcasting System (U.S.A.)
EMI electromagnetic interference
ESC escape
FCC Federal Communications Commission (USA regulatory agency)
FDNR frequency-dependent negative resistor⎯an element used in RC-active filters
FPGA Field-programmable gate array
FET field effect transistor
FFT fast Fourier transform
FIFO first-in, first-out
G/R gain reduction
HF high-frequency
HP high-pass
IC integrated circuit
IM intermodulation (or “intermodulation distortion”)
I/O input/output
ITU International Telecommunications Union (formerly CCIR). ITU-R is the arm of the ITU dedicated
to radio.
JFET junction field effect transistor
LC inductor/capacitor
LCD liquid crystal display
LED light-emitting diode
LF low-frequency
LP low-pass
LVL level
MHF midrange/high-frequency
MLF midrange/low-frequency
MOD modulation
N&D noise and distortion
N/C no connection
OSHOOT overshoot
PC IBM-compatible personal computer running a Microsoft Windows® operating system
PCM pulse code modulation
PIC A family of small microprocessors often used for embedded systems
PPM peak program meter
RAM random-access memory
RC resistor/capacitor
REF reference
RF radio frequency
RFI radio-frequency interference
RMS root-mean-square
ROM read-only memory
SDI / HD-SDI serial data interface and high-definition serial data interface — a family of SMPTE standards
allowing audio, video, and ancillary data to be multiplexed together and conveyed via
75 ohm coaxial cable or optical fiber at speeds up to 3 Gb/sec.

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-15
S/PDIF Sony/Philips digital interface (standardized as IEC958)
TRS tip-ring-sleeve (2-circuit phone jack)
THD total harmonic distortion
TX transmitter
μs Microseconds. For pre-emphasis, the +3 dB frequency is 1/(2 π τ), where τ is the preemphasis
time constant, measured in seconds.
VCA voltage-controlled amplifier
VU volume unit (meter)
XLR a common style of 3-conductor audio connector
XTAL crystal
Parts List
Many parts used in the 8685 are surface-mount devices (“SMT”) and are not normally
field replaceable because specialized equipment and skills are necessary to
remove and replace them. The list below includes substantially all of the parts used
in the 8685 (including surface-mount devices) and inclusion of a part in this list does
not imply that the part is field-replaceable.
See the following assembly drawings for locations of components.
Obtaining Spare Parts
Special or subtle characteristics of certain components are exploited to produce an
elegant design at a reasonable cost. It is therefore unwise to make substitutions for
listed parts. Consult the factory if the listing of a part includes the note “selected” or
“realignment required.”
Orban normally maintains an inventory of tested, exact replacement parts that can
be supplied quickly at nominal cost. Standardized spare part kits are also available.
When ordering parts from the factory, please have available the following information
about the parts you want:
Orban part number
Reference designator (e.g., C3, R78, IC14)
Brief description of part
Model, serial, and “M” (if any) number of unit ⎯ see rear-panel label
To facilitate future maintenance, parts for this unit have been chosen from the catalogs
of well-known manufacturers whenever possible. Most of these manufacturers
have extensive worldwide distribution and can be contacted through their web
sites.

6-16
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
Base Board
BASE BOARD
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
42008.020Q
Subassembly Flat Cable-40P-
2""
J7
16013.000.01 Heatsink, Clip On TO 220 H1
20040.604.01
Resistor, METALFIM, 1/8W,
1%, 604 Ω
R28, 30, 33, 35, 37, 39, 44, 46, 48, 49, 50,
51, 52, 53, 54, 55
20080.301.01
Resistor, METALFIM, 1/2W,
1%, 301 Ω
R47
20121.100.01
Resistor, METALFIM, 1/8W,
1%, 10Ω, 1206
R43, 45
20121.750.01
Resistor, THIN FILM, 1/8W,
1%, 75 Ω
R82, 83, 84
20128.002.01 Resistor 2.0 Ω 1% 0805 R22, R23, R24, R25
20129.301.01 Resistor, 301Ω, 0805 R59, R77
20130.100.01 Resistor, 1.00K 1% 0805 R79
20130.162.01
Resistor, 1/8W, 1%, 1.62K,
0805
R41, 42
20130.200.01 Resistor, 2.00K, 0805 R4, R56, R62
20130.249.01
Resistor, 1/8W, 1%, 2.49K,
0805
R76
20130.562.01
Resistor, 1/8W, 1%, 5.62K,
0805
R57
20131.100.01 Resistor, 10K, 0805
R5, 6, 15, 16, 17, 26, 60, 61, 63, 65, 67, 68,
69, 70, 71, 73, 74, 75, 80, 81, 102, 103, 104
20131.140.01 Resistor, 14.0K, 0805 R58, 64
20131.301.01 Resistor, 30.1K, 0805 R72
R1, 2, 3, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 20, 27,
20132.100.01 Resistor, 100K, 0805
29, 31, 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, 66, 85, 86, 87, 88,
89, 90, 91, 92, 93
20132.332.01 Resistor, 332K, 0805 R78
21139.000.01
Capacitor, X7R, 0.1uF, 10%,
0805
C3, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 18, 21, 24, 30,
32, 33, 34, 35, 38, 39, 43
21147.022.01 Capacitor, 22pf, 0805, 1% C40, 41
21319.610.01 Capacitor, 10uf, Tantalum, SMT C1, 4, 14, 15, 17, 19, 22, 36, 37
21322.547.01
Capacitor, 4.7uf, Tantalum,
6032B
C2, 5, 20, 23
22016.000.01 Diode, MMSZ5231B, SOD-123 D12
22083.015.01
Diode, VOLTAGE
SUPPRESSOR, 15 VOLT
D11
22101.001.01 Diode, 1N4148WT/R D1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10
22209.000.01
Diode, SCHOTTKY 1A, 60V,
SMD
REF, , NO, STUFF, D7, D8
23214.000.01 Transistor NPN MMBT3904 Q1, Q3, Q4, Q5
23606.201.01 Transistor, PWR, NPN Q2
24635.000.01 IC 74HCT374 U4
24900.000.01 IC, HEX INVERTER, SMT U11, U13
24967.000.01 IC, 74ACT245DW U3, U5
24978.000.01 IC, 74ACT244SC U14, 15
24979.000.01 IC, BAT54C-7 D13, 14, 15, 16, 17

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-17
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
24982.000.01 IC, 74HC4051M U19
24983.000.01 IC, 7064STC100-10 U1
24984.000.01 IC, LP2987IM-5.0 U20
25008.000.01 IC, PS2506-4 U10, 12
25112.001.01
LED, Red/Green, Bi-
Color/POLR
27017.025.01
Connector, Right Angle, PC
Board Mount, 25P
J10
27147.018.01 IC, Socket, DIP, 18 PIN, DUAL SU18
27223.002.01
Cable, Flat, 2 Long, 14 Conductor
J8
27371.040.01
Connector Header PC104
Stack 40P
Header2
27371.064.01
Connector Header PC104
Stack 64P
Header1, Header3
27406.014.01
Connector, Socket, Strip, 14
PIN
J2
27421.004.01
Connector, Header, Double
ROW, 4P, 2 X 2
J3B, J6
27421.006.01
Connector, Header, Double
ROW, 6P, 2 X 3
J5
27421.010.01
Connector, Header, Double
ROW, 23", 2 X 5
J12
27421.050.01
Connector Header STR .23
2x25
J9
27426.003.01
Connector, Header, 3 Pin, Single
Row
J11
27451.005.01
Connector, STR, Double Row,
26 PIN
J4
27451.024.01
Header, STR, Double Row, PC
MOUNT
J1
27500.000.01
Connector MOL53047-0510
5PIN
J14
28086.000.01 Crystal, 4.0 MHz, HC49US X1
29521.000.01 Inductor, 3.9uH, JM391K L1, L2, L3
32166.000.06 Circuit Board, Base Board
44093.100.01 Software PIC 8300 U18 U18
47010.016.01
Subassembly RECPTL-
W/SHRINK
J3A
47010.017.01
Subassembly RECPTL-
W/SHRINK
J3A
CPU Module
BASE BOARD
CPU MODULE
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT, IDENTIFIER
20128.010.01 Resistor, 10Ω,0805 R31, R34
20128.022.01 Resistor, 22Ω 1% 0805 R5, R6
20128.332.01 Resistor, 33.2Ω,0805 R10, R11, R14

6-18
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT, IDENTIFIER
20128.499.01 Resistor, 49.9Ω 1% 0805 R19, R20, R21, R22, R23
20129.160.01 Resistor, 160Ω 1% 0805 R24, R25
20129.330.01 Resistor, 330Ω 1% 0805 R12, R16
20129.470.01 Resistor, 470Ω 1% 0805 R13, R15
20130.100.01 Resistor, 1.00K 1% 0805 R17, R35
CPU MODULE
20130.475.01 Resistor, 4.75KΩ,0805
R3, R4, R7, R8, R26, R27, R28, R29, R30,
R32
20130.931.01 Resistor, 9.31KΩ, 1%, 0805 R33
20131.100.01 Resistor, 10KΩ,0805 R1, R2, R9
20131.147.01
Resistor,
1/8W,1%,14.7KΩ,0805
R18
20233.102.01
Resistor Network 1K CTS745C
8R BUSSED
RN1
20233.472.01
Resistor Network 4.7K
CTS745C 8R BUSS
RN2, RN3, RN4
20237.472.01 Resistor Network 8R, ISO, 5% RN5
21139.000.01
Capacitor,
X7R,0.1uF,10%,0805
C8, C9, C20, C21, C177, C179, C182
21141.000.01
Capacitor,
NPO,1000pF,1%,0805
C10
21142.000.01
Capacitor,
NPO,100pF,1%,0805
C2
21146.310.01 Capacitor, .01uF,0805,10%
C11, 126, 127, 133, 134, 150, 152, 154,
156, 158,160, 162, 180
21167.047.01 Capacitor, 4.7pF 50V X7R 0805 C1
21170.018.01
Capacitor, 18pF 1% 50V COG
0805
C3, C4, C5, C6, C7
21171.105.01 Capacitor, 1uF X7R 0805
C14, 17, 125, 132, 151, 153, 155, 157, 159,
161, 175, 176, 178, 181, 183
21322.547.01
Capacitor,
4.7uF,Tantalum,6032B
C12
21325.610.01
Capacitor, 10uF 10% Tantalum
6032-B
C13, C15, C16, C18
22101.001.01 Diode,1N4148WT/R D1, D2, D3
24331.025.01
IC Voltage Regulator LT1963-
2.5 SOT223
U14
24331.033.01
IC Voltage Regulator LT1963-
3.3 SOT223
U15
24541.000.01
IC SDRAM MT48LC16
TSOP54P
U2, U3
24542.000.01
IC Flash Memory E28F128
TSOP56
U4
24543.000.01 IC CY2305 0 Delay Buffer 8P U11
24544.000.01
IC NM93C46 Static EEPROM
TSSOP
U12
24653.000.01 IC PWRST MIC8114 SOT143 U5
24670.000.01 IC 10/100BT NIC NATIONAL U10
24965.000.01 IC,74ALVC164245DGG U7, U8, U9

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-19
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT, IDENTIFIER
24972.520.01
IC Microprocessor ELANSC520
BGA388
U1
27306.000.01
Connector RJ45 PCMT
W/MAGS
J1
27370.040.01 Connector Socket PC104 40pin P2
27370.064.01 Connector Socket PC104 64pin P1, P3
28031.000.01 Holder, Battery, Lithium Cell BT1HLDR
28041.000.01 Cell,Coin,Battery,Lithium,3V BT1
28089.000.01
Oscillator 33MHZ SG636 4P
SMD
X1
28090.000.01 IC TCXO DS32KHZ 36P BGA U13
28091.000.01
Crystal 25MHZ RXD MP35L
SMD
Y1
32201.000.02 PCB Control Module 8500
44094.100.01 Firmware 8500 U6 20LV8D
Serial I/O Board
CPU MODULE
PART # DESCRIPTION
SERIAL I/O BOARD
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
27459.006.01.1
Header 1X6 .100 PC-Mount
W/LK
J6 (NO STUFF)
20129.110.01.1 Resistor 0805 110 Ω 1% 1/8W R3 (NO STUFF)
20128.000.01.1 Resistor 0 Ω 0805 R4 R5 (NO STUFF)
44121.000.01.1 Firmware IC PIC MCU U5
21325.610.01.1
Capacitor 10uF 10% Tantalum
3528
C13, C16, C20,
C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6, C7, C8, C9, C10,
21139.000.01.1 Capacitor X7R 0.1uF 10% 0805 C11, C12, C15, C17, C18, C19, C21, C22,
C23, C24, C25
20130.100.01.1 Resistor 1.00K 1% 0805 R1, R2, R11, R14, R15, R16, R17
20165.110.01.1 Resistor 110 Ω 1% 1210 R6, R7, R8, R9
24792.128.01.1 IC PIC24FJ128GA106 MCU U5
24343.000.01.1 IC TPS76933DBVR LDO REG U6
27459.005.01.1
Header 1X5 .100 PC-Mount with
Lock
J5
24623.000.01.1 IC Octal Buffer/Line Driver 20 U7
25102.000.01.1 LED Yellow WATER CLR 1206 D3
20129.475.01.1 Resistor 475 Ω 1% 1/8W 0805 R18
23214.000.01.1 Transistor NPN MMBT3904 Q1, Q2
20237.472.01.1 Resistor Network 8R ISO 5% RN1
20131.100.01.1 Resistor 10K 0805 R10, R12, R13
32336.000.02.1 Circuit Board RS-232/485 Board
27147.014.01.1 IC Socket,DIP,14 Pin ,Dual SU2, SU3
27018.009.01.1 Connector, DB9, Female, Filter J2, J3
24966.000.01.1 IC, QUAD UART, ST16C554DC U4
27147.124.01.1 IC Socket DIP 24 pin Dual SU1
27017.009.01.1
Connector Right-Angle PC-Mount
9P MAL
J1

6-20
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
SERIAL I/O BOARD
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
24968.000.01.1 IC MAX208ECNG+ U1
24778.000.01.1 IC RS-485 Transceiver 14DIP U2, U3
29521.000.01.1 Inductor 3.9uH 10M391KLF L1, NO, STUFF
27421.050.01.1 Connector Header STR .23 2X25 J4
22209.000.01.1 Diode Shottky 1A 60V SMD D1, D2, NO, STUFF
21141.000.01.1 Capacitor NPO 1000PF 1% 0805 C14
Base Input/Output (I/O) Board (for units without SDI)
PART # DESCRIPTION
BASE INPUT/OUTPUT BOARD (no SDI)
COMPONENT, IDENTIFIER
44123.100.01.1 Firmware PIC 8585 IO IC600
44122.100.01.1 Firmware PIC 8585 IO IC500
20129.110.01.1 Resistor 0805 110 Ω 1% 1/8W
R229, R230, R306, R307, R308, R406, R407,
21140.000.01.1 Capacitor NPO 470PF 1% 0805
R408
C214, C215, C216, C217, C222, C223, C224,
C225,
20132.100.01.1 Resistor 100K R0805 1% 1/8W R505, R506, R507, R508, R607, R608, R609
20128.075.01.1 Resistor 75 Ω 1% 0805
R300, R301, R302, R400, R401, R402, R604,
R605, R606
20129.210.01.1 Resistor 0805 210 Ω 1% 1/8W R303, R304, R305, R403, R404, R405
20128.000.01.1 Resistor 0 Ω 0805 R309, R310, R311, R409, R410, R411
24326.000.01.1 IC DDT3-LT1086-3.3V IC701
21153.322.01.1
Capacitor 0805 0.022uF 5%
NPO
C506
27426.005.01.1 Header UNSHRD J500
27426.003.01.1
Connector Header 3PIN
SINGLE RW
J304, J305, J306, J307, J308, J309, J404,
J405, J406, J407, J408, J409
21137.447.01.1
Capacitor 0.47uF 25V 10%
1206
C220, C221
21325.610.01.1
Capacitor 10uF 10% Tantalum
3528
C702, C703, C704, C705, C706, C707, C708,
C709, C710, C711, C712, C713, C714, C715,
C716, C717, C718, C719, C720, C721, C722
27451.007.01.1
Connector DOUBLE RW PC
MNT 40 PIN
J602, J603
27421.010.01.1
Connector Header DOUBLE
RW 23" 2 X 5
J600
24993.000.01.1 IC EPM7256AE24995TC100-10 IC600
24948.000.01.1 IC 74LVC2244 DRVR20-SOIC IC602, IC603, IC604, IC605, IC606
24337.000.01.1
IC LDO Voltage Regulator 1.8V
200m
IC700
24772.000.01.1 IC PIC18LF4420 Microcontroller IC500
24769.000.01.1 IC 2-channel SRC IC304, IC305, IC306, IC404, IC405, IC406
24768.000.01.1
IC 2-Channel AES Receiver/Transmitter
IC301, IC302, IC303, IC401, IC402, IC403
27057.000.01.1
Connector Dual BNC PC-Mount
Internal Capacitor
J301, J302, J303, J401, J402, J403
27630.001.01.1 Jumper PC-Mount Test Point TP700
29539.000.01.1
Choke Common Mode 1K Ω
SM
L208, L209
27451.004.01.1
Header Strip Double Row PC
Mount
J700
27408.003.01.1 Connector 3pin Socket Strip SL200, SL201, SL202, SL203

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-21
PART # DESCRIPTION
BASE INPUT/OUTPUT BOARD (no SDI)
COMPONENT, IDENTIFIER
27406.014.01.1 Connector Socket Strip 14 pin JP600
C203, C204, C205, C206, C207, C208, C209,
C210, C211, C212, C213, C300, C301, C302,
C303, C304, C305, C306, C307, C308, C309,
C310, C311, C312, C313, C314, C400, C401,
C402, C403, C404, C405, C406, C407, C408,
C409, C410, C411, C412, C413, C414, C500,
21139.000.01.1 Capacitor X7R 0.1uF 10% 0805
C501, C502, C503, C601, C602, C603, C604,
C605, C606, C607, C608, C609, C610, C723,
C724, C725, C726, C727, C728, C729, C730,
C731, C732, C733, C734, C735, C736, C737,
C738, C739, C740, C741, C742, C743, C744,
C745, C746, C747, C748, C749, C750, C751,
C752, C753, C754, C755, C756, C757, C758,
C759, C760, C761, C762, C763
29015.000.01.1
AES3 Transformer Surface
Mount SCIENTI
T300, T301, T302, T303, T304, T305, T400,
T401, T402, T403, T404, T405
20135.002.01.1 Resistor 0805 5% 2ohm R700, R701, R702, R703, R704, R705
29532.000.01.1 Inductor Axial 560uH 370MA L600, L601
29537.102.01.1 Inductor 0805 Ferrite 1000 Ω
L700, L701, L702, L703, L704, L705, L706,
L707, L708, L709, L710, L711
20129.604.01.1 Resistor 0805 604 Ω 1% 1/8W R509
21177.000.01.1 Capacitor 0805 0.22uF X7R C505
29508.210.01.1 Filter EMI Suppression 100V 10 L200, L201, L202, L203
L300, L301, L302, L303, L304, L305, L306,
29506.001.01.1 Bead Ferrite On Wire
L307, L308, L309, L310, L311, L400, L401,
L402, L403, L404, L405, L406, L407, L408,
L409, L410, L411
27147.008.01.1 IC Socket DIP 8 Pin Dual SL204, SL205
27053.003.01.1
Connector Male Insert Right-
Angle
J200, J201
24997.000.01.1 IC DAC AK4393VSP VSOP IC200
24979.000.01.1 IC BAT54C-7 CR500, CR501
24960.000.01.1 IC OPA2134UA IC201, IC202, IC203
24958.000.01.1 IC DRV134PA IC204, IC205
24900.000.01.1 IC Hex Inverter SMT IC601
22106.000.01.1 Diode VSTT SMCJ26 DO214 CR200, CR201, CR202, CR203
21319.610.01.1 Capacitor 10uf Tantalum SMT C700, C701
21171.105.01.1 Capacitor 1uf X7R 0805 C200, C201, C202
21146.310.01.1 Capacitor 0.01uf 0805 10% C507, C764
21143.000.01.1
Capacitor NPO 1500PF 1%
0805
C218, C219, C504
20511.310.01.1 Trimpot 10K 10% 3/8TOP ADJ VR200, VR201
20133.100.01.1 Resistor 0805 1.0M 1% 1/8W R227, R228
20131.825.01.1 Resistor 1/8W 1% 82.5K 0805 R213, R214, R215, R216
20131.113.01.1 Resistor 0805 11.3K 1% 1/8W R223, R224, R225, R226
20131.100.01.1 Resistor 10K 0805
R200, R201, R202, R500, R501, R502, R503,
R504
20130.845.01.1 Resistor 1/8W 1% 8.45K 0805
R203, R204, R205, R206, R207, R208, R209,
R210, R211, R212
20130.348.01.1 Resistor 1/8W 1% 3.48K 0805 R217, R218, R219, R220, R221, R222
20130.100.01.1 Resistor 1.00K 1% 0805 R600, R601, R602, R603
24676.000.01.1 IC TRANS CS8427 28 PIN IC501
29535.000.01.1 Inductor 3.9uH CHIP 1008 L204, L205, L206, L207

6-22
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
DSP Board
DSP BOARD
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
20119.020.01.1
Resistor 0.02 Ω 1/4W 1% Surface-Mount
(R701, R702, R712 NO STUFF)
32246.000.08.1 Circuit Board, DSP, 8500/8585
27451.002.01.1
Header STR Double Row PC-
Mount
J604
21305.610.01.1
Capacitor Radial Leads 10uF
20V 10%
C766
27468.006.01.1 Connector 6P MOLEX PC-Mount J200
21175.000.01.1
Capacitor 6800PF 10% X7R
0805
C101, C103, C105, C107, C109, C111, C113,
C115, C117, C119, C121, C123
24757.000.01.1 IC DSPB56367AG150 150MHZ
IC101, IC102, IC103, IC104, IC105, IC106,
IC107, IC108, IC109, IC110, IC111, IC112
16021.000.01.1
Heatsink, Vertical Mount, Black
Anodized
HS700, Use Compound
24944.000.01.1 IC EPM 7064AETC44-10 SMT IC503
21137.447.01.1 Capacitor .47uF 25V 10% 1206
C102, C104, C106, C108, C110, C112, C114,
C116, C118, C120, C122, C124
27451.007.01.1
Connector Double Row PC-
Mount 40 PIN
J504
27451.003.01.1
Header STR Double Row PC-
Mount
J701
27421.010.01.1
Connector Header Double Row
23" 2 X 5
J603
27421.002.01.1
Connector Header Double Row
2P 2 X 1
J500
24993.000.01.1 IC EPM7256AE24995TC100-10 IC603
24964.000.01.1 IC,LM2576T-3.3 FLOW LB03 IC700
24946.000.01.1 IC-8 Bit-Dual Transceiver W/3 IC502
20221.101.01.1
Resistor Network SIP 2% 100K
10PIN
R501
24948.000.01.1 IC 74LVC2244 DRVR20-SOIC IC601, IC602, IC604
27630.001.01.1 Jumper PC MNT TEST PT
TP702, TP200, TP201, (TP700, TP701,
TP703, TP704, NO, STUFF, )
42008.020.03.1 Subassembly Flat Cable 40P 2" J601, J602
24622.000.01.1 IC 74AHCT04 Invert SOIC IC807
C202, C203, C233, C234, C235, C500, C701,
C702, C703, C704, C705, C706, C707, C708,
C709, C710, C711, C712, C713, C714, C715,
C716, C718, C719, C720, C721, C723, C724,
C725, C726, C727, C728, C729, C730, C731,
C732, C733, C734, C739, C740, C741, C742,
C743, C744, C745, C746, C747, C748, C749,
21139.000.01.1 Capacitor X7R 0.1uF 10% 0805 C750, C751, C752, C753, C754, C755, C756,
C757, C758, C759, C760, C762, C786, C787,
C788, C789, C790, C791, C792, C793, C794,
C795, C796, C797, C798, C799, C800, C802,
C805, C809, C810, C811, C812, C813, C814,
C815, C816, C817, C818, C819, C820, C821,
C822, C823, C824, C825, C826, C827, C828,
C829, C830, C831, C832, C839
24549.000.01.1 IC SRAM 16MB TSSOP IC803, IC808, IC809
24945.000.01.1
IC 74AHC541 Octal Buffer
SOL20
IC501, IC504

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-23
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
20128.332.01.1 Resistor 33.2 Ω 0805 1% 1/8W R615
20130.499.01.1 Resistor R0805 4.99K 1% 1/8W R100, R510, R705
20130.200.01.1 Resistor 2.00K 0805 R707, R708, R709, R710
29527.000.01.1
Inductor, Toroidal 8.06uH FIT44-
4
L701
29512.000.01.1 Choke Shield 1670-1 250UH L702
28083.000.01.1
Oscillator, Crystal Clock-27MHZ
IC804
3V
DSP BOARD
20128.000.01.1 Resistor 0 Ω 0805 (R714, R715, R716, R717, R718 NO STUFF)
22104.000.01.1 Diode SCHOT Rectifier 1N5818 CR706, CR707
22208.040.01.1 Diode-Shottky-31DQ04-3 CR701
24333.000.01.1 IC-ST23-LM4041-ADJ IC702
24334.000.01.1 IC LT1767 MS8E 1.8V 1.5A IC701
29537.102.01.1 Inductor 0805 Ferrite 1000 Ω L800, L801, L802
29504.150.01.1 Inductor 2A PE53113 L700
24997.000.01.1 IC DAC AK4393VSP VSOP IC211
24960.000.01.1 IC OPA2134UA IC201
24938.000.01.1 IC Single 2 Input SMT IC810, IC811
23214.000.01.1 Transistor NPN MMBT3904 Q700
22101.001.01.1 Diode 1N4148WT/R CR704, CR705
22083.068.01.1 Diode Voltage Suppressor 6.8 V CR702
22083.033.01.1 Diode Voltage Suppressor 33 V CR700
21319.610.01.1 Capacitor 10uF Tantalum SMT
21230.710.01.1
21227.747.01.1
Capacitor RAD LDS 100uF 50V
HFS
Capacitor RAD LDS 470uF 16V
HF
C735, C736, C801, C804, C850, C851, C852,
C853, C854, C855, C856, C857, C858, C859,
C860, C861
C763
C764, C765, C842
21171.105.01.1 Capacitor 1uF X7R 0805 C200, C201, C232, C737, C738, C767, C768
21146.310.01.1 Capacitor .01uF 0805 10%
21145.000.01.1
Capacitor NPO 5% 100V 33PF-
1206
C773, C774, C775, C776, C777, C778, C779,
C780, C781, C782, C783, C784, C785, C833,
C834, C835, C836, C837, C838, C840
C231
21143.000.01.1 Capacitor NPO 1500PF 1% 0805 C769, C770, C771
21142.000.01.1 Capacitor NPO 100PF 1% 0805 C772
21140.000.01.1 Capacitor NPO 470PF 1% 0805 C217, C218
20132.100.01.1 Resistor 100K R0805 1% 1/8W R504, R507, R601, R602, R603, R703
20131.499.01.1 Resistor 1/8W 1% 49.9K 0805 R704, R706
20131.249.01.1 Resistor 1% 24.9K 0805 R203, R209, R213, R216
20131.100.01.1 Resistor 10K 0805 R237, R505, R711, R901
20130.845.01.1 Resistor 1/8W 1% 8.45K 0805
R201, R202, R207, R208, R211, R212, R214,
R215
20129.150.01.1 Resistor 1/8W 1% 150 Ω 0805 R616
20128.075.01.1 Resistor 75 Ω 1% 0805 R238, R508, R509
20128.022.01.1 Resistor 22 Ω 1% 0805 R806, R807, R808, R809, R810, R811
24766.000.01.1 IC PLL1707DBQ IC812
12004.408.01.1 Nut Hex STL C2 4-40 X 1/4 HS700
10009.406.01.1 Screw MS SEM P/P 4-40 X 3/8 HS700

6-24
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
Interface Board
PART # DESCRIPTION
INTERFACE BOARD
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
20128.000.01 Resistor, 0Ω, 0805
R102, R103, R104, R105, R116, R117, R128,
R129, R130, R131, R138, R139, R140, R209
20128.010.01 Resistor, 10Ω, 0805 R121
20130.100.01 Resistor, 1.00K 1% 0805 R107, R126, R127, R165, R166, R167, R202
20131.100.01 Resistor, 10KΩ, 0805
R133, R134, R135, R136, R137, R203, R204,
20132.100.01 Resistor, 100KΩ, 0805
21139.000.01
Capacitor, X7R, 0.1uF, 10%,
0805
R205, R206, R207
R118, R119, R120, R141, R142, R143, R144,
R145, R146, R147, R148, R149, R150, R151,
R152, R153, R154, R155, R156, R157, R158,
R159, R160, R161, R162, R163, R164, R201,
R208
21151.020.01 Capacitor, 20pf, 0805 C221, C222
21171.105.01 Capacitor 1uf X7R 0805 C202
21319.610.01 Capacitor, 10uf, Tantalum, SMT C200, C201
23214.000.01 Transistor NPN MMBT3904 Q100
24747.000.01 IC, MAX6501, TEMP 65c IC201
24756.000.01 IC, GRAPHICS, S1D13706F00A IC104
24965.000.01 IC, 74ALVC164245DGG IC100, IC101, IC102
24994.000.01 IC, 74ACT04, SOIC 14P IC103
27183.018.01
Connector Socket DIP 18-PIN
SMT
IC202
27373.040.01
Connector Socket PC104 Stacking
J100
27373.064.01
Connector Socket PC104 Stacking
J101, J102
27414.016.01 Header PIN 2X8 Right-Angle J200
27756.000.01
Connector, Housing, Right-Angle
SMT
J105
27757.033.01 Connector, FPC, 33PIN Rot-Lock J103
28089.000.01
Oscillator 33MHZ SG636PCE 4P
SMD
Y100
28092.000.01 Crystal, 4.000MHZ, SMD Y200
44105.100.01 Firmware PIC DISP INT 8500 IC202
Headphone Board
C100, C101, C102, C203, C204, C205, C206,
C207, C208, C212, C213, C214, C215, C216,
C217, C218
C219, C223, C224
PART # DESCRIPTION
HEADPHONE BOARD
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
20039.100.01 Resistor, MF, 1/8W, 1%, 10 Ω R2, R3, R8
20131.100.01 Resistor, 10K, 0805 R1, R6
20131.499.01 Resistor, 1/8W, 1%, 49.9K, 0805 R10, R13
20543.103.01 Trimpots, Audio, 10K, Taper A R12

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-25
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
HEADPHONE BOARD
21139.000.01
Capacitor, X7R, 0.1uF, 10%,
0805
C5, C6, C7, C8, C9, C10, C11, C12
21142.000.01
Capacitor, NPO, 100PF, 1%,
0805
C2, C4
21445.510.01
Capacitor, Metalized Polyester,
1.0uF, 50V, 5%
C1, C3
24025.000.01 IC, BUF634P, DIP8 U2, U3, U4
24960.000.01 IC, OPA2134UA U1
27090.000.01
Jack, Socket, 1/4" Phone, Right
Angle
J1
27147.008.01 IC, Socket, DIP, 8 PINS, DUAL SU2, SU3, SU4
27408.003.01 Connector, 3P Socket STRIP SL1, SL2, SL3
27758.006.01 Connector 6P Molex Right Angle J2
29508.210.01 Filter-EMI Suppression-50V- L1, L2, L3
32091.000.05 Circuit Board Headphone Board
57148.000.01 Bracket, Phone 8500 TYPE
Encoder Board
PART # DESCRIPTION
ENCODER BOARD
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
15061.003.01 LED MOUNT, T-1, 0.220 LEDMNT
21129.410.01
Capacitor, AXL LDS, 0.1uF, 50V,
20%
C1
25122.000.01 LED, T 1 3/4 RED/GRN LED 1
26088.000.01 Encoder, Rotary, Noble 8500 EN1
26128.000.01 Switch, Joymouse, Push, 8500 A1
26304.001.01 Switch, Push-Mom, SPST SW1, SW2
27421.016.01
Connector, Header, STR, .23", 2
X 8
JP1
32101.000.03 Circuit Board Encoder DPL/DEL
LCD Carrier Board
PART # DESCRIPTION
LCD CARRIER BOARD
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
11568.000.01
SCREW, THREAD-FORM
3x6MM
21112.282.01
Capacitor, Ceramic, 0.0082uF,
1KV, 10%
C1
22106.000.01 Diode, SMCJ26C, TRANZORB D3
22209.000.01 Diode, Shottky 1A, 60V, SMD D1, D2
24758.000.01 LCD Backlight Driver/CCFT A1

6-26
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
25409.000.01 LCD Display 320 X 240 LCD1
27420.002.01 Connector 2 PIN Right Angle J1
27757.033.01 Connector, FPC, 33PIN Rot-Lock J2, J3
Power Supply Distribution Board
LCD CARRIER BOARD
POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
20131.100.01.1 Resistor 10K 0805
R7, R8, R11, R28, R35, R39, R41,
R57
27468.004.01.1 Connector 4P MOLEX PC-Mount J10
24352.000.01.1 IC REF2925AIDBZT VREF2.5V U8
24216.100.01.1 IC TL074CD OP AMP U9, U10
20129.549.01.1 Resistor 1/8W 1% 54.9KΩ 805 R33
20129.513.01.1 Resistor 1/8W 1% 51.1KΩ 805 R38
20129.210.01.1 Resistor 0805 210Ω 1% 1/8W R26, R27, R29, R46, R47, R48
24789.000.01.1 IC Inverter 2-6V SINGLE CMOS SOT U11, U12
21137.447.01.1 Capacitor .47UF 25V 10% 1206 C41
23217.000.01.1
Transistor PNP MMBT3906 40V
SOT23
Q12, Q15
20131.200.01.1 Resistor 0805 20.0K 1% 1/8W R34, R36, R37, R52, R53, R54, R56
23214.000.01.1 Transistor NPN MMBT3904 Q10, Q11, Q13, Q14
20132.100.01.1 Resistor 1/8W 1% 100K R0805 R30, R31, R32, R49, R50, R51
21249.220.01.1
Capacitor Aluminum 220UF 25V
SMD-F
C8, C28
21248.470.01.1 Capacitor Aluminum 470UF 25V SMD C6,
27459.006.01.1 Header 1X6 .100 PC Mount with lock (J9, NO, STUFF)
20128.000.01.1 Resistor 0Ω 0805
R17, R20 (R16, R18, R19, R40, R55,
NO STUFF)
20130.100.01.1 Resistor 1.00K 1% 0805
R2, R5, R15, R21, R23, R25, R43,
R45
21313.568.01.1 Capacitor Tantalum 6.8UF 25V 10% C17
27421.010.01.1
Connector Header Double Row 23" 2 X
5
J6
27468.002.01.1 Connector 2P Molex PC-Mount J8
29556.000.01.1 Inductor Toroid 14.75UH 3.4A L2, L3
27382.008.01.1 Connector Header 8 PIN 3.96MM J1, J2
24108.000.01.1
IC Temperature Fan Control
TC650ACV
U6
24107.000.01.1 IC Ideal Diode LTC4355IMS U3
24106.000.01.1 IC Ideal Diode LTC4354IS8 U7
24105.000.01.1 IC Ideal Diode LTC4352 U1, U2
23418.000.01.1 Transistor MOSFET N-Channel Q3, Q4, Q7, Q8

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-27
POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
30V5.6A
23417.000.01.1
Transistor MOSFET N-Channel
FDD6770A
Q1, Q2, Q5, Q6
24351.000.01.1 IC Voltage Regulator NEG 5V D2PAK U5
24350.000.01.1 IC Voltage Regulator POS 5V D2PAK U4
29555.126.01.1 Inductor 12UH 12A Toroid Vertical L1
27451.024.01.1 Header STR Double Row PC-Mount J5
27451.003.01.1 Header STR Double Row PC-Mount J3
27451.004.01.1 Header STR Double Row PC-Mount J4
27479.004.01.1 Connector Header .156CTR 4 PIN (J7 NO STUFF)
20130.309.01.1 Resistor 3.09K 1% 0805 R3, R6
20130.316.01.1 Resistor 31.6K 1% 0805 R1, R4
22084.167.01.1 Diode TVS 16.7V BIDIR CR3, CR4, CR5, CR8
21331.106.01.1 Capacitor Tantalum 10UF 35V SMD
C5, C10, C11, C22, C23, C24, C27,
C33
22084.064.01.1 Diode TVS 6.4V BIDIR CR1, CR2
23416.000.01.1
Transistor MOSFET N-CHANNEL 20V
4.2
Q9
C1, C2, C3, C4, C7, C12, C13, C16,
21139.000.01.1 Capacitor X7R 0.1UF 10% 0805 C18, C19, C25, C26, C31, C34, C36,
C37, C38, C39, C40
20128.010.01.1 Resistor 10Ω 0805 R9, R10
20130.200.01.1 Resistor 2.00K 0805 R12, R13, R22, R24, R42, R44
22101.001.01.1 Diode 1N4148WT/R CR6, CR7, CR9, CR10
21318.510.01.1
Capacitor Tantalum 1.0uF 35V A-
CASE
C20
21171.105.01.1 Capacitor 1uf X7R 0805 C21
21146.310.01.1 Capacitor 0.01uf 0805 10% 0805 C9, C14, C15, C29, C30, C32, C35
20130.162.01.1 Resistor 1/8W 1% 1.62K 0805 R14
16024.000.01.1 Heatsink D2-PAK SMD HS_U4, HS_U5
Optional HD-SDI I/O Board
PART # DESCRIPTION
OPTIONAL HD-SDI I/O BOARD
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
32360.000.1 PCA HD-SDI DOLBY E I/O
32361.000.04.1 PCB HD-SDI DOLBY E I/O
20131.301.01.1 Resistor 30.1K 0805 R501
20129.210.01.1 Resistor 0805 210Ω 1% 1/8W R300, R309, R318, R621, R622
24789.000.01.1 IC INV 2-6V SGLE CMOS SOT U602, U605, U606, (U1400 NO STUFF)
20131.499.01.1 Resistor 1/8W 1% 49.9K 0805 R500
20131.140.01.1 Resistor 1/8W 1% 14.0K 0805 R214

6-28
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
27421.002.01.1
Connector Header Double Row
2P 2 X 1
(J701, J702, NO STUFF)
16023.600.01.1 HEATSINK BGA 28X28X15MM HEATSINK U700
29557.033.01.1
Inductor 3.3UH 9A Surface-
Mount
L600, L601, L604, L605
20130.970.01.1 Resistor 976Ω 1% 1/8W 0805 R603
20130.400.01.1 Resistor 402Ω 1%1/8W 0805 R611
20130.303.01.1 Resistor 30.9K 1% 1/8W 0805 R617
28057.000.01.1 IC GO1555-IXTE3 U1302
24684.000.01.1 IC STM6822SWY6F U702
24683.000.01.1 IC GS4915-INE3 U1301
24682.000.01.1 IC GS4911BCNE3 U1401
21199.330.01.1
Capacitor 33PF 50V 5% NPO
0603
C1405
21199.220.01.1
Capacitor 22PF 50V 5% NPO
0603
C1406
21199.104.01.1
21199.103.01.1
Capacitor 0.1UF 16V 5% NPO
0603
Capacitor 10000PF 50V 5%
0603
OPTIONAL HD-SDI I/O BOARD
C1305, C1306, C1312, C1313, C1315,
C1319, C1320, C1321, C1322, C1323,
C1324, C1400, C1401, C1404
C1316, C1407, C1408, C1409, C1410,
C1413, C1414, C1415
20171.619.01.1 Resistor 619Ω 1% 1/10W 0603 R1305, R1306, R1307, R1310
20171.105.01.1 Resistor 1.0M 1% 1/10W 0603 R1411
20171.103.01.1 Resistor 10K 1% 1/10W 0603 R1315
20171.102.01.1 Resistor 1.0K 1% 1/10W 0603 R1407
20171.101.01.1 Resistor 100Ω 1% 1/10W 060 R1311
R1410, R1412 (R1301, R1302, R1303,
20171.000.01.1 Resistor 0Ω 0603
R1304, R1401, R1402, R1403, R1404,
R1405, R1406, R1408, R1409, R1413,
R1414, R1416, R1417 NO STUFF)
20130.715.01.1 Resistor 7.15K 1% 1/8W 0805 R1308
20130.237.01.1 Resistor 2.37K 1% 1/8W 0805 R616
20130.154.01.1 Resistor 150K 1% 1/8W 0805 R1002, R1312, R1313
20130.010.01.1 Resistor 1Ω 1% 1/8W 0805 R1314
27426.005.01.1 Header UNSHRD J501
23217.000.01.1
Transistor PNP MMBT3906 40V
SOT23
Q201
20237.472.01.1 Resistor Network 8R ISO 5% RN1400
20128.000.01.1 Resistor 0Ω 0805 R213, R218, R304, R307, R314
28044.001.01.1
Oscillator 18-25MHZ INPT 3.3V
HD
U900, U902, U903
29554.000.01.1 Inductor 6.8NH 5% 0402 SMD L201
29553.000.01.1 Inductor 5.6NH 5% 0402 SMD L200, L202
28127.000.01.1 relay DPDT 5V 10GHZ 0.5W K200
28045.856.01.1 Crystal 18.5625MHZ 18PF SMD Y901
28045.270.01.1 Crystal 27.000MHZ 18PF SMD Y1400

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-29
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
28045.250.01.1 Crystal 25.000MHZ 18PF SMD Y902
28045.200.01.1 Crystal 20.000MHZ 18PF SMD Y900
27115.000.01.1 Connector BNC RA 6GHZ 75Ω J200, J201
24796.300.01.1
21198.225.01.1
21197.475.01.1
21197.224.01.1
IC FPGA VERTEX5 30K
665FPGA
Capacitor Ceramic 2.2UF 6.3V
0805
Capacitor Ceramic 4.7UF 6.3V
0402
Capacitor Ceramic 0.22UF 6.3V
0402
U700
OPTIONAL HD-SDI I/O BOARD
C717, C718, C720, C721, C723, C724,
C744, C745, C746, C747, C761, C762,
C763, C764, C765, C766
C204, C209, C210, C211, C213, C214
C715, C716, C719, C722, C725, C726,
C727, C728, C729, C730, C731, C732,
C733, C734, C735, C736, C737, C738,
C739, C740, C741, C742, C743, C748,
C749, C750, C751, C752, C753, C754,
C755, C756, C757, C758, C759, C760,
C767, C768, C769, C770, C771, C772,
C773, C774, C775, C776, C777, C778,
C779, C780, C781, C782, C783, C784,
C785, C786, C787, C788, C789
21197.105.01.1
Capacitor Ceramic 1UF 6.3V
0402
C208, C212
21194.103.01.1
Capacitor Ceramic 0.01UF 25V
0402
C215, C216, C217
20169.750.01.1 Resistor 750Ω 1/16W 1%0402 R211
20169.499.01.1 Resistor 49.9Ω 1/16W 0402 R208, R209
20169.374.01.1 Resistor 37.4Ω 1/16W 0402 R204
20169.153.01.1 Resistor 1.5KΩ 1/16W 0402 R210
20169.075.01.1 Resistor 75Ω 1/16W 1% 0402 R200, R201, R202, R203, R205, R206, R207
29551.000.01.1
Inductor Ferrite 220K 2000MA
0805
L1100, L1101, L1102, L1103, L1104, L1105,
L1106, L1107, L1108, L1109, L1110, L1300,
L1301, L1400
29540.000.01.1 BEAD Ferrite 100MHz 80ohm
L303, L304, L305, L306, L307, L308, L309,
L310, L312, L313, L314, L315, L1001, L1002
29539.000.01.1 Choke Common-Mode 1KΩ SM
L109, L110, L300, L301, L302, L311, L316,
L317, L1000
29537.102.01.1 Inductor 0805 Ferrite 1000-Ohm
L100, L318, L319, L320, L321, L322, L323,
L400, L401, L402, L403, L1003, L1004,
27426.003.01.1
Connector Header 3PIN SNGL
RW
J301, J302, J304, J305, J307, J308, J1000
29015.000.01.1
AES3id Transformer, surfacemount
T300, T301, T302, T303, T304, T305, T1000
21330.000.01.1
Capacitor Tantalum 330uF 2.5V
20% L
C709, C810, C1108, C1109, C1110, C1111,
C1304
21329.000.01.1
Capacitor Tantalum 47uF 6.3V
20% Surface Mount
C700, C701, C702, C703, C704, C705,
C706, C707, C708
21328.000.01.1
Capacitor Tantalum 33uF 6.3V
20% Surface Mount
C710, C1317
21325.610.01.1
Capacitor 10UF 10% Tantalum
3528
C104, C108, C218, C220, C315, C316,
C321, C324, C329, C332, C337, C340,

6-30
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
24769.000.01.1
IC 4-Channel Asynchronous
Converter
OPTIONAL HD-SDI I/O BOARD
C341, C342, C343, C344, C345, C400,
C403, C406, C409, C503, C600, C606,
C806, C814, C900, C901, C902, C908,
C917, C918, C1009, C1012, C1017, C1200,
C1201, C1206, C1309, C1310, C1314,
C1402, C1411, C1412
U301, U303, U305, U400, U401, U402,
U403, U1002
24676.000.01.1 IC Transistor CS8427 28 PIN U1001
21192.000.01.1
Capacitor Ceramic 3300pf 50V
5% C0G
C631
21190.000.01.1
Capacitor Ceramic 10uf 25V
LOW ESR
C809
21186.000.01.1 Capacitor 22000pF COG 0805 C222, C1007
C1003, C1120, C1121, C1122, C1123,
21177.000.01.1 Capacitor 0805 0.22UF X7R C1124, C1125, C1126, C1127, C1128,
C1129, C1130, C1302, C1303
21171.105.01.1 Capacitor 1uf X7R 0805
C100, C200, C612, C616, C619, C638,
C811, C913, C914, C915, C916, C1311
21146.310.01.1
Capacitor 0.01uf 0805 10%
0805
C207, C910, C912, C920, C1005
21143.000.01.1
Capacitor NPO 1500PF 1%
0805
C118, C119, C1006
C101, C102, C103, C105, C106, C107,
C109, C110, C111, C114, C115, C205,
C219, C221, C223, C300, C301, C302,
C303, C304, C305, C306, C307, C308,
C309, C310, C311, C312, C313, C314,
C317, C318, C319, C320, C322, C323,
C325, C326, C327, C328, C330, C331,
C333, C334, C335, C336, C338, C339,
C401, C402, C404, C405, C407, C408,
C410, C411, C500, C501, C502, C504,
C505, C506, C507, C602, C603, C608,
C609, C610, C611, C613, C622, C623,
21139.000.01.1 Capacitor X7R 0.1UF 10% 0805 C624, C627, C628, C629, C630, C633,
C635, C640, C711, C712, C713, C714,
C790, C800, C801, C802, C803, C804,
C805, C807, C808, C812, C813, C815,
C903, C904, C905, C906, C907, C909,
C911, C919, C1000, C1001, C1002, C1004,
C1008, C1010, C1011, C1013, C1014,
C1015, C1016, C1104, C1105, C1106,
C1107, C1116, C1117, C1118, C1119,
C1202, C1203, C1204, C1205, C1207,
C1208, C1209, C1210, C1211, C1212,
C1213, C1214, C1301, C1308, C1318
(C1403, NO STUFF)
20242.000.01.1
Resistor Network 47K 5% 4-
Resistor Surface-Mount
RN1001
20241.000.01.1
Resistor Network 47ohm 5% 4-
Resistor Surface-Mount
RN300, RN301, RN302, RN700, RN701,
RN702, RN703, RN704, RN705, RN706,
RN707, RN806, RN808, RN1000

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-31
OPTIONAL HD-SDI I/O BOARD
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
20239.000.01.1
Resistor Network 47ohm 5% 8-
Resistor Surface-Mount
RN200, RN800, RN801, RN802, RN803,
RN804, RN805, RN807
21138.247.01.1
Capacitor SMD1206 4700PF
50V 5%
C615
20166.051.01.1 Resistor 1/4W 5.1Ω 1% R900, R906, R909
20132.619.01.1
Resistor 1/8W 1% 619 ohm
0805
R901, R905, R907, R908
20130.475.01.1 Resistor 4.75K 0805 R614, R615, R619, R620, R717, R718, R802
20135.002.01.1 Resistor 5% 2Ω 0805 R324, R325, R326, R1013
20132.100.01.1 Resistor 1/8W 1% 100K R0805 R216, R1003
R100, R129, R130, R221, R502, R507,
20131.100.01.1 Resistor 10K 0805
R510, R511, R600, R604, R607, R618,
R701, R733, R1005, R1006, R1009 (R721,
R902, NO STUFF)
20130.249.01.1 Resistor 1/8W 1% 2.49K 0805 R512, R513, R602
20129.332.01.1 Resistor 332Ω 1% 0805 R716
R217, R719, R729, R800, R801, R1100,
20129.100.01.1 Resistor 100Ω 0805
R1101, R1102, R1103, R1300 (R219, NO
STUFF)
20129.301.01.1 Resistor 301Ω 0805 R903, R904, R910, R911
20129.110.01.1 Resistor 0805 110Ω 1% 1/8W R127, R128, R303, R312, R322
20129.604.01.1 Resistor 0805 604Ω 1% 1/8W R1001
20130.100.01.1 Resistor 1.00K 1% 0805
R220, R503, R504, R505, R506, R508,
R509, R714, R715, R726, R727
R302, R305, R306, R308, R311, R315,
R316, R317, R319, R320, R321, R323,
R400, R401, R402, R403, R404, R405,
R406, R407, R623, R624, R700, R702,
20128.499.01.1 Resistor 49.9Ω 1% 0805
R703, R704, R705, R706, R707, R708,
R709, R710, R711, R712, R713, R720,
R723, R724, R728, R730, R731, R732,
R1004, R1007, R1008, R1010, R1011,
R1012, R1112, R1200, R1415 (R722, R725,
NO STUFF)
20128.075.01.1 Resistor 75Ω 1% 0805 R215, R301, R310, R313, R612, R1000
24348.000.01.1
IC Regulator Synchronous Buck
Clk 4a
U600, U601, U603, U604
27186.000.01.1
Socket SIMM 72tin Left-
Polarized
J1200, J1201
27473.000.01.1
Connector Header Dual Row
2X7 2mm
J700
24979.000.01.1 IC BAT54C-7 D200, D501, D502
23214.000.01.1 Transistor NPN MMBT3904 Q200, Q500, Q700, Q701
24792.128.01.1 IC PIC24FJ128GA106 MCU U500
44126.000.01.1
Firmware IC
PIC24FJ128GA106
U500
44125.000.01.1 Firmware IC FPGA VIRTEX-5 U700
24732.000.01.1 IC Video Sync Separator HDTV U203

6-32
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
OPTIONAL HD-SDI I/O BOARD
29550.000.01.1
Inductor Shielded PWR 680uH
760mA
L602, L603
24798.000.01.1
IC DDR SDRAM 512MB 66-
TSO
U800, U802
24680.000.01.1
IC GS2974ACNE Cable Equalizer
U200
24679.000.01.1 IC GS2978-CNE3 U201
24349.000.01.1 IC Regulator LDO 1.5A 10-DFN U1100, U1101, U1102, U1103, U1300
24797.000.01.1 IC PROM 1.8V 16M 48TSOP U701
24420.000.01.1
IC Octal Edge-Triggered Type D
Flipflop
U1200, U1201, U1202, U1203
24419.000.01.1 IC 3-8 Line Decoder/Demux U501, U502
28099.000.01.1 Crystal 32.768 KHZ 12.5pf SM Y200
27459.006.01.1
Header 1X6 .100 PC Mount
W/LK
J500
29544.000.01.1 EMI Filter 1000pF 50V 080 L105, L106, L107, L108
29541.000.01.1 Inductor 3.3UH Power SMD L101, L102, L103, L104
25102.000.01.1 LED Yellow CLR 1206 D500, D700, D701
27451.007.01.1
Connector Double Row PC MNT
40 PIN
J601, J602
24768.000.01.1
IC 2-Channel Asynchronous
Converter
U300, U302, U304, U1000
27057.000.01.1
Connector DUAL BNC PC
Mount, Internal Capacitor
J202, J300, J303, J306
27451.004.01.1
Header STR Double Row PC-
Mount
J502, J600
27406.014.01.1 Connector Socket Strip 14 PIN J603
27147.008.01.1 IC Socket DIP 8 Pin Dual SU104, SU105
27053.003.01.1
Connector Male Insert Right Angle
J100, J101
24997.000.01.1 IC DAC AK4393VSP VSOP U100
24960.000.01.1 IC OPA2134UA U101, U102, U103
24958.000.01.1 IC DRV134PA U104, U105
24347.000.01.1
IC Regulator Low-Dropout 3.3V
1.5A SOT2
U901
24345.000.01.1
IC Regulator 3A Sink/Source
DDR 10
U801
21191.000.01.1
Capacitor Ceramic 2200PF 50V
5% COG
C636
21189.000.01.1
Capacitor Ceramic 47uF 10V
X5R 20%
C604, C605, C625, C626, C1100, C1101,
C1102, C1103, C1300
21188.000.01.1
Capacitor Ceramic 100uF 6.3V
X 5R 2
C618, C620, C621, C639
21185.220.01.1
Capacitor 22uF 6.3V X5R 20%
080
C1112, C1113, C1114, C1115, C1307
21175.000.01.1
Capacitor 6800pF 10% X7R
0805
C614, C617, C632, C634, C637
22106.000.01.1 Diode VSTT SMCJ26 DO214 CR100, CR101, CR102, CR103

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-33
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
21319.610.01.1 Capacitor 10uf Tantalum SMT C601, C607
OPTIONAL HD-SDI I/O BOARD
21140.000.01.1 Capacitor NPO 470PF 1% 0805
C112, C113, C116, C117, C122, C123,
C124, C125, C224
20130.332.01.1 Resistor 1% 3.32K 0805 R610
20240.000.01.1
Resistor Network 1.0K 5% 4-
Resistor SMD
RN600, RN1300, RN1401
20166.001.01.1 Resistor 1/4W 1% 1 ohm 1206 R601, R605, R608, R609
20131.124.01.1 Resistor 1/8W 1% 12.4K 0805 R606
20131.021.01.1 Resistor 1/8W 1% 21K 0805 R212, R613
20130.402.01.1 Resistor 1/8W 1% 4.02K 0805 R1104, R1106, R1108
20130.301.01.1 Resistor 3.01K 1% 0805 R1110
21137.447.01.1 Capacitor .47UF 25V 10% 1206 C120, C121, C201, C202
20130.200.01.1 Resistor 2.00K 0805 R1105, R1107, R1109, R1111, R1309
20511.310.01.1 Trimpot 10K 10% 3/8TOP ADJ VR100, VR101
20133.100.01.1 Resistor 1/8W 1% 1.0M 0805 R125, R126
20131.825.01.1 Resistor 1/8W 1% 82.5K 0805 R109, R110, R111, R112
20131.113.01.1 Resistor 1/8W 1% 11.3K 0805 R117, R118, R121, R122
20130.845.01.1 Resistor 1/8W 1% 8.45K 0805
R101, R102, R103, R104, R105, R106,
R107, R108, R119, R120
20130.348.01.1 Resistor 1/8W 1% 3.48K 0805 R113, R114, R115, R116, R123, R124
Optional Serial RS-232 / RS-485 Board for HD-SDI Option
PART # DESCRIPTION
SERIAL BOARD for SDI OPTION
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
20165.110.01.1 Resistor 110Ω 1% 1210 R216, R217, R218, R219
24623.000.01.1 IC Octal Buffer / Line Driver 20 U200
27147.014.01.1 IC Socket DIP 14 Pin Dual SU201, SU202
27018.009.01.1 Connector DB9 Female Filter J201, J202
24966.000.01.1 IC Quad UART ST16C554DCJ U100
27147.124.01.1 IC Socket DIP 24 Pin Dual SU101
27017.009.01.1
Connector Right-Angle PC-
Mount 9P MAL
J101
24968.000.01.1 IC MAX208ECNG+ U101
21325.610.01.1
Capacitor 10UF 10% Tantalum
3528
C100
24778.000.01.1
IC RS-485 TRANSCEIVER
14DIP
U201, U202
27451.004.01.1
Header STR Double Row PC-
Mount
J200
21139.000.01.1 Capacitor X7R 0.1UF 10% 0805
C101, C103, C104, C105, C106, C107,
C108, C109, C110, C111, C200, C201, C202
20128.000.01.1 Resistor 0Ω 0805 R201, R205, R209, R211, R213, R215

6-34
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
PART # DESCRIPTION COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
27421.050.01.1
Connector Header STR .23
2X25
J100
21141.000.01.1
Capacitor NPO 1000PF 1%
0805
C102
20132.100.01.1 Resistor 1/8W 1% 100K R0805 R102
20130.100.01.1 Resistor 1.00K 1% 0805 R100, R101
Schematics and Parts Locator Drawings
SERIAL BOARD for SDI OPTION
These drawings reflect the actual construction of your unit as accurately as possible.
Any differences between the drawings and your unit are probably due to product
improvements or production changes since the publication of this manual.
If you intend to replace parts, please read page 6-15. Please note that because surface-mount
parts are used extensively in the 8500, few parts are field-replaceable.
Servicing ordinarily occurs by swapping circuit board assemblies. However, many
vulnerable parts connected to the outside world are socketed and can be readily replaced
in the field.
Because the drawings are based on vectors and not bitmaps, they can be magnified
as needed to make fine print legible.
Function Description Drawing Page
Chassis Circuit Board Locator and basic Top view
6-37
interconnections
(not to scale)
Base Board Glue logic; supports CPU module Parts Locator 6-38
and RS-232 daughterboard.
Contains:
Drawing
System Connections Schematic 1 of 4 6-39
CPU module interface Schematic 2 of 4 6-40
Power Supply Monitor Schematic 3 of 4 6-41
CPLD, General Purpose Interface,
and Remotes
Schematic 4 of 4 6-42
CPU Module Control microprocessor. Services Parts Locator 6-43
front panel, serial port, Ethernet,
DSP board, and control board. Resides
on base board.
Contains:
Drawing
Ethernet Schematic 1 of 5 6-44
General Purpose Bus Schematic 2 of 5 6-45
Memory Schematic 3 of 5 6-46
Miscellaneous Functions Schematic 4 of 5 6-47
Power and Ground Distribution Schematic 5 of 5 6-48

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-35
Function Description Drawing Page
RS-232 Board
(base model)
Dual Power
Supply
Distribution
I/O Board
Supports Serial Port Parts Locator
Drawing
6-49
Schematic 1 of 1 6-50
Power supply supervisor automati- Parts Locator 6-51
cally chooses good power supply if
one of the dual supplies fails.
Drawing
Power Supply Input Control Schematic 1 of 2 6-52
Power Supply Failure Detector Schematic 2 of 2 6-53
Analog Output
Parts Locator 6-54
AES3 Input/output
Drawing
Contains:
Analog Outputs Schematic 1 of 6 6-55
Digital I/O and SRC 1-6 Schematic 2 of 6 6-56
Digital I/O and SRC 7-12 Schematic 3 of 6 6-57
Control and Miscellaneous Schematic 4 of 6 6-58
Interface Schematic 5 of 6 6-59
Power Distribution Schematic 6 of 6 6-60
DSP Board DSP Chips; Local +3.3V regulator. Parts Locator 6-61
Contains:
Drawing
DSP Interconnects Schematic 1 of 9 6-62
DSP Extended Serial Audio Interface
(ESAI)
Schematic 2 of 9 6-63
DSP Control Interface Schematic 3 of 9 6-64
DSP External Memory Control Interface
Schematic 4 of 9 6-65
DSP Power and Ground Schematic 5 of 9 6-66
DSP 86xx 8-bit Control Interface Schematic 6 of 9 6-67
Clock Generation and CPLD Schematic 7 of 9 6-68
86xx Power Distribution Schematic 8 of 9 6-69
External Memory Interface Controller
Schematic 9 of 9 6-70
Front-Panel LCD Carrier Parts Locator 6-71
Boards
Drawing
LCD Carrier Schematic 1 of 3 6-72
Headphone and Encoder Board Parts Locator
Drawings
6-73
Headphone Board Schematic 2 of 3 6-74
Encoder Board Schematic 3 of 3 6-75
Front-Panel Front Panel Interface Board Parts Locator 6-76
Interface
Drawing
Board Schematic 1 of 2 6-77
Schematic 2 of 2 6-78
SDI I/O Board Optional HD-SDI I/O Board Parts Locator 6-79
(optional)
Drawing 1
Contains: Parts Locator
Drawing 2
6-80

6-36
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
Function Description Drawing Page
HD-SDI Serial
Board
(for HD-SDI
System Interconnect Schematic 1 of 17 6-81
Analog Output Schematic 2 of 17 6-82
Video I/O Schematic 3 of 17 6-83
AES I/O Schematic 4 of 17 6-84
SDI I/O Schematic 5 of 17 6-85
PIC Controller Schematic 6 of 17 6-86
Power Supplies & Interface Schematic 7 of 17 6-87
FPGA Schematic 8 of 17 6-88
DDR SDRAM Schematic 9 of 17 6-89
Clock Oscillators Schematic 10 of 17 6-90
AES and Wordclock Sync Schematic 11 of 17 6-91
GTP Power & Filter Distribution Schematic 12 of 17 6-92
Dolby-E Decoder-Encoder Schematic 13 of 17 6-93
Clock Cleaner Schematic 14 of 17 6-94
Genlock Schematic 15 of 17 6-95
SRC Miscellaneous Signals Schematic 16 of 17 6-86
SRC Power Distribution Schematic 17 of 17 6-97
HD-SDI RS232/RS485 serial interface
board for HD-SDI option
Contains:
Parts Locator
Drawing
6-98
Option) UART Schematic 1 of 2 6-99
Serial Ports Schematic 2 of 2 6-100
DSP Block
Diagram
Shows signal processing 6-101

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-37

6-38
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
Base Board Parts Locator Drawing
(for schematic 62165.000.06)

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-39
JP8
TO I/O BOARD
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
JP7
TO DSP BOARD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
C21
2-5A
2-5A
2-5A
/_IO_RESET
1
2 0.1uF
+5VD
C20
1
2
4.7uF
C19
BKLITE_ON
MISC_OUT4
MISC_OUT5
SIN2
SOUT2
/RTS2
/CTS2
U13e
10
11
74HC14D
1
2
SA9
SA8
SA6
SA7
SA4
SA5
SA3
SA1
SA2
SA0
10uF
18.432MHz
TV15
36.864MHz
24.576MHz
RSTDRV
AUX_COMM
SD7
SD6
SD4
SD5
SD3
SD2
SD1
SD0
TV25
TV26
1-4B, 2-1B
1-4B
RSTDRV
/SPI_CS
SSI_DI
SSI_CLK
SSI_DO
/DACK1
DRQ1
GPAEN
/SMEMWR
/SMEMRD
DSP3.3VA
DSP3.3VB
SA(0..25)
R6
10.0K
10.0K
2-1B, 1-4B
1-4B, 2-1B
R5
10.0K
2-1B, 1-5D
2-1B
1-2C
1-4C
1-2C
1-5D
1-5D
2-1A, 1-5D
1-5D
1-5D
4-8B
4-8B
2-1A, 1-5D
2-1A, 1-5D
2-1B
2-1A, 1-5A
Q5
MMBT3904
1
R17
10.0K
R16
R15 10.0K
2-1A, 1-5A
3
4-2B
4-2B
2-1D
2-1A
SD(0..15)
/GPIOWR
/GPIORD
2
DIRTY_GND
SD(0..15)
/GPIOWR
/GPIORD
/FP_BUSEN
FPLED1
FPLED2
DISPLAY
CONTRAST
+RAW
1
2
3
4
5
J14
SD0
SD1
SD2
SD3
SD4
SD5
SD6
SD7
SD0
SD1
SD2
SD3
SD4
SD5
SD6
SD7
TO 8500 SERIES
LCD BACKLIGHT
DRIVER
R14
R13
R12
R11
R10
R9
R8
R7
FPLED1
FPLED2
DISPLAY
CONTRAST
/GPIOWR
SA0
DIRTY_GND
2
100K
100K
100K
100K
100K
100K
100K
100K
1 3
J3B
Key
TO 8300 SERIES
LCD BACKLIGHT
4
U5
74ACT245DW
+5VD
1
DIR
20
Vcc
19
/OE
9
A8 B8
11
8
A7 B7
12
7
A6 B6
13
6
A5 B5
14
5
A4 B4
15
4
A3 B3
16
3
A2 B2
17
2
A1 B1
18
Gnd
10
+RAW
+5VD
C43
1
2
R86
R87
R88
R89
R90
R91
R92
R93
0.1uF
Key Key
2 4
1 3
J3A
100K
100K
100K
100K
100K
100K
100K
100K
TO SUPPLY
MONITOR LED
FP_D0
FP_D1
FP_D2
FP_D3
FP_D4
FP_D5
FP_D6
FP_D7
FP_D0
FP_D1
FP_D2
FP_D3
FP_D4
FP_D5
FP_D6
FP_D7
FROM POWER SUPPLY
FP_D(0..7)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
J2
LCD DATA
J1
BACKLIGHT
DIRTY_GND
+5vD
+RAW
DIRTY_GND
DGND
AGND
FP_D0
FP_D1
FP_D2
FP_D3
FP_D4
FP_D5
FP_D6
+5VD +RAW
TV9 TV8
TV11 TV12 TV13 TV14
Note: C42 is not populated
in standard build.
FP_D7 FP_D0
+5vD
DGND
C22
1
2
10uF
C23
+RAW
1
2 4.7uF
+5VD
C42
1 2
10uF
FP_D7
FP_D6
FP_D5
FP_D4
FP_D3
FP_D2
FP_D1
1
2 0.1uF
TO FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY
C24
R22
2 Ω
16013.000.01
R23
+5vA —5vA -15V +15V
TV6 TV7 TV5 TV4
2 Ω
BACKLIGHT
R24
Q2
2 Ω
DISPLAY LOGIC
2
TIP120
1
Heatsink
3
R26
1
3
K
10.0 K Q1
MMBT3904
2
A
Reserved
R25
2 Ω
N/C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617181920212223242526
J4
R20 100K
+5vD
DIRTY_GND
+5VD
Plus5VA
Minus5VA
Minus15V
Plus15V
D1
Key
1N4148
/FPCOL_A
/FPCOL_B
/FPROW_A
/FPROW_B
/FPROW_C
/FPROW_D
2
4
Key
6
1 3 5
J5
POWER
C9
R4
(Monitor)
(Monitor)
(Monitor)
(Monitor)
2.00K
1
2
0.1uF
LED_PULSE
/LED
/ENCODER
FP_ROW-COL
ENC1
ENC2
+RAW
Base Board Schematic:
System Connections
(version 62165.000.06)
Sheet 1 of 4
J6
4-8C
4-8C
4-8D
4-8D
2-1D
2-1D
2-1D
2-1D
2-8D
2-8D
Note: J6 is not populated
in standard build.
Key
2 4
ENCODER
(optional)
1 3

6-40 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
============= "Accomodation Provisions" ===========
(Reserved) N/C
Default
Default
GPIRQ11
GPIRQ10
GPIRQ3
GPIRQ4
Patch 4
Patch 3
Patch 2
Patch 1
CPU Module JTAG Port
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
1
2
10uF
C1
1
2
4.7uF
C2
1
2
0.1uF
C3
SA0
SA1
SA2
SA3
SA4
SA5
SA6
SA7
SA8
SA9
SA10
SA11
SA12
SA13
SA14
SA15
SA16
SA17
SA18
SA19
PC-104 Pinouts
/CHCHK
Ground
SD7
RESDRV
SD6
+5v.
SD5
IRQ9
SD4
-5v.
SD3
DRQ2
SD2
-12v.
SD1
/ENDXFR
SD0
+12v.
CHRDY
AEN
/SMWTC
SA19
/SMRDC
SA18
/IOWC
SA17
/IORC
SA16
/DACK3
SA15
DRQ3
SA14
/DACK1
SA13
DRQ1
SA12
/REFRESH
SA11
CLK
SA10
IRQ7
SA9
IRQ6
SA8
IRQ5
SA7
IRQ4
SA6
IRQ3
SA5
/DACK2
SA4
TC
SA3
BALE
SA2
+5v.
SA1
OSC
SA0
Ground
Ground
Ground
A B
(Key)
C
D
Ground
Ground
/SBHE
/MCS16
LA23
/IO16
LA22
IRQ10
LA21
IRQ11
LA20
IRQ12
LA19
IRQ15
LA18
IRQ14
LA17
/DACK0
/MEMRD
DRQ0
/MEMWR
/DACK5
SD8
DRQ5
SD9
/DACK6
SD10
DRQ6
SD11
/DACK7
SD12
DRQ7
SD13
+5V.
SD14
/MASTER16
SD15
Ground
(Key)
Ground
A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
A9
B9
A10
A11
B11
A12
B12
A13
B13
A14
B14
A15
B15
A16
B16
A17
B17
A18
B18
A19
B19
A20
B20
A21
B21
A22
B22
A23
B23
A24
B24
A25
B25
A26
B26
A27
B27
A28
B28
A29
B29
A30
B30
A31
B31
A32
B32
D0
C0
D1
C1
D2
C2
D3
C3
D4
C4
D5
C5
D6
C6
D7
C7
D8
C8
D9
C9
D10
C10
D11
C11
D12
C12
D13
C13
D14
C14
D15
C15
D16
C16
D17
C17
D18
C18
D19
A1a
GPIRQ3
GPIRQ4
GPIRQ5
GPIRQ6
GPIRQ7
GPIRQ9
+5VD
3-6D, 2-1A
2-1A, 3-7B
2-1B
3-7C, 2-1B
2-1A, 3-7C
3-7C
3-7C
3-6D, 2-1A
3-6D, 2-1A
GPIRQ12
GPIRQ11
GPIRQ10
GPIRQ14
GPIRQ15
SD15
SD14
SD13
SD12
SD11
SD10
SD9
SD8
SA17
SA18
SA19
SA20
SA21
SA22
SA23
2-1B
2-1B
2-1B
2-1B
3-7C
3-7C
3-7C
F
E
F1
E1
F2
E2
F3
E3
F4
E4
F5
E5
F6
E6
F7
E7
F8
E8
F9
E9
F10
E10
F11
E11
F12
E12
F13
E13
F14
E14
F15
E15
F16
E16
F17
E17
F18
E18
F19
E19
F20
E20
F21
E21
F22
E22
F23
E23
F24
E24
F25
E25
F26
E26
F27
E27
F28
E28
F29
E29
F30
E30
F31
E31
F32
E32
A1b
4-8B
PATCH4
PATCH3
PATCH2
PATCH1
2-1B
1
2
10uF
C4
1
2
4.7uF
C5
1
2
0.1uF
C6 +5VD
2-1B, 3-7D
/CTS1
/DSR1
/DCD1
/RI1
/CTS2
TV2
TV3
TV30
TV31
TV32
TV33
TV34
TV35
TV36
TV37
TV38
TV39
TV40
+5VD
3-7C
3-7C
GPIRQ3
GPIRQ4
GPIRQ5
GPIRQ6
GPIRQ7
GPIRQ9
GPIRQ10
GPIRQ11
GPIRQ12
GPIRQ14
GPIRQ15
TV41
TV42
TV43
TV44
TV45
TV46
TV47
TV48
TV49
TV50
TV51
TV52
TV53
TV54
TV55
TV56
TV57
TV58
TV59
TV60
TV61
TV62
TV63
TV64
TV65
TV66
TV67
TV68
TV69
4-8B
TV70
TV71
SOUT1
SIN1
/RTS1
/DTR1
SOUT2
SIN2
/RTS2
TV74
TV75
TV76
TV77
TV72
TV73
TV80
TV81
TV82
TV83
TV84
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J13
TV85
TV86
TV87
TV88
3-7D, 2-1B
3-7D
3-7D, 2-1B
SD0
SD1
SD2
SD3
SD4
SD5
SD6
SD7
/GPIOCS
GPRDY
/SMEMWR
/SMEMRD
/DACK1
DRQ1
GPTC
GPALE
/MEMCS16
/SBHE
JTAG_STOP/TX
JTAG_CMD/ACK
JTAG_TDO JTAG_TDO
JTAG_/TRST
JTAG_/TRST
/DTR2
/RING2
/DCD2
/DSR2
SSI_DI
SSI_CLK SSI_DO
Rsvd_1
Rsvd_0
Rsvd_3
/GPCS3
CLK_TIME/TEST /GPCS4
Rsvd_2
Rsvd_7
Rsvd_6
/GPCS6
IDE_/DACK
IDE_DREQ
/GPIOCS16
/MEMRD
18.432MHz
36.864MHz
/GPIORD
/MEMWR
GPAEN
/GPIOWR
/GPCS1
/GPCS2
/GPCS5
/GPCS7
CPU_+3.3V
CPU_+2.5V
/DACK0
/DACK0
DRQ0
DRQ0
/DACK5
/DACK5
DRQ5
DRQ5
/DACK6
/DACK6
DRQ6
DRQ6
/DACK7
/DACK7
DRQ7
DRQ7
JTAG_TRIG
JTAG_TRIG
JTAG_TDI
JTAG_TDI
24.576MHz
JTAG_TMS JTAG_TMS
JTAG_TCK
JTAG_TCK
JTAG_BR/TC
JTAG_BR/TC
RSTDRV
GPIRQ(3..15)
SA(0..25)
AUX_PATCH
AUX_COMM
SD(0..15)
Base Board Schematic:
CPU Module Interface
(version 62165.000.06)
Sheet 2 of 4

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-41
+RAW
+5VD
Plus15V
Minus15V
Plus5VA
Minus5VA
+5vD
+RAW
DSP3.3VA
DSP3.3VB
CPU_+3.3V
CPU_+2.5V
R72
30.1K
R69
R65
10.0K
R75
10.0K
R73
10.0K
R74
10.0K
R80
10.0K
R81
10.0K
10.0K
R63
10.0K
R71
10.0K
R70
10.0K
TV27
TV29
TV28
(A SMALL PATCH OF GROUND)
R64
14.0K
R67
1
2
R62
2.00K
10.0K
D13
BAT54C
R60
10.0K
R61
10.0K
3
D14
1
3
2
BAT54C
R68
1
2
10.0K
R76
1
2
TV1
R102
2.49K
D15
1
3
2
BAT54C
10.0K
D16
3
BAT54C
D17
3
BAT54C
U19
13
X0
14
X1
15
X2
12
X3
1
X4
5
X5
2
X6
4
X7
Vcc_PSM
VDD
VSS
VEE
INH
1674HC4051M
8 7 6
DGND
R66
DGND
C38
11
A
10
B
9
C
100K
3
X
1
2
DGND
0.1uF
10%
PMA0
PMA1
PMA2
R85
DGND
100K
C36
1
2
R78
332K
10uF
Vcc_PSM
C40
2 1
22pF
C41
2 1
22pF
TV24
U20
1
LP2987IM-5.0
5
OUTPUT
N.C.
4
INPUT
6
SENSE
8
/SHUTDOWN
7
/ERROR
GND
3
2
DELAY
4.000 MHz
1
2
MCLR
X1
R79
1.00K
16
OSC1
15
OSC2/OUT
17
RA0/AN0
18
RA1
1
RA2/AN2/VREF
2
RA3/AN3
4
U18
MCLR
C39
PIC16C711/P
3
RA4/T0CK1
VDD VSS
14 5
1
2
0.1uF
C35
1 2
0.1uF
10%
D11
K
A
RB0/INT
RB1
RB2
RB3
RB4
RB5
RB6
RB7
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
R82
75.0 Ω
10uF
C37
1
2
PMA0
PMA1
PMA2
10uF
SOCKET
18-PIN
DIP
SU18
R83
75.0 Ω
C14
1
2
Vcc_PSM
10uF
C15
1
2
D12
A K
R84
R77
301 Ω
75.0 Ω
PWRFAIL
ERROR
D9
K
A
1N4148
FPLED1
FPLED2
D10
K A
1N4148
Vcc_PSM
DEBUG
Plus15V
+RAW
2-8D
2-8D
1
2
J11
+15V +RAW
3LCD
DEBUG/TEST
3-6D
3-6D
Base Board Schematic:
Power Supply Monitor
(version 62165.000.06)
Sheet 3 of 4

J10
NOTE:
D7 and D8 are not populated in
standard build.
D7
1 A.
Chas
1
14
2
15
3
16
4
17
5
18
6
19
7
20
8
21
9
22
10
23
11
24
12
25
13
Chas
D8
1 A.
3-1B
3-1B
4-2C
4-2C
L3
3.9uH
+RAW
DGND
L1
3.9uH
L2
3.9uH
301 Ω
R47
ENC1
ENC2
PWRFAIL
ERROR
R46 604 Ω
R48 604 Ω
R28
604 Ω
R49 604 Ω
R30 604 Ω
R50 604 Ω
R44 604 Ω
R51 604 Ω
R33 604 Ω
R52 604 Ω
R35
604 Ω
R53 604 Ω
R37 604 Ω
R54 604 Ω
R39 604 Ω
R43
C33
0.1uF
1
U10 a
16
2 15
3
PS2506-4
U10 b
14
4 13
5
PS2506-4
U10 c
12
6 11
7
PS2506-4
U10 d
8 9
1
PS2506-4
U12 a
10
16
2 15
3
PS2506-4
U12 b
14
4 13
5
PS2506-4
U12 c
12
6 11
7
+5VD
1
2
10.0 Ω
D4
A K
1N4148
PS2506-4
U12 d
D6
14 U11g
74HC14D
C34
1
7
0.1uF 2
SU10
SU12
SOCKET
SOCKET
16-PIN
DIP
16-PIN
DIP
8 9
R55 604 Ω PS2506-4
R45 10.0 Ω
D3
A K
1N4148
K
A
1N4148
DGND
10
3
2
1
U11a
1 2
74HC14D
R27
100K
U11b
3 4
74HC14D
R29
100K
U11c
5 6
74HC14D
R31
100K
U11d
9 8
74HC14D
R32
100K
U11e
11 10
74HC14D
R34
100K
U11f
13 12
74HC14D
R36
D5
Q4
MMBT3904
100K
U13a
1 2
74HC14D
R38
100K
U13b
3 4
74HC14D
R40
100K
K
1N4148
A
DGND
14U13g
74HC14D
7
3 Q3
1
+5VD
R41
1.62K
2 MMBT3904
R42
1.62K
TALLY1
TALLY2
R103
10.0K
ENC1
ENC2
PWRFAIL
ERROR
TV16
TV17
TV18
TV10
+5VD
R104
10.0K
U13d
9 8
CONT1
U13c
5 6
74HC14D
CONT2
CONT3
74HC14D
U15
2
1A1
18
1Y1
4
1A2
16
1Y2
6
1A3
14
1Y3
8
1A4
12
1Y4
11
2A1
9
2Y1
13
2A2
7
2Y2
15
2A3
5
2Y3
17
2A4
3
2Y4
1
1G
20
VCC
19
2G
10
GND
74ACT244DW
2
1A1
4
1A2
6
1A3
8
1A4
11
2A1
13
2A2
15
2A3
17
2A4
U14
18
1Y1
16
1Y2
14
1Y3
12
1Y4
9
2Y1
7
2Y2
5
2Y3
3
2Y4
1
1G
20
VCC
19
2G
10
GND
74ACT244DW
R56
R57
R58
2.00K
5.62K
C32
C30
14.0K
+5VD
U4
20 Vcc
OE
CP
1
11
2 QO
5 Q1
6 Q2
9 Q3
12 Q4
15 Q5
16 Q6
19 Q7
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
3
4
7
8
13
14
17
18
C7
1 10 Gnd
0.1uF 2 74HCT374
+5VD
1
2
+5VD
1
2
MISC_OUT5
MISC_OUT4
BKLITE_ON
TV78 TV79
U13f
0.1uF
R59
0.1uF
13 12
74HC14D
301 Ω
(Spare)
SD0
SD1
SD2
SD3
SD4
SD5
SD6
SD7
/MISC_IN
SD0
SD1
SD2
SD3
SD4
SD5
SD6
SD7
/REMOTE_IN
CONTRAST
/MISC_OUT
SD0
SD1
SD2
SD3
SD4
SD5
SD6
SD7
3-8A
3-8A
3-8A
TV19
TV20
TV21
SD0
SD1
SD2
SD3
SD4
SD5
SD6
SD7
6-42
C10
/GPIORD
/AUX_BUSEN
0.1uF
C11
0.1uF
C12
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
U3
74ACT245DW +5VD
1
DIR
20
Vcc
19
/OE
9
A8
11
B8
8
A7
12
B7
7
A6
13
B6
6
A5
14
B5
5
A4
15
B4
4
A3
16
B3
3
A2
17
B2
2
A1
18
B1
Gnd
10
0.1uF
C8
C13
1
2
0.1uF
0.1uF
AUX_D0
AUX_D1
AUX_D2
AUX_D3
AUX_D4
AUX_D5
AUX_D6
AUX_D7
+5VD
100K
R1
J12
TCK 1 2
TDO 3 4
TMS 5 6
NC
TDI
NC 7
9
8
NC
10
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
G G G G G G G G G G G V
# # # #
nd nd nd nd nd nd nd nd nd nd nd c
T T T T
c
C D M D
K O S I
N/C
O
N/C
SA0
SA1 SA1
SA2 SA2
SA3 SA3
SA4 SA4
SA5 SA5
SA6
SA7
SA6
SA7 P/N: 24983.000.01
SA8
SA9
SA8
SA9
Altera EPM 7064 STC 100-10
SA10
SA11
SA12
SA13
SA14
SA15
SA16
SA17
SA18
SA19
SA20
SA21
SA22
SA23
SA24
SA25
N/C
N/C
/I
V
c
c
N
T
I
V
c
c
N
T
I
V
c
c
O /I
V
c
c
O /I
V
c
c
O /I
V
c
c
O /I
V
c
c
O /I
DISPLAY
#LED
#ENCODER
LED_PULSE
#FPCOL_A
#FPCOL_B
#FPROW_A
#FPROW_B
#FPROW_C
#FPROW_D
#FP_BUSEN
#AUX_BUSEN
#AUX0
#AUX1
#AUX2
#AUX3
#SPI_CS
#USB_CS
N I
G
P
A
E
N
#
# M
M I
M
I S
T
H
S C
z E C
O
1
U
8
T
I
N
/
C
B
K
L
O
N
/N
N
/
C C
N
/
C
/N
C
N
N N
/
/ /
C
C C
/N
N N
/ /
C C C
/N
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
# #
G G
P P
I I
O O
R W
D R
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
T
N C
I
11 26 38 43 59 74 86 88 89 90 95 39 91 82 66 51 34 18 3 62 73 15 4 U1
1
2
57
16
58
94
48
96
84
12
46
10
54
9
45
8
6
47
52
13
14
56
79
17
76
19
80
20
65
21
71
23
64
25
42
29
41
30
40
31
32
63
33
67
35
68
36
69
37
75
93
92
5
7
#
R
E
M
O
E
81
83
85
22 24 27 28 99 98 100 87 97 49 50 61 44 60 53 55 70 72 77 78
R3
100K
R2
100K
JTAG Port
DISPLAY
/LED
/ENCODER
LED_PULSE
/FPCOL_A
/FPCOL_B
/FPROW_A
/FPROW_B
/FPROW_C
/FPROW_D
/FP_BUSEN
/AUX_BUSEN
/SPI_CS
/USB_CS
RSTDRV
/GPIOCS
/MEMCS
/GPIOCS16
/MEMCS16
/MEMRD
/MEMWR
24.576MHz
/AUX_0
/AUX_1
/AUX_2
/AUX_3
/CTS2
/RTS2
SIN2
SOUT2
/RI1
/DCD1
/DSR1
/CTS1
/DTR1
/RTS1
SIN1
SOUT1
FP_ROW-COL
DISPLAY
/LED
/ENCODER
LED_PULSE
AUX_D7
AUX_D6
AUX_D5
AUX_D4
AUX_D3
AUX_D2
AUX_D1
AUX_D0
PATCH1
PATCH2
PATCH3
PATCH4
/AUX_0
/AUX_1
/AUX_2
/AUX_3
SA2
SA1
SA0
+5VD
RSTDRV
18.432MHz
/USB_CS
/GPIOWR
/GPIORD
AUX_COMM
AUX_PATCH
RSTDRV
/FP_BUSEN
/SPI_CS
/GPIOCS
/MEMCS
/GPIOCS16
/MEMCS16
/MEMRD
/MEMWR
24.576MHz
18.432MHz
/GPIOWR
/GPIORD
GPAEN
CONTRAST
SA(0..25)
SD(0..15)
To Peripheral Board
J9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
C18
2
2
3-1B
3-6D
3-1B
3-1B
3-1B
C17
10uF
1
0.1uF
Base Board Schematic:
CPLD, GPI & Remote
(version 62165.000.06)
Sheet 4 of 4
1
1-4B, 3-7D
1-4B
3-7C, 1-5D
3-6D
3-7C
1-5D
1-5D
1-5D
1-5D
1-5D
3-7D, 1-4B
3-7D, 1-4B
3-6D, 1-5D
3-6D, 1-5D
3-7C, 1-5D
3-6D
1-5A, 3-7B
3-6D, 1-5A

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-43
CPU MODULE
Drawing 32200.000.02

1 10
9
8
7
6
4
3
2
5
C
+3.3 VDC
Req4-n
Req3-n
Req2-n
Req1-n
IntD-n
IntC-n
IntB-n
RN4
4.7 k, 5%, CTS 745?083472J
U3
R3
P4
N3
U4
T3
P3
N4
H4
H3
J3
Req4-n
Req3-n
Req2-n
Req1-n
Gnt4-n
Gnt3-n
Gnt2-n
Gnt1-n
IntD-n
IntC-n
IntB-n
AMD ElanSC520-100AC
U1C
AD31
AD30
AD29
AD28
AD27
AD26
AD25
AD24
AD23
AD22
AD21
AD20
AD19
AD18
AD17
AD16
AD15
AD14
AD13
AD12
AD11
AD10
AD9
AD8
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
AD1
AD0
CBE3-n
CBE2-n
CBE1-n
CBE0-n
A2
A1
B1
B2
D2
D1
E1
E2
F1
G1
G2
H2
H1
J1
J2
K2
R2
T2
T1
U1
U2
V2
V1
W1
Y2
Y1
AA1
AA2
AB2
AB1
AC1
AC2
F2
K1
R1
W2
Reset-n
DevSel-n
Stop-n
IRdy-n
TRdy-n
Frame-n
PErr-n
SErr-n
Parity
A5
M1
N1
L2
M2
L1
N2
P2
P1
Req0-n
Gnt0-n
IntA-n
L3
M3
K3
ClkPCIOut
ClkPCIIn
A6
G3
PCI_AD31
PCI_AD30
PCI_AD29
PCI_AD28
PCI_AD27
PCI_AD26
PCI_AD25
PCI_AD24
PCI_AD23
PCI_AD22
PCI_AD21
PCI_AD20
PCI_AD19
PCI_AD18
PCI_AD17
PCI_AD16
PCI_AD15
PCI_AD14
PCI_AD13
PCI_AD12
PCI_AD11
PCI_AD10
PCI_AD9
PCI_AD8
PCI_AD7
PCI_AD6
PCI_AD5
PCI_AD4
PCI_AD3
PCI_AD2
PCI_AD1
PCI_AD0
PCI_CBE3-n
PCI_CBE2-n
PCI_CBE1-n
PCI_CBE0-n
PCI_Reset-n
PCI_DevSel-n
PCI_Stop-n
PCI_IRdy-n
PCI_TRdy-n
PCI_Frame-n
PCI_PErr-n
PCI_SErr-n
PCI_Parity
PCI_Req0-n
PCI_Gnt0-n
PCI_IntA-n
PCI_ClkOut
PCI_ClkIn
+3.3 VDC
R12
330 ohm, 5%, 0805
R10
33.2 ohm, 5%, 0805
PCI_ClkReference
R11
33.2 ohm, 5%, 0805
R13
470 ohm, 5%, 0805
C2
100 pf
PCI_ClkReturn
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
PCI_AD[0..31]
+3.3 VDC
1
4
RN5
R-PACK
ClkRef
Vss
Vcc
Clk1
Clk2
Clk3
Clk4
ClkOut
CY2305SI-1H
U11
6
3
2
5
7
8
+3.3 VDC
PCI_Clk1Out
R14
33.2 ohm, 5%, 0805
R15
470 ohm, 5%, 0805
+3.3 VDC
+3.3 VDC
PCI_AD31
PCI_AD30
PCI_AD29
PCI_AD28
PCI_AD27
PCI_AD26
PCI_AD25
PCI_AD24
PCI_AD23
PCI_AD22
PCI_AD21
PCI_AD20
PCI_AD19
PCI_AD18
PCI_AD17
PCI_AD16
PCI_AD15
PCI_AD14
PCI_AD13
PCI_AD12
PCI_AD11
PCI_AD10
PCI_AD9
PCI_AD8
PCI_AD7
PCI_AD6
PCI_AD5
PCI_AD4
PCI_AD3
PCI_AD2
PCI_AD1
PCI_AD0
PCI_AD24
R16
330 ohm, 5%, 0805
PCI_Clk1
CnfgDisn
6-44
66
67
68
70
71
72
73
74
78
79
81
82
83
86
87
88
101
102
104
105
106
108
109
110
112
113
115
116
118
119
120
121
76
60
28
29
6
15
14
12
11
10
7
31
141
140
139
138
135
134
133
132
R17
1 k, 5%, 0805
AD31
AD30
AD29
AD28
AD27
AD26
AD25
AD24
AD23
AD22
AD21
AD20
AD19
AD18
AD17
AD16
AD15
AD14
AD13
AD12
AD11
AD10
AD09
AD08
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
AD1
AD0
75
89
100
111
CBEN3-n
CBEN2-n
CBEN1-n
CBEN0-n
62
95
96
92
93
91
97
98
99
Reset-n
DevSel-n
Stop-n
IRdy-n
TRdy-n
Frame-n
PErr-n
SErr-n
Par
64
63
61
Req-n
Gnt-n
IntA-n
IDSel
122
3VAux
123
PwrGood
59
PME-n/ClkRun-n
PCIClk
ColDetect
CarSense
RxClk
RxDataVal/MA11
RxErr/MA10
RxData3/MA9
RxData2/MA8
RxData1/MA7
RxData0/MA6
TxClk
MD7
MD6
MD5
MD4/EEDO
MD3
MD2
MD1/CNFGDISN
MD0
National DP83815DVNG
U10A
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
TPTDP
TPTDM
TPRDP
TPRDM
X1
X2
MgmtDataClk
MgmtDataIO
RxOE
TxEn
TxData3/MA15
TxData2/MA14
TxData1/MA13
TxData0/MA12
MWRN
MRDN
MCSN
EESel
MA5
MA4/EECLK
MA3/EEDI
MA2/LED100Link
MA1/LED10Link
MA0/LEDAcitvity
54
53
46
45
17
18
5
4
13
30
25
24
23
22
131
130
129
128
3
2
1
144
143
142
TxData-
RxData+
RxData-
X1
X2
MDIO
TxData+
C5
18 pf
C3
18 pf
SerialROMCS
SerialROMClk
SerialROMDataIn
LED100Link
LEDActivity
Y1
Ecliptek ECSMA-25.000M
R18
14.7 k, 5%, 0805
R19
49.9 ohm, 1%, 0805
R20
49.9 ohm, 1%, 0805
R22
49.9 ohm, 1%, 0805
R23
49.9 ohm, 1%, 0805
C4
18 pf
SerialROMDataOut
R24
160 ohm, 5%, 0805
R21
49.9 ohm, 1%, 0805
C6
18 pf
C7
18 pf
+3.3 VDC
+3.3 VDC
1
CS Vcc
8
2
SK NC
7
3
DI NC
6
4
DO Gnd
5
NM93C46LEMT8
U12
R25
160 ohm, 5%, 0805
TxCT
C8
0.1 uf
YelLEDA
GrnLEDA
RxCT
+3.3 VDC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
8
13
14
Tx+
CT1
Tx-
Rx+
CT2
Rx-
NC
YelLEDA
YelLEDC
GrnLEDA
GrnLEDC
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
RJ-45 MAGJack LED
J1
CPU Module: Ethernet

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-45
MasterReset-n
GPCS1-n
GPCS2-n
GPCS3-n
GPCS4-n
GPCS5-n
FlashStatus
PIO10
GPCS6-n
GPCS7-n
IDE_DReq
IDE_DAck-n
3
1
MstrReset Vcc
Gnd Reset-n
MIC8114TU
U5
4
2
R1
10 k, 5%, 0805
+3.3 VDC
B24
C23
AC21
AA24
AC20
+3.3 VDC
PwrGood C20
PwrGood
ROMCS1-n/GPCS1-n
ROMCS2-n/GPCS2-n
PITGate2/GPCS3-n
TimerIn1/GPCS4-n
TimerIn0/GPCS5-n
AE10
PIO6/GPDReq2
AD9
PIO10/GPDAck2-n
AC23
TimerOut1/GPCS6-n
AD23
TimerOut0/GPCS7-n
AD10
PIO5/GPDReq3
AE9
PIO9/GPDAck3-n
PIO14/GPIRQ9
AMD ElanSC520-100AC
U1B
GPD15
GPD14
GPD13
GPD12
GPD11
GPD10
GPD9
GPD8
GPD7
GPD6
GPD5
GPD4
GPD3
GPD2
GPD1
GPD0
GPA25
GPA24
GPA23
GPA22
GPA21
GPA20
GPA19
GPA18
GPA17
GPA16
GPA15
GPA14
GPA13
GPA12
GPA11
GPA10
GPA9
GPA8
GPA7
GPA6
GPA5
GPA4
GPA3
GPA2
GPA1
GPA0
AE8
PIO11/GPDAck1-n
AC9
PIO7/GPDReq1
AF10
PIO16/GPIRQ7
PIO17/GPIRQ6
PIO18/GPIRQ5
PIO19/GPIRQ4
PIO20/GPIRQ3
AF7
AE7
AD7
AD6
AE6
PIO4/GPTC
AD11
PIO0/GPALE
AE12
PIO2/GPRdy
AF11
PIO3/GPAEN
AE11
PIO27/GPCS0-n
AE4
PIO1/GPBHE-n
PIO24/GPDBUFOE-n
GPReset
AC22
PrgReset
D20
GPMemRd-n
GPMemWr-n
GPIOWr-n
GPIORd-n
D17
C17
C15
D14
D13
C13
C12
C11
C10
D10
D9
C9
C8
C7
B5
C4
C3
D4
D3
F3
C19
C14
C21
B22
E24
D24
AF12
C24
R24
P24
N24
N23
M23
C2
M24
F23
C1
H24
L24
J23
K24
G4
J24
F24
C18
C16
G24
AD5
PIO26/GPMemCS16-n
AD4
PIO25/GPIOCS16-n
AC4
PIO13/GPIRQ10
AD8
PIO23/GPIRQ0
AE5
PIO22/GPIRQ1
AF5
PIO21/GPIRQ2
AF6
PIO15/GPIRQ8
AF8
PIO12/GPDAck0-n
AC8
PIO8/GPDReq0
AF9
GP_Reset
PrgReset
GPD15
GPD7
GPD14
GPD6
GPD13
GPD5
GPD12
GPD4
GPD11
GPD3
GPD10
GPD2
GPD9
GPD1
GPD8
GPD0
GPD7
GPD15
GPD6
GPD14
GPD5 GPD13
GPD4
GPD12
GPD3
GPD11
GPD2
GPD10
GPD1
GPD9
GPD0
GPD8
GPA24
GPA23
GPA22
GPA21
GPA20
GPA19
GPA18
GPA17
GPA16
GPA15
GPA14
GPA13
GPA12
GPA11
GPA10
GPA9
GPA8
GPA7
GPA6
GPA5
GPA4
GPA3
GPA2
GPA1
GPA0
GP_MemRd-n
GP_MemWr-n
GP_IOWr-n
GP_IORd-n
GPDBufOE-n
GPA23
GPA24
GPA21
GPA20
GPA22
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
17
27
GPA24
GPA23
R3
4.75 k, 5%, 0805
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
I10
I11
2
IClk
16
OutEn
Out0
Out1
Out2
Out3
Out4
Out5
Out6
Out7
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
GAL 20LV8D-7LJ
U6A
R4
4.75 k, 5%, 0805
GPA[0..24]
GPD[0..15]
GP_SMemWr-n
GP_SMemRd-n
BuffRd-n
47
46
44
43
41
40
38
37
36
35
33
32
30
29
27
26
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
1A5
1A6
1A7
1A8
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
2A5
2A6
2A7
2A8
1B1
1B2
1B3
1B4
1B5
1B6
1B7
1B8
2B1
2B2
2B3
2B4
2B5
2B6
2B7
2B8
2
3
5
6
8
9
11
12
13
14
16
17
19
20
22
23
1
24
1DIR
2DIR
1OE
2OE
48
25
74ACLV162450/SO
U7A
MemCS16-n
IOCS16-n
IRQ10
IRQ11
IRQ12
IRQ15
IRQ14
DAck0-n
DReq0
DAck5-n
DReq5
DAck6-n
DReq6
DAck7-n
DReq7
+5 VDC
R2
10 k, 5%, 0805
ResetDrv-n
ISA_D7
ISA_D6
ISA_D5
ISA_D4
ISA_D3
ISA_D2
ISA_D1
ISA_D0
ISA_D15
ISA_D14
ISA_D13
ISA_D12
ISA_D11
ISA_D10
ISA_D9
ISA_D8
P2B
D1
Gnd
D2
MemCS16-n
D3
IOCS16-n
D4
IRQ10
D5
IRQ11
D6
IRQ12
D7
IRQ15
D8
IRQ14
D9
DAck0-n
D10
DReq0
D11
DAck5-n
D12
DReq5
D13
DAck6-n
D14
DReq6
D15
DAck7-n
D16
DReq7
D17
+5 VDC
D18
Master-n
D19
Gnd
D20
Gnd
PC104-P2
GP_SMemRd-n = GPA20 + GPA21 + GPA22 + GPA23 + GPA24 + GP_MemRd-n
GP_SMemWr-n = GPA20 + GPA21 + GPA22 + GPA23 + GPA24 + GP_MemWr-n
ResetDrv-n = GP_Reset
PrgReset = !MasterReset-n
BuffRd-n = GP_MemRd-n & GP_IORd-n
ISA_D[0..15]
+3.3 VDC
GPA15
GPA14
GPA13
GPA12
GPA11
GPA10
GPA9
GPA8
GPA7
GPA6
GPA5
GPA4
GPA3
GPA2
GPA1
GPA0
GPA23
GPA22
GPA21
GPA20
GP_SMemWr-n
GP_SMemRd-n
GPA19
GPA18
GP_Reset
GP_AEN
GPA17
GPA16
GP_MemRd-n
GP_MemWr-n
+3.3 VDC
47
46
44
43
41
40
38
37
36
35
33
32
30
29
27
26
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
1A5
1A6
1A7
1A8
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
2A5
2A6
2A7
2A8
1B1
1B2
1B3
1B4
1B5
1B6
1B7
1B8
2B1
2B2
2B3
2B4
2B5
2B6
2B7
2B8
2
3
5
6
8
9
11
12
13
14
16
17
19
20
22
23
1
24
1DIR
2DIR
1OE
2OE
48
25
74ACLV162450/SO
U9A
BHE-n
47
46
44
43
41
40
38
37
36
35
33
32
30
29
27
26
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
1A5
1A6
1A7
1A8
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
2A5
2A6
2A7
2A8
1B1
1B2
1B3
1B4
1B5
1B6
1B7
1B8
2B1
2B2
2B3
2B4
2B5
2B6
2B7
2B8
2
3
5
6
8
9
11
12
13
14
16
17
19
20
22
23
1
24
1DIR
2DIR
1OE
2OE
48
25
74ACLV162450/SO
U8A
DReq2
DReq3
DReq1
DReq0
DReq5
2
3
4
6
7
5
8
DReq6
DReq7
9
1 10
C
4.7 k, 5%, CTS 745?083472J
RN2
ISA_A15
ISA_A14
ISA_A13
ISA_A12
ISA_A11
ISA_A10
ISA_A9
ISA_A8
ISA_A7
ISA_A6
ISA_A5
ISA_A4
ISA_A3
ISA_A2
ISA_A1
ISA_A0
ISA_A23
ISA_A22
ISA_A21
ISA_A20
ISA_SMemWr-n
ISA_SMemRd-n
ISA_IOWr-n
ISA_IORd-n
ISA_A19
ISA_A18
ISA_Reset
ISA_AEN
ISA_A17
ISA_A16
ISA_MemRd-n
ISA_MemWr-n
ISA_OE-n
+5 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC
1 2
JP1
1 2
JP2
ISA_A[0..23]
1 2
JP3
DAck3-n
DAck5-n
DAck1-n
DAck0-n
2
3
4
6
5
7
DAck6-n
DAck7-n
DAck2-n
8
9
1 10
C
4.7 k, 5%, CTS 745?083472J
RN3
ISA_Reset
IRQ9
-5 VDC
DReq2
-12 VDC
+12 VDC
Document Number
62200.000.01
ISA_SMemWr-n
ISA_SMemRd-n
ISA_IOWr-n
ISA_IORd-n
DAck3-n
DReq3
DAck1-n
DReq1
IRQ7
IRQ6
IRQ5
IRQ4
IRQ3
DAck2-n
TC
ALE
NMI
ISA_D7
ISA_D6
ISA_D5
ISA_D4
ISA_D3
ISA_D2
ISA_D1
ISA_D0
IOChRdy
ISA_AEN
ISA_A19
ISA_A18
ISA_A17
ISA_A16
ISA_A15
ISA_A14
ISA_A13
ISA_A12
ISA_A11
ISA_A10
ISA_A9
ISA_A8
ISA_A7
ISA_A6
ISA_A5
ISA_A4
ISA_A3
ISA_A2
ISA_A1
ISA_A0
+5 VDC
ISA_A23
ISA_A22
ISA_A21
ISA_A20
ISA_A19
ISA_A18
ISA_A17
ISA_MemRd-n
ISA_MemWr-n
ISA_D8
ISA_D9
ISA_D10
ISA_D11
ISA_D12
ISA_D13
ISA_D14
ISA_D15
+3.3 VDC
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
A32
P1B
BHE
Gnd
Reset
Vcc
IRQ9
-5 VDC
DReq2
-12 VDC
OWS-n
+ 12 VDC
Gnd
SMemWr-n
SMemRd-n
IOWr-n
IORd-n
DAck3-n
DReq3
DAck1-n
DReq1
Refresh-n
SysClk
IRQ7
IRQ6
IRQ5
IRQ4
IRQ3
DAck2-n
TC
ALE
Vcc
OSC
Gnd
Gnd
PC104-P1
P1A
IOChk-n
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
IOChRdy
AEN
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
Gnd
PC104-P1
P2A
C1
Gnd
C2
SBHe
C3
LA23
C4
LA22
C5
LA21
C6
LA20
C7
LA19
C8
LA18
C9
LA17
C10
MemRd-n
C11
MemWr-n
C12
SD8
C13
SD9
C14
SD10
C15
SD11
C16
SD12
C17
SD13
C18
SD14
C19
SD15
C20
Key
PC104-P2
GPD[0..15]
GPA[0..24]
CPU Module:
General Purpose Bus

+3.3 VDC
5 2 MECC4
3
4 MECC6
6 MECC3
7 MECC2
8 MECC5
9 MECC1
10
C
1 MECC0
CTS 745?083102J
RN1
MD31
MD30
MD29
MD28
MD27
MD26
MD25
MD24
MD23
MD22
MD21
MD20
MD19
MD18
MD17
MD16
MD15
MD14
MD13
MD12
MD11
MD10
MD9
MD8
MD7
MD6
MD5
MD4
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
MECC6
MECC5
MECC4
MECC3
MECC2
MECC1
MECC0
A24
A23
B21
A20
A19
B18
A17
B16
A15
B14
A13
B12
A11
B10
A9
B8
B23
A22
A21
B20
A18
B17
A16
B15
A14
B13
A12
B11
A10
B9
A8
B7
Y26
D25
C26
Y25
W26
D26
C25
MD31
MD30
MD29
MD28
MD27
MD26
MD25
MD24
MD23
MD22
MD21
MD20
MD19
MD18
MD17
MD16
MD15
MD14
MD13
MD12
MD11
MD10
MD9
MD8
MD7
MD6
MD5
MD4
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
MECC6
MECC5
MECC4
MECC3
MECC2
MECC1
MECC0
GPA[0..24]
ROMRd-n
FlashWR-n
BootCS-n
ResetDrv-n
AMD ElanSC520-100AC
U1A
MA12
MA11
MA10
MA9
MA8
MA7
MA6
MA5
MA4
MA3
MA2
MA1
MA0
BA1
BA0
SWEA-n
SCASA-n
SRASA-n
SCS0-n
SDQM3
SDQM2
SDQM1
SDQM0
SRASB-n
SCASB-n
SWEB-n
SCS1-n
SCS2-n
SCS3-n
V26
U26
T26
R26
R25
P25
P26
N26
N25
M25
M26
L26
L25
U25
T25
E26
F25
K25
V25
H25
G26
H26
G25
K26
F26
E25
W25
J25
J26
B19 ClkMemOut
ClkMemOut
ClkMemIn
A4
MD[0..31]
6-46
MA12
MA11
MA10
MA9
MA8
MA7
MA6
MA5
MA4
MA3
MA2
MA1
MA0
BA1
BA0
+3.3 VDC
R7
4.75k, 5%, 0805
MA12
MA11
MA10
MA9
MA8
MA7
MA6
MA5
MA4
MA3
MA2
MA1
MA0
36
35
22
34
33
32
31
30
29
26
25
24
23
21
20
A12
A11
A10/AP
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
BA1
BA0
DQ15
DQ14
DQ13
DQ12
DQ11
DQ10
DQ9
DQ8
DQ7
DQ6
DQ5
DQ4
DQ3
DQ2
DQ1
DQ0
53
51
50
48
47
45
44
42
13
11
10
8
7
5
4
2
MD15
MD14
MD13
MD12
MD11
MD10
MD9
MD8
MD7
MD6
MD5
MD4
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
+3.3 VDC
R8
4.75k, 5%, 0805
MA12
MA11
MA10
MA9
MA8
MA7
MA6
MA5
MA4
MA3
MA2
MA1
MA0
RAMWE-n
RAMCAS-n
RAMRAS-n
RAMCS-n
CKELow
37
16
17
18
19
CKE
WE-n
CAS-n
RAS-n
CS-n
UDQM
LDQM
39
15
SDQM1
SDQM0
CKEHigh
SDQM3
SDQM2
SDQM1
38
CLK
SDQM0
SDQM[0..3]
32 Mbit x 16 SDRAM
U2A
ClkMemIn
R5
22 ohm, 5%, 0805
22 ohm, 5%, 0805
R6
MA[0..12]
DRAMClk
C1
4.7 pf
+3.3 VDC
Route the ClkMemIn trace back and forth so that it is the
same length as the SDRAMClk trace to either chip.
Route the SDRAMCLK "T" style so that the trace length
to each SDRAM chip is the same length.
Place the two (2), 22 ohm series terminating resistors as
close as possible to the ElanSC520.
Place the 4.7 fp capacitor as close as possible to the
Elan SC520. Adjust the value to equalize loading on
SDRAMCLK and ClkMemIn nets.
Flash Circuitry
GPA24
GPA23
GPA22
GPA21
GPA20
GPA19
GPA18
GPA17
GPA16
GPA15
GPA14
GPA13
GPA12
GPA11
GPA10
GPA9
GPA8
GPA7
GPA6
GPA5
GPA4
GPA3
GPA2
GPA1
GPA0
56
30
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
32
31
54
55
14
2
29
16
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
Byte-n
OE-n
WE-n
CE0-n
CE1-n
CE2-n
RP-n
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
E28F128J3A-150
U4A
52
50
47
45
41
39
36
34
51
49
46
44
40
38
D1
35
D0
33
Vpen
STS
15
53
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
GPD15
GPD14
GPD13
GPD12
GPD11
GPD10
GPD9
GPD8
GPD7
GPD6
GPD5
GPD4
GPD3
GPD2
GPD1
GPD0
+3.3 VDC
+3.3 VDC
R9
10k, 5%, 0805
Document Number
62200.000.01
36
35
22
34
33
32
31
30
29
26
25
24
23
21
20
37
16
17
18
19
38
GPD[0..15]
A12
A11
A10/AP
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
BA1
BA0
CKE
WE-n
CAS-n
RAS-n
CS-n
CLK
DQ15
DQ14
DQ13
DQ12
DQ11
DQ10
DQ9
DQ8
DQ7
DQ6
DQ5
DQ4
DQ3
DQ2
DQ1
DQ0
32 Mbit x 16 SDRAM
U3A
53
51
50
48
47
45
44
42
13
11
10
8
7
5
4
2
UDQM
39
LDQM
15
MD31
MD30
MD29
MD28
MD27
MD26
MD25
MD24
MD23
MD22
MD21
MD20
MD19
MD18
MD17
MD16
SDQM3
SDQM2
GPD[0..15]
FlashStatus
CPU Module: Memory

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-47
AF25
AF23
AF1
AE25
AE24
AE1
AD26
AD25
AD2
AD1
AC25
AC3
AA26
AB4
AB3
E23
D23
C22
E3
C6
C5
B6
B4
B3
A3
NC0
NC1
NC2
NC3
NC4
NC5
NC6
NC7
NC8
NC9
NC10
NC11
NC12
NC13
NC14
NC15
NC16
NC17
NC18
NC19
NC20
NC21
NC22
NC23
NC24
AMD ElanSC520-100AC
U1D
Trig/Trace
BR/TC
JTAG_TMS
JTAG_TDI
JTAG_TCK
AC13
AD24
AE21
AF21
AD21
PIO31/Ring2-n
PIO30/DCD2-n
PIO29/DSR2-n
PIO28/CTS2-n
Ring1-n
DCD1-n
DSR1-n
CTS1-n
AD3
AE3
AF3
AF4
AA3
V4
Y3
V3
SSI_Clk
AD19
CF_DRAM-n/CFG2
PITOut2/CGF3
ClkTimer/CltTest
W24
Y24
A7
AE17
AD17
AC17
AC16
AD16
AE16
AF16
AF15
AE15
AD15
AD14
AE14
AF14
AF13
AE13
AD13
AD18
AE18
AF18
AC12
T24
T23
AF20
AE20
AD12
PData15
PData14
PData13
PData12
PData11
PData10
PData09
PData08
PData07
PData06
PData05
PData04
PData03
PData02
PData01
PData0
PAddr2
PAddr1
PAddr0
ICE_Dis
PBReq
TV
PBGnt
PRW
TClk
Stop/TX
CmdAck
JTAG_TDO
JTAG_TRst-n
DTR2-n
RTS2-n
SIn2
SOut2
DTR1-n
RTS1-n
SIn1
SOut1
SSI_DI
SSI_DO
+3.3 VDC
AF17
U24
AF22
AE22
AE23
AD22
V24
U23
W3
W4
AE2
AF2
AE19
AF19
DataStrb/CFG1
CS_ROM_GPCS-n/CFG0
AC24
AD20
ROMRd-n
FlashWr-n
BootCS-n
ROMBufOE-n
AB23
AB24
AB25
AA25
Trig/Trace
BR/TC
JTAG_TMS
JTAG_TDI
JTAG_TCK
Ring2-n
DCD2-n
DSR2-n
CTS2-n
Ring1-n
DCD1-n
DSR1-n
CTS1-n
SSI_Clk
CFG2
PITOut2/CFG3
ClkTimer/ClkTest
R27
4.75 k, 5%, 0805
Stop/TX
CmdAck
JTAG_TDO
JTAG_TRst-n
DTR2-n
RST2-n
SIn2
SOut2
DTR1-n
RTS1-n
SIn1
SOut1
SSI_DI
SSI_DO
+3.3 VDC
DataStrb/CFG1
CS_ROM_GPCS-n/CFG0
4.75 k, 5%, 0805
R30
R28
+3.3 VDC
+3.3 VDC
4.75 k, 5%, 0805
R26
4.75 k, 5%, 0805
ROMRd-n
FlashWr-n
BootCS-n
IDE_DReq
IDE_DAck-n
GPCS1-n
GPCS2-n
GPCS3-n
GPCS4-n
GPCS5-n
GPCS6-n
GPCS7-n
+2.5 VDC
R29
4.75 k, 5%, 0805
+3.3 VDC
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
A32
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
P3A
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
A32
32X2Conn
P3B
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
32X2Conn
R31
10 ohm, 5%, 0805
C9
0.1 uf
+3.3 VDC
C10
0.001 uf
Vcc_Osc
+2.5 VDC
VBat
4
C11
0.01 uf
4.75 k, 5%, 0805
R32
VccOsc VccCPU
2
Gnd ClkOut
3
Epson SG-636PCE-33MC2
X1
1
C12
0.01 uf
+3.3 VDC
A4
A5
B4
B5
A7
A8
B7
B8
Vbat 32.768 khz
Vbat 32.768 khz
Vbat 32.768 khz
Vbat 32.768 khz
T
T
T
T
DS32khz
U13A
T
T
T
T
C4
C5
D4
D5
C7
C8
D7
D8
LF_PLL
RTC_Clock
AF24
AC26
AB26
AE26
AF26
LF_PLL
33MXtal2
33MXtal1
32kXtal2
32kXtal1
AMD ElanSC520-100AC
U1E
Document Number
62200.000.01
CPU Module: Miscellaneous

+5 VDC
5
5
+2.5 VDC
4
4
34
42
43
48
NC1
NC2
NC3
NC4
+2.5 VDC
Res3
Res2
Res1
127
50
41
3
3
6-48
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
2
+3.3 VDC +3.3 VDC
+3.3 VDC
C13
10 uf, low ESR
+
1
Vin Vout
3
2
Gnd Gnd
4
LT1963EST_2.5
U14
C14
1 uf
C15
10 uf, low ESR
35
20
32
FSGnd
PHYGnd1
PHYGnd2
FSVdd
PHYVdd1
PHYVdd2
36
33
21
+3.3 VDC
28
41
54
6
12
46
52
Vss
Vss
Vss
Vssq
Vssq
Vssq
Vssq
Vdd
Vdd
Vdd
Vddq
Vddq
Vddq
Vddq
1
14
27
3
9
43
49
28
41
54
6
12
46
52
Vss
Vss
Vss
Vssq
Vssq
Vssq
Vssq
Vdd
Vdd
Vdd
Vddq
Vddq
Vddq
Vddq
1
14
27
3
9
43
49
Vcc
37
Vcc
9
Vccq
43
21
Gnd
42
Gnd
48
Gnd
E28F128J3A-150
D
+5 VDC
+3.3 VDC
8
16
26
84
136
IOGnd1
IOGnd2
IOGnd3
IOGnd4
IOGnd5
IOVdd1
IOVdd2
IOVdd3
IOVdd4
IOVdd5
137
85
27
19
9
32 Mbit x 16 SDRAM
U2B
+3.3 VDC
32 Mbit x 16 SDRAM
U3B
+3.3 VDC
U4B
D
C16
10 uf, low ESR
+
1
2
Vin Vout
Gnd Gnd
3
4
C17
1 uf
C18
10 uf, low ESR
65
77
90
103
114
PCIGnd1
PCIGnd2
PCIGnd3
PCIGnd4
PCIGnd5
PCIVdd1
PCIVdd2
PCIVdd3
PCIVdd4
PCIVdd5
117
107
94
80
69
C125
1 uf
C126
0.1 uf
C127
0.01 uf
C132
1 uf
C133
0.1 uf
C134
0.01 uf
LT1963EST_3.3
U15
57
124
MACGnd1
MACGnd2
MACVdd1
MACVdd2
125
58
51
TxDigGnd TxDigVdd
56
52
55
TxIOGnd1
TxIOGnd2
38
44
RxAnalGnd1
RxAnalGnd2
RxAnalVdd1
RxAnalVdd2
47
39
+3.3 VDC
37
49
126
SubGnd1
SubGnd2
SubGnd3
Vref
40 Vref
+3.3 VDC
+3.3 VDC
+3.3 VDC
National DP83815DVNG
+3.3 VDC
C178
1 uf
C179
0.1 uf
C180
0.01 uf
C181
1 uf
C182
0.1 uf
+3.3 VDC
C183
1 uf
+3.3 VDC
U10B
R33
9.31 kohm, 5%, 0805
1
8
15
22
14
NC Vcc
NC
NC
NC
Gnd
28
4
10
15
21
28
34
39
45
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Vcc
Vcc
Vcc
Vcc
42
31
18
7
+5 VDC
4
10
15
21
28
34
39
45
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Vcc
Vcc
Vcc
Vcc
42
31
18
7
+5 VDC
4
10
15
21
28
34
39
45
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Vcc
Vcc
Vcc
Vcc
42
31
18
7
+5 VDC
GAL 20LV8D-7LJ
U6B
74ACLV162450/SO
74ACLV162450/SO
74ACLV162450/SO
U7B
U8B
U9B
C
+3.3 VDC
+3.3 VDC
+5 VDC +5 VDC
+5 VDC
C
C175
1 uf
C176
1 uf
C177
0.1 uf
+3.3 VDC
C150
C151
C155
C156
C159
C160
0.01 uf
1 uf
1 uf
0.01 uf
1 uf
0.01 uf
1
2
A25
GndAnalog
AMD ElanSC520-100AC
U1F
VccAnalog
B26
C153
1 uf
+3.3 VDC +3.3 VDC +3.3 VDC
A1
Gnd
A2
Gnd
A3
+3.3 VDC VBat
+2.5 VDC
Gnd
A6
D1
Gnd
A9
C2
1N4148
Gnd Vcc
B1
Gnd Vcc
C3
A26
VccRTC
VccCore
AC15
B2
Gnd
AC14
10 ohm, 5%, 0805
VccCore
B3
Gnd
AC7
R34
VccCore
B6
C20
Gnd
AC6
B VccCore
B9
B
0.1 uf
Gnd
VccCore
AC5
C1
Gnd Vcc
D2
B25
BBatSense
VccCore
R23
C6
Gnd Vcc
D3
VccCore
P23
C9
Gnd
T16
Gnd
VccCore
T4
D1
D3
D2
Gnd
T15
Gnd
VccCore
R4
D6
1N4148
1N4148
Gnd
T14
Gnd
VccCore
H23
D9
Gnd
T13
Gnd
VccCore
G23
T12
Gnd
VccCore
F4
T11
E4
BBatSense
Gnd
VccCore
R16
D19
DS32khz
Gnd
VccCore
R15
D18
U13B
1 k, 5%, 0805
Gnd
VccCore
R14
VccCore
D12
R35
C21
Gnd
R13
D11
+3.3 VDC
BT1
0.1 uf
Gnd
VccCore
R12
BATTERY
Gnd
R11
Gnd
P16
Gnd
VccIO
AC19
P15
Gnd
VccIO
AC18
P14
Gnd
VccIO
AC11
P13
Gnd
VccIO
AC10
P12
Gnd
VccIO
AA4
P11
Gnd
VccIO
Y4
N16
Gnd
VccIO
AA23
N15
Gnd
VccIO
Y23
N14
Gnd
VccIO
W23
N13
Gnd
VccIO
V23
N12
Gnd
VccIO
L23
N11
Gnd
VccIO
K23
M16
Gnd
VccIO
M4
M15
Gnd
VccIO
L4
M14
Gnd
VccIO
K4
M13
Gnd
VccIO
J4
M12
Gnd
VccIO
D22
M11
Gnd
VccIO
D21
L16
Gnd
VccIO
D16
L15
Gnd
VccIO
D15
L14
Gnd
VccIO
D8
L13
Gnd
VccIO
D7
A L12
D6
A
Gnd
VccIO
L11
D5
Document Number
Gnd
VccIO
62200.000.01
2
C157
1 uf
C158
0.01 uf
C161
1 uf
1
1
C162
0.01 uf
CPU Module: Power and Ground

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-49
RS232 Board Parts Locator Drawing
(for schematic 62250.000.02)

From Base Board
1
2
3
4
5
N/C
6
N/C
7
N/C
8
N/C
9
N/C
10 N/C
11 N/C
12 N/C
13 N/C
14 N/C
15 N/C
16 N/C
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
12 @ 0 Ω
No-stuff
R7 10.0K
10.0K
R6
0.1uF
C18
0.1uF
C17
6-50
+5VD
Revision History:
62250.000.02
U1
C13
1 2
0.1uF
ECO# DATE REV
DESCRIPTION DONE CHECKED
+5VD
9
Vcc
3124 12/15/03 01 Created for 8500 project.
WRS --- DGND
DGND
3179 11/02/04 02 Changed sockets; bridged R11, 15, 19; C16 becomes R20. WRS
SOUT1 5 Tin A
Tout A 2 SOUTP1
1
1
1
1
/RTS1 18 Tin B Tout B 1 RTSP1
2
2
2
2
J4
C22
0.1uF
1
2
RSTDRV
+5VD
DGND
18.432MHz
AUX_D7
AUX_D6
AUX_D5
AUX_D4
AUX_D3
AUX_D2
AUX_D1
AUX_D0
PATCH1
PATCH2
PATCH3
PATCH4
/AUX_0
/AUX_1
/AUX_2
/AUX_3
/GPIOWR
/GPIORD
1 C21
2 10uF
SA2
SA1
SA0
(BRIDGED)
R19
R18
R17
R16
R15
(BRIDGED)
R14
(BRIDGED)
R13
R12
R11
R10
R9
R8
SA2
SA1
SA0
C20
/AUX_0
/AUX_1
/AUX_2
/AUX_3
0.1uF
C19
32
A2
33
A1
34
A0
/GPIOWR 18
/IOW
/GPIORD 52
/IOR
RSTDRV 37
RESET
DGND
U4
13 30 47 64
VCC VCC
31
SEL16/68
65
INTSEL
VCC
17
TXA
14
/RTSA
12
/DTRA
SOUT1
/RTS1
/DTR1
16
/CSA
20
/CSB
50
/CSC
54
/CSD
7
RXA
11
/CTSA
10
/DSRA
9
/CDA
SIN1
/CTS1
/DSR1
/DCD1
/RIA
8
N/C
TXB
19
22
/RTSB
/DTRB
24
0.1uF
29
RXB
25
/CTSB
26
/DSRB
27
/CDB
SIN2
/CTS2
/DSR2
/DCD2
/RIB
28
N/C
AUX_D0
AUX_D1
AUX_D2
AUX_D3
AUX_D4
AUX_D5
AUX_D6
AUX_D7
66
D0
67
D1
68
D2
1
D3
2
D4
3
D5
4
D6
5
D7
51 SOUT3
TXC
48 /RTS3
/RTSC
46 /DTR3
/DTRC
41 SIN3
RXC
45 /CTS3
/CTSC
44 /DSR3
/DSRC
43 /DCD3
/CDC
42
/RIC N/C
53
TXD N/C
56
/RTSD N/C
N/C 38
/RXRDY
/DTRD
58 N/C
N/C
39
/TXRDY
RXD
63
/CTSD
59
15
INTA
/DSRD
60
21
INTB
/CDD
61
49
INTC
/RID
62 N/C
N/C 55
INTD
X1 X2 GND GND GND
35 36 6 23 40 57
18.432MHz
R20
249 Ω
R5
110 Ω
DGND
DGND
ST16C554DCJ68
SOUT2
/RTS2
/DTR2
R4
100K
R2
100K
DGND
+5VD
R3
100K
R1
100K
+5VD
+5VD
C15
1 2
0.1uF
C14
1 2
0.1uF
/DTR1
SIN1
/CTS1
/DSR1
/DCD1
C12
1 2
0.1uF
SOUT3
/RTS3
/DTR3
SIN3
/CTS3
/DSR3
/DCD3
C8
1 2
0.1uF
19 Tin C Tout C 24
21 Tin D
6
4
22
17
(TTL)
11
V+
Rout A
Rout B
Rout C
Rout D
10
C1+
12
C1-
U3
5 Tin A
21 Tin D
Gnd
8
9
Vcc
Gnd
Tout D 20
(RS232)
Rin A
Rin B
Rin C 23
Rin D 16
V-
C2+
C2-
7
3
15
13
14
MAX208ECNG
+5VD
Tout A 2
18 Tin B Tout B 1
19 Tin C Tout C 24
6
4
22
17
(TTL)
11
V+
Rout A
Rout B
Rout C
Rout D
10
C1+
12
C1-
DGND
+5VD
8
DGND
C9
0.1uF
2 1
Tout D 20
(RS232)
Rin A
Rin B
Rin C 23
Rin D 16
V-
C2+
C2-
7
3
15
13
14
DGND
MAX208ECNG
C11
1 2
0.1uF
C10
1 2
0.1uF
C7
1 2
0.1uF
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
DTRP1
SINP1
CTSP1
DSRP1
DCDP1
SOUTP3
RTSP3
DTRP3
SINP3
CTSP3
DSRP3
DCDP3
C6
1 2
0.1uF
SOUT2
/RTS2
/DTR2
SIN2
/CTS2
/DSR2
/DCD2
C4
1 2
0.1uF
C2
1 2
0.1uF
SU1
SOCKET
24-PIN
DIP
DGND
SOCKET
SU3
24-PIN
DIP
DGND
U2
5 Tin A
21 Tin D
Vcc
Gnd
2
C5
1 0.1uF
Tout A 2
18 Tin B Tout B 1
19 Tin C Tout C 24
6
4
22
17
(TTL)
11
V+
Rout A
Rout B
Rout C
Rout D
10
C1+
12
C1-
+5VD
9
8
DGND
Tout D 20
(RS232)
Rin A
Rin B
7
3
Rin C 23
Rin D 16
DGND
15
V-
C3
13 1 2
C2+
0.1uF
14
C2-
MAX208ECNG
SOUTP2
RTSP2
DTRP2
SINP2
CTSP2
DSRP2
DCDP2
C1
1 2
0.1uF
1
3.9uH
SU2
SOCKET
24-PIN
DIP
DGND
L1
2
D1
1 A.
RIGnd
D2
1 A.
DTRP1
CTSP1
SOUTP1
RTSP1
SINP1
DSRP1
DCDP1
RIGnd
DTRP2
CTSP2
SOUTP2
RTSP2
SINP2
DSRP2
DCDP2
RIGnd
DTRP3
CTSP3
SOUTP3
RTSP3
SINP3
DSRP3
DCDP3
D1 & D2
Dual Footprints
- No-stuff -
Chas
5
9
4
8
3
7
2
6
1
Chas
Chas
5
9
4
8
3
7
2
6
1
Chas
Chas
5
9
4
8
3
7
2
6
1
Chas
CHASSIS
J1
SERIAL PORT ONE
(rear panel)
J2
SERIAL PORT TWO
(rear panel)
J3
SERIAL PORT THREE
(rear panel)
RS232 Board Schematic Drawing

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-51
DUAL SUPPLY POWER DISTRIBUTION
PARTS LOCATOR DRAWING
32380.000
(sheet 1 of 1)

+5V_PS1
CR1
SMAJ5.0CA
+5V_PS2
CR2
SMAJ5.0CA
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
R7
C1
10.0K
0.1UF
DGND
R1
31.6K
� �
R2
1.00K
R3
3.09K
� �
DGND
R8
C2
10.0K
0.1UF
DGND
R4
31.6K
� �
R5
1.00K
R6
3.09K
� �
+15V_PS1
DGND
C3
0.1UF
C4
0.1UF
DGND
CR3 +15V_PS2
SMAJ15CA
DGND 16
DGND
2
3
4
7
2
3
4
7
10
11
Q3
SI1472DH-T1-E3
1
4
IN1
MON1
SET
MON2
Q1
FDD6770A
4
R9
10OHM
Vcc
UV
OV
REV
1
4
R10
10OHM
Vcc
UV
OV
REV
CR4
SMAJ15CA
3
2
Vin
GATE1
1
1
10
1, 2, 5, 6
4
DGND
Q4
SI1472DH-T1-E3
7
3
CPO
IN2
NC
3
12
9
Q2
FDD6770A
1
Vin
10
CPO
3
12
9
3
6
5
SOURCE
GND
SOURCE
GND
DGND
GATE2
NC
1, 2, 5, 6
9
Q5
FDD6770A
3 4
3
GND
DGND
1
11
1
4
GATE
OUT
8
OUT
STATUS
FAULT
U3
LTC4355IMS
VDSFLT
FUSEFLT1
FUSEFLT2
PWRFLT1
PWRFLT2
5
6
U1
LTC4352IMS
Q6
FDD6770A
11
GATE
8
4
OUT
STATUS
FAULT
5
6
U2
LTC4352IMS
8
14
13
15
12
E2
E3
L1
12.0UH
E4
E5
DGND
L2
14.75UF
E6
E7
E8
E10
E12
+ C6 + C10 C12
470UF/25V 10UF/35V 0.1UF
+ C5 C7 C9
TP6
+15VD
10UF/35V 0.1UF 0.01UF
DGND
DGND
+15VD
C14
DGND DGND DGND DGND
0.01UF
+ C8 + C11 C13
220UF/25V 10UF/35V 0.1UF
C15
AGND AGND AGND AGND
+5VD
TP3
+5VD
0.01UF
+15VA
TP10
+15VA
HS_U4
573300
HS_U5
573300
6-52
-15V_PS1
+15VD
-15VD
DGND
CR5
SMAJ15CA
1
C16
0.1UF
4
-15V_PS2
IN
DGND
1
GND
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
1.62K
U7 DGND
LTC4354IS8
1
R12
2.00K
DA
8
DB
CR8
SMAJ15CA
CR6
1N4148W
U4
L78M05CD2T
IN
+ C17
6.8UF
4
GND
2
2
NC/GND
NC/GND
OUT
OUT
U5
L79M05CD2T
CR7
1N4148W
R14
R13
2.00K
3
3
1, 2, 5, 6
4
3
GA
3
Vcc
4
Q7
SI1472DH-T1-E3
C19
0.1UF
C20
+
1UF/35V
1, 2, 5, 6
6
3
C21
1.0UF
GB
2
Vss
4
5
Vss
Q8
SI1472DH-T1-E3
CR9
1N4148W
CR10
1N4148W
FAULT
7
E1
-15VD
C27
+ 10UF/35V
C31 C32
TP1
-15VD
0.1UF 0.01UF
L3
DGND DGND DGND
14.75UF
C28 C33 C34
+
+
220UF/25V 10UF/35V
0.1UF
AGND
+ C24 C25
10UF/35V 0.1UF
C23
+
10UF/35V
C26
0.1UF
AGND
C29
0.01UF
C30
0.01UF
R21
1.00K
AGND
+5VA
TP4
+5VA
AGND
-5VA
TP5
-5VA
C35
TP2
-15VA
0.01UF
AGND
-15VA
DUAL SUPPLY POWER DISTRIBUTION
SCHEMATIC: POWER SUPPLY INPUT CONTROL
62380.000
(sheet 1 of 2)

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-53
From: Power Supply 1 +5V_PS1 From: Power Supply 2 +5V_PS2
TP7
+5V_PS1
J1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
HDR 8
TP8
+15V_PS1
DGND
+5V_PS1 +15V_PS1 -15V_PS1
+15V_PS1 -15V_PS1
Bypass Caps
+15VD -15VD
C36
0.1UF
C37
0.1UF
TP9
-15V_PS1
C38
0.1UF
TP11
+5V_PS2
C39
0.1UF
J2
Test Points
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
HDR 8
TP12
+15V_PS2
DGND
+5V_PS2 +15V_PS2 -15V_PS2
TP13
-15V_PS2
+15V_PS2 -15V_PS2
LCD GND ISOLATION
1
+5VD
DGND
TP14DGND
2
LCD_GND
TP15AGND
DGND AGND
+5VD
-5VA
+15VA
ANALOG TO DIGITAL GROUND
1
+15VD
DGND
AGND
TP16DGND
DGND
Testing Access
J6
2
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
HDR 5X2
DGND
-15VD
DGND
Mounting Holes
M1 M2 M3
-15VA
+5VA
KEY - CUT PIN
+REF_4.82V
M4 M5
E11
E13
To: Future Expansion To: AUX I/O Power
R35
10.0K
+5VD
+15VD
R28
10.0K
+5VD
U12
+5V_PS1 Sense: +4.82V Nom
U11
74HC1G14
+5V_PS2
Sense: +4.82V Nom
2
74HC1G14
4
PS2_OK_N
2
4
PS1_OK_N
U9D
+15V_PS1
+REF_4.82V
R26
210 OHM
9
10
U9C
TL074
8
R30
R34
20.0K
Q10
MMBT3904
DGND
+15V_PS2
+REF_4.82V
R46
210 OHM
13
12
TL074
14
R52
20.0K
Q13
MMBT3904
DGND
100.0K
DGND
-15VD
R49
DGND
R24
2.00K
Sense: +14.53V Nom
R44
2.00K
100.0K
Sense: +14.53V Nom
U10A
U10B
R25
+REF_4.82V
R27
210 OHM
2
3
TL074
1
R36
20.0K
Q11
MMBT3904
R45
+REF_4.82V
R47
210 OHM
6
5
TL074
7
R53
20.0K
Q14
MMBT3904
-15V_PS1
1.00K
R31
-15V_PS2
1.00K
R50
100.0K
DGND
100.0K
DGND
R22
2.00K
AGND
Sense: -14.53V Nom
R42
2.00K
AGND
+15VD
Sense: -14.53V Nom
U10C
U10D
R23
-REF_4.82V
R29
210 OHM
9
10
TL074
8
R37
20.0K
Q12
MMBT3906
R43
-REF_4.82V
R48
210 OHM
13
12
TL074
14
R54
20.0K
Q15
MMBT3906
1.00K
R32
1.00K
100.0K
DGND
-15VD
DGND
AGND
AGND
R51
+2.5V REF
R41
100.0K
+5VA
U8 REF2925AIDBZT
1
2
Vin
Vout
5
U9B
TL074
7
R39
2
10.0K
U9A
TL074
PS1_OK_N R56 20.0K
PS1_2_OK_N
C41
0.47UF
6
10.0K
3
1
-REF_4.82V
PS2_OK_N R57 10.0K
+5VD
DGND
C40
0.1UF
AGND
3
GND
AGND AGND
AGND
R38
51.1K
R33
54.9K
AGND
R40 NO STUFF
3 5
AGND
+15VD
2
3
4
NC
+5VD
DGND
+5VD C18
R11
10.0K
SHDN
GND
4
11
4
11
J7
1
2
3
4
NO STUFF
0.1UF
U6
DGND
1
VDD PWM
TC650ACVUA
GND
TOVER
DGND DGND
Brushless DC Fan Controller with Temperature Sensor
NC
8
7
6
5
R15
1.00K
E9
+15VD
R16
NO STUFF
+5VD
DGND
+5VD
1
C22
+
10UF/35V
DGND
+5VD
3
2
DGND
J9
1
2
3
4
5
6
NO STUFF
R17
0 OHM
J8
1
2
70545MLX2
Q9
IRLML2502
R55 NO STUFF
3 5
Brushless DC Fan
R18
NO STUFF
DGND
PS1_OK_N
PS2_OK_N
PS1_2_OK_N
To: Baseboard
DGND
J10
1
2
3
4
(TV16)
(TV17)
(TV1)
70545MLX4
+5VA
-5VA
-15VA
+15VA
+15VD
+5VD
+5VD
+15VD
AGND
+15VA
+5VD
R19
NO STUFF
-15VA
R20
0 OHM
DGND LCD_GND
-5VA
+5VA
DGND AGND
DGND
J5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12 To: Base Board
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
HDR 12X2 SH PWR
J4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 To: I/O Board
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
HDR 10X2 SH PWR
J3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 To: DSP Board
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
HDR 8X2 SH PWR
DUAL SUPPLY POWER DISTRIBUTION
SCHEMATIC: POWER SUPPLY FAILURE DETECTION
62380.000
(sheet 2 of 2)

6-54
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
8585 Digital I/O & SRC
Control & Miscellaneous
Parts Locator
32330.000.02.1

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-55
+5VA
3
2
8 4
1
IC201A
OPA2134UA
5
6
7
IC201B
OPA2134UA
+15V
-15V
3
2
8 4
1
IC202A
OPA2134UA
5
6
7
IC202B
OPA2134UA
+15V
-15V
1
2
3
4
�����
J200
MALE
1%
R203
8.45K
1%
R207
8.45K
1%
R204
8.45K 1%
R208
8.45K
1%
R205
8.45K 1%
R209
8.45K
1%
R206
8.45K 1%
R210
8.45K
1%,50V
C214
470PF
1%,50V
C215
470PF
1%
R219
3.48K
1%
R220
3.48K
1%
R223
11.3K
1%
R224
11.3K
1%
R211
8.45K
1%
R212
8.45K
1%,50V
C216
470PF
1%,50V
C217
470PF
1%
R225
11.3K
1%
R226
11.3K
1%
R221
3.48K
1%
R222
3.48K
1%,50V
C218
1500PF
1%,50V
C219
1500PF
AOUT_MCLK
RSTIO-N
AOUT_BCLK
AOUT_DATA
AOUT_FCLK
1%
R213
82.5K
1%
R214
82.5K
1%
R215
82.5K
1%
R216
82.5K
1%
R217
3.48K
1%
R218
3.48K
3
2
8 4
1
IC203A
OPA2134UA
5
6
7
IC203B
OPA2134UA
25V
C220
0.47µF
25V
C221
0.47µF
1%
R229
110OHM
1%
R230
110OHM
+15V
-15V
CW
VR200
10K
CW
VR201
10K
1
2
3
4
5 6
7
8
IC204
DRV134PA
1
2
3
4
5 6
7
8
IC205
DRV134PA
+15V
-15V
C202
1.0µF
C200
1.0µF
1
2
3
1000PF
L200
FILTER
1
2
3
1000PF
L201
FILTER
CR200 TRANSZORB
CR201
TRANSZORB
+15V
-15V
1
2
3
4
�����
J201
MALE
1
2
3
1000PF
L202
FILTER
1
2
3
1000PF
L203
FILTER
CR202
TRANSZORB
CR203
TRANSZORB
TRANSZORB
+3.3V
AGND1
CGND
SOCKET
DIP-8
SOCKET
DIP-8
CGND
AGND1
AGND1
AGND1
AGND1
AGND2
AGND2
AGND2
AGND2
AGND1
AGND2
AGND2
AGND2
AGND2
AGND2
AGND1
AGND
AGND
DGND
LEFT ANALOG
OUTPUT
RIGHT ANALOG
OUTPUT
3-pole
Butterworth
f-3db=40KHz
Servo
f-3db=0.10Hz
LEFT
OUTPUT
TRIM
RIGHT
OUTPUT
TRIM
AGND1 AGND2
AGND2
AGND
DGND
DGND
(SHT6)
(SHT5)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
R200
10.0K
R201
10.0K
R202
10.0K
L204
3.9UH
L205
3.9UH
L206
3.9UH
L207
3.9UH
C204
0.1UF
C205
0.1UF
AGND
.
. .
.
L208
1K
CGND
.
. .
.
L209
1K
CGND
C210
0.1UF
C213
0.1UF
C212
0.1UF
C211
0.1UF
C206
0.1UF
C209
0.1UF
C208
0.1UF
C207
0.1UF
+15V
-15V
AGND2
AGND1
AGND1
1
2
3
TIE_NET2
1
2
TIE_NET1
R227
1.00M
R228
1.00M
C201
1.0µF
C203
0.1UF
AGND
MCLK
3
PD
4
PD
4
BICK
5
SDATA
6
LRCK
7
SMUTE
8
DFS
9
DEM0
10
DEM1
11
DIF0
12
DVSS
1
AVSS
19
BVSS
15 VREFL
16
AOUTR+
21
AOUTR-
20
AOUTL+
23
AOUTL-
22
P/S
25
VREFH
17
VCOM
VCOM
24
DVDD
2
DIF1
13
DIF2
14
CKS0
26
CKS1
27
CKS2
28
AVDD
18
IC200
AK4393VF
1%,50V
C223
470PF
AGND1
1%,50V
C222
470PF
AGND1
1%,50V
C224
470PF
1%,50V
C225
470PF
AGND2
AGND2
8585 Digital I/O & SRC
Control & Miscellaneous
62330.000.02.1 2 of 7
8585 Digital I/O & SRC
Control & Miscellaneous
62330.000.02.1 2 of 7

6-56 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
SDINA
39
LRCKA
38
BCKA
37
BLS
35
SYNC
36
AESOUT
34
TX-
31
TX+
32
SDOUTA
40
MCLK
25
IC301B
SRC4382IPFB
RCKIA
20
LRCKIA
59
BCKIA
60
SDINA
58
TDMIA
61
BYPA
8
MUTEA
19
LRCKOA
62
BCKOA
63
SDOUTA
64
RATIOA
17
RDYA
18
IC304A
SRC4184IPAG
RX1+
1
RX1-
2
RX2+
3
RX2-
4
RX3+
5
RX3-
6
RX4+
7
RX4-
8
RXCKI
13
MUTE
14
RXCKO
12
LOCK
11
RDY
15
SDINB
46
LRCKB
47
BCKB
48
SDOUTB
45
IC301A
SRC4382IPFB
DGND
TX_MCLK_1-2
(SHT6)
1
2
4
5
8
T300
SC937-02
DGND
RCKIB
29
LRCKIB
54
BCKIB
53
SDINB
55
TDMIB
52
BYPB
41
MUTEB
30
LRCKOB
51
BCKOB
50
SDOUTB
49
RATIOB
32
RDYB
31
IC304B
SRC4184IPAG
DGND
SDINA
39
LRCKA
38
BCKA
37
BLS
35
SYNC
36
AESOUT
34
TX-
31
TX+
32
SDOUTA
40
MCLK
25
IC302B
SRC4382IPFB
RCKIA
20
LRCKIA
59
BCKIA
60
SDINA
58
TDMIA
61
BYPA
8
MUTEA
19
LRCKOA
62
BCKOA
63
SDOUTA
64
RATIOA
17
RDYA
18
IC305A
SRC4184IPAG
RX1+
1
RX1-
2
RX2+
3
RX2-
4
RX3+
5
RX3-
6
RX4+
7
RX4-
8
RXCKI
13
MUTE
14
RXCKO
12
LOCK
11
RDY
15
SDINB
46
LRCKB
47
BCKB
48
SDOUTB
45
IC302A
SRC4382IPFB
DGND
1
2
4
5
8
T301
SC937-02
DGND
RCKIB
29
LRCKIB
54
BCKIB
53
SDINB
55
TDMIB
52
BYPB
41
MUTEB
30
LRCKOB
51
BCKOB
50
SDOUTB
49
RATIOB
32
RDYB
31
IC305B
SRC4184IPAG
DGND
SDINA
39
LRCKA
38
BCKA
37
BLS
35
SYNC
36
AESOUT
34
TX-
31
TX+
32
SDOUTA
40
MCLK
25
IC303B
SRC4382IPFB
RCKIA
20
LRCKIA
59
BCKIA
60
SDINA
58
TDMIA
61
BYPA
8
MUTEA
19
LRCKOA
62
BCKOA
63
SDOUTA
64
RATIOA
17
RDYA
18
IC306A
SRC4184IPAG
RX1+
1
RX1-
2
RX2+
3
RX2-
4
RX3+
5
RX3-
6
RX4+
7
RX4-
8
RXCKI
13
MUTE
14
RXCKO
12
LOCK
11
RDY
15
SDINB
46
LRCKB
47
BCKB
48
SDOUTB
45
IC303A
SRC4382IPFB
DGND
1
2
4
5
8
T302
SC937-02
DGND
RCKIB
29
LRCKIB
54
BCKIB
53
SDINB
55
TDMIB
52
BYPB
41
MUTEB
30
LRCKOB
51
BCKOB
50
SDOUTB
49
RATIOB
32
RDYB
31
IC306B
SRC4184IPAG
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
1
2
3
J304
HDR 3
HDR 3
DGND
CGND
R300
75OHM
1
2
3
J305
HDR 3
HDR 3
DGND
CGND
R301
75OHM
1
2
3
J306
HDR 3
HDR 3
DGND
CGND
R302
75OHM
AES3-id
INPUT 1-2
AES3-id
INPUT 3-4
AES3-id
INPUT 5-6
RXCKO_1-2
(SHT6)
RX_BCK_1-2
(SHT6)
RX_LRCK_1-2
(SHT6)
RXCKO_3-4
(SHT6)
RX_BCK_3-4
(SHT6)
RX_LRCK_3-4
(SHT6)
RXCKO_5-6
(SHT6)
RX_BCK_5-6
(SHT6)
RX_LRCK_5-6
(SHT6)
IN_DATA_1-2
(SHT6)
IN_LRCK_1-2
IN_BCK_1-2
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
IN_DATA_3-4
(SHT6)
IN_LRCK_3-4
IN_BCK_3-4
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
IN_DATA_5-6
(SHT6)
IN_LRCK_5-6
IN_BCK_5-6
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
OUT_LRCK_1-2
(SHT6)
OUT_BCK_1-2
(SHT6)
OUT_DATA_1-2
(SHT6)
TX_BCK_1-2
TX_LRCK_1-2
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
TX_MCLK_3-4
(SHT6)
OUT_LRCK_3-4
(SHT6)
OUT_BCK_3-4
(SHT6)
OUT_DATA_3-4
(SHT6)
TX_BCK_3-4
TX_LRCK_3-4
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
TX_MCLK_5-6
(SHT6)
OUT_LRCK_5-6
(SHT6)
OUT_BCK_5-6
(SHT6)
OUT_DATA_5-6
(SHT6)
TX_BCK_5-6
TX_LRCK_5-6
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
1
2
3
J308
HDR 3
HDR 3
DGND
CGND
1
2
3
J307
HDR 3
HDR 3
DGND
CGND
1
2
3
J309
HDR 3
HDR 3
DGND
CGND
AES3-id
OUTPUT 1-2
AES3-id
OUTPUT 3-4
AES3-id
OUTPUT 5-6
3
4
6
J301B
1
2
5
J301A
1
2
5
J302A
1
2
5
J303A
3
4
6
J302B
3
4
6
J303B
C300
0.1UF
C306
0.1UF
C307
0.1UF
C312
0.1UF
C303
0.1UF
C313
0.1UF
C304
0.1UF
C314
0.1UF
C305
0.1UF
C301
0.1UF
C308
0.1UF
C309
0.1UF
C302
0.1UF
C310
0.1UF
C311
0.1UF
L310
FERRITE
L311
FERRITE
L308
FERRITE
L309
FERRITE
L306
FERRITE
L307
FERRITE
L300
FERRITE
L301
FERRITE
L302
FERRITE
L303
FERRITE
L304
FERRITE
L305
FERRITE
1
2
4
5
8
T303
SC937-02
DGND
DGND
DGND
1
2
4
5
8
T304
SC937-02
DGND
1
2
4
5
8
T305
SC937-02
REF_CLK_1-2
(SHT6)
REF_CLK_3-4
(SHT6)
REF_CLK_5-6
(SHT6)
IN_DATA_7-8
(SHT4)
R309
0OHM
0 OHM
R310
0OHM
0 OHM
R311
0OHM
0 OHM
R306
110.0 OHM
110.0 OHM
R307
110.0 OHM
110.0 OHM
R308
110.0 OHM
110.0 OHM
R303
210.0 OHM
210.0 OHM
R304
210.0 OHM
210.0 OHM
R305
210.0 OHM
210.0 OHM
8585 Digital I/O & SRC
Control & Miscellaneous
62330.000.02.1 3 of 7
8585 Digital I/O & SRC
Control & Miscellaneous
62330.000.02.1 3 of 7

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-57
SDINA
39
LRCKA
38
BCKA
37
BLS
35
SYNC
36
AESOUT
34
TX-
31
TX+
32
SDOUTA
40
MCLK
25
IC401B
SRC4382IPFB
RCKIA
20
LRCKIA
59
BCKIA
60
SDINA
58
TDMIA
61
BYPA
8
MUTEA
19
LRCKOA
62
BCKOA
63
SDOUTA
64
RATIOA
17
RDYA
18
IC404A
SRC4184IPAG
RX1+
1
RX1-
2
RX2+
3
RX2-
4
RX3+
5
RX3-
6
RX4+
7
RX4-
8
RXCKI
13
MUTE
14
RXCKO
12
LOCK
11
RDY
15
SDINB
46
LRCKB
47
BCKB
48
SDOUTB
45
IC401A
SRC4382IPFB
RXCKO_7-8
(SHT6)
DGND
AES3-id
INPUT 7-8
AES3-id
OUTPUT 7-8
RCKIB
29
LRCKIB
54
BCKIB
53
SDINB
55
TDMIB
52
BYPB
41
MUTEB
30
LRCKOB
51
BCKOB
50
SDOUTB
49
RATIOB
32
RDYB
31
IC404B
SRC4184IPAG
DGND
RX_BCK_7-8
(SHT6)
RX_LRCK_7-8
(SHT6)
SDINA
39
LRCKA
38
BCKA
37
BLS
35
SYNC
36
AESOUT
34
TX-
31
TX+
32
SDOUTA
40
MCLK
25
IC402B
SRC4382IPFB
RCKIA
20
LRCKIA
59
BCKIA
60
SDINA
58
TDMIA
61
BYPA
8
MUTEA
19
LRCKOA
62
BCKOA
63
SDOUTA
64
RATIOA
17
RDYA
18
IC405A
SRC4184IPAG
RX1+
1
RX1-
2
RX2+
3
RX2-
4
RX3+
5
RX3-
6
RX4+
7
RX4-
8
RXCKI
13
MUTE
14
RXCKO
12
LOCK
11
RDY
15
SDINB
46
LRCKB
47
BCKB
48
SDOUTB
45
IC402A
SRC4382IPFB
DGND
RCKIB
29
LRCKIB
54
BCKIB
53
SDINB
55
TDMIB
52
BYPB
41
MUTEB
30
LRCKOB
51
BCKOB
50
SDOUTB
49
RATIOB
32
RDYB
31
IC405B
SRC4184IPAG
DGND
IN_DATA_9-10
(SHT5)
SDINA
39
LRCKA
38
BCKA
37
BLS
35
SYNC
36
AESOUT
34
TX-
31
TX+
32
SDOUTA
40
MCLK
25
IC403B
SRC4382IPFB
RCKIA
20
LRCKIA
59
BCKIA
60
SDINA
58
TDMIA
61
BYPA
8
MUTEA
19
LRCKOA
62
BCKOA
63
SDOUTA
64
RATIOA
17
RDYA
18
IC406A
SRC4184IPAG
RX1+
1
RX1-
2
RX2+
3
RX2-
4
RX3+
5
RX3-
6
RX4+
7
RX4-
8
RXCKI
13
MUTE
14
RXCKO
12
LOCK
11
RDY
15
SDINB
46
LRCKB
47
BCKB
48
SDOUTB
45
IC403A
SRC4382IPFB
OUT_LRCK_11-12
(SHT6)
OUT_BCK_11-12
(SHT6)
OUT_DATA_11-12
(SHT6)
DGND
TX_MCLK_11-12
(SHT6)
RCKIB
29
LRCKIB
54
BCKIB
53
SDINB
55
TDMIB
52
BYPB
41
MUTEB
30
LRCKOB
51
BCKOB
50
SDOUTB
49
RATIOB
32
RDYB
31
IC406B
SRC4184IPAG
DGND
IN_LRCK_11-12
IN_BCK_11-12
TX_BCK_11-12
TX_LRCK_11-12
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
AES3-id
INPUT 9-10
SYNC IN
SYNC IN
AES3-id
OUTPUT 9-10
AES3-id
OUTPUT 11-12
1
2
3
J404
HDR 3
HDR 3
DGND
CGND
1
2
3
J405
HDR 3
HDR 3
DGND
CGND
1
2
3
J406
HDR 3
HDR 3
DGND
CGND
1
2
3
J409
HDR 3
HDR 3
DGND
CGND
1
2
3
J408
HDR 3
HDR 3
DGND
CGND
1
2
3
J407
HDR 3
HDR 3
DGND
CGND
(SHT5)
SYNC_IN
RXCKO_9-10
(SHT6)
RX_BCK_9-10
(SHT6)
RX_LRCK_9-10
(SHT6)
RXCKO_11-12
(SHT6)
RX_BCK_11-12
(SHT6)
RX_LRCK_11-12
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
IN_LRCK_9-10
IN_BCK_9-10
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
IN_DATA_7-8
(SHT6,3)
IN_LRCK_7-8
IN_BCK_7-8
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
OUT_LRCK_9-10
(SHT6)
OUT_BCK_9-10
(SHT6)
OUT_DATA_9-10
(SHT6)
OUT_LRCK_7-8
(SHT6)
OUT_BCK_7-8
(SHT6)
OUT_DATA_7-8
(SHT6)
TX_MCLK_9-10
(SHT6)
TX_BCK_9-10
TX_LRCK_9-10
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
TX_MCLK_7-8
(SHT6)
TX_BCK_7-8
TX_LRCK_7-8
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
1
2
4
5
8
T401
SC937-02
1
2
4
5
8
T400
SC937-02
1
2
4
5
8
T402
SC937-02
3
4
6
J401B
3
4
6
J402B
3
4
6
J403B
1
2
5
J401A
1
2
5
J402A
1
2
5
J403A
C400
0.1UF
C406
0.1UF
C407
0.1UF
C412
0.1UF
C403
0.1UF
C413
0.1UF
C404
0.1UF
C414
0.1UF
C405
0.1UF
C401
0.1UF
C408
0.1UF
C409
0.1UF
C402
0.1UF
C410
0.1UF
C411
0.1UF
L410
FERRITE
L411
FERRITE
L408
FERRITE
L409
FERRITE
L406
FERRITE
L407
FERRITE
DGND
L400
FERRITE
L401
FERRITE
DGND
L402
FERRITE
L403
FERRITE
DGND
L404
FERRITE
L405
FERRITE
R400
75OHM
R401
75OHM
R402
75OHM
DGND
1
2
4
5
8
T403
SC937-02
DGND
1
2
4
5
8
T404
SC937-02
DGND
1
2
4
5
8
T405
SC937-02
REF_CLK_11-12
(SHT6)
REF_CLK_9-10
(SHT6)
REF_CLK_7-8
(SHT6)
R409
0OHM
0 OHM
R410
0OHM
0 OHM
R411
0OHM
0 OHM
R406
110.0 OHM
110.0 OHM
R407
110.0 OHM
110.0 OHM
R408
110.0 OHM
110.0 OHM
R403
210.0 OHM
210.0 OHM
R404
210.0 OHM
210.0 OHM
R405
210.0 OHM
210.0 OHM
8585 Digital I/O & SRC
Control & Miscellaneous
62330.000.02.1 4 of 7
8585 Digital I/O & SRC
Control & Miscellaneous
62330.000.02.1 4 of 7

6-58 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
MCLR/VPP/RE3
18
RE2/CS/AN7
27
RE1/WR/AN6
26
RE0/RD/AN5
25
RD7/PSP7/P1D
5
RD6/PSP6/P1C
4
RD5/PSP5/P1B
3
RD4/PSP4
2
RD3/PSP3
41
RD2/PSP2
40
RD1/PSP1
39
RD0/PSP0
38
OSC1/CLKI/RA7
30
OSC2/CLKO/RA6
31
RA5/AN4/SS/HLVDIN/C2OUT
24
RA4/T0CKI/C1OUT
23
RA3/AN3/VREF+
22
RA2/AN2/VREF-/CVREF
21
RA1/AN1
20
RA0/AN0
19
RB7/KBI3/PGD
17
RB6/KBI2/PGC
16
RB5/KBI1/PGM
15
RB4/KBI0/AN11
14
RB3/AN9/CCP2
11
RB2/INT2/AN8
10
RB1/INT1/AN10
9
RB0/INT0/FLT0/AN12
8
RC7/RX/DT
1
RC6/TX/CK
44
RC4/SDI/SDA
42
RC3/SCK/SCL
37
RC2/CCP1/P1A
36
RC1/T1OSI/CCP2
35
RC0/T1OSO/T13CKI
32
RC5/SDO
43
VSS
6
VSS
29
VDD
28
VDD
7
N/C
34
N/C
33
N/C
13
N/C
12
IC500
PIC18LF4420-I/PT
IFMTA0
1
IFMTA1
2
IFMTA1
2
IFMTA2
3
IFMTA2
3
OFMTA0
4
OFMTA1
5
OWLA0
6
OWLA1
7
LGRPA0
9
LGRPA1
10
DDNA
11
DEMA0
12
DEMA1
13
MODEA0
14
MODEA1
15
MODEA2
16
IFMTB0
48
IFMTB1
47
IFMTB2
46
OFMTB0
45
OFMTB1
44
OWLB0
43
OWLB1
42
LGRPB0
40
LGRPB1
39
DDNB
38
DEMB0
37
DEMB1/CDOUT
36
MODEB0/CS
35
MODEB1/CCLK
34
MODEB2/CDIN
33
H/S
22
RST
21
IC304C
SRC4184IPAG
1
2
3
CR501
BAT54C
R507
100.0K
R504
10.0K
DGND
SEL_K-N
DGND DGND
+3.3V
C503
0.1UF
1
2
3
CR500
BAT54C
DGND
PICPWR
DGND
DGND
1
2
3
4
5
J500
HDR 5
HDR 5
PROGRAMMING
PORT (PIC)
DGND
DGND
PICPWR
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D[0...7]
R508
100.0K
(SHT6) PIC_RST-N
DGND
SDA/CDOUT
22
RST
24
CPM
18
INT
23
GPO4
29
GPO3
28
GPO2
27
GPO1
26
SCL/CCLK
20
A0/CS
19
A1/CDIN
21
IC403C
SRC4382IPFB
IFMTA0
1
IFMTA1
2
IFMTA1
2
IFMTA2
3
IFMTA2
3
OFMTA0
4
OFMTA1
5
OWLA0
6
OWLA1
7
LGRPA0
9
LGRPA1
10
DDNA
11
DEMA0
12
DEMA1
13
MODEA0
14
MODEA1
15
MODEA2
16
IFMTB0
48
IFMTB1
47
IFMTB2
46
OFMTB0
45
OFMTB1
44
OWLB0
43
OWLB1
42
LGRPB0
40
LGRPB1
39
DDNB
38
DEMB0
37
DEMB1/CDOUT
36
MODEB0/CS
35
MODEB1/CCLK
34
MODEB2/CDIN
33
H/S
22
RST
21
IC305C
SRC4184IPAG
IFMTA0
1
IFMTA1
2
IFMTA1
2
IFMTA2
3
IFMTA2
3
OFMTA0
4
OFMTA1
5
OWLA0
6
OWLA1
7
LGRPA0
9
LGRPA1
10
DDNA
11
DEMA0
12
DEMA1
13
MODEA0
14
MODEA1
15
MODEA2
16
IFMTB0
48
IFMTB1
47
IFMTB2
46
OFMTB0
45
OFMTB1
44
OWLB0
43
OWLB1
42
LGRPB0
40
LGRPB1
39
DDNB
38
DEMB0
37
DEMB1/CDOUT
36
MODEB0/CS
35
MODEB1/CCLK
34
MODEB2/CDIN
33
H/S
22
RST
21
IC306C
SRC4184IPAG
DGND DGND
IFMTA0
1
IFMTA1
2
IFMTA1
2
IFMTA2
3
IFMTA2
3
OFMTA0
4
OFMTA1
5
OWLA0
6
OWLA1
7
LGRPA0
9
LGRPA1
10
DDNA
11
DEMA0
12
DEMA1
13
MODEA0
14
MODEA1
15
MODEA2
16
IFMTB0
48
IFMTB1
47
IFMTB2
46
OFMTB0
45
OFMTB1
44
OWLB0
43
OWLB1
42
LGRPB0
40
LGRPB1
39
DDNB
38
DEMB0
37
DEMB1/CDOUT
36
MODEB0/CS
35
MODEB1/CCLK
34
MODEB2/CDIN
33
H/S
22
RST
21
IC404C
SRC4184IPAG
DGND
IFMTA0
1
IFMTA1
2
IFMTA1
2
IFMTA2
3
IFMTA2
3
OFMTA0
4
OFMTA1
5
OWLA0
6
OWLA1
7
LGRPA0
9
LGRPA1
10
DDNA
11
DEMA0
12
DEMA1
13
MODEA0
14
MODEA1
15
MODEA2
16
IFMTB0
48
IFMTB1
47
IFMTB2
46
OFMTB0
45
OFMTB1
44
OWLB0
43
OWLB1
42
LGRPB0
40
LGRPB1
39
DDNB
38
DEMB0
37
DEMB1/CDOUT
36
MODEB0/CS
35
MODEB1/CCLK
34
MODEB2/CDIN
33
H/S
22
RST
21
IC405C
SRC4184IPAG
IFMTA0
1
IFMTA1
2
IFMTA1
2
IFMTA2
3
IFMTA2
3
OFMTA0
4
OFMTA1
5
OWLA0
6
OWLA1
7
LGRPA0
9
LGRPA1
10
DDNA
11
DEMA0
12
DEMA1
13
MODEA0
14
MODEA1
15
MODEA2
16
IFMTB0
48
IFMTB1
47
IFMTB2
46
OFMTB0
45
OFMTB1
44
OWLB0
43
OWLB1
42
LGRPB0
40
LGRPB1
39
DDNB
38
DEMB0
37
DEMB1/CDOUT
36
MODEB0/CS
35
MODEB1/CCLK
34
MODEB2/CDIN
33
H/S
22
RST
21
IC406C
SRC4184IPAG
DGND DGND
IC406_CS-N
IC403_CS-N
DGND
SDA/CDOUT
22
RST
24
CPM
18
INT
23
GPO4
29
GPO3
28
GPO2
27
GPO1
26
SCL/CCLK
20
A0/CS
19
A1/CDIN
21
IC402C
SRC4382IPFB
IC402_CS-N
DGND
SDA/CDOUT
22
RST
24
CPM
18
INT
23
GPO4
29
GPO3
28
GPO2
27
GPO1
26
SCL/CCLK
20
A0/CS
19
A1/CDIN
21
IC401C
SRC4382IPFB
IC401_CS-N
DGND
SDA/CDOUT
22
RST
24
CPM
18
INT
23
GPO4
29
GPO3
28
GPO2
27
GPO1
26
SCL/CCLK
20
A0/CS
19
A1/CDIN
21
IC303C
SRC4382IPFB
IC303_CS-N
DGND
SDA/CDOUT
22
RST
24
CPM
18
INT
23
GPO4
29
GPO3
28
GPO2
27
GPO1
26
SCL/CCLK
20
A0/CS
19
A1/CDIN
21
IC302C
SRC4382IPFB
IC302_CS-N
DGND
SDA/CDOUT
22
RST
24
CPM
18
INT
23
GPO4
29
GPO3
28
GPO2
27
GPO1
26
SCL/CCLK
20
A0/CS
19
A1/CDIN
21
IC301C
SRC4382IPFB
IC301_CS-N
DGND
IC304_CS-N IC305_CS-N IC306_CS-N IC404_CS-N IC405_CS-N
SEL_L-N
SEL_M-N
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
D0
(SHT6)
PIC_MCLK
(SHT6)
IC301_CS-N
IC302_CS-N
IC303_CS-N
IC401_CS-N
IC402_CS-N
IC403_CS-N
IC304_CS-N
IC305_CS-N
IC306_CS-N
SIN
SOUT
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
IC404_CS-N
IC405_CS-N
IC406_CS-N
(SHT2)
RSTIO-N
C502
0.1UF
SDA/CDOUT
1
AD0/CS
2
EMPH
3
RXP
4
RXN
5
VA+
6
AGND
7
FILT
8
FILT
8
RST
9
RMCK
10
RERR
11
ILRCK
12
ISCLK
13
SDIN
14
TCBL
15
OSCLK
16
OLRCK
17
SDOUT
18
INT
19
U
20
U
20
OMCK
21
DGND
22
VL+
23
H/S
24
TXN
25
TXR
26
AD1/CDIN
27
SCL/CCLK
28
IC501
CS8427-CSZ
DGND
DGND
C500
0.1UF
+5VD
DGND
DGND
+5VD
C505
0.22UF
C506
0.022UF
C501
0.1UF
DGND
R509
604OHM
R500
10.0K
18.432MHZ
(SHT6)
SYNCIN_LRCK
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
SYNCIN_SCLK
DGND
(SHT6)
SYNCIN_RMCK
R506
100.0K
R505
100.0K
+5VD
DGND
C507
0.01UF
(SHT4)
SYNC_IN
R501
10.0K
R502
10.0K
DGND
DGND DGND
DGND DGND
DGND DGND
DGND DGND
DGND DGND
Word Clock
Word Clock
Receiver/PLL
C504
1500PF
R503
10.0K
DGND
IC501_CS-N
8585 Digital I/O & SRC
Control & Miscellaneous
62330.000.02.1 5 of 7
8585 Digital I/O & SRC
Control & Miscellaneous
62330.000.02.1 5 of 7

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-59
BASE BOARD
CONNECTOR
DGND
JP600
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
HDR 14
DGND
DGND
J602
SIN
SOUT
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28
29 30
31 32
33 34
35 36
37 38
39 40
HDR 20X2 SH
DSP BOARD
CONNECTORS
J603
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28
29 30
31 32
33 34
35 36
37 38
39 40
HDR 20X2 SH
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
R606
75OHM
R605
75OHM
R604
75OHM
PIC_RST-N
DGND
(SHT5)
18.432MHZ
36.864MHZ
24.576MHZ
33.8688MHZ
16.384MHZ
IN_DATA_1-2
IN_DATA_3-4
IN_DATA_5-6
IN_DATA_7-8
IN_DATA_9-10
AOUT_DATA
AOUT_BCLK
AOUT_FCLK
+5VD
C601
IC601F
0.1UF
74HC14A
12
13
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
DGND
IC602
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
OE1
OE2
20
74LVC2244
DGND
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
7 14
6
4
+3.3V C602
VCC
GND
10
+15V
L600
560UH
L601
560UH
-15V
IC601B
74HC14A
IC601C
74HC14A
DGND
DGND
R603
1.00K
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
5
0.1UF
3
DGND
DGND
R601
1.00K
R602
1.00K
18 OUT_BCK_1-2
16 OUT_BCK_3-4
14 OUT_BCK_5-6
12 OUT_BCK_7-8
9 OUT_BCK_9-10
7 OUT_BCK_11-12
5
3
DGND
AGND
DGND
(SHT5)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
IC601A
1 2
74HC14A
DGND DGND DGND
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
IC603
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
OE1
OE2
20
74LVC2244
DGND
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
IC605
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
OE1
OE2
+3.3V C603
VCC
GND
10
DGND
20
74LVC2244
DGND
+3.3V
C605
VCC
GND
10
DGND
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
0.1UF
0.1UF
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
SPARES
IC601D
9 8
74HC14A
DGND
18 OUT_LRCK_1-2
Y1
(SHT3)
16 OUT_LRCK_3-4
Y2
(SHT3)
14 OUT_LRCK_5-6
Y3
(SHT3)
12 OUT_LRCK_7-8
Y4
(SHT4)
9 OUT_LRCK_9-10
Y5
(SHT4)
7 OUT_LRCK_11-12
Y6
(SHT4)
5
Y7
3
Y8
DGND
IN_BCK_1-2
IN_BCK_3-4
IN_BCK_5-6
IN_BCK_7-8
IN_BCK_9-10
IN_BCK_11-12
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
IC601E
11 10
74HC14A
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
IC604
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
OE1
OE2
20
74LVC2244
DGND
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
IC606
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
OE1
OE2
+3.3V C604
VCC
GND
10
DGND
20
74LVC2244
DGND
VCC
GND
10
DGND
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
+3.3V
C606
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
0.1UF
0.1UF
+3.3V
18 OUT_DATA_1-2
16 OUT_DATA_3-4
14 OUT_DATA_5-6
12 OUT_DATA_7-8
9 OUT_DATA_9-10
7
5
3
OUT_DATA_11-12
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
R600
1.00K
IN_LRCK_1-2
IN_LRCK_3-4
IN_LRCK_5-6
IN_LRCK_7-8
IN_LRCK_9-10
IN_LRCK_11-12
JTAG
(CPLD)
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
J600
2
4
6
8
10
1
3
5
7
9
HDR 5X2
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
+3.3V
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
R607 R608 R609
100.0K 100.0K 100.0K
���
���
DGND
33.8688MHZ
16.384MHZ
RXCKO_1-2
RX_BCK_1-2
RX_LRCK_1-2
(SHT3) RXCKO_3-4
8
9
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
12
13
14
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
RX_BCK_3-4
RX_LRCK_3-4
20
21
23
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
RXCKO_5-6
RX_BCK_5-6
RX_LRCK_5-6
31
32
33
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
RXCKO_7-8
RX_BCK_7-8
RX_LRCK_7-8
40
41
42
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
RXCKO_9-10
RX_BCK_9-10
RX_LRCK_9-10
52
54
57
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
RXCKO_11-12 63
RX_BCK_11-12 64
RX_LRCK_11-12 65
SEL_K-N
(SHT5) SEL_L-N
(SHT5) SEL_M-N
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
SYNCIN_RMCK
SYNCIN_SCLK
SYNCIN_LRCK
D[0...7]
87
88
89
90
+3.3V +3.3V
3
VCCIO
GCLK1
OE1
GCLRN
OE2/GCLK2
GNDIO
11
DGND
18
33.8688MHZ
16.384MHZ
VCCIO
RXCKO_1-2
RX_BCK_1-2
RX_LRCK_1-2
GNDIO
26
34
VCCIO
GNDIO
43
51
VCCIO
62
TCK
VCCIO
73
TDO
15
TMS
4
TDI
47
48
56
83
84
85
D7 92
D6 93
D5 94
D4 96
D3 97
D2 98
D1 99
D0 100
RXCKO_3-4
RX_BCK_3-4
RX_LRCK_3-4
RXCKO_5-6
RX_BCK_5-6
RX_LRCK_5-6
RXCKO_7-8
RX_BCK_7-8
RX_LRCK_7-8
RXCKO_9-10 10
RX_BCK_9-10 10
RX_LRCK_9-10 10
RXCKO_11-12 12
RX_BCK_11-12 12
RX_LRCK_11-12 12
SYNCIN_RMCK
SYNCIN_SCLK
SYNCIN_LRCK
SEL_K-N
SEL_L-N
SEL_M-N
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
GNDIO
59
66
GNDIO
74
82
VCCIO
GNDIO
95
39
VCCINT
REF_CLK_1-2
REF_CLK_3-4
REF_CLK_5-6
REF_CLK_7-8
REF_CLK_9-10 10
REF_CLK_11-12 12
81 REF_CLK_1-2
80 REF_CLK_3-4
79 REF_CLK_5-6
76 REF_CLK_7-8
75 REF_CLK_9-10
71 REF_CLK_11-12
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
PIC_MCLK
6 PIC_MCLK
(SHT5)
AOUT_MCLK
10 AOUT_MCLK
(SHT2)
TX_MCLK_1-2
TX_BCK_1-2
TX_LRCK_1-2
19 TX_MCLK_1-2
17 TX_BCK_1-2
16 TX_LRCK_1-2
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
TX_MCLK_3-4
TX_BCK_3-4
TX_LRCK_3-4
30 TX_MCLK_3-4
29 TX_BCK_3-4
25 TX_LRCK_3-4
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
TX_MCLK_5-6
TX_BCK_5-6
TX_LRCK_5-6
37 TX_MCLK_5-6
36 TX_BCK_5-6
35 TX_LRCK_5-6
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
TX_MCLK_7-8
TX_BCK_7-8
TX_LRCK_7-8
46 TX_MCLK_7-8
45 TX_BCK_7-8
44 TX_LRCK_7-8
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
TX_MCLK_9-10 10
TX_BCK_9-10 10
TX_LRCK_9-10 10
61 TX_MCLK_9-10
60 TX_BCK_9-10
58 TX_LRCK_9-10
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
TX_MCLK_11-12 12
TX_BCK_11-12 12
TX_LRCK_11-12 12
69 TX_MCLK_11-12
68 TX_BCK_11-12
67 TX_LRCK_11-12
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
GNDINT
38
DGND
91
VCCINT
GNDINT
86
+3.3V
DGND
C607
0.1UF
1
2
5
7
22
24
27
28
49
50
53
55
70
72
77
78
C608
0.1UF
C609
0.1UF
IC600
EPM7256AETC100-10
C610
0.1UF
8585 Digital I/O & SRC
Control & Miscellaneous
62330.000.02.1 6 of 7

+
C703
10UF
C725
0.1UF
POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTOR
+5VA
+5VA
-5VA J700
-5VA
-15V
+15V
1
3
2
4
-15V
+15V
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
AGND
13
15
14
16
AGND
+5VD
17 18
19 20
DGND
TP700
TEST_POINT
CGND
NOTE:
1. -5VA (J700 PINS 3,4) IS NOT
USED ON THIS ASSEMBLY.
ASSEM
AGND
IC700
TPS79318DBV
1
IN OUT
3
C726
0.1UF
EN
HDR 10X2 SH
+15V
+ C700 C723
10UF/20V 0.1UF
+ C701
C724
10UF/20V
0.1UF
-15V
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9
GND
2
5
4
NR
C764
0.01UF
DGND
IC701
LT1086CM-3.3PBF
3
2
Vin Vout
GND
1
Vout P AD
4
C727
0.1UF
DGND
+1.8V
+
+3.3V
+
DGND
M10 M11 M12
C702
10UF
C704
10UF
II
II
II
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
R700
2.0OHM
+ C705
10UF
+ C707
10UF
L700
R701
2.0OHM
+ C709
10UF
C729
0.1UF
L701
R702
2.0OHM
C733
0.1UF
L702
C737
0.1UF
9
10
9
10
9
10
DGND
44
VCC
BGND
AGND
44
VCC
BGND
AGND
44
VCC
BGND
AGND
16
DGND DGND
DGND
16
DGND DGND
DGND
43
DGND1
DGND3
43
DGND1
DGND3
43
DGND1 DGND1
16
DGND DGND
DGND3
C728
0.1UF
C731
42
VIO
VDD18
17
0.1UF
C732
0.1UF
C735
42
VIO
VDD18
17
0.1UF
C736
0.1UF
42
VIO
VDD18 VDD18
17
C739
0.1UF
41
NC
VDD33
DGND2
+1.8V
41
NC
VDD33
DGND2
+1.8V
41
NC
VDD33
DGND2
C301D
SRC4382IPFB
33
30
DGND
C302D
SRC4382IPFB
33
30
DGND
C303D
SRC4382IPFB
33
30
C730
0.1UF
+
C734
0.1UF
+
C738
0.1UF
+
C706
10UF
C708
10UF
C710
10UF
II
II
II
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
R703
2.0OHM
+ C711
10UF
+ C713
10UF
C741
0.1UF
+1.8V +1.8V
C751
DGND
L703
L704
R704
2.0OHM
R705
2.0OHM
+ C715
10UF
C745
0.1UF
L705
C749
0.1UF
9
10
9
10
9
10
DGND
44
VCC
BGND
AGND
44
VCC
BGND
AGND
44
VCC
BGND
AGND
16
DGND DGND
DGND
16
DGND DGND
DGND
43
DGND1
DGND3
43
DGND1
DGND3
43
DGND1 DGND1
16
DGND DGND
DGND3
C740
0.1UF
C743
42
VIO
VDD18
17
0.1UF
C744
0.1UF
C747
42
VIO
VDD18
17
0.1UF
C748
0.1UF
42
VIO
VDD18 VDD18
17
0.1UF
41
NC
VDD33
DGND2
+1.8V
41
NC
VDD33
DGND2
+1.8V
41
NC
VDD33
DGND2
6-60
C401D
SRC4382IPFB
33
30
DGND
C402D
SRC4382IPFB
33
30
DGND
C403D
SRC4382IPFB
33
30
DGND
C742
0.1UF
+
C746
0.1UF
+
C750
0.1UF
+
C712
10UF
C714
10UF
C716
10UF
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
+3.3V
DGND
+3.3V
DGND
+3.3V
DGND
+ C717
10UF
+ C718
10UF
+ C719
10UF
DGND
DGND
DGND
L706
C752
0.1UF
L707
C754
0.1UF
L708
C756
0.1UF
28
27
26
25
24
23
28
27
26
25
24
23
28
27
26
25
24
23
IC304D
SRC4184IPAG
VDD18
VDD18
REGEN
VDD33
VDD33
DGND
IC305D
SRC4184IPAG
VDD18
VDD18
REGEN
VDD33
VDD33
DGND
IC306D
SRC4184IPAG
VDD18
VDD18
REGEN
VDD33
VDD33
DGND
VIO
DGND
VIO
DGND
VIO
DGND
56
57
56
57
56
57
C753
0.1UF
C755
0.1UF
C757
0.1UF
+3.3V
DGND
+3.3V
DGND
+3.3V
DGND
+ C720
10UF
+ C721
10UF
+ C722
10UF
DGND
DGND
DGND
L709
C758
0.1UF
L710
C760
0.1UF
L711
C762
0.1UF
28
27
26
25
24
23
28
27
26
25
24
23
28
27
26
25
24
23
IC404D
SRC4184IPAG
VDD18
VDD18
REGEN
VDD33
VDD33
DGND
IC405D
SRC4184IPAG
VDD18
VDD18
REGEN
VDD33
VDD33
DGND
IC406D
SRC4184IPAG
VDD18
VDD18
REGEN
VDD33
VDD33
DGND
VIO
DGND
VIO
DGND
VIO
DGND
56
57
56
57
56
57
C759
0.1UF
C761
0.1UF
C763
0.1UF
8585 Digital I/O & SRC
Control & Miscellaneous
62330.000.02.1 7 of 7

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-61
DSP BOARD PARTS LOCATOR DIAGRAM
FOR SCHEMATIC 62375.000.xx.1

DSP CONTROL INTERFACE
62375.000.01.1_Sheet03.SchDoc
EXTAL
IRQB-N
DSP_RST-N
IC201_0_CS-N
IC201_1_CS-N
IC202_0_CS-N
IC202_1_CS-N
IC203_0_CS-N
IC203_1_CS-N
IC204_0_CS-N
IC204_1_CS-N
IC205_0_CS-N
IC205_1_CS-N
IC206_0_CS-N
IC206_1_CS-N
IC207_0_CS-N
IC207_1_CS-N
IC208_0_CS-N
IC208_1_CS-N
IC209_0_CS-N
IC209_1_CS-N
SSI_DO
SSI_CLK
SSI_DI
HREQ-N
DSP EXTERNAL MEMORY CONTROLLER INTERFACE 1
62375.000.01.1_Sheet04.SchDoc
DSP POWER & GROUND
62375.000.01.1_Sheet05.SchDoc
SSI_DO
SSI_CLK
SSI_DI
HREQ-N
8-BIT CONTROL INTERFACE
62375.000.01.1_Sheet06.SchDoc
SSI_DO
SSI_CLK
SSI_DI
HREQ-N
ISA_CM N
ISA_A5
ISA_A4
ISA_A3
ISA_A2
ISA_A1
ISA_A0
EXTAL
IRQB-N
DSP_RST-N
IC201_0_CS-N
IC201_1_CS-N
IC202_0_CS-N
IC202_1_CS-N
IC203_0_CS-N
IC203_1_CS-N
IC204_0_CS-N
IC204_1_CS-N
IC205_0_CS-N
IC205_1_CS-N
IC206_0_CS-N
IC206_1_CS-N
IC207_0_CS-N
IC207_1_CS-N
IC208_0_CS-N
IC208_1_CS-N
IC209_0_CS-N
IC209_1_CS-N
ISA_CM N
ISA_A5
ISA_A4
ISA_A3
ISA_A2
ISA_A1
ISA_A0
CLOCK GENERATION & CPLD
62375.000.01.1_Sheet07.SchDoc
EXTAL
IRQB-N
DSP_RST-N
IC201_0_CS-N
IC201_1_CS-N
IC202_0_CS-N
IC202_1_CS-N
IC203_0_CS-N
IC203_1_CS-N
IC204_0_CS-N
IC204_1_CS-N
IC205_0_CS-N
IC205_1_CS-N
IC206_0_CS-N
IC206_1_CS-N
IC207_0_CS-N
IC207_1_CS-N
IC208_0_CS-N
IC208_1_CS-N
IC209_0_CS-N
IC209_1_CS-N
ISA_CM N
ISA_A5
ISA_A4
ISA_A3
ISA_A2
ISA_A1
ISA_A0
SSI_DO
SSI_CLK
SSI_DI
PW R_SY NC
PHONE_M CLK
PHONE_RST-N
PHONE_BCLK
PHONE_DATA
PHONE_W CLK
MUTE_IC901
PHONE_DFS
FSY NC
BCLK
IN_FCLK
IN_BCLK
OUT_FCLK
OUT_BCLK
COM P_W CLK
COM P_BCLK
AIN_DATA
DIN_DATA1
IC209_SDI1_0
IC209_SDI2_0
IC209_SDI3_0
IC208_SDI3_0
IC207_SDI3_0
IC206_SDI3_0
IC205_SDI3_0
IC204_SDI3_0
IC203_SDI3_0
IC202_SDI3_0
IC201_SDI0_0
IC201_SDI1_0
IC201_SDI2_0
IC201_SDI3_0
IC201_SDI0_1
IC201_SDI0_2
IC209_SDO5_0
IC209_SDO5_1
IC209_SDO4_1
IC209_SDO3_1
IC209_SDO2_1
IC209_SDO5_3
IC209_SDO4_3
IC209_SDO3_3
IC209_SDO2_3
IC208_SDO5_3
IC208_SDO4_3
IC208_SDO3_3
IC208_SDO2_3
IC207_SDO2_3
IC206_SDO2_3
IC205_SDO2_3
IC204_SDO2_3
IC203_SDO2_3
IC202_SDO2_3
IC201_SDO2_3
IC201_SDIO_A
IC201_SDIO_B
IC209_SDO3_2
IC209_SDO2_2
SY NC_FLAG
PW R_SY NC
PHONE_M CLK
PHONE_RST-N
PHONE_BCLK
PHONE_DATA
PHONE_W CLK
MUTE_IC901
PHONE_DFS
FSY NC
BCLK
IN_FCLK
IN_BCLK
OUT_FCLK
OUT_BCLK
COM P_W CLK
COM P_BCLK
AIN_DATA
DIN_DATA1
IC209_SDI1_0
IC209_SDI2_0
IC209_SDI3_0
IC208_SDI3_0
IC207_SDI3_0
IC206_SDI3_0
IC205_SDI3_0
IC204_SDI3_0
IC203_SDI3_0
IC202_SDI3_0
IC201_SDI0_0
IC201_SDI1_0
IC201_SDI2_0
IC201_SDI3_0
IC201_SDI0_1
IC201_SDI0_2
6-62
IC209_SDO5_0
IC209_SDO5_1
IC209_SDO4_1
IC209_SDO3_1
IC209_SDO2_1
IC209_SDO5_3
IC209_SDO4_3
IC209_SDO3_3
IC209_SDO2_3
IC208_SDO5_3
IC208_SDO4_3
IC208_SDO3_3
IC208_SDO2_3
IC207_SDO2_3
IC206_SDO2_3
IC205_SDO2_3
IC204_SDO2_3
IC203_SDO2_3
IC202_SDO2_3
IC201_SDO2_3
IC201_SDIO_A
IC201_SDIO_B
IC209_SDO3_2
IC209_SDO2_2
SY NC_FLAG
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
POWER DISTRIBUTION
62375.000.01.1_Sheet08.SchDoc
PW R_SY NC
DSP EXTERNAL MEMORY CONTROLLER INTERFACE 2
62375.000.01.1_Sheet09.SchDoc
PHONE_M CLK
PHONE_RST-N
PHONE_BCLK
PHONE_DATA
PHONE_W CLK
MUTE_IC901
PHONE_DFS
DSP ENHANCED SERIAL AUDIO INTERFACE
62375.000.01.1_Sheet02.SchDoc
FSY NC
BCLK
IN_FCLK
IN_BCLK
OUT_FCLK
OUT_BCLK
COM P_W CLK
COM P_BCLK
AIN_DATA
DIN_DATA1
IC209_SDI1_0
IC209_SDI2_0
IC209_SDI3_0
IC208_SDI3_0
IC207_SDI3_0
IC206_SDI3_0
IC205_SDI3_0
IC204_SDI3_0
IC203_SDI3_0
IC202_SDI3_0
IC201_SDI0_0
IC201_SDI1_0
IC201_SDI2_0
IC201_SDI3_0
IC201_SDI0_1
IC201_SDI0_2
IC209_SDO5_0
IC209_SDO5_1
IC209_SDO4_1
IC209_SDO3_1
IC209_SDO2_1
IC209_SDO5_3
IC209_SDO4_3
IC209_SDO3_3
IC209_SDO2_3
IC208_SDO5_3
IC208_SDO4_3
IC208_SDO3_3
IC208_SDO2_3
IC207_SDO2_3
IC206_SDO2_3
IC205_SDO2_3
IC204_SDO2_3
IC203_SDO2_3
IC202_SDO2_3
IC201_SDO2_3
IC201_SDIO_A
IC201_SDIO_B
IC209_SDO3_2
IC209_SDO2_2
SY NC_FLAG
DSP BOARD
SCHEMATIC 1 OF 9
INTERCONNECTS
62375.000.xx.1

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-63
SPDIFIN1/PG9
83
SPDIFOUT1/PG13
84
SDI0_0/SDO5_0/PC6_0
85
SDI1_0/SDO4_0/PC7_0
86
SDI2_0/SDO3_0/PC8_0
87
SDI3_0/SDO2_0/PC9_0
88
HCKT_0/PC5_0/STCLK
89
FST_0/PC4_0
90
SCKT_0/PC3_0
91
HCKR_0/PC2_0/SRCK
92
SCKR_0/PC0_0
93
FSR_0/PC1_0
94
SDI0_1/SDO5_1/PE6_0
97
SDI1_1/SDO4_1/PE7_0
98
SDI2_1/SDO3_1/PE8_0
99
SDI3_1/SDO2_1/PE9_0
100
SDI0_3/SDO5_3/PE6_1
118
SDI1_3/SDO4_3/PE7_1
119
SDI2_3/SDO3_3/PE8_1
120
SDI3_3/SDO2_3/PE9_1
121
SDI0_2/SDO5_2/PC6_1
122
SDI1_2/SDO4_2/PC7_1
123
SDI2_2/SDO3_2/PC8_1
124
SDI3_2/SDO2_2/PC9_1
125
HCKT_3/PE5_1/STCLK
134
FST_3_PE4_1
135
SCKT_3/PE3_1
136
HCKR_3/PE2_1/SRCK
137
SCKR_3/PE0_1
138
FSR_3/PE1_1
139
IC201A
DSP B56724AG
SPDIFIN1/PG9
83
SPDIFOUT1/PG13
84
SDI0_0/SDO5_0/PC6_0
85
SDI1_0/SDO4_0/PC7_0
86
SDI2_0/SDO3_0/PC8_0
87
SDI3_0/SDO2_0/PC9_0
88
HCKT_0/PC5_0/STCLK
89
FST_0/PC4_0
90
SCKT_0/PC3_0
91
HCKR_0/PC2_0/SRCK
92
SCKR_0/PC0_0
93
FSR_0/PC1_0
94
SDI0_1/SDO5_1/PE6_0
97
SDI1_1/SDO4_1/PE7_0
98
SDI2_1/SDO3_1/PE8_0
99
SDI3_1/SDO2_1/PE9_0
100
SDI0_3/SDO5_3/PE6_1
118
SDI1_3/SDO4_3/PE7_1
119
SDI2_3/SDO3_3/PE8_1
120
SDI3_3/SDO2_3/PE9_1
121
SDI0_2/SDO5_2/PC6_1
122
SDI1_2/SDO4_2/PC7_1
123
SDI2_2/SDO3_2/PC8_1
124
SDI3_2/SDO2_2/PC9_1
125
HCKT_3/PE5_1/STCLK
134
FST_3_PE4_1
135
SCKT_3/PE3_1
136
HCKR_3/PE2_1/SRCK
137
SCKR_3/PE0_1
138
FSR_3/PE1_1
139
IC202A
DSP B56724AG
SPDIFIN1/PG9
83
SPDIFOUT1/PG13
84
SDI0_0/SDO5_0/PC6_0
85
SDI1_0/SDO4_0/PC7_0
86
SDI2_0/SDO3_0/PC8_0
87
SDI3_0/SDO2_0/PC9_0
88
HCKT_0/PC5_0/STCLK
89
FST_0/PC4_0
90
SCKT_0/PC3_0
91
HCKR_0/PC2_0/SRCK
92
SCKR_0/PC0_0
93
FSR_0/PC1_0
94
SDI0_1/SDO5_1/PE6_0
97
SDI1_1/SDO4_1/PE7_0
98
SDI2_1/SDO3_1/PE8_0
99
SDI3_1/SDO2_1/PE9_0
100
SDI0_3/SDO5_3/PE6_1
118
SDI1_3/SDO4_3/PE7_1
119
SDI2_3/SDO3_3/PE8_1
120
SDI3_3/SDO2_3/PE9_1
121
SDI0_2/SDO5_2/PC6_1
122
SDI1_2/SDO4_2/PC7_1
123
SDI2_2/SDO3_2/PC8_1
124
SDI3_2/SDO2_2/PC9_1
125
HCKT_3/PE5_1/STCLK
134
FST_3_PE4_1
135
SCKT_3/PE3_1
136
HCKR_3/PE2_1/SRCK
137
SCKR_3/PE0_1
138
FSR_3/PE1_1
139
IC203A
DSP B56724AG
SPDIFIN1/PG9
83
SPDIFOUT1/PG13
84
SDI0_0/SDO5_0/PC6_0
85
SDI1_0/SDO4_0/PC7_0
86
SDI2_0/SDO3_0/PC8_0
87
SDI3_0/SDO2_0/PC9_0
88
HCKT_0/PC5_0/STCLK
89
FST_0/PC4_0
90
SCKT_0/PC3_0
91
HCKR_0/PC2_0/SRCK
92
SCKR_0/PC0_0
93
FSR_0/PC1_0
94
SDI0_1/SDO5_1/PE6_0
97
SDI1_1/SDO4_1/PE7_0
98
SDI2_1/SDO3_1/PE8_0
99
SDI3_1/SDO2_1/PE9_0
100
SDI0_3/SDO5_3/PE6_1
118
SDI1_3/SDO4_3/PE7_1
119
SDI2_3/SDO3_3/PE8_1
120
SDI3_3/SDO2_3/PE9_1
121
SDI0_2/SDO5_2/PC6_1
122
SDI1_2/SDO4_2/PC7_1
123
SDI2_2/SDO3_2/PC8_1
124
SDI3_2/SDO2_2/PC9_1
125
HCKT_3/PE5_1/STCLK
134
FST_3_PE4_1
135
SCKT_3/PE3_1
136
HCKR_3/PE2_1/SRCK
137
SCKR_3/PE0_1
138
FSR_3/PE1_1
139
IC207A
DSP B56724AG
SPDIFIN1/PG9
83
SPDIFOUT1/PG13
84
SDI0_0/SDO5_0/PC6_0
85
SDI1_0/SDO4_0/PC7_0
86
SDI2_0/SDO3_0/PC8_0
87
SDI3_0/SDO2_0/PC9_0
88
HCKT_0/PC5_0/STCLK
89
FST_0/PC4_0
90
SCKT_0/PC3_0
91
HCKR_0/PC2_0/SRCK
92
SCKR_0/PC0_0
93
FSR_0/PC1_0
94
SDI0_1/SDO5_1/PE6_0
97
SDI1_1/SDO4_1/PE7_0
98
SDI2_1/SDO3_1/PE8_0
99
SDI3_1/SDO2_1/PE9_0
100
SDI0_3/SDO5_3/PE6_1
118
SDI1_3/SDO4_3/PE7_1
119
SDI2_3/SDO3_3/PE8_1
120
SDI3_3/SDO2_3/PE9_1
121
SDI0_2/SDO5_2/PC6_1
122
SDI1_2/SDO4_2/PC7_1
123
SDI2_2/SDO3_2/PC8_1
124
SDI3_2/SDO2_2/PC9_1
125
HCKT_3/PE5_1/STCLK
134
FST_3_PE4_1
135
SCKT_3/PE3_1
136
HCKR_3/PE2_1/SRCK
137
SCKR_3/PE0_1
138
FSR_3/PE1_1
139
IC208A
DSP B56724AG
SPDIFIN1/PG9
83
SPDIFOUT1/PG13
84
SDI0_0/SDO5_0/PC6_0
85
SDI1_0/SDO4_0/PC7_0
86
SDI2_0/SDO3_0/PC8_0
87
SDI3_0/SDO2_0/PC9_0
88
HCKT_0/PC5_0/STCLK
89
FST_0/PC4_0
90
SCKT_0/PC3_0
91
HCKR_0/PC2_0/SRCK
92
SCKR_0/PC0_0
93
FSR_0/PC1_0
94
SDI0_1/SDO5_1/PE6_0
97
SDI1_1/SDO4_1/PE7_0
98
SDI2_1/SDO3_1/PE8_0
99
SDI3_1/SDO2_1/PE9_0
100
SDI0_3/SDO5_3/PE6_1
118
SDI1_3/SDO4_3/PE7_1
119
SDI2_3/SDO3_3/PE8_1
120
SDI3_3/SDO2_3/PE9_1
121
SDI0_2/SDO5_2/PC6_1
122
SDI1_2/SDO4_2/PC7_1
123
SDI2_2/SDO3_2/PC8_1
124
SDI3_2/SDO2_2/PC9_1
125
HCKT_3/PE5_1/STCLK
134
FST_3_PE4_1
135
SCKT_3/PE3_1
136
HCKR_3/PE2_1/SRCK
137
SCKR_3/PE0_1
138
FSR_3/PE1_1
139
IC209A
DSP B56724AG
IN_FCLK
IN_BCLK
IC201_SDI0_0
(SHT7)
IC201_SDI0_0
IC201_SDI1_0
IC201_SDI1_0
IC201_SDI2_0
IC201_SDI2_0
IC201_SDI3_0
IC201_SDI3_0
IC201_IC202_X
IC201_IC202_Y
IC201_IC202_Z
IC202_SDI3_0
IC202_SDI3_0
IC209_SDO5_0
IC209_SDO5_0
IC209_SDI1_0
IC209_SDI1_0
IC209_SDI2_0
IC209_SDI2_0
IC209_SDI3_0
IC209_SDI3_0
FSY NC
BCLK
FSY NC
BCLK
FSY NC
BCLK
FSY NC
BCLK
FSY NC
BCLK
FSY NC
BCLK
FSY NC
BCLK
FSY NC
BCLK
FSY NC
BCLK
IC209_SDO5_1
IC209_SDO5_1
IC209_SDO4_1
IC209_SDO4_1
IC209_SDO3_1
IC209_SDO3_1
IC209_SDO5_3
IC209_SDO5_3
IC209_SDO4_3
IC209_SDO4_3
IC209_SDO3_3
IC209_SDO3_3
COM P_BCLK
COM P_W CLK
(SHT7) COM P_W CLK
COM P_BCLK
(SHT7) COM P_BCLK
OUT_FCLK
OUT_BCLK
IC209_SDO2_3
IC209_SDO2_3
IC208_SDO2_3
IC208_SDO2_3
IC207_SDO2_3
IC207_SDO2_3
IC203_SDO2_3
IC203_SDO2_3
IC202_SDO2_3
IC202_SDO2_3
IC201_SDO2_3
IC201_SDO2_3
IC203_SDI3_0
IC203_SDI3_0
IC207_SDI3_0
IC207_SDI3_0
IC208_SDI3_0
IC208_SDI3_0
OUT_FCLK
OUT_BCLK
FSY NC
(SHT7) FSY NC
BCLK
(SHT7) BCLK
IC201_SDI0_1
IC201_SDI0_1
FSY NC
BCLK
IC208_SDO3_3
IC208_SDO3_3
IC208_SDO4_3
IC208_SDO4_3
IC208_SDO5_3
IC208_SDO5_3
IC201_IC202_Z
IC201_IC202_Y
IC201_IC202_X
IC201_SDI0_2
IC201_SDI0_2
IC209_SDO2_1
IC209_SDO2_1
COM P_W CLK
SPDIFIN1/PG9
83
SPDIFOUT1/PG13
84
SDI0_0/SDO5_0/PC6_0
85
SDI1_0/SDO4_0/PC7_0
86
SDI2_0/SDO3_0/PC8_0
87
SDI3_0/SDO2_0/PC9_0
88
HCKT_0/PC5_0/STCLK
89
FST_0/PC4_0
90
SCKT_0/PC3_0
91
HCKR_0/PC2_0/SRCK
92
SCKR_0/PC0_0
93
FSR_0/PC1_0
94
SDI0_1/SDO5_1/PE6_0
97
SDI1_1/SDO4_1/PE7_0
98
SDI2_1/SDO3_1/PE8_0
99
SDI3_1/SDO2_1/PE9_0
100
SDI0_3/SDO5_3/PE6_1
118
SDI1_3/SDO4_3/PE7_1
119
SDI2_3/SDO3_3/PE8_1
120
SDI3_3/SDO2_3/PE9_1
121
SDI0_2/SDO5_2/PC6_1
122
SDI1_2/SDO4_2/PC7_1
123
SDI2_2/SDO3_2/PC8_1
124
SDI3_2/SDO2_2/PC9_1
125
HCKT_3/PE5_1/STCLK
134
FST_3_PE4_1
135
SCKT_3/PE3_1
136
HCKR_3/PE2_1/SRCK
137
SCKR_3/PE0_1
138
FSR_3/PE1_1
139
IC204A
DSP B56724AG
FSY NC
BCLK
FSY NC
BCLK
IC204_SDO2_3
IC204_SDO2_3
IC204_SDI3_0
IC204_SDI3_0
SPDIFIN1/PG9
83
SPDIFOUT1/PG13
84
SDI0_0/SDO5_0/PC6_0
85
SDI1_0/SDO4_0/PC7_0
86
SDI2_0/SDO3_0/PC8_0
87
SDI3_0/SDO2_0/PC9_0
88
HCKT_0/PC5_0/STCLK
89
FST_0/PC4_0
90
SCKT_0/PC3_0
91
HCKR_0/PC2_0/SRCK
92
SCKR_0/PC0_0
93
FSR_0/PC1_0
94
SDI0_1/SDO5_1/PE6_0
97
SDI1_1/SDO4_1/PE7_0
98
SDI2_1/SDO3_1/PE8_0
99
SDI3_1/SDO2_1/PE9_0
100
SDI0_3/SDO5_3/PE6_1
118
SDI1_3/SDO4_3/PE7_1
119
SDI2_3/SDO3_3/PE8_1
120
SDI3_3/SDO2_3/PE9_1
121
SDI0_2/SDO5_2/PC6_1
122
SDI1_2/SDO4_2/PC7_1
123
SDI2_2/SDO3_2/PC8_1
124
SDI3_2/SDO2_2/PC9_1
125
HCKT_3/PE5_1/STCLK
134
FST_3_PE4_1
135
SCKT_3/PE3_1
136
HCKR_3/PE2_1/SRCK
137
SCKR_3/PE0_1
138
FSR_3/PE1_1
139
IC205A
DSP B56724AG
FSY NC
BCLK
FSY NC
BCLK
IC205_SDO2_3
IC205_SDO2_3
IC205_SDI3_0
IC205_SDI3_0
SPDIFIN1/PG9
83
SPDIFOUT1/PG13
84
SDI0_0/SDO5_0/PC6_0
85
SDI1_0/SDO4_0/PC7_0
86
SDI2_0/SDO3_0/PC8_0
87
SDI3_0/SDO2_0/PC9_0
88
HCKT_0/PC5_0/STCLK
89
FST_0/PC4_0
90
SCKT_0/PC3_0
91
HCKR_0/PC2_0/SRCK
92
SCKR_0/PC0_0
93
FSR_0/PC1_0
94
SDI0_1/SDO5_1/PE6_0
97
SDI1_1/SDO4_1/PE7_0
98
SDI2_1/SDO3_1/PE8_0
99
SDI3_1/SDO2_1/PE9_0
100
SDI0_3/SDO5_3/PE6_1
118
SDI1_3/SDO4_3/PE7_1
119
SDI2_3/SDO3_3/PE8_1
120
SDI3_3/SDO2_3/PE9_1
121
SDI0_2/SDO5_2/PC6_1
122
SDI1_2/SDO4_2/PC7_1
123
SDI2_2/SDO3_2/PC8_1
124
SDI3_2/SDO2_2/PC9_1
125
HCKT_3/PE5_1/STCLK
134
FST_3_PE4_1
135
SCKT_3/PE3_1
136
HCKR_3/PE2_1/SRCK
137
SCKR_3/PE0_1
138
FSR_3/PE1_1
139
IC206A
DSP B56724AG
FSY NC
BCLK
FSY NC
BCLK
IC206_SDO2_3
IC206_SDO2_3
IC206_SDI3_0
IC206_SDI3_0
IC202_IC203_X
IC202_IC203_Y
IC202_IC203_Z
IC203_IC204_X
IC203_IC204_Y
IC203_IC204_Z
IC204_IC205_X
IC204_IC205_Y
IC204_IC205_Z
IC205_IC206_X
IC205_IC206_Y
IC205_IC206_Z
IC206_IC207_X
IC206_IC207_Y
IC206_IC207_Z
IC207_IC208_X
IC207_IC208_Y
IC207_IC208_Z
IC202_IC203_X
IC202_IC203_Y
IC202_IC203_Z
IC203_IC204_X
IC203_IC204_Y
IC203_IC204_Z
IC204_IC205_X
IC204_IC205_Y
IC204_IC205_Z
IC205_IC206_X
IC205_IC206_Y
IC205_IC206_Z
IC206_IC207_X
IC206_IC207_Y
IC206_IC207_Z
IC207_IC208_X
IC207_IC208_Y
IC207_IC208_Z
IN_FCLK
(SHT7) IN_FCLK
IN_BCLK
(SHT7) IN_BCLK
OUT_FCLK
(SHT7) OUT_FCLK
OUT_BCLK
(SHT7) OUT_BCLK
E201
E211
E202
E212
E203
E213
E204
E214
E205
E215
E206
E216
E207
E217
E208
E218
E209
E219
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
AIN_DATA
AIN_DATA (SHT7)
DIN_DATA1
DIN_DATA1 (SHT7)
IC202_IC203_W IC203_IC204_W
IC204_IC205_W IC205_IC206_W IC206_IC207_W
IC207_IC208_W
FSY NC
BCLK
IC201_SDIO_A
IC201_SDIO_A (SHT7)
IC201_SDIO_B
IC201_SDIO_B (SHT7)
IC209_SDO3_2
IC209_SDO3_2 (SHT7)
IC209_SDO2_2
IC209_SDO2_2 (SHT7)
IC202_I C203_W
IC203_IC204_W IC204_IC205_W IC205_IC206_W
IC206_IC207_W IC207_IC208_W
SYNC_F L AG
SY NC_FLAG (SHT7)
DSP BOARD
SCHEMATIC 2 OF 9
ENHANCED SERIAL INTERFACE
62375.000.xx.1

(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT7)
EXTAL
DSP_RST-N
SSI_DI
SSI_DO
SSI_CLK
IRQB-N
IC302A
1C
12
1Y 1B
1A
74AC11D
(SHT6) HREQ-N
HREQ-N
IC302B
2C
6
2Y 2B
2A
74AC11D
IC302C
3C
8
3Y 3B
3A
74AC11D
GND
7
+3.3V
14
V CC
+3.3V
13
2
1
5
4
3
+3.3V
9
10
11
EXTAL
DSP_RST-N
SSI_DI
SSI_DO
SSI_CLK
IRQB-N
IC301A
1C
12
1Y 1B
1A
74AC11D
IC301B
2C
6
2Y 2B
2A
74AC11D
13
2
1
5
4
3
8
IC301C
3C
3Y 3B
3A
74AC11D
+3.3V
9
10
11
14
VCC
IC302D
IC301D
C302
C301
0.01UF 0.01UF
74AC11D
74AC11D
G ND
7
R210
4.99K
DSP B56724AG
DSP B56724AG
6-64
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
IC201B
IC202B
IC203B
EXTAL 80
EXTAL
XTAL
79
EXTAL 80
EXTAL
XTAL
79
EXTAL
80
EXTAL
XTAL
79
TM S
TCK
IC201_IC202
101
102
103
TM S
TCK
TDI
TDO
104 IC201_TDO
TM S
TCK
IC202_IC203
101
102
103
TM S
TCK
TDI
TDO
104 IC201_IC202
TM S
TCK
IC203_IC204
101
102
103
TM S
TCK
TDI
TDO
104 IC202_IC203
105
PINIT/NM I0
105
PINIT/NM I0
105
PINIT/NM I0
DSP_RST-N 111
RESET
WDT
106
DSP_RST-N 111
RESET
WDT
106
DSP_RST-N 111
RESET
WDT
106
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
IC201_0_CS-N
IC201_1_CS-N
SSI_DI 113
SSI_DO 114
SSI_CLK 115
116
IC201_0_CS-N 117
IC201_1_CS-N 112
MISO/SDA
MOSI/HA0
SCK/SCL
HREQ/PH4
SS_0/HA2_0
SS_1/HA2_1
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
IC202_0_CS-N
IC202_1_CS-N
SSI_DI 113
SSI_DO 114
SSI_CLK 115
116
IC202_0_CS-N 117
IC202_1_CS-N 112
MISO/SDA
MOSI/HA0
SCK/SCL
HREQ/PH4
SS_0/HA2_0
SS_1/HA2_1
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
IC203_0_CS-N
IC203_1_CS-N
SSI_DI 113
SSI_DO 114
SSI_CLK 115
116
IC203_0_CS-N 117
IC203_1_CS-N 112
MISO/SDA
MOSI/HA0
SCK/SCL
HREQ/PH4
SS_0/HA2_0
SS_1/HA2_1
126
127
128
129
MODD1/PG2
MODC1/NM I1
MODB1/IRQD/PG8
MODA1/IRQC/PG7
126
127
128
129
MODD1/PG2
MODC1/NM I1
MODB1/IRQD/PG8
MODA1/IRQC/PG7
126
127
128
129
MODD1/PG2
MODC1/NM I1
MODB1/IRQD/PG8
MODA1/IRQC/PG7
R201
10.0K
IRQB-N
140
141
142
143
MODD0/PG1
MODC0/PLOCK/PG0
MODB0/IRQB/PG6
MODA0/IRQA/PG5
R202
10.0K
IRQB-N
140
141
142
143
MODD0/PG1
MODC0/PLOCK/PG0
MODB0/IRQB/PG6
MODA0/IRQA/PG5
R203
10.0K
IRQB-N
140
141
142
143
MODD0/PG1
MODC0/PLOCK/PG0
MODB0/IRQB/PG6
MODA0/IRQA/PG5
144
SCAN
144
SCAN
144
SCAN
DSP B56724AG
DSP B56724AG
DSP B56724AG
IC204B
IC205B
IC206B
EXTAL 80
EXTAL
XTAL
79
EXTAL 80
EXTAL
XTAL
79
EXTAL
80
EXTAL
XTAL
79
TM S
TCK
IC204_IC205
101
102
103
TM S
TCK
TDI
TDO
104 IC203_IC204
TM S
TCK
IC205_IC206
101
102
103
TM S
TCK
TDI
TDO
104 IC204_IC205
TM S
TCK
IC206_IC207
101
102
103
TM S
TCK
TDI
TDO
104 IC205_IC206
105
PINIT/NM I0
105
PINIT/NM I0
105
PINIT/NM I0
DSP_RST-N 111
RESET
WDT
106
DSP_RST-N 111
RESET
WDT
106
DSP_RST-N 111
RESET
WDT
106
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
IC204_0_CS-N
IC204_1_CS-N
SSI_DI 113
SSI_DO 114
SSI_CLK 115
116
IC204_0_CS-N 117
IC204_1_CS-N 112
MISO/SDA
MOSI/HA0
SCK/SCL
HREQ/PH4
SS_0/HA2_0
SS_1/HA2_1
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
IC205_0_CS-N
IC205_1_CS-N
SSI_DI 113
SSI_DO 114
SSI_CLK 115
116
IC205_0_CS-N 117
IC205_1_CS-N 112
MISO/SDA
MOSI/HA0
SCK/SCL
HREQ/PH4
SS_0/HA2_0
SS_1/HA2_1
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
IC206_0_CS-N
IC206_1_CS-N
SSI_DI 113
SSI_DO 114
SSI_CLK 115
116
IC206_0_CS-N 117
IC206_1_CS-N 112
MISO/SDA
MOSI/HA0
SCK/SCL
HREQ/PH4
SS_0/HA2_0
SS_1/HA2_1
126
127
128
129
MODD1/PG2
MODC1/NM I1
MODB1/IRQD/PG8
MODA1/IRQC/PG7
126
127
128
129
MODD1/PG2
MODC1/NM I1
MODB1/IRQD/PG8
MODA1/IRQC/PG7
126
127
128
129
MODD1/PG2
MODC1/NM I1
MODB1/IRQD/PG8
MODA1/IRQC/PG7
R204
10.0K
IRQB-N
140
141
142
143
MODD0/PG1
MODC0/PLOCK/PG0
MODB0/IRQB/PG6
MODA0/IRQA/PG5
R205
10.0K
IRQB-N
140
141
142
143
MODD0/PG1
MODC0/PLOCK/PG0
MODB0/IRQB/PG6
MODA0/IRQA/PG5
R206
10.0K
IRQB-N
140
141
142
143
MODD0/PG1
MODC0/PLOCK/PG0
MODB0/IRQB/PG6
MODA0/IRQA/PG5
144
SCAN
144
SCAN
144
SCAN
DSP B56724AG
DSP B56724AG
DSP B56724AG
IC207B
IC208B
IC209B
EXTAL 80
EXTAL
XTAL
79
EXTAL 80
EXTAL
XTAL
79
EXTAL
80
EXTAL
XTAL
79
TM S
TCK
IC207_IC208
101
102
103
TM S
TCK
TDI
TDO
104 IC206_IC207
TM S
TCK
IC208_IC209
101
102
103
TM S
TCK
TDI
TDO
104 IC207_IC208
TM S
TCK
IC209_TDI
101
102
103
TM S
TCK
TDI
TDO
104 IC208_IC209
105
PINIT/NM I0
105
PINIT/NM I0
105
PINIT/NM I0
DSP_RST-N 111
RESET
WDT
106
DSP_RST-N 111
RESET
WDT
106
DSP_RST-N 111
RESET
WDT
106
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
SSI_DI 113
SSI_DO 114
SSI_CLK 115
116
IC207_0_CS-N 117
IC207_0_CS-N
IC207_1_CS-N 112
IC207_1_CS-N
MISO/SDA
MOSI/HA0
SCK/SCL
HREQ/PH4
SS_0/HA2_0
SS_1/HA2_1
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
SSI_DI 113
SSI_DO 114
SSI_CLK 115
116
IC208_0_CS-N 117
IC208_0_CS-N
IC208_1_CS-N 112
IC208_1_CS-N
MISO/SDA
MOSI/HA0
SCK/SCL
HREQ/PH4
SS_0/HA2_0
SS_1/HA2_1
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
SSI_DI 113
SSI_DO 114
SSI_CLK 115
116
IC209_0_CS-N 117
IC209_0_CS-N
IC209_1_CS-N 112
IC209_1_CS-N
MISO/SDA
MOSI/HA0
SCK/SCL
HREQ/PH4
SS_0/HA2_0
SS_1/HA2_1
126
127
128
129
MODD1/PG2
MODC1/NM I1
MODB1/IRQD/PG8
MODA1/IRQC/PG7
126
127
128
129
MODD1/PG2
MODC1/NM I1
MODB1/IRQD/PG8
MODA1/IRQC/PG7
126
127
128
129
MODD1/PG2
MODC1/NM I1
MODB1/IRQD/PG8
MODA1/IRQC/PG7
R207
10.0K
IRQB-N
140
141
142
143
MODD0/PG1
MODC0/PLOCK/PG0
MODB0/IRQB/PG6
MODA0/IRQA/PG5
R208
10.0K
IRQB-N
140
141
142
143
MODD0/PG1
MODC0/PLOCK/PG0
MODB0/IRQB/PG6
MODA0/IRQA/PG5
R209
10.0K
IRQB-N
140
141
142
143
MODD0/PG1
MODC0/PLOCK/PG0
MODB0/IRQB/PG6
MODA0/IRQA/PG5
144
SCAN
144
SCAN
144
SCAN
DSP B56724AG
DSP BOARD
SCHEMATIC 3 OF 9
DSP CONTROL INTERFACE
62375.000.xx.1

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-65
LAD0/PA0
70
LAD1/PA1
69
LAD2/PA2
68
LAD3/PA3
67
LAD4/PA4
66
LAD5/PA5
65
LAD6/PA6
64
LAD7/PA7
63
LAD8/PA8
62
LAD9/PA9
57
LAD10/PA10
56
LAD11/PA11
55
LAD12/PA12
54
LAD13/PA13
53
LAD14/PA14
52
LAD15/PA15
51
LAD16/PA16
50
LAD17/PA17
45
LAD18/PA18
44
LAD19/PA19
43
LAD20/PA20
42
LAD21/PA21
41
LAD22/PA22
40
LAD23/PA23
39
LALE
3
LCS0
4
LCS1
5
LCS2
6
LCS3
7
LCS4
8
LCS5
9
LCS6
10
LCS7
11
LW E/LSDDQM
16
LOE/LSDRAS/LGPL2
17
LGPL5
18
LSDA10/LGPL0
19
LCKE
20
LCLK
21
LBCTL
22
LSDW E/LGPL1
23
LSDCAS/LGPL3
24
LGTA/LGPL4/UPW AIT
25
LA0/PA24
26
LA1/PA25
27
LA2/PA26
28
LSY NC_IN
37
LSY NC_OUT
38
IC201C
DSP B56724AG
DQ0
2
DQ1
4
DQ2
5
DQ3
7
DQ4
8
DQ5
10
DQ6
11
DQ7
13
NC
14
DQM 0
16
WE
17
CAS
18
RAS
19
CS
20
NC
21
BA0
22
BA1
23
A10
24
A0
25
A1
26
A2
27
DQM 2
28
NC
30
DQ16
31
DQ17
33
DQ18
34
DQ19
36
DQ20
37
DQ21
39
DQ22
40
DQ23
42
DQ24
45
DQ25
47
DQ26
48
DQ27
50
DQ28
51
DQ29
53
DQ30
54
DQ31
56
NC
57
DQM 3
59
A3
60
A4
61
A5
62
A6
63
A7
64
A8
65
A9
66
CKE
67
CLK
68
NC
69
NC
70
DQM 1
71
DQ8
74
DQ9
76
DQ10
77
DQ11
79
DQ12
80
DQ13
82
DQ14
83
DQ15
85
NC
73
IC4 01A
MT4 8LC2 M32B 2P -6
LA1D0
LA1D1
LA1D2
LA1D3
LA1D4
LA1D5
LA1D6
LA1D7
LA1D8
LA1D9
LA1D10
LA1D11
LA1D12
LA1D13
LA1D14
LA1D15
LA1D16
LA1D17
LA1D18
LA1D19
LA1D20
LA1D21
LA1D22
LA1D23
LA1D0
LA1D1
LA1D2
LA1D3
LA1D4
LA1D5
LA1D6
LA1D7
LA1D8
LA1D9
LA1D10
LA1D11
LA1D12
LA1D13
LA1D14
LA1D15
LA1D16
LA1D17
LA1D18
LA1D19
LA1D20
LA1D21
LA1D22
LA1D23
LA1D3
LA1D4
LA1D5
LA1D6
LA1D7
LA1D8
LA1D9
LA1D11
LA1D12
LA1D13
LA1D[0..2 3]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
RN401
4.7K
1D1
47
1D2
46
1D3
44
1D4
43
1D5
41
1D6
40
1D7
38
1D8
37
2D1
36
2D2
35
2D3
33
2D4
32
2D5
30
2D6
29
2D7
27
2D8
26
1OE
1
2OE
24
1Q1
2
1Q2
3
1Q3
5
1Q4
6
1Q5
8
1Q6
9
1Q7
11
1Q8
12
2Q1
13
2Q2
14
2Q3
16
2Q4
17
2Q5
19
2Q6
20
2Q7
22
2Q8
23
1LE
48
2LE
25
IC411A
74AL VCH16373
LAD0/PA0
70
LAD1/PA1
69
LAD2/PA2
68
LAD3/PA3
67
LAD4/PA4
66
LAD5/PA5
65
LAD6/PA6
64
LAD7/PA7
63
LAD8/PA8
62
LAD9/PA9
57
LAD10/PA10
56
LAD11/PA11
55
LAD12/PA12
54
LAD13/PA13
53
LAD14/PA14
52
LAD15/PA15
51
LAD16/PA16
50
LAD17/PA17
45
LAD18/PA18
44
LAD19/PA19
43
LAD20/PA20
42
LAD21/PA21
41
LAD22/PA22
40
LAD23/PA23
39
LALE
3
LCS0
4
LCS1
5
LCS2
6
LCS3
7
LCS4
8
LCS5
9
LCS6
10
LCS7
11
LW E/LSDDQM
16
LOE/LSDRAS/LGPL2
17
LGPL5
18
LSDA10/LGPL0
19
LCKE
20
LCLK
21
LBCTL
22
LSDW E/LGPL1
23
LSDCAS/LGPL3
24
LGTA/LGPL4/UPW AIT
25
LA0/PA24
26
LA1/PA25
27
LA2/PA26
28
LSY NC_IN
37
LSY NC_OUT
38
IC202C
DSP B56724AG
DQ0
2
DQ1
4
DQ2
5
DQ3
7
DQ4
8
DQ5
10
DQ6
11
DQ7
13
NC
14
DQM 0
16
WE
17
CAS
18
RAS
19
CS
20
NC
21
BA0
22
BA1
23
A10
24
A0
25
A1
26
A2
27
DQM 2
28
NC
30
DQ16
31
DQ17
33
DQ18
34
DQ19
36
DQ20
37
DQ21
39
DQ22
40
DQ23
42
DQ24
45
DQ25
47
DQ26
48
DQ27
50
DQ28
51
DQ29
53
DQ30
54
DQ31
56
NC
57
DQM 3
59
A3
60
A4
61
A5
62
A6
63
A7
64
A8
65
A9
66
CKE
67
CLK
68
NC
69
NC
70
DQM 1
71
DQ8
74
DQ9
76
DQ10
77
DQ11
79
DQ12
80
DQ13
82
DQ14
83
DQ15
85
NC
73
IC4 02A
MT4 8LC2 M32B 2P -6
LA2D0
LA2D1
LA2D2
LA2D3
LA2D4
LA2D5
LA2D6
LA2D7
LA2D8
LA2D9
LA2D10
LA2D11
LA2D12
LA2D13
LA2D14
LA2D15
LA2D16
LA2D17
LA2D18
LA2D19
LA2D20
LA2D21
LA2D22
LA2D23
LA2D0
LA2D1
LA2D2
LA2D3
LA2D4
LA2D5
LA2D6
LA2D7
LA2D8
LA2D9
LA2D10
LA2D11
LA2D12
LA2D13
LA2D14
LA2D15
LA2D16
LA2D17
LA2D18
LA2D19
LA2D20
LA2D21
LA2D22
LA2D23
LA2D3
LA2D4
LA2D5
LA2D6
LA2D7
LA2D8
LA2D9
LA2D11
LA2D12
LA2D13
LA2D[0..23]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
RN402
4.7K
1D1
47
1D2
46
1D3
44
1D4
43
1D5
41
1D6
40
1D7
38
1D8
37
2D1
36
2D2
35
2D3
33
2D4
32
2D5
30
2D6
29
2D7
27
2D8
26
1OE
1
2OE
24
1Q1
2
1Q2
3
1Q3
5
1Q4
6
1Q5
8
1Q6
9
1Q7
11
1Q8
12
2Q1
13
2Q2
14
2Q3
16
2Q4
17
2Q5
19
2Q6
20
2Q7
22
2Q8
23
1LE
48
2LE
25
IC412A
74AL VCH16373
LAD0/PA0
70
LAD1/PA1
69
LAD2/PA2
68
LAD3/PA3
67
LAD4/PA4
66
LAD5/PA5
65
LAD6/PA6
64
LAD7/PA7
63
LAD8/PA8
62
LAD9/PA9
57
LAD10/PA10
56
LAD11/PA11
55
LAD12/PA12
54
LAD13/PA13
53
LAD14/PA14
52
LAD15/PA15
51
LAD16/PA16
50
LAD17/PA17
45
LAD18/PA18
44
LAD19/PA19
43
LAD20/PA20
42
LAD21/PA21
41
LAD22/PA22
40
LAD23/PA23
39
LALE
3
LCS0
4
LCS1
5
LCS2
6
LCS3
7
LCS4
8
LCS5
9
LCS6
10
LCS7
11
LW E/LSDDQM
16
LOE/LSDRAS/LGPL2
17
LGPL5
18
LSDA10/LGPL0
19
LCKE
20
LCLK
21
LBCTL
22
LSDW E/LGPL1
23
LSDCAS/LGPL3
24
LGTA/LGPL4/UPW AIT
25
LA0/PA24
26
LA1/PA25
27
LA2/PA26
28
LSY NC_IN
37
LSY NC_OUT
38
IC203C
DSP B56724AG
VDD
1
VDDQ
3
VSSQ
6
VDDQ
9
VSSQ
12
VDD
15
VDD
29
VSSQ
32
VDDQ
35
VSSQ
38
VDDQ
41
VDD
43
VSS
44
VSSQ
46
VDDQ
49
VSSQ
52
VDDQ
55
VSS
58
VSS
72
VDDQ
75
VSSQ
78
VDDQ
81
VSSQ
84
VSS
86
IC4 01B
MT4 8LC2 M32B 2P -6
+3.3V
C441
1.0UF
C401
0.01UF
+3.3V
C461
1.0UF
C421
0.01UF
VDD
1
VDDQ
3
VSSQ
6
VDDQ
9
VSSQ
12
VDD
15
VDD
29
VSSQ
32
VDDQ
35
VSSQ
38
VDDQ
41
VDD
43
VSS
44
VSSQ
46
VDDQ
49
VSSQ
52
VDDQ
55
VSS
58
VSS
72
VDDQ
75
VSSQ
78
VDDQ
81
VSSQ
84
VSS
86
IC4 02B
MT4 8LC2 M32B 2P -6
+3.3V
C442
1.0UF
C402
0.01UF
+3.3V
C462
1.0UF
C422
0.01UF
+3.3V
+3.3V
C452
1.0UF
C472
1.0UF
C412
0.01UF
C432
0.01UF
GND
4
GND
10
GND
15
GND
21
GND
28
GND
34
GND
39
GND
45
VCC
42
VCC
31
VCC
18
VCC
7
IC412B
74AL VCH16373
+3.3V
+3.3V
C451
1.0UF
C471
1.0UF
C411
0.01UF
C431
0.01UF
GND
4
GND
10
GND
15
GND
21
GND
28
GND
34
GND
39
GND
45
VCC
42
VCC
31
VCC
18
VCC
7
IC411B
74AL VCH16373
LAD0/PA0
70
LAD1/PA1
69
LAD2/PA2
68
LAD3/PA3
67
LAD4/PA4
66
LAD5/PA5
65
LAD6/PA6
64
LAD7/PA7
63
LAD8/PA8
62
LAD9/PA9
57
LAD10/PA10
56
LAD11/PA11
55
LAD12/PA12
54
LAD13/PA13
53
LAD14/PA14
52
LAD15/PA15
51
LAD16/PA16
50
LAD17/PA17
45
LAD18/PA18
44
LAD19/PA19
43
LAD20/PA20
42
LAD21/PA21
41
LAD22/PA22
40
LAD23/PA23
39
LALE
3
LCS0
4
LCS1
5
LCS2
6
LCS3
7
LCS4
8
LCS5
9
LCS6
10
LCS7
11
LW E/LSDDQM
16
LOE/LSDRAS/LGPL2
17
LGPL5
18
LSDA10/LGPL0
19
LCKE
20
LCLK
21
LBCTL
22
LSDW E/LGPL1
23
LSDCAS/LGPL3
24
LGTA/LGPL4/UPW AIT
25
LA0/PA24
26
LA1/PA25
27
LA2/PA26
28
LSY NC_IN
37
LSY NC_OUT
38
IC204C
DSP B56724AG
LAD0/PA0
70
LAD1/PA1
69
LAD2/PA2
68
LAD3/PA3
67
LAD4/PA4
66
LAD5/PA5
65
LAD6/PA6
64
LAD7/PA7
63
LAD8/PA8
62
LAD9/PA9
57
LAD10/PA10
56
LAD11/PA11
55
LAD12/PA12
54
LAD13/PA13
53
LAD14/PA14
52
LAD15/PA15
51
LAD16/PA16
50
LAD17/PA17
45
LAD18/PA18
44
LAD19/PA19
43
LAD20/PA20
42
LAD21/PA21
41
LAD22/PA22
40
LAD23/PA23
39
LALE
3
LCS0
4
LCS1
5
LCS2
6
LCS3
7
LCS4
8
LCS5
9
LCS6
10
LCS7
11
LW E/LSDDQM
16
LOE/LSDRAS/LGPL2
17
LGPL5
18
LSDA10/LGPL0
19
LCKE
20
LCLK
21
LBCTL
22
LSDW E/LGPL1
23
LSDCAS/LGPL3
24
LGTA/LGPL4/UPW AIT
25
LA0/PA24
26
LA1/PA25
27
LA2/PA26
28
LSY NC_IN
37
LSY NC_OUT
38
IC205C
DSP B56724AG
LAD0/PA0
70
LAD1/PA1
69
LAD2/PA2
68
LAD3/PA3
67
LAD4/PA4
66
LAD5/PA5
65
LAD6/PA6
64
LAD7/PA7
63
LAD8/PA8
62
LAD9/PA9
57
LAD10/PA10
56
LAD11/PA11
55
LAD12/PA12
54
LAD13/PA13
53
LAD14/PA14
52
LAD15/PA15
51
LAD16/PA16
50
LAD17/PA17
45
LAD18/PA18
44
LAD19/PA19
43
LAD20/PA20
42
LAD21/PA21
41
LAD22/PA22
40
LAD23/PA23
39
LALE
3
LCS0
4
LCS1
5
LCS2
6
LCS3
7
LCS4
8
LCS5
9
LCS6
10
LCS7
11
LW E/LSDDQM
16
LOE/LSDRAS/LGPL2
17
LGPL5
18
LSDA10/LGPL0
19
LCKE
20
LCLK
21
LBCTL
22
LSDW E/LGPL1
23
LSDCAS/LGPL3
24
LGTA/LGPL4/UPW AIT
25
LA0/PA24
26
LA1/PA25
27
LA2/PA26
28
LSY NC_IN
37
LSY NC_OUT
38
IC206C
DSP B56724AG
DSP BOARD
SCHEMATIC 4 OF 9
EXTERNAL MEMORY CONTROL INTERFACE 1
62375.000.xx.1

6-66 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
CORE_VDD
1
CORE_GND
2
IO_VDD
12
IO_GND
13
CORE_VDD
14
CORE_GND
15
IO_VDD
29
IO_GND
30
PLLP1_GND
31
PLLP1_VDD
32
PLLD1_GND
33
PLLD1_VDD
34
PLLA1_GND
35
PLLA1_VDD
36
IO_GND
71
IO_VDD
72
PLLP_VDD
73
PLLA_VDD
74
PLLA_GND
75
PLLD_VDD
76
PLLD_GND
77
PLLP_GND
78
IO_VDD
81
IO_GND
82
CORE_VDD
95
CORE_GND
96
IO_VDD
107
IO_GND
108
CORE_VDD
109
CORE_GND
110
CORE_VDD
130
CORE_GND
131
IO_VDD
132
IO_GND
133
CORE_GND
47
IO_VDD
48
IO_GND
49
IO_GND
59
CORE_VDD
60
CORE_GND
61
CORE_VDD
46
IO_VDD
58
IC201D
DSP B56724AG
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+1.2V
+1.2V
+1.2V
C211
0.01UF
C231
0.01UF
C251
0.01UF
C271
0.01UF
C201
0.01UF
C111
0.01UF
C221
0.01UF
C261
0.01UF
C101
0.01UF
C241
0.01UF
C281
0.01UF
C291
0.01UF
CORE_VDD
1
CORE_GND
2
IO_VDD
12
IO_GND
13
CORE_VDD
14
CORE_GND
15
IO_VDD
29
IO_GND
30
PLLP1_GND
31
PLLP1_VDD
32
PLLD1_GND
33
PLLD1_VDD
34
PLLA1_GND
35
PLLA1_VDD
36
IO_GND
71
IO_VDD
72
PLLP_VDD
73
PLLA_VDD
74
PLLA_GND
75
PLLD_VDD
76
PLLD_GND
77
PLLP_GND
78
IO_VDD
81
IO_GND
82
CORE_VDD
95
CORE_GND
96
IO_VDD
107
IO_GND
108
CORE_VDD
109
CORE_GND
110
CORE_VDD
130
CORE_GND
131
IO_VDD
132
IO_GND
133
CORE_GND
47
IO_VDD
48
IO_GND
49
IO_GND
59
CORE_VDD
60
CORE_GND
61
CORE_VDD
46
IO_VDD
58
IC202D
DSP B56724AG
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+1.2V
+1.2V
+1.2V
C212
0.01UF
C232
0.01UF
C252
0.01UF
C272
0.01UF
C202
0.01UF
C112
0.01UF
C222
0.01UF
C262
0.01UF
C102
0.01UF
C242
0.01UF
C282
0.01UF
C292
0.01UF
CORE_VDD
1
CORE_GND
2
IO_VDD
12
IO_GND
13
CORE_VDD
14
CORE_GND
15
IO_VDD
29
IO_GND
30
PLLP1_GND
31
PLLP1_VDD
32
PLLD1_GND
33
PLLD1_VDD
34
PLLA1_GND
35
PLLA1_VDD
36
IO_GND
71
IO_VDD
72
PLLP_VDD
73
PLLA_VDD
74
PLLA_GND
75
PLLD_VDD
76
PLLD_GND
77
PLLP_GND
78
IO_VDD
81
IO_GND
82
CORE_VDD
95
CORE_GND
96
IO_VDD
107
IO_GND
108
CORE_VDD
109
CORE_GND
110
CORE_VDD
130
CORE_GND
131
IO_VDD
132
IO_GND
133
CORE_GND
47
IO_VDD
48
IO_GND
49
IO_GND
59
CORE_VDD
60
CORE_GND
61
CORE_VDD
46
IO_VDD
58
IC203D
DSP B56724AG
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+1.2V
+1.2V
+1.2V
C213
0.01UF
C233
0.01UF
C253
0.01UF
C273
0.01UF
C203
0.01UF
C113
0.01UF
C223
0.01UF
C263
0.01UF
C103
0.01UF
C243
0.01UF
C283
0.01UF
C293
0.01UF
CORE_VDD
1
CORE_GND
2
IO_VDD
12
IO_GND
13
CORE_VDD
14
CORE_GND
15
IO_VDD
29
IO_GND
30
PLLP1_GND
31
PLLP1_VDD
32
PLLD1_GND
33
PLLD1_VDD
34
PLLA1_GND
35
PLLA1_VDD
36
IO_GND
71
IO_VDD
72
PLLP_VDD
73
PLLA_VDD
74
PLLA_GND
75
PLLD_VDD
76
PLLD_GND
77
PLLP_GND
78
IO_VDD
81
IO_GND
82
CORE_VDD
95
CORE_GND
96
IO_VDD
107
IO_GND
108
CORE_VDD
109
CORE_GND
110
CORE_VDD
130
CORE_GND
131
IO_VDD
132
IO_GND
133
CORE_GND
47
IO_VDD
48
IO_GND
49
IO_GND
59
CORE_VDD
60
CORE_GND
61
CORE_VDD
46
IO_VDD
58
IC204D
DSP B56724AG
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+1.2V
+1.2V
+1.2V
C214
0.01UF
C234
0.01UF
C254
0.01UF
C274
0.01UF
C204
0.01UF
C114
0.01UF
C224
0.01UF
C264
0.01UF
C104
0.01UF
C244
0.01UF
C284
0.01UF
C294
0.01UF
CORE_VDD
1
CORE_GND
2
IO_VDD
12
IO_GND
13
CORE_VDD
14
CORE_GND
15
IO_VDD
29
IO_GND
30
PLLP1_GND
31
PLLP1_VDD
32
PLLD1_GND
33
PLLD1_VDD
34
PLLA1_GND
35
PLLA1_VDD
36
IO_GND
71
IO_VDD
72
PLLP_VDD
73
PLLA_VDD
74
PLLA_GND
75
PLLD_VDD
76
PLLD_GND
77
PLLP_GND
78
IO_VDD
81
IO_GND
82
CORE_VDD
95
CORE_GND
96
IO_VDD
107
IO_GND
108
CORE_VDD
109
CORE_GND
110
CORE_VDD
130
CORE_GND
131
IO_VDD
132
IO_GND
133
CORE_GND
47
IO_VDD
48
IO_GND
49
IO_GND
59
CORE_VDD
60
CORE_GND
61
CORE_VDD
46
IO_VDD
58
IC205D
DSP B56724AG
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+1.2V
+1.2V
+1.2V
C215
0.01UF
C235
0.01UF
C255
0.01UF
C275
0.01UF
C205
0.01UF
C115
0.01UF
C225
0.01UF
C265
0.01UF
C105
0.01UF
C245
0.01UF
C285
0.01UF
C295
0.01UF
CORE_VDD
1
CORE_GND
2
IO_VDD
12
IO_GND
13
CORE_VDD
14
CORE_GND
15
IO_VDD
29
IO_GND
30
PLLP1_GND
31
PLLP1_VDD
32
PLLD1_GND
33
PLLD1_VDD
34
PLLA1_GND
35
PLLA1_VDD
36
IO_GND
71
IO_VDD
72
PLLP_VDD
73
PLLA_VDD
74
PLLA_GND
75
PLLD_VDD
76
PLLD_GND
77
PLLP_GND
78
IO_VDD
81
IO_GND
82
CORE_VDD
95
CORE_GND
96
IO_VDD
107
IO_GND
108
CORE_VDD
109
CORE_GND
110
CORE_VDD
130
CORE_GND
131
IO_VDD
132
IO_GND
133
CORE_GND
47
IO_VDD
48
IO_GND
49
IO_GND
59
CORE_VDD
60
CORE_GND
61
CORE_VDD
46
IO_VDD
58
IC206D
DSP B56724AG
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+1.2V
+1.2V
+1.2V
C216
0.01UF
C236
0.01UF
C256
0.01UF
C276
0.01UF
C206
0.01UF
C116
0.01UF
C226
0.01UF
C266
0.01UF
C106
0.01UF
C246
0.01UF
C286
0.01UF
C296
0.01UF
CORE_VDD
1
CORE_GND
2
IO_VDD
12
IO_GND
13
CORE_VDD
14
CORE_GND
15
IO_VDD
29
IO_GND
30
PLLP1_GND
31
PLLP1_VDD
32
PLLD1_GND
33
PLLD1_VDD
34
PLLA1_GND
35
PLLA1_VDD
36
IO_GND
71
IO_VDD
72
PLLP_VDD
73
PLLA_VDD
74
PLLA_GND
75
PLLD_VDD
76
PLLD_GND
77
PLLP_GND
78
IO_VDD
81
IO_GND
82
CORE_VDD
95
CORE_GND
96
IO_VDD
107
IO_GND
108
CORE_VDD
109
CORE_GND
110
CORE_VDD
130
CORE_GND
131
IO_VDD
132
IO_GND
133
CORE_GND
47
IO_VDD
48
IO_GND
49
IO_GND
59
CORE_VDD
60
CORE_GND
61
CORE_VDD
46
IO_VDD
58
IC207D
DSP B56724AG
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+1.2V
+1.2V
+1.2V
C217
0.01UF
C237
0.01UF
C257
0.01UF
C277
0.01UF
C207
0.01UF
C117
0.01UF
C227
0.01UF
C267
0.01UF
C107
0.01UF
C247
0.01UF
C287
0.01UF
C297
0.01UF
CORE_VDD
1
CORE_GND
2
IO_VDD
12
IO_GND
13
CORE_VDD
14
CORE_GND
15
IO_VDD
29
IO_GND
30
PLLP1_GND
31
PLLP1_VDD
32
PLLD1_GND
33
PLLD1_VDD
34
PLLA1_GND
35
PLLA1_VDD
36
IO_GND
71
IO_VDD
72
PLLP_VDD
73
PLLA_VDD
74
PLLA_GND
75
PLLD_VDD
76
PLLD_GND
77
PLLP_GND
78
IO_VDD
81
IO_GND
82
CORE_VDD
95
CORE_GND
96
IO_VDD
107
IO_GND
108
CORE_VDD
109
CORE_GND
110
CORE_VDD
130
CORE_GND
131
IO_VDD
132
IO_GND
133
CORE_GND
47
IO_VDD
48
IO_GND
49
IO_GND
59
CORE_VDD
60
CORE_GND
61
CORE_VDD
46
IO_VDD
58
IC208D
DSP B56724AG
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+1.2V
+1.2V
+1.2V
C218
0.01UF
C238
0.01UF
C258
0.01UF
C278
0.01UF
C208
0.01UF
C118
0.01UF
C228
0.01UF
C268
0.01UF
C108
0.01UF
C248
0.01UF
C288
0.01UF
C298
0.01UF
CORE_VDD
1
CORE_GND
2
IO_VDD
12
IO_GND
13
CORE_VDD
14
CORE_GND
15
IO_VDD
29
IO_GND
30
PLLP1_GND
31
PLLP1_VDD
32
PLLD1_GND
33
PLLD1_VDD
34
PLLA1_GND
35
PLLA1_VDD
36
IO_GND
71
IO_VDD
72
PLLP_VDD
73
PLLA_VDD
74
PLLA_GND
75
PLLD_VDD
76
PLLD_GND
77
PLLP_GND
78
IO_VDD
81
IO_GND
82
CORE_VDD
95
CORE_GND
96
IO_VDD
107
IO_GND
108
CORE_VDD
109
CORE_GND
110
CORE_VDD
130
CORE_GND
131
IO_VDD
132
IO_GND
133
CORE_GND
47
IO_VDD
48
IO_GND
49
IO_GND
59
CORE_VDD
60
CORE_GND
61
CORE_VDD
46
IO_VDD
58
IC209D
DSP B56724AG
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+1.2V
+1.2V
+1.2V
C219
0.01UF
C239
0.01UF
C259
0.01UF
C279
0.01UF
C209
0.01UF
C119
0.01UF
C229
0.01UF
C269
0.01UF
C109
0.01UF
C249
0.01UF
C289
0.01UF
C299
0.01UF
C501
0.1UF
C521
0.1UF
C541
0.1UF
C581
1.0UF
+1.2V
C591
1.0UF
+3.3V
C561
0.1UF
C511
0.1UF
C531
0.1UF
C551
0.1UF
C571
0.1UF
C502
0.1UF
C522
0.1UF
C542
0.1UF
C582
1.0UF
+1.2V
C592
1.0UF
+3.3V
C562
0.1UF
C512
0.1UF
C532
0.1UF
C552
0.1UF
C572
0.1UF
C503
0.1UF
C523
0.1UF
C543
0.1UF
C583
1.0UF
+1.2V
C593
1.0UF
+3.3V
C563
0.1UF
C513
0.1UF
C533
0.1UF
C553
0.1UF
C573
0.1UF
C504
0.1UF
C524
0.1UF
C544
0.1UF
C584
1.0UF
+1.2V
C594
1.0UF
+3.3V
C564
0.1UF
C514
0.1UF
C534
0.1UF
C554
0.1UF
C574
0.1UF
C505
0.1UF
C525
0.1UF
C545
0.1UF
C585
1.0UF
+1.2V
C595
1.0UF
+3.3V
C565
0.1UF
C515
0.1UF
C535
0.1UF
C555
0.1UF
C575
0.1UF
C506
0.1UF
C526
0.1UF
C546
0.1UF
C586
1.0UF
+1.2V
C596
1.0UF
+3.3V
C566
0.1UF
C516
0.1UF
C536
0.1UF
C556
0.1UF
C576
0.1UF
C507
0.1UF
C527
0.1UF
C547
0.1UF
C587
1.0UF
+1.2V
C597
1.0UF
+3.3V
C567
0.1UF
C517
0.1UF
C537
0.1UF
C557
0.1UF
C577
0.1UF
C508
0.1UF
C528
0.1UF
C548
0.1UF
C588
1.0UF
+1.2V
C598
1.0UF
+3.3V
C568
0.1UF
C518
0.1UF
C538
0.1UF
C558
0.1UF
C578
0.1UF
C509
0.1UF
C529
0.1UF
C549
0.1UF
C589
1.0UF
+1.2V
C599
1.0UF
+3.3V
C569
0.1UF
C519
0.1UF
C539
0.1UF
C559
0.1UF
C579
0.1UF
DSP BOARD
SCHEMATIC 5 OF 9
POWER AND GROUND
62375.000.xx.1

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-67
(SHT3,7)
(SHT3,7)
(SHT3)
SSI_DI
SSI_CLK
HREQ-N
R603
10.0K
ISA_D[0..7]
IC604
2
D1
3
D2
4
D3
5
D4
6
D5
7
D6
8
D7
9
D8
1
19
E1
E2
+5VB
20
VCC
G ND
10
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
+5VB
RESET
ISA_D6
ISA_D4
ISA_D3
ISA_D0
J601
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
ISA_D7
ISA_D5
ISA_D2
ISA_D1
AEN
BIOR-N
SSI_DI
SSI_CLK
HREQ-N
ISA_A9
ISA_A8
ISA_A4
ISA_A3
ISA_A1
ISA_A0
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
BIOW -N
SSI_DO
ISA_A6
ISA_A7
ISA_A5
ISA_A2
ISA_A[0..9]
R604
10.0K
+5VB
+5VB
IDC HEADER 20X2
FROM BASE BOARD
C604
0.1UF
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
74AHC541
SSI_DO
ISA_D0
ISA_D1
ISA_D2
ISA_D3
ISA_D4
ISA_D5
ISA_D6
ISA_D7
POWER MONI TOR SENSE
+3.3V
R601
75.0OHM
(SHT3,7)
+3.3VB
R602
75.0OHM
RESET
AEN
BIOW -N
BIOR-N
ISA_A9
ISA_A8
ISA_A7
ISA_A6
ISA_A5
ISA_A4
ISA_A3
ISA_A2
ISA_A1
ISA_A0
ISA_A5
ISA_A4
ISA_A3
ISA_A2
ISA_A1
ISA_A0
IC601A
1 2
74AHCT04
IC601B
3 4
74AHCT04
IC601D
9 8
74AHCT04
IC601E
11 10
74AHCT04
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
1
2
4
5
9
10
12
13
IC602A
74VHC08
IC602B
74VHC08
IC602C
74VHC08
IC602D
74VHC08
G ND
7
+5VB
14
3
6
8
11
V C C
IC601C
5 6
74AHCT04
C602
0.01UF
IC602E
74VHC08
IC603A
1
1A
2
1B 1Y
13
1C
74AC11D
IC603B
3
2A
4
2B 2Y
5
2C
74AC11D
IC603D
GND
7
+5VB
14
VCC
12
6
74AC11D
C603
0.01UF
ISA_CM N
IC603C
11
3A
10
3B 3Y
9
3C
74AC11D
ISA_CM N
8
+5VB
14
13
IC601F
12 DSP_SEL-N
7
(SHT7)
C601
0.01UF
74AHCT04
DSP BOARD
SCHEMATIC 6 OF 9
86xx 8-BIT CONTROL INTERFACE
62375.000.xx.1

L703
HZ0805G102R-10
C703
+3.3V
0.1UF
12
5
6
7
10
11
+3.3V
8
CSEL
9
AGND
V cc
4
Vdd1
DGND1
16
Vdd2
DG ND2
17
Vdd3
DGND3
FS1
FS2
SR
XT1
XT2
1
13
20
R704
PHASE COMPARATOR
+3.3V
16
3
14
6
7
IC704
COM P IN
SIG IN
C1A
C1B
PC1 OUT
PC3 OUT
PC2 OUT
2
15
13
11
12
9
5
R1
R2
VCO IN
INH
PCP OUT
VCO OUT
DEM OUT
1
4
10
+3.3V
74HC4046AM
VCC
G ND
8
L704
HZ0805G102R-10
C704
MCK01
MCK02
SCK00
SCK01
SCK02
SCK03
14
15
18
19
2
3
+ C700
10UF
0.1UF
18.432M HZB
22OHM
33.8688M HZ
36.864M HZ
16.384M HZ
24.576M HZ
IC702
IC PLL1707
IC705A
1 2
R701
33.8688M HZB
22OHM
74AHCT04 IC705B
3 4
R702
36.864M HZB
22OHM
IC705C 74AHCT04
5 6
R703
24.576M HZB
22OHM
74AHCT04
IC705D
9 8
74AHCT04
IC705F
13 12
74AHCT04
IC705E
11 10
74AHCT04
C705
0.1UF
+5V
7 14
+3.3V
IC705G
74AHCT04
R706
100.0K
R707
100.0K
R711
1.00K
C711
0.1UF
C701
1.0UF
+3.3V
6-68
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
IC201_0_CS-N
IC201_1_CS-N
IC202_0_CS-N
IC202_1_CS-N
IC203_0_CS-N
IC203_1_CS-N
IC204_0_CS-N
IC204_1_CS-N
IC205_0_CS-N
IC205_1_CS-N
IC206_0_CS-N
IC206_1_CS-N
IC207_0_CS-N
IC207_1_CS-N
IC201_0_CS-N
IC201_1_CS-N
IC202_0_CS-N
IC202_1_CS-N
IC203_0_CS-N
IC203_1_CS-N
IC204_0_CS-N
IC204_1_CS-N
IC205_0_CS-N
IC205_1_CS-N
IC206_0_CS-N
IC206_1_CS-N
IC207_0_CS-N
IC207_1_CS-N
23
16
17
25
19
20
21
22
31
24
26
27
28
35
30
IC7 03
I0 (429)
I0 (426)
I0 (423)
I0 (420)
I0 (417)
I0 (414)
I0 (408)
I0 (405)
IO (402)
I0 (399)
I0 (396)
I0 (390)
I0 (387)
I0 (384)
I0/GCK1 (381)
I0 (3)
I0 (6)
I0 (9)
I0 (12)
I0 (15)
I0 (18)
I0 (21)
I0 (24)
I0 (27)
I0 (30)
I0 (36)
I0 (39)
I0 (42)
I0 (45)
I0 (48)
105 IC209_SDO2_1
107 IC209_SDO2_3
104 IC208_SDO5_3
102 IC208_SDO4_3
103 IC208_SDO3_3
100 IC208_SDO2_3
98 IC207_SDO2_3
101 IC203_SDO2_3
96 IC202_SDO2_3
94 IC201_SDIO_A
93 IC201_SDIO_B
92
97 IC201_SDO2_3
95 FSY NC
91 BCLK
IC209_SDO2_1
IC209_SDO2_3
IC208_SDO5_3
IC208_SDO4_3
IC208_SDO3_3
IC208_SDO2_3
IC207_SDO2_3
IC203_SDO2_3
IC202_SDO2_3
IC201_SDIO_A
IC201_SDIO_B
E702
IC201_SDO2_3
FSY NC
BCLK
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
E701
(SHT3)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
SSI_DI
DSP_RST-N
SSI_DO
IRQB-N
SSI_CLK
ISA_CM N
ISA_A5
ISA_A4
ISA_A3
ISA_A2
ISA_A1
ISA_A0
SSI_DI
DSP_RST-N
SSI_DO
IRQB-N
SS1
SS2
SSI_CLK
ISA_CM N
ISA_A5
ISA_A4
ISA_A3
ISA_A2
ISA_A1
ISA_A0
142
143
4
2
3
5
6
7
9
10
12
11
13
14
15
I0 (375)
I0/GSR (372)
I0 (366)
I0/GTS3 (363)
I0/GTS4 (360)
I0/GTS1 (354)
I0/GTS2 (351)
I0 (348)
I0 (345)
I0 (342)
I0 (339)
I0 (336)
I0 (333)
I0 (330)
I0 (327)
I0 (57)
I0 (60)
I0 (63)
I0 (66)
I0 (69)
I0 (72)
I0 (75)
I0 (78)
I0 (81)
I0 (84)
I0 (87)
I0 (90)
I0 (93)
I0 (99)
I0 (102)
88
83
87
86
81
85
82
79
80
78
77
76
74
75
71
IC209_SDO5_0
IC209_SDI1_0
IC209_SDI2_0
IC209_SDI3_0
IC208_SDI3_0
IC207_SDI3_0
IC203_SDI3_0
IC209_SDO3_2
IC209_SDO2_2
IC202_SDI3_0
IC201_SDI0_0
IC201_SDI1_0
IC201_SDI2_0
IC201_SDI3_0
IC209_SDO5_0
IC209_SDI1_0
IC209_SDI2_0
IC209_SDI3_0
IC208_SDI3_0
IC207_SDI3_0
IC203_SDI3_0
IC209_SDO3_2
IC209_SDO2_2
E703
IC202_SDI3_0
IC201_SDI0_0
IC201_SDI1_0
IC201_SDI2_0
IC201_SDI3_0
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
J705
3
2
1
R705
4.99K
+3.3V
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT8)
IC208_0_CS-N
IC208_1_CS-N
IC209_0_CS-N
IC209_1_CS-N
PHONE_M CLK
PHONE_BCLK
PHONE_DATA
PHONE_W CLK
PW R_SY NC
IC208_0_CS-N
IC208_1_CS-N
IC209_0_CS-N
IC209_1_CS-N
18.432M HZ
PHONE_M CLK
PHONE_BCLK
PHONE_DATA
PHONE_W CLK
SY NC_REF
PW R_SY NC
39
32
41
44
33
34
46
38
40
48
43
45
49
50
51
I0 (321)
I0/GCK2 (318)
I0 (315)
I0 (312)
I0 (309)
I0 (306)
I0 (303)
I0/GCK3 (300)
I0 (297)
I0 (294)
I0 (291)
I0 (288)
I0 (282)
I0 (279)
I0 (273)
I0 (111)
I0 (114)
I0 (117)
I0 (120)
I0 (126)
I0 (129)
I0 (132)
I0 (135)
I0 (138)
I0 (144)
I0 (147)
I0 (150)
I0 (156)
125 PHONE_DFS
117 PHONE_RST-N
124 DOUT_FCLK
121 DOUT_BCLK
120 AOUT_FCLK
119 AOUT_BCLK
115 COM P_W CLK
116 COM P_BCLK
113 OUT_FCLK
112 OUT_BCLK
110 IN_FCLK
111 IN_BCLK
106 EXTAL
PHONE_DFS
PHONE_RST-N
OUT_FCLK
OUT_BCLK
EXTAL
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT3)
HDR 3
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
J705 = board configuration: (SHT2)
FM = pins 1-2 (or none) (SHT2)
multichannel = pins 2-3 (SHT2)
(SHT2)
+3.3V +3.3V +3.3V
R708 R709 R710
100.0K 100.0K 100.0K
(TCK)
(TDO)
(TMS)
(TDI)
IC209_SDO5_1
IC209_SDO5_1
IC209_SDO4_1
IC209_SDO4_1
IC209_SDO3_1
IC209_SDO3_1
IC209_SDO5_3
IC209_SDO5_3
IC209_SDO4_3
IC209_SDO4_3
IC209_SDO3_3
IC209_SDO3_3
AOUT_DATA
DOUT_DATA1
DOUT_DATA2
COM P_DATA
PILOT_DATA
DOUT_DATA3
DOUT_DATA4
DIN_DATA2
DIN_DATA3
JTAG PORT
+3.3V
J703
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
HDR 5X2 UNSHRD
118
126
133
128
129
130
131
135
132
134
137
136
138
139
140
18
29
36
47
62
72
89
90
99
108
114
123
144
I0 (267)
I0 (264)
I0 (261)
I0 (255)
I0 (252)
I0 (246)
I0 (243)
I0 (240)
I0 (237)
I0 (234)
I0 (231)
I0 (228)
I0 (225)
I0 (222)
I0 (219)
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
I0 (165)
I0 (171)
I0 (174)
I0 (177)
I0 (180)
I0 (183)
I0 (186)
I0 (189)
I0 (192)
I0 (195)
I0 (198)
I0 (201)
I0 (207)
I0 (210)
Vccio2.5V/3.3V
Vccio2.5V/3.3V
Vccio2.5V/3.3V
Vccio2.5V/3.3V
Vccio2.5V/3.3V
Vccio2.5V/3.3V
Vccint3.3V
Vccint3.3V
Vccint3.3V
Vccint3.3V
69 IC206_SDO2_3
IC206_SDO2_3 (SHT2)
64 IC205_SDO2_3
IC205_SDO2_3 (SHT2)
61 IC204_SDO2_3
IC204_SDO2_3 (SHT2)
70 MUTE_IC901
MUTE_IC901 (SHT9)
60 IC201_SDI0_1
IC201_SDI0_1 (SHT2)
58
68
57 SY NC_FLAG
SY NC_FLAG
56 IC201_SDI0_2
IC201_SDI0_2 (SHT2)
66 IC206_SDI3_0
IC206_SDI3_0 (SHT2)
54 IC205_SDI3_0
IC205_SDI3_0 (SHT2)
53 IC204_SDI3_0
IC204_SDI3_0 (SHT2)
59 PILOT_W CLK
52 PILOT_BCLK
+3.3V
1
37
55
73
109
127
C725 C724 C723 C722
8
42
0.01UF 0.01UF 0.01UF 0.01UF
84
141
+3.3V +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V
67
65
63
TCK
TM S
TDI
TDO
122
C709
0.1UF
C708
0.1UF
C707
0.1UF
C706
0.1UF
C702
1.0UF
1
2
3
IC701
VC
EN
GND
VDD
N/C
OUT
FVXO- HC73B- 27MHz
6
5
4
C726 C710
0.01UF 0.1UF
R712
150.0 OHM
L701
HZ0805G102R-10
Function Block 4
Function Block 3
Function B lock 2
Function B lock 1
Function B lock 5 F unction Block 6 Function Block 7 Function Block 8
XC9 5144XL -10TQ G144C
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
16.384M HZ
DOUT_DATA1
DOUT_DATA2
DOUT_DATA3
DOUT_DATA4
DOUT_BCLK
DOUT_FCLK
COM P_BCLK
+3.3V
C719
0.01UF
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
C713
0.1UF
2
4
6
8
IN_BCLK 11
IN_FCLK 13
COM P_W CLK 15
AOUT_DATA 17
+3.3V
1
19
C720
0.01UF
C714
0.1UF
IN_FCLK
(SHT2)
IN_BCLK
(SHT2)
COM P_W CLK (SHT2)
COM P_BCLK (SHT2)
AOUT_BCLK 2
AOUT_FCLK 4
PILOT_DATA 6
PILOT_BCLK 8
COM P_W CLK 11
COM P_DATA 13
COM P_BCLK 15
PILOT_W CLK
+3.3V
C721
0.01UF
17
1
19
+3.3V
IC706
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
OE1
OE2
+3.3V
IC707
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
OE1
OE2
+3.3V
IC708
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
OE1
OE2
20
V C C
G ND
10
20
VCC
G ND
10
20
VCC
G ND
10
C716
0.01UF
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
74LVC2244
C717
0.01UF
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
74LVC2244
C718
0.01UF
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
74LVC2244
+3.3V
+3.3V
C712
0.1UF
DIN_DATA2
DIN_DATA3
C715
0.1UF
AIN_DATA
DIN_DATA1
+15V
18.432M HZB
36.864M HZB
24.576M HZB
33.8688M HZB
+3.3V
SY NC_REF
-15V
J701
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
RIBBON CABLE_40P
J704
TO I/O PCA
TO I/O DAUGHTER PCA
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
IDC HEADER 7X2
AIN_DATA
DIN_DATA1
TO I/O PCA
J702
2 1
4 3
6 5
8 7
10 9
12 11
14 13
16 15
18 17
20 19
22 21
24 23
26 25
28 27
30 29
32 31
34 33
36 35
38 37
40 39
RIBBON CABLE_40P
DSP BOARD
SCHEMATIC 7 OF 9
CLOCK GENERATION AND CPLD
62375.000.xx.1
SS2
SS1
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
+5V

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-69
+5V
FROM POWER SUPPLY
J8 01
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
HDR 8X2
SHRD
CR8 03
DIODE_VOL 33
+
C8 33
100/50V
+RAW 1
+5V
+3.3V
+15V
+ C8 31
10µF
25V
L100
250uH
+ C8 32
10µF
25V
+1.2V
C8 34
0.1UF
J8 02
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
HDR 5X2
2
1
(NO-STUFF)
TP 805
+5V
C8 35
0.1UF
TP 801
DGND
+RAW
(SHT7)
TESTING ACCESS
10
9
(NO-STUFF)
TP 802
+RAW
PWR_SYNC
KEY
-15V
C8 01 +
22UF
+5V
C8 02 +
22UF
+5V
P IN 10 TRIMMED FOR KE Y
C8 09
1.0UF
+5V
R8 05
10.0K
R8 17
110.0 OHM
+3.3V
R8 09
10.0K
C8 10
1.0UF
R8 06
10.0K
R8 18
110.0 OHM
R8 10
10.0K
C8 19
0.1UF
R8 07
10.0K
C8 20
0.1UF
R8 08
10.0K
C8 23
100PF
C8 24
100PF
C8 27
0.01UF
R8 03 2 OHM
C8 11
1.0UF
C8 21
100PF
C8 25
100PF
C8 28
0.01UF
R8 04 2 OHM
C8 12
1.0UF
C8 22
100PF
C8 26
100PF
1
6
7
14
12
16
4
15
R8 15
3.48K
C8 29
4700PF
5%,50V
1
6
7
14
12
16
4
15
R8 16
1.00K
C8 30
4700PF
5%,50V
IC8 01
SS/TRCK
PVIN
PVIN
AVIN
EN
SY NC
IC8 02
SS/TRCK
PVIN
PVIN
AVIN
EN
SY NC
SW
SW
VCC
COM P PGND
AGND
NC
FB
PGOOD
G ND
17
SW
SW
VCC
COM P PGND
AGND
NC
FB
PGOOD
GND
17
PGND
PGND
5
8
9
2
3
13
10
11
LM 20134M H
5
8
9
2
3
13
10
11
LM 20134MH
L801
1.5uH
C8 13
1.0UF
L802
1.5uH
C8 14
1.0UF
R8 13
4.99K C8 17
R8 12
1.62K
R8 14
4.99K
R8 11
10.0K
M1 M2 M3
CGND_ NE T_ TIE 1
CGND_ NE T_ TIE 2
1
M4 M5
CGND_ NE T_ TIE 4
1
2
2
(TAB=GND)
(TAB=GND)
1
1
2
CGND_ NE T_ TIE 5
2
M6
1
1
0.1UF
C8 18
0.1UF
CGND_ NE T_ TIE 3
2
CGND_ NE T_ TIE 6
2
C8 15
22UF
C8 16
22UF
+ C8 03
22UF
+1.2V
+ C8 04
+3.3V
22UF
+ C8 05
10UF
+ C8 06
10UF
(NO-STUFF)
TP 803
+3.3V
+ C8 07
10UF
(NO-STUFF)
TP 804
+1.2V
+ C8 08
10UF
CR8 01
DIODE_VOL 6.8
+3.3V
CR802
1N5818
+ C8 36
470µF/16V
+3.3VB
IC8 03
LM 4041
+RAW
R819
3.48K
1%
R821
4.99K
1%
R820
3.48K
1%
DSP BOARD
SCHEMATIC 8 OF 9
86xx POWER DISTRIBUTION
62375.000.xx.1

6-70 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
Ch ecke d:
Re lease d:
Engineer:
File :
BC
DC
BC
LAD0/PA0
70
LAD1/PA1
69
LAD2/PA2
68
LAD3/PA3
67
LAD4/PA4
66
LAD5/PA5
65
LAD6/PA6
64
LAD7/PA7
63
LAD8/PA8
62
LAD9/PA9
57
LAD10/PA10
56
LAD11/PA11
55
LAD12/PA12
54
LAD13/PA13
53
LAD14/PA14
52
LAD15/PA15
51
LAD16/PA16
50
LAD17/PA17
45
LAD18/PA18
44
LAD19/PA19
43
LAD20/PA20
42
LAD21/PA21
41
LAD22/PA22
40
LAD23/PA23
39
LALE
3
LCS0
4
LCS1
5
LCS2
6
LCS3
7
LCS4
8
LCS5
9
LCS6
10
LCS7
11
LW E/LSDDQM
16
LOE/LSDRAS/LGPL2
17
LGPL5
18
LSDA10/LGPL0
19
LCKE
20
LCLK
21
LBCTL
22
LSDW E/LGPL1
23
LSDCAS/LGPL3
24
LGTA/LGPL4/UPW AIT
25
LA0/PA24
26
LA1/PA25
27
LA2/PA26
28
LSY NC_IN
37
LSY NC_OUT
38
IC207C
DSP B56724AG
DQ0
2
DQ1
4
DQ2
5
DQ3
7
DQ4
8
DQ5
10
DQ6
11
DQ7
13
NC
14
DQM 0
16
WE
17
CAS
18
RAS
19
CS
20
NC
21
BA0
22
BA1
23
A10
24
A0
25
A1
26
A2
27
DQM 2
28
NC
30
DQ16
31
DQ17
33
DQ18
34
DQ19
36
DQ20
37
DQ21
39
DQ22
40
DQ23
42
DQ24
45
DQ25
47
DQ26
48
DQ27
50
DQ28
51
DQ29
53
DQ30
54
DQ31
56
NC
57
DQM 3
59
A3
60
A4
61
A5
62
A6
63
A7
64
A8
65
A9
66
CKE
67
CLK
68
NC
69
NC
70
DQM 1
71
DQ8
74
DQ9
76
DQ10
77
DQ11
79
DQ12
80
DQ13
82
DQ14
83
DQ15
85
NC
73
IC9 07A
MT4 8LC2 M32B 2P -6
LA7D0
LA7D1
LA7D2
LA7D3
LA7D4
LA7D5
LA7D6
LA7D7
LA7D8
LA7D9
LA7D10
LA7D11
LA7D12
LA7D13
LA7D14
LA7D15
LA7D16
LA7D17
LA7D18
LA7D19
LA7D20
LA7D21
LA7D22
LA7D23
LA7D0
LA7D1
LA7D2
LA7D3
LA7D4
LA7D5
LA7D6
LA7D7
LA7D8
LA7D9
LA7D10
LA7D11
LA7D12
LA7D13
LA7D14
LA7D15
LA7D16
LA7D17
LA7D18
LA7D19
LA7D20
LA7D21
LA7D22
LA7D23
LA7D3
LA7D4
LA7D5
LA7D6
LA7D7
LA7D8
LA7D9
LA7D11
LA7D12
LA7D13
LA7D[0..2 3]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
RN907
4.7K
1D1
47
1D2
46
1D3
44
1D4
43
1D5
41
1D6
40
1D7
38
1D8
37
2D1
36
2D2
35
2D3
33
2D4
32
2D5
30
2D6
29
2D7
27
2D8
26
1OE
1
2OE
24
1Q1
2
1Q2
3
1Q3
5
1Q4
6
1Q5
8
1Q6
9
1Q7
11
1Q8
12
2Q1
13
2Q2
14
2Q3
16
2Q4
17
2Q5
19
2Q6
20
2Q7
22
2Q8
23
1LE
48
2LE
25
IC917A
74AL VCH16373
LAD0/PA0
70
LAD1/PA1
69
LAD2/PA2
68
LAD3/PA3
67
LAD4/PA4
66
LAD5/PA5
65
LAD6/PA6
64
LAD7/PA7
63
LAD8/PA8
62
LAD9/PA9
57
LAD10/PA10
56
LAD11/PA11
55
LAD12/PA12
54
LAD13/PA13
53
LAD14/PA14
52
LAD15/PA15
51
LAD16/PA16
50
LAD17/PA17
45
LAD18/PA18
44
LAD19/PA19
43
LAD20/PA20
42
LAD21/PA21
41
LAD22/PA22
40
LAD23/PA23
39
LALE
3
LCS0
4
LCS1
5
LCS2
6
LCS3
7
LCS4
8
LCS5
9
LCS6
10
LCS7
11
LW E/LSDDQM
16
LOE/LSDRAS/LGPL2
17
LGPL5
18
LSDA10/LGPL0
19
LCKE
20
LCLK
21
LBCTL
22
LSDW E/LGPL1
23
LSDCAS/LGPL3
24
LGTA/LGPL4/UPW AIT
25
LA0/PA24
26
LA1/PA25
27
LA2/PA26
28
LSY NC_IN
37
LSY NC_OUT
38
IC208C
DSP B56724AG
DQ0
2
DQ1
4
DQ2
5
DQ3
7
DQ4
8
DQ5
10
DQ6
11
DQ7
13
NC
14
DQM 0
16
WE
17
CAS
18
RAS
19
CS
20
NC
21
BA0
22
BA1
23
A10
24
A0
25
A1
26
A2
27
DQM 2
28
NC
30
DQ16
31
DQ17
33
DQ18
34
DQ19
36
DQ20
37
DQ21
39
DQ22
40
DQ23
42
DQ24
45
DQ25
47
DQ26
48
DQ27
50
DQ28
51
DQ29
53
DQ30
54
DQ31
56
NC
57
DQM 3
59
A3
60
A4
61
A5
62
A6
63
A7
64
A8
65
A9
66
CKE
67
CLK
68
NC
69
NC
70
DQM 1
71
DQ8
74
DQ9
76
DQ10
77
DQ11
79
DQ12
80
DQ13
82
DQ14
83
DQ15
85
NC
73
IC9 08A
MT4 8LC2 M32B 2P -6
LA8D0
LA8D1
LA8D2
LA8D3
LA8D4
LA8D5
LA8D6
LA8D7
LA8D8
LA8D9
LA8D10
LA8D11
LA8D12
LA8D13
LA8D14
LA8D15
LA8D16
LA8D17
LA8D18
LA8D19
LA8D20
LA8D21
LA8D22
LA8D23
LA8D0
LA8D1
LA8D2
LA8D3
LA8D4
LA8D5
LA8D6
LA8D7
LA8D8
LA8D9
LA8D10
LA8D11
LA8D12
LA8D13
LA8D14
LA8D15
LA8D16
LA8D17
LA8D18
LA8D19
LA8D20
LA8D21
LA8D22
LA8D23
LA8D3
LA8D4
LA8D5
LA8D6
LA8D7
LA8D8
LA8D9
LA8D11
LA8D12
LA8D13
LA8D[0..23]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
RN908
4.7K
1D1
47
1D2
46
1D3
44
1D4
43
1D5
41
1D6
40
1D7
38
1D8
37
2D1
36
2D2
35
2D3
33
2D4
32
2D5
30
2D6
29
2D7
27
2D8
26
1OE
1
2OE
24
1Q1
2
1Q2
3
1Q3
5
1Q4
6
1Q5
8
1Q6
9
1Q7
11
1Q8
12
2Q1
13
2Q2
14
2Q3
16
2Q4
17
2Q5
19
2Q6
20
2Q7
22
2Q8
23
1LE
48
2LE
25
IC918A
74AL VCH16373
LAD0/PA0
70
LAD1/PA1
69
LAD2/PA2
68
LAD3/PA3
67
LAD4/PA4
66
LAD5/PA5
65
LAD6/PA6
64
LAD7/PA7
63
LAD8/PA8
62
LAD9/PA9
57
LAD10/PA10
56
LAD11/PA11
55
LAD12/PA12
54
LAD13/PA13
53
LAD14/PA14
52
LAD15/PA15
51
LAD16/PA16
50
LAD17/PA17
45
LAD18/PA18
44
LAD19/PA19
43
LAD20/PA20
42
LAD21/PA21
41
LAD22/PA22
40
LAD23/PA23
39
LALE
3
LCS0
4
LCS1
5
LCS2
6
LCS3
7
LCS4
8
LCS5
9
LCS6
10
LCS7
11
LW E/LSDDQM
16
LOE/LSDRAS/LGPL2
17
LGPL5
18
LSDA10/LGPL0
19
LCKE
20
LCLK
21
LBCTL
22
LSDW E/LGPL1
23
LSDCAS/LGPL3
24
LGTA/LGPL4/UPW AIT
25
LA0/PA24
26
LA1/PA25
27
LA2/PA26
28
LSY NC_IN
37
LSY NC_OUT
38
IC209C
DSP B56724AG
DQ0
2
DQ1
4
DQ2
5
DQ3
7
DQ4
8
DQ5
10
DQ6
11
DQ7
13
NC
14
DQM 0
16
WE
17
CAS
18
RAS
19
CS
20
NC
21
BA0
22
BA1
23
A10
24
A0
25
A1
26
A2
27
DQM 2
28
NC
30
DQ16
31
DQ17
33
DQ18
34
DQ19
36
DQ20
37
DQ21
39
DQ22
40
DQ23
42
DQ24
45
DQ25
47
DQ26
48
DQ27
50
DQ28
51
DQ29
53
DQ30
54
DQ31
56
NC
57
DQM 3
59
A3
60
A4
61
A5
62
A6
63
A7
64
A8
65
A9
66
CKE
67
CLK
68
NC
69
NC
70
DQM 1
71
DQ8
74
DQ9
76
DQ10
77
DQ11
79
DQ12
80
DQ13
82
DQ14
83
DQ15
85
NC
73
IC9 09A
MT4 8LC2 M32B 2P -6
LA9D0
LA9D1
LA9D2
LA9D3
LA9D4
LA9D5
LA9D6
LA9D7
LA9D8
LA9D9
LA9D10
LA9D11
LA9D12
LA9D13
LA9D14
LA9D15
LA9D16
LA9D17
LA9D18
LA9D19
LA9D20
LA9D21
LA9D22
LA9D23
LA9D0
LA9D1
LA9D2
LA9D3
LA9D4
LA9D5
LA9D6
LA9D7
LA9D8
LA9D9
LA9D10
LA9D11
LA9D12
LA9D13
LA9D14
LA9D15
LA9D16
LA9D17
LA9D18
LA9D19
LA9D20
LA9D21
LA9D22
LA9D23
LA9D3
LA9D4
LA9D5
LA9D6
LA9D7
LA9D8
LA9D9
LA9D11
LA9D12
LA9D13
LA9D[0..23]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
RN909
4.7K
1D1
47
1D2
46
1D3
44
1D4
43
1D5
41
1D6
40
1D7
38
1D8
37
2D1
36
2D2
35
2D3
33
2D4
32
2D5
30
2D6
29
2D7
27
2D8
26
1OE
1
2OE
24
1Q1
2
1Q2
3
1Q3
5
1Q4
6
1Q5
8
1Q6
9
1Q7
11
1Q8
12
2Q1
13
2Q2
14
2Q3
16
2Q4
17
2Q5
19
2Q6
20
2Q7
22
2Q8
23
1LE
48
2LE
25
IC919A
74AL VCH16373
VDD
1
VDDQ
3
VSSQ
6
VDDQ
9
VSSQ
12
VDD
15
VDD
29
VSSQ
32
VDDQ
35
VSSQ
38
VDDQ
41
VDD
43
VSS
44
VSSQ
46
VDDQ
49
VSSQ
52
VDDQ
55
VSS
58
VSS
72
VDDQ
75
VSSQ
78
VDDQ
81
VSSQ
84
VSS
86
IC9 07B
MT4 8LC2 M32B 2P -6
+3.3V
C947
1.0UF
C907
0.01UF
+3.3V
C967
1.0UF
C927
0.01UF
VDD
1
VDDQ
3
VSSQ
6
VDDQ
9
VSSQ
12
VDD
15
VDD
29
VSSQ
32
VDDQ
35
VSSQ
38
VDDQ
41
VDD
43
VSS
44
VSSQ
46
VDDQ
49
VSSQ
52
VDDQ
55
VSS
58
VSS
72
VDDQ
75
VSSQ
78
VDDQ
81
VSSQ
84
VSS
86
IC9 08B
MT4 8LC2 M32B 2P -6
+3.3V
C948
1.0UF
C908
0.01UF
+3.3V
C968
1.0UF
C928
0.01UF
VDD
1
VDDQ
3
VSSQ
6
VDDQ
9
VSSQ
12
VDD
15
VDD
29
VSSQ
32
VDDQ
35
VSSQ
38
VDDQ
41
VDD
43
VSS
44
VSSQ
46
VDDQ
49
VSSQ
52
VDDQ
55
VSS
58
VSS
72
VDDQ
75
VSSQ
78
VDDQ
81
VSSQ
84
VSS
86
IC9 09B
MT4 8LC2 M32B 2P -6
+3.3V
C949
1.0UF
C909
0.01UF
+3.3V
C969
1.0UF
C929
0.01UF
E901
E903
E902
E904
+3.3V
PHONE_M CLK
PHONE_RST-N
PHONE_BCLK
PHONE_DATA
PHONE_W CLK
PHONE_DFS
C906
0.1UF
C905
0.1UF
C904
0.1UF
C902
1.0UF
C903
1.0UF
MUTE_IC901
MUTE_IC901
R901
8.45K
R905
8.45K
R903
8.45K
R907
8.45K
1%,50V
C911
470PF
R909
82.5K
R911
82.5K
3
2
1
IC9 02A
OPA2134UA
R902
8.45K
R906
8.45K
R904
8.45K
R908
8.45K
1%,50V
C912
470PF
R910
82.5K
R912
82.5K
5
6
7
IC9 02B
OPA2134UA
+3.3V
+3.3V
C958
1.0UF
C978
1.0UF
C918
0.01UF
C938
0.01UF
GND
4
GND
10
GND
15
GND
21
GND
28
GND
34
GND
39
GND
45
VCC
42
VCC
31
VCC
18
VCC
7
IC918B
74AL VCH16373
+3.3V
+3.3V
C957
1.0UF
C977
1.0UF
C917
0.01UF
C937
0.01UF
GND
4
GND
10
GND
15
GND
21
GND
28
GND
34
GND
39
GND
45
VCC
42
VCC
31
VCC
18
VCC
7
IC917B
74AL VCH16373
+3.3V
+3.3V
C959
1.0UF
C979
1.0UF
C919
0.01UF
C939
0.01UF
GND
4
GND
10
GND
15
GND
21
GND
28
GND
34
GND
39
GND
45
VCC
42
VCC
31
VCC
18
VCC
7
IC919B
74AL VCH16373
PHONE_RST-N
PHONE_BCLK
PHONE_DATA
PHONE_W CLK
PHONE_DFS
PHONE_M CLK
C901
1.0UF
(SHT7)
/ \
/ \
TP901
TP902
1
2
3
4
5
6
J901
MOLEX 6PIN
-15V
+15V
4 8
IC9 02 C
OPA2134UA
+5V
+15V
-15V
C913
0.1UF
C914
0.1UF
TO
HEADPHONE
PCA
7LADxx or LA7Dxx
7LADxx or LA7Dxx
7LADxx or LA7Dxx
8LADxx or LA8Dxx
8LADxx or LA8Dxx
8LADxx or LA8Dxx
9LADxx or LA9Dxx
9LADxx or LA9Dxx
9LADxx or LA9Dxx
MCLK
3
PD
4
BICK
5
SDATA
6
LRCK
7
SM UTE
8
DFS
9
DEM 0
10
DEM 1
11
DIF0
12
DV S S
1
AVS S
19
BVSS
15 VREFL
16
AOUTR+
21
AOUTR-
20
AOUTL+
23
AOUTL-
22
P/S
25
VREFH
17
V C OM
24
DV DD
2
DIF1
13
DIF2
14
CKS0
26
CKS1
27
CKS2
28
AVDD
18
IC903
AK 4393VF
DSP BOARD
SCHEMATIC 9 OF 9
EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE CONTROLLER 2
62375.000.xx.1

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-71
LCD CARRIER PARTS LOCATOR
32270.000

J2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
(Mounts From Backside)
J1
2 1
LEDAC2 RED/GRN 2-PIN
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Power Supply Monitor LED
J3
LED1
Flex Jumper
Four M-3 screws to LCD frame
(copper plane on front, under the LCD).
* NOTE: All Components Except LED & LCD Mount
To Backside Of PCB.
OPTIMOD
8500 SERIES
D1
1 A. Schottky
LCD1
orban
Sharp LCY-99073B-17
ESD Suppression (TBD)
D2
1 A. Schottky
1
2
C1
0.0082 F, 1Kv
D3
1
2
5V Transorb
CHASSIS
(Chassis plane on backside of board.)
6-72
Four #6-32 screws to chassis stand-offs (chassis ground).
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
PS1
Backlight Supply
SIPF-200A
Revision History:
(Backlight power supply module mounts to REAR
of Carrier Board with double-stick tape.)
Ref: PCB
FAB 32271.000.02
62270.000.02
ECO# DATE REV
DESCRIPTION DONE CHECKED
3174 03/08/04 01 First Cut Released
WRS
3200 08/27/04 02 LCD Rotation, add ZIFs, Move LED Connector
WRS
LCD CARRIER BOARD SCHEMATIC
1 of 1

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-73
HEADPHONE BOARD PARTS LOCATOR
ENCODER BOARD PARTS LOCATOR

From Interface Board
J2
Pin 4 is audio shield within cable.
Ties to chassis (bracket) by
way of metal bushing on Pot R12.
Right-angle connector is used on
8500 Series products, straight-up
version is used on the 8400.
1
2
3
4
5
6
CHASSIS
AGND
+15vA
-15vA
C1
1 2
1uF, 50v
C3
1 2
1uF, 50v
5%
5%
AGND
a3
Cw Cw
Cw Cw
a1
R12
b3
b1
a2
Dual Dual Pot Pot
10K 20%
b2
R1
10.0K 1%
C5
R6
10.0K
1%
2
1
AGND
C6
0.1uF,50v
20%
1
2
AGND
AGND
AGND
100pF, 100v 5%
6
5
0.1uF,50v
20%
1 2
C2
R10
49.9K 1%
100pF, 100v 5%
2
3
R13
49.9k 1%
1 2
+15vA
U1b
8
OPA2134
4
-15vA
C4
7
OPA2134
U1a
1
OPA2134
U1c
C7
C8
C9
C10
C11
AGND
C12
2
1
AGND
2
1
AGND
2
1
AGND
2
1
AGND
2
1
AGND
2
1
AGND
0.1uF,50v
20%
3
0.1uF,50v
20%
0.1uF,50v
20%
0.1uF,50v
20%
0.1uF,50v
20%
3
3
0.1uF,50v
20%
6-74
+15vA
7
V V+
BW
G=1
V V-
4
-15vA
+15vA
V V+
-15vA
+15vA
-15vA
N/C
1
BW
G=1
V V-
7
V V+
7
4
N/C
1
BW
G=1
V V-
4
N/C
1
U2
6
BUF634PA
U3
6
BUF634PA
U4
6
BUF634PA
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
SOCKET
8-PIN
DIP
SU2
SOCKET
8-PIN
DIP
SU3
SOCKET
8-PIN
DIP
SU4
R3
10.0
1%
R8
10.0
1%
R2
10.0
1%
1
1
1
L1
L2
L3
2
CHASSIS
2
CHASSIS
CHASSIS
3
T-filter
2
3
3
3
T-filter
1000pF,50v
20%
T-filter
1000pF,50v
20%
1000pF,50v
20%
Left
Right
Headphone Board Sheet 1 of 1
62090.000.07.1
1
2
3
J1
Headphone Jack

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-75
2
D1
1
LED (Green)
Power Indicator LED is on a break-away.
Wires soldered at both ends.
1
2
J2
Red Wire
Black Wire
J1
1
2
FPLED1
FPLED2
CHASSIS
(Pin 11 to be N/C on Interface Bd.)
JP1
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
16-pin Header
DGnd
From Interface Board
+5vD
+5vD
Joy_X
Joy_Y
Sw_ENC
Sw_Esc
Sw_Joy
Sw_Ent
DGnd
ENC_1
ENC_2
ENC_C
C1
1 2
0.1µF, 50v
SW1
ENTER
Y1
Y2
A1
1 2
MK Series Keyswitch
X3
X2
Y3 S1
X1
JOYSTICK ASSEMBLY
XVL161-7.3FF-B1OK/B
S2
Mounting Tabs of Joystick (A1) and Encoder
(EN1) are tied to Chassis Ground by way of
all four PCB mounting holes (to Bracket).
1
2
C
EN1
1 2
ESCAPE
MK Series Keyswitch
ROTARY ENCODER
REB162(9x5)PVBS20FINA1-2-24PCE
(PUSH)
Pa
Pb
Encoder Board 62100.000.05.1
Sheet 1of1 1 of 1

6-76
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
FRONT-PANEL INTERFACE BOARD PARTS LOCATOR DRAWING

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-77
Drawing Number Rev. Sheet
of
Ver.
000 1 2
62255
03
1A1
47
1A2
46
1A3
44
1A4
43
1A5
41
1A6
40
1A7
38
1A8
37
2A1
36
2A2
35
2A3
33
2A4
32
2A5
30
2A6
29
2A7
27
2A8
26
1DIR
1
2DIR
24
1B1
2
1B2
3
1B3
5
1B4
6
1B5
8
1B6
9
1B7
11
1B8
12
2B1
13
2B2
14
2B3
16
2B4
17
2B5
19
2B6
20
2B7
22
2B8
23
1OE
48
2OE
25
VCCA
42
VCCA
31
VCCB
18
VCCB
7
GND
4
GND
10
GND
15
GND
21
GND
28
GND
34
GND
39
GND
45
IC100
74ALVC164245DGG
COREVDD
1
COREVDD
51
HIOVDD
16
HIOVDD
26
CLKI
15
CLKI2
77
AB0
5
AB1
4
AB2
3
AB3
2
AB4
99
AB5
98
AB6
97
AB7
96
AB8
95
AB9
94
AB10
93
AB11
92
AB12
91
AB13
90
AB14
89
AB15
88
AB16
87
DB0
35
DB1
34
DB2
33
DB3
32
DB4
31
DB5
30
DB6
29
DB7
28
DB8
27
DB9
24
DB10
23
DB11
22
DB12
21
DB13
20
DB14
19
DB15
18
BS#
8
RD/WR#
12
M/R#
7
CS#
6
WE0#
10
WE1#
11
RD#
9
WAIT#
17
RESET#
13
CNF0
85
CNF1
84
CNF2
83
CNF3
82
CNF4
81
CNF5
80
CNF6
79
CNF7
78
TESTEN
86
VSS
100
VSS
75
VSS
62
VSS
50
VSS
36
VSS
25
VSS
14
GPIO6
39
GPIO5
40
GPIO4
41
GPIO3
42
GPIO2
43
GPIO1
44
GPIO0
45
CVOUT
46
PWMOUT
38
GPO
47
DRDY
48
FPSHIFT
54
FPLINE
53
FPFRAME
52
FPDAT0
55
FPDAT1
56
FPDAT2
57
FPDAT3
58
FPDAT4
59
FPDAT5
60
FPDAT6
61
FPDAT7
64
FPDAT8
65
FPDAT9
66
FPDAT10
67
FPDAT11
68
FPDAT12
69
FPDAT13
70
FPDAT14
71
FPDAT15
72
FPDAT16
73
FPDAT17
74
NIOVDD
37
NIOVDD
49
NIOVDD
63
NIOVDD
76
IC104
S1D13706F00A
1A1
47
1A2
46
1A3
44
1A4
43
1A5
41
1A6
40
1A7
38
1A8
37
2A1
36
2A2
35
2A3
33
2A4
32
2A5
30
2A6
29
2A7
27
2A8
26
1DIR
1
2DIR
24
1B1
2
1B2
3
1B3
5
1B4
6
1B5
8
1B6
9
1B7
11
1B8
12
2B1
13
2B2
14
2B3
16
2B4
17
2B5
19
2B6
20
2B7
22
2B8
23
1OE
48
2OE
25
VCCA
42
VCCA
31
VCCB
18
VCCB
7
GND
4
GND
10
GND
15
GND
21
GND
28
GND
34
GND
39
GND
45
IC101
74ALVC164245DGG
1A1
47
1A2
46
1A3
44
1A4
43
1A5
41
1A6
40
1A7
38
1A8
37
2A1
36
2A2
35
2A3
33
2A4
32
2A5
30
2A6
29
2A7
27
2A8
26
1DIR
1
2DIR
24
1B1
2
1B2
3
1B3
5
1B4
6
1B5
8
1B6
9
1B7
11
1B8
12
2B1
13
2B2
14
2B3
16
2B4
17
2B5
19
2B6
20
2B7
22
2B8
23
1OE
48
2OE
25
VCCA
42
VCCA
31
VCCB
18
VCCB
7
GND
4
GND
10
GND
15
GND
21
GND
28
GND
34
GND
39
GND
45
IC102
74ALVC164245DGG
IOCHCHK
A1
SD7
A2
SD6
A3
SD5
A4
SD4
A5
SD3
A6
SD2
A7
SD1
A8
SD0
A9
IOCHRDY
A10
AEN
A11
SA19
A12
SA18
A13
SA17
A14
SA16
A15
SA15
A16
SA14
A17
SA13
A18
SA12
A19
SA11
A20
SA10
A21
SA9
A22
SA8
A23
SA7
A24
SA6
A25
SA5
A26
SA4
A27
SA3
A28
SA2
A29
SA1
A30
SA0
A31
GND
A32
GND
B1
RESETDRV
B2
+5V
B3
IRQ9
B4
-5V
B5
DRQ2
B6
-12V
B7
ENDXFR
B8
+12V
B9
(KEY)
B10
SMEMW
B11
SMEMR
B12
IOW
B13
IOR
B14
DACK3
B15
DRQ3
B16
DACK1
B17
DRQ1
B18
REFRESH
B19
SYSCLK
B20
IRQ7
B21
IRQ6
B22
IRQ5
B23
IRQ4
B24
IRQ3
B25
DACK2
B26
TC
B27
BALE
B28
+5V
B29
OSC
B30
GND
B31
GND
B32
J101
PC104 64P
GND
C0
SBHE
C1
LA23
C2
LA22
C3
LA21
C4
LA20
C5
LA19
C6
LA18
C7
LA17
C8
MEMR
C9
MEMW
C10
SD8
C11
SD9
C12
SD10
C13
SD11
C14
SD12
C15
SD13
C16
SD14
C17
SD15
C18
(KEY)
C19
GND
D0
MEMCS16
D1
IOCS116
D2
IRQ10
D3
IRQ11
D4
IRQ12
D5
IRQ15
D6
IRQ14
D7
DACK0
D8
DRQ0
D9
DACK5
D10
DRQ5
D11
DACK6
D12
DRQ6
D13
DACK7
D14
DRQ7
D15
+5V
D16
MASTER
D17
GND
D18
GND
D19
J100
PC104 40P
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
A32
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
J102
HEADER32X2
/SBHE
SA20
SA21
SA22
SA23
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
/MEMRD
/MEMWR
SD8
SD9
SD10
SD11
SD12
SD13
SD14
SD15
SD[0..15]
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
SW_JOY
/TOVER
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
+5VD
(rsvd)
+5VD +3.3V
R102 0 OHM
R103 0 OHM
R104 0 OHM
R105 0 OHM
/GPCS1
/MEMWR
/MEMRD
SA23
SA16
SA17
SA18
SA19
SA20
SA21
SA22
TP100
TP101
TP102
TP103
/LCDCS
/LCDRST
/LCDWR
/LCDRD
TP104
TP105
TP106
TP107
TP108
TP109
BSA16
BSA17
+5VD +3.3V
SD15
SD0
SD1
SD2
SD3
SD4
SD5
SD6
SD7
SD8
SD9
SD10
SD11
SD12
SD13
SD14
SD[0..15]
R107
1.00K
1%
+3.3V
/LCDCS
BSD0
BSD1
BSD2
BSD3
BSD4
BSD5
BSD6
BSD7
BSD8
BSD9
BSD10
BSD11
BSD12
BSD13
BSD14
BSD15
BSD[0..15]
/LCDRD
+5VD +3.3V
SA0
SA1
SA2
SA3
SA4
SA5
SA6
SA7
SA8
SA9
SA10
SA11
SA12
SA13
SA14
SA15
SA[0..15]
BSA0
BSA1
BSA2
BSA3
BSA4
BSA5
BSA6
BSA7
BSA8
BSA9
BSA10
BSA11
BSA12
BSA13
BSA14
BSA15
BSA[0..15]
TP110
SD0
SD1
SD2
SD3
SD4
SD5
SD6
SD7
GPRDY
(rsvd)
SA0
SA1
SA2
SA3
SA4
SA5
SA6
SA7
SA8
SA9
SA10
SA11
SA12
SA13
SA14
SA15
SA16
SA17
SA18
SA19
SA[0..15]
5 6
IC103C
74ACT04D
9 8
IC103D
74ACT04D
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
+5VD
RSTDRV
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
R118
100K
SYSCLK
BUFCLK
+5VD
C100
0.1UF
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
+3.3V
TP111
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
TP112
TP113
+3.3V
C101
0.1UF
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
/RTS1
SIN1
/GPCS1
TP114
TP115
TP116
TP117
TP118
TP119
TP120
+3.3V
R116 0 OHM
R117 0 OHM
VccCpu
1
Gnd
2
ClkOut
3
VccOsc
4
Y100
SG 636PCE 33MC2
+3.3V
R119
100K
R120
100K
BUFCLK
C102
0.1UF
R121
10OHM
+3.3V
BSA0
BSA1
BSA2
BSA3
BSA4
BSA5
BSA6
BSA7
BSA8
BSA9
BSA10
BSA11
BSA12
BSA13
BSA14
BSA15
BSA16
BSA[0..15]
BSD[0..15]
BSD0
BSD1
BSD2
BSD3
BSD4
BSD5
BSD6
BSD7
BSD8
BSD9
BSD10
BSD11
BSD12
BSD13
BSD14
BSD15
R126
1.00K
1%
R127
1.00K
1%
R128
0 OHM
R129
0 OHM
R130
0 OHM
R131
0 OHM
+3.3V
BSA17
/LCDCS
/LCDWR
/SBHE
/LCDRD
GPRDY
+3.3V
/LCDRST
+3.3V
TP121
TP122
TP123
TP124
TP125
NC
NC
NC
NC
TP126
TP127
TP128
R133
10.0K 1%
R134
10.0K 1%
R135
10.0K
1%
R136
10.0K
1%
R137
10.0K
1%
R139
0 OHM
E100
E101
+3.3V
+3.3V
GND
CK
HSYNC
VSYNC
GND
R0
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
GND
G0
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
GND
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
GND
ENAB
VCC
VCC
R/L
U/D
V/Q
GND
1
2
3
4
5
J105
MOLEX_53261 0590
Q100
MMBT3904
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
J103
XF2H 3315
11 10
IC103E
74ACT04D
TO SHARP LCD
TO LCD
BACKLIGHT
DRIVER
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
R141 100K
R142 100K
R143 100K
R144 100K
R145 100K
R146 100K
R147 100K
R148 100K
R149 100K
R150 100K
R151 100K
R152 100K
R153 100K
R154 100K
R155 100K
R156 100K
R157 100K
R158 100K
R159 100K
R160 100K
R161 100K
R162 100K
R163 100K
R164 100K
+5VD
R165
1.00K 1%
R166
1.00K 1%
R167
1.00K
1%
SD8
SD9
SD10
SD11
SD12
SD13
SD14
SD15
BSD0
BSD1
BSD2
BSD3
BSD4
BSD5
BSD6
BSD7
BSD8
BSD9
BSD10
BSD11
BSD12
BSD13
BSD14
BSD15
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
(rsvd)
CPU_+3.3V
TP129
TP130
E102
FRONT-PANEL INTERFACE BOARD SCHEMATIC 1 of 2

GND
1
+5VD
4
VCC
GND
2
IC201
/TOVER
HYST
3
5
MAX6501
R201
100K
/TOVER
(SHT 2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
SIN1
/RTS1
+5VD
1
2
+ C200
10UF
C221
20PF
C222
20PF
IC103A
74ACT04D
TP200 TP201
C208
0.1UF
TP204 TP205
1
2
Y200
4.000MHZ
JOY_Y
JOY_X
+5VD
R202
1.00K
1%
C207
0.1UF
16
15
17
18
1
2
4
IC103B
3 4
74ACT04D
C206
0.1UF
IC202
PIC16C711 P
MCLR
VDD
14
14
C205
0.1UF
OSC1
RB0/INT
RB1
OSC2/OUT RB2
RB3
RA0/AN0
RB4
RA1
RB5
RA2/AN2/VREF RB6
RA3/AN3
RB7
IC103F
13 12
7
C223
+5VD
0.1UF
RA4/T0CK
VSS
5
74ACT04D
C204
0.1UF
*Use Mill
214
SPARE
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
3
C203
0.1UF
ENC_1
ENC_2
SW_ENT
SW_ESC
SW_ENC
C224
0.1UF
+5VD
R203
10.0K
1%
(Left)
(Right)
(Center)
+3.3V
+ C201
10UF
R204
10.0K
1%
6-78
TP208
TP212
R205
10.0K
1%
C202
1.0UF
R206
10.0K
1%
C212
0.1UF
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
R207
10.0K
1%
C213
0.1UF
C214
0.1UF
C215
0.1UF
JOY_X
SW_ENC
ENC_1
M1
MNTG
C216
0.1UF
C217
0.1UF
C218
0.1UF
TO ENCODER BOARD
R209
0 OHM
TP216
J200
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
HDR 8X2_RA
+5VD
Drawing Number Ver. Rev.
Sheet
62255
C219
0.1UF
JOY_Y
SW_ESC
SW_JOY
SW_ENT
ENC_2
000 03
+5VD
R208
100K
2 of 2
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE BOARD SCHEMATIC 2 of 2
(SHT2)

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-79
HD-SDI I/O BOARD:
Parts Locator Drawing (top)
32360.000
(sheet 1 of 2)

6-80
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
HD-SDI I/O BOARD:
Parts Locator Drawing (bottom)
32360.000
(sheet 2 of 2)

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-81
DAC_MCLK
RSTIO
DAC_BCLK
DAC_DATA
DAC_FCLK
U_Pg2 Analog_Out
Pg2 Analog_Out.SchDoc
DAC_MCLK
RSTIO
DAC_BCLK
DAC_DATA
DAC_FCLK
DIN_DATA1
DIN_DATA2
DIN_DATA3
AOUT_DATA
AOUT_BCLK
AOUT_FCLK
IN_BCLK
IN_FCLK
PILOT_BCLK
PILOT_WCLK
DOUT_DATA1
18_432MHZ
36_864MHZ
FPGA_24_576MHZ
33_8688MHZ
16_384MHZ
DOUT_FCLK
DOUT_DATA2
DOUT_DATA3
DOUT_BCLK
HOST_TX_A
HOST_RX_A
PIC_RESET
PILOT_DATA
COMP_DATA
COMP_BCLK
COMP_WCLK
GENLOC_PWR_GOOD
PIC_24_576MHZ
U_Pg7 Power_Interface
Pg7 Power_Interface.SchDoc
DIN_DATA1
DIN_DATA2
DIN_DATA3
HOST_RX_A
AOUT_DATA
AOUT_BCLK
AOUT_FCLK
IN_BCLK
IN_FCLK
PILOT_BCLK
PILOT_WCLK
DOUT_DATA1
18_432MHZ
36_864MHZ
FPGA_24_576MHZ
33_8688MHZ
16_384MHZ
DOUT_FCLK
DOUT_DATA2
DOUT_DATA3
DOUT_BCLK
HOST_TX_A
PIC_RESET
PILOT_DATA
COMP_DATA
COMP_BCLK
COMP_WCLK
DDQS[3..0]
DDQM[3..0]
DDCLK1_P
DDCLK1_N
DDWE
DDCAS
DDRAS
DDCS
DDA[13..0]
DDD[31..0]
DDCLKE
DDBA[1..0]
DDCLK2_P
DDCLK2_N
U_Pg9 DDR SDRAM
Pg9 DDR SDRAM.SchDoc
DDQS[3..0]
DDQM[3..0]
DDCLK1_P
DDCLK1_N
DDWE
DDCAS
DDRAS
DDCS
DDA[13..0]
DDD[31..0]
DDCLKE
DDBA[1..0]
DDCLK2_P
DDCLK2_N
U_Pg17 SRC_Power_Dist
Pg17 SRC_Power_Dist.SchDoc
U_Pg12 GTP Power Filters
Pg12 GTP Power Filters.SchDoc
ENCODED_AUDIO_DATA
ENCODED_AUDIO_BCK
ENCODED_AUDIO_LRCK
DECODER_VSYNC
DEC_METADATA
DEC_METASUB_DATA
DEC_METASUB_BCK
DEC_METASUB_LRCK
DOLBY_DEC_LRCK
DOLBY_DEC_BCK
DOLBY_DEC_1-2
DOLBY_DEC_3-4
DOLBY_DEC_5-6
DOLBY_DEC_7-8
DOLBY_DEC_AUX
SPI_SCK
SPI_SDO
SPI_SDI
DOLBY_DEC_STAT[7..0]
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA3
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK3
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK3
ENCODER_OUT_AUDIO_DATA0
ENCODER_OUT_AUDIO_BCK0
ENCODER_OUT_AUDIO_LRCK0
ENCODER_METADATA_IN
ENC_VSYNC
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL[19..0]
DOLBY_ENC_STAT[1..0]
PMD[7..0]
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL0
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL1
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL2
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL3
SPI_DEV_CS13
SPI_DEV_CS14
ENC_RES[4..0]
U_Pg13 Dolby E
Pg13 Dolby E.SchDoc
ENCODED_AUDIO_DATA
ENCODED_AUDIO_BCK
ENCODED_AUDIO_LRCK
DECODER_VSYNC
DOLBY_DEC_LRCK
DOLBY_DEC_BCK
SPI_SCK
SPI_SDO
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA3
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK3
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK3
ENCODER_METADATA_IN
ENC_VSYNC
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL[19..0]
PMD[7..0]
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL0
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL1
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL2
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL3
DEC_METADATA
DEC_METASUB_DATA
DEC_METASUB_BCK
DEC_METASUB_LRCK
DOLBY_DEC_1-2
DOLBY_DEC_3-4
DOLBY_DEC_5-6
DOLBY_DEC_7-8
DOLBY_DEC_AUX
SPI_SDI
DOLBY_DEC_STAT[7..0]
ENCODER_OUT_AUDIO_DATA0
ENCODER_OUT_AUDIO_BCK0
ENCODER_OUT_AUDIO_LRCK0
DOLBY_ENC_STAT[1..0]
SPI_DEV_CS13
SPI_DEV_CS14
SDI_ILRCK_1-2
SDI_IBCK_1-2
SDI_IDATA_1-2
SDI_IN_LRCK_3-4
SDI_IN_BCK_3-4
SDI_IN_DATA_1-2
SDI_IREF_CLK_1-2
SDI_IDATA_3-4
SDI_IREF_CLK_3-4
SDI_ILRCK_5-6
SDI_IBCK_5-6
SDI_IDATA_5-6
SDI_IN_LRCK_5-6
SDI_IN_BCK_5-6
SDI_IREF_CLK_5-6
SDI_IDATA_7-8
SDI_IREF_CLK_7-8
SDI_OUT_LRCK_1-2
SDI_OUT_BCK_1-2
SDI_OUT_DATA_1-2
SDI_OUT_LRCK_5-6
SDI_OUT_BCK_5-6
SDI_OUT_DATA_5-6
SDI_OLRCK_1-2
SDI_OBCK_1-2
SDI_ODATA_1-2
SDI_OREF_CLK_1-2
SDI_ODATA_3-4
SDI_OREF_CLK_3-4
SDI_OLRCK_5-6
SDI_OBCK_5-6
SDI_ODATA_5-6
SDI_OREF_CLK_5-6
SDI_ODATA_7-8
SDI_OREF_CLK_7-8
SDI_OUT_DATA_7-8
SDI_OUT_DATA_3-4
SDI_OLRCK_3-4
SDI_OBCK_3-4
SDI_OLRCK_7-8
SDI_OBCK_7-8
SDI_ILRCK_3-4
SDI_IBCK_3-4
SDI_ILRCK_7-8
SDI_IBCK_7-8
SDI_IN_LRCK_1-2
SDI_IN_BCK_1-2
SDI_IN_LRCK_7-8
SDI_IN_BCK_7-8
SDI_OUT_LRCK_3-4
SDI_OUT_BCK_3-4
SDI_OUT_LRCK_7-8
SDI_OUT_BCK_7-8
U_Pg5 SDI_IO
Pg5 SDI_IO.SchDoc
SDI_ILRCK_1-2
SDI_IBCK_1-2
SDI_IDATA_1-2
SDI_IN_LRCK_3-4
SDI_IN_BCK_3-4
SDI_IREF_CLK_1-2
SDI_IDATA_3-4
SDI_IREF_CLK_3-4
SDI_ILRCK_5-6
SDI_IBCK_5-6
SDI_IDATA_5-6
SDI_IN_LRCK_5-6
SDI_IN_BCK_5-6
SDI_IREF_CLK_5-6
SDI_IDATA_7-8
SDI_IREF_CLK_7-8
SDI_OUT_LRCK_1-2
SDI_OUT_BCK_1-2
SDI_OUT_LRCK_5-6
SDI_OUT_BCK_5-6
SDI_OLRCK_1-2
SDI_OBCK_1-2
SDI_ODATA_1-2
SDI_OREF_CLK_1-2
SDI_ODATA_3-4
SDI_OREF_CLK_3-4
SDI_OLRCK_5-6
SDI_OBCK_5-6
SDI_ODATA_5-6
SDI_OREF_CLK_5-6
SDI_ODATA_7-8
SDI_OREF_CLK_7-8
SDI_OLRCK_3-4
SDI_OBCK_3-4
SDI_OLRCK_7-8
SDI_OBCK_7-8
SDI_ILRCK_3-4
SDI_IBCK_3-4
SDI_ILRCK_7-8
SDI_IBCK_7-8
SDI_IN_LRCK_1-2
SDI_IN_BCK_1-2
SDI_IN_LRCK_7-8
SDI_IN_BCK_7-8
SDI_OUT_LRCK_3-4
SDI_OUT_BCK_3-4
SDI_OUT_LRCK_7-8
SDI_OUT_BCK_7-8
SDI_IN_DATA_1-2
SDI_OUT_DATA_1-2
SDI_OUT_DATA_5-6
SDI_OUT_DATA_7-8
SDI_OUT_DATA_3-4
ENC_RES[4..0]
HD_MUTE1 MGT_VID1_RX_P
MGT_VID1_RX_N
HD_CD1
MGT_VID1_TX_P
MGT_VID1_TX_N
HD_SD1
SYNC_SDENB
SYNC_SCL
SYNC_SDA
SYNC_LOCK
SYNC_V_OUT
SYNC_H_OUT
SYNC_BACKPORCH
SYNC_SYNC_OUT
SYNC_V_BLANK
SYNC_ODDEVEN
SDI_BYPASS
U_Pg3 Video_IO
Pg3 Video_IO.SchDoc
HD_MUTE1
MGT_VID1_TX_P
MGT_VID1_TX_N
HD_SD1
SYNC_SDENB
SYNC_SCL
SYNC_SDA
SDI_BYPASS
MGT_VID1_RX_P
MGT_VID1_RX_N
HD_CD1
SYNC_LOCK
SYNC_V_OUT
SYNC_H_OUT
SYNC_BACKPORCH
SYNC_SYNC_OUT
SYNC_V_BLANK
SYNC_ODDEVEN
RXCKO_1-2
RX_LRCK_1-2
RX_BCK_1-2
AES_IDATA_1-2
AES_ILRCK_1-2
AES_IBCK_1-2
AES_IREFCLK1_1-2
TX_LRCK_1-2
TX_BCK_1-2
AES_OLRCK_1-2
AES_OBCK_1-2
AES_ODATA_1-2
TX_LRCK_3-4
TX_BCK_3-4
AES_OLRCK_3-4
AES_OBCK_3-4
AES_ODATA_3-4
TX_MCLK_1-2
RXCKO_3-4
RX_LRCK_3-4
RX_BCK_3-4
RXCKO_5-6
RX_LRCK_5-6
RX_BCK_5-6
TX_MCLK_3-4
AES_IDATA_3-4
AES_ILRCK_3-4
AES_IBCK_3-4
AES_IDATA_5-6
AES_ILRCK_5-6
AES_IBCK_5-6
AES_OREFCLK_1-2
AES_OREFCLK_3-4
AES_IREFCLK1_3-4
AES_IREFCLK1_5-6
AES_IREFCLK2_1-2
AES_IREFCLK2_3-4
AES_IREFCLK2_5-6
TX_LRCK_5-6
TX_BCK_5-6
TX_MCLK_5-6
AES_OREFCLK_5-6
AES_OLRCK_5-6
AES_OBCK_5-6
AES_ODATA_5-6
AES_IDATA_7-8
U_Pg4 AES_IO
Pg4 AES_IO.SchDoc
AES_ILRCK_1-2
AES_IBCK_1-2
AES_IREFCLK1_1-2
TX_LRCK_1-2
TX_BCK_1-2
AES_OLRCK_1-2
AES_OBCK_1-2
AES_ODATA_1-2
TX_LRCK_3-4
TX_BCK_3-4
AES_OLRCK_3-4
AES_OBCK_3-4
AES_ODATA_3-4
TX_MCLK_1-2
TX_MCLK_3-4
AES_ILRCK_3-4
AES_IBCK_3-4
AES_ILRCK_5-6
AES_IBCK_5-6
AES_OREFCLK_1-2
AES_OREFCLK_3-4
AES_IREFCLK1_3-4
AES_IREFCLK1_5-6
AES_IREFCLK2_1-2
AES_IREFCLK2_3-4
AES_IREFCLK2_5-6
TX_LRCK_5-6
TX_BCK_5-6
TX_MCLK_5-6
AES_OREFCLK_5-6
AES_OLRCK_5-6
AES_OBCK_5-6
AES_ODATA_5-6
AES_IDATA_7-8
RXCKO_1-2
RX_LRCK_1-2
RX_BCK_1-2
AES_IDATA_1-2
RXCKO_3-4
RX_LRCK_3-4
RX_BCK_3-4
RXCKO_5-6
RX_LRCK_5-6
RX_BCK_5-6
AES_IDATA_3-4
AES_IDATA_5-6
SPI_SDI
SPI_SDO
SPI_SCK
RSTIO
PIC_INT
SPI_DEV_CS1
SPI_DEV_CS2
SPI_DEV_CS3
SPI_DEV_CS4
SPI_DEV_CS5
SPI_DEV_CS6
SPI_DEV_CS7
SPI_DEV_CS8
SPI_DEV_CS9
SPI_DEV_CS10
SPI_DEV_CS11
SPI_DEV_CS15
U_Pg16 SRC_Misc Signals
Pg16 SRC_Misc Signals.SchDoc
SPI_SDI
SPI_SDO
SPI_SCK
RSTIO
SPI_DEV_CS1
SPI_DEV_CS2
SPI_DEV_CS3
SPI_DEV_CS4
SPI_DEV_CS5
SPI_DEV_CS6
SPI_DEV_CS7
SPI_DEV_CS8
SPI_DEV_CS9
SPI_DEV_CS10
SPI_DEV_CS11
SPI_DEV_CS15
PIC_INT
HOST_TX_A HOST_RX_A
PMD[7..0] PMALL
PMRD
PMWR
PMCS2
SPI_SDI
SPI_SDO
SPI_SCK
RSTIO
PIC_RESET
PIC_FPGA_SPARE0
PIC_FPGA_SPARE1
SPI_DEV_CS1
PIC_INT
SPI_DEV_CS2
SPI_DEV_CS3
SPI_DEV_CS4
SPI_DEV_CS5
SPI_DEV_CS6
SPI_DEV_CS7
SPI_DEV_CS8
SPI_DEV_CS9
SPI_DEV_CS10
SPI_DEV_CS11
SPI_DEV_CS12
SPI_DEV_CS13
SPI_DEV_CS14
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SDO
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SCK
PIC_IN_METADATA_SDI
PIC_IN_METADATA_SCK
PIC_VSYNC
PIC_IN_METADATA_SS
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SS
PIC_24_576MHZ
SYNC_SDENB
SYNC_SCL
SYNC_SDA
SPI_DEV_CS15
U_Pg6 PIC
Pg6 PIC.SchDoc
HOST_TX_A
PMD[7..0]
SPI_SDI
PIC_RESET
PIC_FPGA_SPARE0
PIC_FPGA_SPARE1
PIC_INT
PIC_IN_METADATA_SDI
PIC_IN_METADATA_SCK
PIC_VSYNC
PIC_IN_METADATA_SS
PIC_24_576MHZ
SYNC_SDA
HOST_RX_A
PMALL
PMRD
PMWR
PMCS2
SPI_SDO
SPI_SCK
RSTIO
SPI_DEV_CS1
SPI_DEV_CS2
SPI_DEV_CS3
SPI_DEV_CS4
SPI_DEV_CS5
SPI_DEV_CS6
SPI_DEV_CS7
SPI_DEV_CS8
SPI_DEV_CS9
SPI_DEV_CS10
SPI_DEV_CS11
SPI_DEV_CS12
SPI_DEV_CS13
SPI_DEV_CS14
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SDO
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SCK
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SS
SYNC_SDENB
SYNC_SCL
SPI_DEV_CS15
RXCKO_7-8
RX_LRCK_7-8
RX_BCK_7-8
AES_IDATA_7-8
AES_ILRCK_7-8
AES_IBCK_7-8
AES_IREFCLK1_7-8
AES_IREFCLK2_7-8
SYNCIN_LRCK
SYNCIN_SCLK
SYNCIN_RMCK
SPI_SDI
SPI_SDO
SPI_SCK
RSTIO
SPI_DEV_CS12
SYNCIN_MCLK
U_Pg11 AES Sync
Pg11 AES Sync.SchDoc
AES_ILRCK_7-8
AES_IBCK_7-8
AES_IREFCLK1_7-8
AES_IREFCLK2_7-8
SPI_SDI
SPI_SDO
SPI_SCK
RSTIO
SPI_DEV_CS12
SYNCIN_MCLK
RXCKO_7-8
RX_LRCK_7-8
RX_BCK_7-8
AES_IDATA_7-8
SYNCIN_LRCK
SYNCIN_SCLK
SYNCIN_RMCK
PCLK1
RX_USRCLK_P
RX_USRCLK_N
TX_REFCLK_P
TX_REFCLK_N
GENLOC_CLNR_RST
CLNR_SKEW_EN
CLNR_DOUBLE
CLNR_IPSEL
CLK_CLNR_LOCK
GENLOC_PWR_GOOD
U_Pg14 Clock Cleaner
Pg14 Clock Cleaner.SchDoc
PCLK1
GENLOC_CLNR_RST
GENLOC_SPI_CLK
GENLOC_SPI_SDIN
GENLOC_SPI_CS
GENLOC_HSYNC
GENLOC_VSYNC
GENLOC_FSYNC
GENLOC_SPI_SDOUT
U_Pg15 Genlock
Pg15 Genlock.SchDoc
PCLK1
RX_USRCLK_P
RX_USRCLK_N
GENLOC_CLNR_RST
CLNR_SKEW_EN
CLNR_DOUBLE
CLNR_IPSEL
GENLOC_CLNR_RST
GENLOC_SPI_CLK
GENLOC_SPI_SDIN
GENLOC_SPI_CS
GENLOC_HSYNC
GENLOC_VSYNC
GENLOC_FSYNC
TX_REFCLK_P
TX_REFCLK_N
CLK_CLNR_LOCK
GENLOC_PWR_GOOD
PCLK1
GENLOC_SPI_SDOUT
GENLOC_PWR_GOOD
DDD[31..0]
DDQS[3..0]
DDA[13..0]
DDQM[3..0]
DDCLK1_P
DDCLK1_N
DDCLK2_N
DDCLK2_P
DDCLKE
DDWE
DDCAS
DDRAS
DDCS
DDBA[1..0]
MGT_VID1_RX_P
MGT_VID1_RX_N
HD_CD1
MGT_VID1_TX_P
MGT_VID1_TX_N
HD_SD1
HD_MUTE1
MGTCLK_1485_P
MGTCLK_1485_N
XO_160_P
XO_160_N
SYNC_LOCK
SYNC_V_OUT
SYNC_H_OUT
SYNC_BACKPORCH
SYNC_V_BLANK
SYNC_ODDEVEN
SYNC_SYNC_OUT
DAC_MCLK
DAC_BCLK
DAC_DATA
DAC_FCLK
RXCKO_1-2
RX_LRCK_1-2
RX_BCK_1-2
RXCKO_3-4
RX_LRCK_3-4
RX_BCK_3-4
RXCKO_5-6
RX_LRCK_5-6
RX_BCK_5-6
RXCKO_7-8
RX_LRCK_7-8
RX_BCK_7-8
AES_IREFCLK1_1-2
TX_LRCK_1-2
TX_BCK_1-2
TX_LRCK_3-4
TX_BCK_3-4
TX_MCLK_1-2
TX_MCLK_3-4
AES_IDATA_1-2
AES_ILRCK_1-2
AES_IBCK_1-2
AES_IDATA_3-4 AES_ILRCK_3-4
AES_IBCK_3-4
AES_IDATA_5-6
AES_ILRCK_5-6
AES_IBCK_5-6
AES_IDATA_7-8
AES_ILRCK_7-8
AES_IBCK_7-8
SDI_IDATA_1-2
SDI_IREF_CLK_1-2
SDI_IDATA_3-4
SDI_IREF_CLK_3-4
SDI_IDATA_5-6
SDI_IREF_CLK_5-6
SDI_IDATA_7-8
SDI_IREF_CLK_7-8
SDI_IN_DATA_1-2
SDI_OLRCK_1-2
SDI_OBCK_1-2
SDI_ODATA_1-2
SDI_OREF_CLK_1-2
SDI_OLRCK_3-4
SDI_OBCK_3-4
SDI_ODATA_3-4
SDI_OREF_CLK_3-4
SDI_OLRCK_5-6
SDI_OBCK_5-6
SDI_ODATA_5-6
SDI_OREF_CLK_5-6
SDI_OLRCK_7-8
SDI_OBCK_7-8
SDI_ODATA_7-8
SDI_OREF_CLK_7-8
SDI_OUT_DATA_1-2
SDI_OUT_DATA_5-6
SDI_OUT_DATA_7-8
SDI_OUT_DATA_3-4
PMRD
PMWR
PMALL
ENCODED_AUDIO_DATA
ENCODED_AUDIO_BCK
ENCODED_AUDIO_LRCK
DECODER_VSYNC
DEC_METADATA
DEC_METASUB_DATA
DEC_METASUB_BCK
DEC_METASUB_LRCK
DOLBY_DEC_LRCK
DOLBY_DEC_BCK
DOLBY_DEC_1-2
DOLBY_DEC_3-4
DOLBY_DEC_5-6
DOLBY_DEC_7-8
DOLBY_DEC_AUX
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA3
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK3
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK3
ENCODER_METADATA_IN
ENCODER_OUT_AUDIO_DATA0
ENCODER_OUT_AUDIO_BCK0
ENCODER_OUT_AUDIO_LRCK0
ENC_VSYNC
DOLBY_DEC_STAT[7..0]
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL[19..0]
DOLBY_ENC_STAT[1..0]
DOUT_DATA1
DOUT_FCLK
DOUT_DATA2
DOUT_DATA3
DOUT_BCLK
18_432MHZ
36_864MHZ
FPGA_24_576MHZ
33_8688MHZ
16_384MHZ
DIN_DATA1
DIN_DATA2
DIN_DATA3
AOUT_DATA
AOUT_BCLK
AOUT_FCLK
IN_BCLK
IN_FCLK
PILOT_BCLK
PILOT_WCLK
PILOT_DATA
COMP_DATA
COMP_BCLK
COMP_WCLK
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL0
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL1
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL2
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL3
PMCS2
PIC_FPGA_SPARE0
PIC_FPGA_SPARE1
PMD[7..0]
SYNCIN_LRCK
SYNCIN_SCLK
SYNCIN_RMCK
AES_OLRCK_1-2
AES_OBCK_1-2
AES_ODATA_1-2
AES_OLRCK_3-4
AES_OBCK_3-4
AES_ODATA_3-4
SYNCIN_MCLK
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SDO
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SCK
PIC_IN_METADATA_SCK
PIC_IN_METADATA_SDI
PIC_VSYNC
AES_OREFCLK_1-2
AES_OREFCLK_3-4
PIC_IN_METADATA_SS
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SS
AES_IREFCLK1_3-4
AES_IREFCLK1_5-6
AES_IREFCLK1_7-8
AES_IREFCLK2_1-2
AES_IREFCLK2_3-4
AES_IREFCLK2_5-6
AES_IREFCLK2_7-8
ENC_RES[4..0]
SDI_BYPASS
SDI_IN_LRCK_3-4
SDI_IN_BCK_3-4
SDI_IN_LRCK_1-2
SDI_IN_BCK_1-2
SDI_IN_LRCK_5-6
SDI_IN_BCK_5-6
SDI_IN_LRCK_7-8
SDI_IN_BCK_7-8
XO_200_P
XO_200_N
XO_1485_FSEL
SDI_ILRCK_1-2
SDI_IBCK_1-2
SDI_ILRCK_7-8
SDI_IBCK_7-8
SDI_OUT_LRCK_1-2
SDI_OUT_BCK_1-2
SDI_OUT_LRCK_3-4
SDI_OUT_BCK_3-4
SDI_OUT_LRCK_5-6
SDI_OUT_BCK_5-6
SDI_OUT_LRCK_7-8
SDI_OUT_BCK_7-8
SDI_ILRCK_3-4
SDI_IBCK_3-4
SDI_ILRCK_5-6
SDI_IBCK_5-6
TX_LRCK_5-6
TX_BCK_5-6
TX_MCLK_5-6
AES_OREFCLK_5-6
AES_OLRCK_5-6
AES_OBCK_5-6
AES_ODATA_5-6
TX_REFCLK_P
TX_REFCLK_N
RX_USRCLK_P
RX_USRCLK_N
GENLOC_CLNR_RST
CLNR_DOUBLE
CLNR_SKEW_EN
CLNR_IPSEL
CLK_CLNR_LOCK
GENLOC_SPI_CLK
GENLOC_SPI_SDIN
GENLOC_SPI_CS
GENLOC_SPI_SDOUT
GENLOC_HSYNC
GENLOC_VSYNC
GENLOC_FSYNC
U_Pg8 FPGA
Pg8 FPGA.SchDoc
DDA[13..0]
DDQM[3..0]
DDCLK1_P
DDCLK1_N
DDCLK2_N
DDCLK2_P
DDCLKE
DDWE
DDCAS
DDRAS
DDCS
DDBA[1..0]
MGT_VID1_TX_P
MGT_VID1_TX_N
HD_SD1
HD_MUTE1
DAC_MCLK
DAC_BCLK
DAC_DATA
DAC_FCLK
AES_IREFCLK1_1-2
TX_LRCK_1-2
TX_BCK_1-2
TX_LRCK_3-4
TX_BCK_3-4
TX_MCLK_1-2
TX_MCLK_3-4
AES_ILRCK_1-2
AES_IBCK_1-2
AES_ILRCK_3-4
AES_IBCK_3-4
AES_ILRCK_5-6
AES_IBCK_5-6
AES_ILRCK_7-8
AES_IBCK_7-8
SDI_IDATA_1-2
SDI_IREF_CLK_1-2
SDI_IDATA_3-4
SDI_IREF_CLK_3-4
SDI_IDATA_5-6
SDI_IREF_CLK_5-6
SDI_IDATA_7-8
SDI_IREF_CLK_7-8
SDI_OLRCK_1-2
SDI_OBCK_1-2
SDI_ODATA_1-2
SDI_OREF_CLK_1-2
SDI_OLRCK_3-4
SDI_OBCK_3-4
SDI_ODATA_3-4
SDI_OREF_CLK_3-4
SDI_OLRCK_5-6
SDI_OBCK_5-6
SDI_ODATA_5-6
SDI_OREF_CLK_5-6
SDI_OLRCK_7-8
SDI_OBCK_7-8
SDI_ODATA_7-8
SDI_OREF_CLK_7-8
ENCODED_AUDIO_DATA
ENCODED_AUDIO_BCK
ENCODED_AUDIO_LRCK
DECODER_VSYNC
DOLBY_DEC_LRCK
DOLBY_DEC_BCK
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA3
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK3
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK3
ENCODER_METADATA_IN
ENCODER_OUT_AUDIO_BCK0
ENCODER_OUT_AUDIO_LRCK0
ENC_VSYNC
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL[19..0]
DIN_DATA1
DIN_DATA2
DIN_DATA3
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL0
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL1
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL2
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL3
AES_OLRCK_1-2
AES_OBCK_1-2
AES_ODATA_1-2
AES_OLRCK_3-4
AES_OBCK_3-4
AES_ODATA_3-4
SYNCIN_MCLK
PIC_IN_METADATA_SCK
PIC_IN_METADATA_SDI
PIC_VSYNC
AES_OREFCLK_1-2
AES_OREFCLK_3-4
PIC_IN_METADATA_SS
AES_IREFCLK1_3-4
AES_IREFCLK1_5-6
AES_IREFCLK1_7-8
AES_IREFCLK2_1-2
AES_IREFCLK2_3-4
AES_IREFCLK2_5-6
AES_IREFCLK2_7-8
ENC_RES[4..0]
SDI_BYPASS
SDI_IN_LRCK_3-4
SDI_IN_BCK_3-4
SDI_IN_LRCK_1-2
SDI_IN_BCK_1-2
SDI_IN_LRCK_5-6
SDI_IN_BCK_5-6
SDI_IN_LRCK_7-8
SDI_IN_BCK_7-8
XO_1485_FSEL
SDI_ILRCK_1-2
SDI_IBCK_1-2
SDI_ILRCK_7-8
SDI_IBCK_7-8
SDI_OUT_LRCK_1-2
SDI_OUT_BCK_1-2
SDI_OUT_LRCK_3-4
SDI_OUT_BCK_3-4
SDI_OUT_LRCK_5-6
SDI_OUT_BCK_5-6
SDI_OUT_LRCK_7-8
SDI_OUT_BCK_7-8
SDI_ILRCK_3-4
SDI_IBCK_3-4
SDI_ILRCK_5-6
SDI_IBCK_5-6
TX_LRCK_5-6
TX_BCK_5-6
TX_MCLK_5-6
AES_OREFCLK_5-6
AES_OLRCK_5-6
AES_OBCK_5-6
AES_ODATA_5-6
RX_USRCLK_P
RX_USRCLK_N
GENLOC_CLNR_RST
CLNR_DOUBLE
CLNR_SKEW_EN
CLNR_IPSEL
GENLOC_SPI_CLK
GENLOC_SPI_SDIN
GENLOC_SPI_CS
GENLOC_HSYNC
GENLOC_VSYNC
GENLOC_FSYNC
DDD[31..0]
DDQS[3..0]
MGT_VID1_RX_P
MGT_VID1_RX_N
HD_CD1
MGTCLK_1485_P
MGTCLK_1485_N
XO_160_P
XO_160_N
SYNC_LOCK
SYNC_V_OUT
SYNC_H_OUT
SYNC_BACKPORCH
SYNC_V_BLANK
SYNC_ODDEVEN
SYNC_SYNC_OUT
RXCKO_1-2
RX_LRCK_1-2
RX_BCK_1-2
RXCKO_3-4
RX_LRCK_3-4
RX_BCK_3-4
RXCKO_5-6
RX_LRCK_5-6
RX_BCK_5-6
RXCKO_7-8
RX_LRCK_7-8
RX_BCK_7-8
AES_IDATA_1-2
AES_IDATA_3-4
AES_IDATA_5-6
AES_IDATA_7-8
SDI_IN_DATA_1-2
SDI_OUT_DATA_1-2
SDI_OUT_DATA_5-6
SDI_OUT_DATA_7-8
SDI_OUT_DATA_3-4
PMRD
PMWR
PMALL
DEC_METADATA
DEC_METASUB_DATA
DEC_METASUB_BCK
DEC_METASUB_LRCK
DOLBY_DEC_1-2
DOLBY_DEC_3-4
DOLBY_DEC_5-6
DOLBY_DEC_7-8
DOLBY_DEC_AUX
ENCODER_OUT_AUDIO_DATA0
DOLBY_DEC_STAT[7..0]
DOLBY_ENC_STAT[1..0]
DOUT_DATA1
DOUT_FCLK
DOUT_DATA2
DOUT_DATA3
DOUT_BCLK
18_432MHZ
36_864MHZ
FPGA_24_576MHZ
33_8688MHZ
16_384MHZ
AOUT_DATA
AOUT_BCLK
AOUT_FCLK
IN_BCLK
IN_FCLK
PILOT_BCLK
PILOT_WCLK
PILOT_DATA
COMP_DATA
COMP_BCLK
COMP_WCLK
PMCS2
PIC_FPGA_SPARE0
PIC_FPGA_SPARE1
PMD[7..0]
SYNCIN_LRCK
SYNCIN_SCLK
SYNCIN_RMCK
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SDO
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SCK
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SS
XO_200_P
XO_200_N
TX_REFCLK_P
TX_REFCLK_N
CLK_CLNR_LOCK
GENLOC_SPI_SDOUT
XO_1485_FSEL MGTCLK_1485_P
MGTCLK_1485_N
XO_160_P
XO_160_N
XO_200_P
XO_200_N
U_Pg10 Clocks_XO
Pg10 Clocks_XO.SchDoc
MGTCLK_1485_P
MGTCLK_1485_N
XO_160_P
XO_160_N
XO_200_P
XO_200_N
XO_1485_FSEL
PIC_24_576MHZ
HD-SDI I/O BOARD:
Schematic: System Interconnect
62360.000
(sheet 1 of 17)

6-82 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
+5VA
5
6
7
U101B
OPA2134UA
3
2
8 4
1
U101A
OPA2134UA
+15V
-15V
3
2
8 4
1
U102A
OPA2134UA
5
6
7
U102B
OPA2134UA
+15V
-15V
1
2
3
4
J101
MALE
R101
8.45K
R108
8.45K
R102
8.45K
R105
8.45K
R104
8.45K
R106
8.45K
R103
8.45K
R107
8.45K
C112
470PF
C113
470PF
R115
3.48K
R116
3.48K
R117
11.3K
R118
11.3K
R119
8.45K
R120
8.45K
C116
470PF
C117
470PF
R121
11.3K
R122
11.3K
R123
3.48K
R124
3.48K
C118
1500pF
C119
1500pF
R109
82.5K
R110
82.5K
R111
82.5K
R112
82.5K
R113
3.48K
R114
3.48K
3
2
8 4
1
U103A
OPA2134UA
5
6
7
U103B
OPA2134UA
R127
110.0 OHM
R128
110.0 OHM
+15V
-15V
1
2
3
CW
VR100
10K
1
2
3
CW
VR101
10K
1
2
3
4
5 6
7
8
U104
DRV134PA
1
2
3
4
5 6
7
8
U105
DRV134PA
+15V
-15V
1
2
3
L106
FILTER
1
2
3
L105
FILTER
CR103
TRANSZORB
CR100
TRANSZORB
+15V
-15V
1
2
3
4
J100
MALE
1
2
3
L107
FILTER
1
2
3
L108
FILTER
CR101
TRANSZORB
CR102
TRANSZORB
+3.3V
AGND1
CGND
SOCKET
DIP-8
SOCKET
DIP-8
CGND
AGND1
AGND1
AGND1
AGND1
AGND2
AGND2
AGND2
AGND1
AGND2
AGND2
AGND2
AGND2
AGND1
AGND
AGND
DGND
3-pole
Butterworth
f-3db=40KHz
Servo
f-3db=0.10Hz
AGND
DGND
R100
10.0K
R129
10.0K
R130
10.0K
L101
3.3uH
L102
3.3uH
L103
3.3uH
L104
3.3uH
C109
0.1uF
C101
0.1uF
CGND
CGND
C110
0.1uF
C115
0.1uF
C111
0.1uF
C114
0.1uF
C107
0.1uF
C106
0.1uF
-15V
AGND2
AGND1
R125
1.00M
R126
1.00M
C105
0.1uF
AGND
C124
470PF
AGND1
C122
470PF
AGND1
C123
470PF
C125
470PF
AGND2
AGND2
RSTIO
+
C104 10uF
L100
HZ0805G102R-10
+
C108 10uF
+15V
C102
0.1uF
C103
0.1uF
AGND1
-15V
+15V
AGND2
AGND AGND2
AGND1
SEE NOTE 1
SEE NOTE 2
SEE NOTE 3
LEFT ANALOG OUT
RIGHT
ANALOG OUT
LEFT
OUTPUT
TRIM
RIGHT
OUTPUT
TRIM
MCLK
3
PD
4
BICK
5
SDATA
6
LRCK
7
SMUTE
8
DFS
9
DEM0
10
DEM1
11
DIF0
12
DVSS
1
AVSS
19
BVSS
15
VREFL
16
AOUTR+
21
AOUTR-
20
AOUTL+
23
AOUTL-
22
P/S
25
VREFH
17
VCOM
24
DVDD
2
DIF1
13
DIF2
14
CKS0
26
CKS1
27
CKS2
28
AVDD
18
U100
AK4393VF
TP107
WHT
TP104
RED
TP105
ORG
TP106
YEL
TP108
BLK
DAC_MCLK
DAC_BCLK
DAC_DATA
DAC_FCLK
DAC_MCLK
DAC_FCLK
DAC_BCLK
DAC_DATA
DAC_MCLK
DAC_FCLK
DAC_BCLK
DAC_DATA
TP109
BLK
DGND AGND
TP101
RED
TP100
WHT
TP102
WHT
TP103
RED
TP110
WHT
TP111
RED
1
2
AGND
1
2
AGND1
AGND
1
2
AGND2
SEE NOTE 2
C100
1.0uF
C121
0.47µF
C120
0.47µF
1
2 . .
4
3
L109
1K
.
. L110
1K
HD-SDI I/O BOARD:
SCHEMATIC: AUDIO OUTPUT
62360.000
(sheet 2 of 17)

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-83
BNC7T
VIDEO RX
3Gbps Max
J200
5
4
3
2
DGND
EXTERNAL
VIDEO SYNC
J202B
BNC DUAL_with cap.
LOWER
3
DGND
1
4
8
K200C
GRF300-5
6
7
COMPONENT VIDEO
DGND
C206 C-NP
R201 75 OHM
SDI_BYPASS
R215
75 OHM
L201 6.8nH
R203
75 OHM
HD_MUTE1
D200
BAT54C
DGND DGND
R220
1.0K
R221
10.0K
DGND
R213
0 OHM
1
3
2
DGND
DGND
C208 1.0uF
C212 1.0uF
R204
37.4 OHM
+5VD
DGND
C224
C-NP
C223
C201
0.47µF
DGND
1
9
Q200
MMBT3904
0.1uF
C202
C215
0.01uF
K200A
COIL
COIL
0.47µF
GND
GRF300-5
DGND
R210
1.50K
5
SYNC_SDENB
SYNC_SCL
SYNC_SDA
5
6
2
3
14
8
7
DGND
MULTI-RATE SDI
CABLE EQUALIZER
AGC
AGC
SDI
SDI
Y200
32.768KHZ
1 2
MUTE
MCLADJ
BYPASS
U200
GS2974A
SDI BYPASS RELAY
PWDN
R217
100 OHM
DGND
VCC_D
VCC_A
SDO
SDO
CD
VEE_D
VEE_D
VEE_A
VEE_A
CNTR PAD
1
24
10
9
11
5
6
7
4
XTAL
XTALN
PWDN
13
16
11
10
15
9
12
1
4
17
U203
EL4511CUZ
SYNCIN
HIN
VERTIN
SDENB
SCL
SDA
GNDD1
GNDD2
8
17
+3.3V
18
VCCD1
+3.3V
DGND
14
15
DGND
VCCA1
VCCA2
SDO_P
SDO_N
SYNCLOCK
LEVEL
VERTOUT
HOUT
BACKPORCH
SYNCOUT
VBLANK
ODD/EVEN
GNDA1
GNDA2
13
16
C200
1.0uF
C205
0.1uF
DGND
C209 4.7uF
C213 4.7uF
3
12
22
21
20
19
2
23
HD_CD1
+3.3V
C221
0.1uF
VIDEO SYNC SEPARATOR
MGT_VID1_TX_P
MGT_VID1_TX_N
DGND DGND
RN200
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
+ C220
10uF
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
47 OHM 5%
MGT_VID1_RX_P
MGT_VID1_RX_P
MGT_VID1_RX_N
MGT_VID1_RX_N
+3.3V
+ C218
10uF
DGND DGND
SYNC_LOCK
SYNC_V_OUT
SYNC_H_OUT
SYNC_BACKPORCH
SYNC_SYNC_OUT
SYNC_V_BLANK
SYNC_ODDEVEN
SYNC_LOCK
SYNC_V_OUT
SYNC_H_OUT
SYNC_BACKPORCH
SYNC_SYNC_OUT
SYNC_V_BLANK
SYNC_ODDEVEN
HD_SD1
MGT_VID1_TX_P
MGT_VID1_TX_N
C219
0.1uF
SYNC_LOCK
C210 4.7uF
C214 4.7uF
SYNC_V_OUT
SYNC_H_OUT
SYNC_BACKPORCH
SYNC_SYNC_OUT
SYNC_V_BLANK
SYNC_ODDEVEN
WHT
TP204
ORG
TP205
YEL
TP206
WHT
TP207
RED
TP203
ORG
TP200
YEL
TP201
SYNCLOCK
R208
49.9
DGND
R209
49.9
C216
0.01uF
DDI_P
DDI_N
+3.3V
10
1
2
7
5
8
6
4
MULTI-RATE SDI
CABLE DRIVER
SD/HD
DDI
DDI
R211
750 OHM
U201
GS2978
VCC
SDO
SDO
RSVD NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
DISABLE
RSET VEE
CNTR PAD
TP202
BLK
DGND
R212
21.0K
9
12
11
13
14
15
16
3
17
+3.3V
DGND
C207
0.01uF
R205
75 OHM
DGND
DGND
R214
14.0K
C222
0.022uF
C217
0.01uF
R216
100.0K
L200 5.6nH
R200 75 OHM
R206
75 OHM
+3.3V
DGND
C203 C-NP
C204
4.7uF
L202 5.6nH C211
4.7uF
R202 75 OHM
+3.3V
Q201
MMBT3906
R218
0 OHM
K200B
4
3
R219
R-NP
GRF300-5
DGND
DGND
2
R207
75 OHM
VIDEO TX
3Gbps Max
1
PWDN
J201
2
3
4
5
DGND
EL4511 EXTERNAL RESET: R218 INSTALLED AND R219 NOT INSTALLED
EL4511 INTERNAL RESET: R218 NOT INSTALLED AND R219 INSTALLED
HD-SDI I/O BOARD:
SCHEMATIC: VIDEO I-O
62360.000
(sheet 3 of 17)
BNC7T

J300A
BNC DUAL with CAPACITOR
UPPER
L300
2
1
J303A
BNC DUAL with CAPACITOR
UPPER
L301
2
1
L303
T300
C300 SC937-02
1 5
FERRITE
0.1uF
4 8
CGND
1
2
3
HDR 3
AES_IREFCLK1_1-2
2
DGND
J301
L305
T302
C305 SC937-02
1 5
FERRITE
0.1uF
4 8
2
CGND
DGND
J304
HDR 3
1
2
3
J306A
BNC DUAL with CAPACITOR L307
UPPER
T305
C312 SC937-02
L302
2
1 5
FERRITE
1K.
0.1uF
4 8
1
AES3-id
INPUT 1-2
.
1K
AES3-id
INPUT 3-4
.
1K
AES3-id
INPUT 5-6
.
FERRITE
L304
FERRITE
L306
AES_IREFCLK1_3-4
FERRITE
L308
CGND
1
2
3
HDR 3
AES_IREFCLK1_5-6
2
DGND
J308
C301
0.1uF
R301
75 OHM
C304
0.1uF
TP313
RED
C306
0.1uF
R310
75 OHM
C309
0.1uF
TP328
RED
C313
0.1uF
R313
75 OHM
C314
0.1uF
TP345
RED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
13
14
RX1+
RX1-
RX2+
RX2-
RX3+
RX3-
RX4+
RX4-
U300A
SRC4382IPFB
RXCKI
MUTE
RX1+
RX1-
RX2+
RX2-
RX3+
RX3-
RX4+
RX4-
RXCKI
MUTE
RX1+
RX1-
RX2+
RX2-
RX3+
RX3-
RX4+
RX4-
SDOUTB
SDINB
LRCKB
BCKB
RXCKO
U302A
SRC4382IPFB
RXCKI
MUTE
LOCK
RDY
SDOUTB
SDINB
LRCKB
BCKB
RXCKO
U304A
SRC4382IPFB
LOCK
RDY
SDOUTB
SDINB
LRCKB
BCKB
RXCKO
LOCK
RDY
45
46
47
48
12
11
15
45
46
47
48
12
11
15
45
46
47
48
12
11
15
TP308 WHT
TP305 RED
TP300 ORG
YEL
TP302
R302 49.9
RN300
1
2
3
4
R308
49.9
TP321 WHT
TP318 RED
TP315 ORG
YEL
TP316
1
2
3
4
R311 49.9
R317 49.9
TP339 WHT
TP337 RED
TP334 ORG
YEL
TP335
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
47 OHM 5%
RN301
8
7
6
5
47 OHM 5%
R316 49.9
RN302
8
7
6
5
47 OHM 5%
R319 49.9
RX_LRCK_1-2
RX_BCK_1-2
RXCKO_1-2
AES_IREFCLK2_1-2
DGND
RX_LRCK_3-4
RX_BCK_3-4
RXCKO_3-4
AES_IREFCLK2_3-4
DGND
RX_LRCK_5-6
RX_BCK_5-6
RXCKO_5-6
TP349
RED
DGND
TP347
RED
29
54
53
55
52
41
30
29
54
53
55
52
41
30
AES_IDATA_5-6
29
54
53
55
52
41
30
RCKIB
LRCKIB
BCKIB
SDINB
TDMIB
BYPB
MUTEB
AES_IDATA_3-4
TP348
RED
AES_IDATA_7-8
RCKIB
LRCKIB
BCKIB
SDINB
TDMIB
BYPB
MUTEB
AES_IREFCLK2_5-6
RCKIB
LRCKIB
BCKIB
SDINB
TDMIB
BYPB
MUTEB
U301B
SRC4184IPAG
RATIOB
RDYB
U303B
SRC4184IPAG
LRCKOB
BCKOB
SDOUTB
RATIOB
RDYB
U305B
SRC4184IPAG
51
LRCKOB
50
BCKOB
49
SDOUTB
R306 49.9
LRCKOB
BCKOB
SDOUTB
RATIOB
RDYB
AES_IDATA_7-8
TP306 WHT
TP301 ORG
YEL
TP303
32
31
TP322 WHT
TP317 ORG
YEL
TP319
51
50
49
32
31
51
50
49
R320 49.9
32
31
AES_OLRCK_1-2
AES_OBCK_1-2
AES_ODATA_1-2
R315
49.9
AES_OLRCK_3-4
AES_OBCK_3-4
AES_ODATA_3-4
AES_OLRCK_5-6
AES_OBCK_5-6
AES_ODATA_5-6
AES_ILRCK_1-2
AES_IBCK_1-2
AES_IDATA_1-2
TP312 WHT
TP310 ORG
TP311 YEL
AES_OREFCLK_1-2
AES_IDATA_3-4
TP327 WHT
TP325 ORG
AES_OREFCLK_3-4
YEL
TP326
TP332 WHT
TP330 ORG
AES_OREFCLK_5-6
YEL
TP331
ORG
YEL
WHT
AES_IDATA_5-6
TP341
TP342
TP343
6-84
DGND
DGND
20
59
60
58
61
8
19
AES_ILRCK_3-4
AES_IBCK_3-4
AES_IDATA_3-4
DGND
20
59
60
58
61
8
19
AES_ILRCK_5-6
AES_IBCK_5-6
AES_IDATA_5-6
TP346
BLK
DGND
20
59
60
58
61
8
19
U301A
SRC4184IPAG
RCKIA
LRCKIA
BCKIA
SDINA
TDMIA
BYPA
MUTEA
RCKIA
LRCKIA
BCKIA
SDINA
TDMIA
BYPA
MUTEA
TX_LRCK_1-2
TX_BCK_1-2
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
LRCKOA
BCKOA
SDOUTA
RATIOA
RDYA
TX_MCLK_1-2
TX_LRCK_3-4
TX_BCK_3-4
U303A
SRC4184IPAG
RCKIA
LRCKIA
BCKIA
SDINA
TDMIA
BYPA
MUTEA
TX_MCLK_3-4
62
63
64
17
18
R321 49.9
LRCKOA
BCKOA
SDOUTA
62
63
64
R323 49.9
RATIOA
RDYA
17
18
TX_LRCK_5-6
TX_BCK_5-6
U305A
SRC4184IPAG
TX_MCLK_5-6
LRCKOA
BCKOA
SDOUTA
RATIOA
RDYA
62
63
64
R305 49.9
17
18
TP314
RED
TP329
RED
TP333
RED
ORG
YEL
WHT
40
39
38
37
25
ORG
YEL
WHT
40
39
38
37
25
ORG
YEL
WHT
40
39
38
37
25
TP304
TP307
TP309
SDOUTA
SDINA
LRCKA
BCKA
MCLK
TP320
TP323
TP324
SDINA
LRCKA
BCKA
U300B
SRC4382IPFB
SDOUTA
MCLK
TP336
TP338
TP340
SDINA
LRCKA
BCKA
TX+
TX-
AESOUT
SYNC
BLS
U302B
SRC4382IPFB
SDOUTA
MCLK
TX+
TX-
AESOUT
SYNC
BLS
U304B
SRC4382IPFB
TX+
TX-
AESOUT
SYNC
BLS
32
R303
110.0 OHM
31
R304
0 OHM
34
36
35
R300
210.0 OHM
C302
0.1uF
R309
210.0 OHM
C307
0.1uF
32
R312
110.0 OHM
31
R314
0 OHM
34
36
35
R318
210.0 OHM
C310
0.1uF
32
R322
110.0 OHM
31
R307
0 OHM
34
36
35
4
1
2
T301
SC937-02
4
1
CGND
DGND
J302
HDR 3
2
T303
SC937-02
4
1
1
2
3
CGND
DGND
J305
HDR 3
2
T304
SC937-02
1
2
3
CGND
DGND
J307
HDR 3
1
2
3
AES3-id
OUTPUT 1-2
J300B
DGND L312 BNC DUAL with CAPACITOR
LOWER
C303
L316
8
4
FERRITE
0.1uF .
5
1K
FERRITE
L313
3
AES3-id
OUTPUT 3-4
J303B
DGND L314 BNC DUAL with CAPACITOR
LOWER
C308
L317
8
4
FERRITE
0.1uF .
5
1K
FERRITE
L315
J306B
DGND L309 BNC DUAL with CAPACITOR
LOWER
C311
L311
8
4
FERRITE
0.1uF 1K.
5
FERRITE
L310
.
.
.
3
AES3-id
OUTPUT 5-6
HD-SDI I/O BOARD:
SCHEMATIC: AES3id I-O
62360.000
(sheet 4 of 17)
3

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-85
SDI AUDIO IN CH 1-2
SDI_IREF_CLK_1-2
SDI_ILRCK_1-2
SDI_IBCK_1-2
SDI_IDATA_1-2
TP401 WHT
TP400 RED
TP402 ORG
YEL
TP403
SDI AUDIO IN CH 3-4
SDI_IREF_CLK_3-4
SDI_ILRCK_3-4
SDI_IBCK_3-4
SDI_IDATA_3-4
TP405 WHT
TP404 RED
TP445 ORG
YEL
TP446
SDI AUDIO IN CH 5-6
SDI_IREF_CLK_5-6
SDI_ILRCK_5-6
SDI_IBCK_5-6
SDI_IDATA_5-6
TP407 WHT
TP406 RED
TP408 ORG
YEL
TP409
SDI AUDIO IN CH 7-8
SDI_IREF_CLK_7-8
SDI_ILRCK_7-8
SDI_IBCK_7-8
SDI_IDATA_7-8
TP411 WHT
TP410 RED
TP447 ORG
YEL
TP448
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
20
59
60
58
61
8
19
29
54
53
55
52
41
30
20
59
60
58
61
8
19
29
54
53
55
52
41
30
U400A
SRC4184IPAG
RCKIA
LRCKIA
BCKIA
SDINA
TDMIA
BYPA
MUTEA
RCKIB
LRCKIB
BCKIB
SDINB
TDMIB
BYPB
MUTEB
RCKIB
LRCKIB
BCKIB
SDINB
TDMIB
BYPB
MUTEB
LRCKOA
BCKOA
SDOUTA
RATIOA
RDYA
SLAVE/SLAVE
U400B
SRC4184IPAG
RCKIA
LRCKIA
BCKIA
SDINA
TDMIA
BYPA
MUTEA
SDI_IN_DATA_3-4
LRCKOB
BCKOB
SDOUTB
RATIOB
RDYB
SLAVE/SLAVE
SDI_IN_DATA_5-6
U401A
SRC4184IPAG
SDI_IN_DATA_7-8
LRCKOA
BCKOA
SDOUTA
RATIOA
RDYA
SLAVE/SLAVE
U401B
SRC4184IPAG
LRCKOB
BCKOB
SDOUTB
RATIOB
RDYB
SLAVE/SLAVE
62
63
64
17
18
51
50
49
32
31
62
63
64
17
18
51
50
49
32
31
R400 49.9
R405 49.9
SDI_IN_LRCK_5-6
SDI_IN_BCK_5-6
R406 49.9
R407 49.9
ORG
TP416
YEL
TP417
WHT
TP415
SDI_IN_LRCK_1-2
SDI_IN_BCK_1-2
SDI_IN_DATA_1-2
WHT
TP412
ORG
TP449
YEL
TP450
SDI_IN_LRCK_3-4
SDI_IN_BCK_3-4
WHT
TP413
ORG
TP418
WHT
TP419
SDI_IN_LRCK_5-6
SDI_IN_BCK_5-6
WHT
TP414
ORG
TP451
YEL
TP452
SDI_IN_LRCK_7-8
SDI_IN_BCK_7-8
TP420
BLK
DGND
SDI_OREF_CLK_1-2
SDI_OLRCK_1-2
SDI_OBCK_1-2
SDI_ODATA_1-2
SDI_OREF_CLK_3-4
SDI_OLRCK_3-4
SDI_OBCK_3-4
SDI_ODATA_3-4
SDI_OREF_CLK_5-6
SDI_OLRCK_5-6
SDI_OBCK_5-6
SDI_ODATA_5-6
SDI_OREF_CLK_7-8
SDI_OLRCK_7-8
SDI_OBCK_7-8
SDI_ODATA_7-8
TP424 WHT
TP421 RED
TP422 ORG
YEL
TP423
TP428 WHT
TP425 RED
TP426 ORG
YEL
TP427
TP432 WHT
TP429 RED
TP430 ORG
YEL
TP431
TP436 WHT
TP433 RED
TP434 ORG
YEL
TP435
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
20
59
60
58
61
8
19
29
54
53
55
52
41
30
20
59
60
58
61
8
19
29
54
53
55
52
41
30
U402A
SRC4184IPAG
RCKIA
LRCKIA
BCKIA
SDINA
TDMIA
BYPA
MUTEA
RCKIB
LRCKIB
BCKIB
SDINB
TDMIB
BYPB
MUTEB
LRCKOA
BCKOA
SDOUTA
RATIOA
RDYA
U402B
SRC4184IPAG
RCKIA
LRCKIA
BCKIA
SDINA
TDMIA
BYPA
MUTEA
LRCKOB
BCKOB
SDOUTB
RATIOB
RDYB
U403A
SRC4184IPAG
RCKIB
LRCKIB
BCKIB
SDINB
TDMIB
BYPB
MUTEB
SLAVE/SLAVE
SLAVE/SLAVE
LRCKOA
BCKOA
SDOUTA
RATIOA
RDYA
SLAVE/SLAVE
U403B
SRC4184IPAG
LRCKOB
BCKOB
SDOUTB
RATIOB
RDYB
SLAVE/SLAVE
62
63
64
17
18
51
50
49
32
31
62
63
64
17
18
51
50
49
32
31
R401 49.9
R402 49.9
R403 49.9
R404 49.9
SDI AUDIO OUT CH 1-2
ORG
TP440
TP441
WHT
TP439
YEL
YEL
TP437
ORG
TP454
TP453
ORG
WHT
TP443
TP444
WHT
TP442
YEL
SDI_OUT_LRCK_1-2
SDI_OUT_BCK_1-2
SDI_OUT_DATA_1-2
SDI AUDIO OUT CH 3-4
SDI_OUT_LRCK_3-4
SDI_OUT_BCK_3-4
SDI_OUT_DATA_3-4
SDI AUDIO OUT CH 5-6
SDI_OUT_LRCK_5-6
SDI_OUT_BCK_5-6
SDI_OUT_DATA_5-6
SDI AUDIO OUT CH 7-8
SDI_OUT_LRCK_7-8
SDI_OUT_BCK_7-8
SDI_OUT_DATA_7-8
ORG
TP438
YEL
TP455
ORG
TP456
HD-SDI I/O BOARD:
SCHEMATIC: SDI I-O
62360.000
(sheet 5 of 17)

IN-CIRCUIT SERIAL
PROGRAMMING INTERFACE
PIC_RESET
MCLR*
3.3V
GND
RB7
RB6
J501
1
2
3
4
5
HDR 1X5
1
2
R512
2.49K
SYNC_SCL
SYNC_SDA
SYNC_SDENB
D502
BAT54C
+3.3V
DGND
3
R513
2.49K
YEL
ORG
WHT
+PIC_PWR
DGND
C500
0.1uF
R501
30.1K
R500
49.9K
TP516
TP517
TP523
DGND
MCLR
RB7
RB6
MCLR
SPI_SDO
SPI_SDI
SPI_SCK
PIC_VSYNC
PIC_IN_METADATA_SDI
HOST_RX_A
HOST_TX_A
PIC_IN_METADATA_SS
PIC_IN_METADATA_SCK
PMALL
PIC_TX_C
PIC_RX_C
PIC_RX_D
PIC_TX_D
PULSE
PIC_VSYNC
PIC_IN_METADATA_SDI
RB6
RB7
PULSE
PMCS2
PMALL
PMRD
PMWR
SPI_SCK
SPI_SDO
SPI_SDI
PIC_VSYNC
+5VD
R502
10.0K
PIC_IN_METADATA_SS
PIC_RTSB_DE
PIC_RTSB_RE
R503 1.0K
R504 1.0K
R505
1.0K
RED
YEL
WHT
ORG
YEL
ORG
WHT
RED
W500
PIC STATUS
D500
YEL LED
Q500
MMBT3904
DGND
TP500
TP501
TP502
TP503
TP505
TP506
TP504
TP507
PMD5
PMD6
PMD7
SPI_SDI
PIC_RTSC_DE
PIC_RTSC_RE
PIC_IN_METADATA_SCK
PMALL
PROCESSED METADATA OUT
SPI_SDO
SPI_SCK
NP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
21
22
23
24
27
28
29
30
31
32
U500
PIC24FJ128GA106-I/PT
PMD5/CN63/RE5
PMD6/SCL3/CN64/RE6
PMD7/SDA3/CN65/RE7
PMA5/RP21/C1IND/CN8/RG6
RP26/PMA4/C1INC/CN9/RG7
RP26/PMA4 A /C1INC/CN9/RG7
PMA3/RP19/C2IND/CN10/RG8
MCLR
RP27/PMA2/C2INC/CN11/RG9
PGEC3/RP18/C1INA/CN7/AN5/RB5
PGEC3/RP18/C1INA/ A CN7/A / N5/RB5
PGED3/RP28/C1INB/AN4/CN6/RB4
PGED3/RP28/C1INB/A / N4/CN6/RB4
C2INA/AN3/CN5/RB3
C2INA/ A/ AN3/CN5/RB3
RP13/C2INB/AN2/CN4/RB2
RP13/C2INB/A / N2/CN4/RB2
PGEC1/RP1/VREF-/AN1/CN3/RB1
PGEC1/RP1/V / REF-/A / N1/CN3/RB1
PGED1/RP0/PMA6/VREF+/AN0/CN2/RB0
PGED1/RP0/PMA6/V / REF+/A / N0/CN2/RB0
+5VD
19
AVDD
AVSS
20
10
26
38
VDD
VDD
VDD
DGND
VSS
VSS
VSS
9
25
41
57
56
ENVREG
VCAP/VDDCORE
10uF
+ C503
C3INA/CN16/RD7
C3INA/ A CN16/RD7
C3INB/CN15/RD6
PMRD/RP20/CN14/RD5
PMWR/RP25/CN13/RD4
PMWR/ R RP25/CN13/RD4
PMBE/RP22/CN52/RD3
RP23/CN51/RD2
RP24/CN50/RD1
PGEC2/AN6/RP6/CN24/RB6
PGEC2/A / N6/RP6/CN24/RB6
SOSCO/C3INC/RPI37/CN0/T1CK/RC14
SOSCO/ O C3INC/RPI37/CN0/T1CK/ K RC14
PGED2/RP7/AN7/CN25/RB7
PGED2/RP7/A / N7/CN25/RB7
SOSCI/C3IND/CN1/RC13
RP11/CN49/RD0
RP12/PMCS1/CN56/RD11
RP8/AN8/CN26/RB8
RP8/A / N8/CN26/RB8
RP3/PMCS2/CN55/RD10
PMA7/RP9/AN9/CN27/RB9
PMA7/RP9/A / N9/CN27/RB9
RP4/CN54/RD9
TMS/PMA13/AN10/CVREF/CN28/RB10
TMS/PMA13/A / N10/CVREF/CN28/RB10
TDO/PMA12/AN11/CN29/RB11
TDO/ O PMA12/A / N11/CN29/RB11
TCK/PMA11/AN12/CTED2/CN30/RB12
TC T K/ K PMA11/A / N12/CTED2/CN30/RB12
RP2/RTCC/CN53/RD8
RP2/RTC T C/ C CN53/RD8
OSC2/CLKO/CN22/RC15
OSC2/CLKO/ O CN22/RC15
OSC1/CLKIN/CN23/RC12
TDI/PMA10/AN13/CTED1/CN31/RB13
TDI/PMA10/A / N13/CTED1/CN31/RB13
SCL1/CN83/RG2
RP14/CTPLS/PMA1/AN14/CN32/RB14
RP14/CTPLS/PMA1/A / N14/CN32/RB14
SDA1/CN84/RG3
RP29/PMA0/AN15/REFO/CN12/RB15
RP29/PMA0/A / N15/REFO/ O CN12/RB15
RPI45/SCK1/INT0/CN72/RF6
RPI45/SCK1/INT0 T /CN72/RF6
PMA9/RP10/SDA2/CN17/RF4
RP30/CN70/RF2
PMA8/RP17/SCL2/CN18/RF5 RP16/CN71/RF3
R506
1.0K
+3.3V
1
2
D501
BAT54C
BYPASS CAPACITORS
U500 PINS 10,19,26,&38
C501 C502
0.1uF 0.1uF
PMD4/CN62/RE4
PMD3/CN61/RE3
PMD2/CN60/RE2
PMD1/CN59/RE1
PMD0/CN58/RE0
CN69/RF1
CN68/RF0
DGND
C504
0.1uF
6-86
PIC Parallel Port Configuration:
Master Mode
Read Timing = 8-Bit Data, Partially Multiplexed Address
Write Timing = 8-Bit Data, Partially Multiplexed Address
+PIC_PWR
3
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
40
39
37
36
35
34
33
PIC_24_576MHZ
C505
0.1uF
PMD4
PMD3
PMD2
PMD1
PMD0
NP
NP
ORG
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SDO
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SCK
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SS
PIC_IN_METADATA_SDI
PIC_IN_METADATA_SCK
PIC_IN_METADATA_SS
W501
W502
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
RED
PMD[7..0]
SPI_SEL_A1
SPI_SEL_A0
PMRD
PMWR
METADATA SERIAL IN PIC_RX_B
PMCS2
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SCK
PIC_TX_B
TP508
+PIC_PWR
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SS
SYNC_SDENB
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SDO
WHT
YEL
ORG
WHT
YEL
ORG
PIC_24_576MHZ
SYNC_SCL
SYNC_SDA
SPI_SEL_A2
SPI_SEL_A3
TP509
TP510
TP511
TP512
TP513
TP514
TP515
TP518
BLK
DGND
PMD[7..0]
PMRD
PMWR
PIC_FPGA_SPARE1
PIC_FPGA_SPARE0
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SS
RSTIO
SYNC_SDENB
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SDO
PMCS2
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SCK
PIC_24_576MHZ
SYNC_SCL
SYNC_SDA
PIC_RX_B
PIC_TX_B
PIC_RTSB_DE
PIC_RTSB_RE
PIC_RX_C
PIC_TX_C
PIC_RTSC_DE
PIC_RTSC_RE
TP519 ORG
TP520 WHT
TP521 ORG
TP522 WHT
SPI_SEL_A0
SPI_SEL_A1
SPI_SEL_A2
SPI_SEL_A3
SPI_SEL_A0
SPI_SEL_A1
SPI_SEL_A2
SPI_SEL_A3
+3.3V
U501
SN74AHC138PWR
+3.3V
R507
10.0K
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
A
B
C
G2A
G2B
G1
U502
SN74AHC138PWR
DGND
PIC_INT
A
B
C
G2A
G2B
G1
+3.3V
16
8
VCC
GND
DGND
+3.3V
16
8
VCC
GND
DGND
R508 1.0K
R509 1.0K
C506
0.1uF
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
C507
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
7
0.1uF
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
7
+5VD
R510
10.0K
DGND
SPI
DGND
R511
10.0K
SPI_DEV_CS1
SPI_DEV_CS2
SPI_DEV_CS3
SPI_DEV_CS4
SPI_DEV_CS5
SPI_DEV_CS6
SPI_DEV_CS7
SPI_DEV_CS8
SPI_DEV_CS9
SPI_DEV_CS10
SPI_DEV_CS11
SPI_DEV_CS12
SPI_DEV_CS13
SPI_DEV_CS14
SPI_DEV_CS15
RS485-SDI
INTERFACE
J502
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
HDR 10X2 SH
DGND
HD-SDI I/O BOARD:
SCHEMATIC: PIC CONTROLLER
62360.000
(sheet 6 of 17)

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-87
+5VD
R614
4.75K
W600
6
7
U601
LM20134MH
PVIN
SW
PVIN
SW
8
9
L601
3.3uH
TP606
RED
JMP_1.8V
+1.8V
C605
47uF/10V
LOW
ESR
+5VD
+5VA
+
DGND
C604
47uF/10V
LOW
ESR
+
C600
10uF
AGND AGND
+15V
+ C601
10uF
+
DGND
GENLOC_PWR_GOOD
AGND AGND
C609
0.1uF
C608
0.1uF
DGND
DGND
R601
1.0 Ohm
DGND
R603
976 OHM
DGND
+15V -15V +5VA
+5VA -15V +15V +5VD
J600
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
HDR 10X2 SH
AGND DGND
AGND
C602
0.1uF
C603
0.1uF
C613
0.1uF
R605
1.0 Ohm
C635
0.1uF
+5VD
+
C606
10uF
DGND DGND
-15V
DGND
C607
+
10uF
AGND AGND
C610
0.1uF
C611
0.1uF
C615
4700pF
R615
4.75K
R616
2.37K
C636
2200pF
W601
DGND
DGND DGND
POWER SUPPLY INTERFACE
5VA (J700 PINS 3,4) NOT
USED ON THIS ASSEMBLY.
+5VD
+5VA
+15V
-15V
12
14
16
4
5
10
11
6
7
12
14
16
4
5
10
11
EN
AVIN
SYNC
COMP
NC
PGND
PGND
RED
BLK
ORG
WHT
YEL
BLK
DGND
AGND
VCC
SS/TRK
TP600
TP601
TP602
TP603
TP604
TP605
FB
PGOOD
AGND
EP
U604
LM20134MH
PVIN
PVIN
EN
AVIN
SYNC
COMP
NC
PGND
PGND
SW
SW
FB
PGOOD
VCC
SS/TRK
AGND
EP
2
3
13
1
15
17
8
9
DGND DGND
2
3
13
1
15
17
C617
6800pF
C637
6800pF
W602
DGND
W603
DGND
TP608
BLK
DGND
DGND
L605
3.3uH
DGND
DGND
C619
1.0uF
C638
1.0uF
DGND
DGND
DGND
R606
12.4K
R607
10.0K
R617
30.9K
R618
10.0K
J602
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28
29 30
31 32
33 34
35 36
37 38
39 40
HDR 20X2 SH
J601
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28
29 30
31 32
33 34
35 36
37 38
39 40
HDR 20X2 SH
+ C621
100uF/6.3V
LOW
ESR
DGND DGND
DSP INTERFACE
DIN_DATA1
DIN_DATA2
DIN_DATA3
DSP INTERFACE
IN_BCLK
IN_FCLK
AOUT_DATA
AOUT_BCLK
AOUT_FCLK
PILOT_DATA
PILOT_BCLK
PILOT_WCLK
COMP_DATA
COMP_BCLK
COMP_WCLK
18_432MHZ
36_864MHZ
24_576MHZ
33_8688MHZ
16_384MHZ
DOUT_DATA1
DOUT_DATA2
DOUT_DATA3
DOUT_BCLK
DOUT_FCLK
TP607
RED
+ C639
100uF/6.3V
LOW
ESR
DGND DGND
1
C623
0.1uF
1
2
JMP_3.3V
C640
0.1uF
2
L602
680uH
L603
680uH
DOUT_DATA1
DOUT_DATA2
DOUT_DATA3
DOUT_BCLK
DOUT_FCLK
+15V
-15V
+3.3V
AGND
DGND
DGND
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
U603
TP623 JMP_2.5V
LM20134MH
L604
RED
6
8
+5VD PVIN
SW
+2.5V
7
9
W604
PVIN
SW
3.3uH
C625
47uF/10V
LOW
ESR
+
DGND
C626
47uF/10V
LOW
ESR
+
DGND
DIN_DATA1
DIN_DATA2
DIN_DATA3
IN_BCLK
IN_FCLK
AOUT_DATA
AOUT_BCLK
AOUT_FCLK
PILOT_DATA
PILOT_BCLK
PILOT_WCLK
COMP_DATA
COMP_BCLK
COMP_WCLK
18_432MHZ
36_864MHZ
33_8688MHZ
16_384MHZ
RN600
1.0K OHM 5%
C627
0.1uF
C628
0.1uF
DGND
DGND
CGND
R608
1.0 Ohm
C629
0.1uF
DGND
+1.0V_PGOOD
R609
1.0 Ohm
DGND
R619
4.75K
R610
1.50K
R611
402 OHM
C632
6800pF
DGND
DGND DGND
DGND DGND
18_432MHZ
PIC_24_576MHZ
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11 M12
12
14
16
4
5
10
11
14
16
4
5
10
11
EN
AVIN
SYNC
COMP
NC
PGND
PGND
AVIN
SYNC
COMP
NC
PGND
PGND
FB
PGOOD
VCC
SS/TRK
AGND
EP
PGOOD
VCC
SS/TRK
AGND
EP
2
3
13
1
15
17
3
13
1
15
17
+5VD
C633
0.1uF
DGND
2
3 5
DGND
DGND
+1.0V_PGOOD
DGND
U602
74HC1G14
4
DGND
DGND
C612
1.0uF
C616
1.0uF
DIN_DATA1
DIN_DATA2
DIN_DATA3
IN_BCLK
IN_FCLK
AOUT_DATA
AOUT_BCLK
AOUT_FCLK
PILOT_DATA
PILOT_BCLK
PILOT_WCLK
COMP_DATA
COMP_BCLK
COMP_WCLK
R612
75 OHM
DGND
DGND
R613
21.0K
R600
10.0K
R602
2.49K
R604
10.0K
HOST_RX_A
HOST_TX_A
PIC_RESET
WHT
WHT
WHT
YEL
ORG
WHT
YEL
ORG
WHT
YEL
ORG
WHT
YEL
ORG
+ C618
100uF/6.3V
LOW
ESR
DGND DGND
+5VD
DGND
W605
6
7
U600
LM20134MH
PVIN
SW
PVIN
SW
8
9
L600
3.3uH
TP624
RED
JMP_1.0V
+1.0V
R620
4.75K
12
EN
FB
2
C630
0.1uF
+3.3V
C641
0.1uF
DGND
R621
2
210.0 OHM
R622
210.0 OHM
2
3 5
DGND
+3.3V
3 5
DGND
C631
3300pF
U605
74HC1G14
4
U606
74HC1G14
4
R623
49.9
R624
49.9
FPGA_24_576MHZ
C634
6800pF
C614
6800pF
W606
+ C620
100uF/6.3V
LOW
ESR
DGND DGND
TP609
TP610
TP611
TP612
TP613
TP614
TP615
TP616
TP617
TP618
TP619
TP620
TP621
TP622
SIN
SOUT
1
C622
0.1uF
1
C624
0.1uF
BASEBOARD
INTERFACE
DGND
18_432MHZ
36_864MHZ
24_576MHZ
33_8688MHZ
16_384MHZ
DOUT_DATA1
DOUT_DATA2
DOUT_DATA3
DOUT_BCLK
DOUT_FCLK
2
2
J603
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
HDR 14
RED
RED
RED
RED
RED
WHT
WHT
WHT
YEL
ORG
TP625
TP626
TP627
TP628
TP629
TP630
TP631
TP632
TP633
TP634
HD-SDI I/O BOARD:
SCHEMATIC: POWER SUPPLIES & INTERFACE
62360.000
(sheet 7 of 17)

6-88 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
BANK 1
IO_L0P_A19_1
G15
IO_L0N_A18_1
G16
IO_L1P_A17_1
H13
IO_L1N_A16_1
G14
IO_L2P_A15_D31_1
G17
IO_L2N_A14_D30_1
F17
IO_L3P_A13_D29_1
F15
IO_L3N_A12_D28_1
F14
IO_L4P_A11_D27_1
F18
IO_L4N_VREF_A10_D26_1
G19
IO_L5P_A9_D25_1
F13
IO_L5N_A8_D24_1
G12
IO_L6P_A7_D23_1
H18
IO_L6N_A6_D22_1
H19
IO_L7P_A5_D21_1
G11
IO_L7N_A4_D20_1
H11
IO_L8P_CC_A3_D19_1
G20
IO_L8N_CC_A2_D18_1
H21
IO_L9P_CC_A1_D17_1
G10
IO_L9N_CC_A0_D16_1
H9
U700A
XC5VLX30T-1FFG665C
BANK 2
IO_L0P_CC_RS1_2
W11
IO_L0N_CC_RS0_2
Y10
IO_L1P_CC_A25_2
Y20
IO_L1N_CC_A24_2
AA19
IO_L2P_A23_2
AA10
IO_L2N_A22_2
Y11
IO_L3P_A21_2
AA18
IO_L3N_A20_2
Y18
IO_L4P_FCS_B_2
Y12
IO_L4N_VREF_FOE_B_MOSI_2
AA12
IO_L5P_FWE_B_2
AA17
IO_L5N_CSO_B_2
Y17
IO_L6P_D7_2
AA13
IO_L6N_D6_2
AA14
IO_L7P_D5_2
Y16
IO_L7N_D4_2
W16
IO_L8P_D3_2
Y13
IO_L8N_D2_FS2_2
W14
IO_L9P_D1_FS1_2
Y15
IO_L9N_D0_FS0_2
AA15
U700B
XC5VLX30T-1FFG665C
BANK 3
IO_L0P_CC_GC_3
D15
IO_L0N_CC_GC_3
E15
IO_L1P_CC_GC_3
D16
IO_L1N_CC_GC_3
E16
IO_L2P_GC_VRN_3
D14
IO_L2N_GC_VRP_3
D13
IO_L3P_GC_3
E17
IO_L3N_GC_3
D18
IO_L4P_GC_3
E13
IO_L4N_GC_VREF_3
E12
IO_L5P_GC_3
E18
IO_L5N_GC_3
F19
IO_L6P_GC_3
F12
IO_L6N_GC_3
E11
IO_L7P_GC_3
E20
IO_L7N_GC_3
E21
IO_L8P_GC_3
E10
IO_L8N_GC_3
F10
IO_L9P_GC_3
F20
IO_L9N_GC_3
G21
U700C
XC5VLX30T-1FFG665C
BANK 4
IO_L0P_GC_D15_4
Y21
IO_L0N_GC_D14_4
AA20
IO_L1P_GC_D13_4
AB10
IO_L1N_GC_D12_4
AB11
IO_L2P_GC_D11_4
AB21
IO_L2N_GC_D10_4
AB20
IO_L3P_GC_D9_4
AC11
IO_L3N_GC_D8_4
AB12
IO_L4P_GC_4
AB19
IO_L4N_GC_VREF_4
AC19
IO_L5P_GC_4
AC12
IO_L5N_GC_4
AC13
IO_L6P_GC_4
AC18
IO_L6N_GC_4
AB17
IO_L7P_GC_VRN_4
AB14
IO_L7N_GC_VRP_4
AC14
IO_L8P_CC_GC_4
AC17
IO_L8N_CC_GC_4
AB16
IO_L9P_CC_GC_4
AB15
IO_L9N_CC_GC_4
AC16
U700D
XC5VLX30T-1FFG665C
BANK 11
IO_L0P_11
E26
IO_L0N_11
E25
IO_L1P_11
F25
IO_L1N_11
G26
IO_L2P_11
H26
IO_L2N_11
G25
IO_L3P_11
F24
IO_L3N_11
G24
IO_L4P_11
E23
IO_L4N_VREF_11
E22
IO_L5P_11
F23
IO_L5N_11
F22
IO_L6P_11
G22
IO_L6N_11
H22
IO_L7P_11
H23
IO_L7N_11
J23
IO_L8P_CC_11
J21
IO_L8N_CC_11
K21
IO_L9P_CC_11
K22
IO_L9N_CC_11
K23
IO_L10P_CC_SM15P_11
L23
IO_L10N_CC_SM15N_11
L22
IO_L11P_CC_SM14P_11
M21
IO_L11N_CC_SM14N_11
N21
IO_L12P_VRN_11
H24
IO_L12N_VRP_11
J24
IO_L13P_11
J25
IO_L13N_11
J26
IO_L14P_11
K26
IO_L14N_VREF_11
L25
IO_L15P_SM13P_11
L24
IO_L15N_SM13N_11
K25
IO_L16P_SM12P_11
N26
IO_L16N_SM12N_11
M26
IO_L17P_SM11P_11
M25
IO_L17N_SM11N_11
M24
IO_L18P_SM10P_11
N24
IO_L18N_SM10N_11
N23
IO_L19P_SM9P_11
N22
IO_L19N_SM9N_11
M22
U700E
XC5VLX30T-1FFG665C
BANK 12
IO_L0P_12
Y6
IO_L0N_12
Y5
IO_L1P_12
G6
IO_L1N_12
H6
IO_L2P_12
Y4
IO_L2N_12
W4
IO_L3P_12
G5
IO_L3N_12
F5
IO_L4P_12
W5
IO_L4N_VREF_12
W6
IO_L5P_12
G4
IO_L5N_12
H4
IO_L6P_12
V6
IO_L6N_12
V7
IO_L7P_12
J5
IO_L7N_12
J6
IO_L8P_CC_12
U7
IO_L8N_CC_12
T8
IO_L9P_CC_12
K5
IO_L9N_CC_12
L5
IO_L10P_CC_12
K6
IO_L10N_CC_12
K7
IO_L11P_CC_12
U6
IO_L11N_CC_12
U5
IO_L12P_VRN_12
K8
IO_L12N_VRP_12
L7
IO_L13P_12
T5
IO_L13N_12
R5
IO_L14P_12
M7
IO_L14N_VREF_12
L8
IO_L15P_12
R6
IO_L15N_12
T7
IO_L16P_12
P6
IO_L16N_12
N6
IO_L17P_12
M6
IO_L17N_12
N7
IO_L18P_12
N8
IO_L18N_12
P8
IO_L19P_12
R8
IO_L19N_12
R7
U700F
XC5VLX30T-1FFG665C
BANK 13
IO_L0P_SM8P_13
P26
IO_L0N_SM8N_13
R26
IO_L1P_SM7P_13
P25
IO_L1N_SM7N_13
R25
IO_L2P_SM6P_13
P24
IO_L2N_SM6N_13
P23
IO_L3P_SM5P_13
R23
IO_L3N_SM5N_13
R22
IO_L4P_13
U26
IO_L4N_VREF_13
V26
IO_L5P_SM4P_13
U25
IO_L5N_SM4N_13
T25
IO_L6P_SM3P_13
T24
IO_L6N_SM3N_13
T23
IO_L7P_SM2P_13
U24
IO_L7N_SM2N_13
V24
IO_L8P_CC_SM1P_13
W26
IO_L8N_CC_SM1N_13
W25
IO_L9P_CC_SM0P_13
W24
IO_L9N_CC_SM0N_13
V23
IO_L10P_CC_13
AA22
IO_L10N_CC_13
Y22
IO_L11P_CC_13
Y23
IO_L11N_CC_13
W23
IO_L12P_VRN_13
Y26
IO_L12N_VRP_13
Y25
IO_L13P_13
AA25
IO_L13N_13
AB26
IO_L14P_13
AB25
IO_L14N_VREF_13
AA24
IO_L15P_13
AB24
IO_L15N_13
AA23
IO_L16P_13
P21
IO_L16N_13
R21
IO_L17P_13
T22
IO_L17N_13
U22
IO_L18P_13
U21
IO_L18N_13
V22
IO_L19P_13
V21
IO_L19N_13
W21
U700G
XC5VLX30T-1FFG665C
BANK 15
IO_L0P_15
C13
IO_L0N_15
C14
IO_L1P_15
B14
IO_L1N_15
A13
IO_L2P_15
A14
IO_L2N_15
A15
IO_L3P_15
B15
IO_L3N_15
C16
IO_L4P_15
B16
IO_L4N_VREF_15
C17
IO_L5P_15
B17
IO_L5N_15
A17
IO_L6P_15
A18
IO_L6N_15
A19
IO_L7P_15
B19
IO_L7N_15
C18
IO_L8P_CC_15
A20
IO_L8N_CC_15
B20
IO_L9P_CC_15
C19
IO_L9N_CC_15
D19
IO_L10P_CC_15
D21
IO_L10N_CC_15
D20
IO_L11P_CC_15
B21
IO_L11N_CC_15
C21
IO_L12P_VRN_15
D23
IO_L12N_VRP_15
C22
IO_L13P_15
B22
IO_L13N_15
A22
IO_L14P_15
A23
IO_L14N_VREF_15
A24
IO_L15P_15
B24
IO_L15N_15
C23
IO_L16P_15
D24
IO_L16N_15
C24
IO_L17P_15
B25
IO_L17N_15
A25
IO_L18P_15
B26
IO_L18N_15
C26
IO_L19P_15
D26
IO_L19N_15
D25
U700H
XC5VLX30T-1FFG665C
BANK 16
IO_L0P_16
H7
IO_L0N_16
G7
IO_L1P_16
F7
IO_L1N_16
F8
IO_L2P_16
F9
IO_L2N_16
G9
IO_L3P_16
H8
IO_L3N_16
J8
IO_L4P_16
A9
IO_L4N_VREF_16
A8
IO_L5P_16
E8
IO_L5N_16
E7
IO_L6P_16
B9
IO_L6N_16
C8
IO_L7P_16
E6
IO_L7N_16
D6
IO_L8P_CC_16
C9
IO_L8N_CC_16
D8
IO_L9P_CC_16
C7
IO_L9N_CC_16
C6
IO_L10P_CC_16
A7
IO_L10N_CC_16
B7
IO_L11P_CC_16
D9
IO_L11N_CC_16
D10
IO_L12P_VRN_16
B6
IO_L12N_VRP_16
A5
IO_L13P_16
B10
IO_L13N_16
A10
IO_L14P_16
A4
IO_L14N_VREF_16
A3
IO_L15P_16
B11
IO_L15N_16
A12
IO_L16P_16
B4
IO_L16N_16
B5
IO_L17P_16
B12
IO_L17N_16
C12
IO_L18P_16
D5
IO_L18N_16
E5
IO_L19P_16
C11
IO_L19N_16
D11
U700I
XC5VLX30T-1FFG665C
BANK 17
IO_L0P_17
AC26
IO_L0N_17
AD26
IO_L1P_17
AD25
IO_L1N_17
AD24
IO_L2P_17
AE25
IO_L2N_17
AE26
IO_L3P_17
AF25
IO_L3N_17
AF24
IO_L4P_17
AF23
IO_L4N_VREF_17
AE23
IO_L5P_17
AE22
IO_L5N_17
AD23
IO_L6P_17
AC24
IO_L6N_17
AC23
IO_L7P_17
AC22
IO_L7N_17
AB22
IO_L8P_CC_17
AF22
IO_L8N_CC_17
AE21
IO_L9P_CC_17
AF20
IO_L9N_CC_17
AE20
IO_L10P_CC_17
AD19
IO_L10N_CC_17
AD20
IO_L11P_CC_17
AC21
IO_L11N_CC_17
AD21
IO_L12P_VRN_17
AF19
IO_L12N_VRP_17
AF18
IO_L13P_17
AE18
IO_L13N_17
AD18
IO_L14P_17
AE17
IO_L14N_VREF_17
AF17
IO_L15P_17
AE16
IO_L15N_17
AD16
IO_L16P_17
AD15
IO_L16N_17
AE15
IO_L17P_17
AF15
IO_L17N_17
AF14
IO_L18P_17
AF13
IO_L18N_17
AE13
IO_L19P_17
AD13
IO_L19N_17
AD14
U700J
XC5VLX30T-1FFG665C
BANK 18
IO_L0P_18
AF12
IO_L0N_18
AE12
IO_L1P_18
V8
IO_L1N_18
V9
IO_L2P_18
AE11
IO_L2N_18
AD11
IO_L3P_18
W9
IO_L3N_18
W8
IO_L4P_18
AD10
IO_L4N_VREF_18
AE10
IO_L5P_18
Y7
IO_L5N_18
Y8
IO_L6P_18
AF9
IO_L6N_18
AF10
IO_L7P_18
AA7
IO_L7N_18
AA8
IO_L8P_CC_18
AF7
IO_L8N_CC_18
AF8
IO_L9P_CC_18
AA5
IO_L9N_CC_18
AB5
IO_L10P_CC_18
AB6
IO_L10N_CC_18
AB7
IO_L11P_CC_18
AE8
IO_L11N_CC_18
AE7
IO_L12P_VRN_18
AC6
IO_L12N_VRP_18
AD5
IO_L13P_18
AE6
IO_L13N_18
AF5
IO_L14P_18
AE5
IO_L14N_VREF_18
AD4
IO_L15P_18
AF4
IO_L15N_18
AF3
IO_L16P_18
AD6
IO_L16N_18
AC7
IO_L17P_18
AC8
IO_L17N_18
AD8
IO_L18P_18
AD9
IO_L18N_18
AC9
IO_L19P_18
AB9
IO_L19N_18
AA9
U700K
XC5VLX30T-1FFG665C
MGTTXP0_112
H2
MGTTXN0_112
J2
MGTRXP0_112
J1
MGTRXN0_112
K1
MGTRXN1_112
L1
MGTREFCLKN_112
K3
MGTRXP1_112
M1
MGTREFCLKP_112
K4
MGTTXN1_112
M2
MGTTXP1_112
N2
MGTRREF_112
P4
MGTTXP0_114
P2
MGTTXN0_114
R2
MGTRXP0_114
R1
MGTRXN0_114
T1
MGTRXN1_114
U1
MGTREFCLKN_114
T3
MGTRXP1_114
V1
MGTREFCLKP_114
T4
MGTTXN1_114
V2
MGTTXP1_114
W2
MGTTXP0_116
B2
MGTTXN0_116
C2
MGTRXP0_116
C1
MGTRXN0_116
D1
MGTRXN1_116
E1
MGTREFCLKN_116
D3
MGTRXP1_116
F1
MGTREFCLKP_116
D4
MGTTXN1_116
F2
MGTTXP1_116
G2
MGTTXP0_118
Y2
MGTTXN0_118
AA2
MGTRXP0_118
AA1
MGTRXN0_118
AB1
MGTRXN1_118
AC1
MGTREFCLKN_118
AB3
MGTRXP1_118
AD1
MGTREFCLKP_118
AB4
MGTTXN1_118
AD2
MGTTXP1_118
AE2
U700M
XC5VLX30T-1FFG665C
NC
M5
U700P
XC5VLX30T-1FFG665C
DDD0
DDD1
DDD2
DDD3
DDD4
DDD5
DDD6
DDD7
DDD8
DDD9
DDD10
DDD11
DDD12
DDD13
DDD14
DDD15
DDD16
DDD17
DDD18
DDD19
DDD20
DDD21
DDD22
DDD23
DDD24
DDD25
DDD26
DDD27
DDD28
DDD29
DDD30
DDD31
DDD[31..0]
DDD[31..0]
R722 R-NP
R723 49.9
R724 49.9
+2.5V
+DDVTT
DDQS0
DDQS1
DDQS[3..0]
R725
R-NP
+DDVTT
R712 49.9
R713 49.9
+2.5V
DDQS[3..0]
DDQS2
DDQS3
DDA0
DDA1
DDA2
DDA3
DDA4
DDA5
DDA6
DDA7
DDA8
DDA9
DDA10
DDA11
DDA12
DDA13
DDA[13..0]
DDA[13..0]
DDQM0
DDQM1
DDQM2
DDQM3
DDQM[3..0]
DDQM[3..0]
DDCLK1_P
DDCLK1_N
DDCLK2_N
DDCLK2_P
DDCLKE
DDWE
DDCAS
DDRAS
DDCS
DCI is used to terminate DQ
W715
W717
DDBA0
DDBA1
DDBA[1..0]
DDBA[1..0]
MGT_VID1_RX_P
MGT_VID1_RX_N
HD_CD1
MGT_VID1_TX_P
MGT_VID1_TX_N
HD_SD1
HD_MUTE1
DGND
DGND
MGTCLK_1485_P
MGTCLK_1485_N
+2.5V
AVDD_0
M15
AVSS_0
M14
VP_0
N15
VN_0
P14
VREFP_0
P15
VREFN_0
N14
VBATT_0
J19
MGTAVTTTX_112
H3
MGTAVTTRX_112
J3
MGTAVCCPLL_112
M3
MGTAVTTTX_112
N3
MGTAVTTRXC
P5
MGTAVTTTX_114
P3
MGTAVTTRX_114
R3
MGTAVCCPLL_114
V3
MGTAVTTTX_114
W3
MGTAVTTTX_116
B3
MGTAVTTRX_116
C3
MGTAVCCPLL_116
F3
MGTAVTTTX_116
G3
MGTAVTTTX_118
Y3
MGTAVTTRX_118
AA3
MGTAVCCPLL_118
AD3
MGTAVTTTX_118
AE3
VCCAUX
U8
VCCAUX
K9
VCCAUX
M9
VCCAUX
P9
VCCAUX
T9
VCCAUX
W10
VCCAUX
M19
VCCAUX
P19
VCCAUX
T19
VCCAUX
V19
VCCAUX
Y19
VCCAUX
N20
VCCINT
L10
VCCINT
N10
VCCINT
R10
VCCINT
U10
VCCINT
M11
VCCINT
P11
VCCINT
T11
VCCINT
L12
VCCINT
N12
VCCINT
R12
VCCINT
K13
VCCINT
M13
VCCINT
P13
VCCINT
T13
VCCINT
J14
VCCINT
L14
VCCINT
U14
VCCINT
H15
VCCINT
K15
VCCINT
T15
VCCINT
V15
VCCINT
J16
VCCINT
L16
VCCINT
N16
VCCINT
R16
VCCINT
U16
VCCINT
H17
VCCINT
K17
VCCINT
M17
VCCINT
P17
VCCINT
T17
VCCINT
V17
VCCINT
J18
VCCINT
L18
VCCINT
N18
VCCINT
R18
VCCINT
U18
VCCINT
W18
VCCINT
K19
VCCO_0
F11
VCCO_0
J12
VCCO_1
B13
VCCO_1
E14
VCCO_2
AA16
VCCO_2
AD17
VCCO_3
D17
VCCO_3
G18
VCCO_4
AB13
VCCO_4
AE14
VCCO_11
J22
VCCO_11
M23
VCCO_11
H25
VCCO_12
H5
VCCO_12
L6
VCCO_12
P7
VCCO_13
W22
VCCO_13
R24
VCCO_13
V25
VCCO_15
F21
VCCO_15
B23
VCCO_15
E24
VCCO_16
D7
VCCO_16
G8
VCCO_16
C10
VCCO_17
AC20
VCCO_17
AB23
VCCO_17
AE24
VCCO_18
AA6
VCCO_18
AD7
VCCO_18
AC10
MGTAVCC_112
L3
MGTAVCC_112
L4
MGTAVCC_114
U3
MGTAVCC_114
U4
MGTAVCC_116
E3
MGTAVCC_116
E4
MGTAVCC_118
AC3
MGTAVCC_118
AC4
U700N
XC5VLX30T-1FFG665C
GND
A2
GND
D2
GND
E2
GND
K2
GND
L2
GND
T2
GND
U2
GND
AB2
GND
AC2
GND
AF2
GND
C4
GND
F4
GND
J4
GND
M4
GND
R4
GND
V4
GND
AA4
GND
AE4
GND
C5
GND
N5
GND
V5
GND
AC5
GND
A6
GND
F6
GND
T6
GND
AF6
GND
J7
GND
W7
GND
B8
GND
M8
GND
AB8
GND
E9
GND
L9
GND
N9
GND
R9
GND
U9
GND
Y9
GND
AE9
GND
H10
GND
K10
GND
M10
GND
P10
GND
T10
GND
V10
GND
A11
GND
L11
GND
N11
GND
R11
GND
U11
GND
AA11
GND
AF11
GND
D12
GND
K12
GND
M12
GND
P12
GND
T12
GND
W12
GND
AD12
GND
G13
GND
J13
GND
L13
GND
N13
GND
R13
GND
U13
GND
H14
GND
K14
GND
T14
GND
V14
GND
Y14
GND
C15
GND
J15
GND
L15
GND
U15
GND
W15
GND
AC15
GND
A16
GND
F16
GND
H16
GND
K16
GND
M16
GND
P16
GND
T16
GND
V16
GND
AF16
GND
J17
GND
L17
GND
N17
GND
R17
GND
U17
GND
W17
GND
B18
GND
K18
GND
M18
GND
P18
GND
T18
GND
V18
GND
AB18
GND
E19
GND
L19
GND
N19
GND
R19
GND
U19
GND
W19
GND
AE19
GND
C20
GND
H20
GND
V20
GND
A21
GND
L21
GND
T21
GND
AA21
GND
AF21
GND
D22
GND
P22
GND
AD22
GND
G23
GND
U23
GND
K24
GND
Y24
GND
C25
GND
N25
GND
AC25
GND
A26
GND
F26
GND
L26
GND
T26
GND
AA26
GND
AF26
RSVD
P20
RSVD
R20
U700O
XC5VLX30T-1FFG665C
+3.3V +1.0V
+2.5V
DGND
DGND
DGND DGND
DGND
CCLK_0
J11
DONE_0
K11
PROGRAM_B_0
J20
M0_0
T20
M1_0
W20
M2_0
U20
HSWAPEN_0
K20
RDWR_B_0
M20
TDI_0
V13
TDO_0
V12
TCK_0
V11
TMS_0
W13
DXP_0
R15
DXN_0
R14
D_OUT_BUSY_0
U12
D_IN_0
J10
CS_B_0
L20
INIT_B_0
H12
FLOAT
N4
U700L
XC5VLX30T-1FFG665C
FLASH_PROM_CLK
TDO
DONE
PROG_B
INIT_B
FLASH_PROM_TDO
FLASH_PROM_D0
R720 49.9
TMS
TCK
W713
W720
R721 R-NP
W704
W711
W712
DNC
1
DNC
14
DNC
16
DNC
3
DNC
18
DNC
35
DNC
39
DNC
40
DNC
41
DNC
42
GND
2
GND
7
GND
23
GND
31
GND
36
GND
46
DNC
37
VCCINT
4
VCCINT
15
VCCINT
34
VCCO
8
VCCO
30
VCCO
38
VCCO
45
VCCJ
24
D0
28
D1
29
D2
32
D3
33
D4
43
D5
44
D6
47
D7
48
BUSY
5
CLKOUT
9
CF
6
CE
13
CLK
12
OE/RESET
11
CEO
10
REV_SEL0
26
REV_SEL1
27
EN EXT SEL
25
GND
17
TDI
19
TCK
20
TMS
21
TDO
22
U701
XCF16PVOG48C
+2.5V +1.8V
TMS
TCK
R716
332
+2.5V
DONE
PROG_B
W719
INIT_B
FLASH_PROM_D0
FLASH_PROM_CLK
TDI
FLASH_PROM_TDO
R728
49.9
R729
100 OHM
R719
100 OHM
+2.5V
IMPEDANCE R717
4.75K
+2.5V
W718
C713 0.1uF
C712 0.1uF
C711 0.1uF
C714 0.1uF
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
50 OHM CONTROLLED
VCCINT (+1.0V) BYPASS CAPS
+
C709
330uF/2.5V
+1.0V
+2.5V VCCAUX (+2.5V) BYPASS CAPS
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
J700
HDR 2X7
JTAG
+2.5V
TMS
TCK
TDO
TDI
INTERFACE
DGND
DDR SDRAM
FPGA POWER
FPGA GND
FLASH PROM
DGND
+
C710
33uF/6.3V
GTP RX/TX
R706
49.9
R707
49.9
+3.3V
DGND
R708 49.9
R709 49.9
+3.3V
DGND
R710
49.9
R711
49.9
+3.3V
DGND
R704
49.9
R705
49.9
+3.3V
DGND
R702 49.9
R703
49.9
+2.5V
DGND
XO_160_P
XO_160_N
SYNC_LOCK
SYNC_V_OUT
SYNC_H_OUT
SYNC_BACKPORCH
SYNC_V_BLANK
SYNC_ODDEVEN
SYNC_SYNC_OUT
DAC_MCLK
DAC_BCLK
DAC_DATA
DAC_FCLK
RXCKO_1-2
RX_LRCK_1-2
RX_BCK_1-2
RXCKO_3-4
RX_LRCK_3-4
RX_BCK_3-4
RXCKO_5-6
RX_LRCK_5-6
RX_BCK_5-6
RXCKO_7-8
RX_LRCK_7-8
RX_BCK_7-8
AES_IREFCLK1_1-2
TX_LRCK_1-2
TX_BCK_1-2
TX_LRCK_3-4
TX_BCK_3-4
TX_MCLK_1-2
TX_MCLK_3-4
AES_IDATA_1-2
AES_ILRCK_1-2
AES_IBCK_1-2
AES_IDATA_3-4
AES_ILRCK_3-4
AES_IBCK_3-4
AES_IDATA_5-6
AES_ILRCK_5-6
AES_IBCK_5-6
AES_IDATA_7-8
AES_ILRCK_7-8
AES_IBCK_7-8
SDI_IDATA_1-2
SDI_IREF_CLK_1-2
SDI_IDATA_3-4
SDI_IREF_CLK_3-4
SDI_IDATA_5-6
SDI_IREF_CLK_5-6
SDI_IDATA_7-8
SDI_IREF_CLK_7-8
SDI_IN_DATA_1-2
SDI_OLRCK_1-2
SDI_OBCK_1-2
SDI_ODATA_1-2
SDI_OREF_CLK_1-2
SDI_OLRCK_3-4
SDI_OBCK_3-4
SDI_ODATA_3-4
SDI_OREF_CLK_3-4
SDI_OLRCK_5-6
SDI_OBCK_5-6
SDI_ODATA_5-6
SDI_OREF_CLK_5-6
SDI_OLRCK_7-8
SDI_OBCK_7-8
SDI_ODATA_7-8
SDI_OREF_CLK_7-8
SDI_OUT_DATA_1-2
SDI_OUT_DATA_5-6
SDI_OUT_DATA_7-8
SDI_OUT_DATA_3-4
PMRD
PMWR
PMALL
ENCODED_AUDIO_DATA
ENCODED_AUDIO_BCK
ENCODED_AUDIO_LRCK
DECODER_VSYNC
DEC_METADATA
DEC_METASUB_DATA
DEC_METASUB_BCK
DEC_METASUB_LRCK
DOLBY_DEC_LRCK
DOLBY_DEC_BCK
DOLBY_DEC_1-2
DOLBY_DEC_3-4
DOLBY_DEC_5-6
DOLBY_DEC_7-8
DOLBY_DEC_AUX
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA3
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK3
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK3
ENCODER_METADATA_IN
ENCODER_OUT_AUDIO_DATA0
ENCODER_OUT_AUDIO_BCK0
ENCODER_OUT_AUDIO_LRCK0
ENC_VSYNC
DOLBY_DEC_STAT0
DOLBY_DEC_STAT1
DOLBY_DEC_STAT2
DOLBY_DEC_STAT3
DOLBY_DEC_STAT4
DOLBY_DEC_STAT5
DOLBY_DEC_STAT6
DOLBY_DEC_STAT7
DOLBY_DEC_STAT[7..0] DOLBY_DEC_STAT[7..0]
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL[19..0]
DOLBY_ENC_STAT[1..0]
DOLBY_ENC_STAT[1..0]
DOLBY_ENC_STAT0
DOLBY_ENC_STAT1
DOUT_DATA1
DOUT_FCLK
DOUT_DATA2
DOUT_DATA3
DOUT_BCLK
18_432MHZ
36_864MHZ
FPGA_24_576MHZ
33_8688MHZ
16_384MHZ
DIN_DATA1
DIN_DATA2
DIN_DATA3
AOUT_DATA
AOUT_BCLK
AOUT_FCLK
IN_BCLK
IN_FCLK
PILOT_BCLK
PILOT_WCLK
PILOT_DATA
COMP_DATA
COMP_BCLK
COMP_WCLK
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL0
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL1
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL2
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL3
DGND
BANK 1: +3.3V
BANK 2: +3.3V
BANK 3: +3.3V
BANK 4: +2.5V
BANK 12: +3.3V
BANK 18: +3.3V
BANK 15: +3.3V BANK 16: +3.3V
BANK 17: +3.3V
BANK 11: +2.5V
BANK 13: +2.5V
BANK 0: +2.5V
PMCS2
PIC_FPGA_SPARE0
PIC_FPGA_SPARE1
MGT_AVTTX0_112
MGT_AVTTX1_112
MGT_AVTRX_112
MGT_AVTTX0_114
MGT_AVTTX1_114
MGT_AVTRX_114
MGT_AVCC_114
MGT_AVCC_112
MGT_APLL_114
MGT_APLL_112
MGT_AVTT_RXC
MGT_RREF_112
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL0
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL1
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL2
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL3
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL4
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL5
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL6
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL7
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL8
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL9
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL10
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL11
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL12
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL13
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL14
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL15
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL16
+3.3V
DGND
VCCO_0/VCCO_4
+
C703
47uF/6.3V
+2.5V
DGND
+
C700
47uF/6.3V
VCCO BYPASS CAPS
VCCO_12
+2.5V
DGND
+
C701
47uF/6.3V
VCCO_18
+2.5V
DGND
+
C702
47uF/6.3V
VCCO_3
+3.3V
DGND
+
C704
47uF/6.3V
VCCO_11
+3.3V
DGND
+
C705
47uF/6.3V
VCCO_13
+3.3V
DGND
+
C706
47uF/6.3V
VCCO_15
+3.3V
DGND
+
C707
47uF/6.3V
VCCO_16
+3.3V
DGND
+
C708
47uF/6.3V
VCCO_17
R718
4.75K
CONFIGURATION
PMD[7..0]
PMD[7..0]
PMD0
PMD1
PMD2
PMD3
PMD4
PMD5
PMD6
PMD7
SYNCIN_LRCK
SYNCIN_SCLK
SYNCIN_RMCK
AES_OLRCK_1-2
AES_OBCK_1-2
AES_ODATA_1-2
AES_OLRCK_3-4
AES_OBCK_3-4
AES_ODATA_3-4
W703 NP
STATUS1
Q700
MMBT3904
R714
1.0K
STATUS1 INDICATOR
D700
YEL LED
DGND
+5VD
STATUS2
Q701
MMBT3904
R715
1.0K
STATUS2 INDICATOR
D701
YEL LED
DGND
+5VD
SYNCIN_MCLK
R726
1.0K
R727
1.0K
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SDO
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SCK
PIC_IN_METADATA_SCK
PIC_IN_METADATA_SDI
PIC_VSYNC
AES_OREFCLK_1-2
AES_OREFCLK_3-4
PIC_IN_METADATA_SS
PIC_OUT_METADATA_SS
AES_IREFCLK1_3-4
AES_IREFCLK1_5-6
AES_IREFCLK1_7-8
AES_IREFCLK2_1-2
AES_IREFCLK2_3-4
AES_IREFCLK2_5-6
AES_IREFCLK2_7-8
+DDVREF
R701
10.0K
+2.5V
DGND
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL[19..0]
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL17
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL18
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL19
ENC_RES[4..0]
ENC_RES[4..0]
ENC_RES0
ENC_RES1
ENC_RES2
ENC_RES3
ENC_RES4
SDI_BYPASS
1
2
3
4
6
5
8
7
RN706
47 OHM 5%
1
2
3
4
6
5
8
7
RN707
47 OHM 5%
SDI_IN_LRCK_1-4
SDI_IN_LRCK_5-8
SDI_IN_BCK_1-4
SDI_IN_BCK_5-8
SDI_IN_LRCK_3-4
SDI_IN_BCK_3-4
SDI_IN_LRCK_1-2
SDI_IN_BCK_1-2
SDI_IN_LRCK_5-6
SDI_IN_BCK_5-6
SDI_IN_LRCK_7-8
SDI_IN_BCK_7-8
DDCLK1_P
DDCLK1_N
DDCLK1_P
DDCLK1_N
DDCLK2_P
DDCLK2_N
DDQM0
DDQM1
DDQM2
DDQM3
DDCLK2_P
DDCLK2_N
DDQS3
XO_200_P
XO_200_N
XO_1485_FSEL
W700
NP
W701
NP
W709
NP
W710
NP
W708
NP
W707
NP
C750
0.22uF
C751
0.22uF
C752
0.22uF
C753
0.22uF
C717
2.2uF
C716
0.22uF
C719
0.22uF
C722
0.22uF
C726
0.22uF
C729
0.22uF
C733
0.22uF
C736
0.22uF
C739
0.22uF
C742
0.22uF
C715
0.22uF
C754
0.22uF
C755
0.22uF
C756
0.22uF
C757
0.22uF
C758
0.22uF
C759
0.22uF
C760
0.22uF
C741
0.22uF
C725
0.22uF
C727
0.22uF
C728
0.22uF
C730
0.22uF
C731
0.22uF
C732
0.22uF
C734
0.22uF
C735
0.22uF
C737
0.22uF
C738
0.22uF
C740
0.22uF
C718
2.2uF
C720
2.2uF
C721
2.2uF
C723
2.2uF
C724
2.2uF
C744
2.2uF
C745
2.2uF
C746
2.2uF
C747
2.2uF
C748
0.22uF
C749
0.22uF
C743
0.22uF
DDQS0
DDQS1
DDQS2
SDI_ILRCK_1-2
SDI_IBCK_1-2
SDI_ILRCK_7-8
SDI_IBCK_7-8
SDI_OUT_LRCK_1-2
SDI_OUT_BCK_1-2
SDI_OUT_LRCK_3-4
SDI_OUT_BCK_3-4
SDI_OUT_LRCK_5-6
SDI_OUT_BCK_5-6
SDI_OUT_LRCK_7-8
SDI_OUT_BCK_7-8
SDI_ILRCK_3-4
SDI_IBCK_3-4
SDI_ILRCK_5-6
SDI_IBCK_5-6
1
2
3
4
6
5
8
7
RN700
47 OHM 5%
1
2
3
4
6
5
8
7
RN701
47 OHM 5%
SDI_ILRCK_1-4
SDI_IBCK_1-4
SDI_ILRCK_5-8
SDI_IBCK_5-8
STATUS1
STATUS2
W716
NP
W714
NP
C761
2.2uF
C762
2.2uF
C763
2.2uF
C764
2.2uF
C765
2.2uF
C766
2.2uF
TX_LRCK_5-6
TX_BCK_5-6
TX_MCLK_5-6
AES_OREFCLK_5-6
AES_OLRCK_5-6
AES_OBCK_5-6
AES_ODATA_5-6
1
2
3
4
6
5
8
7
RN702 47 OHM 5%
1
2
3
4
6
5
8
7
RN703 47 OHM 5%
1
2
3
4
6
5
8
7
RN704 47 OHM 5%
1
2
3
4
6
5
8
7
RN705 47 OHM 5%
R730
49.9
DGND
R700
49.9
+3.3V
W706 NP
R732
49.9
DGND
R731
49.9
+3.3V
C767
0.22uF
C768
0.22uF
C769
0.22uF
C770
0.22uF
C771
0.22uF
C772
0.22uF
C773
0.22uF
C774
0.22uF
C775
0.22uF
C778
0.22uF
C779
0.22uF
C780
0.22uF
C781
0.22uF
C782
0.22uF
C783
0.22uF
C784
0.22uF
C777
0.22uF
C776
0.22uF
C785
0.22uF
C786
0.22uF
+3.3V
DGND
VCCO BYPASS CAPS
C787
0.22uF
C788
0.22uF
C789
0.22uF
VCC
5
WDI
4
VSS
2
RST
1
MR
3
U702
STM6822SWY6F
DGND
+2.5V
C790
0.1uF
DGND
+3.3V
R733
10.0K
FPGA_RST
1
2
J701
J-NP
DGND
FPGA RST
FPGA_RST
TX_REFCLK_P
TX_REFCLK_N
RX_USRCLK_P
RX_USRCLK_N
GENLOC_CLNR_RST
CLNR_DOUBLE
CLNR_SKEW_EN
CLNR_IPSEL
CLK_CLNR_LOCK
GENLOC_SPI_CLK
GENLOC_SPI_SDIN
GENLOC_SPI_CS
GENLOC_SPI_SDOUT
GENLOC_HSYNC
GENLOC_VSYNC
GENLOC_FSYNC
W705
NP
W702
NP
1
2
J702
J-NP
DGND
HEATSINK FAN
+5VD
HD-SDI I/O BOARD:
SCHEMATIC: FPGA
62360.000
(sheet 8 of 17)

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-89
+DDVTT
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
RN800
DDD[31..0]
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
47 OHM 5%
RN801
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
47 OHM 5%
RN802
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
47 OHM 5%
RN803
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
47 OHM 5%
DDD0
DDD1
DDD2
DDD3
DDD4
DDD5
DDD6
DDD7
DDD8
DDD9
DDD10
DDD11
DDD12
DDD13
DDD14
DDD15
DDD16
DDD17
DDD18
DDD19
DDD20
DDD21
DDD22
DDD23
DDD24
DDD25
DDD26
DDD27
DDD28
DDD29
DDD30
DDD31
R800
100 OHM
+DDVTT
DDCLK1_P
DDCLK1_N
DDA[13..0]
DDD[31..0]
13 4 DDA0 RN805D
14 3 DDA1 RN805C
15 2 DDA2 RN805B
16 1 DDA3 RN805A
9 8 DDA4 RN804H
10 7 DDA5 RN804G
11 6 DDA6 RN804F
12 5 DDA7 RN804E
13
47 OHM 5%
4 DDA8 RN804D
14 3 DDA9 RN804C
12 5 DDA10 RN805E
15 2 DDA11 RN804B
16 1 DDA12 RN804A
10 7 DDA13 RN807G
10 7
RN805G
11 6
RN805F
12
47 OHM 5%
5 RN807E
1 8 RN808A
1 8 RN806A
2 7 RN806B
9 8 RN807H
4 5 RN808D
3 6 RN806C
4 5 RN806D
14
47 OHM 5%
3 RN807C
16 1 RN807A
9 8 RN805H
15 2 RN807B
13 4 RN807D
11 6 RN807F
2 7 RN808B
3 6 RN808C
DDR SDRAM TERMINATING RESISTORS
R801
100 OHM
DDBA[1..0]
DDCAS
DDCLKE
DDCS
DDRAS
DDWE
DDQS[3..0]
DDQM[3..0]
DDCLK2_P
DDCLK2_N
DDBA0
DDBA1
DDQS[3..0]
DDQM[3..0]
+2.5V
DGND
DDA[13..0]
DDBA[1..0]
DDQM0
DDQM1
DDQM2
DDQM3
DDQS0
DDQS1
DDQS2
DDQS3
+ C814
10uF
C800
0.1uF
DDQM0
DDQM1
DDBA0
DDBA1
BYPASS CAPS
C801
0.1uF
DDCS
DDRAS
DDCAS
DDWE
DDCLK1_P
DDCLK1_N
DDCLKE
C802
0.1uF
DDA0
DDA1
DDA2
DDA3
DDA4
DDA5
DDA6
DDA7
DDA8
DDA9
DDA10
DDA11
DDA12
DDA13
DDCS
DDRAS
DDCAS
DDWE
DDCLK1_P
DDCLK1_N
DDCLKE
TP800
DGND
BLK
C803
0.1uF
29
30
31
32
35
36
37
38
39
40
28
41
42
17
24
23
22
21
26
27
20
47
45
46
44
C804
0.1uF
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
NC
CS
RAS
CAS
WE
BA0
BA1
LDM
UDM
CK
CK
CKE
1
18
33
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
34
48
66
C805
0.1uF
+2.5V
3
9
15
55
61
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
6
12
52
58
64
DGND
R802
4.75K
C808
0.1uF
U800
MT46V32M16P-6T:F TR
DQ0
DQ1
DQ2
DQ3
DQ4
DQ5
DQ6
DQ7
DQ8
DQ9
DQ10
DQ11
DQ12
DQ13
DQ14
DQ15
LDQS
UDQS
NC
NC
NC
NC
DNU
DNU
VREF
C815
0.1uF
+2.5V
2
4
5
7
8
10
11
13
54
56
57
59
60
62
63
65
16
51
14
25
43
53
19
50
49
DGND
DGND
+ C806
1
2
7
9
8
4
11
DDD0
DDD1
DDD2
DDD3
DDD4
DDD5
DDD6
DDD7
DDD8
DDD9
DDD10
DDD11
DDD12
DDD13
DDD14
DDD15
DDQS0
DDQS1
C807
0.1uF
10uF
DGND
U801
VDDQSNS
VLDOIN
S3
S5
+DDVREF
VIN
VTTREF
VTT
GND VTTSNS
PGND
THERMAL PAD
TPS51100DGQ
DDQS[3..0]
10
6
3
5
DDA[13..0]
DDBA[1..0]
DDQM[3..0]
+5VD
DDCLK2_P
DDCLK2_N
C811
1.0uF
DGND
DGND
+1.25V, 10mA Ma x
+1.25V, 3A Max
C812
0.1uF
+
DGND
DDA0
DDA1
DDA2
DDA3
DDA4
DDA5
DDA6
DDA7
DDA8
DDA9
DDA10
DDA11
DDA12
DDA13
DDCS
DDRAS
DDCAS
DDWE
DDBA0
DDBA1
DDQM2
DDQM3
DDCLK2_P
DDCLK2_N
DDCLKE
C809
10.0uF
+
DGND
29
30
31
32
35
36
37
38
39
40
28
41
42
17
24
23
22
21
26
27
20
47
45
46
44
C810
330uF/2.5V
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
NC
CS
RAS
CAS
WE
BA0
BA1
LDM
UDM
CK
CK
CKE
RED
ORG
+2.5V
1
18
33
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
34
48
66
+DDVREF
+DDVTT
3
9
15
55
61
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
6
12
52
58
64
DGND
TP801
TP802
U802
MT46V32M16P-6T:F TR
DQ0
DQ1
DQ2
DQ3
DQ4
DQ5
DQ6
DQ7
DQ8
DQ9
DQ10
DQ11
DQ12
DQ13
DQ14
DQ15
LDQS
UDQS
NC
NC
NC
NC
DNU
DNU
VREF
DDD[31..0]
2
4
5
7
8
10
11
13
54
56
57
59
60
62
63
65
16
51
14
25
43
53
19
50
49
DGND
DDD16
DDD17
DDD18
DDD19
DDD20
DDD21
DDD22
DDD23
DDD24
DDD25
DDD26
DDD27
DDD28
DDD29
DDD30
DDD31
DDQS2
DDQS3
C813
0.1uF
DDQS[3..0]
+DDVREF
NOTES:
The following DDR SDRAM can be installed:
MICRON MT46V32M16P-6T (32M X 16)
MICRON MT46V64M16P-6T (64M X 16)
HD-SDI I/O BOARD:
SCHEMATIC: DDR SDRAM
62360.000
(sheet 9 of 17)

+5VD
Y902
1 2
DGND1
+3.3V_CLK
25.0000MHZ
+ C901
10uF
DGND1
LDO SUPPLY FOR CLOCKS
2
1
C903
0.1uF
DDR REF 200.0000MHZ XO
R909
C918
10uF
5.1 OHM
U903
C919
0.1uF
C920
0.01uF
PL611-30-G93SC
DGND1
7
FSEL VDD
5
1
XIN CLK0
3 XO_CLK_200_P
R910
8
XOUT CLK1
4 XO_CLK_200_N
R911
6
DNC VSS
2
1
DGND
IN
U901
TPS78633DCQR
OUT
4
EN
3
GND
6
TAB
DGND1
DGND900
2
DGND1
NR/FB
DGND1
5
+
DGND1
R902
R-NP
C905
0.1uF
TP900
BLK
DGND1
301 OHM
301 OHM
1500mA Max
C907
0.1uF
DGND1 DGND1
+ C900
10uF
C913
1.0uF
XO_200_P
XO_200_N
C914
1.0uF
C915
1.0uF
DGND1 DGND1 DGND1 DGND1
C916
1.0uF
XO_200_P
XO_200_N
TP901
ORG
+ C917
10uF
DGND1
+3.3V_CLK
XO_1485_FSEL
6-90
Y901
1 2
18.5625MHZ
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
297.0000MHZ XO FOR HD GTP (SELECTABLE TO 148.5000MHZ)
Y900
1 2
20.0000MHZ
+3.3V_CLK
297.0000 MHZ = LOGIC LOW
148.5000 MHZ = LOGIC HIGH
+3.3V_CLK
7
1
8
6
U900
PL611-30-G93SC
FSEL
XIN
XOUT
DNC
R906
5.1 OHM
VDD
CLK0
CLK1
VSS
R900
5.1 OHM
5
3
4
2
C902
10uF
+
C904
0.1uF
DGND1
R907
XO_CLK_1485_P
R908
XO_CLK_1485_N
DGND1
DDR 160.0000MHZ XO
U902
PL611-30-G93SC
7
FSEL VDD
5
1
XIN CLK0
3
8
XOUT CLK1
4
6
DNC VSS
2
DGND1
C912
0.01uF
C908
10uF
+
C909
0.1uF
C910
0.01uF
XO_CLK_160_P
XO_CLK_160_N
DGND1
619 OHM
619 OHM
R901
619 OHM
R903
R904
DGND1
301 OHM
301 OHM
C906 0.1uF
C911 0.1uF
R905
619 OHM
MGTCLK_1485_P
MGTCLK_1485_N
XO_160_P
XO_160_N
XO_160_P
XO_160_N
MGTCLK_1485_P
MGTCLK_1485_N
HD-SDI I/O BOARD:
SCHEMATIC: CLOCK OSCILLATORS
62360.000
(sheet 10 of 17)

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-91
AES11-id
SYNC INPUT
J202A
BNC DUAL_with cap.
UPPER
1
2
1K
.
L1000
L1001
FERRITE
FERRITE
L1002
RSTIO
TP1000
RED
CGND
T1000
C1000 SC937-02
1 5
0.1uF
1
2
3
HDR 3
AES_IREFCLK1_7-8
4
2
AES_SYNC_IN
DGND
J1000
8
TP1001
RED
+5VD
DGND
C1001
0.1uF
R1000
75 OHM
C1002
0.1uF
C1004
0.1uF
C1003
0.22uF
R1001
AES_IREFCLK1_7-8 13
604 OHM
C1005
0.01uF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
14
SPI_DEV_CS12
C1006
1500pF
+5VD
DGND
RX1+
RX1-
RX2+
RX2-
RX3+
RX3-
RX4+
RX4-
U1000A
SRC4382IPFB
RXCKI
MUTE
C1007
0.022uF
R1002
150K
R1003
100.0K
SDOUTB
SDINB
LRCKB
BCKB
RXCKO
LOCK
RDY
DGND
DGND
R1005
10.0K
SYNCIN_RMCK
R1004 49.9
R1006
10.0K
45
46
47
48
12
11
15
1
2
3
4
DGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
R1009
10.0K
TP1005 WHT
TP1002 ORG
TP1003 YEL
TP1004 RED
R1007 49.9
RN1000
8
7
6
5
47 OHM 5%
R1008 49.9
WORD CLOCK
RECEIVER/PLL
SDA/CDOUT
AD0/CS
EMPH
RXP
RXN
VA+
AGND
FILT
RST
RMCK
RERR
ILRCK
ISCLK
SDIN
U1001
CS8427-CSZ
SCL/CCLK
AD1/CDIN
TXR
TXN
H/S
VL+
DGND
OMCK
U
INT
SDOUT
OLRCK
OSCLK
TCBL
DGND
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
RX_LRCK_7-8
RX_BCK_7-8
RXCKO_7-8
AES_IREFCLK2_7-8
TP1006
RED
20
59
60
58
61
8
19
R1010 49.9
R1011 49.9
RCKIA
LRCKIA
BCKIA
SDINA
TDMIA
BYPA
MUTEA
TP1010
BLK
DGND
RED
ORG
YEL
SYNCIN_RMCK
U1002A
SRC4184IPAG
LRCKOA
BCKOA
SDOUTA
RATIOA
RDYA
TP1007
TP1008
TP1009
62
63
64
17
18
+5VD
DGND
C1008
0.1uF
SYNCIN_LRCK
SYNCIN_SCLK
SYNCIN_RMCK
R1012 49.9
SPI_SDI
SPI_SCK
SPI_SDO
SYNCIN_MCLK
AES_IREFCLK1_7-8
ORG
YEL
WHT
DGND
40
39
38
37
25
TP1011
TP1012
TP1013
SDINA
LRCKA
BCKA
AES_ILRCK_7-8
AES_IBCK_7-8
AES_IDATA_7-8
SDOUTA
MCLK
U1000B
SRC4382IPFB
TX+
TX-
AESOUT
SYNC
BLS
32
31
34
36
35
UNUSED TRANSMITTER
HD-SDI I/O BOARD:
SCHEMATIC: AES and WORDCLOCK SYNC
62360.000
(sheet 11 of 17)

+2.5V
DGND
+2.5V
DGND
+2.5V
DGND
+2.5V
DGND
+5VD
+ C1100
47uF/10V
DGND
+5VD
+ C1101
47uF/10V
DGND
+5VD
+ C1102
47uF/10V
DGND
+5VD
+ C1103
47uF/10V
DGND
R1100
100 OHM
C1104
0.1uF
R1101
100 OHM
C1105
0.1uF
R1102
100 OHM
C1106
0.1uF
R1103
100 OHM
C1107
0.1uF
U1100
LTC3026EDD#PBF
1
9
IN OUT
2
10
IN OUT
6
5
4
3
SHDN
BST
SW
GND
ADJ
PG
GND
8
7
11
DGND DGND
U1101
LTC3026EDD#PBF
1
9
IN OUT
2
10
IN OUT
6
5
4
3
SHDN
BST
SW
GND
ADJ
PG
GND
8
7
11
DGND DGND
U1102
LTC3026EDD#PBF
1
9
IN OUT
2
10
IN OUT
6
5
4
3
SHDN
BST
SW
GND
ADJ
PG
GND
8
7
11
DGND DGND
U1103
LTC3026EDD#PBF
1
9
IN OUT
2
10
IN OUT
6
5
4
3
SHDN
BST
SW
GND
ADJ
PG
GND
8
7
11
DGND DGND
GTP POWER: +1.2V FOR AVRX (1500mA Max)
DGND
DGND
R1104
4.02K
R1105
2.00K
R1106
4.02K
R1107
2.00K
+ C1108
330uF/2.5V
+ C1112
22uF
DGND DGND DGND
GTP POWER: +1.2V FOR AVTX (1500mA Max)
+ C1109
330uF/2.5V
+ C1113
22uF
DGND DGND DGND
GTP POWER: +1.2V FOR APLL(1500mA Max)
DGND
R1108
4.02K
R1109
2.00K
+ C1110
330uF/2.5V
+ C1114
22uF
DGND DGND DGND
GTP POWER: +1.0V FOR AVCC(1500mA Max)
DGND
R1110
3.01K
R1111
2.00K
+ C1111
330uF/2.5V
+ C1115
22uF
DGND DGND DGND
TP1102
ORG
C1116
0.1uF
TP1100
ORG
C1117
0.1uF
TP1101
ORG
C1118
0.1uF
TP1103
ORG
C1119
0.1uF
+RIO_AVRX
+RIO_AVTX
+RIO_APLL
+RIO_AVCC
+RIO_AVRX
+RIO_AVTX
+RIO_APLL
+RIO_AVCC
GTP TILE 112 POWER FILTERS
L1105
220 OHM@100MHz
L1106
220 OHM@100MHz
L1107
220 OHM@100MHz
L1108
220 OHM@100MHz
L1109
220 OHM@100MHz
L111 0
220 OHM @100MHz
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
C1125
0.22uF
C1126
0.22uF
C1127
0.22uF
C1128
0.22uF
C1129
0.22uF
C1130
0.22uF
6-92
R1112
49.9
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
MGT_AVTT_RXC
MGT_AVTRX_112
MGT_AVTTX0_112
MGT_AVTTX1_112
MGT_RREF_112
MGT_APLL_112
MGT_AVCC_112
TP1104
BLK
DGND
+RIO_AVRX
+RIO_AVTX
+RIO_APLL
+RIO_AVCC
GTP TILE 114 POWER FILTERS
L1100
220 OHM@100MHz
L1101
220 OHM@100MHz
L1102
220 OHM@100MHz
L1103
220 OHM@100MHz
L1104
220 OHM@100MHz
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
C1120
0.22uF
C1121
0.22uF
C1122
0.22uF
C1123
0.22uF
C1124
0.22uF
MGT_AVTRX_114
MGT_AVTTX0_114
MGT_AVTTX1_114
MGT_APLL_114
MGT_AVCC_114
HD-SDI I/O BOARD:
SCHEMATIC: GTP POWER & FILTER DISTRIBUTION
62360.000
(sheet 12 of 17)

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-93
DGND
GND
1
+5V
2
RST
3
ENBL
4
MOD0
5
MOD1
6
MAP0
7
MAP1
8
PCL
9
PME
10
PRG0
11
PRG1
12
PRG2
13
DCM0
14
DCM1
15
ACM
16
PDN
17
ACS
18
CPE
19
CPC
20
DLC
21
AOC0
22
AOC1
23
FSA
24
GND
25
+5V
26
DIN
27
DOUT
28
SCLK
29
SSEL
30
DLM0
31
DLM1
32
DLM2
33
PLE
34
PLS
35
PGP
36
N/C
37
N/C
38
N/C
39
N/C
40
N/C
41
N/C
42
N/C
43
N/C
44
DADA
45
DADB
46
+5V
47
GND
48
EAD
49
EAFS
50
EABC
51
DADM
52
DADC
53
DADD
54
DAFS
55
DABC
56
MSD
57
MSFS
58
MSBC
59
META
60
BSF0
61
BSF1
62
BSF2
63
CFG0
64
CFG1
65
CFG2
66
RESERVED
67
VFS
68
SYNC
69
ERR
70
+5V
71
GND
72
MH1
73
MH2
74
J1200
SIMM-72
+5VD
DGND
ENCODED_AUDIO_DATA
ENCODED_AUDIO_BCK
ENCODED_AUDIO_LRCK
DECODER_VSYNC
DEC_METADATA
DEC_METASUB_DATA
DEC_METASUB_BCK
DEC_METASUB_LRCK
DOLBY_DEC_LRCK
DOLBY_DEC_BCK
DOLBY_DEC_1-2
DOLBY_DEC_3-4
DOLBY_DEC_5-6
DOLBY_DEC_7-8
DOLBY_DEC_AUX
SPI_SCK
SPI_SDO
SPI_SDI
SPI_SDO
SPI_SDI
SPI_SCK
SPI_SDO
SPI_SDI
SPI_SCK
DOLBY_DEC_ENBL
DOLBY_DEC_MOD0
DOLBY_DEC_MOD1
DOLBY_DEC_MAP0
DOLBY_DEC_MAP1
DOLBY_DEC_PCL
DOLBY_DEC_PME
DOLBY_DEC_PRG0
DOLBY_DEC_PRG1
DOLBY_DEC_PRG2
DOLBY_DEC_DCM0
DOLBY_DEC_DCM1
DOLBY_DEC_DLM0
DOLBY_DEC_DLM1
DOLBY_DEC_DLM2
DOLBY_DEC_PLE
DOLBY_DEC_PLS
DOLBY_DEC_PGP
DOLBY_DEC_ACM
DOLBY_DEC_PDN
DOLBY_DEC_ACS
DOLBY_DEC_CPE
DOLBY_DEC_CPC
DOLBY_DEC_DLC
DOLBY_DEC_AOC0
DOLBY_DEC_AOC1
DOLBY_DEC_FSA
DOLBY_DEC_RST
DOLBY_DEC_STAT[7..0]
DOLBY_DEC_STAT0
DOLBY_DEC_STAT1
DOLBY_DEC_STAT2
DOLBY_DEC_STAT3
DOLBY_DEC_STAT4
DOLBY_DEC_STAT5
DOLBY_DEC_STAT6
DOLBY_DEC_STAT7
DOLBY_DEC_STAT[7..0]
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA3
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK3
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK3
ENCODER_OUT_AUDIO_DATA0
ENCODER_OUT_AUDIO_BCK0
ENCODER_OUT_AUDIO_LRCK0
ENCODER_METADATA_IN
R1200
49.9
ENC_VSYNC
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL[19..0]
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL[19..0]
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL0
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL1
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL2
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL3
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL4
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL5
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL6
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL7
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL8
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL9
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL10
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL11
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL12
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL13
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL14
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL15
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL16
DOLBY_ENC_RST
C1202
0.1uF
C1203
0.1uF
C1204
0.1uF
C1205
0.1uF
+
C1201
10uF
DGND
+5VD
C1207
0.1uF
C1208
0.1uF
C1209
0.1uF
C1210
0.1uF
+
C1206
10uF
1D
2
2D
3
3D
4
4D
5
5D
6
6D
7
7D
8
8D
9
1Q
19
2Q
18
3Q
17
4Q
16
5Q
15
6Q
14
7Q
13
8Q
12
OC
1
CK
11
VCC
20
GND
10
U1200
SN74AHC574PWR
DGND
+3.3V
1D
2
2D
3
3D
4
4D
5
5D
6
6D
7
7D
8
8D
9
1Q
19
2Q
18
3Q
17
4Q
16
5Q
15
6Q
14
7Q
13
8Q
12
OC
1
CK
11
VCC
20
GND
10
U1201
SN74AHC574PWR
DGND
+3.3V
1D
2
2D
3
3D
4
4D
5
5D
6
6D
7
7D
8
8D
9
1Q
19
2Q
18
3Q
17
4Q
16
5Q
15
6Q
14
7Q
13
8Q
12
OC
1
CK
11
VCC
20
GND
10
U1202
SN74AHC574PWR
DGND
+3.3V
1D
2
2D
3
3D
4
4D
5
5D
6
6D
7
7D
8
8D
9
1Q
19
2Q
18
3Q
17
4Q
16
5Q
15
6Q
14
7Q
13
8Q
12
OC
1
CK
11
VCC
20
GND
10
U1203
SN74AHC574PWR
DGND
+3.3V
DOLBY_DEC_ENBL
DOLBY_DEC_MOD0
DOLBY_DEC_MOD1
DOLBY_DEC_MAP0
DOLBY_DEC_MAP1
DOLBY_DEC_PCL
DOLBY_DEC_PME
DOLBY_DEC_PRG0
DOLBY_DEC_PRG1
DOLBY_DEC_PRG2
DOLBY_DEC_DCM0
DOLBY_DEC_DCM1
DOLBY_DEC_DLM0
DOLBY_DEC_DLM1
DOLBY_DEC_DLM2
DOLBY_DEC_PLE
DOLBY_DEC_PLS
DOLBY_DEC_PGP
DOLBY_DEC_ACM
DOLBY_DEC_PDN
DOLBY_DEC_ACS
DOLBY_DEC_CPE
DOLBY_DEC_CPC
DOLBY_DEC_AOC0
DOLBY_DEC_AOC1
DOLBY_DEC_FSA
DOLBY_DEC_RST
PMD[7..0]
PMD[7..0]
PMD0
PMD1
PMD2
PMD3
PMD4
PMD5
PMD6
PMD7
PMD0
PMD1
PMD2
PMD3
PMD4
PMD5
PMD6
PMD7
PMD0
PMD1
PMD2
PMD3
PMD4
PMD5
PMD6
PMD7
PMD0
PMD1
PMD2
PMD3
PMD4
PMD5
PMD6
PMD7
W1200
NP
DOLBY_ENC_RST
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL0
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL1
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL2
DOLBY_DEC_CNTRL3
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
SPI_DEV_CS13
SPI_DEV_CS14
TP1203
WHT TP1202
ORG TP1201
YEL
TP1200
BLK
TP1204
RED
DGND
TP1207
WHT
TP1206
ORG TP1205
YEL
DOLBY_DEC_BCK
DOLBY_DEC_LRCK
DOLBY_DEC_1-2
DOLBY_DEC_3-4
DOLBY_DEC_5-6
DOLBY_DEC_7-8
DOLBY_DEC_AUX
DEC_METASUB_BCK
DEC_METASUB_LRCK
DEC_METASUB_DATA
DEC_METADATA
DOLBY_DEC_BCK
DOLBY_DEC_LRCK
TP1208
WHT
TP1209
WHT
TP1210
WHT
TP1211
WHT
DOLBY_DEC_1-2
DOLBY_DEC_3-4
DOLBY_DEC_5-6
DOLBY_DEC_7-8
DOLBY_DEC_AUX
TP1213
ORG TP1212
YEL
DEC_METASUB_BCK
DEC_METASUB_LRCK
TP1215
WHT TP1214
WHT
DEC_METASUB_DATA
DEC_METADATA
TP1218
ORG TP1217
YEL
TP1219
WHT
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK3
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK3
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA3
ENCODER_METADATA_IN
TP1221
ORG TP1220
YEL
TP1222
WHT
TP1224
ORG TP1223
YEL
TP1225
WHT
TP1227
ORG TP1226
YEL
TP1228
WHT
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_BCK3
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_LRCK3
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA0
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA1
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA2
ENCODER_IN_AUDIO_DATA3
ENCODER_METADATA_IN
TP1216
WHT
TP1229
RED
ENC_VSYNC
TP1231
ORG TP1230
YEL
TP1232
WHT
ENC_VSYNC
DOLBY E 559E ENCODER MODULE
DOLBY E 552 DECODER MODULE
GND
1
+5V
2
RST
3
ENBL
4
MOD0
5
MOD1
6
MOD2
7
MDS
8
MRM0
9
MRM1
10
DEFR0
11
DEFR1
12
DEFR2
13
DEBD0/PESRC
14
DEBD1
15
DEPT
16
PDN
17
SPM
18
CPE
19
CPC
20
DLC
21
RCS0
22
RCS1
23
FSA
24
GND
25
+5V
26
DIN
27
DOUT
28
SCLK
29
SSEL
30
ICA0
31
ICA1
32
ICA2
33
PCCM0
34
PCCM1
35
PCCM2
36
N/C
37
N/C
38
N/C
39
N/C
40
N/C
41
N/C
42
N/C
43
N/C
44
AFSA
45
ABCA
46
+5V
47
GND
48
ADA
49
AFSB
50
ABCB
51
ADB
52
EADA
53
RESERVED
54
EAFS
55
EABC
56
META
60
AFSC
61
ABCC
62
ADC
63
AFSD
64
ABCD
65
ADD
66
RESERVED
67
VFS
68
SYNC
69
ERR
70
+5V
71
GND
72
MH1
73
MH2
74
RESERVED
57
RESERVED
58
RESERVED
59
J1201
SIMM-72
+5VD
DGND
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL17
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL18
DOLBY_ENC_CNTRL19
ENC_MRM0
ENC_MRM1
ENC_MRM0
ENC_MRM1
DOLBY_ENC_STAT[1..0]
DOLBY_ENC_STAT[1..0]
DOLBY_ENC_STAT0
DOLBY_ENC_STAT1
ENC_RES0
ENC_RES1
ENC_RES2
ENC_RES3
ENC_RES4
ENC_RES[4..0]
ENC_RES[4..0]
ENCODER_OUT_AUDIO_BCK0
ENCODER_OUT_AUDIO_LRCK0
ENCODER_OUT_AUDIO_DATA0
C1211
0.1uF
C1212
0.1uF
C1213
0.1uF
C1214
0.1uF
+
C1200
10uF
+5VD
DGND
DGND
+3.3V
DOLBY_DEC_DLC
HD-SDI I/O BOARD:
SCHEMATIC: DOLBY E DECODER/ENCODER
62360.000
(sheet 13 of 17)

+2.5V
DGND_CLNR
+ C1300
47uF/10V
+1.8V_GENLOC_CLNR
+1.8VD_CLKCLNR
+5VD
RX_USRCLK_P
RX_USRCLK_N
PCLK1
R1300
100 OHM
C1301
0.1uF
R1301 R-NP
R1302 R-NP
R1303 R-NP
R1304 R-NP
U1300
LTC3026EDD#PBF +1.8V FOR GENLOCK/CLOCKCLEANER
1
2
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
9
10
6
5
4
3
SHDN
BST
SW
GND
ADJ
PG
GND
8
7
11
R1308
7.15K
+ C1304
330uF/2.5V
DGND_CLNR DGND_CLNR DGND_CLNR
GENLOC_PWR_GOOD
GENLOC_CLNR_RST
CLNR_DOUBLE
CLNR_SKEW_EN
CLNR_IPSEL
RX_USRCLK_P
RX_USRCLK_N
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
L1300
220 OHM@100MHz
L1301
220 OHM@100MHz
DGND_CLNR
R1305 619 OHM
R1306 619 OHM
R1307
619 OHM
RN1300
1.0K OHM 5%
R1309
2.00K
DGND_CLNR
DGND_CLNR
DGND_CLNR
C1302
0.22uF
C1303
0.22uF
DGND_CLNR
USRCLK_P
USRCLK_N
BYPASS
AUTOBYPASS
FCTRL0
FCTRL1
+ C1307
22uF
DGND_CLNR DGND_CLNR DGND_CLNR
R1310
619 OHM
+1.8VD_CLKCLNR
+1.8VA_CLKCLNR
CLNR_DOUBLE
CLNR_SKEW_EN
CLNR_IPSEL
C1305
0.1uF
C1306
0.1uF
CLOCK CLEANER CONFIGURATION
R1311
100 OHM
TP1300
ORG
C1308
0.1uF
+3.3V
+1.8VD_CLKCLNR
+1.8V_GENLOC_CLNR
PCLK1
+2.5V_VCO
C1309 +
10uF
C1312
0.1uF
AGND_CLNR AGND_CLNR
GENLOC_CLNR_RST
C1310
+
10uF
CLK_IN_P
CLK_IN_N
C1313
0.1uF
C1311
VCO_GND
+2.5V_VCO
R1312
150K
R1313
150K
1.0uF
VCO_GND
+1.8VA_CLKCLNR
+1.8VA_CLKCLNR
C1315
0.1uF
R1314
1.0 OHM
C1316
0.01uF
DGND_CLNR DGND_CLNR DGND_CLNR
VCO_GND
VCO_GND
AGND_CLNR
+ C1317
33uF/6.3V
LOOP FILTER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
41
5
3
VCTR
NC
AGND_CLNR
REG_VDD
AGND
PD_VDD
CLKIN
CLKIN
AGND
IN_VDD
CLKIN_SE
AGND
RESET
GND_PAD
CLNR_IPSEL
2
40
11
GND
AGND
IPSEL
BYPASS
AUTOBYPASS
FCTRL0
FCTRL1
CLNR_DOUBLE
CLNR_SKEW_EN
+2.5V_VCO
7
4
IN_VDD
GND
6
GND
VCO_GND
39
12
VCO_VDD
GND
38
13
CP_VDD
BYPASS
C1318
0.1uF
8
37
14
GND
CP_RES
AUTOBYPASS
VCO_GND
36
15
LF
D_VDD
O/P
6-94
35
16
VCO_GND
FCTRL0
1
34
17
U1302
GO1555-IXTE3
VCO
FCTRL1
33
18
VCO
DOUBLE
32
19
DIV_VDD
SKEW_EN
31
20
AGND
GND
R1315
10.0k
AGND_CLNR
CLKOUT
CLKOUT
DIFF_OUT_VDD
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
AGND
AGND
D_VDD
CLKOUT_SE
SE_VDD
GND
LOCK
1
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
VCO_GND
JMP1300
2
DGND AGND_CLNR
JMP1301
1
C1319
0.1uF
U1301
GS4915-INE3
DGND_CLNR
2
DGND DGND_CLNR
AGND_CLNR AGND_CLNR AGND_CLNR AGND_CLNR AGND_CLNR
AGND_CLNR
C1320
0.1uF
C1321
0.1uF
+1.8VA_CLKCLNR
C1324
0.1uF
C1314 +
10uF
CLKCNR_CLKOUT_P C1322 0.1uF
CLKCNR_CLKOUT_N C1323 0.1uF
TP1301
TX_REFCLK_P
TX_REFCLK_N
+1.8VA_CLKCLNR
TX_REFCLK_P
TX_REFCLK_N
CLK_CLNR_LOCK
HD-SDI I/O BOARD:
SCHEMATIC: CLOCK CLEANER
62360.000
(sheet 14 of 17)

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-95
GENLOC_SPI_CLK
GENLOC_SPI_SDIN
GENLOC_SPI_CS
GENLOC_CLNR_RST
GENLOC_SPI_SDOUT
GENLOC_HSYNC
GENLOC_VSYNC
GENLOC_FSYNC
GENLOC_SPI_CLK
GENLOC_SPI_SDIN
GENLOC_SPI_CS
GENLOC_CLNR_RST
U1400
74HC1G14
+2.5V
3 5
4 2
DGND
GENLOC_HSYNC
GENLOC_VSYNC
GENLOC_FSYNC
C1403
C-NP
DGND
DO NOT INSTALL
+1.8V_GENLOC_CLNR
R1408
R-NP
+1.8V_APLL_ANLG
CONNECT PIN-14 TO ANALOG_GND
WHEN ASR_SEL[2..0]=000
+1.8V_GENLOC_CLNR
C1400
0.1uF
Y1400
27.0000MHZ
C1406
22pF
W1400
C1401
0.1uF
@PIN 26 @PIN 44
C1405
33pF
R1407
1.00K
TP1400
LOCK_LOST
TP1401
REF_LOST
1
2
R1401 R-NP
R1402 R-NP
R1403 R-NP
R1404 R-NP
R1405 R-NP
R1406 R-NP
GENLOCK CONFIGURATION
DGND_CLNR
DGND_CLNR
C1407
0.01uF
GENLOCK_SPI_SDOUT
@PIN 18
R1411
1.00M
R1409
R-NP
C1408
0.01uF
R1410
0 OHM
GENLOC_HSYNC
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
C1409
0.01uF
C1410
0.01uF
@PIN 31 @PIN 50 @PIN 62
+3.3V
RN1400
10.0k OHM 5%
+1.8V_GENLOC_CLNR
C1412
10uF
DGND_CLNR
DGND_CLNR DGND_CLNR
DGND_CLNR
+1.8V_GENLOC_CLNR
AGND_CLNR
R1412
0 OHM
+
GENLOC_VSYNC
GENLOC_FSYNC
+1.8V_GENLOC_CLNR
VID_STD_SEL0
VID_STD_SEL1
VID_STD_SEL2
VID_STD_SEL3
VID_STD_SEL4
VID_STD_SEL5
C1413
0.01uF
@PIN 45
+1.8V_GENLOC_CLNR
R1413
R-NP
CORE & I/O VDD PCLK1&2 VDD
XTAL VDD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
65
LOCK_LOST
REF_LOST
VID_PLL_VDD
VID_PLL_GND
XTAL_VDD
X1
X2
XTAL_GND
CORE_GND
ANALOG_VDD
NC
ANALOG_GND
AUD_PLL_GND
AUD_PLL_VDD
10FID
HSYNC
GND_PAD
+3.3V
DGND_CLNR DGND_CLNR
64
17
GENLOCK
VSYNC
63
18
NC
IO_VDD
62
19
IO_VDD
FSYNC
61
20
RESET
NC
60
21
CS_TMS
VID_STD0
59
22
SDOUT_TDO
VID_STD1
58
23
SDIN_TDI
VID_STD2
57
24
SCLK_TCLK
VID_STD3
C1411
+
10uF
56
25
JTAG/HOST
VID_STD4
55
26
PHS_GND
CORE_VDD
54
27
PHS_VDD
VID_STD5
C1414
0.01uF
@PIN 5
53
28
PCLK1&2_VDD
ACLK1
W1401
52
29
PCLK1&2_GND
ACLK2
W1402
51
30
PCLK1
ACLK3
W1403
50
31
IO_VDD
IO_VDD
49
32
PCLK2
ASR_SEL2
+1.8V_GENLOC_CLNR
LVDS/PCLK3_GND
LVDS/PCLK3_VDD
CORE_VDD
TIMING_OUT8
TIMING_OUT7
TIMING_OUT6
TIMING_OUT5
TIMING_OUT4
IO_VDD
TIMING_OUT3
TIMING_OUT2
TIMING_OUT1
ASR_SEL0
ASR_SEL1
+1.8V_GENLOC_CLNR
C1415
0.01uF
PCLK3
PCLK3
+1.8V_GENLOC_CLNR
@PIN 3
DGND_CLNR
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
VPLL_PHS
DGND_CLNR
R1415 49.9OHM
W1404
U1401
GS4911BCNE3
W1405
W1406
W1407
W1408
W1409
W1410
W1411
W1412
W1413
W1414
+1.8V_GENLOC_CLNR
R1416
R-NP
R1417
R-NP
+1.8V_GENLOC_CLNR
R1414
R-NP
+1.8V_GENLOC_CLNR
+1.8V_GENLOC_CLNR
4
3
2
1
RN1401
5
6
7
8
1.0K OHM 5%
L1400
220 OHM @100MHz
DGND_CLNR
C1402
10uF
+ C1404
AGND_CLNR
0.1uF
@PIN 10
PCLK1
+1.8V_APLL_ANLG
HD-SDI I/O BOARD:
SCHEMATIC: GENLOCK
62360.000
(sheet 15 of 17)

6-96 TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
IFMTA0
1
IFMTA1
2
IFMTA2
3
OFMTA0
4
OFMTA1
5
OWLA0
6
OWLA1
7
LGRPA0
9
LGRPA1
10
DDNA
11
DEMA0
12
DEMA1
13
MODEA0
14
MODEA1
15
MODEA2
16
IFMTB0
48
IFMTB1
47
IFMTB2
46
OFMTB0
45
OFMTB1
44
OWLB0
43
OWLB1
42
LGRPB0
40
LGRPB1
39
DDNB
38
DEMB0
37
DEMB1/CDOUT
36
MODEB0/CS
35
MODEB1/CCLK
34
MODEB2/CDIN
33
H/S
22
RST
21
U301C
SRC4184IPAG
DGND
SDA/CDOUT
22
RST
24
CPM
18
INT
23
GPO4
29
GPO3
28
GPO2
27
GPO1
26
SCL/CCLK
20
A0/CS
19
A1/CDIN
21
U300C
SRC4382IPFB
DGND
DGND
SPI_SDI
SPI_SDO
SPI_SCK
SPI_SCK
SPI_SDO
SPI_SDI
SPI_SCK
SPI_SDO
SPI_SDI
RSTIO
RSTIO
RSTIO
IFMTA0
1
IFMTA1
2
IFMTA2
3
OFMTA0
4
OFMTA1
5
OWLA0
6
OWLA1
7
LGRPA0
9
LGRPA1
10
DDNA
11
DEMA0
12
DEMA1
13
MODEA0
14
MODEA1
15
MODEA2
16
IFMTB0
48
IFMTB1
47
IFMTB2
46
OFMTB0
45
OFMTB1
44
OWLB0
43
OWLB1
42
LGRPB0
40
LGRPB1
39
DDNB
38
DEMB0
37
DEMB1/CDOUT
36
MODEB0/CS
35
MODEB1/CCLK
34
MODEB2/CDIN
33
H/S
22
RST
21
U303C
SRC4184IPAG
DGND DGND
SPI_SCK
SPI_SDO
SPI_SDI
RSTIO
IFMTA0
1
IFMTA1
2
IFMTA2
3
OFMTA0
4
OFMTA1
5
OWLA0
6
OWLA1
7
LGRPA0
9
LGRPA1
10
DDNA
11
DEMA0
12
DEMA1
13
MODEA0
14
MODEA1
15
MODEA2
16
IFMTB0
48
IFMTB1
47
IFMTB2
46
OFMTB0
45
OFMTB1
44
OWLB0
43
OWLB1
42
LGRPB0
40
LGRPB1
39
DDNB
38
DEMB0
37
DEMB1/CDOUT
36
MODEB0/CS
35
MODEB1/CCLK
34
MODEB2/CDIN
33
H/S
22
RST
21
U305C
SRC4184IPAG
DGND DGND
SPI_SCK
SPI_SDO
SPI_SDI
RSTIO
IFMTA0
1
IFMTA1
2
IFMTA2
3
OFMTA0
4
OFMTA1
5
OWLA0
6
OWLA1
7
LGRPA0
9
LGRPA1
10
DDNA
11
DEMA0
12
DEMA1
13
MODEA0
14
MODEA1
15
MODEA2
16
IFMTB0
48
IFMTB1
47
IFMTB2
46
OFMTB0
45
OFMTB1
44
OWLB0
43
OWLB1
42
LGRPB0
40
LGRPB1
39
DDNB
38
DEMB0
37
DEMB1/CDOUT
36
MODEB0/CS
35
MODEB1/CCLK
34
MODEB2/CDIN
33
H/S
22
RST
21
U401C
SRC4184IPAG
DGND DGND
SPI_SCK
SPI_SDO
SPI_SDI
RSTIO
IFMTA0
1
IFMTA1
2
IFMTA2
3
OFMTA0
4
OFMTA1
5
OWLA0
6
OWLA1
7
LGRPA0
9
LGRPA1
10
DDNA
11
DEMA0
12
DEMA1
13
MODEA0
14
MODEA1
15
MODEA2
16
IFMTB0
48
IFMTB1
47
IFMTB2
46
OFMTB0
45
OFMTB1
44
OWLB0
43
OWLB1
42
LGRPB0
40
LGRPB1
39
DDNB
38
DEMB0
37
DEMB1/CDOUT
36
MODEB0/CS
35
MODEB1/CCLK
34
MODEB2/CDIN
33
H/S
22
RST
21
U402C
SRC4184IPAG
DGND DGND
SPI_SCK
SPI_SDO
SPI_SDI
RSTIO
IFMTA0
1
IFMTA1
2
IFMTA2
3
OFMTA0
4
OFMTA1
5
OWLA0
6
OWLA1
7
LGRPA0
9
LGRPA1
10
DDNA
11
DEMA0
12
DEMA1
13
MODEA0
14
MODEA1
15
MODEA2
16
IFMTB0
48
IFMTB1
47
IFMTB2
46
OFMTB0
45
OFMTB1
44
OWLB0
43
OWLB1
42
LGRPB0
40
LGRPB1
39
DDNB
38
DEMB0
37
DEMB1/CDOUT
36
MODEB0/CS
35
MODEB1/CCLK
34
MODEB2/CDIN
33
H/S
22
RST
21
U400C
SRC4184IPAG
DGND DGND
SPI_SCK
SPI_SDO
SPI_SDI
RSTIO
IFMTA0
1
IFMTA1
2
IFMTA2
3
OFMTA0
4
OFMTA1
5
OWLA0
6
OWLA1
7
LGRPA0
9
LGRPA1
10
DDNA
11
DEMA0
12
DEMA1
13
MODEA0
14
MODEA1
15
MODEA2
16
IFMTB0
48
IFMTB1
47
IFMTB2
46
OFMTB0
45
OFMTB1
44
OWLB0
43
OWLB1
42
LGRPB0
40
LGRPB1
39
DDNB
38
DEMB0
37
DEMB1/CDOUT
36
MODEB0/CS
35
MODEB1/CCLK
34
MODEB2/CDIN
33
H/S
22
RST
21
U403C
SRC4184IPAG
DGND DGND
SPI_SCK
SPI_SDO
SPI_SDI
RSTIO
PIC_INT
PIC_INT
PIC_INT
SPI_SCK
SPI_SDO
SPI_SDI
SDA/CDOUT
22
RST
24
CPM
18
INT
23
GPO4
29
GPO3
28
GPO2
27
GPO1
26
SCL/CCLK
20
A0/CS
19
A1/CDIN
21
U302C
SRC4382IPFB
DGND
PIC_INT
SPI_SCK
SPI_SDO
SPI_SDI
SDA/CDOUT
22
RST
24
CPM
18
INT
23
GPO4
29
GPO3
28
GPO2
27
GPO1
26
SCL/CCLK
20
A0/CS
19
A1/CDIN
21
U304C
SRC4382IPFB
DGND
RSTIO PIC_INT
SPI_SCK
SPI_SDO
SPI_SDI
SDA/CDOUT
22
RST
24
CPM
18
INT
23
GPO4
29
GPO3
28
GPO2
27
GPO1
26
SCL/CCLK
20
A0/CS
19
A1/CDIN
21
U1000C
SRC4382IPFB
DGND
RSTIO PIC_INT
SPI_SCK
SPI_SDO
SPI_SDI
SPI_DEV_CS1 SPI_DEV_CS2 SPI_DEV_CS3 SPI_DEV_CS4
SPI_DEV_CS5 SPI_DEV_CS6 SPI_DEV_CS7
SPI_DEV_CS8
SPI_DEV_CS9
SPI_DEV_CS10
SPI_DEV_CS11
IFMTA0
1
IFMTA1
2
IFMTA2
3
OFMTA0
4
OFMTA1
5
OWLA0
6
OWLA1
7
LGRPA0
9
LGRPA1
10
DDNA
11
DEMA0
12
DEMA1
13
MODEA0
14
MODEA1
15
MODEA2
16
IFMTB0
48
IFMTB1
47
IFMTB2
46
OFMTB0
45
OFMTB1
44
OWLB0
43
OWLB1
42
LGRPB0
40
LGRPB1
39
DDNB
38
DEMB0
37
DEMB1/CDOUT
36
MODEB0/CS
35
MODEB1/CCLK
34
MODEB2/CDIN
33
H/S
22
RST
21
U1002C
SRC4184IPAG
DGND DGND
SPI_SCK
SPI_SDO
SPI_SDI
RSTIO
SPI_DEV_CS15
RCKIB
29
LRCKIB
54
BCKIB
53
SDINB
55
TDMIB
52
BYPB
41
MUTEB
30
LRCKOB
51
BCKOB
50
SDOUTB
49
RATIOB
32
RDYB
31
U1002B
SRC4184IPAG
UNUSED SRC
DGND
1
2
3
4
6
5
8
7
RN1001
47K 5%
DGND
RSTIO
RSTIO
HD-SDI I/O BOARD:
SCHEMATIC: SAMPLE RATE CONVERTER MISC SIGNALS
62360.000
(sheet 16 of 17)

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-97
BGND
44
VCC
9
AGND
10
DGND2
30
VDD33
33
NC
41
VIO
42
DGND3
43
VDD18
17
DGND1
16
U300D
SRC4382IPFB
+3.3V
C318
0.1uF
+
C316
10uF
R324
2.0 OHM
DGND DGND
C319
0.1uF
C317
0.1uF
+
C321
10uF
C320
0.1uF
DGND
L318
VDD18
27
VDD18
28
REGEN
26
VDD33
25
VDD33
24
DGND
23
VIO
56
DGND
57
U301D
SRC4184IPAG
C323
0.1uF
C322
0.1uF
+3.3V
DGND
+ C315
10uF
DGND
L319
+1.8V
DGND
BGND
44
VCC
9
AGND
10
DGND2
30
VDD33
33
NC
41
VIO
42
DGND3
43
VDD18
17
DGND1
16
U302D
SRC4382IPFB
+3.3V
C326
0.1uF
+
C324
10uF
R325
2.0 OHM
DGND DGND
C327
0.1uF
C325
0.1uF
+
C329
10uF
C328
0.1uF
DGND
L320
+1.8V
DGND
BGND
44
VCC
9
AGND
10
DGND2
30
VDD33
33
NC
41
VIO
42
DGND3
43
VDD18
17
DGND1
16
U304D
SRC4382IPFB
+3.3V
C334
0.1uF
+
C332
10uF
R326
2.0 OHM
DGND DGND
C335
0.1uF
C333
0.1uF
+
C337
10uF
C336
0.1uF
DGND
L322
+1.8V
DGND
BGND
44
VCC
9
AGND
10
DGND2
30
VDD33
33
NC
41
VIO
42
DGND3
43
VDD18
17
DGND1
16
U1000D
SRC4382IPFB
+3.3V
C1014
0.1uF
+
C1012
10uF
R1013
2.0 OHM
DGND DGND
C1015
0.1uF
C1013
0.1uF
+
C1017
10uF
C1016
0.1uF
DGND
L1004
+1.8V
DGND
VDD18
27
VDD18
28
REGEN
26
VDD33
25
VDD33
24
DGND
23
VIO
56
DGND
57
U401D
SRC4184IPAG
C405
0.1uF
C404
0.1uF
+3.3V
DGND
+ C403
10uF
DGND
L401
VDD18
27
VDD18
28
REGEN
26
VDD33
25
VDD33
24
DGND
23
VIO
56
DGND
57
U403D
SRC4184IPAG
C411
0.1uF
C410
0.1uF
+3.3V
DGND
+ C409
10uF
DGND
L403
VDD18
27
VDD18
28
REGEN
26
VDD33
25
VDD33
24
DGND
23
VIO
56
DGND
57
U303D
SRC4184IPAG
C331
0.1uF
C330
0.1uF
+3.3V
DGND
+ C340
10uF
DGND
L321
VDD18
27
VDD18
28
REGEN
26
VDD33
25
VDD33
24
DGND
23
VIO
56
DGND
57
U402D
SRC4184IPAG
C408
0.1uF
C407
0.1uF
+3.3V
DGND
+ C406
10uF
DGND
L402
VDD18
27
VDD18
28
REGEN
26
VDD33
25
VDD33
24
DGND
23
VIO
56
DGND
57
U400D
SRC4184IPAG
C402
0.1uF
C401
0.1uF
+3.3V
DGND
+ C400
10uF
DGND
L400
VDD18
27
VDD18
28
REGEN
26
VDD33
25
VDD33
24
DGND
23
VIO
56
DGND
57
U305D
SRC4184IPAG
C339
0.1uF
C338
0.1uF
+3.3V
DGND
+ C341
10uF
DGND
L323
VDD18
27
VDD18
28
REGEN
26
VDD33
25
VDD33
24
DGND
23
VIO
56
DGND
57
U1002D
SRC4184IPAG
C1011
0.1uF
C1010
0.1uF
+3.3V
DGND
+ C1009
10uF
DGND
L1003
+
C342
10uF
+
C343
10uF
+
C344
10uF
+
C345
10uF
HD-SDI I/O BOARD:
SCHEMATIC: SRC POWER DISTRIBUTION
62360.000
(sheet 17 of 17)

6-98
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
HD-SDI RS232/RS485 SDI BOARD:
PARTS LOCATOR DRAWING
32365.000
(sheet 1 of 1)

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-99
DGND
+5VD
C2-
14
C2+
13
V-
15
RIN D
16
RIN C
23
RIN B
3
RIN A
7
TOUT D
20
TOUT C
24
TOUT B
1
TOUT A
2
TIN A
5
TIN B
18
TIN C
19
TIN D
21
ROUT A
6
ROUT B
4
ROUT C
22
ROUT D
17
V+
11
C1+
10
C1-
12
VCC
9
GND
8
U101
MAX208ECNG+
SEL16/68
31
INTSEL
65
/CSA
16
/CSB
20
/CSC
50
/CSD
54
A2
32
A1
33
A0
34
/IOW
18
/IOR
52
RESET
37
D0
66
D1
67
D2
68
D3
1
D4
2
D5
3
D6
4
D7
5
/RXRDY
38
/TXRDY
39
INTA
15
INTB
21
INTC
49
INTD
55
X1
35
X2
36
GND
6
GND
23
GND
40
GND
57
VCC
13
VCC
30
VCC
47
VCC
64
TXA
17
/RTSA
14
/DTRA
12
RXA
7
/CTSA
11
/DSRA
10
/CDA
9
/RIA
8
TXB
19
/RTSB
22
/DTRB
24
RXB
29
/CTSB
25
/DSRB
26
/CDB
27
/RIB
28
TXC
51
/RTSC
48
/DTRC
46
RXC
41
/CTSC
45
/DSRC
44
/CDC
43
/RIC
42
TXD
53
/RTSD
56
/DTRD
58
RXD
63
/CTSD
59
/DSRD
60
/CDD
61
/RID
62
U100
ST16C554DCJ68-F
+
C100
10uF
+5VD
DGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
J100
HDR 25X2
DGND
DGND
+5VD
DGND
+5VD
DGND
CGND
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
10
11
J101
DB9_M
AUX_D0
AUX_D1
AUX_D2
AUX_D3
AUX_D4
AUX_D5
AUX_D6
AUX_D7
AUX_D0
AUX_D1
AUX_D2
AUX_D3
AUX_D4
AUX_D5
AUX_D6
AUX_D7
18.432MHz
SA0
AUX_0
AUX_1
AUX_2
AUX_3
SOUT1-N
RTS1-N
DTR1-N
SIN1-N
CTS1-N
DSR1-N
DCD1-N
SOUTP1
RTSP1
DTRP1
SINP1
CTSP1
DSRP1
DCDP1
SOUTP1
RTSP1
DTRP1
SINP1
CTSP1
DSRP1
DCDP1
RSTDRV
DGND
CHASSIS
RSTDRV
INTA
INTB
INTC
INTA
INTB
INTC
SA1
SA2
SA0
SA1
SA2
GPIOWR
GPIORD
SOUT1-N
RTS1-N
DTR1-N
SIN1-N
CTS1-N
DSR1-N
DCD1-N
18.432MHz
+5VD
+5VD
+5VD
+5VD
C102
1000pF
C101
0.1uF
C103
0.1uF
C104
0.1uF
C105
0.1uF
C106
0.1uF
C107
0.1uF
C108
0.1uF
C111
0.1uF
C110
0.1uF
C109
0.1uF
R100
1.0K
R101
1.0K
SA[2..0]
AUX_D[7..0]
DIP-24 SOCKET
DGND
BASEBOARD INTERFACE
DGND
SA[2..0]
R102
100.0K
SERIAL PORT 1
(rear panel)
RS-232
GPIOWR
GPIORD
AUX_0
AUX_1
AUX_2
AUX_3
RS232/RS485-SDI INTERFACE BOARD
SCHEMATIC: UART
62365.000
(sheet 1 of 2)

RS485-SDI
INTERFACE
DGND
J200
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
H/F*:
SRL:
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
HDR 10X2 SH
PIC_RX_B
PIC_TX_B
PIC_RTSB_DE
PIC_RTSB_RE
PIC_RX_C
PIC_TX_C
PIC_RTSC_DE
PIC_RTSC_RE
U200
SN74HCT541DW
DGND
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
+5VD
20
10
VCC
GND
DGND
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
OE1
OE2
C200
0.1uF
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
1
19
DGND
BUF_PIC_TX_B
BUF_PIC_RTSB_DE
BUF_PIC_RTSB_RE
BUF_PIC_TX_C
BUF_PIC_RTSC_DE
BUF_PIC_RTSC_RE
DGND
R200/R204 R201/R205 H/F* LOGIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER PHASE/POLARITY
No Install 0 ohm Installed Low
Full Duplex
0 ohm Installed No Install
High
Half Duplex
R202/R206 R203/R207 SRL LOGIC LEVEL
No Install No Install
0 ohm Installed No Install
No Install 0 ohm Installed
High-Z
High
Low
DGND
PIC_RX_B
BUF_PIC_RTSB_RE
BUF_PIC_RTSB_DE
BUF_PIC_TX_B
DGND
PIC_RX_C
BUF_PIC_RTSC_RE
BUF_PIC_RTSC_DE
BUF_PIC_TX_C
U201 & U202 H/F*, SRL, TXP, & RXP SIGNAL LEVEL DESCRIPTIONS
SLEW-RATE LIMIT
250kbps
500kbps
16Mbps
RXP:
TXP:
+5VD
+5VD
DGND
+5VD
+5VD
DGND
R200
R201
R202
R203
R204
R205
R206
R207
R-NP
0 OHM
R-NP
R-NP
R-NP
0 OHM
R-NP
R-NP
PIC_B_HF
1
2
3
4
5
PIC_B_SRL 6
PIC_C_HF
U201
MAX13089EEPD+
1
2
3
4
5
PIC_C_SRL 6
R208/R212 R209/R213 RXP LOGIC LEVEL
No Install 0 ohm Installed Low
0 ohm Installed No Install
High
R210/R214 R211/R215 TXP LOGIC LEVEL
No Install 0 ohm Installed Low
0 ohm Installed No Install
High
H/F
RO
RE
DE
DI
SRL
U202
MAX13089EEPD+
H/F
RO
RE
DE
DI
SRL
+5VD
14
7
VCC
GND
DGND
+5VD
14
7
VCC
GND
DGND
C201
0.1uF
C202
0.1uF
RECEIVER PHASE/POLARITY
Normal
Invert
RXP
A
B
Z
Y
TXP
RXP
A
B
Z
Y
TXP
DGND
13
12
11
10
9
8
DIP-14 SOCKET
DGND
13
12
11
10
9
8
DIP-14 SOCKET
TRANSMITTER PHASE/POLARITY
Normal
Invert
6-100
PIC_B_RXP
PIC_B_TXP
PIC_C_RXP
PIC_C_TXP
R208 R-NP
R209
R210 R-NP
R211
R212 R-NP
R213
R214 R-NP
R215
TECHNICAL DATA ORBAN MODEL 8685
0 OHM
+5VD
DGND
R216 110 OHM
R217 110 OHM
0 OHM
0 OHM
+5VD
DGND
+5VD
DGND
R218 110 OHM
R219 110 OHM
0 OHM
+5VD
DGND
DGND
CGND
11
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
10
11
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
10
CHASSIS
J201
J202
DB9_F
DB9_F
RS-485
METADATA
INPUT
SERIAL PORT 2
(rear panel)
RS-485
METADATA
OUTPUT
SERIAL PORT 3
(rear panel)
RS232/RS485-SDI INTERFACE BOARD
SCHEMATIC: RS485
62365.000
(sheet 2 of 2)

OPTIMOD SURROUND PROCESSOR TECHNICAL DATA 6-101